- Home
- RFC 8881
RFC 8881: Network File System (NFS) Version 4 Minor Version 1 Protocol
- D. Noveck, Ed.,
- C. Lever
Abstract
This document describes the Network File System (NFS) version 4 minor version 1, including features retained from the base protocol (NFS version 4 minor version 0, which is specified in RFC 7530) and protocol extensions made subsequently. The later minor version has no dependencies on NFS version 4 minor version 0, and is considered a separate protocol.¶
This document obsoletes RFC 5661. It substantially revises the treatment of features relating to multi-server namespace, superseding the description of those features appearing in RFC 5661.¶
Status of This Memo
This is an Internet Standards Track document.¶
This document is a product of the Internet Engineering Task Force (IETF). It represents the consensus of the IETF community. It has received public review and has been approved for publication by the Internet Engineering Steering Group (IESG). Further information on Internet Standards is available in Section 2 of RFC 7841.¶
Information about the current status of this document, any
errata, and how to provide feedback on it may be obtained at
https://
Copyright Notice
Copyright (c) 2020 IETF Trust and the persons identified as the document authors. All rights reserved.¶
This document is subject to BCP 78 and the IETF Trust's Legal
Provisions Relating to IETF Documents
(https://
This document may contain material from IETF Documents or IETF Contributions published or made publicly available before November 10, 2008. The person(s) controlling the copyright in some of this material may not have granted the IETF Trust the right to allow modifications of such material outside the IETF Standards Process. Without obtaining an adequate license from the person(s) controlling the copyright in such materials, this document may not be modified outside the IETF Standards Process, and derivative works of it may not be created outside the IETF Standards Process, except to format it for publication as an RFC or to translate it into languages other than English.¶
1. Introduction
1.1. Introduction to This Update
Two important features previously defined in minor version 0 but never fully addressed in minor version 1 are trunking, which is the simultaneous use of multiple connections between a client and server, potentially to different network addresses, and Transparent State Migration, which allows a file system to be transferred between servers in a way that provides to the client the ability to maintain its existing locking state across the transfer.¶
The revised description of the NFS version 4 minor version 1 (NFSv4.1) protocol presented in this update is necessary to enable full use of these features together with other multi-server namespace features. This document is in the form of an updated description of the NFSv4.1 protocol previously defined in RFC 5661 [66]. RFC 5661 is obsoleted by this document. However, the update has a limited scope and is focused on enabling full use of trunking and Transparent State Migration. The need for these changes is discussed in Appendix A. Appendix B describes the specific changes made to arrive at the current text.¶
This limited-scope update replaces the current NFSv4.1 RFC with the intention of providing an authoritative and complete specification, the motivation for which is discussed in [36], addressing the issues within the scope of the update. However, it will not address issues that are known but outside of this limited scope as could be expected by a full update of the protocol. Below are some areas that are known to need addressing in a future update of the protocol:¶
- Work needs to be done with regard to RFC 8178 [67], which establishes NFSv4-wide versioning rules. As RFC 5661 is currently inconsistent with that document, changes are needed in order to arrive at a situation in which there would be no need for RFC 8178 to update the NFSv4.1 specification.¶
- Work needs to be done with regard to RFC 8434 [70], which establishes the requirements for parallel NFS (pNFS) layout types, which are not clearly defined in RFC 5661. When that work is done and the resulting documents approved, the new NFSv4.1 specification document will provide a clear set of requirements for layout types and a description of the file layout type that conforms to those requirements. Other layout types will have their own specification documents that conform to those requirements as well.¶
-
Work needs to be done to address many errata reports relevant to RFC 5661, other than errata report 2006 [64], which is addressed in this document. Addressing that report was not deferrable because of the interaction of the changes suggested there and the newly described handling of state and session migration.¶
The errata reports that have been deferred and that will need to be addressed in a later document include reports currently assigned a range of statuses in the errata reporting system, including reports marked Accepted and those marked Hold For Document Update because the change was too minor to address immediately.¶
In addition, there is a set of other reports, including at least one in state Rejected, that will need to be addressed in a later document. This will involve making changes to consensus decisions reflected in RFC 5661, in situations in which the working group has decided that the treatment in RFC 5661 is incorrect and needs to be revised to reflect the working group's new consensus and to ensure compatibility with existing implementations that do not follow the handling described in RFC 5661.¶
Note that it is expected that all such errata reports will remain relevant to implementors and the authors of an eventual rfc5661bis, despite the fact that this document obsoletes RFC 5661 [66].¶
-
There is a need for a new approach to the description of
internationaliz
ation since the current internationaliz ation section (Section 14) has never been implemented and does not meet the needs of the NFSv4 protocol. Possible solutions are to create a new internationaliz ation section modeled on that in [68] or to create a new document describing internationaliz ation for all NFSv4 minor versions and reference that document in the RFCs defining both NFSv4.0 and NFSv4.1.¶ - There is a need for a revised treatment of security in NFSv4.1. The issues with the existing treatment are discussed in Appendix C.¶
Until the above work is done, there will not be a consistent set of documents that provides a description of the NFSv4.1 protocol, and any full description would involve documents updating other documents within the specification. The updates applied by RFC 8434 [70] and RFC 8178 [67] to RFC 5661 also apply to this specification, and will apply to any subsequent v4.1 specification until that work is done.¶
1.2. The NFS Version 4 Minor Version 1 Protocol
The NFS version 4 minor version 1 (NFSv4.1) protocol
is the second minor version of the NFS version 4
(NFSv4) protocol. The first minor version, NFSv4.0, is
now described in RFC 7530 [68]. It generally
follows the guidelines for minor versioning that are
listed in Section 10
of RFC 3530 [37]. However, it
diverges from guidelines 11 ("a client and server
that support minor version X must support minor
versions 0 through X-1") and 12 ("no new features may be
introduced as mandatory in a minor version"). These
divergences are due to the introduction of
the sessions model for managing non-idempotent
operations and the RECLAIM_
As a minor version, NFSv4.1 is consistent with the overall goals for NFSv4, but extends the protocol so as to better meet those goals, based on experiences with NFSv4.0. In addition, NFSv4.1 has adopted some additional goals, which motivate some of the major extensions in NFSv4.1.¶
1.3. Requirements Language
The key words "MUST", "MUST NOT", "REQUIRED", "SHALL", "SHALL NOT", "SHOULD", "SHOULD NOT", "RECOMMENDED", "MAY", and "OPTIONAL" in this document are to be interpreted as described in RFC 2119 [1].¶
1.4. Scope of This Document
This document describes the NFSv4.1 protocol. With respect to NFSv4.0, this document does not:¶
1.5. NFSv4 Goals
The NFSv4 protocol is a further revision of the NFS protocol defined already by NFSv3 [38]. It retains the essential characteristics of previous versions: easy recovery; independence of transport protocols, operating systems, and file systems; simplicity; and good performance. NFSv4 has the following goals:¶
-
Improved access and good performance on the Internet¶
The protocol is designed to transit firewalls easily, perform well where latency is high and bandwidth is low, and scale to very large numbers of clients per server.¶
-
Strong security with negotiation built into the protocol¶
The protocol builds on the work of the ONCRPC working group in supporting the RPCSEC_
GSS protocol. Additionally, the NFSv4.1 protocol provides a mechanism to allow clients and servers the ability to negotiate security and require clients and servers to support a minimal set of security schemes.¶ -
Good cross-platform interoperabilit
y¶ The protocol features a file system model that provides a useful, common set of features that does not unduly favor one file system or operating system over another.¶
-
Designed for protocol extensions¶
The protocol is designed to accept standard extensions within a framework that enables and encourages backward compatibility.¶
1.6. NFSv4.1 Goals
NFSv4.1 has the following goals, within the framework established by the overall NFSv4 goals.¶
- To correct significant structural weaknesses and oversights discovered in the base protocol.¶
- To add clarity and specificity to areas left unaddressed or not addressed in sufficient detail in the base protocol. However, as stated in Section 1.4, it is not a goal to clarify the NFSv4.0 protocol in the NFSv4.1 specification.¶
- To add specific features based on experience with the existing protocol and recent industry developments.¶
- To provide protocol support to take advantage of clustered server deployments including the ability to provide scalable parallel access to files distributed among multiple servers.¶
1.7. General Definitions
The following definitions provide an appropriate context for the reader.¶
- Byte:
-
In this document, a byte is an octet, i.e., a datum exactly 8 bits in length.¶
- Client:
-
The client is the entity that accesses the NFS server's resources. The client may be an application that contains the logic to access the NFS server directly. The client may also be the traditional operating system client that provides remote file system services for a set of applications.¶
A client is uniquely identified by a client owner.¶
With reference to byte-range locking, the client is also the entity that maintains a set of locks on behalf of one or more applications. This client is responsible for crash or failure recovery for those locks it manages.¶
Note that multiple clients may share the same transport and connection and multiple clients may exist on the same network node.¶
- Client ID:
- The client ID is a 64-bit quantity used as a unique, short-hand reference to a client-supplied verifier and client owner. The server is responsible for supplying the client ID.¶
- Client Owner:
- The client owner is a unique string, opaque to the server, that identifies a client. Multiple network connections and source network addresses originating from those connections may share a client owner. The server is expected to treat requests from connections with the same client owner as coming from the same client.¶
- File System:
- The file system is the collection of objects on a server (as identified by the major identifier of a server owner, which is defined later in this section) that share the same fsid attribute (see Section 5.8.1.9).¶
- Lease:
-
A lease is an interval of time defined by the server for which the client is irrevocably granted locks. At the end of a lease period, locks may be revoked if the lease has not been extended. A lock must be revoked if a conflicting lock has been granted after the lease interval.¶
A server grants a client a single lease for all state.¶
- Lock:
- The term "lock" is used to refer to byte-range (in UNIX environments, also known as record) locks, share reservations, delegations, or layouts unless specifically stated otherwise.¶
- Secret State Verifier (SSV):
- The SSV is a unique secret key shared between a client and server. The SSV serves as the secret key for an internal (that is, internal to NFSv4.1) Generic Security Services (GSS) mechanism (the SSV GSS mechanism; see Section 2.10.9). The SSV GSS mechanism uses the SSV to compute message integrity code (MIC) and Wrap tokens. See Section 2.10.8.3 for more details on how NFSv4.1 uses the SSV and the SSV GSS mechanism.¶
- Server:
- The Server is the entity responsible for coordinating client access to a set of file systems and is identified by a server owner. A server can span multiple network addresses.¶
- Server Owner:
- The server owner identifies the server to the client. The server owner consists of a major identifier and a minor identifier. When the client has two connections each to a peer with the same major identifier, the client assumes that both peers are the same server (the server namespace is the same via each connection) and that lock state is shareable across both connections. When each peer has both the same major and minor identifiers, the client assumes that each connection might be associable with the same session.¶
- Stable Storage:
-
Stable storage is storage from which data stored by an NFSv4.1 server can be recovered without data loss from multiple power failures (including cascading power failures, that is, several power failures in quick succession), operating system failures, and/or hardware failure of components other than the storage medium itself (such as disk, nonvolatile RAM, flash memory, etc.).¶
Some examples of stable storage that are allowable for an NFS server include:¶
- Media commit of data; that is, the modified data has been successfully written to the disk media, for example, the disk platter.¶
- An immediate reply disk drive with battery-backed, on-drive intermediate storage or uninterruptible power system (UPS).¶
- Server commit of data with battery-backed intermediate storage and recovery software.¶
- Cache commit with uninterruptible power system (UPS) and recovery software.¶
- Stateid:
-
A stateid is a 128-bit quantity returned by a server that uniquely
defines the open and locking states provided by the server
for a specific open-owner or lock
-owner /open -owner pair for a specific file and type of lock.¶ - Verifier:
- A verifier is a 64-bit quantity generated by the client that the server can use to determine if the client has restarted and lost all previous lock state.¶
1.8. Overview of NFSv4.1 Features
The major features of the NFSv4.1 protocol will be reviewed in brief. This will be done to provide an appropriate context for both the reader who is familiar with the previous versions of the NFS protocol and the reader who is new to the NFS protocols. For the reader new to the NFS protocols, there is still a set of fundamental knowledge that is expected. The reader should be familiar with the External Data Representation (XDR) and Remote Procedure Call (RPC) protocols as described in [2] and [3]. A basic knowledge of file systems and distributed file systems is expected as well.¶
In general, this specification of NFSv4.1 will not distinguish those features added in minor version 1 from those present in the base protocol but will treat NFSv4.1 as a unified whole. See Section 1.9 for a summary of the differences between NFSv4.0 and NFSv4.1.¶
1.8.1. RPC and Security
As with previous versions of NFS, the External Data Representation
(XDR) and Remote Procedure Call (RPC) mechanisms used for the NFSv4.1 protocol are those defined in
[2] and [3]. To
meet end-to-end security requirements, the RPCSEC_
To enable in-band security negotiation, the NFSv4.1 protocol has operations that provide the client a method of querying the server about its policies regarding which security mechanisms must be used for access to the server's file system resources. With this, the client can securely match the security mechanism that meets the policies specified at both the client and server.¶
NFSv4.1 introduces parallel access (see Section 1.8.2.2), which is called pNFS. The security framework described in this section is significantly modified by the introduction of pNFS (see Section 12.9), because data access is sometimes not over RPC. The level of significance varies with the storage protocol (see Section 12.2.5) and can be as low as zero impact (see Section 13.12).¶
1.8.2. Protocol Structure
1.8.2.1. Core Protocol
Unlike NFSv3, which used a series of ancillary protocols (e.g., NLM, NSM (Network Status Monitor), MOUNT), within all minor versions of NFSv4 a single RPC protocol is used to make requests to the server. Facilities that had been separate protocols, such as locking, are now integrated within a single unified protocol.¶
1.8.2.2. Parallel Access
Minor version 1 supports high
Such parallel data access is controlled by recallable objects known as "layouts", which are integrated into the protocol locking model. Clients direct requests for data access to a set of data servers specified by the layout via a data storage protocol which may be NFSv4.1 or may be another protocol.¶
Because the protocols used for parallel data access are not necessarily RPC-based, the RPC-based security model (Section 1.8.1) is obviously impacted (see Section 12.9). The degree of impact varies with the storage protocol (see Section 12.2.5) used for data access, and can be as low as zero (see Section 13.12).¶
1.8.3. File System Model
The general file system
model used for the NFSv4.1 protocol
is the same as previous versions. The server file system is
hierarchical with the regular files contained within being
treated as opaque byte
streams. In a slight departure, file and directory names are encoded
with UTF-8 to deal with the basics of internationaliz
The NFSv4.1 protocol does not require a separate protocol to provide for the initial mapping between path name and filehandle. All file systems exported by a server are presented as a tree so that all file systems are reachable from a special per-server global root filehandle. This allows LOOKUP operations to be used to perform functions previously provided by the MOUNT protocol. The server provides any necessary pseudo file systems to bridge any gaps that arise due to unexported gaps between exported file systems.¶
1.8.3.1. Filehandles
As in previous versions of the NFS protocol, opaque filehandles are used to identify individual files and directories. Lookup-type and create operations translate file and directory names to filehandles, which are then used to identify objects in subsequent operations.¶
The NFSv4.1 protocol provides support for persistent filehandles, guaranteed to be valid for the lifetime of the file system object designated. In addition, it provides support to servers to provide filehandles with more limited validity guarantees, called volatile filehandles.¶
1.8.3.2. File Attributes
The NFSv4.1 protocol has a rich and extensible file object attribute structure, which is divided into REQUIRED, RECOMMENDED, and named attributes (see Section 5).¶
Several (but not all) of the REQUIRED attributes are derived from the attributes of NFSv3 (see the definition of the fattr3 data type in [38]). An example of a REQUIRED attribute is the file object's type (Section 5.8.1.2) so that regular files can be distinguished from directories (also known as folders in some operating environments) and other types of objects. REQUIRED attributes are discussed in Section 5.1.¶
An example of three RECOMMENDED attributes are acl, sacl, and dacl. These attributes define an Access Control List (ACL) on a file object (Section 6). An ACL provides directory and file access control beyond the model used in NFSv3. The ACL definition allows for specification of specific sets of permissions for individual users and groups. In addition, ACL inheritance allows propagation of access permissions and restrictions down a directory tree as file system objects are created. RECOMMENDED attributes are discussed in Section 5.2.¶
A named attribute is an opaque byte stream that is associated
with a directory or file and referred to by a string name.
Named attributes are meant to be used by client applications
as a method to associate application
1.8.3.3. Multi-Server Namespace
NFSv4.1 contains a number of features to allow implementation of namespaces that cross server boundaries and that allow and facilitate a nondisruptive transfer of support for individual file systems between servers. They are all based upon attributes that allow one file system to specify alternate, additional, and new location information that specifies how the client may access that file system.¶
These attributes can be used to provide for individual active file systems:¶
- Alternate network addresses to access the current file system instance.¶
- The locations of alternate file system instances or replicas to be used in the event that the current file system instance becomes unavailable.¶
These file system location attributes may be used together with the concept of absent file systems, in which a position in the server namespace is associated with locations on other servers without there being any corresponding file system instance on the current server. For example,¶
- These attributes may be used with absent file systems to implement referrals whereby one server may direct the client to a file system provided by another server. This allows extensive multi-server namespaces to be constructed.¶
- These attributes may be provided when a previously present file system becomes absent. This allows nondisruptive migration of file systems to alternate servers.¶
1.8.4. Locking Facilities
As mentioned previously, NFSv4.1 is a single protocol that includes locking facilities. These locking facilities include support for many types of locks including a number of sorts of recallable locks. Recallable locks such as delegations allow the client to be assured that certain events will not occur so long as that lock is held. When circumstances change, the lock is recalled via a callback request. The assurances provided by delegations allow more extensive caching to be done safely when circumstances allow it.¶
The types of locks are:¶
- Share reservations as established by OPEN operations.¶
- Byte-range locks.¶
- File delegations, which are recallable locks that assure the holder that inconsistent opens and file changes cannot occur so long as the delegation is held.¶
- Directory delegations, which are recallable locks that assure the holder that inconsistent directory modifications cannot occur so long as the delegation is held.¶
- Layouts, which are recallable objects that assure the holder that direct access to the file data may be performed directly by the client and that no change to the data's location that is inconsistent with that access may be made so long as the layout is held.¶
All locks for a given client are tied together under a single client-wide lease. All requests made on sessions associated with the client renew that lease. When the client's lease is not promptly renewed, the client's locks are subject to revocation. In the event of server restart, clients have the opportunity to safely reclaim their locks within a special grace period.¶
1.9. Differences from NFSv4.0
The following summarizes the major differences between minor version 1 and the base protocol:¶
- Implementation of the sessions model (Section 2.10).¶
- Parallel access to data (Section 12).¶
-
Addition of the RECLAIM_
COMPLETE operation to better structure the lock reclamation process (Section 18.51).¶ -
Enhanced delegation support as follows.¶
- Delegations on directories and other file types in addition to regular files (Section 18.39, Section 18.49).¶
- Operations to optimize acquisition of recalled or denied delegations (Section 18.49, Section 20.5, Section 20.7).¶
- Notifications of changes to files and directories (Section 18.39, Section 20.4).¶
- A method to allow a server to indicate that it is recalling one or more delegations for resource management reasons, and thus a method to allow the client to pick which delegations to return (Section 20.6).¶
-
Attributes can be set atomically
during exclusive file create via the OPEN operation
(see the new EXCLUSIVE4_
1 creation method in Section 18.16).¶ -
Open files can be preserved if removed and the
hard link count ("hard link" is defined in
an Open Group [6] standard) goes
to zero, thus obviating the
need for clients to rename deleted files to
partially hidden names -- colloquially called
"silly rename" (see the new
OPEN4_
RESULT_ PRESERVE_ UNLINKED reply flag in Section 18.16).¶ - Improved compatibility with Microsoft Windows for Access Control Lists (Section 6.2.3, Section 6.2.2, Section 6.4.3.2).¶
- Data retention (Section 5.13).¶
- Identification of the implementation of the NFS client and server (Section 18.35).¶
-
Support for notification of the availability of
byte-range locks (see the new
OPEN4_
RESULT_ MAY_ NOTIFY_ LOCK reply flag in Section 18.16 and see Section 20.11).¶ - In NFSv4.1, LIPKEY and SPKM-3 are not required security mechanisms [39].¶
2. Core Infrastructure
2.1. Introduction
NFSv4.1 relies on core infrastructure common to nearly every operation. This core infrastructure is described in the remainder of this section.¶
2.2. RPC and XDR
The NFSv4.1 protocol is a Remote Procedure Call (RPC) application that uses RPC version 2 and the corresponding eXternal Data Representation (XDR) as defined in [3] and [2].¶
2.2.1. RPC-Based Security
Previous NFS versions have been thought of as having a
host-based authentication model, where the NFS server
authenticates the NFS client, and trusts the client
to authenticate all users.
Actually, NFS has always depended on RPC for
authentication. One of the first forms of RPC authentication,
AUTH_
2.2.1.1. RPC Security Flavors
As described in "Authentication
NFSv4.1 clients and servers MUST implement RPCSEC_
2.2.1.1.1. RPCSEC_GSS and Security Services
RPCSEC_
2.2.1.1.1.1. Identification, Authentication, Integrity, Privacy
Via the GSS-API, RPCSEC_
Although GSS-API has an authentication service distinct from its
privacy and integrity services, GSS-API's
authentication service is not used for RPCSEC_
NFSv4.1 client and servers MUST support RPCSEC_
2.2.1.1.1.2. Security Mechanisms for NFSv4.1
RPCSEC_
The use of RPCSEC_
2.2.1.1.1.2.1. Kerberos V5
The Kerberos V5 GSS-API mechanism as described in
[5] MUST be implemented with
the RPCSEC_
column descriptions: 1 == number of pseudo flavor 2 == name of pseudo flavor 3 == mechanism's OID 4 == RPCSEC_GSS service 5 == NFSv4.1 clients MUST support 6 == NFSv4.1 servers MUST support 1 2 3 4 5 6 ------------------------------------------------------------------ 390003 krb5 1.2.840.113554.1.2.2 rpc_gss_svc_none yes yes 390004 krb5i 1.2.840.113554.1.2.2 rpc_gss_svc_integrity yes yes 390005 krb5p 1.2.840.113554.1.2.2 rpc_gss_svc_privacy no yes
Note that the number and name of the pseudo flavor are presented here as a mapping aid to the implementor. Because the NFSv4.1 protocol includes a method to negotiate security and it understands the GSS-API mechanism, the pseudo flavor is not needed. The pseudo flavor is needed for the NFSv3 since the security negotiation is done via the MOUNT protocol as described in [40].¶
At the time NFSv4.1 was specified, the Advanced Encryption Standard (AES) with HMAC-SHA1 was a REQUIRED algorithm set for Kerberos V5. In contrast, when NFSv4.0 was specified, weaker algorithm sets were REQUIRED for Kerberos V5, and were REQUIRED in the NFSv4.0 specification, because the Kerberos V5 specification at the time did not specify stronger algorithms. The NFSv4.1 specification does not specify REQUIRED algorithms for Kerberos V5, and instead, the implementor is expected to track the evolution of the Kerberos V5 standard if and when stronger algorithms are specified.¶
2.2.1.1.1.2.1.1. Security Considerations for Cryptographic Algorithms in Kerberos V5
When deploying NFSv4.1, the strength of the security achieved depends on the existing Kerberos V5 infrastructure. The algorithms of Kerberos V5 are not directly exposed to or selectable by the client or server, so there is some due diligence required by the user of NFSv4.1 to ensure that security is acceptable where needed.¶
2.2.1.1.1.3. GSS Server Principal
Regardless of what security mechanism under RPCSEC_
service@hostname
For NFS, the "service" element is¶
nfs
Implementations of security mechanisms will convert nfs@hostname to various different forms. For Kerberos V5, the following form is RECOMMENDED:¶
nfs/hostname
2.3. COMPOUND and CB_COMPOUND
A significant departure from the versions of the NFS protocol before NFSv4 is the introduction of the COMPOUND procedure. For the NFSv4 protocol, in all minor versions, there are exactly two RPC procedures, NULL and COMPOUND. The COMPOUND procedure is defined as a series of individual operations and these operations perform the sorts of functions performed by traditional NFS procedures.¶
The operations combined within a COMPOUND request are evaluated in order by the server, without any atomicity guarantees. A limited set of facilities exist to pass results from one operation to another. Once an operation returns a failing result, the evaluation ends and the results of all evaluated operations are returned to the client.¶
With the use of the COMPOUND procedure, the client is able to build simple or complex requests. These COMPOUND requests allow for a reduction in the number of RPCs needed for logical file system operations. For example, multi-component look up requests can be constructed by combining multiple LOOKUP operations. Those can be further combined with operations such as GETATTR, READDIR, or OPEN plus READ to do more complicated sets of operation without incurring additional latency.¶
NFSv4.1 also contains a considerable set of
callback operations in which the server makes an RPC
directed at the client. Callback RPCs have a similar
structure to that of the normal server requests.
In all minor versions of the NFSv4 protocol,
there are two callback RPC procedures:
CB_
The addition of new server and callback operations within the
COMPOUND and CB_
Except for a small number of operations needed for session creation, server requests and callback requests are performed within the context of a session. Sessions provide a client context for every request and support robust replay protection for non-idempotent requests.¶
2.4. Client Identifiers and Client Owners
For each operation that obtains or depends on locking state, the specific client needs to be identifiable by the server.¶
Each distinct client instance is represented by a client ID. A client ID is a 64-bit identifier representing a specific client at a given time. The client ID is changed whenever the client re-initializes, and may change when the server re-initializes. Client IDs are used to support lock identification and crash recovery.¶
During steady state operation, the client ID associated with each operation is derived from the session (see Section 2.10) on which the operation is sent. A session is associated with a client ID when the session is created.¶
Unlike NFSv4.0, the only NFSv4.1 operations possible before a client ID is established are those needed to establish the client ID.¶
A sequence of an EXCHANGE_
Releasing such state requires that the server be able to determine that one client instance is the successor of another. Where this cannot be done, for any of a number of reasons, the locking state will remain for a time subject to lease expiration (see Section 8.3) and the new client will need to wait for such state to be removed, if it makes conflicting lock requests.¶
Client identification is encapsulated in the following client owner data type:¶
struct client_owner4 {
verifier4 co_verifier;
opaque co_ownerid<NFS4_OPAQUE_LIMIT>;
};
The first field, co_
The second field, co_
There are several considerations for how the client
generates the co_
- The string should be unique so that multiple clients do not present the same string. The consequences of two clients presenting the same string range from one client getting an error to one client having its leased state abruptly and unexpectedly cancelled.¶
- The string should be selected so that subsequent incarnations (e.g., restarts) of the same client cause the client to present the same string. The implementor is cautioned from an approach that requires the string to be recorded in a local file because this precludes the use of the implementation in an environment where there is no local disk and all file access is from an NFSv4.1 server.¶
- The string should be the same for each server network address that the client accesses. This way, if a server has multiple interfaces, the client can trunk traffic over multiple network paths as described in Section 2.10.5. (Note: the precise opposite was advised in the NFSv4.0 specification [37].)¶
-
The algorithm for generating the string should not
assume that the client's network address will not
change, unless the client implementation knows it
is using statically assigned network addresses.
This includes changes between client incarnations
and even changes while the client is still running
in its current incarnation. Thus, with dynamic
address assignment, if the
client includes just the client's network address
in the co_
ownerid string, there is a real risk that after the client gives up the network address, another client, using a similar algorithm for generating the co_ ownerid string, would generate a conflicting co_ ownerid string.¶
Given the above considerations, an example of a well-generated co_
- If applicable, the client's statically assigned network address.¶
-
Additional information that tends to be unique, such as one or more of:¶
- The client machine's serial number (for privacy reasons, it is best to perform some one-way function on the serial number).¶
- A Media Access Control (MAC) address (again, a one-way function should be performed).¶
- The timestamp of when the NFSv4.1 software was first installed on the client (though this is subject to the previously mentioned caution about using information that is stored in a file, because the file might only be accessible over NFSv4.1).¶
- A true random number. However, since this number ought to be the same between client incarnations, this shares the same problem as that of using the timestamp of the software installation.¶
- For a user-level NFSv4.1 client, it should contain additional information to distinguish the client from other user-level clients running on the same host, such as a process identifier or other unique sequence.¶
The client ID is assigned by the server (the eir_
In the event of a server restart, a client may find
out that its current client ID is no longer valid when
it receives an NFS4ERR_
When a session is not persistent, the client will find out that
it needs to create a new session as a result of getting an
NFS4ERR_
In the case of the session being persistent, the
client will re-establish communication using the
existing session after the restart. This session
will be associated with the existing client ID but
may only be used to retransmit operations that the
client previously transmitted and did not see replies
to. Replies to operations that the server previously performed
will come from the reply cache; otherwise,
NFS4ERR_
When NFS4ERR_
See the descriptions of EXCHANGE_
2.4.1. Upgrade from NFSv4.0 to NFSv4.1
To facilitate upgrade from NFSv4.0 to NFSv4.1, a server
may compare a value of data type client_
2.4.2. Server Release of Client ID
NFSv4.1 introduces a new operation called
DESTROY_
If the server determines that the client holds no associated state
for its client ID (associated state includes unrevoked sessions,
opens, locks, delegations, layouts, and wants), the server MAY
choose to unilaterally release the client ID in order to
conserve resources.
If the client
contacts the server after this release, the server
MUST ensure that the client receives the appropriate error
so that it will use the EXCHANGE_
2.4.3. Resolving Client Owner Conflicts
When the server gets an EXCHANGE_
When the server gets an EXCHANGE_
-
The principal that created the client ID for the client owner
is the same as the principal that is sending the EXCHANGE_
ID operation. Note that if the client ID was created with SP4_ MACH_ CRED state protection (Section 18.35), the principal MUST be based on RPCSEC_ GSS authentication, the RPCSEC_ GSS service used MUST be integrity or privacy, and the same GSS mechanism and principal MUST be used as that used when the client ID was created.¶ -
The client ID was established with SP4_
SSV protection (Section 18.35, Section 2.10.8.3) and the client sends the EXCHANGE_ ID with the security flavor set to RPCSEC_ GSS using the GSS SSV mechanism (Section 2.10.9).¶ -
The client ID was established with SP4_
SSV protection, and under the conditions described herein, the EXCHANGE_ ID was sent with SP4_ MACH_ CRED state protection. Because the SSV might not persist across client and server restart, and because the first time a client sends EXCHANGE_ ID to a server it does not have an SSV, the client MAY send the subsequent EXCHANGE_ ID without an SSV RPCSEC_ GSS handle. Instead, as with SP4_ MACH_ CRED protection, the principal MUST be based on RPCSEC_ GSS authentication, the RPCSEC_ GSS service used MUST be integrity or privacy, and the same GSS mechanism and principal MUST be used as that used when the client ID was created.¶
If none of the above situations apply, the server
MUST return NFS4ERR_
If the server accepts the principal and co_
2.5. Server Owners
The server owner is similar to a client owner (Section 2.4), but unlike the client owner, there is no shorthand server ID. The server owner is defined in the following data type:¶
struct server_owner4 {
uint64_t so_minor_id;
opaque so_major_id<NFS4_OPAQUE_LIMIT>;
};
The server owner is returned from
EXCHANGE_
The considerations for generating an so_
2.6. Security Service Negotiation
With the NFSv4.1 server potentially offering
multiple security mechanisms, the client needs a method
to determine or negotiate which mechanism is to be
used for its communication with the server. The NFS
server may have multiple points within its file system
namespace that are available for use by NFS clients.
These points can be considered security policy boundaries,
and, in some NFS implementations
The security negotiation between client and server SHOULD be done with a secure channel to eliminate the possibility of a third party intercepting the negotiation sequence and forcing the client and server to choose a lower level of security than required or desired. See Section 21 for further discussion.¶
2.6.1. NFSv4.1 Security Tuples
An NFS server can assign one or more "security tuples" to each
security policy boundary in its namespace. Each security tuple
consists of a security flavor
(see Section 2.2.1.1) and, if the flavor
is RPCSEC_
2.6.2. SECINFO and SECINFO_NO_NAME
The SECINFO and SECINFO_
Where the use of different security tuples would affect the type of
access that would be allowed if a request was sent over the same
connection used for the SECINFO or SECINFO_
2.6.3. Security Error
Based on the assumption that each NFSv4.1 client
and server MUST support a minimum set of security (i.e.,
Kerberos V5 under RPCSEC_
2.6.3.1. Using NFS4ERR_WRONGSEC, SECINFO, and SECINFO_NO_NAME
This section explains the mechanics of NFSv4.1 security negotiation.¶
2.6.3.1.1. Put Filehandle Operations
The term "put filehandle operation" refers to PUTROOTFH, PUTPUBFH, PUTFH, and RESTOREFH. Each of the subsections herein describes how the server handles a subseries of operations that starts with a put filehandle operation.¶
2.6.3.1.1.1. Put Filehandle Operation + SAVEFH
The client is saving a filehandle for a future
RESTOREFH, LINK, or RENAME. SAVEFH MUST NOT
return NFS4ERR_
2.6.3.1.1.2. Two or More Put Filehandle Operations
For a series of N put filehandle operations, the server
MUST NOT return NFS4ERR_
2.6.3.1.1.3. Put Filehandle Operation + LOOKUP (or OPEN of an Existing Name)
This situation also applies to a put filehandle operation followed by a LOOKUP or an OPEN operation that specifies an existing component name.¶
In this situation, the client is potentially crossing
a security policy boundary, and the set of security tuples
the parent directory supports may differ from those of
the child.
The server implementation may decide whether to impose
any restrictions on security policy administration.
There are at least three approaches
- (a)
-
sec_
policy_ child <= sec_ policy_ parent (<= for subset). This means that the set of security tuples specified on the security policy of a child directory is always a subset of its parent directory.¶ - (b)
-
sec_
policy_ child ^ sec_ policy_ parent != {} (^ for intersection, {} for the empty set). This means that the set of security tuples specified on the security policy of a child directory always has a non-empty intersection with that of the parent.¶ - (c)
-
sec_
policy_ child ^ sec_ policy_ parent == {}. This means that the set of security tuples specified on the security policy of a child directory may not intersect with that of the parent. In other words, there are no restrictions on how the system administrator may set up these tuples.¶
In order for a server to support approaches (b)
(for the case when a client chooses a flavor that is
not a member of sec_
Since the above guideline does not contradict approach (a), it should be followed in general. Even if approach (a) is implemented, it is possible for the security tuple used to be acceptable for the target of LOOKUP but not for the filehandles used in the put filehandle operation. The put filehandle operation could be a PUTROOTFH or PUTPUBFH, where the client cannot know the security tuples for the root or public filehandle. Or the security policy for the filehandle used by the put filehandle operation could have changed since the time the filehandle was obtained.¶
Therefore, an NFSv4.1 server MUST NOT return NFS4ERR_
2.6.3.1.1.4. Put Filehandle Operation + LOOKUPP
Since SECINFO only works its way down, there is no way LOOKUPP can
return NFS4ERR_
Regardless of whether SECINFO_
2.6.3.1.1.5. Put Filehandle Operation + SECINFO/SECINFO_NO_NAME
A security
In theory, there is no connection between the security
flavor used by SECINFO or SECINFO_
The NFSv4.1 server MUST NOT return NFS4ERR_
2.6.3.1.1.6. Put Filehandle Operation + Nothing
The NFSv4.1 server MUST NOT return NFS4ERR_
2.6.3.1.1.7. Put Filehandle Operation + Anything Else
"Anything Else" includes OPEN by filehandle.¶
The security policy enforcement applies to the
filehandle specified in the put filehandle operation. Therefore, the
put filehandle operation MUST
return NFS4ERR_
A COMPOUND containing the series put filehandle
operation + SECINFO_
The NFSv4.1 server MUST NOT return NFS4ERR_
2.6.3.1.1.8. Operations after SECINFO and SECINFO_NO_NAME
Suppose a client sends a COMPOUND procedure
containing the series SEQUENCE, PUTFH,
SECINFO_
2.6.3.1.2. LINK and RENAME
The LINK and RENAME operations use both the current
and saved filehandles.
Technically, the server MAY return NFS4ERR_
For example, suppose the client sends this COMPOUND
request: SEQUENCE, PUTFH bFH, SAVEFH, PUTFH aFH,
RENAME "c" "d", where filehandles bFH and aFH refer
to different directories. Suppose no common security
tuple exists between the security policies of aFH and
bFH. If the client sends the request using credentials
acceptable to bFH's security policy but not aFH's
policy, then the PUTFH aFH operation will fail with
NFS4ERR_
To prevent a client from an endless sequence of a
request containing LINK or RENAME, followed by a request
containing SECINFO_
2.7. Minor Versioning
To address the requirement of an NFS protocol that can evolve as the need arises, the NFSv4.1 protocol contains the rules and framework to allow for future minor changes or versioning.¶
The base assumption with respect to minor versioning is that any
future accepted minor version will be
documented in one or more Standards Track RFCs.
Minor version 0 of the NFSv4 protocol is represented by
[37], and minor version 1 is represented by
this RFC.
The COMPOUND and CB_
The following items represent the basic rules for the development of minor versions. Note that a future minor version may modify or add to the following rules as part of the minor version definition.¶
-
Procedures are not added or deleted.¶
To maintain the general RPC model, NFSv4 minor versions will not add to or delete procedures from the NFS program.¶
-
Minor versions may add operations to the COMPOUND and CB_
COMPOUND procedures.¶ The addition of operations to the COMPOUND and CB_
COMPOUND procedures does not affect the RPC model.¶ -
Minor versions may append attributes to the bitmap4 that represents sets of attributes and to the fattr4 that represents sets of attribute values.¶
This allows for the expansion of the attribute model to allow for future growth or adaptation.¶
-
Minor version X must append any new attributes after the last documented attribute.¶
Since attribute results are specified as an opaque array of per-attribute, XDR-encoded results, the complexity of adding new attributes in the midst of the current definitions would be too burdensome.¶
-
-
Minor versions must not modify the structure of an existing operation's arguments or results.¶
Again, the complexity of handling multiple structure definitions for a single operation is too burdensome. New operations should be added instead of modifying existing structures for a minor version.¶
This rule does not preclude the following adaptations in a minor version:¶
- adding bits to flag fields, such as new attributes to GETATTR's bitmap4 data type, and providing corresponding variants of opaque arrays, such as a notify4 used together with such bitmaps¶
- adding bits to existing attributes like ACLs that have flag words¶
-
extending enumerated types (including NFS4ERR_
* ) with new values¶ - adding cases to a switched union¶
- Minor versions must not modify the structure of existing attributes.¶
-
Minor versions must not delete operations.¶
This prevents the potential reuse of a particular operation "slot" in a future minor version.¶
- Minor versions must not delete attributes.¶
- Minor versions must not delete flag bits or enumeration values.¶
-
Minor versions may declare an operation MUST NOT be implemented.¶
Specifying that an operation MUST NOT be implemented is equivalent to obsoleting an operation. For the client, it means that the operation MUST NOT be sent to the server. For the server, an NFS error can be returned as opposed to "dropping" the request as an XDR decode error. This approach allows for the obsolescence of an operation while maintaining its structure so that a future minor version can reintroduce the operation.¶
- Minor versions may downgrade features from REQUIRED to RECOMMENDED, or RECOMMENDED to OPTIONAL.¶
- Minor versions may upgrade features from OPTIONAL to RECOMMENDED, or RECOMMENDED to REQUIRED.¶
- A client and server that support minor version X SHOULD support minor versions zero through X-1 as well.¶
-
Except for infrastructural changes, a minor version must not introduce REQUIRED new features.¶
This rule allows for the introduction of new functionality and forces the use of implementation experience before designating a feature as REQUIRED. On the other hand, some classes of features are infrastructural and have broad effects. Allowing infrastructural features to be RECOMMENDED or OPTIONAL complicates implementation of the minor version.¶
- A client MUST NOT attempt to use a stateid, filehandle, or similar returned object from the COMPOUND procedure with minor version X for another COMPOUND procedure with minor version Y, where X != Y.¶
2.8. Non-RPC-Based Security Services
As described in Section 2.2.1.1.1.1, NFSv4.1 relies on RPC for identification, authentication, integrity, and privacy. NFSv4.1 itself provides or enables additional security services as described in the next several subsections.¶
2.8.1. Authorization
Authorization to access a file object via an NFSv4.1 operation is ultimately determined by the NFSv4.1 server. A client can predetermine its access to a file object via the OPEN (Section 18.16) and the ACCESS (Section 18.1) operations.¶
Principals with appropriate access rights can modify the
authorization on a file object via the SETATTR
(Section 18.30) operation. Attributes that affect
access rights include mode, owner, owner_
2.8.2. Auditing
NFSv4.1 provides auditing on a per-file object basis, via the acl and sacl attributes as described in Section 6. It is outside the scope of this specification to specify audit log formats or management policies.¶
2.8.3. Intrusion Detection
NFSv4.1 provides alarm control on a per-file object basis, via the acl and sacl attributes as described in Section 6. Alarms may serve as the basis for intrusion detection. It is outside the scope of this specification to specify heuristics for detecting intrusion via alarms.¶
2.9. Transport Layers
2.9.1. REQUIRED and RECOMMENDED Properties of Transports
NFSv4.1 works over Remote Direct Memory Access (RDMA) and non-RDMA-based transports with the following attributes:¶
- The transport supports reliable delivery of data, which NFSv4.1 requires but neither NFSv4.1 nor RPC has facilities for ensuring [41].¶
- The transport delivers data in the order it was sent. Ordered delivery simplifies detection of transmit errors, and simplifies the sending of arbitrary sized requests and responses via the record marking protocol [3].¶
Where an NFSv4.1 implementation supports operation
over the IP network protocol, any transport used between
NFS and IP MUST be among the IETF-approved congestion
control transport protocols. At the time this document
was written, the only two transports that had the above
attributes were TCP and the Stream
Control Transmission Protocol (SCTP). To enhance the
possibilities for interoperabilit
Even if NFSv4.1 is used over a non-IP network protocol, it is RECOMMENDED that the transport support congestion control.¶
It is permissible for a connectionless transport to be used under NFSv4.1; however, reliable and in-order delivery of data combined with congestion control by the connectionless transport is REQUIRED. As a consequence, UDP by itself MUST NOT be used as an NFSv4.1 transport. NFSv4.1 assumes that a client transport address and server transport address used to send data over a transport together constitute a connection, even if the underlying transport eschews the concept of a connection.¶
2.9.2. Client and Server Transport Behavior
If a connection
- This will prevent the weakening of the transport's congestion control mechanisms via short-lived connections.¶
- This will improve performance for the WAN environment by eliminating the need for connection setup handshakes.¶
- The NFSv4.1 callback model differs from NFSv4.0, and requires the client and server to maintain a client-created backchannel (see Section 2.10.3.1) for the server to use.¶
In order to reduce congestion, if a connection
- A requester MUST NOT retry a request unless the connection the request was sent over was lost before the reply was received.¶
-
A replier MUST NOT silently drop a request, even if the request is a
retry. (The silent drop behavior of RPCSEC_
GSS [4] does not apply because this behavior happens at the RPCSEC_ GSS layer, a lower layer in the request processing.) Instead, the replier SHOULD return an appropriate error (see Section 2.10.6.1), or it MAY disconnect the connection.¶
When sending a reply, the replier MUST send the reply
to the same full network address (e.g., if using an
IP-based transport, the source port of the requester
is part of the full network address) from which the requester
sent the request. If using a connection
If a connection is dropped after the replier receives the request but before the replier sends the reply, the replier might have a pending reply. If a connection is established with the same source and destination full network address as the dropped connection, then the replier MUST NOT send the reply until the requester retries the request. The reason for this prohibition is that the requester MAY retry a request over a different connection (provided that connection is associated with the original request's session).¶
When using RDMA transports, there are other reasons for not tolerating retries over the same connection:¶
- RDMA transports use "credits" to enforce flow control, where a credit is a right to a peer to transmit a message. If one peer were to retransmit a request (or reply), it would consume an additional credit. If the replier retransmitted a reply, it would certainly result in an RDMA connection loss, since the requester would typically only post a single receive buffer for each request. If the requester retransmitted a request, the additional credit consumed on the server might lead to RDMA connection failure unless the client accounted for it and decreased its available credit, leading to wasted resources.¶
- RDMA credits present a new issue to the reply cache in NFSv4.1. The reply cache may be used when a connection within a session is lost, such as after the client reconnects. Credit information is a dynamic property of the RDMA connection, and stale values must not be replayed from the cache. This implies that the reply cache contents must not be blindly used when replies are sent from it, and credit information appropriate to the channel must be refreshed by the RPC layer.¶
In addition, as described in Section 2.10.6.2, while a session is active, the NFSv4.1 requester MUST NOT stop waiting for a reply.¶
2.10. Session
NFSv4.1 clients and servers MUST support and MUST use the session feature as described in this section.¶
2.10.1. Motivation and Overview
Previous versions and minor versions of NFS have suffered from the following:¶
- Lack of support for Exactly Once Semantics (EOS). This includes lack of support for EOS through server failure and recovery.¶
- Limited callback support, including no support for sending callbacks through firewalls, and races between replies to normal requests and callbacks.¶
- Limited trunking over multiple network paths.¶
- Requiring machine credentials for fully secure operation.¶
Through the introduction of a session, NFSv4.1 addresses the above shortfalls with practical solutions:¶
- EOS is enabled by a reply cache with a bounded size, making it feasible to keep the cache in persistent storage and enable EOS through server failure and recovery. One reason that previous revisions of NFS did not support EOS was because some EOS approaches often limited parallelism. As will be explained in Section 2.10.6, NFSv4.1 supports both EOS and unlimited parallelism.¶
- The NFSv4.1 client (defined in Section 1.7) creates transport connections and provides them to the server to use for sending callback requests, thus solving the firewall issue (Section 18.34). Races between responses from client requests and callbacks caused by the requests are detected via the session's sequencing properties that are a consequence of EOS (Section 2.10.6.3).¶
- The NFSv4.1 client can associate an arbitrary number of connections with the session, and thus provide trunking (Section 2.10.5).¶
- The NFSv4.1 client and server produce a session key independent of client and server machine credentials which can be used to compute a digest for protecting critical session management operations (Section 2.10.8.3).¶
-
The NFSv4.1 client can also create secure RPCSEC_
GSS contexts for use by the session's backchannel that do not require the server to authenticate to a client machine principal (Section 2.10.8.2).¶
A session is a dynamically created, long-lived server object
created by a client and used over time from one or more transport
connections. Its function is to maintain the server's state
relative to the connection(s) belonging to a client instance. This
state is entirely independent of the connection itself, and indeed
the state exists whether or not the connection exists. A client may
have one or more sessions associated with it so that
client
A single client may create multiple sessions. A single session MUST NOT serve multiple clients.¶
2.10.2. NFSv4 Integration
Sessions are part of NFSv4.1 and not NFSv4.0. Normally, a major
infrastructure change such as sessions would require a new major
version number to an Open Network Computing (ONC) RPC program like
NFS. However, because NFSv4 encapsulates its functionality in a single procedure, COMPOUND,
and because COMPOUND can support an arbitrary number of
operations, sessions have been added to NFSv4.1 with little difficulty. COMPOUND includes
a minor version number field, and for NFSv4.1 this minor version
is set to 1. When the NFSv4 server processes a COMPOUND with
the minor version set to 1, it expects a different set of
operations than it does for NFSv4.0. NFSv4.1 defines the
SEQUENCE operation, which is required for every
COMPOUND that operates over an established session, with the
exception of some session administration operations, such
as DESTROY_
2.10.2.1. SEQUENCE and CB_SEQUENCE
In NFSv4.1, when the SEQUENCE operation is present, it MUST be the first operation in the COMPOUND procedure. The primary purpose of SEQUENCE is to carry the session identifier. The session identifier associates all other operations in the COMPOUND procedure with a particular session. SEQUENCE also contains required information for maintaining EOS (see Section 2.10.6). Session-enabled NFSv4.1 COMPOUND requests thus have the form:¶
+-----+--------------+-----------+------------+-----------+----
| tag | minorversion | numops |SEQUENCE op | op + args | ...
| | (== 1) | (limited) | + args | |
+-----+--------------+-----------+------------+-----------+----
and the replies have the form:¶
+------------+-----+--------+-------------------------------+--//
|last status | tag | numres |status + SEQUENCE op + results | //
+------------+-----+--------+-------------------------------+--//
//-----------------------+----
// status + op + results | ...
//-----------------------+----
A CB_
2.10.2.2. Client ID and Session Association
Each client ID (Section 2.4) can have zero or more active sessions. A client ID and associated session are required to perform file access in NFSv4.1. Each time a session is used (whether by a client sending a request to the server or the client replying to a callback request from the server), the state leased to its associated client ID is automatically renewed.¶
State (which can consist of share reservations, locks, delegations, and layouts (Section 1.8.4)) is tied to the client ID. Client state is not tied to any individual session. Successive state changing operations from a given state owner MAY go over different sessions, provided the session is associated with the same client ID. A callback MAY arrive over a different session than that of the request that originally acquired the state pertaining to the callback. For example, if session A is used to acquire a delegation, a request to recall the delegation MAY arrive over session B if both sessions are associated with the same client ID. Sections 2.10.8.1 and 2.10.8.2 discuss the security considerations around callbacks.¶
2.10.3. Channels
A channel is not a connection. A channel represents the direction ONC RPC requests are sent.¶
Each session has one or two channels: the fore channel and the backchannel. Because there are at most two channels per session, and because each channel has a distinct purpose, channels are not assigned identifiers.¶
The fore channel is used for ordinary requests from the client to the server, and carries COMPOUND requests and responses. A session always has a fore channel.¶
The backchannel is used for callback requests from server
to client, and carries CB_
Each session has resources for each channel, including separate reply caches (see Section 2.10.6.1). Note that even the backchannel requires a reply cache (or, at least, a slot table in order to detect retries) because some callback operations are non-idempotent.¶
2.10.3.1. Association of Connections, Channels, and Sessions
Each channel is associated with zero or more transport
connections (whether of the same transport protocol or different
transport protocols). A connection can be associated with
one channel or both channels of a session; the client
and server negotiate whether a connection will carry
traffic for one channel or both channels via the
CREATE_
A connection's association with a session is not exclusive. A connection associated with the channel(s) of one session may be simultaneously associated with the channel(s) of other sessions including sessions associated with other client IDs.¶
It is permissible for connections of multiple transport types to be associated with the same channel. For example, both TCP and RDMA connections can be associated with the fore channel. In the event an RDMA and non-RDMA connection are associated with the same channel, the maximum number of slots SHOULD be at least one more than the total number of RDMA credits (Section 2.10.6.1). This way, if all RDMA credits are used, the non-RDMA connection can have at least one outstanding request. If a server supports multiple transport types, it MUST allow a client to associate connections from each transport to a channel.¶
It is permissible for a connection of one type of transport to be associated with the fore channel, and a connection of a different type to be associated with the backchannel.¶
2.10.4. Server Scope
Servers each specify a server scope value in the form
of an opaque string eir_
The use of such compatible values does not imply that a value generated by one server will always be accepted by another. In most cases, it will not. However, a server will not inadvertently accept a value generated by another server. When it does accept it, it will be because it is recognized as valid and carrying the same meaning as on another server of the same scope.¶
When servers are of the same server scope, this compatibility of values applies to the following identifiers:¶
- Filehandle values. A filehandle value accepted by two servers of the same server scope denotes the same object. A WRITE operation sent to one server is reflected immediately in a READ sent to the other.¶
- Server owner values. When the server scope values are the same, server owner value may be validly compared. In cases where the server scope values are different, server owner values are treated as different even if they contain identical strings of bytes.¶
The coordination among servers required to provide such compatibility can be quite minimal, and limited to a simple partition of the ID space. The recognition of common values requires additional implementation, but this can be tailored to the specific situations in which that recognition is desired.¶
Clients will have occasion to compare the server scope values of multiple servers under a number of circumstances, each of which will be discussed under the appropriate functional section:¶
-
When server owner values received in response to
EXCHANGE_
ID operations sent to multiple network addresses are compared for the purpose of determining the validity of various forms of trunking, as described in Section 11.5.2.¶ - When network or server reconfiguration causes the same network address to possibly be directed to different servers, with the necessity for the client to determine when lock reclaim should be attempted, as described in Section 8.4.2.1.¶
When two replies from EXCHANGE_
-
If both EXCHANGE_
ID requests were sent with RPCSEC_ GSS ([4], [9], [27]) authentication and the server principal is the same for both targets, the equality of server scope is validated. It is RECOMMENDED that two servers intending to share the same server scope and server_ owner major_ id also share the same principal name. In some cases, this simplifies the client's task of validating server scope.¶ -
The client may accept the appearance of the second
server in the fs_
locations or fs_ locations_ info attribute for a relevant file system. For example, if there is a migration event for a particular file system or there are locks to be reclaimed on a particular file system, the attributes for that particular file system may be used. The client sends the GETATTR request to the first server for the fs_ locations or fs_ locations_ info attribute with RPCSEC_ GSS authentication. It may need to do this in advance of the need to verify the common server scope. If the client successfully authenticates the reply to GETATTR, and the GETATTR request and reply containing the fs_ locations or fs_ locations_ info attribute refers to the second server, then the equality of server scope is supported. A client may choose to limit the use of this form of support to information relevant to the specific file system involved (e.g. a file system being migrated).¶
2.10.5. Trunking
Trunking is the use of multiple connections between a client and server in order to increase the speed of data transfer. NFSv4.1 supports two types of trunking: session trunking and client ID trunking.¶
In the context of a single server network address, it can be assumed that all connections are accessing the same server, and NFSv4.1 servers MUST support both forms of trunking. When multiple connections use a set of network addresses to access the same server, the server MUST support both forms of trunking. NFSv4.1 servers in a clustered configuration MAY allow network addresses for different servers to use client ID trunking.¶
Clients may use either form of trunking as long as they do not, when trunking between different server network addresses, violate the servers' mandates as to the kinds of trunking to be allowed (see below). With regard to callback channels, the client MUST allow the server to choose among all callback channels valid for a given client ID and MUST support trunking when the connections supporting the backchannel allow session or client ID trunking to be used for callbacks.¶
Session trunking is essentially the association of multiple
connections, each with potentially different target and/or source
network addresses, to the same session. When the target network
addresses (server addresses) of the two connections are the same,
the server MUST
support such session trunking. When the target network addresses
are different, the server MAY indicate such support using the
data returned by the EXCHANGE_
Client ID trunking is the association of multiple sessions to the same client ID. Servers MUST support client ID trunking for two target network addresses whenever they allow session trunking for those same two network addresses. In addition, a server MAY, by presenting the same major server owner ID (Section 2.5) and server scope (Section 2.10.4), allow an additional case of client ID trunking. When two servers return the same major server owner and server scope, it means that the two servers are cooperating on locking state management, which is a prerequisite for client ID trunking.¶
Distinguishing when the client is allowed to use session and
client ID trunking requires understanding how the results of the
EXCHANGE_
- Session Trunking.
-
If the eia_
clientowner argument is the same in two different EXCHANGE_ ID requests, and the eir_ clientid, eir_ server_ owner .so_ major_ id, eir_ server_ owner .so_ minor_ id, and eir_ server_ scope results match in both EXCHANGE_ ID results, then the client is permitted to perform session trunking. If the client has no session mapping to the tuple of eir_ clientid, eir_ server_ owner .so_ major_ id, eir_ server_ scope, and eir_ server_ owner .so_ minor_ id, then it creates the session via a CREATE_ SESSION operation over one of the connections, which associates the connection to the session. If there is a session for the tuple, the client can send BIND_ CONN_ TO_ SESSION to associate the connection to the session.¶ Of course, if the client does not desire to use session trunking, it is not required to do so. It can invoke CREATE_
SESSION on the connection. This will result in client ID trunking as described below. It can also decide to drop the connection if it does not choose to use trunking.¶ - Client ID Trunking.
-
If the eia_
clientowner argument is the same in two different EXCHANGE_ ID requests, and the eir_ clientid, eir_ server_ owner .so_ major_ id, and eir_ server_ scope results match in both EXCHANGE_ ID results, then the client is permitted to perform client ID trunking (regardless of whether the eir_ server_ owner .so_ minor_ id results match). The client can associate each connection with different sessions, where each session is associated with the same server.¶ The client completes the act of client ID trunking by invoking CREATE_
SESSION on each connection, using the same client ID that was returned in eir_ clientid . These invocations create two sessions and also associate each connection with its respective session. The client is free to decline to use client ID trunking by simply dropping the connection at this point.¶ When doing client ID trunking, locking state is shared across sessions associated with that same client ID. This requires the server to coordinate state across sessions and the client to be able to associate the same locking state with multiple sessions.¶
It is always possible that, as a result of various sorts
of reconfiguration events, eir_
In most cases, such reconfiguration events will be disruptive and indicate that an IP address formerly connected to one server is now connected to an entirely different one.¶
Some guidelines on client handling of such situations follow:¶
-
When eir_
server_ scope changes, the client has no assurance that any IDs that it obtained previously (e.g., filehandles) can be validly used on the new server, and, even if the new server accepts them, there is no assurance that this is not due to accident. Thus, it is best to treat all such state as lost or stale, although a client may assume that the probability of inadvertent acceptance is low and treat this situation as within the next case.¶ -
When eir_
server_ scope remains the same and eir_ server_ owner .so_ major_ id changes, the client can use the filehandles it has, consider its locking state lost, and attempt to reclaim or otherwise re-obtain its locks. It might find that its filehandle is now stale. However, if NFS4ERR_ STALE is not returned, it can proceed to reclaim or otherwise re-obtain its open locking state.¶ -
When eir_
server_ scope and eir_ server_ owner .so_ major_ id remain the same, the client has to use the now-current values of eir_ server_ owner .so_ minor_ id in deciding on appropriate forms of trunking. This may result in connections being dropped or new sessions being created.¶
2.10.5.1. Verifying Claims of Matching Server Identity
When the server responds using two different connections that claim
matching or partially matching eir_
-
For session trunking, clients SHOULD reliably verify if connections between different network paths are in fact associated with the same NFSv4.1 server and usable on the same session, and servers MUST allow clients to perform reliable verification. When a client ID is created, the client SHOULD specify that BIND_
CONN_ TO_ SESSION is to be verified according to the SP4_ SSV or SP4_ MACH_ CRED (Section 18.35) state protection options. For SP4_ SSV, reliable verification depends on a shared secret (the SSV) that is established via the SET_ SSV (see Section 18.47) operation.¶ When a new connection is associated with the session (via the BIND_
CONN_ TO_ SESSION operation, see Section 18.34), if the client specified SP4_ SSV state protection for the BIND_ CONN_ TO_ SESSION operation, the client MUST send the BIND_ CONN_ TO_ SESSION with RPCSEC_ GSS protection, using integrity or privacy, and an RPCSEC_ GSS handle created with the GSS SSV mechanism (see Section 2.10.9).¶ If the client mistakenly tries to associate a connection to a session of a wrong server, the server will either reject the attempt because it is not aware of the session identifier of the BIND_
CONN_ TO_ SESSION arguments, or it will reject the attempt because the RPCSEC_ GSS authentication fails. Even if the server mistakenly or maliciously accepts the connection association attempt, the RPCSEC_ GSS verifier it computes in the response will not be verified by the client, so the client will know it cannot use the connection for trunking the specified session.¶ If the client specified SP4_
MACH_ CRED state protection, the BIND_ CONN_ TO_ SESSION operation will use RPCSEC_ GSS integrity or privacy, using the same credential that was used when the client ID was created. Mutual authentication via RPCSEC_ GSS assures the client that the connection is associated with the correct session of the correct server.¶ -
For client ID trunking, the client has at least two options for verifying that the same client ID obtained from two different EXCHANGE_
ID operations came from the same server. The first option is to use RPCSEC_ GSS authentication when sending each EXCHANGE_ ID operation. Each time an EXCHANGE_ ID is sent with RPCSEC_ GSS authentication, the client notes the principal name of the GSS target. If the EXCHANGE_ ID results indicate that client ID trunking is possible, and the GSS targets' principal names are the same, the servers are the same and client ID trunking is allowed.¶ The second option for verification is to use SP4_
SSV protection. When the client sends EXCHANGE_ ID, it specifies SP4_ SSV protection. The first EXCHANGE_ ID the client sends always has to be confirmed by a CREATE_ SESSION call. The client then sends SET_ SSV . Later, the client sends EXCHANGE_ ID to a second destination network address different from the one the first EXCHANGE_ ID was sent to. The client checks that each EXCHANGE_ ID reply has the same eir_ clientid, eir_ server_ owner .so_ major_ id, and eir_ server_ scope . If so, the client verifies the claim by sending a CREATE_ SESSION operation to the second destination address, protected with RPCSEC_ GSS integrity using an RPCSEC_ GSS handle returned by the second EXCHANGE_ ID . If the server accepts the CREATE_ SESSION request, and if the client verifies the RPCSEC_ GSS verifier and integrity codes, then the client has proof the second server knows the SSV, and thus the two servers are cooperating for the purposes of specifying server scope and client ID trunking.¶
2.10.6. Exactly Once Semantics
Via the session, NFSv4.1 offers exactly once semantics (EOS) for requests sent over a channel. EOS is supported on both the fore channel and backchannel.¶
Each COMPOUND or CB_
An example of a non-idempotent request is RENAME. Obviously, if a replier executes the same RENAME request twice, and the first execution succeeds, the re-execution will fail. If the replier returns the result from the re-execution, this result is incorrect. Therefore, EOS is required for non-idempotent requests.¶
An example of an idempotent modifying request is a COMPOUND request containing a WRITE operation. Repeated execution of the same WRITE has the same effect as execution of that WRITE a single time. Nevertheless, enforcing EOS for WRITEs and other idempotent modifying requests is necessary to avoid data corruption.¶
Suppose a client sends WRITE A to a noncompliant server that does not enforce EOS, and receives no response, perhaps due to a network partition. The client reconnects to the server and re-sends WRITE A. Now, the server has outstanding two instances of A. The server can be in a situation in which it executes and replies to the retry of A, while the first A is still waiting in the server's internal I/O system for some resource. Upon receiving the reply to the second attempt of WRITE A, the client believes its WRITE is done so it is free to send WRITE B, which overlaps the byte-range of A. When the original A is dispatched from the server's I/O system and executed (thus the second time A will have been written), then what has been written by B can be overwritten and thus corrupted.¶
An example of an idempotent non-modifying request is a COMPOUND containing SEQUENCE, PUTFH, READLINK, and nothing else. The re-execution of such a request will not cause data corruption or produce an incorrect result. Nonetheless, to keep the implementation simple, the replier MUST enforce EOS for all requests, whether or not idempotent and non-modifying.¶
Note that true and complete EOS is not possible unless the server persists the reply cache in stable storage, and unless the server is somehow implemented to never require a restart (indeed, if such a server exists, the distinction between a reply cache kept in stable storage versus one that is not is one without meaning). See Section 2.10.6.5 for a discussion of persistence in the reply cache. Regardless, even if the server does not persist the reply cache, EOS improves robustness and correctness over previous versions of NFS because the legacy duplicate request/reply caches were based on the ONC RPC transaction identifier (XID). Section 2.10.6.1 explains the shortcomings of the XID as a basis for a reply cache and describes how NFSv4.1 sessions improve upon the XID.¶
2.10.6.1. Slot Identifiers and Reply Cache
The RPC layer provides a transaction ID (XID), which, while required to be unique, is not convenient for tracking requests for two reasons. First, the XID is only meaningful to the requester; it cannot be interpreted by the replier except to test for equality with previously sent requests. When consulting an RPC-based duplicate request cache, the opaqueness of the XID requires a computationally expensive look up (often via a hash that includes XID and source address). NFSv4.1 requests use a non-opaque slot ID, which is an index into a slot table, which is far more efficient. Second, because RPC requests can be executed by the replier in any order, there is no bound on the number of requests that may be outstanding at any time. To achieve perfect EOS, using ONC RPC would require storing all replies in the reply cache. XIDs are 32 bits; storing over four billion (232) replies in the reply cache is not practical. In practice, previous versions of NFS have chosen to store a fixed number of replies in the cache, and to use a least recently used (LRU) approach to replacing cache entries with new entries when the cache is full. In NFSv4.1, the number of outstanding requests is bounded by the size of the slot table, and a sequence ID per slot is used to tell the replier when it is safe to delete a cached reply.¶
In the NFSv4.1 reply cache, when the requester sends a new request,
it selects a slot ID in the
range 0..N, where N is the replier's current maximum slot ID
granted to the requester on the session over which the request is to be
sent. The value of N starts out as equal to
ca_
A slot contains a sequence ID and the cached reply corresponding to the request sent with that sequence ID. The sequence ID is a 32-bit unsigned value, and is therefore in the range 0..0xFFFFFFFF (232 - 1). The first time a slot is used, the requester MUST specify a sequence ID of one (Section 18.36). Each time a slot is reused, the request MUST specify a sequence ID that is one greater than that of the previous request on the slot. If the previous sequence ID was 0xFFFFFFFF, then the next request for the slot MUST have the sequence ID set to zero (i.e., (232 - 1) + 1 mod 232).¶
The sequence ID accompanies the slot ID in each request. It is
for the critical check at the replier: it used to efficiently
determine whether a request using a certain
slot ID is a retransmit or a new, never
The replier compares each received request's sequence ID with the last one previously received for that slot ID, to see if the new request is:¶
- A new request, in which the sequence ID is one greater than that previously seen in the slot (accounting for sequence wraparound). The replier proceeds to execute the new request, and the replier MUST increase the slot's sequence ID by one.¶
- A retransmitted request, in which the sequence ID is equal to that currently recorded in the slot. If the original request has executed to completion, the replier returns the cached reply. See Section 2.10.6.2 for direction on how the replier deals with retries of requests that are still in progress.¶
-
A misordered retry, in which the sequence ID
is less than (accounting for sequence wraparound)
that previously seen in the slot. The
replier MUST return NFS4ERR_
SEQ_ MISORDERED (as the result from SEQUENCE or CB_ SEQUENCE ).¶ -
A misordered new request, in which the sequence ID
is two or more than (accounting for sequence
wraparound) that previously seen in the
slot. Note that because the sequence ID MUST
wrap around to zero once it reaches 0xFFFFFFFF, a
misordered new request and a misordered retry
cannot be distinguished. Thus, the replier MUST
return NFS4ERR_
SEQ_ MISORDERED (as the result from SEQUENCE or CB_ SEQUENCE ).¶
Unlike the XID, the slot ID is always within a specific range; this has two implications. The first implication is that for a given session, the replier need only cache the results of a limited number of COMPOUND requests. The second implication derives from the first, which is that unlike XID-indexed reply caches (also known as duplicate request caches - DRCs), the slot ID-based reply cache cannot be overflowed. Through use of the sequence ID to identify retransmitted requests, the replier does not need to actually cache the request itself, reducing the storage requirements of the reply cache further. These facilities make it practical to maintain all the required entries for an effective reply cache.¶
The slot ID, sequence ID, and session ID therefore take over the traditional role of the XID and source network address in the replier's reply cache implementation. This approach is considerably more portable and completely robust -- it is not subject to the reassignment of ports as clients reconnect over IP networks. In addition, the RPC XID is not used in the reply cache, enhancing robustness of the cache in the face of any rapid reuse of XIDs by the requester. While the replier does not care about the XID for the purposes of reply cache management (but the replier MUST return the same XID that was in the request), nonetheless there are considerations for the XID in NFSv4.1 that are the same as all other previous versions of NFS. The RPC XID remains in each message and needs to be formulated in NFSv4.1 requests as in any other ONC RPC request. The reasons include:¶
- The RPC layer retains its existing semantics and implementation.¶
-
The requester and replier must be able to interoperate at the
RPC layer, prior to the NFSv4.1 decoding of the SEQUENCE or CB_
SEQUENCE operation.¶ -
If an operation is being used that does not start with
SEQUENCE or CB_
SEQUENCE (e.g., BIND_ CONN_ TO_ SESSION ), then the RPC XID is needed for correct operation to match the reply to the request.¶ -
The SEQUENCE or CB_
SEQUENCE operation may generate an error. If so, the embedded slot ID, sequence ID, and session ID (if present) in the request will not be in the reply, and the requester has only the XID to match the reply to the request.¶
Given that well-formulated XIDs continue to be required,
this raises the question: why do SEQUENCE and CB_
The SEQUENCE (and CB_
The replier
responds with both a new target highest_
-
The target highest_
slotid is an indication to the requester of the highest_ slotid the replier wishes the requester to be using. This permits the replier to withdraw (or add) resources from a requester that has been found to not be using them, in order to more fairly share resources among a varying level of demand from other requesters. The requester must always comply with the replier's value updates, since they indicate newly established hard limits on the requester's access to session resources. However, because of request pipelining, the requester may have active requests in flight reflecting prior values; therefore, the replier must not immediately require the requester to comply.¶ -
The enforced highest_
slotid indicates the highest slot ID the requester is permitted to use on a subsequent SEQUENCE or CB_ SEQUENCE operation. The replier's enforced highest_ slotid SHOULD be no less than the highest_ slotid the requester indicated in the SEQUENCE or CB_ SEQUENCE arguments.¶ A requester can be intransigent with respect to lowering its highest_
slotid argument to a Sequence operation, i.e. the requester continues to ignore the target highest_ slotid in the response to a Sequence operation, and continues to set its highest_ slotid argument to be higher than the target highest_ slotid . This can be considered particularly egregious behavior when the replier knows there are no outstanding requests with slot IDs higher than its target highest_ slotid . When faced with such intransigence, the replier is free to take more forceful action, and MAY reply with a new enforced highest_ slotid that is less than its previous enforced highest_ slotid . Thereafter, if the requester continues to send requests with a highest_ slotid that is greater than the replier's new enforced highest_ slotid, the server MAY return NFS4ERR_ BAD_ HIGH_ SLOT, unless the slot ID in the request is greater than the new enforced highest_ slotid and the request is a retry.¶ The replier SHOULD retain the slots it wants to retire until the requester sends a request with a highest_
slotid less than or equal to the replier's new enforced highest_ slotid .¶ The requester can also be intransigent with respect to sending non-retry requests that have a slot ID that exceeds the replier's highest_
slotid . Once the replier has forcibly lowered the enforced highest_ slotid, the requester is only allowed to send retries on slots that exceed the replier's highest_ slotid . If a request is received with a slot ID that is higher than the new enforced highest_ slotid, and the sequence ID is one higher than what is in the slot's reply cache, then the server can both retire the slot and return NFS4ERR_ BADSLOT (however, the server MUST NOT do one and not the other). The reason it is safe to retire the slot is because by using the next sequence ID, the requester is indicating it has received the previous reply for the slot.¶ -
The requester SHOULD use the lowest available
slot when sending a new request. This way, the
replier may be able to retire slot entries faster.
However, where the replier is actively adjusting
its granted highest_
slotid, it will not be able to use only the receipt of the slot ID and highest_ slotid in the request. Neither the slot ID nor the highest_ slotid used in a request may reflect the replier's current idea of the requester's session limit, because the request may have been sent from the requester before the update was received. Therefore, in the downward adjustment case, the replier may have to retain a number of reply cache entries at least as large as the old value of maximum requests outstanding, until it can infer that the requester has seen a reply containing the new granted highest_ slotid . The replier can infer that the requester has seen such a reply when it receives a new request with the same slot ID as the request replied to and the next higher sequence ID.¶
2.10.6.1.1. Caching of SEQUENCE and CB_SEQUENCE Replies
When a SEQUENCE or CB_
Regardless of whether or not a replier is re-computing highest slot ID, target slot ID, and status on replies to retries, the requester MUST NOT assume that the values are being re-computed whenever it receives a reply after a retry is sent, since it has no way of knowing whether the reply it has received was sent by the replier in response to the retry or is a delayed response to the original request. Therefore, it may be the case that highest slot ID, target slot ID, or status bits may reflect the state of affairs when the request was first executed. Although acting based on such delayed information is valid, it may cause the receiver of the reply to do unneeded work. Requesters MAY choose to send additional requests to get the current state of affairs or use the state of affairs reported by subsequent requests, in preference to acting immediately on data that might be out of date.¶
2.10.6.1.2. Errors from SEQUENCE and CB_SEQUENCE
Any time SEQUENCE or CB_
2.10.6.1.3. Optional Reply Caching
On a per-request basis, the requester can choose to
direct the replier to cache the reply to all operations
after the first operation (SEQUENCE or CB_
Whether or not the requester requests the reply to be cached
has no effect on the slot processing. If the
result of SEQUENCE or CB_
-
The replier can cache the entire original reply.
Even though sa_
cachethis or csa_ cachethis is FALSE, the replier is always free to cache. It may choose this approach in order to simplify implementation.¶ -
The replier enters into its reply cache a reply consisting of the original results to the SEQUENCE or CB_
SEQUENCE operation, and with the next operation in COMPOUND or CB_ COMPOUND having the error NFS4ERR_ RETRY_ UNCACHED_ REP . Thus, if the requester later retries the request, it will get NFS4ERR_ RETRY_ UNCACHED_ REP . If a replier receives a retried Sequence operation where the reply to the COMPOUND or CB_ COMPOUND was not cached, then the replier,¶ -
MAY return NFS4ERR_
RETRY_ UNCACHED_ REP in reply to a Sequence operation if the Sequence operation is not the first operation (granted, a requester that does so is in violation of the NFSv4.1 protocol).¶ -
MUST NOT return
NFS4ERR_
RETRY_ UNCACHED_ REP in reply to a Sequence operation if the Sequence operation is the first operation.¶
-
MAY return NFS4ERR_
-
If the second operation is an illegal operation, or an
operation that was legal in a previous minor version of
NFSv4 and MUST NOT
be supported in the current minor version (e.g., SETCLIENTID), the
replier MUST NOT ever return NFS4ERR_
RETRY_ UNCACHED_ REP . Instead the replier MUST return NFS4ERR_ OP_ ILLEGAL or NFS4ERR_ BADXDR or NFS4ERR_ NOTSUPP as appropriate.¶ -
If the second operation can result in another error status,
the replier MAY return a status other than NFS4ERR_
RETRY_ UNCACHED_ REP, provided the operation is not executed in such a way that the state of the replier is changed. Examples of such an error status include: NFS4ERR_ NOTSUPP returned for an operation that is legal but not REQUIRED in the current minor versions, and thus not supported by the replier; NFS4ERR_ SEQUENCE_ POS; and NFS4ERR_ REQ_ TOO_ BIG .¶
The discussion above assumes that the retried request matches the original one. Section 2.10.6.1.3.1 discusses what the replier might do, and MUST do when original and retried requests do not match. Since the replier may only cache a small amount of the information that would be required to determine whether this is a case of a false retry, the replier may send to the client any of the following responses:¶
- The cached reply to the original request (if the replier has cached it in its entirety and the users of the original request and retry match).¶
-
A reply that consists only of the Sequence operation with the error
NFS4ERR_
SEQ_ FALSE_ RETRY .¶ -
A reply consisting of the response to Sequence with the status
NFS4_
OK, together with the second operation as it appeared in the retried request with an error of NFS4ERR_ RETRY_ UNCACHED_ REP or other error as described above.¶ -
A reply that consists of the response to Sequence with the status
NFS4_
OK, together with the second operation as it appeared in the original request with an error of NFS4ERR_ RETRY_ UNCACHED_ REP or other error as described above.¶
2.10.6.1.3.1. False Retry
If a requester sent a Sequence operation
with a slot ID and sequence ID that are
in the reply cache but the replier
detected that the retried request is not
the same as the original request,
including a retry that has different
operations or different arguments in the
operations from the original and a retry
that uses a different principal in the
RPC request's credential field that
translates to a different user, then this
is a false retry. When the replier
detects a false retry, it is permitted
(but not always obligated) to return
NFS4ERR_
Translations of particularly privileged
user values to other users due to the
lack of appropriately secure credentials,
as configured on the replier, should be
applied before determining whether the
users are the same or different. If the
replier determines the users are
different between the original request
and a retry, then the replier MUST return
NFS4ERR_
If an operation of the retry is an
illegal operation, or an operation that
was legal in a previous minor version of
NFSv4 and MUST NOT be supported in the
current minor version (e.g., SETCLIENTID),
the replier MAY return
NFS4ERR_
2.10.6.2. Retry and Replay of Reply
A requester MUST NOT retry a request, unless the connection it used to send the request disconnects. The requester can then reconnect and re-send the request, or it can re-send the request over a different connection that is associated with the same session.¶
If the requester is a server wanting to re-send a callback
operation over the backchannel of a session, the requester
of course cannot reconnect because only the client can
associate connections with the backchannel. The
server can re-send the request over another connection that
is bound to the same session's backchannel. If there is no
such connection, the server
MUST indicate that the session has no backchannel by setting
the SEQ4_
Note that it is not fatal for a requester to retry without a disconnect between the request and retry. However, the retry does consume resources, especially with RDMA, where each request, retry or not, consumes a credit. Retries for no reason, especially retries sent shortly after the previous attempt, are a poor use of network bandwidth and defeat the purpose of a transport's inherent congestion control system.¶
A requester MUST wait for a reply to a request before using
the slot for another request. If it does not wait for
a reply, then the requester does not know what
sequence ID to use for the slot on its next request.
For example, suppose a requester sends a request with sequence ID
1, and does not wait for the response. The next time it uses
the slot, it sends the new request with sequence ID 2.
If the replier has not seen the request with sequence ID 1, then
the replier is not expecting sequence ID 2, and rejects the
requester's new request with NFS4ERR_
RDMA fabrics do not guarantee that the memory handles (Steering Tags) within each RPC/RDMA "chunk" [32] are valid on a scope outside that of a single connection. Therefore, handles used by the direct operations become invalid after connection loss. The server must ensure that any RDMA operations that must be replayed from the reply cache use the newly provided handle(s) from the most recent request.¶
A retry might be sent while the original request is still in
progress on the replier. The replier SHOULD deal with the issue
by returning NFS4ERR_
2.10.6.3. Resolving Server Callback Races
It is possible for server callbacks to arrive at the client before the reply from related fore channel operations. For example, a client may have been granted a delegation to a file it has opened, but the reply to the OPEN (informing the client of the granting of the delegation) may be delayed in the network. If a conflicting operation arrives at the server, it will recall the delegation using the backchannel, which may be on a different transport connection, perhaps even a different network, or even a different session associated with the same client ID.¶
The presence of a session between the client and server alleviates this issue. When a session is in place, each client request is uniquely identified by its { session ID, slot ID, sequence ID } triple. By the rules under which slot entries (reply cache entries) are retired, the server has knowledge whether the client has "seen" each of the server's replies. The server can therefore provide sufficient information to the client to allow it to disambiguate between an erroneous or conflicting callback race condition.¶
For each client operation that might result in some
sort of server callback, the server SHOULD "remember"
the { session ID, slot ID, sequence ID } triple of the client request
until the slot ID retirement rules allow the server to
determine that the client has, in fact, seen the
server's reply. Until the time the { session ID, slot ID,
sequence ID } request triple can be retired, any recalls
of the associated object MUST carry an array of these
referring identifiers (in the CB_
The CB_
The client must not simply wait forever for the
expected server reply to arrive before responding to the
CB_
2.10.6.4. COMPOUND and CB_COMPOUND Construction Issues
Very large requests and replies may pose both buffer
management issues (especially with RDMA) and reply
cache issues. When the session is created
(Section 18.36), for each channel (fore and
back), the client and server
negotiate the maximum-sized request they will
send or process
If a request exceeds ca_
If a reply exceeds ca_
If sa_
A client needs to take care that, when sending
operations that change the current filehandle (except for
PUTFH, PUTPUBFH, PUTROOTFH, and RESTOREFH), it
does not exceed the maximum reply buffer before the GETFH
operation. Otherwise, the client will have to retry
the operation that changed the current filehandle, in order
to obtain the desired filehandle.
For the OPEN operation (see Section 18.16),
retry is not always available as an option.
The following guidelines for the handling of
filehandle
-
Within the same COMPOUND procedure, a client
SHOULD send GETFH immediately after a current
filehandle
-changing operation. A client MUST send GETFH after a current filehandle -changing operation that is also non-idempotent (e.g., the OPEN operation), unless the operation is RESTOREFH. RESTOREFH is an exception, because even though it is non-idempotent, the filehandle RESTOREFH produced originated from an operation that is either idempotent (e.g., PUTFH, LOOKUP), or non-idempotent (e.g., OPEN, CREATE). If the origin is non-idempotent, then because the client MUST send GETFH after the origin operation, the client can recover if RESTOREFH returns an error.¶ -
A server MAY return NFS4ERR_
REP_ TOO_ BIG or NFS4ERR_ REP_ TOO_ BIG_ TO_ CACHE (if sa_ cachethis is TRUE) on a filehandle -changing operation if the reply would be too large on the next operation.¶ -
A server SHOULD return NFS4ERR_
REP_ TOO_ BIG or NFS4ERR_ REP_ TOO_ BIG_ TO_ CACHE (if sa_ cachethis is TRUE) on a filehandle -changing, non-idempotent operation if the reply would be too large on the next operation, especially if the operation is OPEN.¶ -
A server MAY return NFS4ERR_
UNSAFE_ COMPOUND to a non-idempotent current filehandle -changing operation, if it looks at the next operation (in the same COMPOUND procedure) and finds it is not GETFH. The server SHOULD do this if it is unable to determine in advance whether the total response size would exceed ca_ maxresponsesize_ cached or ca_ maxresponsesize .¶
2.10.6.5. Persistence
Since the reply cache is bounded, it is practical for the reply cache to persist across server restarts. The replier MUST persist the following information if it agreed to persist the session (when the session was created; see Section 18.36):¶
The above are sufficient for a replier to provide EOS semantics
for any requests that were sent and executed before the server
restarted.
If the replier is a client, then there is no need for
it to persist any more information, unless the client will
be persisting all other state across client restart, in which case,
the server will never see any NFSv4.1-level protocol manifestation
of a client restart.
If the replier is a server, with just the
slot table and session ID persisting,
any requests the client retries after the server restart will
return the results that are cached in the reply cache,
and any new requests (i.e., the sequence ID is one greater than the
slot's sequence ID) MUST be rejected with NFS4ERR_
- The client ID. This is a prerequisite to let the client create more sessions associated with the same client ID as the re-animated session.¶
- The client ID's sequence ID that is used for creating sessions (see Sections 18.35 and 18.36). This is a prerequisite to let the client create more sessions.¶
-
The principal that created the client ID. This
allows the server to authenticate the client when
it sends EXCHANGE_
ID .¶ -
The SSV, if SP4_
SSV state protection was specified when the client ID was created (see Section 18.35). This lets the client create new sessions, and associate connections with the new and existing sessions.¶ - The properties of the client ID as defined in Section 18.35.¶
A persistent reply cache places certain demands on the server. The execution of the sequence of operations (starting with SEQUENCE) and placement of its results in the persistent cache MUST be atomic. If a client retries a sequence of operations that was previously executed on the server, the only acceptable outcomes are either the original cached reply or an indication that the client ID or session has been lost (indicating a catastrophic loss of the reply cache or a session that has been deleted because the client failed to use the session for an extended period of time).¶
A server could fail and restart in the middle of a
COMPOUND procedure that contains one or more non-idempotent
or idempotent
While the description of the implementation for atomic execution of the request and caching of the reply is beyond the scope of this document, an example implementation for NFSv2 [45] is described in [46].¶
2.10.7. RDMA Considerations
A complete discussion of the operation of RPC-based protocols over RDMA transports is in [32]. A discussion of the operation of NFSv4, including NFSv4.1, over RDMA is in [33]. Where RDMA is considered, this specification assumes the use of such a layering; it addresses only the upper-layer issues relevant to making best use of RPC/RDMA.¶
2.10.7.1. RDMA Connection Resources
RDMA requires its consumers to register memory and post buffers of a specific size and number for receive operations.¶
Registration of memory can be a relatively high-overhead operation,
since it requires pinning of buffers, assignment of attributes
(e.g., readable
Following basic registration, these buffers must be posted by the RPC layer to handle receives. These buffers remain in use by the RPC/NFSv4.1 implementation; the size and number of them must be known to the remote peer in order to avoid RDMA errors that would cause a fatal error on the RDMA connection.¶
NFSv4.1 manages slots as resources on a per-session basis (see Section 2.10), while RDMA connections manage credits on a per-connection basis. This means that in order for a peer to send data over RDMA to a remote buffer, it has to have both an NFSv4.1 slot and an RDMA credit. If multiple RDMA connections are associated with a session, then if the total number of credits across all RDMA connections associated with the session is X, and the number of slots in the session is Y, then the maximum number of outstanding requests is the lesser of X and Y.¶
2.10.7.2. Flow Control
Previous versions of NFS do not provide flow control;
instead, they rely on the windowing provided by
transports like TCP to throttle requests. This does
not work with RDMA, which provides no operation flow
control and will terminate a connection in error when
limits are exceeded.
Limits such as maximum number of requests
outstanding are therefore negotiated when a session
is created (see the ca_
The limits may also be modified
dynamically at the replier's choosing by manipulating
certain parameters present in each NFSv4.1 reply. In
addition, the CB_
2.10.7.3. Padding
Header padding is requested by each peer at session initiation
(see the ca_
Padding leverages the useful property that RDMA preserve alignment of data, even when they are placed into anonymous (untagged) buffers. If requested, client inline writes will insert appropriate pad bytes within the request header to align the data payload on the specified boundary. The client is encouraged to add sufficient padding (up to the negotiated size) so that the "data" field of the WRITE operation is aligned. Most servers can make good use of such padding, which allows them to chain receive buffers in such a way that any data carried by client requests will be placed into appropriate buffers at the server, ready for file system processing. The receiver's RPC layer encounters no overhead from skipping over pad bytes, and the RDMA layer's high performance makes the insertion and transmission of padding on the sender a significant optimization. In this way, the need for servers to perform RDMA Read to satisfy all but the largest client writes is obviated. An added benefit is the reduction of message round trips on the network -- a potentially good trade, where latency is present.¶
The value to choose for padding is subject to a number of criteria.
A primary source of variable-length data in the RPC header is the
authentication information, the form of which is client
Sender gather:
|RPC Request|Pad bytes|Length| -> |User data...|
\------+----------------------/ \
\ \
\ Receiver scatter: \-----------+- ...
/-----+----------------\ \ \
|RPC Request|Pad|Length| -> |FS buffer|->|FS buffer|->...
In the above case, the server may recycle unused buffers to the next posted receive if unused by the actual received request, or may pass the now-complete buffers by reference for normal write processing. For a server that can make use of it, this removes any need for data copies of incoming data, without resorting to complicated end-to-end buffer advertisement and management. This includes most kernel-based and integrated server designs, among many others. The client may perform similar optimizations, if desired.¶
2.10.7.4. Dual RDMA and Non-RDMA Transports
Some RDMA transports (e.g., RFC 5040 [8]) permit a "streaming" (non-RDMA) phase, where ordinary traffic might flow before "stepping up" to RDMA mode, commencing RDMA traffic. Some RDMA transports start connections always in RDMA mode. NFSv4.1 allows, but does not assume, a streaming phase before RDMA mode. When a connection is associated with a session, the client and server negotiate whether the connection is used in RDMA or non-RDMA mode (see Sections 18.36 and 18.34).¶
2.10.8. Session Security
2.10.8.1. Session Callback Security
Via session
2.10.8.2. Backchannel RPC Security
When the NFSv4.1 client establishes the backchannel, it
informs the server of the security flavors and principals
to use when sending requests. If the security flavor is
RPCSEC_
The CREATE_
Also note that the SP4_
2.10.8.3. Protection from Unauthorized State Changes
As described to this point in the specification, the state model
of NFSv4.1 is vulnerable to an attacker that
sends a SEQUENCE operation with a forged session ID and with a slot ID that
it expects the legitimate client to use next. When the legitimate client
uses the slot ID with the same sequence number, the server
returns the attacker's result from the reply cache, which
disrupts the legitimate client and thus denies service to it.
Similarly, an attacker could send a CREATE_
NFSv4.1 provides three options to a client for state protection,
which are specified when a client creates
a client ID via EXCHANGE_
The first
The other two options
-
An RPCSEC_
GSS -based credential is used to authenticate client ID and session maintenance operations, including creating and destroying a session, associating a connection with the session, and destroying the client ID.¶ -
Because RPCSEC_
GSS is used to authenticate client ID and session maintenance, the attacker cannot associate a rogue connection with a legitimate session, or associate a rogue session with a legitimate client ID in order to maliciously alter the client ID's lock state via CLOSE, LOCKU, DELEGRETURN, LAYOUTRETURN, etc.¶ -
In cases where the server's security policies on a
portion of its namespace require RPCSEC_
GSS authentication, a client may have to use an RPCSEC_ GSS credential to remove per-file state (e.g., LOCKU, CLOSE, etc.). The server may require that the principal that removes the state match certain criteria (e.g., the principal might have to be the same as the one that acquired the state). However, the client might not have an RPCSEC_ GSS context for such a principal, and might not be able to create such a context (perhaps because the user has logged off). When the client establishes SP4_ MACH_ CRED or SP4_ SSV protection, it can specify a list of operations that the server MUST allow using the machine credential (if SP4_ MACH_ CRED is used) or the SSV credential (if SP4_ SSV is used).¶
The SP4_
There are at least three scenarios for the SP4_
- The system administrator configures a unique, permanent per-machine credential for one of the mandated GSS mechanisms (e.g., if Kerberos V5 is used, a "keytab" containing a principal derived from a client host name could be used).¶
- The client is used by a single user, and so the client ID and its sessions are used by just that user. If the user's credential expires, then session and client ID maintenance cannot occur, but since the client has a single user, only that user is inconvenienced.¶
- The physical client has multiple users, but the client implementation has a unique client ID for each user. This is effectively the same as the second scenario, but a disadvantage is that each user needs to be allocated at least one session each, so the approach suffers from lack of economy.¶
The SP4_
-
The arguments to and results of SET_
SSV include digests of the old and new SSV, respectively.¶ -
Because the initial value of the SSV is zero,
therefore known, the client that opts for SP4_
SSV protection and opts to apply SP4_ SSV protection to BIND_ CONN_ TO_ SESSION and CREATE_ SESSION MUST send at least one SET_ SSV operation before the first BIND_ CONN_ TO_ SESSION operation or before the second CREATE_ SESSION operation on a client ID. If it does not, the SSV mechanism will not generate tokens (Section 2.10.9). A client SHOULD send SET_ SSV as soon as a session is created.¶ -
A SET_
SSV request does not replace the SSV with the argument to SET_ SSV . Instead, the current SSV on the server is logically exclusive ORed (XORed) with the argument to SET_ SSV . Each time a new principal uses a client ID for the first time, the client SHOULD send a SET_ SSV with that principal's RPCSEC_ GSS credentials, with RPCSEC_ GSS service set to RPC_ GSS_ SVC_ PRIVACY .¶
Here are the types of attacks that can be attempted by an attacker named
Eve on a victim named Bob, and how SP4_
-
Suppose Eve is the first user to log into a legitimate client. Eve's use of an NFSv4.1 file system will cause the legitimate client to create a client ID with SP4_
SSV protection, specifying that the BIND_ CONN_ TO_ SESSION operation MUST use the SSV credential. Eve's use of the file system also causes an SSV to be created. The SET_ SSV operation that creates the SSV will be protected by the RPCSEC_ GSS context created by the legitimate client, which uses Eve's GSS principal and credentials. Eve can eavesdrop on the network while her RPCSEC_ GSS context is created and the SET_ SSV using her context is sent. Even if the legitimate client sends the SET_ SSV with RPC_ GSS_ SVC_ PRIVACY, because Eve knows her own credentials, she can decrypt the SSV. Eve can compute an RPCSEC_ GSS credential that BIND_ CONN_ TO_ SESSION will accept, and so associate a new connection with the legitimate session. Eve can change the slot ID and sequence state of a legitimate session, and/or the SSV state, in such a way that when Bob accesses the server via the same legitimate client, the legitimate client will be unable to use the session.¶ The client's only recourse is to create a new client ID for Bob to use, and establish a new SSV for the client ID. The client will be unable to delete the old client ID, and will let the lease on the old client ID expire.¶
Once the legitimate client establishes an SSV over the new session using Bob's RPCSEC_
GSS context, Eve can use the new session via the legitimate client, but she cannot disrupt Bob. Moreover, because the client SHOULD have modified the SSV due to Eve using the new session, Bob cannot get revenge on Eve by associating a rogue connection with the session.¶ The question is how did the legitimate client detect that Eve has hijacked the old session? When the client detects that a new principal, Bob, wants to use the session, it SHOULD have sent a SET_
SSV, which leads to the following sub-scenarios:¶ -
Let us suppose that from the rogue connection, Eve sent a SET_
SSV with the same slot ID and sequence ID that the legitimate client later uses. The server will assume the SET_ SSV sent with Bob's credentials is a retry, and return to the legitimate client the reply it sent Eve. However, unless Eve can correctly guess the SSV the legitimate client will use, the digest verification checks in the SET_ SSV response will fail. That is an indication to the client that the session has apparently been hijacked.¶ -
Alternatively, Eve sent a SET_
SSV with a different slot ID than the legitimate client uses for its SET_ SSV . Then the digest verification of the SET_ SSV sent with Bob's credentials fails on the server, and the error returned to the client makes it apparent that the session has been hijacked.¶ -
Alternatively, Eve sent an operation other than SET_
SSV, but with the same slot ID and sequence that the legitimate client uses for its SET_ SSV . The server returns to the legitimate client the response it sent Eve. The client sees that the response is not at all what it expects. The client assumes either session hijacking or a server bug, and either way destroys the old session.¶
-
-
Eve associates a rogue connection with the session as above, and then destroys the session. Again, Bob goes to use the server from the legitimate client, which sends a SET_
SSV using Bob's credentials. The client receives an error that indicates that the session does not exist. When the client tries to create a new session, this will fail because the SSV it has does not match that which the server has, and now the client knows the session was hijacked. The legitimate client establishes a new client ID.¶ -
If Eve creates a connection before the legitimate client establishes an SSV, because the initial value of the SSV is zero and therefore known, Eve can send a SET_
SSV that will pass the digest verification check. However, because the new connection has not been associated with the session, the SET_ SSV is rejected for that reason.¶
In summary, an attacker's disruption of state when
SP4_
Note that neither the SP4_
If a connection hijack occurs, the hijacker could in
theory change locking state and negatively impact the
service to legitimate clients. However, if the server
is configured to require the use of RPCSEC_
2.10.9. The Secret State Verifier (SSV) GSS Mechanism
The SSV provides the secret key for a GSS mechanism internal to NFSv4.1
that NFSv4.1 uses for state protection. Contexts for this
mechanism are not established via the RPCSEC_
The mechanism OID for the SSV mechanism is
iso
The SSV mechanism defines four subkeys derived from
the SSV value. Each time SET_
/* Input for computing subkeys */
enum ssv_subkey4 {
SSV4_SUBKEY_MIC_I2T = 1,
SSV4_SUBKEY_MIC_T2I = 2,
SSV4_SUBKEY_SEAL_I2T = 3,
SSV4_SUBKEY_SEAL_T2I = 4
};
The subkey derived from SSV4_
The PerMsgToken description is based on an XDR definition:¶
/* Input for computing smt_hmac */
struct ssv_mic_plain_tkn4 {
uint32_t smpt_ssv_seq;
opaque smpt_orig_plain<>;
};
/* SSV GSS PerMsgToken token */
struct ssv_mic_tkn4 {
uint32_t smt_ssv_seq;
opaque smt_hmac<>;
};
The field smt_
The token emitted by GSS_
The SealedMessage description is based on an XDR definition:¶
/* Input for computing ssct_encr_data and ssct_hmac */
struct ssv_seal_plain_tkn4 {
opaque sspt_confounder<>;
uint32_t sspt_ssv_seq;
opaque sspt_orig_plain<>;
opaque sspt_pad<>;
};
/* SSV GSS SealedMessage token */
struct ssv_seal_cipher_tkn4 {
uint32_t ssct_ssv_seq;
opaque ssct_iv<>;
opaque ssct_encr_data<>;
opaque ssct_hmac<>;
};
The token emitted by GSS_
The ssct_
The ssct_
The ssct_
The ssct_
The sspt_
The sspt_
The field sspt_
The sspt_
For example, suppose the encryption algorithm uses 16-byte blocks, and
the sspt_
GSS_
There is one SSV per client ID.
There is a single GSS context for
a client ID / SSV pair.
All SSV mechanism RPCSEC_
SSV RPCSEC_
The client MUST establish an SSV via SET_
The SSV mechanism does not support replay detection and sequencing
in its tokens because RPCSEC_
2.10.10. Security Considerations for RPCSEC_GSS When Using the SSV Mechanism
When a client ID is created with SP4_
There are multiple ways to prevent the attack on the SSV RPCSEC_
-
Each time one or more new SSV RPCSEC_
GSS handles are created via EXCHANGE_ ID, the client SHOULD send a SET_ SSV operation to modify the SSV. By changing the SSV, the new handles will not result in the re-use of an SSV RPCSEC_ GSS verifier in a reply.¶ -
When a requester decides to use N SSV RPCSEC_
GSS handles, it SHOULD assign a unique and non-overlapping range of seq_ nums to each SSV RPCSEC_ GSS handle. The size of each range SHOULD be equal to MAXSEQ / N (see Section 5 of [4] for the definition of MAXSEQ). When an SSV RPCSEC_ GSS handle reaches its maximum, it SHOULD force the replier to destroy the handle by sending a NULL RPC request with seq_ num set to MAXSEQ + 1 (see Section 5.3.3.3 of [4]).¶ -
When the requester wants to increase or decrease N, it SHOULD force
the replier to destroy all N handles by sending a NULL RPC request on
each handle with seq_
num set to MAXSEQ + 1. If the requester is the client, it SHOULD send a SET_ SSV operation before using new handles. If the requester is the server, then the client SHOULD send a SET_ SSV operation when it detects that the server has forced it to destroy a backchannel's SSV RPCSEC_ GSS handle. By sending a SET_ SSV operation, the SSV will change, and so the attacker will be unavailable to successfully replay a previous verifier in a reply to the requester.¶
Note that if the replier carefully creates the SSV RPCSEC_
2.10.11. Session Mechanics - Steady State
2.10.11.1. Obligations of the Server
The server has the primary obligation to monitor the
state of backchannel resources that the client has
created for the server
2.10.11.2. Obligations of the Client
The client SHOULD honor the following obligations in order to utilize the session:¶
- Keep a necessary session from going idle on the server. A client that requires a session but nonetheless is not sending operations risks having the session be destroyed by the server. This is because sessions consume resources, and resource limitations may force the server to cull an inactive session. A server MAY consider a session to be inactive if the client has not used the session before the session inactivity timer (Section 2.10.12) has expired.¶
- Destroy the session when not needed. If a client has multiple sessions, one of which has no requests waiting for replies, and has been idle for some period of time, it SHOULD destroy the session.¶
-
Maintain GSS contexts and RPCSEC_
GSS handles for the backchannel. If the client requires the server to use the RPCSEC_ GSS security flavor for callbacks, then it needs to be sure the RPCSEC_ GSS handles and/or their GSS contexts that are handed to the server via BACKCHANNEL_ CTL or CREATE_ SESSION are unexpired.¶ - Preserve a connection for a backchannel. The server requires a backchannel in order to gracefully recall recallable state or notify the client of certain events. Note that if the connection is not being used for the fore channel, there is no way for the client to tell if the connection is still alive (e.g., the server restarted without sending a disconnect). The onus is on the server, not the client, to determine if the backchannel's connection is alive, and to indicate in the response to a SEQUENCE operation when the last connection associated with a session's backchannel has disconnected.¶
2.10.11.3. Steps the Client Takes to Establish a Session
If the client does not have a client ID, the client
sends EXCHANGE_
The client uses the client ID to send a
CREATE_
If the client specified SP4_
If the client wants to use delegations, layouts,
directory notifications, or any other state that
requires a backchannel, then it needs to add a connection
to the backchannel if CREATE_
If the client wants to use additional
connections for the backchannel, then it needs to call
BIND_
At this point, the session has reached steady state.¶
2.10.12. Session Inactivity Timer
The server MAY maintain a session inactivity timer for
each session. If the session inactivity timer expires,
then the server MAY destroy the session. To avoid losing
a session due to inactivity, the client MUST renew
the session inactivity timer. The length of session
inactivity timer MUST NOT be less than the lease_
2.10.13. Session Mechanics - Recovery
2.10.13.1. Events Requiring Client Action
The following events require client action to recover.¶
2.10.13.1.1. RPCSEC_GSS Context Loss by Callback Path
If all RPCSEC_
2.10.13.1.2. Connection Loss
If the client loses the last connection of the session
and wants to retain the session, then it needs to
create a new connection, and if, when the client
ID was created, BIND_
If there was a request outstanding at the time of connection loss, then if the client wants to continue to use the session, it MUST retry the request, as described in Section 2.10.6.2. Note that it is not necessary to retry requests over a connection with the same source network address or the same destination network address as the lost connection. As long as the session ID, slot ID, and sequence ID in the retry match that of the original request, the server will recognize the request as a retry if it executed the request prior to disconnect.¶
If the connection that was lost was the last one associated with
the backchannel, and the client wants to retain the backchannel and/or
prevent revocation of recallable state, the client needs to
reconnect, and if it does, it
MUST associate the connection to the session and backchannel via
BIND_
2.10.13.1.3. Backchannel GSS Context Loss
Via the sr_
2.10.13.1.4. Loss of Session
The replier might lose a record of the session. Causes include:¶
- Replier failure and restart.¶
-
A catastrophe that causes the reply cache to be corrupted or
lost on the media on which it was stored. This applies
even if the replier indicated in the CREATE_
SESSION results that it would persist the cache.¶ - The server purges the session of a client that has been inactive for a very extended period of time.¶
- As a result of configuration changes among a set of clustered servers, a network address previously connected to one server becomes connected to a different server that has no knowledge of the session in question. Such a configuration change will generally only happen when the original server ceases to function for a time.¶
Loss of reply cache is equivalent to loss of session.
The replier indicates loss of session to the requester
by returning NFS4ERR_
After an event like a server restart, the client may have
lost its connections. The client assumes for the moment
that the session has not been lost. It reconnects, and
if it specified connection association enforcement when
the session was created, it
invokes BIND_
Here is one suggested algorithm for the client when it gets
NFS4ERR_
- If the client has other connections to other server network addresses associated with the same session, attempt a COMPOUND with a single operation, SEQUENCE, on each of the other connections.¶
-
If the attempts succeed, the session is still alive,
and this is a strong indicator that the server's
network address has moved.
The client might send an EXCHANGE_
ID on the connection that returned NFS4ERR_ BADSESSION to see if there are opportunities for client ID trunking (i.e., the same client ID and so_ major_ id value are returned). The client might use DNS to see if the moved network address was replaced with another, so that the performance and availability benefits of session trunking can continue.¶ -
If the SEQUENCE requests fail with NFS4ERR_
BADSESSION, then the session no longer exists on any of the server network addresses for which the client has connections associated with that session ID. It is possible the session is still alive and available on other network addresses. The client sends an EXCHANGE_ ID on all the connections to see if the server owner is still listening on those network addresses. If the same server owner is returned but a new client ID is returned, this is a strong indicator of a server restart. If both the same server owner and same client ID are returned, then this is a strong indication that the server did delete the session, and the client will need to send a CREATE_ SESSION if it has no other sessions for that client ID. If a different server owner is returned, the client can use DNS to find other network addresses. If it does not, or if DNS does not find any other addresses for the server, then the client will be unable to provide NFSv4.1 service, and fatal errors should be returned to processes that were using the server. If the client is using a "mount" paradigm, unmounting the server is advised.¶ - If the client knows of no other connections associated with the session ID and server network addresses that are, or have been, associated with the session ID, then the client can use DNS to find other network addresses. If it does not, or if DNS does not find any other addresses for the server, then the client will be unable to provide NFSv4.1 service, and fatal errors should be returned to processes that were using the server. If the client is using a "mount" paradigm, unmounting the server is advised.¶
If there is a reconfiguration event that results in the
same network address being assigned to servers where the
eir_
A variation on the above is that after a server's network
address moves, there is no NFSv4.1 server listening, e.g., no
listener on port 2049. In this example, one of the following occur: the NFSv4 server returns
NFS4ERR_
When the client detects session loss, it needs to call CREATE_
Note that loss of session does not imply loss of byte-range lock, open, delegation, or layout state because locks, opens, delegations, and layouts are tied to the client ID and depend on the client ID, not the session. Nor does loss of byte-range lock, open, delegation, or layout state imply loss of session state, because the session depends on the client ID; loss of client ID however does imply loss of session, byte-range lock, open, delegation, and layout state. See Section 8.4.2. A session can survive a server restart, but lock recovery may still be needed.¶
It is possible that CREATE_
2.10.13.2. Events Requiring Server Action
The following events require server action to recover.¶
2.10.13.2.1. Client Crash and Restart
As described in Section 18.35,
a restarted client sends EXCHANGE_
2.10.13.2.2. Client Crash with No Restart
If a client crashes and never comes back, it will never send
EXCHANGE_
2.10.13.2.3. Extended Network Partition
To the server, the extended network partition may be no different from a client crash with no restart (see Section 2.10.13.2.2). Unless the server can discern that there is a network partition, it is free to treat the situation as if the client has crashed permanently.¶
2.10.13.2.4. Backchannel Connection Loss
If there were callback requests outstanding at the time of a connection loss, then the server MUST retry the requests, as described in Section 2.10.6.2. Note that it is not necessary to retry requests over a connection with the same source network address or the same destination network address as the lost connection. As long as the session ID, slot ID, and sequence ID in the retry match that of the original request, the callback target will recognize the request as a retry even if it did see the request prior to disconnect.¶
If the connection lost is the last one associated with the backchannel,
then the server MUST indicate that in the sr_
2.10.13.2.5. GSS Context Loss
The server SHOULD monitor when the number of RPCSEC_
2.10.14. Parallel NFS and Sessions
A client and server can potentially be a non-pNFS implementation,
a metadata server implementation, a data server implementation, or two or
three types of implementations
3. Protocol Constants and Data Types
The syntax and semantics to describe the data types of the NFSv4.1 protocol are defined in the XDR (RFC 4506 [2]) and RPC (RFC 5531 [3]) documents. The next sections build upon the XDR data types to define constants, types, and structures specific to this protocol. The full list of XDR data types is in [10].¶
3.1. Basic Constants
const NFS4_FHSIZE = 128; const NFS4_VERIFIER_SIZE = 8; const NFS4_OPAQUE_LIMIT = 1024; const NFS4_SESSIONID_SIZE = 16; const NFS4_INT64_MAX = 0x7fffffffffffffff; const NFS4_UINT64_MAX = 0xffffffffffffffff; const NFS4_INT32_MAX = 0x7fffffff; const NFS4_UINT32_MAX = 0xffffffff; const NFS4_MAXFILELEN = 0xffffffffffffffff; const NFS4_MAXFILEOFF = 0xfffffffffffffffe;
Except where noted, all these constants are defined in bytes.¶
-
NFS4_
FHSIZE is the maximum size of a filehandle.¶ -
NFS4_
VERIFIER_ SIZE is the fixed size of a verifier.¶ -
NFS4_
OPAQUE_ LIMIT is the maximum size of certain opaque information.¶ -
NFS4_
SESSIONID_ SIZE is the fixed size of a session identifier.¶ -
NFS4_
INT64_ MAX is the maximum value of a signed 64-bit integer.¶ -
NFS4_
UINT64_ MAX is the maximum value of an unsigned 64-bit integer.¶ -
NFS4_
INT32_ MAX is the maximum value of a signed 32-bit integer.¶ -
NFS4_
UINT32_ MAX is the maximum value of an unsigned 32-bit integer.¶ -
NFS4_
MAXFILELEN is the maximum length of a regular file.¶ -
NFS4_
MAXFILEOFF is the maximum offset into a regular file.¶
3.2. Basic Data Types
These are the base NFSv4.1 data types.¶
| Data Type | Definition |
|---|---|
| int32_ |
typedef int int32_ |
| uint32_ |
typedef unsigned int uint32_ |
| int64_ |
typedef hyper int64_ |
| uint64_ |
typedef unsigned hyper uint64_ |
| attrlist4 |
typedef opaque attrlist4<>;¶ Used for file/directory attributes.¶ |
| bitmap4 |
typedef uint32_ Used in attribute array encoding.¶ |
| changeid4 |
typedef uint64_ Used in the definition of change_ |
| clientid4 |
typedef uint64_ Shorthand reference to client identification.¶ |
| count4 |
typedef uint32_ Various count parameters (READ, WRITE, COMMIT).¶ |
| length4 |
typedef uint64_ The length of a byte-range within a file.¶ |
| mode4 |
typedef uint32_ Mode attribute data type.¶ |
| nfs_ |
typedef uint64_ Opaque cookie value for READDIR.¶ |
| nfs_ |
typedef opaque nfs_ Filehandle definition.¶ |
| nfs_ |
enum nfs_ Various defined file types.¶ |
| nfsstat4 |
enum nfsstat4;¶ Return value for operations.¶ |
| offset4 |
typedef uint64_ Various offset designations (READ, WRITE, LOCK, COMMIT).¶ |
| qop4 |
typedef uint32_ Quality of protection designation in SECINFO.¶ |
| sec_ |
typedef opaque sec_ Security Object Identifier. The sec_ |
| sequenceid4 |
typedef uint32_ Sequence number used for various session operations
|
| seqid4 |
typedef uint32_ Sequence identifier used for locking.¶ |
| sessionid4 |
typedef opaque sessionid4[NFS4 Session identifier.¶ |
| slotid4 |
typedef uint32_ Sequencing artifact for various session operations
(SEQUENCE, CB_ |
| utf8string |
typedef opaque utf8string<>;¶ UTF-8 encoding for strings.¶ |
| utf8str_ |
typedef utf8string utf8str_ Case-insensitive UTF-8 string.¶ |
| utf8str_ |
typedef utf8string utf8str_ Case-sensitive UTF-8 string.¶ |
| utf8str_ |
typedef utf8string utf8str_ UTF-8 strings with a case-sensitive prefix and a
case |
| component4 |
typedef utf8str_ Represents pathname components.¶ |
| linktext4 |
typedef utf8str_ Symbolic link contents ("symbolic link" is defined in an Open Group [11] standard).¶ |
| pathname4 |
typedef component4 pathname4<>;¶ Represents pathname for fs_ |
| verifier4 |
typedef opaque verifier4[NFS4_ Verifier used for various operations (COMMIT, CREATE,
EXCHANGE_ |
End of Base Data Types¶
3.3. Structured Data Types
3.3.1. nfstime4
struct nfstime4 {
int64_t seconds;
uint32_t nseconds;
};
The nfstime4 data type gives the number of seconds and nanoseconds since midnight or zero hour January 1, 1970 Coordinated Universal Time (UTC). Values greater than zero for the seconds field denote dates after the zero hour January 1, 1970. Values less than zero for the seconds field denote dates before the zero hour January 1, 1970. In both cases, the nseconds field is to be added to the seconds field for the final time representation. For example, if the time to be represented is one-half second before zero hour January 1, 1970, the seconds field would have a value of negative one (-1) and the nseconds field would have a value of one-half second (500000000). Values greater than 999,999,999 for nseconds are invalid.¶
This data type is used to pass time and date information. A server converts to and from its local representation of time when processing time values, preserving as much accuracy as possible. If the precision of timestamps stored for a file system object is less than defined, loss of precision can occur. An adjunct time maintenance protocol is RECOMMENDED to reduce client and server time skew.¶
3.3.3. settime4
union settime4 switch (time_how4 set_it) {
case SET_TO_CLIENT_TIME4:
nfstime4 time;
default:
void;
};
The time_
3.3.4. specdata4
struct specdata4 {
uint32_t specdata1; /* major device number */
uint32_t specdata2; /* minor device number */
};
This data type represents the device numbers for the device file types NF4CHR and NF4BLK.¶
3.3.6. change_policy4
struct change_policy4 {
uint64_t cp_major;
uint64_t cp_minor;
};
The change_
3.3.7. fattr4
struct fattr4 {
bitmap4 attrmask;
attrlist4 attr_vals;
};
The fattr4 data type is used to represent file and directory attributes.¶
The bitmap is a counted array of 32-bit integers used to contain bit values. The position of the integer in the array that contains bit n can be computed from the expression (n / 32), and its bit within that integer is (n mod 32).¶
0 1 +-----------+-----------+-----------+-- | count | 31 .. 0 | 63 .. 32 | +-----------+-----------+-----------+--
3.3.8. change_info4
struct change_info4 {
bool atomic;
changeid4 before;
changeid4 after;
};
This data type is used with the CREATE, LINK, OPEN, REMOVE, and RENAME operations to let the client know the value of the change attribute for the directory in which the target file system object resides.¶
3.3.9. netaddr4
struct netaddr4 {
/* see struct rpcb in RFC 1833 */
string na_r_netid<>; /* network id */
string na_r_addr<>; /* universal address */
};
The netaddr4 data type is used to identify network transport endpoints.
The na_
3.3.10. state_owner4
struct state_owner4 {
clientid4 clientid;
opaque owner<NFS4_OPAQUE_LIMIT>;
};
typedef state_owner4 open_owner4;
typedef state_owner4 lock_owner4;
The state_
3.3.10.1. open_owner4
This data type is used to identify the owner of OPEN state.¶
3.3.10.2. lock_owner4
This structure is used to identify the owner of byte-range locking state.¶
3.3.11. open_to_lock_owner4
struct open_to_lock_owner4 {
seqid4 open_seqid;
stateid4 open_stateid;
seqid4 lock_seqid;
lock_owner4 lock_owner;
};
This data type is used for the first LOCK operation done for
an open_
3.3.12. stateid4
struct stateid4 {
uint32_t seqid;
opaque other[12];
};
This data type is used for the various state sharing mechanisms between the client and server. The client never modifies a value of data type stateid. The starting value of the "seqid" field is undefined. The server is required to increment the "seqid" field by one at each transition of the stateid. This is important since the client will inspect the seqid in OPEN stateids to determine the order of OPEN processing done by the server.¶
3.3.13. layouttype4
enum layouttype4 {
LAYOUT4_NFSV4_1_FILES = 0x1,
LAYOUT4_OSD2_OBJECTS = 0x2,
LAYOUT4_BLOCK_VOLUME = 0x3
};
This data type indicates what type of layout is being used.
The file server advertises the
layout types it supports through the fs_
The layouttype4 data type is 32 bits in length. The range
represented by the layout type is split into three parts. Type
0x0 is reserved. Types
within the range 0x00000001
The LAYOUT4_
3.3.14. deviceid4
const NFS4_DEVICEID4_SIZE = 16; typedef opaque deviceid4[NFS4_DEVICEID4_SIZE];
Layout information includes device IDs that specify a storage device through a compact handle. Addressing and type information is obtained with the GETDEVICEINFO operation. Device IDs are not guaranteed to be valid across metadata server restarts. A device ID is unique per client ID and layout type. See Section 12.2.10 for more details.¶
3.3.15. device_addr4
struct device_addr4 {
layouttype4 da_layout_type;
opaque da_addr_body<>;
};
The device address is used to set up a communication channel
with the storage device. Different layout types will require
different data types to define how they communicate
with storage devices. The opaque da_
This document defines the device address for the NFSv4.1 file layout (see Section 13.3), which identifies a storage device by network IP address and port number. This is sufficient for the clients to communicate with the NFSv4.1 storage devices, and may be sufficient for other layout types as well. Device types for object-based storage devices and block storage devices (e.g., Small Computer System Interface (SCSI) volume labels) are defined by their respective layout specifications.¶
3.3.16. layout_content4
struct layout_content4 {
layouttype4 loc_type;
opaque loc_body<>;
};
The loc_
3.3.17. layout4
struct layout4 {
offset4 lo_offset;
length4 lo_length;
layoutiomode4 lo_iomode;
layout_content4 lo_content;
};
The layout4 data type defines a layout for a file. The layout
type specific data is opaque within lo_
3.3.18. layoutupdate4
struct layoutupdate4 {
layouttype4 lou_type;
opaque lou_body<>;
};
The layoutupdate4 data type is used by the client to return
updated layout information to the metadata server via the
LAYOUTCOMMIT (Section 18.42) operation.
This data type provides a channel to pass
layout type specific information (in field lou_
3.3.19. layouthint4
struct layouthint4 {
layouttype4 loh_type;
opaque loh_body<>;
};
The layouthint4 data type is used by the client to pass in a
hint about the type of layout it would like created for a particular
file. It is the data type specified by the layout_
3.3.20. layoutiomode4
enum layoutiomode4 {
LAYOUTIOMODE4_READ = 1,
LAYOUTIOMODE4_RW = 2,
LAYOUTIOMODE4_ANY = 3
};
The iomode specifies whether the client intends to just read or both
read and write the data represented by the
layout. While the LAYOUTIOMODE4_
3.3.21. nfs_impl_id4
struct nfs_impl_id4 {
utf8str_cis nii_domain;
utf8str_cs nii_name;
nfstime4 nii_date;
};
This data type is used to identify client and server
implementation details. The nii_
3.3.22. threshold_item4
struct threshold_item4 {
layouttype4 thi_layout_type;
bitmap4 thi_hintset;
opaque thi_hintlist<>;
};
This data type contains a list of hints specific to
a layout type for helping the client determine when
it should send I/O directly through the metadata
server versus the storage devices. The data type
consists of the layout type
The thi_
| name | # | Data Type | Description |
|---|---|---|---|
| threshold4_ |
0 | length4 |
If a file's length is less than the value of threshold4_ |
| threshold4_ |
1 | length4 |
If a file's length is less than the value of threshold4_ |
| threshold4_ |
2 | length4 | For read I/O sizes below this threshold, it is RECOMMENDED to read data through the MDS. |
| threshold4_ |
3 | length4 | For write I/O sizes below this threshold, it is RECOMMENDED to write data through the MDS. |
3.3.23. mdsthreshold4
struct mdsthreshold4 {
threshold_item4 mth_hints<>;
};
This data type holds an array of elements of data type
threshold_
4. Filehandles
The filehandle in the NFS protocol is a per-server unique identifier for a file system object. The contents of the filehandle are opaque to the client. Therefore, the server is responsible for translating the filehandle to an internal representation of the file system object.¶
4.1. Obtaining the First Filehandle
The operations of the NFS protocol are defined in terms of one or more filehandles. Therefore, the client needs a filehandle to initiate communication with the server. With the NFSv3 protocol (RFC 1813 [38]), there exists an ancillary protocol to obtain this first filehandle. The MOUNT protocol, RPC program number 100005, provides the mechanism of translating a string-based file system pathname to a filehandle, which can then be used by the NFS protocols.¶
The MOUNT protocol has deficiencies in the area of security and use via firewalls. This is one reason that the use of the public filehandle was introduced in RFC 2054 [49] and RFC 2055 [50]. With the use of the public filehandle in combination with the LOOKUP operation in the NFSv3 protocol, it has been demonstrated that the MOUNT protocol is unnecessary for viable interaction between NFS client and server.¶
Therefore, the NFSv4.1 protocol will not use an ancillary protocol for translation from string-based pathnames to a filehandle. Two special filehandles will be used as starting points for the NFS client.¶
4.1.1. Root Filehandle
The first of the special filehandles is the ROOT filehandle. The ROOT filehandle is the "conceptual" root of the file system namespace at the NFS server. The client uses or starts with the ROOT filehandle by employing the PUTROOTFH operation. The PUTROOTFH operation instructs the server to set the "current" filehandle to the ROOT of the server's file tree. Once this PUTROOTFH operation is used, the client can then traverse the entirety of the server's file tree with the LOOKUP operation. A complete discussion of the server namespace is in Section 7.¶
4.1.2. Public Filehandle
The second special filehandle is the PUBLIC filehandle. Unlike the ROOT filehandle, the PUBLIC filehandle may be bound or represent an arbitrary file system object at the server. The server is responsible for this binding. It may be that the PUBLIC filehandle and the ROOT filehandle refer to the same file system object. However, it is up to the administrative software at the server and the policies of the server administrator to define the binding of the PUBLIC filehandle and server file system object. The client may not make any assumptions about this binding. The client uses the PUBLIC filehandle via the PUTPUBFH operation.¶
4.2. Filehandle Types
In the NFSv3 protocol, there was one type of filehandle with a single set of semantics. This type of filehandle is termed "persistent" in NFSv4.1. The semantics of a persistent filehandle remain the same as before. A new type of filehandle introduced in NFSv4.1 is the "volatile" filehandle, which attempts to accommodate certain server environments.¶
The volatile filehandle type was introduced to address server
functionality or implementation issues that make correct
implementation of a persistent filehandle infeasible. Some server
environments do not provide a file
Since the client will need to handle persistent and volatile filehandles differently, a file attribute is defined that may be used by the client to determine the filehandle types being returned by the server.¶
4.2.1. General Properties of a Filehandle
The filehandle contains all the information the server needs to distinguish an individual file. To the client, the filehandle is opaque. The client stores filehandles for use in a later request and can compare two filehandles from the same server for equality by doing a byte-by-byte comparison. However, the client MUST NOT otherwise interpret the contents of filehandles. If two filehandles from the same server are equal, they MUST refer to the same file. Servers SHOULD try to maintain a one-to-one correspondence between filehandles and files, but this is not required. Clients MUST use filehandle comparisons only to improve performance, not for correct behavior. All clients need to be prepared for situations in which it cannot be determined whether two filehandles denote the same object and in such cases, avoid making invalid assumptions that might cause incorrect behavior. Further discussion of filehandle and attribute comparison in the context of data caching is presented in Section 10.3.4.¶
As an example, in the case that two different pathnames when traversed at the server terminate at the same file system object, the server SHOULD return the same filehandle for each path. This can occur if a hard link (see [6]) is used to create two file names that refer to the same underlying file object and associated data. For example, if paths /a/b/c and /a/d/c refer to the same file, the server SHOULD return the same filehandle for both pathnames' traversals.¶
4.2.2. Persistent Filehandle
A persistent filehandle is defined as having a fixed value for the lifetime of the file system object to which it refers. Once the server creates the filehandle for a file system object, the server MUST accept the same filehandle for the object for the lifetime of the object. If the server restarts, the NFS server MUST honor the same filehandle value as it did in the server's previous instantiation. Similarly, if the file system is migrated, the new NFS server MUST honor the same filehandle as the old NFS server.¶
The persistent filehandle will be become stale or invalid when the
file system object is removed. When the server is presented with a
persistent filehandle that refers to a deleted object, it MUST return
an error of NFS4ERR_
4.2.3. Volatile Filehandle
A volatile filehandle does not share the same longevity
characteristics of a persistent filehandle. The server may
determine that a volatile filehandle is no longer valid at many
different points in time. If the server can definitively determine
that a volatile filehandle refers to an object that has been removed,
the server should return NFS4ERR_
The REQUIRED attribute "fh_
- FH4_
PERSISTENT -
The value of FH4_
PERSISTENT is used to indicate a persistent filehandle, which is valid until the object is removed from the file system. The server will not return NFS4ERR_ FHEXPIRED for this filehandle. FH4_ PERSISTENT is defined as a value in which none of the bits specified below are set.¶ - FH4_
VOLATILE_ ANY -
The filehandle may expire at any time, except as specifically
excluded (i.e., FH4_
NO_ EXPIRE_ WITH_ OPEN ).¶ - FH4_
NOEXPIRE_ WITH_ OPEN -
May only be set when FH4_
VOLATILE_ ANY is set. If this bit is set, then the meaning of FH4_ VOLATILE_ ANY is qualified to exclude any expiration of the filehandle when it is open.¶ - FH4_
VOL_ MIGRATION -
The filehandle will expire as a result of a file system
transition (migration or replication), in those cases in
which the continuity of filehandle use is not specified by
handle class information
within the fs_
locations_ info attribute. When this bit is set, clients without access to fs_ locations_ info information should assume that filehandles will expire on file system transitions.¶ - FH4_
VOL_ RENAME -
The filehandle will expire during rename. This includes a rename by
the requesting client or a rename by any other client. If FH4_
VOL_ ANY is set, FH4_ VOL_ RENAME is redundant.¶
Servers that provide volatile filehandles that can expire
while open require special care as regards handling of RENAMEs
and REMOVEs. This situation can arise if FH4_
Volatile filehandles are especially suitable for implementation of the pseudo file systems used to bridge exports. See Section 7.5 for a discussion of this.¶
4.3. One Method of Constructing a Volatile Filehandle
A volatile filehandle, while opaque to the client, could contain:¶
[volatile bit = 1 | server boot time | slot | generation number]
- slot is an index in the server volatile filehandle table¶
- generation number is the generation number for the table entry/slot¶
When the client presents a volatile filehandle, the server makes the
following checks, which assume that the check for the volatile bit has
passed. If the server boot time is less than the current server boot
time, return NFS4ERR_
When the server restarts, the table is gone (it is volatile).¶
If the volatile bit is 0, then it is a persistent filehandle with a different structure following it.¶
4.4. Client Recovery from Filehandle Expiration
If possible, the client SHOULD recover from the receipt of an
NFS4ERR_
For volatile filehandles, most commonly the client will need to store the component names leading up to and including the file system object in question. With these names, the client should be able to recover by finding a filehandle in the namespace that is still available or by starting at the root of the server's file system namespace.¶
If the expired filehandle refers to an object that has been removed from the file system, obviously the client will not be able to recover from the expired filehandle.¶
It is also possible that the expired filehandle refers to a file that has been renamed. If the file was renamed by another client, again it is possible that the original client will not be able to recover. However, in the case that the client itself is renaming the file and the file is open, it is possible that the client may be able to recover. The client can determine the new pathname based on the processing of the rename request. The client can then regenerate the new filehandle based on the new pathname. The client could also use the COMPOUND procedure to construct a series of operations like:¶
RENAME A B
LOOKUP B
GETFH
Note that the COMPOUND procedure does not provide atomicity. This example only reduces the overhead of recovering from an expired filehandle.¶
5. File Attributes
To meet the requirements of extensibility and increased
interoperabilit
To this end, attributes are divided into three groups: REQUIRED, RECOMMENDED, and named. Both REQUIRED and RECOMMENDED attributes are supported in the NFSv4.1 protocol by a specific and well-defined encoding and are identified by number. They are requested by setting a bit in the bit vector sent in the GETATTR request; the server response includes a bit vector to list what attributes were returned in the response. New REQUIRED or RECOMMENDED attributes may be added to the NFSv4 protocol as part of a new minor version by publishing a Standards Track RFC that allocates a new attribute number value and defines the encoding for the attribute. See Section 2.7 for further discussion.¶
Named attributes are accessed by the new OPENATTR operation, which accesses a hidden directory of attributes associated with a file system object. OPENATTR takes a filehandle for the object and returns the filehandle for the attribute hierarchy. The filehandle for the named attributes is a directory object accessible by LOOKUP or READDIR and contains files whose names represent the named attributes and whose data bytes are the value of the attribute. For example:¶
| LOOKUP | "foo" | ; look up file |
| GETATTR | attrbits | |
| OPENATTR | ; access foo's named attributes | |
| LOOKUP | "x11icon" | ; look up specific attribute |
| READ | 0,4096 | ; read stream of bytes |
Named attributes are intended for data needed by applications rather than by an NFS client implementation. NFS implementors are strongly encouraged to define their new attributes as RECOMMENDED attributes by bringing them to the IETF Standards Track process.¶
The set of attributes that are classified as REQUIRED is deliberately small since servers need to do whatever it takes to support them. A server should support as many of the RECOMMENDED attributes as possible but, by their definition, the server is not required to support all of them. Attributes are deemed REQUIRED if the data is both needed by a large number of clients and is not otherwise reasonably computable by the client when support is not provided on the server.¶
Note that the hidden directory returned by OPENATTR is a convenience for protocol processing. The client should not make any assumptions about the server's implementation of named attributes and whether or not the underlying file system at the server has a named attribute directory. Therefore, operations such as SETATTR and GETATTR on the named attribute directory are undefined.¶
5.1. REQUIRED Attributes
These MUST be supported by every NFSv4.1 client and server in
order to ensure a minimum level of interoperabilit
5.2. RECOMMENDED Attributes
These attributes are understood well enough to warrant support in the NFSv4.1 protocol. However, they may not be supported on all clients and servers. A client may ask for any of these attributes to be returned by setting a bit in the GETATTR request but must handle the case where the server does not return them. A client MAY ask for the set of attributes the server supports and SHOULD NOT request attributes the server does not support. A server should be tolerant of requests for unsupported attributes and simply not return them rather than considering the request an error. It is expected that servers will support all attributes they comfortably can and only fail to support attributes that are difficult to support in their operating environments. A server should provide attributes whenever they don't have to "tell lies" to the client. For example, a file modification time should be either an accurate time or should not be supported by the server. At times this will be difficult for clients, but a client is better positioned to decide whether and how to fabricate or construct an attribute or whether to do without the attribute.¶
5.3. Named Attributes
These attributes are not supported by direct encoding in the NFSv4 protocol but are accessed by string names rather than numbers and correspond to an uninterpreted stream of bytes that are stored with the file system object. The namespace for these attributes may be accessed by using the OPENATTR operation. The OPENATTR operation returns a filehandle for a virtual "named attribute directory", and further perusal and modification of the namespace may be done using operations that work on more typical directories. In particular, READDIR may be used to get a list of such named attributes, and LOOKUP and OPEN may select a particular attribute. Creation of a new named attribute may be the result of an OPEN specifying file creation.¶
Once an OPEN is done, named attributes may be examined and changed by normal READ and WRITE operations using the filehandles and stateids returned by OPEN.¶
Named attributes and the named attribute directory may have their own (non-named) attributes. Each of these objects MUST have all of the REQUIRED attributes and may have additional RECOMMENDED attributes. However, the set of attributes for named attributes and the named attribute directory need not be, and typically will not be, as large as that for other objects in that file system.¶
Named attributes and the named attribute directory might be the target of delegations (in the case of the named attribute directory, these will be directory delegations). However, since granting of delegations is at the server's discretion, a server need not support delegations on named attributes or the named attribute directory.¶
It is RECOMMENDED that servers support arbitrary named attributes. A client should not depend on the ability to store any named attributes in the server's file system. If a server does support named attributes, a client that is also able to handle them should be able to copy a file's data and metadata with complete transparency from one location to another; this would imply that names allowed for regular directory entries are valid for named attribute names as well.¶
In NFSv4.1, the structure of named attribute directories is
restricted in a number of ways, in order to prevent the development
of non
- CREATE is not allowed in a named attribute directory. Thus, such objects as symbolic links and special files are not allowed to be named attributes. Further, directories may not be created in a named attribute directory, so no hierarchical structure of named attributes for a single object is allowed.¶
-
If OPENATTR is done on a named attribute directory or on
a named attribute, the server MUST return NFS4ERR_
WRONG_ TYPE .¶ -
Doing a RENAME of a named attribute to a different named
attribute directory or to an ordinary (i.e., non
-named -attribute ) directory is not allowed.¶ - Creating hard links between named attribute directories or between named attribute directories and ordinary directories is not allowed.¶
Names of attributes will not be controlled by this document or other IETF Standards Track documents. See Section 22.2 for further discussion.¶
5.4. Classification of Attributes
Each of the REQUIRED and RECOMMENDED attributes can be classified in
one of three categories: per server (i.e., the value of the attribute will
be the same for all file objects that share the same
server owner; see Section 2.5 for a definition of server
owner), per file system (i.e., the value of the attribute will
be the same for some or all file objects that share the
same fsid attribute (Section 5.8.1.9) and
server owner), or per file system
object. Note that it is possible that some per file system attributes
may vary within the file system, depending on the value of
the "homogeneous" (Section 5.8.2.16)
attribute. Note that the attributes time_
-
The per-server attribute is:¶
-
lease_
time¶
-
lease_
-
The per-file system attributes are:¶
-
supported_
attrs, suppattr_ exclcreat, fh_ expire_ type, link_ support, symlink_ support, unique_ handles, aclsupport, cansettime, case_ insensitive, case_ preserving, chown_ restricted, files_ avail, files_ free, files_ total, fs_ locations, homogeneous, maxfilesize, maxname, maxread, maxwrite, no_ trunc, space_ avail, space_ free, space_ total, time_ delta, change_ policy, fs_ status, fs_ layout_ type, fs_ locations_ info, fs_ charset_ cap¶
-
supported_
-
The per-file system object attributes are:¶
-
type, change, size, named_
attr, fsid, rdattr_ error, filehandle, acl, archive, fileid, hidden, maxlink, mimetype, mode, numlinks, owner, owner_ group, rawdev, space_ used, system, time_ access, time_ backup, time_ create, time_ metadata, time_ modify, mounted_ on_ fileid, dir_ notif_ delay, dirent_ notif_ delay, dacl, sacl, layout_ type, layout_ hint, layout_ blksize, layout_ alignment, mdsthreshold, retention_ get, retention_ set, retentevt_ get, retentevt_ set, retention_ hold, mode_ set_ masked¶
-
type, change, size, named_
For quota_
5.5. Set-Only and Get-Only Attributes
Some REQUIRED and RECOMMENDED attributes are set-only; i.e., they
can be set via SETATTR but not retrieved via GETATTR. Similarly, some
REQUIRED and RECOMMENDED attributes are get-only; i.e., they
can be retrieved via GETATTR but not set via SETATTR. If a client attempts
to set a get-only attribute or get a set-only attributes, the server
MUST return NFS4ERR_
5.6. REQUIRED Attributes - List and Definition References
The list of REQUIRED attributes appears in Table 4. The meaning of the columns of the table are:¶
- Name:
- The name of the attribute.¶
- Id:
- The number assigned to the attribute. In the event of conflicts between the assigned number and [10], the latter is likely authoritative, but should be resolved with Errata to this document and/or [10]. See [51] for the Errata process.¶
- Data Type:
- The XDR data type of the attribute.¶
- Acc:
- Access allowed to the attribute. R means read-only (GETATTR may retrieve, SETATTR may not set). W means write-only (SETATTR may set, GETATTR may not retrieve). R W means read/write (GETATTR may retrieve, SETATTR may set).¶
- Defined in:
- The section of this specification that describes the attribute.¶
| Name | Id | Data Type | Acc | Defined in: |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| supported_ |
0 | bitmap4 | R | Section 5.8.1.1 |
| type | 1 | nfs_ |
R | Section 5.8.1.2 |
| fh_ |
2 | uint32_ |
R | Section 5.8.1.3 |
| change | 3 | uint64_ |
R | Section 5.8.1.4 |
| size | 4 | uint64_ |
R W | Section 5.8.1.5 |
| link_ |
5 | bool | R | Section 5.8.1.6 |
| symlink_ |
6 | bool | R | Section 5.8.1.7 |
| named_ |
7 | bool | R | Section 5.8.1.8 |
| fsid | 8 | fsid4 | R | Section 5.8.1.9 |
| unique_ |
9 | bool | R | Section 5.8.1.10 |
| lease_ |
10 | nfs_ |
R | Section 5.8.1.11 |
| rdattr_ |
11 | enum | R | Section 5.8.1.12 |
| filehandle | 19 | nfs_ |
R | Section 5.8.1.13 |
| suppattr_ |
75 | bitmap4 | R | Section 5.8.1.14 |
5.7. RECOMMENDED Attributes - List and Definition References
The RECOMMENDED attributes are defined in Table 5. The meanings of the column headers are the same as Table 4; see Section 5.6 for the meanings.¶
| Name | Id | Data Type | Acc | Defined in: |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| acl | 12 | nfsace4<> | R W | Section 6.2.1 |
| aclsupport | 13 | uint32_ |
R | Section 6.2.1.2 |
| archive | 14 | bool | R W | Section 5.8.2.1 |
| cansettime | 15 | bool | R | Section 5.8.2.2 |
| case_ |
16 | bool | R | Section 5.8.2.3 |
| case_ |
17 | bool | R | Section 5.8.2.4 |
| change_ |
60 | chg_ |
R | Section 5.8.2.5 |
| chown_ |
18 | bool | R | Section 5.8.2.6 |
| dacl | 58 | nfsacl41 | R W | Section 6.2.2 |
| dir_ |
56 | nfstime4 | R | Section 5.11.1 |
| dirent_ |
57 | nfstime4 | R | Section 5.11.2 |
| fileid | 20 | uint64_ |
R | Section 5.8.2.7 |
| files_ |
21 | uint64_ |
R | Section 5.8.2.8 |
| files_ |
22 | uint64_ |
R | Section 5.8.2.9 |
| files_ |
23 | uint64_ |
R | Section 5.8.2.10 |
| fs_ |
76 | uint32_ |
R | Section 5.8.2.11 |
| fs_ |
62 | layouttype4<> | R | Section 5.12.1 |
| fs_ |
24 | fs_ |
R | Section 5.8.2.12 |
| fs_ |
67 | fs_ |
R | Section 5.8.2.13 |
| fs_ |
61 | fs4_ |
R | Section 5.8.2.14 |
| hidden | 25 | bool | R W | Section 5.8.2.15 |
| homogeneous | 26 | bool | R | Section 5.8.2.16 |
| layout_ |
66 | uint32_ |
R | Section 5.12.2 |
| layout_ |
65 | uint32_ |
R | Section 5.12.3 |
| layout_ |
63 | layouthint4 | W | Section 5.12.4 |
| layout_ |
64 | layouttype4<> | R | Section 5.12.5 |
| maxfilesize | 27 | uint64_ |
R | Section 5.8.2.17 |
| maxlink | 28 | uint32_ |
R | Section 5.8.2.18 |
| maxname | 29 | uint32_ |
R | Section 5.8.2.19 |
| maxread | 30 | uint64_ |
R | Section 5.8.2.20 |
| maxwrite | 31 | uint64_ |
R | Section 5.8.2.21 |
| mdsthreshold | 68 | mdsthreshold4 | R | Section 5.12.6 |
| mimetype | 32 | utf8str_ |
R W | Section 5.8.2.22 |
| mode | 33 | mode4 | R W | Section 6.2.4 |
| mode_ |
74 | mode_ |
W | Section 6.2.5 |
| mounted_ |
55 | uint64_ |
R | Section 5.8.2.23 |
| no_ |
34 | bool | R | Section 5.8.2.24 |
| numlinks | 35 | uint32_ |
R | Section 5.8.2.25 |
| owner | 36 | utf8str_ |
R W | Section 5.8.2.26 |
| owner_ |
37 | utf8str_ |
R W | Section 5.8.2.27 |
| quota_ |
38 | uint64_ |
R | Section 5.8.2.28 |
| quota_ |
39 | uint64_ |
R | Section 5.8.2.29 |
| quota_ |
40 | uint64_ |
R | Section 5.8.2.30 |
| rawdev | 41 | specdata4 | R | Section 5.8.2.31 |
| retentevt_ |
71 | retention_ |
R | Section 5.13.3 |
| retentevt_ |
72 | retention_ |
W | Section 5.13.4 |
| retention_ |
69 | retention_ |
R | Section 5.13.1 |
| retention_ |
73 | uint64_ |
R W | Section 5.13.5 |
| retention_ |
70 | retention_ |
W | Section 5.13.2 |
| sacl | 59 | nfsacl41 | R W | Section 6.2.3 |
| space_ |
42 | uint64_ |
R | Section 5.8.2.32 |
| space_ |
43 | uint64_ |
R | Section 5.8.2.33 |
| space_ |
44 | uint64_ |
R | Section 5.8.2.34 |
| space_ |
45 | uint64_ |
R | Section 5.8.2.35 |
| system | 46 | bool | R W | Section 5.8.2.36 |
| time_ |
47 | nfstime4 | R | Section 5.8.2.37 |
| time_ |
48 | settime4 | W | Section 5.8.2.38 |
| time_ |
49 | nfstime4 | R W | Section 5.8.2.39 |
| time_ |
50 | nfstime4 | R W | Section 5.8.2.40 |
| time_ |
51 | nfstime4 | R | Section 5.8.2.41 |
| time_ |
52 | nfstime4 | R | Section 5.8.2.42 |
| time_ |
53 | nfstime4 | R | Section 5.8.2.43 |
| time_ |
54 | settime4 | W | Section 5.8.2.44 |
5.8. Attribute Definitions
5.8.1. Definitions of REQUIRED Attributes
5.8.1.1. Attribute 0: supported_attrs
The bit vector that would retrieve all REQUIRED and RECOMMENDED attributes that are supported for this object. The scope of this attribute applies to all objects with a matching fsid.¶
5.8.1.2. Attribute 1: type
Designates the type of an object in terms of one of a number of special constants:¶
- NF4REG designates a regular file.¶
- NF4DIR designates a directory.¶
- NF4BLK designates a block device special file.¶
- NF4CHR designates a character device special file.¶
- NF4LNK designates a symbolic link.¶
- NF4SOCK designates a named socket special file.¶
- NF4FIFO designates a fifo special file.¶
- NF4ATTRDIR designates a named attribute directory.¶
- NF4NAMEDATTR designates a named attribute.¶
Within the explanatory text and operation descriptions, the following phrases will be used with the meanings given below:¶
- The phrase "is a directory" means that the object's type attribute is NF4DIR or NF4ATTRDIR.¶
- The phrase "is a special file" means that the object's type attribute is NF4BLK, NF4CHR, NF4SOCK, or NF4FIFO.¶
- The phrases "is an ordinary file" and "is a regular file" mean that the object's type attribute is NF4REG or NF4NAMEDATTR.¶
5.8.1.3. Attribute 2: fh_expire_type
Server uses this to specify filehandle expiration behavior to the client. See Section 4 for additional description.¶
5.8.1.4. Attribute 3: change
A value created by the server that the client can use to
determine if file data, directory contents, or attributes of
the object have been modified. The server may return the
object's time_
5.8.1.5. Attribute 4: size
The size of the object in bytes.¶
5.8.1.6. Attribute 5: link_support
TRUE, if the object's file system supports hard links.¶
5.8.1.7. Attribute 6: symlink_support
TRUE, if the object's file system supports symbolic links.¶
5.8.1.8. Attribute 7: named_attr
TRUE, if this object has named attributes. In other words, object has a non-empty named attribute directory.¶
5.8.1.9. Attribute 8: fsid
Unique file system identifier for the file system holding this
object. The fsid attribute has major and minor components, each of
which are of data type uint64_
5.8.1.10. Attribute 9: unique_handles
TRUE, if two distinct filehandles are guaranteed to refer to two different file system objects.¶
5.8.1.11. Attribute 10: lease_time
Duration of the lease at server in seconds.¶
5.8.1.12. Attribute 11: rdattr_error
Error returned from an attempt to retrieve attributes during a READDIR operation.¶
5.8.1.13. Attribute 19: filehandle
The filehandle of this object (primarily for READDIR requests).¶
5.8.1.14. Attribute 75: suppattr_exclcreat
The bit vector that would set all REQUIRED and
RECOMMENDED attributes that are supported by the EXCLUSIVE4_
5.8.2. Definitions of Uncategorized RECOMMENDED Attributes
The definitions of most of the RECOMMENDED attributes follow. Collections that share a common category are defined in other sections.¶
5.8.2.1. Attribute 14: archive
TRUE, if this file has been archived since the time of last
modification (deprecated in favor of time_
5.8.2.2. Attribute 15: cansettime
TRUE, if the server is able to change the times for a file system object as specified in a SETATTR operation.¶
5.8.2.3. Attribute 16: case_insensitive
TRUE, if file name comparisons on this file system are case insensitive.¶
5.8.2.4. Attribute 17: case_preserving
TRUE, if file name case on this file system is preserved.¶
5.8.2.5. Attribute 60: change_policy
A value created by the server that the client can use to
determine if some server policy related to the current
file system has been subject to change. If the value
remains the same, then the client can be sure that the
values of the attributes related to fs location
and the fss_
This attribute MUST change when the value returned by
the fs_
5.8.2.6. Attribute 18: chown_restricted
If TRUE, the server will reject any request to change either the owner or the group associated with a file if the caller is not a privileged user (for example, "root" in UNIX operating environments or, in Windows 2000, the "Take Ownership" privilege).¶
5.8.2.7. Attribute 20: fileid
A number uniquely identifying the file within the file system.¶
5.8.2.8. Attribute 21: files_avail
File slots available to this user on the file system containing this object -- this should be the smallest relevant limit.¶
5.8.2.9. Attribute 22: files_free
Free file slots on the file system containing this object -- this should be the smallest relevant limit.¶
5.8.2.10. Attribute 23: files_total
Total file slots on the file system containing this object.¶
5.8.2.11. Attribute 76: fs_charset_cap
Character set capabilities for this file system. See Section 14.4.¶
5.8.2.12. Attribute 24: fs_locations
Locations where this file system may be found. If the server
returns NFS4ERR_
5.8.2.13. Attribute 67: fs_locations_info
Full function file system location. See Section 11.17.2 for more details.¶
5.8.2.14. Attribute 61: fs_status
Generic file system type information. See Section 11.18 for more details.¶
5.8.2.16. Attribute 26: homogeneous
TRUE, if this object's file system is homogeneous; i.e., all objects in the file system (all objects on the server with the same fsid) have common values for all per-file-system attributes.¶
5.8.2.17. Attribute 27: maxfilesize
Maximum supported file size for the file system of this object.¶
5.8.2.18. Attribute 28: maxlink
Maximum number of links for this object.¶
5.8.2.19. Attribute 29: maxname
Maximum file name size supported for this object.¶
5.8.2.20. Attribute 30: maxread
Maximum amount of data the READ operation will return for this object.¶
5.8.2.21. Attribute 31: maxwrite
Maximum amount of data the WRITE operation will accept for this object. This attribute SHOULD be supported if the file is writable. Lack of this attribute can lead to the client either wasting bandwidth or not receiving the best performance.¶
5.8.2.22. Attribute 32: mimetype
MIME body type/subtype of this object.¶
5.8.2.23. Attribute 55: mounted_on_fileid
Like fileid, but if the target filehandle is the root of a file system, this attribute represents the fileid of the underlying directory.¶
UNIX-based operating environments connect a file system into the namespace by connecting (mounting) the file system onto the existing file object (the mount point, usually a directory) of an existing file system. When the mount point's parent directory is read via an API like readdir(), the return results are directory entries, each with a component name and a fileid. The fileid of the mount point's directory entry will be different from the fileid that the stat() system call returns. The stat() system call is returning the fileid of the root of the mounted file system, whereas readdir() is returning the fileid that stat() would have returned before any file systems were mounted on the mount point.¶
Unlike NFSv3, NFSv4.1 allows a client's LOOKUP
request to cross other file systems. The client detects the
file system crossing whenever the filehandle argument of
LOOKUP has an fsid attribute different from that of the
filehandle returned by LOOKUP. A UNIX-based client will
consider this a "mount point crossing". UNIX has a legacy
scheme for allowing a process to determine its current working
directory. This relies on readdir() of a mount point's parent
and stat() of the mount point returning fileids as previously
described. The mounted_
While the NFSv4.1 client could simply fabricate a fileid
corresponding to what mounted_
If the server detects that there is no mounted point at the
target file object, then the value for mounted_
The mounted_
5.8.2.24. Attribute 34: no_trunc
If this attribute is TRUE, then if the client uses a file
name longer than name_
5.8.2.25. Attribute 35: numlinks
Number of hard links to this object.¶
5.8.2.26. Attribute 36: owner
The string name of the owner of this object.¶
5.8.2.27. Attribute 37: owner_group
The string name of the group ownership of this object.¶
5.8.2.28. Attribute 38: quota_avail_hard
The value in bytes that represents the amount of additional disk space beyond the current allocation that can be allocated to this file or directory before further allocations will be refused. It is understood that this space may be consumed by allocations to other files or directories.¶
5.8.2.29. Attribute 39: quota_avail_soft
The value in bytes that represents the amount of additional disk space that can be allocated to this file or directory before the user may reasonably be warned. It is understood that this space may be consumed by allocations to other files or directories though there is a rule as to which other files or directories.¶
5.8.2.30. Attribute 40: quota_used
The value in bytes that represents the amount of disk
space used by this file or directory and possibly a
number of other similar files or directories, where the
set of "similar" meets at least the criterion that
allocating space to any file or directory in the set
will reduce the "quota_
Note that there may be a number of distinct but
overlapping sets of files or directories for which a
quota_
5.8.2.31. Attribute 41: rawdev
Raw device number of file of type NF4BLK or NF4CHR. The device number is split into major and minor numbers. If the file's type attribute is not NF4BLK or NF4CHR, the value returned SHOULD NOT be considered useful.¶
5.8.2.32. Attribute 42: space_avail
Disk space in bytes available to this user on the file system containing this object -- this should be the smallest relevant limit.¶
5.8.2.33. Attribute 43: space_free
Free disk space in bytes on the file system containing this object -- this should be the smallest relevant limit.¶
5.8.2.34. Attribute 44: space_total
Total disk space in bytes on the file system containing this object.¶
5.8.2.35. Attribute 45: space_used
Number of file system bytes allocated to this object.¶
5.8.2.36. Attribute 46: system
This attribute is TRUE if this file is a "system" file with respect to the Windows operating environment.¶
5.8.2.37. Attribute 47: time_access
The time_
Whenever the file object resides on a writable file system,
the server should make its best efforts to record time_
5.8.2.38. Attribute 48: time_access_set
Sets the time of last access to the object. SETATTR use only.¶
5.8.2.39. Attribute 49: time_backup
The time of last backup of the object.¶
5.8.2.40. Attribute 50: time_create
The time of creation of the object. This attribute does not have any relation to the traditional UNIX file attribute "ctime" or "change time".¶
5.8.2.41. Attribute 51: time_delta
Smallest useful server time granularity.¶
5.8.2.42. Attribute 52: time_metadata
The time of last metadata modification of the object.¶
5.8.2.43. Attribute 53: time_modify
The time of last modification to the object.¶
5.8.2.44. Attribute 54: time_modify_set
Sets the time of last modification to the object. SETATTR use only.¶
5.9. Interpreting owner and owner_group
The RECOMMENDED attributes "owner" and "owner_
Similarly, security principals may be represented in different ways by different security mechanisms. Servers normally translate these representations into a common format, generally that used by local storage, to serve as a means of identifying the users corresponding to these security principals. When these local identifiers are translated to the form of the owner attribute, associated with files created by such principals, they identify, in a common format, the users associated with each corresponding set of security principals.¶
The translation used to interpret owner and group strings is
not specified as part of the protocol. This allows various
solutions to be employed. For example, a local translation
table may be consulted that maps a numeric identifier to the
user
Servers that do not provide support for all possible values of
the owner and owner_
The "dns_
In the case where there is no translation available to the
client or server, the attribute value will be constructed
without the "@". Therefore, the absence of the @ from the
owner or owner_
To provide a greater degree of compatibility with NFSv3,
which identified users and groups by 32-bit unsigned user
identifiers and group identifiers, owner and group strings that
consist of decimal numeric values with no leading zeros can be
given a special interpretation by clients and servers that
choose to provide such support. The receiver may treat such a
user or group string as representing the same user as would be
represented by an NFSv3 uid or gid having the corresponding
numeric value. A server is not obligated to accept such a
string, but may return an NFS4ERR_
The owner string "nobody" may be used to designate an anonymous user, which will be associated with a file created by a security principal that cannot be mapped through normal means to the owner attribute. Users and implementations of NFSv4.1 SHOULD NOT use "nobody" to designate a real user whose access is not anonymous.¶
5.10. Character Case Attributes
With respect to the case_
5.11. Directory Notification Attributes
As described in Section 18.39, the
client can request a minimum delay for notifications of changes
to attributes, but the server is free to ignore what the client
requests. The client can determine in advance what notification
delays the server will accept by sending a GETATTR operation for either or
both of two directory notification attributes. When the client
calls the GET_
5.11.1. Attribute 56: dir_notif_delay
The dir_
5.11.2. Attribute 57: dirent_notif_delay
The dirent_
5.12. pNFS Attribute Definitions
5.12.1. Attribute 62: fs_layout_type
The fs_
5.12.2. Attribute 66: layout_alignment
When a client holds layouts on files of a file system, the
layout_
5.12.3. Attribute 65: layout_blksize
When a client holds layouts on files of a file system, the
layout_
5.12.4. Attribute 63: layout_hint
The layout_
5.12.5. Attribute 64: layout_type
This attribute lists the layout type(s) available for a file. The value returned by the server is for informational purposes only. The client will use the LAYOUTGET operation to obtain the information needed in order to perform I/O, for example, the specific device information for the file and its layout.¶
5.12.6. Attribute 68: mdsthreshold
This attribute is a server-provided hint used to communicate to the client when it is more efficient to send READ and WRITE operations to the metadata server or the data server. The two types of thresholds described are file size thresholds and I/O size thresholds. If a file's size is smaller than the file size threshold, data accesses SHOULD be sent to the metadata server. If an I/O request has a length that is below the I/O size threshold, the I/O SHOULD be sent to the metadata server. Each threshold type is specified separately for read and write.¶
The server MAY provide both types of thresholds for a file. If both file size and I/O size are provided, the client SHOULD reach or exceed both thresholds before sending its read or write requests to the data server. Alternatively, if only one of the specified thresholds is reached or exceeded, the I/O requests are sent to the metadata server.¶
For each threshold type, a value of zero indicates no READ or WRITE should be sent to the metadata server, while a value of all ones indicates that all READs or WRITEs should be sent to the metadata server.¶
The attribute is available on a per-filehandle basis. If the current filehandle refers to a non-pNFS file or directory, the metadata server should return an attribute that is representative of the filehandle's file system. It is suggested that this attribute is queried as part of the OPEN operation. Due to dynamic system changes, the client should not assume that the attribute will remain constant for any specific time period; thus, it should be periodically refreshed.¶
5.13. Retention Attributes
Retention is a concept whereby a file object can be placed in an immutable, undeletable, unrenamable state for a fixed or infinite duration of time. Once in this "retained" state, the file cannot be moved out of the state until the duration of retention has been reached.¶
When retention is enabled, retention MUST extend to the data of the file, and the name of file. The server MAY extend retention to any other property of the file, including any subset of REQUIRED, RECOMMENDED, and named attributes, with the exceptions noted in this section.¶
Servers MAY support or not support retention on any file object type.¶
The five retention attributes are explained in the next subsections.¶
5.13.1. Attribute 69: retention_get
If retention is enabled for the associated file, this attribute's value represents the retention begin time of the file object. This attribute's value is only readable with the GETATTR operation and MUST NOT be modified by the SETATTR operation (Section 5.5). The value of the attribute consists of:¶
const RET4_DURATION_INFINITE = 0xffffffffffffffff;
struct retention_get4 {
uint64_t rg_duration;
nfstime4 rg_begin_time<1>;
};
The field rg_
If (as soon as) rg_
5.13.2. Attribute 70: retention_set
This attribute is used to set the retention
duration and optionally enable retention for
the associated file object. This attribute is
only modifiable via the SETATTR operation and
MUST NOT be retrieved by the GETATTR operation
(Section 5.5).
This attribute corresponds to retention_
struct retention_set4 {
bool rs_enable;
uint64_t rs_duration<1>;
};
If the client sets rs_
The following rules apply to both the retention_
- As long as retention is not enabled, the client is permitted to decrease the duration.¶
-
The duration can always be set to an
equal or higher value, even if retention is
enabled. Note that once retention is enabled,
the actual duration (as returned by the
retention_
get or retentevt_ get attributes; see Section 5.13.1 or Section 5.13.3) is constantly counting down to zero (one unit per second), unless the duration was set to RET4_ DURATION_ INFINITE . Thus, it will not be possible for the client to precisely extend the duration on a file that has retention enabled.¶ -
While retention is enabled, attempts to disable
retention or decrease the retention's duration
MUST fail with the error NFS4ERR_
INVAL .¶ -
If the principal attempting to change
retention_
set or retentevt_ set does not have ACE4_ WRITE_ RETENTION permissions, the attempt MUST fail with NFS4ERR_ ACCESS .¶
5.13.3. Attribute 71: retentevt_get
Gets the event-based retention duration, and if enabled, the
event-based retention begin time of the file object. This
attribute is like retention_
5.13.4. Attribute 72: retentevt_set
Sets the event-based retention duration, and optionally enables
event-based retention on the file object. This attribute
corresponds to retentevt_
5.13.5. Attribute 73: retention_hold
Gets or sets administrative retention holds, one hold per bit position.¶
This attribute allows one to 64 administrative holds, one hold
per bit on the attribute. If retention_
If the principal attempting to change retention_
6. Access Control Attributes
Access Control Lists (ACLs) are file attributes that specify
fine-grained access control. This section covers the
"acl", "dacl", "sacl",
"aclsupport", "mode", and
"mode_
6.1. Goals
ACLs and modes represent two well
- If a server supports the mode attribute, it should provide reasonable semantics to clients that only set and retrieve the mode attribute.¶
- If a server supports ACL attributes, it should provide reasonable semantics to clients that only set and retrieve those attributes.¶
- On servers that support the mode attribute, if ACL attributes have never been set on an object, via inheritance or explicitly, the behavior should be traditional UNIX-like behavior.¶
-
On servers that support the mode attribute, if the ACL attributes have been previously set on an object, either explicitly or via inheritance:¶
-
Setting only the mode attribute should effectively
control the traditional UNIX-like permissions of read,
write, and execute on owner, owner_
group, and other.¶ -
Setting only the mode attribute should provide
reasonable security. For example, setting a mode of
000 should be enough to ensure that future OPEN operations for
OPEN4_
SHARE_ ACCESS_ READ or OPEN4_ SHARE_ ACCESS_ WRITE by any principal fail, regardless of a previously existing or inherited ACL.¶
-
Setting only the mode attribute should effectively
control the traditional UNIX-like permissions of read,
write, and execute on owner, owner_
-
NFSv4.1 may introduce different
semantics relating to the mode and ACL attributes,
but it does not render invalid any previously
existing implementations
. Additionally, this section provides clarifications based on previous implementations and discussions around them.¶ - On servers that support both the mode and the acl or dacl attributes, the server must keep the two consistent with each other. The value of the mode attribute (with the exception of the three high-order bits described in Section 6.2.4) must be determined entirely by the value of the ACL, so that use of the mode is never required for anything other than setting the three high-order bits. See Section 6.4.1 for exact requirements.¶
- When a mode attribute is set on an object, the ACL attributes may need to be modified in order to not conflict with the new mode. In such cases, it is desirable that the ACL keep as much information as possible. This includes information about inheritance, AUDIT and ALARM ACEs, and permissions granted and denied that do not conflict with the new mode.¶
6.2. File Attributes Discussion
6.2.1. Attribute 12: acl
The NFSv4.1 ACL attribute contains an array of Access Control Entries (ACEs) that are associated with the file system object. Although the client can set and get the acl attribute, the server is responsible for using the ACL to perform access control. The client can use the OPEN or ACCESS operations to check access without modifying or reading data or metadata.¶
The NFS ACE structure is defined as follows:¶
typedef uint32_t acetype4;
typedef uint32_t aceflag4;
typedef uint32_t acemask4;
struct nfsace4 {
acetype4 type;
aceflag4 flag;
acemask4 access_mask;
utf8str_mixed who;
};
To determine if a request succeeds, the server processes
each nfsace4 entry in order. Only ACEs that have a "who"
that matches the requester are considered. Each ACE is
processed until all of the bits of the requester's access
have been ALLOWED. Once a bit (see below) has been ALLOWED
by an ACCESS_
Unlike the ALLOW and DENY ACE types, the ALARM and AUDIT ACE types do not affect a requester's access, and instead are for triggering events as a result of a requester's access attempt. Therefore, AUDIT and ALARM ACEs are processed only after processing ALLOW and DENY ACEs.¶
The NFSv4.1 ACL model is quite rich. Some server platforms may provide access-control functionality that goes beyond the UNIX-style mode attribute, but that is not as rich as the NFS ACL model. So that users can take advantage of this more limited functionality, the server may support the acl attributes by mapping between its ACL model and the NFSv4.1 ACL model. Servers must ensure that the ACL they actually store or enforce is at least as strict as the NFSv4 ACL that was set. It is tempting to accomplish this by rejecting any ACL that falls outside the small set that can be represented accurately. However, such an approach can render ACLs unusable without special client-side knowledge of the server's mapping, which defeats the purpose of having a common NFSv4 ACL protocol. Therefore, servers should accept every ACL that they can without compromising security. To help accomplish this, servers may make a special exception, in the case of unsupported permission bits, to the rule that bits not ALLOWED or DENIED by an ACL must be denied. For example, a UNIX-style server might choose to silently allow read attribute permissions even though an ACL does not explicitly allow those permissions. (An ACL that explicitly denies permission to read attributes should still be rejected.)¶
The situation is complicated by the fact that a server may have multiple modules that enforce ACLs. For example, the enforcement for NFSv4.1 access may be different from, but not weaker than, the enforcement for local access, and both may be different from the enforcement for access through other protocols such as SMB (Server Message Block). So it may be useful for a server to accept an ACL even if not all of its modules are able to support it.¶
The guiding principle with regard to NFSv4 access is that the server must not accept ACLs that appear to make access to the file more restrictive than it really is.¶
6.2.1.1. ACE Type
The constants used for the type field (acetype4) are as follows:¶
const ACE4_ACCESS_ALLOWED_ACE_TYPE = 0x00000000; const ACE4_ACCESS_DENIED_ACE_TYPE = 0x00000001; const ACE4_SYSTEM_AUDIT_ACE_TYPE = 0x00000002; const ACE4_SYSTEM_ALARM_ACE_TYPE = 0x00000003;
Only the ALLOWED and DENIED bits may be used in the dacl attribute, and only the AUDIT and ALARM bits may be used in the sacl attribute. All four are permitted in the acl attribute.¶
| Value | Abbreviation | Description |
|---|---|---|
| ACE4_ |
ALLOW | Explicitly grants the access defined in acemask4 to the file or directory. |
| ACE4_ |
DENY | Explicitly denies the access defined in acemask4 to the file or directory. |
| ACE4_ |
AUDIT |
Log (in a system |
| ACE4_ |
ALARM |
Generate an alarm (in a system |
The "Abbreviation" column denotes how the types will be referred to throughout the rest of this section.¶
6.2.1.2. Attribute 13: aclsupport
A server need not support all of the above ACE types. This attribute indicates which ACE types are supported for the current file system. The bitmask constants used to represent the above definitions within the aclsupport attribute are as follows:¶
const ACL4_SUPPORT_ALLOW_ACL = 0x00000001; const ACL4_SUPPORT_DENY_ACL = 0x00000002; const ACL4_SUPPORT_AUDIT_ACL = 0x00000004; const ACL4_SUPPORT_ALARM_ACL = 0x00000008;
Servers that support either the ALLOW or DENY ACE type SHOULD support both ALLOW and DENY ACE types.¶
Clients should not attempt to set an ACE unless the server
claims support for that ACE type. If the server receives a
request to set an ACE that it cannot store, it MUST reject
the request with NFS4ERR_
Support for any of the ACL attributes is optional (albeit RECOMMENDED). However, a server that supports either of the new ACL attributes (dacl or sacl) MUST allow use of the new ACL attributes to access all of the ACE types that it supports. In other words, if such a server supports ALLOW or DENY ACEs, then it MUST support the dacl attribute, and if it supports AUDIT or ALARM ACEs, then it MUST support the sacl attribute.¶
6.2.1.3. ACE Access Mask
The bitmask constants used for the access mask field are as follows:¶
const ACE4_READ_DATA = 0x00000001; const ACE4_LIST_DIRECTORY = 0x00000001; const ACE4_WRITE_DATA = 0x00000002; const ACE4_ADD_FILE = 0x00000002; const ACE4_APPEND_DATA = 0x00000004; const ACE4_ADD_SUBDIRECTORY = 0x00000004; const ACE4_READ_NAMED_ATTRS = 0x00000008; const ACE4_WRITE_NAMED_ATTRS = 0x00000010; const ACE4_EXECUTE = 0x00000020; const ACE4_DELETE_CHILD = 0x00000040; const ACE4_READ_ATTRIBUTES = 0x00000080; const ACE4_WRITE_ATTRIBUTES = 0x00000100; const ACE4_WRITE_RETENTION = 0x00000200; const ACE4_WRITE_RETENTION_HOLD = 0x00000400; const ACE4_DELETE = 0x00010000; const ACE4_READ_ACL = 0x00020000; const ACE4_WRITE_ACL = 0x00040000; const ACE4_WRITE_OWNER = 0x00080000; const ACE4_SYNCHRONIZE = 0x00100000;
Note that some masks have coincident values, for
example, ACE4_
6.2.1.3.1. Discussion of Mask Attributes
ACE4_
ACE4_
ACE4_
ACE4_
-
- Operation(s) affected:
-
CREATE¶
LINK¶
OPEN¶
RENAME¶
- Discussion:
-
Permission to add a new file in a directory.
The CREATE operation is affected when nfs_
ftype4 is NF4LNK, NF4BLK, NF4CHR, NF4SOCK, or NF4FIFO. (NF4DIR is not listed because it is covered by ACE4_ ADD_ SUBDIRECTORY .) OPEN is affected when used to create a regular file. LINK and RENAME are always affected.¶
ACE4_
-
- Operation(s) affected:
-
WRITE¶
OPEN¶
SETATTR of size¶
- Discussion:
-
The ability to modify a file's data, but only
starting at EOF. This allows for the notion of
append-only files, by allowing ACE4_
APPEND_ DATA and denying ACE4_ WRITE_ DATA to the same user or group. If a file has an ACL such as the one described above and a WRITE request is made for somewhere other than EOF, the server SHOULD return NFS4ERR_ ACCESS .¶
ACE4_
ACE4_
-
- Operation(s) affected:
-
OPENATTR¶
- Discussion:
- Permission to read the named attributes of a file or to look up the named attribute directory. OPENATTR is affected when it is not used to create a named attribute directory. This is when 1) createdir is TRUE, but a named attribute directory already exists, or 2) createdir is FALSE.¶
ACE4_
-
- Operation(s) affected:
-
OPENATTR¶
- Discussion:
-
Permission to write the named attributes of a
file or to create a named attribute directory.
OPENATTR is affected when it is used to create a
named attribute directory. This is when
createdir is TRUE and no named attribute
directory exists. The ability to check whether
or not a named attribute directory exists
depends on the ability to look it up; therefore,
users also need the ACE4_
READ_ NAMED_ ATTRS permission in order to create a named attribute directory.¶
ACE4_
-
- Operation(s) affected:
-
READ¶
OPEN¶
REMOVE¶
RENAME¶
LINK¶
CREATE¶
- Discussion:
-
Permission to execute a file.¶
Servers SHOULD allow a user the ability to read the data of the file when only the ACE4_
EXECUTE access mask bit is allowed. This is because there is no way to execute a file without reading the contents. Though a server may treat ACE4_ EXECUTE and ACE4_ READ_ DATA bits identically when deciding to permit a READ operation, it SHOULD still allow the two bits to be set independently in ACLs, and MUST distinguish between them when replying to ACCESS operations. In particular, servers SHOULD NOT silently turn on one of the two bits when the other is set, as that would make it impossible for the client to correctly enforce the distinction between read and execute permissions.¶ As an example, following a SETATTR of the following ACL:¶
- nfsuser
:ACE4_ EXECUTE :ALLOW¶
A subsequent GETATTR of ACL for that file SHOULD return:¶
- nfsuser
:ACE4_ EXECUTE :ALLOW¶
Rather than:¶
-
nfsuser
:ACE4_ EXECUTE /ACE4_ READ_ DATA :ALLOW¶
- nfsuser
ACE4_
ACE4_
-
- Operation(s) affected:
-
REMOVE¶
RENAME¶
- Discussion:
-
Permission to delete a file or directory within
a directory.
See Section 6.2.1.3.2
for information on ACE4_
DELETE and ACE4_ DELETE_ CHILD interact.¶
ACE4_
-
- Operation(s) affected:
-
GETATTR of file system object attributes¶
VERIFY¶
NVERIFY¶
READDIR¶
- Discussion:
- The ability to read basic attributes (non-ACLs) of a file. On a UNIX system, basic attributes can be thought of as the stat-level attributes. Allowing this access mask bit would mean that the entity can execute "ls -l" and stat. If a READDIR operation requests attributes, this mask must be allowed for the READDIR to succeed.¶
ACE4_
-
- Operation(s) affected:
-
SETATTR of time_
access_ set, time_ backup,¶ time_
create, time_ modify_ set, mimetype, hidden, system¶ - Discussion:
-
Permission to change the times associated with a
file or directory to an arbitrary value. Also
permission to change the mimetype, hidden, and
system attributes. A user having
ACE4_
WRITE_ DATA or ACE4_ WRITE_ ATTRIBUTES will be allowed to set the times associated with a file to the current server time.¶
ACE4_
-
- Operation(s) affected:
- SETATTR of retention_
set, retentevt_ set .¶ - Discussion:
-
Permission to modify the durations of event and
non-event-based retention. Also permission to
enable event and non-event-based retention. A
server MAY behave such that setting
ACE4_
WRITE_ ATTRIBUTES allows ACE4_ WRITE_ RETENTION .¶
ACE4_
ACE4_
-
- Operation(s) affected:
- REMOVE¶
- Discussion:
-
Permission to delete the
file or directory.
See Section 6.2.1.3.2
for information on ACE4_
DELETE and ACE4_ DELETE_ CHILD interact.¶
ACE4_
ACE4_
ACE4_
ACE4_
-
- Operation(s) affected:
- NONE¶
- Discussion:
-
Permission to use the file object as a synchronization primitive for interprocess communication. This permission is not enforced or interpreted by the NFSv4.1 server on behalf of the client.¶
Typically, the ACE4_
SYNCHRONIZE permission is only meaningful on local file systems, i.e., file systems not accessed via NFSv4.1. The reason that the permission bit exists is that some operating environments, such as Windows, use ACE4_ SYNCHRONIZE .¶ For example, if a client copies a file that has ACE4_
SYNCHRONIZE set from a local file system to an NFSv4.1 server, and then later copies the file from the NFSv4.1 server to a local file system, it is likely that if ACE4_ SYNCHRONIZE was set in the original file, the client will want it set in the second copy. The first copy will not have the permission set unless the NFSv4.1 server has the means to set the ACE4_ SYNCHRONIZE bit. The second copy will not have the permission set unless the NFSv4.1 server has the means to retrieve the ACE4_ SYNCHRONIZE bit.¶
Server implementations need not provide the granularity
of control that is implied by this list of masks. For
example, POSIX-based systems might not distinguish
ACE4_
If a server receives a SETATTR request that it cannot
accurately implement, it should err in the direction of
more restricted access, except in the previously
discussed cases of execute and read. For example,
suppose a server cannot distinguish overwriting data
from appending new data, as described in the previous
paragraph. If a client submits an ALLOW ACE where
ACE4_
6.2.1.3.2. ACE4_DELETE vs. ACE4_DELETE_CHILD
Two access mask bits govern the ability to delete a
directory entry: ACE4_
Many systems also take the "sticky bit"
Servers SHOULD allow unlink if either ACE4_
If the ACLs in question neither explicitly ALLOW
nor DENY either of the above, and if MODE4_
This allows servers to support something close to
traditional UNIX-like semantics, with ACE4_
6.2.1.4. ACE flag
The bitmask constants used for the flag field are as follows:¶
const ACE4_FILE_INHERIT_ACE = 0x00000001; const ACE4_DIRECTORY_INHERIT_ACE = 0x00000002; const ACE4_NO_PROPAGATE_INHERIT_ACE = 0x00000004; const ACE4_INHERIT_ONLY_ACE = 0x00000008; const ACE4_SUCCESSFUL_ACCESS_ACE_FLAG = 0x00000010; const ACE4_FAILED_ACCESS_ACE_FLAG = 0x00000020; const ACE4_IDENTIFIER_GROUP = 0x00000040; const ACE4_INHERITED_ACE = 0x00000080;
A server need not support any of these flags. If the
server supports flags that are similar to, but not
exactly the same as, these flags, the implementation
may define a mapping between the protocol
For example, suppose a client tries to set an ACE with
ACE4_
6.2.1.4.1. Discussion of Flag Bits
- ACE4_
FILE_ INHERIT_ ACE - Any non-directory file in any sub-directory will get this ACE inherited.¶
- ACE4_
DIRECTORY_ INHERIT_ ACE -
Can be placed on a directory and indicates that this ACE should be added to each new directory created.¶
If this flag is set in an ACE in an ACL attribute to be set on a non-directory file system object, the operation attempting to set the ACL SHOULD fail with NFS4ERR_
ATTRNOTSUPP .¶ - ACE4_
NO_ PROPAGATE_ INHERIT_ ACE - Can be placed on a directory. This flag tells the server that inheritance of this ACE should stop at newly created child directories.¶
- ACE4_
INHERIT_ ONLY_ ACE -
Can be placed on a directory but does not apply to the directory; ALLOW and DENY ACEs with this bit set do not affect access to the directory, and AUDIT and ALARM ACEs with this bit set do not trigger log or alarm events. Such ACEs only take effect once they are applied (with this bit cleared) to newly created files and directories as specified by the ACE4_
FILE_ INHERIT_ ACE and ACE4_ DIRECTORY_ INHERIT_ ACE flags.¶ If this flag is present on an ACE, but neither ACE4_
DIRECTORY_ INHERIT_ ACE nor ACE4_ FILE_ INHERIT_ ACE is present, then an operation attempting to set such an attribute SHOULD fail with NFS4ERR_ ATTRNOTSUPP .¶ - ACE4_
SUCCESSFUL_ ACCESS_ ACE_ FLAG and ACE4_ FAILED_ ACCESS_ ACE_ FLAG -
The ACE4_
SUCCESSFUL_ ACCESS_ ACE_ FLAG (SUCCESS) and ACE4_ FAILED_ ACCESS_ ACE_ FLAG (FAILED) flag bits may be set only on ACE4_ SYSTEM_ AUDIT_ ACE_ TYPE (AUDIT) and ACE4_ SYSTEM_ ALARM_ ACE_ TYPE (ALARM) ACE types. If during the processing of the file's ACL, the server encounters an AUDIT or ALARM ACE that matches the principal attempting the OPEN, the server notes that fact, and the presence, if any, of the SUCCESS and FAILED flags encountered in the AUDIT or ALARM ACE. Once the server completes the ACL processing, it then notes if the operation succeeded or failed. If the operation succeeded, and if the SUCCESS flag was set for a matching AUDIT or ALARM ACE, then the appropriate AUDIT or ALARM event occurs. If the operation failed, and if the FAILED flag was set for the matching AUDIT or ALARM ACE, then the appropriate AUDIT or ALARM event occurs. Either or both of the SUCCESS or FAILED can be set, but if neither is set, the AUDIT or ALARM ACE is not useful.¶ The previously described processing applies to ACCESS operations even when they return NFS4_
OK . For the purposes of AUDIT and ALARM, we consider an ACCESS operation to be a "failure" if it fails to return a bit that was requested and supported.¶ - ACE4_
IDENTIFIER_ GROUP -
Indicates that the "who" refers to a GROUP
as defined under UNIX or a GROUP ACCOUNT
as defined under Windows. Clients and
servers MUST ignore the
ACE4_
IDENTIFIER_ GROUP flag on ACEs with a who value equal to one of the special identifiers outlined in Section 6.2.1.5.¶ - ACE4_
INHERITED_ ACE - Indicates that this ACE is inherited from a parent directory. A server that supports automatic inheritance will place this flag on any ACEs inherited from the parent directory when creating a new object. Client applications will use this to perform automatic inheritance. Clients and servers MUST clear this bit in the acl attribute; it may only be used in the dacl and sacl attributes.¶
6.2.1.5. ACE Who
The "who" field of an ACE is an identifier that
specifies the principal or principals to whom the ACE
applies. It may refer to a user or a group, with the flag
bit ACE4_
There are several special identifiers that need to be understood universally, rather than in the context of a particular DNS domain. Some of these identifiers cannot be understood when an NFS client accesses the server, but have meaning when a local process accesses the file. The ability to display and modify these permissions is permitted over NFS, even if none of the access methods on the server understands the identifiers.¶
| Who | Description |
|---|---|
| OWNER | The owner of the file. |
| GROUP | The group associated with the file. |
| EVERYONE | The world, including the owner and owning group. |
| INTERACTIVE | Accessed from an interactive terminal. |
| NETWORK | Accessed via the network. |
| DIALUP | Accessed as a dialup user to the server. |
| BATCH | Accessed from a batch job. |
| ANONYMOUS | Accessed without any authentication. |
| AUTHENTICATED | Any authenticated user (opposite of ANONYMOUS). |
| SERVICE | Access from a system service. |
To avoid conflict, these special identifiers are distinguished by an appended "@" and should appear in the form "xxxx@" (with no domain name after the "@"), for example, ANONYMOUS@.¶
The ACE4_
6.2.1.5.1. Discussion of EVERYONE@
It is important to note that "EVERYONE@" is not equivalent to the UNIX "other" entity. This is because, by definition, UNIX "other" does not include the owner or owning group of a file. "EVERYONE@" means literally everyone, including the owner or owning group.¶
6.2.2. Attribute 58: dacl
The dacl attribute is like the acl attribute, but dacl allows just ALLOW and DENY ACEs. The dacl attribute supports automatic inheritance (see Section 6.4.3.2).¶
6.2.3. Attribute 59: sacl
The sacl attribute is like the acl attribute, but sacl allows just AUDIT and ALARM ACEs. The sacl attribute supports automatic inheritance (see Section 6.4.3.2).¶
6.2.4. Attribute 33: mode
The NFSv4.1 mode attribute is based on the UNIX mode bits. The following bits are defined:¶
const MODE4_SUID = 0x800; /* set user id on execution */ const MODE4_SGID = 0x400; /* set group id on execution */ const MODE4_SVTX = 0x200; /* save text even after use */ const MODE4_RUSR = 0x100; /* read permission: owner */ const MODE4_WUSR = 0x080; /* write permission: owner */ const MODE4_XUSR = 0x040; /* execute permission: owner */ const MODE4_RGRP = 0x020; /* read permission: group */ const MODE4_WGRP = 0x010; /* write permission: group */ const MODE4_XGRP = 0x008; /* execute permission: group */ const MODE4_ROTH = 0x004; /* read permission: other */ const MODE4_WOTH = 0x002; /* write permission: other */ const MODE4_XOTH = 0x001; /* execute permission: other */
Bits MODE4_
Bits within a mode other than those specified above
are not defined by this protocol. A server
MUST NOT return bits other than those defined above in a
GETATTR or READDIR operation, and it MUST return NFS4ERR_
6.2.5. Attribute 74: mode_set_masked
The mode_
In such instances that the nine low-order bits are left unmodified, then neither the acl nor the dacl attribute should be automatically modified as discussed in Section 6.4.1.¶
The mode_
The mode_
Bits not defined as valid in the mode attribute are not
valid in either word of the mode_
6.3. Common Methods
The requirements in this section will be referred to in future sections, especially Section 6.4.¶
6.3.1. Interpreting an ACL
6.3.1.1. Server Considerations
The server uses the algorithm described in Section 6.2.1 to determine whether an ACL allows access to an object. However, the ACL might not be the sole determiner of access. For example:¶
- In the case of a file system exported as read-only, the server may deny write access even though an object's ACL grants it.¶
-
Server implementations MAY grant ACE4_
WRITE_ ACL and ACE4_ READ_ ACL permissions to prevent a situation from arising in which there is no valid way to ever modify the ACL.¶ -
All servers will allow a user the ability to read
the data of the file when only the execute
permission is granted (i.e., if the ACL denies the
user the ACE4_
READ_ DATA access and allows the user ACE4_ EXECUTE, the server will allow the user to read the data of the file).¶ - Many servers have the notion of owner-override in which the owner of the object is allowed to override accesses that are denied by the ACL. This may be helpful, for example, to allow users continued access to open files on which the permissions have changed.¶
- Many servers have the notion of a "superuser" that has privileges beyond an ordinary user. The superuser may be able to read or write data or metadata in ways that would not be permitted by the ACL.¶
- A retention attribute might also block access otherwise allowed by ACLs (see Section 5.13).¶
6.3.1.2. Client Considerations
Clients SHOULD NOT do their own access checks based on their interpretation of the ACL, but rather use the OPEN and ACCESS operations to do access checks. This allows the client to act on the results of having the server determine whether or not access should be granted based on its interpretation of the ACL.¶
Clients must be aware of situations in which an object's ACL will define a certain access even though the server will not enforce it. In general, but especially in these situations, the client needs to do its part in the enforcement of access as defined by the ACL. To do this, the client MAY send the appropriate ACCESS operation prior to servicing the request of the user or application in order to determine whether the user or application should be granted the access requested. For examples in which the ACL may define accesses that the server doesn't enforce, see Section 6.3.1.1.¶
6.3.2. Computing a Mode Attribute from an ACL
The following method can be used to calculate the MODE4_
First, for each of the special identifiers OWNER@, GROUP@, and EVERYONE@, evaluate the ACL in order, considering only ALLOW and DENY ACEs for the identifier EVERYONE@ and for the identifier under consideration. The result of the evaluation will be an NFSv4 ACL mask showing exactly which bits are permitted to that identifier.¶
Then translate the calculated mask for OWNER@, GROUP@, and EVERYONE@ into mode bits for, respectively, the user, group, and other, as follows:¶
-
Set the read bit
(MODE4_ RUSR, MODE4_ RGRP, or MODE4_ ROTH ) if and only if ACE4_ READ_ DATA is set in the corresponding mask.¶ -
Set the write bit
(MODE4_ WUSR, MODE4_ WGRP, or MODE4_ WOTH ) if and only if ACE4_ WRITE_ DATA and ACE4_ APPEND_ DATA are both set in the corresponding mask.¶ -
Set the execute bit
(MODE4_ XUSR, MODE4_ XGRP, or MODE4_ XOTH ), if and only if ACE4_ EXECUTE is set in the corresponding mask.¶
6.3.2.1. Discussion
Some server implementations also add bits permitted to
named users and groups to the group bits
Implementations are discouraged from doing this, because it has been found to cause confusion for users who see members of a file's group denied access that the mode bits appear to allow. (The presence of DENY ACEs may also lead to such behavior, but DENY ACEs are expected to be more rarely used.)¶
The same user confusion seen when fetching the mode also results if setting the mode does not effectively control permissions for the owner, group, and other users; this motivates some of the requirements that follow.¶
6.4. Requirements
The server that supports both mode and ACL must take care to
synchronize the MODE4_
In this section, much is made of the methods in Section 6.3.2. Many requirements refer to this section. But note that the methods have behaviors specified with "SHOULD". This is intentional, to avoid invalidating existing implementations that compute the mode according to the withdrawn POSIX ACL draft (1003.1e draft 17), rather than by actual permissions on owner, group, and other.¶
6.4.1. Setting the Mode and/or ACL Attributes
In the case where a server supports the sacl or
dacl attribute, in addition to the acl attribute,
the server MUST fail a request to set the acl
attribute simultaneously with a dacl or sacl
attribute. The error to be given is NFS4ERR_
6.4.1.1. Setting Mode and not ACL
When any of the nine low-order mode bits
are subject to change, either because the mode
attribute was set or because the mode_
Note that any AUDIT or ALARM ACEs (hence any ACEs in the sacl attribute) are unaffected by changes to the mode.¶
In cases in which the permissions bits are subject to
change, the acl and dacl attributes
MUST be modified such that the mode computed via the
method in
Section 6.3.2
yields the low-order nine bits
-
If MODE4_
RGRP is not set, entities explicitly listed in the ACL other than OWNER@ and EVERYONE@ SHOULD NOT be granted ACE4_ READ_ DATA .¶ -
If MODE4_
WGRP is not set, entities explicitly listed in the ACL other than OWNER@ and EVERYONE@ SHOULD NOT be granted ACE4_ WRITE_ DATA or ACE4_ APPEND_ DATA .¶ -
If MODE4_
XGRP is not set, entities explicitly listed in the ACL other than OWNER@ and EVERYONE@ SHOULD NOT be granted ACE4_ EXECUTE .¶
Access mask bits other than those listed above, appearing in ALLOW ACEs, MAY also be disabled.¶
Note that ACEs with the flag ACE4_
Also note that the requirement may be met by discarding the acl and dacl, in favor of an ACL that represents the mode and only the mode. This is permitted, but it is preferable for a server to preserve as much of the ACL as possible without violating the above requirements. Discarding the ACL makes it effectively impossible for a file created with a mode attribute to inherit an ACL (see Section 6.4.3).¶
6.4.1.2. Setting ACL and Not Mode
When setting the acl or dacl and not setting the
mode or mode_
6.4.1.3. Setting Both ACL and Mode
When setting both the mode (includes use of either the
mode attribute or the mode_
6.4.2. Retrieving the Mode and/or ACL Attributes
This section applies only to servers that support both the mode and ACL attributes.¶
Some server implementations may have a concept of
"objects without ACLs", meaning that all permissions
are granted and denied according to the mode attribute and
that no ACL attribute is stored for that object. If an ACL
attribute is requested of such a server, the server SHOULD
return an ACL that does not conflict with the mode; that is to
say, the ACL returned SHOULD represent the nine low-order bits
of the mode attribute
For other server implementations
6.4.3. Creating New Objects
If a server supports any ACL attributes, it may use the ACL attributes on the parent directory to compute an initial ACL attribute for a newly created object. This will be referred to as the inherited ACL within this section. The act of adding one or more ACEs to the inherited ACL that are based upon ACEs in the parent directory's ACL will be referred to as inheriting an ACE within this section.¶
Implementors should standardize what the behavior of CREATE and OPEN must be depending on the presence or absence of the mode and ACL attributes.¶
-
If just the mode is given in the call:¶
In this case, inheritance SHOULD take place, but the mode MUST be applied to the inherited ACL as described in Section 6.4.1.1, thereby modifying the ACL.¶
-
If just the ACL is given in the call:¶
In this case, inheritance SHOULD NOT take place, and the ACL as defined in the CREATE or OPEN will be set without modification, and the mode modified as in Section 6.4.1.2.¶
-
If both mode and ACL are given in the call:¶
In this case, inheritance SHOULD NOT take place, and both attributes will be set as described in Section 6.4.1.3.¶
-
If neither mode nor ACL is given in the call:¶
In the case where an object is being created without any initial attributes at all, e.g., an OPEN operation with an opentype4 of OPEN4_
CREATE and a createmode4 of EXCLUSIVE4, inheritance SHOULD NOT take place (note that EXCLUSIVE4_ 1 is a better choice of createmode4, since it does permit initial attributes). Instead, the server SHOULD set permissions to deny all access to the newly created object. It is expected that the appropriate client will set the desired attributes in a subsequent SETATTR operation, and the server SHOULD allow that operation to succeed, regardless of what permissions the object is created with. For example, an empty ACL denies all permissions, but the server should allow the owner's SETATTR to succeed even though WRITE_ ACL is implicitly denied.¶ In other cases, inheritance SHOULD take place, and no modifications to the ACL will happen. The mode attribute, if supported, MUST be as computed in Section 6.3.2, with the MODE4_
SUID, MODE4_ SGID, and MODE4_ SVTX bits clear. If no inheritable ACEs exist on the parent directory, the rules for creating acl, dacl, or sacl attributes are implementation defined. If either the dacl or sacl attribute is supported, then the ACL4_ DEFAULTED flag SHOULD be set on the newly created attributes.¶
6.4.3.1. The Inherited ACL
If the object being created is not a directory, the
inherited ACL SHOULD NOT inherit ACEs from the parent
directory ACL unless the ACE4_
If the object being created is a directory, the inherited
ACL should inherit all inheritable ACEs from the parent
directory, that is, those that have the ACE4_
When a new directory is created, the server MAY split
any inherited ACE that is both inheritable and effective
(in other words, that has neither ACE4_
6.4.3.2. Automatic Inheritance
The acl attribute consists only of an array of ACEs, but the sacl (Section 6.2.3) and dacl (Section 6.2.2) attributes also include an additional flag field.¶
struct nfsacl41 {
aclflag4 na41_flag;
nfsace4 na41_aces<>;
};
The flag field applies to the entire sacl or dacl; three flag values are defined:¶
const ACL4_AUTO_INHERIT = 0x00000001; const ACL4_PROTECTED = 0x00000002; const ACL4_DEFAULTED = 0x00000004;
and all other bits must be cleared. The
ACE4_
Together these features allow a server to support automatic inheritance, which we now explain in more detail.¶
Inheritable ACEs are normally inherited by child objects only at the time that the child objects are created; later modifications to inheritable ACEs do not result in modifications to inherited ACEs on descendants.¶
However, the dacl and sacl provide an OPTIONAL mechanism that allows a client application to propagate changes to inheritable ACEs to an entire directory hierarchy.¶
A server that supports this performs inheritance at object
creation time in the normal way, and SHOULD set the
ACE4_
A client application such as an ACL editor may then propagate
changes to inheritable ACEs on a directory by recursively
traversing that directory's descendants and modifying each ACL
encountered to remove any ACEs with the ACE4_
The reach of this propagation may be limited in two ways:
first, automatic inheritance is not performed from any
directory ACL that has the ACL4_
This propagation is performed independently for the sacl
and the dacl attributes; thus, the ACL4_
New objects should be created with a dacl and a sacl that
both have the ACL4_
Both the dacl and sacl attributes are RECOMMENDED, and a server may support one without supporting the other.¶
A server that supports both the old acl attribute and
one or both of the new dacl or sacl attributes must do so
in such a way as to keep all three attributes consistent
with each other. Thus, the ACEs reported in the acl attribute
should be the union of the ACEs reported in the dacl and
sacl attributes, except that the ACE4_
When a client performs a SETATTR for the acl attribute,
the server SHOULD set the ACL4_
When a client application queries an ACL, modifies it, and sets
it again, it should leave any ACEs marked with
ACE4_
If a server also supports the mode attribute, it SHOULD set the
mode in such a way that leaves inherited ACEs unchanged, in
their original order, at the end of the ACL. If it is unable
to do so, it SHOULD set the ACL4_
Finally, in the case where the request that creates a new file
or directory does not also set permissions for that file or
directory, and there are also no ACEs to inherit from the
parent's directory, then the server's choice of ACL for the new
object is implementation
7. Single-Server Namespace
This section describes the NFSv4 single-server namespace.
Single-server namespaces may be presented directly to clients,
or they may be used as a basis to form larger multi-server
namespaces (e.g., site-wide or organization
7.1. Server Exports
On a UNIX server, the namespace describes all the files reachable by pathnames under the root directory or "/". On a Windows server, the namespace constitutes all the files on disks named by mapped disk letters. NFS server administrators rarely make the entire server's file system namespace available to NFS clients. More often, portions of the namespace are made available via an "export" feature. In previous versions of the NFS protocol, the root filehandle for each export is obtained through the MOUNT protocol; the client sent a string that identified the export name within the namespace and the server returned the root filehandle for that export. The MOUNT protocol also provided an EXPORTS procedure that enumerated the server's exports.¶
7.2. Browsing Exports
The NFSv4.1 protocol provides a root filehandle that clients can
use to obtain filehandles for the exports of a particular server,
via a series of LOOKUP operations within a COMPOUND, to traverse
a path. A common user experience is to use a graphical user interface
(perhaps a file "Open" dialog window) to find a file via progressive
browsing through a directory tree. The client must be able to move
from one export to another export via single
This style of browsing is not well supported by the NFSv3 protocol. In NFSv3, the client expects all LOOKUP operations to remain within a single server file system. For example, the device attribute will not change. This prevents a client from taking namespace paths that span exports.¶
In the case of NFSv3, an automounter on the client can obtain a snapshot of the server's namespace using the EXPORTS procedure of the MOUNT protocol. If it understands the server's pathname syntax, it can create an image of the server's namespace on the client. The parts of the namespace that are not exported by the server are filled in with directories that might be constructed similarly to an NFSv4.1 "pseudo file system" (see Section 7.3) that allows the user to browse from one mounted file system to another. There is a drawback to this representation of the server's namespace on the client: it is static. If the server administrator adds a new export, the client will be unaware of it.¶
7.3. Server Pseudo File System
NFSv4.1 servers avoid this namespace inconsistency by presenting all the exports for a given server within the framework of a single namespace for that server. An NFSv4.1 client uses LOOKUP and READDIR operations to browse seamlessly from one export to another.¶
Where there are portions of the server namespace that are not exported, clients require some way of traversing those portions to reach actual exported file systems. A technique that servers may use to provide for this is to bridge the unexported portion of the namespace via a "pseudo file system" that provides a view of exported directories only. A pseudo file system has a unique fsid and behaves like a normal, read-only file system.¶
Based on the construction of the server's namespace, it is possible that multiple pseudo file systems may exist. For example,¶
/a pseudo file system
/a/b real file system
/a/b/c pseudo file system
/a/b/c/d real file system
Each of the pseudo file systems is considered a separate entity and therefore MUST have its own fsid, unique among all the fsids for that server.¶
7.4. Multiple Roots
Certain operating environments are sometimes described as having "multiple roots". In such environments, individual file systems are commonly represented by disk or volume names. NFSv4 servers for these platforms can construct a pseudo file system above these root names so that disk letters or volume names are simply directory names in the pseudo root.¶
7.5. Filehandle Volatility
The nature of the server's pseudo file system is that it is a logical
representation of file system(s) available from the server.
Therefore, the pseudo file system is most likely constructed
dynamically when the server is first instantiated. It is expected
that the pseudo file system may not have an on-disk counterpart from
which persistent filehandles could be constructed. Even though it is
preferable that the server provide persistent filehandles for the
pseudo file system, the NFS client should expect that pseudo file
system filehandles are volatile. This can be confirmed by checking
the associated "fh_
Because it is quite likely that servers will implement pseudo file systems using volatile filehandles, clients need to be prepared for them, rather than assuming that all filehandles will be persistent.¶
7.6. Exported Root
If the server's root file system is exported, one might conclude that a pseudo file system is unneeded. This is not necessarily so. Assume the following file systems on a server:¶
/ fs1 (exported)
/a fs2 (not exported)
/a/b fs3 (exported)Because fs2 is not exported, fs3 cannot be reached with simple LOOKUPs. The server must bridge the gap with a pseudo file system.¶
7.7. Mount Point Crossing
The server file system environment may be constructed in such a way that one file system contains a directory that is 'covered' or mounted upon by a second file system. For example:¶
/a/b (file system 1)
/a/b/c/d (file system 2)The pseudo file system for this server may be constructed to look like:¶
/ (place holder/not exported)
/a/b (file system 1)
/a/b/c/d (file system 2)It is the server's responsibility to present the pseudo file system that is complete to the client. If the client sends a LOOKUP request for the path /a/b/c/d, the server's response is the filehandle of the root of the file system /a/b/c/d. In previous versions of the NFS protocol, the server would respond with the filehandle of directory /a/b/c/d within the file system /a/b.¶
The NFS client will be able to determine if it crosses a server mount point by a change in the value of the "fsid" attribute.¶
7.8. Security Policy and Namespace Presentation
Because NFSv4 clients possess the ability to change the security
mechanisms used, after determining what is allowed,
by using SECINFO and SECINFO_
If security considerations make it necessary to hide the existence of a particular file system, as opposed to all of the data within it, the server can apply the security policy of a shared resource in the server's namespace to components of the resource's ancestors. For example:¶
/ (place holder/not exported)
/a/b (file system 1)
/a/b/MySecretProject (file system 2)
The
For the case of the use of multiple, disjoint security mechanisms in the server's resources, applying that sort of policy would result in the higher-level file system not being accessible using any security flavor. Therefore, that sort of configuration is not compatible with hiding the existence (as opposed to the contents) from clients using multiple disjoint sets of security flavors.¶
In other circumstances, a desirable policy is for the security of a particular object in the server's namespace to include the union of all security mechanisms of all direct descendants. A common and convenient practice, unless strong security requirements dictate otherwise, is to make the entire the pseudo file system accessible by all of the valid security mechanisms.¶
Where there is concern about the security of data on the network,
clients should use strong security mechanisms to access the pseudo
file system in order to prevent man
8. State Management
Integrating locking into the NFS protocol necessarily causes it to be stateful. With the inclusion of such features as share reservations, file and directory delegations, recallable layouts, and support for mandatory byte-range locking, the protocol becomes substantially more dependent on proper management of state than the traditional combination of NFS and NLM (Network Lock Manager) [54]. These features include expanded locking facilities, which provide some measure of inter-client exclusion, but the state also offers features not readily providable using a stateless model. There are three components to making this state manageable:¶
- clear division between client and server¶
- ability to reliably detect inconsistency in state between client and server¶
- simple and robust recovery mechanisms¶
In this model, the server owns the state information. The client
requests changes in locks and the server responds with the changes
made. Non
Individual pieces of state created by the server and passed to the client at its request are represented by 128-bit stateids. These stateids may represent a particular open file, a set of byte-range locks held by a particular owner, or a recallable delegation of privileges to access a file in particular ways or at a particular location.¶
In all cases, there is a transition from the most general information that represents a client as a whole to the eventual lightweight stateid used for most client and server locking interactions. The details of this transition will vary with the type of object but it always starts with a client ID.¶
8.1. Client and Session ID
A client must establish a client ID (see Section 2.4) and then one or more sessionids (see Section 2.10) before performing any operations to open, byte-range lock, delegate, or obtain a layout for a file object. Each session ID is associated with a specific client ID, and thus serves as a shorthand reference to an NFSv4.1 client.¶
For some types of locking interactions, the client will represent some number of internal locking entities called "owners", which normally correspond to processes internal to the client. For other types of locking-related objects, such as delegations and layouts, no such intermediate entities are provided for, and the locking-related objects are considered to be transferred directly between the server and a unitary client.¶
8.2. Stateid Definition
When the server grants a lock of any type (including opens,
byte-range locks, delegations, and layouts), it responds with a
unique stateid that represents a set of locks (often a single
lock) for the same file, of the same type, and sharing the same
ownership characteristics
All stateids associated with a given client ID are associated with a common lease that represents the claim of those stateids and the objects they represent to be maintained by the server. See Section 8.3 for a discussion of the lease.¶
The server may assign stateids independently for different clients. A stateid with the same bit pattern for one client may designate an entirely different set of locks for a different client. The stateid is always interpreted with respect to the client ID associated with the current session. Stateids apply to all sessions associated with the given client ID, and the client may use a stateid obtained from one session on another session associated with the same client ID.¶
8.2.1. Stateid Types
With the exception of special stateids (see Section 8.2.3), each stateid represents locking objects of one of a set of types defined by the NFSv4.1 protocol. Note that in all these cases, where we speak of guarantee, it is understood there are situations such as a client restart, or lock revocation, that allow the guarantee to be voided.¶
-
Stateids may represent opens of files.¶
Each stateid in this case represents the OPEN state for a given client ID
/open -owner /filehandle triple. Such stateids are subject to change (with consequent incrementing of the stateid's seqid) in response to OPENs that result in upgrade and OPEN_ DOWNGRADE operations.¶ -
Stateids may represent sets of byte-range locks.¶
All locks held on a particular file by a particular owner and gotten under the aegis of a particular open file are associated with a single stateid with the seqid being incremented whenever LOCK and LOCKU operations affect that set of locks.¶
-
Stateids may represent file delegations, which are recallable guarantees by the server to the client that other clients will not reference or modify a particular file, until the delegation is returned. In NFSv4.1, file delegations may be obtained on both regular and non-regular files.¶
A stateid represents a single delegation held by a client for a particular filehandle.¶
-
Stateids may represent directory delegations, which are recallable guarantees by the server to the client that other clients will not modify the directory, until the delegation is returned.¶
A stateid represents a single delegation held by a client for a particular directory filehandle.¶
-
Stateids may represent layouts, which are recallable guarantees by the server to the client that particular files may be accessed via an alternate data access protocol at specific locations. Such access is limited to particular sets of byte-ranges and may proceed until those byte-ranges are reduced or the layout is returned.¶
A stateid represents the set of all layouts held by a particular client for a particular filehandle with a given layout type. The seqid is updated as the layouts of that set of byte-ranges change, via layout stateid changing operations such as LAYOUTGET and LAYOUTRETURN.¶
8.2.2. Stateid Structure
Stateids are divided into two fields, a 96-bit
"other" field identifying the specific set
of locks and a 32-bit "seqid" sequence value.
Except in the case of special stateids
(see Section 8.2.3),
a particular value of the
"other" field denotes a
set of locks of the same type (for example,
byte-range locks, opens, delegations, or layouts),
for a specific file or directory, and sharing
the same ownership characteristics
When such a set of locks is first created, the server returns a
stateid with seqid value of one. On subsequent
operations that modify the set of locks, the server
is required to increment the "seqid" field by one
whenever it returns a stateid for the same
state
The purpose of the incrementing of the seqid is to allow the server to communicate to the client the order in which operations that modified locking state associated with a stateid have been processed and to make it possible for the client to send requests that are conditional on the set of locks not having changed since the stateid in question was returned.¶
Except for layout stateids (Section 12.5.3),
when a client sends a stateid to the server, it has two
choices with regard to the seqid sent. It may set the seqid
to zero to indicate to the server that it wishes the most
up-to-date seqid for that stateid's "other" field to be
used. This would be the common choice in the case of a
stateid sent with a READ or WRITE operation. It also may
set a non-zero value, in which case the server checks if that
seqid is the correct one. In that case, the server is
required to return NFS4ERR_
When a stateid is sent by the server to the client as part of
a callback operation, it is not subject to checking for
a current seqid and returning NFS4ERR_
In making comparisons between seqids, both by the client
in determining the order of operations and by the server
in determining whether the NFS4ERR_
8.2.3. Special Stateids
Stateid values whose "other" field is either all zeros or all ones are reserved. They may not be assigned by the server but have special meanings defined by the protocol. The particular meaning depends on whether the "other" field is all zeros or all ones and the specific value of the "seqid" field.¶
The following combinations of "other" and "seqid" are defined in NFSv4.1:¶
- When "other" and "seqid" are both zero, the stateid is treated as a special anonymous stateid, which can be used in READ, WRITE, and SETATTR requests to indicate the absence of any OPEN state associated with the request. When an anonymous stateid value is used and an existing open denies the form of access requested, then access will be denied to the request. This stateid MUST NOT be used on operations to data servers (Section 13.6).¶
- When "other" and "seqid" are both all ones, the stateid is a special READ bypass stateid. When this value is used in WRITE or SETATTR, it is treated like the anonymous value. When used in READ, the server MAY grant access, even if access would normally be denied to READ operations. This stateid MUST NOT be used on operations to data servers.¶
-
When "other" is zero and "seqid" is one,
the stateid represents the current stateid,
which is whatever value is the last stateid
returned by an operation within the COMPOUND.
In the case of an OPEN, the stateid returned
for the open file and not the delegation is
used. The stateid passed to the operation in
place of the special value has its "seqid"
value set to zero, except when the current
stateid is used by the operation CLOSE or
OPEN_
DOWNGRADE . If there is no operation in the COMPOUND that has returned a stateid value, the server MUST return the error NFS4ERR_ BAD_ STATEID . As illustrated in Figure 6, if the value of a current stateid is a special stateid and the stateid of an operation's arguments has "other" set to zero and "seqid" set to one, then the server MUST return the error NFS4ERR_ BAD_ STATEID .¶ -
When "other" is zero and "seqid" is NFS4_
UINT32_ MAX, the stateid represents a reserved stateid value defined to be invalid. When this stateid is used, the server MUST return the error NFS4ERR_ BAD_ STATEID .¶
If a stateid value is used that has all zeros or all ones in the
"other" field but does not match one of the cases above, the server
MUST return the error NFS4ERR_
Special stateids, unlike other stateids, are not associated with
individual client IDs or filehandles and can be used with all valid
client IDs and filehandles. In the case of a special
stateid designating the current stateid, the current stateid
value substituted for the special stateid is associated with a
particular client ID and filehandle, and so, if it is used
where the current filehandle does not match that associated with the current
stateid, the operation to which the stateid is passed will return
NFS4ERR_
8.2.4. Stateid Lifetime and Validation
Stateids must remain valid until either a client restart or a
server restart or until the client returns all of the locks
associated with the stateid by means of an operation such as
CLOSE or DELEGRETURN.
If the locks are lost due to revocation, as long
as the client ID is valid, the stateid remains
a valid designation of that revoked state until
the client frees it by using FREE_
It should be noted that there are situations in which the client's locks become invalid, without the client requesting they be returned. These include lease expiration and a number of forms of lock revocation within the lease period. It is important to note that in these situations, the stateid remains valid and the client can use it to determine the disposition of the associated lost locks.¶
An "other" value must never be reused for a different purpose (i.e., different filehandle, owner, or type of locks) within the context of a single client ID. A server may retain the "other" value for the same purpose beyond the point where it may otherwise be freed, but if it does so, it must maintain "seqid" continuity with previous values.¶
One mechanism that may be used to satisfy the requirement that the server recognize invalid and out-of-date stateids is for the server to divide the "other" field of the stateid into two fields.¶
- an index into a table of locking-state structures.¶
- a generation number that is incremented on each allocation of a table entry for a particular use.¶
And then store in each table entry,¶
- the client ID with which the stateid is associated.¶
- the current generation number for the (at most one) valid stateid sharing this index value.¶
- the filehandle of the file on which the locks are taken.¶
- an indication of the type of stateid (open, byte-range lock, file delegation, directory delegation, layout).¶
- the last "seqid" value returned corresponding to the current "other" value.¶
- an indication of the current status of the locks associated with this stateid, in particular, whether these have been revoked and if so, for what reason.¶
With this information, an incoming stateid can be validated and the appropriate error returned when necessary. Special and non-special stateids are handled separately. (See Section 8.2.3 for a discussion of special stateids.)¶
Note that stateids are implicitly qualified by the current client ID, as derived from the client ID associated with the current session. Note, however, that the semantics of the session will prevent stateids associated with a previous client or server instance from being analyzed by this procedure.¶
If server restart has resulted in an invalid client ID or a session ID that is invalid, SEQUENCE will return an error and the operation that takes a stateid as an argument will never be processed.¶
If there has been a server restart where there is a persistent
session and all leased state has been lost, then the session
in question will, although valid, be marked as dead, and any
operation not satisfied by means of the reply cache will
receive the error NFS4ERR_
When a stateid is being tested and the "other" field is all zeros or all ones, a check that the "other" and "seqid" fields match a defined combination for a special stateid is done and the results determined as follows:¶
-
If the "other" and "seqid" fields do not match a defined
combination associated with a special stateid, the error
NFS4ERR_
BAD_ STATEID is returned.¶ - If the special stateid is one designating the current stateid and there is a current stateid, then the current stateid is substituted for the special stateid and the checks appropriate to non-special stateids are performed.¶
-
If the combination is valid in general but is not
appropriate to the context in which the stateid is used
(e.g., an all-zero stateid is used when an OPEN stateid
is required in a LOCK operation), the error
NFS4ERR_
BAD_ STATEID is also returned.¶ - Otherwise, the check is completed and the special stateid is accepted as valid.¶
When a stateid is being tested, and the "other" field is neither all zeros nor all ones, the following procedure could be used to validate an incoming stateid and return an appropriate error, when necessary, assuming that the "other" field would be divided into a table index and an entry generation.¶
-
If the table index field is outside the range of the
associated table, return NFS4ERR_
BAD_ STATEID .¶ -
If the selected table entry is of a different generation than
that specified in the incoming stateid, return
NFS4ERR_
BAD_ STATEID .¶ -
If the selected table entry does not match the current
filehandle, return NFS4ERR_
BAD_ STATEID .¶ -
If the client ID in the table entry does not match the
client ID associated with the current session,
return NFS4ERR_
BAD_ STATEID .¶ -
If the stateid represents revoked state, then return
NFS4ERR_
EXPIRED, NFS4ERR_ ADMIN_ REVOKED, or NFS4ERR_ DELEG_ REVOKED, as appropriate.¶ -
If the stateid type is not valid for the context in which the
stateid appears, return NFS4ERR_
BAD_ STATEID . Note that a stateid may be valid in general, as would be reported by the TEST_ STATEID operation, but be invalid for a particular operation, as, for example, when a stateid that doesn't represent byte-range locks is passed to the non -from_ open case of LOCK or to LOCKU, or when a stateid that does not represent an open is passed to CLOSE or OPEN_ DOWNGRADE . In such cases, the server MUST return NFS4ERR_ BAD_ STATEID .¶ -
If the "seqid" field is not zero and it is greater
than the current sequence value corresponding to the
current "other" field, return NFS4ERR_
BAD_ STATEID .¶ -
If the "seqid" field is not zero and it is less
than the current sequence value corresponding to the
current "other" field, return NFS4ERR_
OLD_ STATEID .¶ - Otherwise, the stateid is valid and the table entry should contain any additional information about the type of stateid and information associated with that particular type of stateid, such as the associated set of locks, e.g., open-owner and lock-owner information, as well as information on the specific locks, e.g., open modes and byte-ranges.¶
8.2.5. Stateid Use for I/O Operations
Clients performing I/O operations need to select an appropriate stateid based on the locks (including opens and delegations) held by the client and the various types of state-owners sending the I/O requests. SETATTR operations that change the file size are treated like I/O operations in this regard.¶
The following rules, applied in order of decreasing priority, govern the selection of the appropriate stateid. In following these rules, the client will only consider locks of which it has actually received notification by an appropriate operation response or callback. Note that the rules are slightly different in the case of I/O to data servers when file layouts are being used (see Section 13.9.1).¶
- If the client holds a delegation for the file in question, the delegation stateid SHOULD be used.¶
- Otherwise, if the entity corresponding to the lock-owner (e.g., a process) sending the I/O has a byte-range lock stateid for the associated open file, then the byte-range lock stateid for that lock-owner and open file SHOULD be used.¶
- If there is no byte-range lock stateid, then the OPEN stateid for the open file in question SHOULD be used.¶
- Finally, if none of the above apply, then a special stateid SHOULD be used.¶
Ignoring these rules may result in situations in which the server does not have information necessary to properly process the request. For example, when mandatory byte-range locks are in effect, if the stateid does not indicate the proper lock-owner, via a lock stateid, a request might be avoidably rejected.¶
The server however should not try to enforce these ordering rules and should use whatever information is available to properly process I/O requests. In particular, when a client has a delegation for a given file, it SHOULD take note of this fact in processing a request, even if it is sent with a special stateid.¶
8.2.6. Stateid Use for SETATTR Operations
Because each operation is associated with a session ID and from that the clientid can be determined, operations do not need to include a stateid for the server to be able to determine whether they should cause a delegation to be recalled or are to be treated as done within the scope of the delegation.¶
In the case of SETATTR operations, a stateid is present. In cases other than those that set the file size, the client may send either a special stateid or, when a delegation is held for the file in question, a delegation stateid. While the server SHOULD validate the stateid and may use the stateid to optimize the determination as to whether a delegation is held, it SHOULD note the presence of a delegation even when a special stateid is sent, and MUST accept a valid delegation stateid when sent.¶
8.3. Lease Renewal
Each client/server pair, as represented by a client ID, has a single lease. The purpose of the lease is to allow the client to indicate to the server, in a low-overhead way, that it is active, and thus that the server is to retain the client's locks. This arrangement allows the server to remove stale locking-related objects that are held by a client that has crashed or is otherwise unreachable, once the relevant lease expires. This in turn allows other clients to obtain conflicting locks without being delayed indefinitely by inactive or unreachable clients. It is not a mechanism for cache consistency and lease renewals may not be denied if the lease interval has not expired.¶
Since each session is associated with a specific
client (identified by the client's client ID), any
operation sent on that session is an indication
that the associated client is reachable. When a
request is sent for a given session, successful
execution of a SEQUENCE operation (or successful
retrieval of the result of SEQUENCE from the reply
cache) on an unexpired lease will result in the
lease being implicitly renewed, for the standard
renewal period (equal to the lease_
If the client ID's lease has not expired when the server receives a SEQUENCE operation, then the server MUST renew the lease. If the client ID's lease has expired when the server receives a SEQUENCE operation, the server MAY renew the lease; this depends on whether any state was revoked as a result of the client's failure to renew the lease before expiration.¶
Absent other activity that would renew the lease, a COMPOUND
consisting of a single SEQUENCE operation will suffice. The
client should also take communication
- When trunking is in effect, the client should consider sending multiple requests on different connections, in order to ensure that renewal occurs, even in the event of blockage in the path used for one of those connections.¶
-
Transport retransmission delays might become so large as to approach or exceed the length of the lease period. This may be particularly likely when the server is unresponsive due to a restart; see Section 8.4.2.1. If the client implementation is not careful, transport retransmission delays can result in the client failing to detect a server restart before the grace period ends. The scenario is that the client is using a transport with exponential backoff, such that the maximum retransmission timeout exceeds both the grace period and the lease_
time attribute. A network partition causes the client's connection's retransmission interval to back off, and even after the partition heals, the next transport-level retransmission is sent after the server has restarted and its grace period ends.¶ The client MUST either recover from the ensuing NFS4ERR_
NO_ GRACE errors or it MUST ensure that, despite transport-level retransmission intervals that exceed the lease_ time, a SEQUENCE operation is sent that renews the lease before expiration. The client can achieve this by associating a new connection with the session, and sending a SEQUENCE operation on it. However, if the attempt to establish a new connection is delayed for some reason (e.g., exponential backoff of the connection establishment packets), the client will have to abort the connection establishment attempt before the lease expires, and attempt to reconnect.¶
If the server renews the lease upon receiving
a SEQUENCE operation, the server MUST NOT allow the lease
to expire while the rest of the operations
in the COMPOUND procedure's request are still
executing. Once the last operation has finished, and
the response to COMPOUND has been sent, the server
MUST set the lease to expire no sooner than the
sum of current time and the value of the lease_
A client ID's lease can expire when it has been
at least the lease interval
Because the SEQUENCE operation is the basic mechanism to renew
a lease, and because it must be done at least once for each
lease period, it is the natural mechanism whereby the server
will inform the client of changes in the lease status that the
client needs to be informed of. The client should inspect the
status flags
-
The status bits SEQ4_
STATUS_ CB_ PATH_ DOWN and SEQ4_ STATUS_ CB_ PATH_ DOWN_ SESSION indicate problems with the backchannel that the client may need to address in order to receive callback requests.¶ -
The status bits SEQ4_
STATUS_ CB_ GSS_ CONTEXTS_ EXPIRING and SEQ4_ STATUS_ CB_ GSS_ CONTEXTS_ EXPIRED indicate problems with GSS contexts or RPCSEC_ GSS handles for the backchannel that the client might have to address in order to allow callback requests to be sent.¶ -
The status bits SEQ4_
STATUS_ EXPIRED_ ALL_ STATE_ REVOKED, SEQ4_ STATUS_ EXPIRED_ SOME_ STATE_ REVOKED, SEQ4_ STATUS_ ADMIN_ STATE_ REVOKED, and SEQ4_ STATUS_ RECALLABLE_ STATE_ REVOKED notify the client of lock revocation events. When these bits are set, the client should use TEST_ STATEID to find what stateids have been revoked and use FREE_ STATEID to acknowledge loss of the associated state.¶ -
The status bit SEQ4_
STATUS_ LEASE_ MOVE indicates that responsibility for lease renewal has been transferred to one or more new servers.¶ -
The status bit SEQ4_
STATUS_ RESTART_ RECLAIM_ NEEDED indicates that due to server restart the client must reclaim locking state.¶ -
The status bit SEQ4_
STATUS_ BACKCHANNEL_ FAULT indicates that the server has encountered an unrecoverable fault with the backchannel (e.g., it has lost track of a sequence ID for a slot in the backchannel).¶
8.4. Crash Recovery
A critical requirement in crash recovery is that both the client and the server know when the other has failed. Additionally, it is required that a client sees a consistent view of data across server restarts. All READ and WRITE operations that may have been queued within the client or network buffers must wait until the client has successfully recovered the locks protecting the READ and WRITE operations. Any that reach the server before the server can safely determine that the client has recovered enough locking state to be sure that such operations can be safely processed must be rejected. This will happen because either:¶
-
The state presented is no longer valid since it is
associated with a now invalid client ID. In this case, the
client will receive either an NFS4ERR_
BADSESSION or NFS4ERR_ DEADSESSION error, and any attempt to attach a new session to that invalid client ID will result in an NFS4ERR_ STALE_ CLIENTID error.¶ -
Subsequent recovery of locks may make execution of the
operation inappropriate
(NFS4ERR_ GRACE ).¶
8.4.1. Client Failure and Recovery
In the event that a client fails, the server may release the client's locks when the associated lease has expired. Conflicting locks from another client may only be granted after this lease expiration. As discussed in Section 8.3, when a client has not failed and re-establishes its lease before expiration occurs, requests for conflicting locks will not be granted.¶
To minimize client delay upon restart, lock requests are associated
with an instance of the client by a client-supplied verifier. This
verifier is part of the client_
Since the verifier will be changed by the client upon each initialization, the server can compare a new verifier to the verifier associated with currently held locks and determine that they do not match. This signifies the client's new instantiation and subsequent loss (upon confirmation of the new client ID) of locking state. As a result, the server is free to release all locks held that are associated with the old client ID that was derived from the old verifier. At this point, conflicting locks from other clients, kept waiting while the lease had not yet expired, can be granted. In addition, all stateids associated with the old client ID can also be freed, as they are no longer reference-able.¶
Note that the verifier must have the same uniqueness properties as the verifier for the COMMIT operation.¶
8.4.2. Server Failure and Recovery
If the server loses locking state (usually as a result of a restart), it must allow clients time to discover this fact and re-establish the lost locking state. The client must be able to re-establish the locking state without having the server deny valid requests because the server has granted conflicting access to another client. Likewise, if there is a possibility that clients have not yet re-established their locking state for a file and that such locking state might make it invalid to perform READ or WRITE operations. For example, if mandatory locks are a possibility, the server must disallow READ and WRITE operations for that file.¶
A client can determine that loss of locking state has occurred via several methods.¶
-
When a SEQUENCE (most common) or other operation returns
NFS4ERR_
BADSESSION, this may mean that the session has been destroyed but the client ID is still valid. The client sends a CREATE_ SESSION request with the client ID to re-establish the session. If CREATE_ SESSION fails with NFS4ERR_ STALE_ CLIENTID, the client must establish a new client ID (see Section 8.1) and re-establish its lock state with the new client ID, after the CREATE_ SESSION operation succeeds (see Section 8.4.2.1).¶ -
When a SEQUENCE (most common) or other operation on a
persistent session returns NFS4ERR_
DEADSESSION, this indicates that a session is no longer usable for new, i.e., not satisfied from the reply cache, operations. Once all pending operations are determined to be either performed before the retry or not performed, the client sends a CREATE_ SESSION request with the client ID to re-establish the session. If CREATE_ SESSION fails with NFS4ERR_ STALE_ CLIENTID, the client must establish a new client ID (see Section 8.1) and re-establish its lock state after the CREATE_ SESSION, with the new client ID, succeeds (Section 8.4.2.1).¶ -
When an operation, neither SEQUENCE nor preceded by SEQUENCE (for
example, CREATE_
SESSION, DESTROY_ SESSION ), returns NFS4ERR_ STALE_ CLIENTID, the client MUST establish a new client ID (Section 8.1) and re-establish its lock state (Section 8.4.2.1).¶
8.4.2.1. State Reclaim
When state information and the associated locks are lost as a result of a server restart, the protocol must provide a way to cause that state to be re-established. The approach used is to define, for most types of locking state (layouts are an exception), a request whose function is to allow the client to re-establish on the server a lock first obtained from a previous instance. Generally, these requests are variants of the requests normally used to create locks of that type and are referred to as "reclaim-type" requests, and the process of re-establishing such locks is referred to as "reclaiming" them.¶
Because each client must have an opportunity to reclaim
all of the locks that it has without the possibility that
some other client will be granted a conflicting lock,
a "grace period" is devoted
to the reclaim process. During this period, requests
creating client IDs and
sessions are handled normally, but locking requests are
subject to special restrictions. Only
reclaim-type locking requests are allowed, unless the
server can reliably determine (through state
persistently maintained across restart instances) that
granting any such lock cannot possibly conflict with a
subsequent reclaim.
When a request is made to obtain
a new lock (i.e., not a reclaim-type request) during the
grace period and such a determination cannot be made,
the server must return the error NFS4ERR_
Once a session is established using the new client ID, the
client will use reclaim-type locking requests (e.g., LOCK
operations with reclaim set to TRUE and OPEN operations with a
claim type of CLAIM_
During the grace period, the server must reject READ
and WRITE operations
and non-reclaim locking requests (i.e., other LOCK
and OPEN operations) with an error of NFS4ERR_
The grace period may last until all clients that are known to
possibly have had locks have done a global RECLAIM_
Some additional time in order to allow a client to establish a new client ID and session and to effect lock reclaims may be added to the lease time. Note that analogous rules apply to file system-specific grace periods discussed in Section 11.11.9.¶
If the server can reliably determine that granting a non-reclaim
request will not conflict with reclamation of locks by other
clients, the NFS4ERR_
For a server to provide simple, valid handling during the grace
period, the easiest method is to simply reject all non-reclaim locking
requests and READ and WRITE operations by returning the NFS4ERR_
For example, if the server maintained on stable storage summary information on whether mandatory locks exist, either mandatory byte-range locks, or share reservations specifying deny modes, many requests could be allowed during the grace period. If it is known that no such share reservations exist, OPEN request that do not specify deny modes may be safely granted. If, in addition, it is known that no mandatory byte-range locks exist, either through information stored on stable storage or simply because the server does not support such locks, READ and WRITE operations may be safely processed during the grace period. Another important case is where it is known that no mandatory byte-range locks exist, either because the server does not provide support for them or because their absence is known from persistently recorded data. In this case, READ and WRITE operations specifying stateids derived from reclaim-type operations may be validly processed during the grace period because of the fact that the valid reclaim ensures that no lock subsequently granted can prevent the I/O.¶
To reiterate, for a server that allows non-reclaim lock and I/O requests to be processed during the grace period, it MUST determine that no lock subsequently reclaimed will be rejected and that no lock subsequently reclaimed would have prevented any I/O operation processed during the grace period.¶
Clients should be prepared for the return of NFS4ERR_
A reclaim-type locking request outside the server's grace period can only succeed if the server can guarantee that no conflicting lock or I/O request has been granted since restart.¶
A server may, upon restart, establish a new value for the lease
period. Therefore, clients should, once a new client ID is
established, refetch the lease_
The possibility exists that, because of server configuration
events, the client will be communicating with a server
different than the one on which the locks were obtained, as
shown by the combination of eir_
- If the server scope is different, the client should not attempt to reclaim locks. In this situation, no lock reclaim is possible. Any attempt to re-obtain the locks with non-reclaim operations is problematic since there is no guarantee that the existing filehandles will be recognized by the new server, or that if recognized, they denote the same objects. It is best to treat the locks as having been revoked by the reconfiguration event.¶
-
If the server scope is the same, the client should attempt
to reclaim locks, even if the eir_
server_ owner value is different. In this situation, it is the responsibility of the server to return NFS4ERR_ NO_ GRACE if it cannot provide correct support for lock reclaim operations, including the prevention of edge conditions.¶
The eir_
8.4.2.1.1. Security Considerations for State Reclaim
During the grace period, a client can reclaim state that it believes or
asserts it had before the server restarted. Unless the server
maintained a complete record of all the state the client had,
the server has little choice but to trust the client. (Of course,
if the server maintained a complete record, then it would not
have to force the client to reclaim state after server restart.)
While the server has to trust the client to tell the truth, the
negative consequences for security are limited to enabling
denial
Nonetheless, it is possible that a client operating in error or
maliciously could, during reclaim, prevent another client from
reclaiming access to state. For example, an attacker could
send an OPEN reclaim operation with a deny mode that prevents
another client from reclaiming the OPEN state it had before the
server restarted.
The attacker could perform the same denial of service during
steady state prior to server restart, as long as the
attacker had permissions. Given that the attack
vectors are equivalent, the grace period does not offer any
additional opportunity for denial of service, and any concerns
about this attack vector, whether during grace or steady state,
are addressed the same way: use RPCSEC_
Note that if prior to restart the server had client
IDs with the EXCHGID4_
8.4.3. Network Partitions and Recovery
If the duration of a network partition is greater than the lease period provided by the server, the server will not have received a lease renewal from the client. If this occurs, the server may free all locks held for the client or it may allow the lock state to remain for a considerable period, subject to the constraint that if a request for a conflicting lock is made, locks associated with an expired lease do not prevent such a conflicting lock from being granted but MUST be revoked as necessary so as to avoid interfering with such conflicting requests.¶
If the server chooses to delay freeing of lock state until there is a conflict, it may either free all of the client's locks once there is a conflict or it may only revoke the minimum set of locks necessary to allow conflicting requests. When it adopts the finer-grained approach, it must revoke all locks associated with a given stateid, even if the conflict is with only a subset of locks.¶
When the server chooses to free all of a client's lock state, either immediately upon lease expiration or as a result of the first attempt to obtain a conflicting a lock, the server may report the loss of lock state in a number of ways.¶
The server may choose to invalidate the session and the associated
client ID. In this case, once the client can communicate
with the server, it will receive an NFS4ERR_
Another possibility is for the server to maintain the session and
client ID but for all stateids held by the
client to become invalid or stale. Once the client can reach
the server after such a network partition, the status returned by
the SEQUENCE operation will indicate a loss of locking state; i.e.,
the flag SEQ4_
When the server adopts a finer-grained approach to revocation
of locks when a client's lease has expired, only a subset of stateids
will normally become invalid during a network partition.
When the client can communicate with the server after such a
network partition heals, the status returned by the SEQUENCE
operation will indicate a partial loss of locking state
When a network partition is combined with a server restart, there are edge conditions that place requirements on the server in order to avoid silent data corruption following the server restart. Two of these edge conditions are known, and are discussed below.¶
The first edge condition arises as a result of the scenarios such as the following:¶
- Client A acquires a lock.¶
- Client A and server experience mutual network partition, such that client A is unable to renew its lease.¶
- Client A's lease expires, and the server releases the lock.¶
- Client B acquires a lock that would have conflicted with that of client A.¶
- Client B releases its lock.¶
- Server restarts.¶
- Network partition between client A and server heals.¶
- Client A connects to a new server instance and finds out about server restart.¶
- Client A reclaims its lock within the server's grace period.¶
Thus, at the final step, the server has erroneously granted client A's lock reclaim. If client B modified the object the lock was protecting, client A will experience object corruption.¶
The second known edge condition arises in situations such as the following:¶
- Client A acquires one or more locks.¶
- Server restarts.¶
- Client A and server experience mutual network partition, such that client A is unable to reclaim all of its locks within the grace period.¶
- Server's reclaim grace period ends. Client A has either no locks or an incomplete set of locks known to the server.¶
- Client B acquires a lock that would have conflicted with a lock of client A that was not reclaimed.¶
- Client B releases the lock.¶
- Server restarts a second time.¶
- Network partition between client A and server heals.¶
- Client A connects to new server instance and finds out about server restart.¶
- Client A reclaims its lock within the server's grace period.¶
As with the first edge condition, the final step of the scenario of the second edge condition has the server erroneously granting client A's lock reclaim.¶
Solving the first and second edge conditions requires either that the server
always assumes after it restarts that some edge condition
occurs, and thus returns NFS4ERR_
-
the co_
ownerid field from the client_ owner4 presented in the EXCHANGE_ ID operation.¶ -
a boolean that indicates if the client's lease expired
or if there was administrative intervention (see
Section 8.5) to revoke
a byte-range lock, share reservation, or delegation and
there has been no acknowledgment, via FREE_
STATEID, of such revocation.¶ -
a boolean that indicates whether the client may have locks
that it believes to be reclaimable in situations in which the
grace period was terminated, making the server's view of
lock reclaimability suspect. The server will set this for
any client record in stable storage where the client has
not done a suitable RECLAIM_
COMPLETE (global or file system-specific depending on the target of the lock request) before it grants any new (i.e., not reclaimed) lock to any client.¶
Assuming the above record keeping, for the first edge condition, after
the server restarts, the record that client A's lease expired means
that another client could have acquired a conflicting byte-range lock,
share reservation, or delegation. Hence, the server must reject a
reclaim from client A with the error NFS4ERR_
For the second edge condition, after the server restarts for a second
time, the indication that the client had not completed its
reclaims at the time at which the grace period ended
means that the server must reject a reclaim from client A
with the error NFS4ERR_
When either edge condition occurs, the client's attempt to reclaim
locks will result in the error NFS4ERR_
Regardless of the level and approach to record keeping, the server MUST implement one of the following strategies (which apply to reclaims of share reservations, byte-range locks, and delegations):¶
-
Reject all reclaims with NFS4ERR_
NO_ GRACE . This is extremely unforgiving, but necessary if the server does not record lock state in stable storage.¶ -
Record sufficient state in stable storage such that all known edge conditions involving server restart, including the two noted in this section, are detected. It is acceptable to erroneously recognize an edge condition and not allow a reclaim, when, with sufficient knowledge, it would be allowed. The error the server would return in this case is NFS4ERR_
NO_ GRACE . Note that it is not known if there are other edge conditions.¶ In the event that, after a server restart, the server determines there is unrecoverable damage or corruption to the information in stable storage, then for all clients and/or locks that may be affected, the server MUST return NFS4ERR_
NO_ GRACE .¶
A mandate for the client's handling of the NFS4ERR_
When the client receives NFS4ERR_
For further discussion of revocation of locks, see Section 8.5.¶
8.5. Server Revocation of Locks
At any point, the server can revoke locks held by a client, and the client must be prepared for this event. When the client detects that its locks have been or may have been revoked, the client is responsible for validating the state information between itself and the server. Validating locking state for the client means that it must verify or reclaim state for each lock currently held.¶
The first occasion of lock revocation is upon server
restart. Note that this includes situations
in which sessions are persistent and locking state is
lost. In this class of instances, the client will
receive an error
The second occasion of lock revocation is the inability to renew the lease
before expiration, as discussed in
Section 8.4.3. While this is
considered a rare or unusual event,
the client must be prepared to recover. The server is responsible
for determining the precise consequences of the lease expiration,
informing the client of the scope of the lock revocation decided
upon. The client then uses the status information provided
by the server in the SEQUENCE results (field sr_
The third occasion of lock revocation can occur as a result of
revocation of locks within the lease period, either because of
administrative intervention or because a recallable lock (a
delegation or layout) was not returned within the lease period
after having been recalled. While these are
considered rare events, they are possible, and the client must be
prepared to deal with them. When either of these events occurs,
the client finds out about the situation through the status returned
by the SEQUENCE operation. Any use of stateids associated with
locks revoked during the lease period will receive the error
NFS4ERR_
In all situations in which a subset of locking state may have been
revoked, which include all cases in which locking state is revoked
within the lease period, it is up to the client to determine which
locks have been revoked and which have not. It does this by
using the TEST_
8.6. Short and Long Leases
When determining the time period for the server lease, the usual lease
trade-offs apply. A short lease is good for fast server recovery at a
cost of increased operations to effect lease renewal (when there are
no other operations during the period to effect lease renewal as a
side effect). A long lease is certainly kinder and gentler to
servers trying to handle very large numbers of clients. The number of extra requests
to effect lock renewal drops in inverse
proportion to the lease time. The disadvantages of a long lease
include the possibility of slower recovery after certain failures.
After server failure, a longer grace period may be required when
some clients do not promptly reclaim their locks and do a
global RECLAIM_
A long lease is practical if the server can store lease state in stable storage. Upon recovery, the server can reconstruct the lease state from its stable storage and continue operation with its clients.¶
8.7. Clocks, Propagation Delay, and Calculating Lease Expiration
To avoid the need for synchronized clocks, lease times are granted by the server as a time delta. However, there is a requirement that the client and server clocks do not drift excessively over the duration of the lease. There is also the issue of propagation delay across the network, which could easily be several hundred milliseconds, as well as the possibility that requests will be lost and need to be retransmitted.¶
To take propagation delay into account, the client should subtract it from lease times (e.g., if the client estimates the one-way propagation delay as 200 milliseconds, then it can assume that the lease is already 200 milliseconds old when it gets it). In addition, it will take another 200 milliseconds to get a response back to the server. So the client must send a lease renewal or write data back to the server at least 400 milliseconds before the lease would expire. If the propagation delay varies over the life of the lease (e.g., the client is on a mobile host), the client will need to continuously subtract the increase in propagation delay from the lease times.¶
The server's lease period configuration should take into account the network distance of the clients that will be accessing the server's resources. It is expected that the lease period will take into account the network propagation delays and other network delay factors for the client population. Since the protocol does not allow for an automatic method to determine an appropriate lease period, the server's administrator may have to tune the lease period.¶
8.8. Obsolete Locking Infrastructure from NFSv4.0
There are a number of operations and fields within existing operations that no longer have a function in NFSv4.1. In one way or another, these changes are all due to the implementation of sessions that provide client context and exactly once semantics as a base feature of the protocol, separate from locking itself.¶
The following NFSv4.0 operations MUST NOT be implemented in NFSv4.1.
The server MUST return NFS4ERR_
-
SETCLIENTID since its function has been replaced by
EXCHANGE_
ID .¶ -
SETCLIENTID_
CONFIRM since client ID confirmation now happens by means of CREATE_ SESSION .¶ -
OPEN_
CONFIRM because state -owner -based seqids have been replaced by the sequence ID in the SEQUENCE operation.¶ -
RELEASE_
LOCKOWNER because lock-owners with no associated locks do not have any sequence -related state and so can be deleted by the server at will.¶ - RENEW because every SEQUENCE operation for a session causes lease renewal, making a separate operation superfluous.¶
Also, there are a number of fields, present in existing operations, related to locking that have no use in minor version 1. They were used in minor version 0 to perform functions now provided in a different fashion.¶
- Sequence ids used to sequence requests for a given state-owner and to provide retry protection, now provided via sessions.¶
- Client IDs used to identify the client associated with a given request. Client identification is now available using the client ID associated with the current session, without needing an explicit client ID field.¶
Such vestigial fields in existing operations have no function in
NFSv4.1 and are ignored by the server. Note that client IDs in
operations new to NFSv4.1 (such as CREATE_
9. File Locking and Share Reservations
To support Win32 share reservations, it is necessary to provide operations that atomically open or create files. Having a separate share/unshare operation would not allow correct implementation of the Win32 OpenFile API. In order to correctly implement share semantics, the previous NFS protocol mechanisms used when a file is opened or created (LOOKUP, CREATE, ACCESS) need to be replaced. The NFSv4.1 protocol defines an OPEN operation that is capable of atomically looking up, creating, and locking a file on the server.¶
9.1. Opens and Byte-Range Locks
It is assumed that manipulating a byte-range lock is rare when compared to READ and WRITE operations. It is also assumed that server restarts and network partitions are relatively rare. Therefore, it is important that the READ and WRITE operations have a lightweight mechanism to indicate if they possess a held lock. A LOCK operation contains the heavyweight information required to establish a byte-range lock and uniquely define the owner of the lock.¶
9.1.1. State-Owner Definition
When opening a file or requesting a byte-range lock, the
client must specify an identifier that represents the owner of
the requested lock. This identifier is in the form of a
state-owner, represented in the protocol by a state_
Owners of opens and owners of byte-range locks are separate
entities and remain separate even if the same opaque arrays
are used to designate owners of each. The protocol distinguishes
between open-owners (represented by open_
Each open is associated with a specific open-owner while each byte-range lock is associated with a lock-owner and an open-owner, the latter being the open-owner associated with the open file under which the LOCK operation was done. Delegations and layouts, on the other hand, are not associated with a specific owner but are associated with the client as a whole (identified by a client ID).¶
9.1.2. Use of the Stateid and Locking
All READ, WRITE, and SETATTR operations contain a stateid. For the purposes of this section, SETATTR operations that change the size attribute of a file are treated as if they are writing the area between the old and new sizes (i.e., the byte-range truncated or added to the file by means of the SETATTR), even where SETATTR is not explicitly mentioned in the text. The stateid passed to one of these operations must be one that represents an open, a set of byte-range locks, or a delegation, or it may be a special stateid representing anonymous access or the special bypass stateid.¶
If the state-owner performs a READ or WRITE operation in a situation in which it has established a byte-range lock or share reservation on the server (any OPEN constitutes a share reservation), the stateid (previously returned by the server) must be used to indicate what locks, including both byte-range locks and share reservations, are held by the state-owner. If no state is established by the client, either a byte-range lock or a share reservation, a special stateid for anonymous state (zero as the value for "other" and "seqid") is used. (See Section 8.2.3 for a description of 'special' stateids in general.) Regardless of whether a stateid for anonymous state or a stateid returned by the server is used, if there is a conflicting share reservation or mandatory byte-range lock held on the file, the server MUST refuse to service the READ or WRITE operation.¶
Share reservations are established by OPEN operations and by their
nature are mandatory in that when the OPEN denies READ or WRITE
operations, that denial results in such operations being rejected with
error NFS4ERR_
Note that for UNIX environments that support mandatory byte-range locking,
the distinction between advisory and mandatory locking is subtle. In
fact, advisory and mandatory byte-range locks are exactly the same as
far as the APIs and requirements on implementation. If the mandatory
lock attribute is set on the file, the server checks to see if the
lock-owner has an appropriate shared
For Windows environments, byte-range locks are always mandatory, so the server always checks for byte-range locks during I/O requests.¶
Thus, the LOCK operation does not need to distinguish between advisory and mandatory byte-range locks. It is the server's processing of the READ and WRITE operations that introduces the distinction.¶
Every stateid that is validly passed to READ, WRITE, or SETATTR,
with the exception of special stateid values,
defines an access mode for the file (i.e.,
OPEN4_
-
For stateids associated with opens, this is the mode defined by
the original OPEN that caused the
allocation of the OPEN stateid
and as modified by subsequent OPENs and OPEN_
DOWNGRADEs for the same open-owner/file pair.¶ - For stateids returned by byte-range LOCK operations, the appropriate mode is the access mode for the OPEN stateid associated with the lock set represented by the stateid.¶
- For delegation stateids, the access mode is based on the type of delegation.¶
When a READ, WRITE, or SETATTR (that specifies the size attribute) operation is done, the operation is subject to checking against the access mode to verify that the operation is appropriate given the stateid with which the operation is associated.¶
In the case of WRITE-type operations (i.e., WRITEs and SETATTRs that
set size), the server MUST verify that the access mode allows writing
and MUST return an NFS4ERR_
The READ bypass special stateid (all bits of "other" and "seqid" set to one) indicates a desire to bypass locking checks. The server MAY allow READ operations to bypass locking checks at the server, when this special stateid is used. However, WRITE operations with this special stateid value MUST NOT bypass locking checks and are treated exactly the same as if a special stateid for anonymous state were used.¶
A lock may not be granted while a READ or WRITE operation using one of the special stateids is being performed and the scope of the lock to be granted would conflict with the READ or WRITE operation. This can occur when:¶
- A mandatory byte-range lock is requested with a byte-range that conflicts with the byte-range of the READ or WRITE operation. For the purposes of this paragraph, a conflict occurs when a shared lock is requested and a WRITE operation is being performed, or an exclusive lock is requested and either a READ or a WRITE operation is being performed.¶
- A share reservation is requested that denies reading and/or writing and the corresponding operation is being performed.¶
-
A delegation is to be granted and the delegation type would
prevent the I/O operation, i.e., READ and WRITE conflict with
an OPEN_
DELEGATE_ WRITE delegation and WRITE conflicts with an OPEN_ DELEGATE_ READ delegation.¶
When a client holds a delegation, it needs to ensure that the stateid sent conveys the association of operation with the delegation, to avoid the delegation from being avoidably recalled. When the delegation stateid, a stateid open associated with that delegation, or a stateid representing byte-range locks derived from such an open is used, the server knows that the READ, WRITE, or SETATTR does not conflict with the delegation but is sent under the aegis of the delegation. Even though it is possible for the server to determine from the client ID (via the session ID) that the client does in fact have a delegation, the server is not obliged to check this, so using a special stateid can result in avoidable recall of the delegation.¶
9.2. Lock Ranges
The protocol allows a lock-owner to request a lock with a byte-range
and then either upgrade, downgrade, or unlock a sub-range of
the initial lock, or a byte-range that
overlaps -- fully or partially -- either with that initial lock or a
combination of a set of existing locks for the same lock-owner. It
is expected that this will be an uncommon type of request. In any
case, servers or server file systems may not be able to support
sub-range lock semantics. In the event that a server receives a
locking request that represents a sub-range of current locking state
for the lock-owner, the server is allowed to return the error
NFS4ERR_
The client is discouraged from combining multiple independent locking ranges that happen to be adjacent into a single request since the server may not support sub-range requests for reasons related to the recovery of byte-range locking state in the event of server failure. As discussed in Section 8.4.2, the server may employ certain optimizations during recovery that work effectively only when the client's behavior during lock recovery is similar to the client's locking behavior prior to server failure.¶
9.3. Upgrading and Downgrading Locks
If a client has a WRITE_
If a client has a READ_
9.4. Stateid Seqid Values and Byte-Range Locks
When a LOCK or LOCKU operation is performed,
the stateid returned has the same "other" value as the argument's
stateid, and a
"seqid" value that is incremented (relative to the argument's
stateid) to reflect the occurrence
of the LOCK or LOCKU operation. The server MUST increment
the value of the "seqid" field whenever there is any change
to the locking status of any byte offset as described by
any of the locks covered by the stateid. A change in locking
status includes a change from locked to unlocked or the reverse or
a change from being locked for READ_
When there is no such change, as, for example, when a range
already locked for WRITE_
9.5. Issues with Multiple Open-Owners
When the same file is opened by multiple open-owners, a client will have multiple OPEN stateids for that file, each associated with a different open-owner. In that case, there can be multiple LOCK and LOCKU requests for the same lock-owner sent using the different OPEN stateids, and so a situation may arise in which there are multiple stateids, each representing byte-range locks on the same file and held by the same lock-owner but each associated with a different open-owner.¶
In such a situation, the locking status of each byte
(i.e., whether it is locked, the READ_
When a byte is locked by the lock-owner in question, the open-owner to which that byte-range lock is assigned SHOULD be that of the open-owner associated with the stateid through which the last LOCK of that byte was done. When there is a change in the open-owner associated with locks for the stateid through which a LOCK or LOCKU was done, the "seqid" field of the stateid MUST be incremented, even if the locking, in terms of lock-owners has not changed. When there is a change to the set of locked bytes associated with a different stateid for the same lock-owner, i.e., associated with a different open-owner, the "seqid" value for that stateid MUST NOT be incremented.¶
9.6. Blocking Locks
Some clients require the support of blocking locks. While NFSv4.1
provides a callback when a previously unavailable lock becomes
available, this is an OPTIONAL feature and clients cannot
depend on its presence. Clients need to be prepared to continually
poll for the lock. This presents a fairness problem. Two of
the lock types, READW_
Servers may also note the lock types and delay returning denial of the request to allow extra time for a conflicting lock to be released, allowing a successful return. In this way, clients can avoid the burden of needless frequent polling for blocking locks. The server should take care in the length of delay in the event the client retransmits the request.¶
If a server receives a blocking LOCK operation, denies it, and then later receives a nonblocking request for the same lock, which is also denied, then it should remove the lock in question from its list of pending blocking locks. Clients should use such a nonblocking request to indicate to the server that this is the last time they intend to poll for the lock, as may happen when the process requesting the lock is interrupted. This is a courtesy to the server, to prevent it from unnecessarily waiting a lease period before granting other LOCK operations. However, clients are not required to perform this courtesy, and servers must not depend on them doing so. Also, clients must be prepared for the possibility that this final locking request will be accepted.¶
When a server indicates, via the flag OPEN4_
9.8. OPEN/CLOSE Operations
To provide correct share semantics, a client MUST use the OPEN
operation to obtain the initial filehandle and indicate the desired
access and what access, if any, to deny. Even if the client intends to
use a special stateid for anonymous state or READ bypass,
it must still obtain the
filehandle for the regular file with the OPEN operation so the
appropriate share semantics can be applied. Clients that do not
have a deny mode built into their programming interfaces for opening
a file should request a deny mode of
OPEN4_
The OPEN operation with the CREATE flag also subsumes the CREATE operation for regular files as used in previous versions of the NFS protocol. This allows a create with a share to be done atomically.¶
The CLOSE operation removes all share reservations held by the
open-owner on that file. If byte-range locks are held, the client
SHOULD release all locks before sending a CLOSE operation. The server MAY free
all outstanding locks on CLOSE, but some servers may not support the
CLOSE of a file that still has byte-range locks held. The server MUST
return failure, NFS4ERR_
The LOOKUP operation will return a filehandle without establishing any
lock state on the server. Without a valid stateid, the server will
assume that the client has the least access. For example, if one
client opened a file with OPEN4_
9.9. Open Upgrade and Downgrade
When an OPEN is done for a file and the open-owner for which the OPEN
is being done already has the file open, the result is to upgrade the
open file status maintained on the server to include the access and
deny bits specified by the new OPEN as well as those for the existing
OPEN. The result is that there is one open file, as far as the
protocol is concerned, and it includes the union of the access and
deny bits for all of the OPEN requests completed. The OPEN
is represented by a single stateid whose "other" value matches
that of the original open, and whose "seqid" value is incremented
to reflect the occurrence of the upgrade. The increment is required
in cases in which the "upgrade" results in no change to the open mode (e.g., an OPEN
is done for read when the existing open file is opened for
OPEN4_
When the server chooses to export multiple filehandles corresponding to the same file object and returns different filehandles on two different OPENs of the same file object, the server MUST NOT "OR" together the access and deny bits and coalesce the two open files. Instead, the server must maintain separate OPENs with separate stateids and will require separate CLOSEs to free them.¶
When multiple open files on the client are merged into a single OPEN
file object on the server, the close of one of the open files (on the
client) may necessitate change of the access and deny status of the
open file on the server. This is because the union of the access and
deny bits for the remaining opens may be smaller (i.e., a proper
subset) than previously. The OPEN_
9.10. Parallel OPENs
Unlike the case of NFSv4.0, in which OPEN operations for the same open-owner are inherently serialized because of the owner-based seqid, multiple OPENs for the same open-owner may be done in parallel. When clients do this, they may encounter situations in which, because of the existence of hard links, two OPEN operations may turn out to open the same file, with a later OPEN performed being an upgrade of the first, with this fact only visible to the client once the operations complete.¶
In this situation, clients may determine the order in which the OPENs were performed by examining the stateids returned by the OPENs. Stateids that share a common value of the "other" field can be recognized as having opened the same file, with the order of the operations determinable from the order of the "seqid" fields, mod any possible wraparound of the 32-bit field.¶
When the possibility exists that the client will send multiple
OPENs for the same open-owner in parallel, it may be the case that
an open upgrade may happen without the client knowing beforehand
that this could happen. Because of this possibility, CLOSEs and
OPEN_
9.11. Reclaim of Open and Byte-Range Locks
Special forms of the LOCK and OPEN operations are provided when it is necessary to re-establish byte-range locks or opens after a server failure.¶
-
To reclaim existing opens, an OPEN operation is performed
using a CLAIM_
PREVIOUS . Because the client, in this type of situation, will have already opened the file and have the filehandle of the target file, this operation requires that the current filehandle be the target file, rather than a directory, and no file name is specified.¶ - To reclaim byte-range locks, a LOCK operation with the reclaim parameter set to true is used.¶
Reclaims of opens associated with delegations are discussed in Section 10.2.1.¶
10. Client-Side Caching
Client-side caching of data, of file attributes, and of file names is essential to providing good performance with the NFS protocol. Providing distributed cache coherence is a difficult problem, and previous versions of the NFS protocol have not attempted it. Instead, several NFS client implementation techniques have been used to reduce the problems that a lack of coherence poses for users. These techniques have not been clearly defined by earlier protocol specifications, and it is often unclear what is valid or invalid client behavior.¶
The NFSv4.1 protocol uses many techniques similar to those that have been used in previous protocol versions. The NFSv4.1 protocol does not provide distributed cache coherence. However, it defines a more limited set of caching guarantees to allow locks and share reservations to be used without destructive interference from client-side caching.¶
In addition, the NFSv4.1 protocol introduces a delegation mechanism, which allows many decisions normally made by the server to be made locally by clients. This mechanism provides efficient support of the common cases where sharing is infrequent or where sharing is read-only.¶
10.1. Performance Challenges for Client-Side Caching
Caching techniques used in previous versions of the NFS protocol have been successful in providing good performance. However, several scalability challenges can arise when those techniques are used with very large numbers of clients. This is particularly true when clients are geographically distributed, which classically increases the latency for cache revalidation requests.¶
The previous versions of the NFS protocol repeat their file data cache validation requests at the time the file is opened. This behavior can have serious performance drawbacks. A common case is one in which a file is only accessed by a single client. Therefore, sharing is infrequent.¶
In this case, repeated references to the server to find that no conflicts exist are expensive. A better option with regards to performance is to allow a client that repeatedly opens a file to do so without reference to the server. This is done until potentially conflicting operations from another client actually occur.¶
A similar situation arises in connection with byte-range locking. Sending LOCK and LOCKU operations as well as the READ and WRITE operations necessary to make data caching consistent with the locking semantics (see Section 10.3.2) can severely limit performance. When locking is used to provide protection against infrequent conflicts, a large penalty is incurred. This penalty may discourage the use of byte-range locking by applications.¶
The NFSv4.1 protocol provides more aggressive caching strategies with the following design goals:¶
- Compatibility with a large range of server semantics.¶
- Providing the same caching benefits as previous versions of the NFS protocol when unable to support the more aggressive model.¶
- Requirements for aggressive caching are organized so that a large portion of the benefit can be obtained even when not all of the requirements can be met.¶
The appropriate requirements for the server are discussed in later sections in which specific forms of caching are covered (see Section 10.4).¶
10.2. Delegation and Callbacks
Recallable delegation of server responsibilitie
A delegation is passed from the server to the client, specifying the object of the delegation and the type of delegation. There are different types of delegations, but each type contains a stateid to be used to represent the delegation when performing operations that depend on the delegation. This stateid is similar to those associated with locks and share reservations but differs in that the stateid for a delegation is associated with a client ID and may be used on behalf of all the open-owners for the given client. A delegation is made to the client as a whole and not to any specific process or thread of control within it.¶
The backchannel is established by CREATE_
Unlike locks, an operation by a second client to a delegated file will cause the server to recall a delegation through a callback. For individual operations, we will describe, under IMPLEMENTATION, when such operations are required to effect a recall. A number of points should be noted, however.¶
- The server is free to recall a delegation whenever it feels it is desirable and may do so even if no operations requiring recall are being done.¶
- Operations done outside the NFSv4.1 protocol, due to, for example, access by other protocols, or by local access, also need to result in delegation recall when they make analogous changes to file system data. What is crucial is if the change would invalidate the guarantees provided by the delegation. When this is possible, the delegation needs to be recalled and MUST be returned or revoked before allowing the operation to proceed.¶
- The semantics of the file system are crucial in defining when delegation recall is required. If a particular change within a specific implementation causes change to a file attribute, then delegation recall is required, whether that operation has been specifically listed as requiring delegation recall. Again, what is critical is whether the guarantees provided by the delegation are being invalidated.¶
Despite those caveats, the implementation sections for a number of operations describe situations in which delegation recall would be required under some common circumstances:¶
- For GETATTR, see Section 18.7.4.¶
- For OPEN, see Section 18.16.4.¶
- For READ, see Section 18.22.4.¶
- For REMOVE, see Section 18.25.4.¶
- For RENAME, see Section 18.26.4.¶
- For SETATTR, see Section 18.30.4.¶
- For WRITE, see Section 18.32.4.¶
On recall, the client holding the delegation needs to flush modified
state (such as modified data) to the server and return the
delegation. The conflicting request will not be acted on until
the recall is complete. The recall is considered complete when
the client returns the delegation or the server times its wait
for the delegation to be returned and revokes the delegation as
a result of the timeout. In the interim, the server will either
delay responding to conflicting requests or respond to them with
NFS4ERR_
At the time the client receives a delegation recall, it may have substantial state that needs to be flushed to the server. Therefore, the server should allow sufficient time for the delegation to be returned since it may involve numerous RPCs to the server. If the server is able to determine that the client is diligently flushing state to the server as a result of the recall, the server may extend the usual time allowed for a recall. However, the time allowed for recall completion should not be unbounded.¶
An example of this is when responsibility to mediate opens on a given file is delegated to a client (see Section 10.4). The server will not know what opens are in effect on the client. Without this knowledge, the server will be unable to determine if the access and deny states for the file allow any particular open until the delegation for the file has been returned.¶
A client failure or a network partition can result in failure to respond to a recall callback. In this case, the server will revoke the delegation, which in turn will render useless any modified state still on the client.¶
10.2.1. Delegation Recovery
There are three situations that delegation recovery needs to deal with:¶
In the event the client restarts, the failure to renew the lease will result in the revocation of byte-range locks and share reservations. Delegations, however, may be treated a bit differently.¶
There will be situations in which delegations will need to be re-established after a client restarts. The reason for this is that the client may have file data stored locally and this data was associated with the previously held delegations. The client will need to re-establish the appropriate file state on the server.¶
To allow for this type of client recovery, the server MAY extend the
period for delegation recovery beyond the typical lease expiration
period. This implies that requests from other clients that conflict
with these delegations will need to wait. Because the normal recall
process may require significant time for the client to flush changed
state to the server, other clients need be prepared for delays that
occur because of a conflicting delegation. This longer interval would
increase the window for clients to restart and consult stable storage
so that the delegations can be reclaimed. For OPEN delegations, such
delegations are reclaimed using OPEN with a claim type of
CLAIM_
A server MAY support claim types of CLAIM_
When the server restarts, delegations are reclaimed (using
the OPEN operation with CLAIM_
- Upon reclaim, a client reporting resources assigned to it by an earlier server instance must be granted those resources.¶
- The server has unquestionable authority to determine whether delegations are to be granted and, once granted, whether they are to be continued.¶
- The use of callbacks should not be depended upon until the client has proven its ability to receive them.¶
When a client needs to reclaim a delegation and there is no associated
open, the client may use the CLAIM_
When a client has more than a single open associated with a delegation,
state for those additional opens can be established using OPEN
operations of type CLAIM_
When a network partition occurs, delegations are subject to freeing by the server when the lease renewal period expires. This is similar to the behavior for locks and share reservations. For delegations, however, the server may extend the period in which conflicting requests are held off. Eventually, the occurrence of a conflicting request from another client will cause revocation of the delegation. A loss of the backchannel (e.g., by later network configuration change) will have the same effect. A recall request will fail and revocation of the delegation will result.¶
A client normally finds out about revocation of a delegation when it
uses a stateid associated with a delegation and receives one of the
errors NFS4ERR_
10.3. Data Caching
When applications share access to a set of files, they need to be implemented so as to take account of the possibility of conflicting access by another application. This is true whether the applications in question execute on different clients or reside on the same client.¶
Share reservations and byte-range locks are the facilities the NFSv4.1 protocol provides to allow applications to coordinate access by using mutual exclusion facilities. The NFSv4.1 protocol's data caching must be implemented such that it does not invalidate the assumptions on which those using these facilities depend.¶
10.3.1. Data Caching and OPENs
In order to avoid invalidating the sharing assumptions on which applications rely, NFSv4.1 clients should not provide cached data to applications or modify it on behalf of an application when it would not be valid to obtain or modify that same data via a READ or WRITE operation.¶
Furthermore, in the absence of an OPEN delegation (see Section 10.4), two additional rules apply. Note that these rules are obeyed in practice by many NFSv3 clients.¶
-
First, cached data present on a client must be revalidated after doing an OPEN. Revalidating means that the client fetches the change attribute from the server, compares it with the cached change attribute, and if different, declares the cached data (as well as the cached attributes) as invalid. This is to ensure that the data for the OPENed file is still correctly reflected in the client's cache. This validation must be done at least when the client's OPEN operation includes a deny of OPEN4_
SHARE_ DENY_ WRITE or OPEN4_ SHARE_ DENY_ BOTH, thus terminating a period in which other clients may have had the opportunity to open the file with OPEN4_ SHARE_ ACCESS_ WRITE /OPEN4_ SHARE_ ACCESS_ BOTH access. Clients may choose to do the revalidation more often (i.e., at OPENs specifying a deny mode of OPEN4_ SHARE_ DENY_ NONE ) to parallel the NFSv3 protocol's practice for the benefit of users assuming this degree of cache revalidation.¶ Since the change attribute is updated for data and metadata modifications, some client implementors may be tempted to use the time_
modify attribute and not the change attribute to validate cached data, so that metadata changes do not spuriously invalidate clean data. The implementor is cautioned in this approach. The change attribute is guaranteed to change for each update to the file, whereas time_ modify is guaranteed to change only at the granularity of the time_ delta attribute. Use by the client's data cache validation logic of time_ modify and not change runs the risk of the client incorrectly marking stale data as valid. Thus, any cache validation approach by the client MUST include the use of the change attribute.¶ -
Second, modified data must be flushed to the server before closing a
file OPENed for OPEN4_
SHARE_ ACCESS_ WRITE . This is complementary to the first rule. If the data is not flushed at CLOSE, the revalidation done after the client OPENs a file is unable to achieve its purpose. The other aspect to flushing the data before close is that the data must be committed to stable storage, at the server, before the CLOSE operation is requested by the client. In the case of a server restart and a CLOSEd file, it may not be possible to retransmit the data to be written to the file, hence, this requirement.¶
10.3.2. Data Caching and File Locking
For those applications that choose to use byte-range locking instead of
share reservations to exclude inconsistent file access, there is an
analogous set of constraints that apply to client-side data caching.
These rules are effective only if the byte-range locking is used in a way
that matches in an equivalent way the actual READ and WRITE operations
executed. This is as opposed to byte-range locking that is based on pure
convention. For example, it is possible to manipulate a two-megabyte
file by dividing the file into two one-megabyte ranges and protecting
access to the two byte-ranges by byte-range locks on bytes zero and one. A WRITE_
The rules for data caching in the byte-range locking environment are:¶
- First, when a client obtains a byte-range lock for a particular byte-range, the data cache corresponding to that byte-range (if any cache data exists) must be revalidated. If the change attribute indicates that the file may have been updated since the cached data was obtained, the client must flush or invalidate the cached data for the newly locked byte-range. A client might choose to invalidate all of the non-modified cached data that it has for the file, but the only requirement for correct operation is to invalidate all of the data in the newly locked byte-range.¶
-
Second, before releasing a WRITE_
LT lock for a byte-range, all modified data for that byte-range must be flushed to the server. The modified data must also be written to stable storage.¶
Note that flushing data to the server and the invalidation of cached data must reflect the actual byte-ranges locked or unlocked. Rounding these up or down to reflect client cache block boundaries will cause problems if not carefully done. For example, writing a modified block when only half of that block is within an area being unlocked may cause invalid modification to the byte-range outside the unlocked area. This, in turn, may be part of a byte-range locked by another client. Clients can avoid this situation by synchronously performing portions of WRITE operations that overlap that portion (initial or final) that is not a full block. Similarly, invalidating a locked area that is not an integral number of full buffer blocks would require the client to read one or two partial blocks from the server if the revalidation procedure shows that the data that the client possesses may not be valid.¶
The data that is written to the server as a prerequisite to the unlocking of a byte-range must be written, at the server, to stable storage. The client may accomplish this either with synchronous writes or by following asynchronous writes with a COMMIT operation. This is required because retransmission of the modified data after a server restart might conflict with a lock held by another client.¶
A client implementation may choose to accommodate applications that use byte-range locking in non-standard ways (e.g., using a byte-range lock as a global semaphore) by flushing to the server more data upon a LOCKU than is covered by the locked range. This may include modified data within files other than the one for which the unlocks are being done. In such cases, the client must not interfere with applications whose READs and WRITEs are being done only within the bounds of byte-range locks that the application holds. For example, an application locks a single byte of a file and proceeds to write that single byte. A client that chose to handle a LOCKU by flushing all modified data to the server could validly write that single byte in response to an unrelated LOCKU operation. However, it would not be valid to write the entire block in which that single written byte was located since it includes an area that is not locked and might be locked by another client. Client implementations can avoid this problem by dividing files with modified data into those for which all modifications are done to areas covered by an appropriate byte-range lock and those for which there are modifications not covered by a byte-range lock. Any writes done for the former class of files must not include areas not locked and thus not modified on the client.¶
10.3.3. Data Caching and Mandatory File Locking
Client-side data caching needs to respect mandatory byte-range locking when
it is in effect. The presence of mandatory byte-range locking for a given
file is indicated when the client gets back NFS4ERR_
10.3.4. Data Caching and File Identity
When clients cache data, the file data needs to be organized according to the file system object to which the data belongs. For NFSv3 clients, the typical practice has been to assume for the purpose of caching that distinct filehandles represent distinct file system objects. The client then has the choice to organize and maintain the data cache on this basis.¶
In the NFSv4.1 protocol, there is now the possibility to have significant deviations from a "one filehandle per object" model because a filehandle may be constructed on the basis of the object's pathname. Therefore, clients need a reliable method to determine if two filehandles designate the same file system object. If clients were simply to assume that all distinct filehandles denote distinct objects and proceed to do data caching on this basis, caching inconsistencies would arise between the distinct client-side objects that mapped to the same server-side object.¶
By providing a method to differentiate filehandles, the NFSv4.1 protocol alleviates a potential functional regression in comparison with the NFSv3 protocol. Without this method, caching inconsistencies within the same client could occur, and this has not been present in previous versions of the NFS protocol. Note that it is possible to have such inconsistencies with applications executing on multiple clients, but that is not the issue being addressed here.¶
For the purposes of data caching, the following steps allow an NFSv4.1 client to determine whether two distinct filehandles denote the same server-side object:¶
- If GETATTR directed to two filehandles returns different values of the fsid attribute, then the filehandles represent distinct objects.¶
-
If GETATTR for any file with an fsid that matches the fsid of the two
filehandles in question returns a unique_
handles attribute with a value of TRUE, then the two objects are distinct.¶ - If GETATTR directed to the two filehandles does not return the fileid attribute for both of the handles, then it cannot be determined whether the two objects are the same. Therefore, operations that depend on that knowledge (e.g., client-side data caching) cannot be done reliably. Note that if GETATTR does not return the fileid attribute for both filehandles, it will return it for neither of the filehandles, since the fsid for both filehandles is the same.¶
- If GETATTR directed to the two filehandles returns different values for the fileid attribute, then they are distinct objects.¶
- Otherwise, they are the same object.¶
10.4. Open Delegation
When a file is being OPENed, the server may delegate further handling of opens and closes for that file to the opening client. Any such delegation is recallable since the circumstances that allowed for the delegation are subject to change. In particular, if the server receives a conflicting OPEN from another client, the server must recall the delegation before deciding whether the OPEN from the other client may be granted. Making a delegation is up to the server, and clients should not assume that any particular OPEN either will or will not result in an OPEN delegation. The following is a typical set of conditions that servers might use in deciding whether an OPEN should be delegated:¶
-
The client must be able to respond to the
server's callback requests. If a backchannel
has been established, the server will send
a CB_
COMPOUND request, containing a single operation, CB_ SEQUENCE, for a test of backchannel availability.¶ - The client must have responded properly to previous recalls.¶
- There must be no current OPEN conflicting with the requested delegation.¶
- There should be no current delegation that conflicts with the delegation being requested.¶
- The probability of future conflicting open requests should be low based on the recent history of the file.¶
- The existence of any server-specific semantics of OPEN/CLOSE that would make the required handling incompatible with the prescribed handling that the delegated client would apply (see below).¶
There are two types of OPEN delegations: OPEN_
When a client has an OPEN_
When a client has an OPEN delegation, it does not need to send OPENs or
CLOSEs to the server. Instead, the client may update the
appropriate status internally. For an OPEN_
When an OPEN delegation is made, the reply to the OPEN contains an OPEN delegation structure that specifies the following:¶
-
the type of delegation
(OPEN_ DELEGATE_ READ or OPEN_ DELEGATE_ WRITE ).¶ -
space limitation information to control flushing of data on close
(OPEN_ DELEGATE_ WRITE delegation only; see Section 10.4.1)¶ - an nfsace4 specifying read and write permissions¶
- a stateid to represent the delegation¶
The delegation stateid is separate and distinct from the stateid for the OPEN proper. The standard stateid, unlike the delegation stateid, is associated with a particular lock-owner and will continue to be valid after the delegation is recalled and the file remains open.¶
When a request internal to the client is made to open a file and an OPEN delegation is in effect, it will be accepted or rejected solely on the basis of the following conditions. Any requirement for other checks to be made by the delegate should result in the OPEN delegation being denied so that the checks can be made by the server itself.¶
- The access and deny bits for the request and the file as described in Section 9.7.¶
- The read and write permissions as determined below.¶
The nfsace4 passed with delegation can be used to avoid frequent ACCESS calls. The permission check should be as follows:¶
- If the nfsace4 indicates that the open may be done, then it should be granted without reference to the server.¶
- If the nfsace4 indicates that the open may not be done, then an ACCESS request must be sent to the server to obtain the definitive answer.¶
The server may return an nfsace4 that is more restrictive than the actual ACL of the file. This includes an nfsace4 that specifies denial of all access. Note that some common practices such as mapping the traditional user "root" to the user "nobody" (see Section 5.9) may make it incorrect to return the actual ACL of the file in the delegation response.¶
The use of a delegation together with various other forms of caching creates the possibility that no server authentication and authorization will ever be performed for a given user since all of the user's requests might be satisfied locally. Where the client is depending on the server for authentication and authorization, the client should be sure authentication and authorization occurs for each user by use of the ACCESS operation. This should be the case even if an ACCESS operation would not be required otherwise. As mentioned before, the server may enforce frequent authentication by returning an nfsace4 denying all access with every OPEN delegation.¶
10.4.1. Open Delegation and Data Caching
An OPEN delegation allows much of the message overhead associated with
the opening and closing files to be eliminated. An open when an OPEN
delegation is in effect does not require that a validation
message be sent to the server. The continued endurance of the
"OPEN_
For the purposes of OPEN delegation, READs and WRITEs done without an OPEN are treated as the functional equivalents of a corresponding type of OPEN. Although a client SHOULD NOT use special stateids when an open exists, delegation handling on the server can use the client ID associated with the current session to determine if the operation has been done by the holder of the delegation (in which case, no recall is necessary) or by another client (in which case, the delegation must be recalled and I/O not proceed until the delegation is returned or revoked).¶
With delegations, a client is able to avoid writing data to the server
when the CLOSE of a file is serviced. The file close system call is
the usual point at which the client is notified of a lack of stable
storage for the modified file data generated by the application. At
the close, file data is written to the server and, through normal
accounting, the server is able to determine if the available file system
space for the data has been exceeded (i.e., the server returns
NFS4ERR_
In the delegation response, the server provides either the limit of the size of the file or the number of modified blocks and associated block size. The server must ensure that the client will be able to write modified data to the server of a size equal to that provided in the original delegation. The server must make this assurance for all outstanding delegations. Therefore, the server must be careful in its management of available space for new or modified data, taking into account available file system space and any applicable quotas. The server can recall delegations as a result of managing the available file system space. The client should abide by the server's state space limits for delegations. If the client exceeds the stated limits for the delegation, the server's behavior is undefined.¶
Based on server conditions, quotas, or available file system space, the
server may grant OPEN_
With respect to authentication, flushing modified data to the server after a CLOSE has occurred may be problematic. For example, the user of the application may have logged off the client, and unexpired authentication credentials may not be present. In this case, the client may need to take special care to ensure that local unexpired credentials will in fact be available. This may be accomplished by tracking the expiration time of credentials and flushing data well in advance of their expiration or by making private copies of credentials to assure their availability when needed.¶
10.4.2. Open Delegation and File Locks
When a client holds an OPEN_
When a client holds an OPEN_
10.4.3. Handling of CB_GETATTR
The server needs to employ special handling for a GETATTR where the
target is a file that has an OPEN_
Since CB_
Since the form of the change attribute is determined by the server and is opaque to the client, the client and server need to agree on a method of communicating the modified state of the file. For the size attribute, the client will report its current view of the file size. For the change attribute, the handling is more involved.¶
For the client, the following steps will be taken when receiving an
OPEN_
- The value of the change attribute will be obtained from the server and cached. Let this value be represented by c.¶
- The client will create a value greater than c that will be used for communicating that modified data is held at the client. Let this value be represented by d.¶
-
When the client is queried via CB_
GETATTR for the change attribute, it checks to see if it holds modified data. If the file is modified, the value d is returned for the change attribute value. If this file is not currently modified, the client returns the value c for the change attribute.¶
For simplicity of implementation, the client MAY for each CB_
While the change attribute is opaque to the client in the sense that it has no idea what units of time, if any, the server is counting change with, it is not opaque in that the client has to treat it as an unsigned integer, and the server has to be able to see the results of the client's changes to that integer. Therefore, the server MUST encode the change attribute in network order when sending it to the client. The client MUST decode it from network order to its native order when receiving it, and the client MUST encode it in network order when sending it to the server. For this reason, change is defined as an unsigned integer rather than an opaque array of bytes.¶
For the server, the following steps will be taken when providing an
OPEN_
-
Upon providing an OPEN_
DELEGATE_ WRITE delegation, the server will cache a copy of the change attribute in the data structure it uses to record the delegation. Let this value be represented by sc.¶ - When a second client sends a GETATTR operation on the same file to the server, the server obtains the change attribute from the first client. Let this value be cc.¶
-
If the value cc is equal to sc, the file is not modified and the
server returns the current values for change, time_
metadata, and time_ modify (for example) to the second client.¶ -
If the value cc is NOT equal to sc, the file is currently modified at
the first client and most likely will be modified at the server at a
future time. The server then uses its current time to construct
attribute values for time_
metadata and time_ modify . A new value of sc, which we will call nsc, is computed by the server, such that nsc >= sc + 1. The server then returns the constructed time_ metadata, time_ modify, and nsc values to the requester. The server replaces sc in the delegation record with nsc. To prevent the possibility of time_ modify, time_ metadata, and change from appearing to go backward (which would happen if the client holding the delegation fails to write its modified data to the server before the delegation is revoked or returned), the server SHOULD update the file's metadata record with the constructed attribute values. For reasons of reasonable performance, committing the constructed attribute values to stable storage is OPTIONAL.¶
As discussed earlier in this section, the client MAY return the same
cc value on subsequent CB_
if (!modified) {
do CB_GETATTR for change and size;
if (cc != sc)
modified = TRUE;
} else {
do CB_GETATTR for size;
}
if (modified) {
sc = sc + 1;
time_modify = time_metadata = current_time;
update sc, time_modify, time_metadata into file's metadata;
}
This would return to the client (that sent GETATTR) the attributes
it requested, but make sure size comes from what
CB_
In the case that the file attribute size is different than the
server's current value, the server treats this as a modification
regardless of the value of the change attribute retrieved via
CB_
This methodology resolves issues of clock differences between client
and server and other scenarios where the use of CB_
It should be noted that the server is under no obligation to use
CB_
10.4.4. Recall of Open Delegation
The following events necessitate recall of an OPEN delegation:¶
- potentially conflicting OPEN request (or a READ or WRITE operation done with a special stateid)¶
- SETATTR sent by another client¶
- REMOVE request for the file¶
- RENAME request for the file as either the source or target of the RENAME¶
Whether a RENAME of a directory in the path leading to the file results in recall of an OPEN delegation depends on the semantics of the server's file system. If that file system denies such RENAMEs when a file is open, the recall must be performed to determine whether the file in question is, in fact, open.¶
In addition to the situations above, the server may choose to recall OPEN delegations at any time if resource constraints make it advisable to do so. Clients should always be prepared for the possibility of recall.¶
When a client receives a recall for an OPEN delegation, it needs to update state on the server before returning the delegation. These same updates must be done whenever a client chooses to return a delegation voluntarily. The following items of state need to be dealt with:¶
- If the file associated with the delegation is no longer open and no previous CLOSE operation has been sent to the server, a CLOSE operation must be sent to the server.¶
-
If a file has other open references at the client, then OPEN
operations must be sent to the server. The appropriate stateids will
be provided by the server for subsequent use by the client since the
delegation stateid will no longer be valid. These OPEN requests are
done with the claim type of CLAIM_
DELEGATE_ CUR . This will allow the presentation of the delegation stateid so that the client can establish the appropriate rights to perform the OPEN. (See Section 18.16, which describes the OPEN operation, for details.)¶ -
If there are granted byte-range locks, the corresponding LOCK operations
need to be performed. This applies to the OPEN_
DELEGATE_ WRITE delegation case only.¶ -
For an OPEN_
DELEGATE_ WRITE delegation, if at the time of recall the file is not open for OPEN4_ SHARE_ ACCESS_ WRITE /OPEN4_ SHARE_ ACCESS_ BOTH, all modified data for the file must be flushed to the server. If the delegation had not existed, the client would have done this data flush before the CLOSE operation.¶ -
For an OPEN_
DELEGATE_ WRITE delegation when a file is still open at the time of recall, any modified data for the file needs to be flushed to the server.¶ -
With the OPEN_
DELEGATE_ WRITE delegation in place, it is possible that the file was truncated during the duration of the delegation. For example, the truncation could have occurred as a result of an OPEN UNCHECKED with a size attribute value of zero. Therefore, if a truncation of the file has occurred and this operation has not been propagated to the server, the truncation must occur before any modified data is written to the server.¶
In the case of OPEN_
An implementation need not wait until delegation recall (or the decision to voluntarily return a delegation) to perform any of the above actions, if implementation considerations (e.g., resource availability constraints) make that desirable. Generally, however, the fact that the actual OPEN state of the file may continue to change makes it not worthwhile to send information about opens and closes to the server, except as part of delegation return. An exception is when the client has no more internal opens of the file. In this case, sending a CLOSE is useful because it reduces resource utilization on the client and server. Regardless of the client's choices on scheduling these actions, all must be performed before the delegation is returned, including (when applicable) the close that corresponds to the OPEN that resulted in the delegation. These actions can be performed either in previous requests or in previous operations in the same COMPOUND request.¶
10.4.5. Clients That Fail to Honor Delegation Recalls
A client may fail to respond to a recall for various reasons, such as
a failure of the backchannel from server to the client. The client
may be unaware of a failure in the backchannel. This lack of
awareness could result in the client finding out long after the
failure that its delegation has been revoked, and another client has
modified the data for which the client had a delegation. This is
especially a problem for the client that held an OPEN_
Status bits returned by SEQUENCE operations help to provide an
alternate way of informing the client of issues regarding the
status of the backchannel and of recalled delegations. When the
backchannel is not available, the server returns the status bit
SEQ4_
Whether the backchannel is functioning or not, it may be that the
recalled delegation is not returned. Note that the client's lease
might still be renewed, even though the recalled delegation is not
returned. In this situation, servers SHOULD revoke delegations that
are not returned in a period of time equal to the lease period. This
period of time should allow the client time to note the
backchannel
When delegations are revoked, the server will return with the
SEQ4_
10.4.6. Delegation Revocation
At the point a delegation is revoked, if there are associated opens on the client, these opens may or may not be revoked. If no byte-range lock or open is granted that is inconsistent with the existing open, the stateid for the open may remain valid and be disconnected from the revoked delegation, just as would be the case if the delegation were returned.¶
For example, if an OPEN for OPEN4_
When opens and/or locks are revoked, the applications holding these opens or locks need to be notified. This notification usually occurs by returning errors for READ/WRITE operations or when a close is attempted for the open file.¶
If no opens exist for the file at the point the delegation is revoked, then notification of the revocation is unnecessary. However, if there is modified data present at the client for the file, the user of the application should be notified. Unfortunately, it may not be possible to notify the user since active applications may not be present at the client. See Section 10.5.1 for additional details.¶
10.4.7. Delegations via WANT_DELEGATION
In addition to providing delegations as part of the reply
to OPEN operations, servers MAY provide delegations
separate from open, via the OPTIONAL WANT_
The WANT_
When a delegation is obtained using WANT_
The WANT_
10.5. Data Caching and Revocation
When locks and delegations are revoked, the assumptions upon which successful caching depends are no longer guaranteed. For any locks or share reservations that have been revoked, the corresponding state-owner needs to be notified. This notification includes applications with a file open that has a corresponding delegation that has been revoked. Cached data associated with the revocation must be removed from the client. In the case of modified data existing in the client's cache, that data must be removed from the client without being written to the server. As mentioned, the assumptions made by the client are no longer valid at the point when a lock or delegation has been revoked. For example, another client may have been granted a conflicting byte-range lock after the revocation of the byte-range lock at the first client. Therefore, the data within the lock range may have been modified by the other client. Obviously, the first client is unable to guarantee to the application what has occurred to the file in the case of revocation.¶
Notification to a state-owner will in many cases consist of simply
returning an error on the next and all subsequent READs/WRITEs to the
open file or on the close. Where the methods available to a client
make such notification impossible because errors for certain
operations may not be returned, more drastic action such as signals or
process termination may be appropriate. The justification here is
that an invariant on which an application depends may be violated.
Depending on how errors are typically treated for the client
10.5.1. Revocation Recovery for Write Open Delegation
Revocation recovery for an OPEN_
If there is modified data on the client, it must not be flushed
normally to the server. A client may attempt to provide a copy of the
file data as modified during the delegation under a different name in
the file system namespace to ease recovery. Note that when the
client can determine that the file has not been modified by any other
client, or when the client has a complete cached copy of the file in
question, such a saved copy of the client's view of the file may be of
particular value for recovery. In another case, recovery using a copy
of the file based partially on the client's cached data and partially
on the server's copy as modified by other clients will be anything but
straightforward
Saving of such modified data in delegation revocation situations may be limited to files of a certain size or might be used only when sufficient disk space is available within the target file system. Such saving may also be restricted to situations when the client has sufficient buffering resources to keep the cached copy available until it is properly stored to the target file system.¶
10.6. Attribute Caching
This section pertains to the caching of a file's attributes on a client when that client does not hold a delegation on the file.¶
The attributes discussed in this section do not include named attributes. Individual named attributes are analogous to files, and caching of the data for these needs to be handled just as data caching is for ordinary files. Similarly, LOOKUP results from an OPENATTR directory (as well as the directory's contents) are to be cached on the same basis as any other pathnames.¶
Clients may cache file attributes obtained from the server and use
them to avoid subsequent GETATTR requests. Such caching is write
through in that modification to file attributes is always done by
means of requests to the server and should not be done locally and
should not be cached. The exception to this are modifications to attributes that
are intimately connected with data caching. Therefore, extending a
file by writing data to the local data cache is reflected immediately
in the size as seen on the client without this change being
immediately reflected on the server. Normally, such changes are not
propagated directly to the server, but when the modified data is
flushed to the server, analogous attribute changes are made on the
server. When OPEN delegation is in effect, the modified attributes
may be returned to the server in reaction to a CB_
The result of local caching of attributes is that the attribute caches maintained on individual clients will not be coherent. Changes made in one order on the server may be seen in a different order on one client and in a third order on another client.¶
The typical file system application programming interfaces do not provide means to atomically modify or interrogate attributes for multiple files at the same time. The following rules provide an environment where the potential incoherencies mentioned above can be reasonably managed. These rules are derived from the practice of previous NFS protocols.¶
-
All attributes for a given file (per-fsid attributes excepted) are
cached as a unit at the client so that no non
-serializability can arise within the context of a single file.¶ - An upper time boundary is maintained on how long a client cache entry can be kept without being refreshed from the server.¶
- When operations are performed that change attributes at the server, the updated attribute set is requested as part of the containing RPC. This includes directory operations that update attributes indirectly. This is accomplished by following the modifying operation with a GETATTR operation and then using the results of the GETATTR to update the client's cached attributes.¶
Note that if the full set of attributes to be cached is requested by READDIR, the results can be cached by the client on the same basis as attributes obtained via GETATTR.¶
A client may validate its cached version of attributes for a file by
fetching both the change and time_
The client may maintain a cache of modified attributes for those
attributes intimately connected with data of modified regular files
(size, time_
In some operating environments, the equivalent to time_
10.7. Data and Metadata Caching and Memory Mapped Files
Some operating environments include the capability for an application to map a file's content into the application's address space. Each time the application accesses a memory location that corresponds to a block that has not been loaded into the address space, a page fault occurs and the file is read (or if the block does not exist in the file, the block is allocated and then instantiated in the application's address space).¶
As long as each memory-mapped access to the file requires a page
fault, the relevant attributes of the file that are used to detect
access and modification
- If there is an application on the server that has memory mapped a file that a client is also accessing, the client may not be able to get a consistent value of the change attribute to determine whether or not its cache is stale. A server that knows that the file is memory-mapped could always pessimistically return updated values for change so as to force the application to always get the most up-to-date data and metadata for the file. However, due to the negative performance implications of this, such behavior is OPTIONAL.¶
-
If the memory-mapped file is not being modified on the server, and
instead is just being read by an application via the memory-mapped
interface, the client will not see an updated time_
access attribute. However, in many operating environments, neither will any process running on the server. Thus, NFS clients are at no disadvantage with respect to local processes.¶ -
If there is another client that is memory mapping the file, and if
that client is holding an OPEN_
DELEGATE_ WRITE delegation, the same set of issues as discussed in the previous two bullet points apply. So, when a server does a CB_ GETATTR to a file that the client has modified in its cache, the reply from CB_ GETATTR will not necessarily be accurate. As discussed earlier, the client's obligation is to report that the file has been modified since the delegation was granted, not whether it has been modified again between successive CB_ GETATTR calls, and the server MUST assume that any file the client has modified in cache has been modified again between successive CB_ GETATTR calls. Depending on the nature of the client's memory management system, this weak obligation may not be possible. A client MAY return stale information in CB_ GETATTR whenever the file is memory-mapped.¶ -
The mixture of memory mapping and byte-range locking on the same file is problematic. Consider the following scenario, where a page size on each client is 8192 bytes.¶
- Client A memory maps the first page (8192 bytes) of file X.¶
- Client B memory maps the first page (8192 bytes) of file X.¶
-
Client A WRITE_
LT locks the first 4096 bytes.¶ -
Client B WRITE_
LT locks the second 4096 bytes.¶ - Client A, via a STORE instruction, modifies part of its locked byte-range.¶
- Simultaneous to client A, client B executes a STORE on part of its locked byte-range.¶
Here the challenge is for each client to resynchronize to get a correct view of the first page. In many operating environments, the virtual memory management systems on each client only know a page is modified, not that a subset of the page corresponding to the respective lock byte-ranges has been modified. So it is not possible for each client to do the right thing, which is to write to the server only that portion of the page that is locked. For example, if client A simply writes out the page, and then client B writes out the page, client A's data is lost.¶
Moreover, if mandatory locking is enabled on the file, then we have a
different problem. When clients A and B execute the STORE instructions,
the resulting page faults require a byte-range lock on the entire page.
Each client then tries to extend their locked range to the entire
page, which results in a deadlock. Communicating the NFS4ERR_
If a client is locking the entire memory-mapped file, there is no problem with advisory or mandatory byte-range locking, at least until the client unlocks a byte-range in the middle of the file.¶
Given the above issues, the following are permitted:¶
- Clients and servers MAY deny memory mapping a file for which they know there are byte-range locks.¶
- Clients and servers MAY deny a byte-range lock on a file they know is memory-mapped.¶
- A client MAY deny memory mapping a file that it knows requires mandatory locking for I/O. If mandatory locking is enabled after the file is opened and mapped, the client MAY deny the application further access to its mapped file.¶
10.8. Name and Directory Caching without Directory Delegations
The NFSv4.1 directory delegation facility (described in Section 10.9 below) is OPTIONAL for servers to implement. Even where it is implemented, it may not always be functional because of resource availability issues or other constraints. Thus, it is important to understand how name and directory caching are done in the absence of directory delegations. These topics are discussed in the next two subsections.¶
10.8.1. Name Caching
The results of LOOKUP and READDIR operations may be cached to avoid the cost of subsequent LOOKUP operations. Just as in the case of attribute caching, inconsistencies may arise among the various client caches. To mitigate the effects of these inconsistencies and given the context of typical file system APIs, an upper time boundary is maintained for how long a client name cache entry can be kept without verifying that the entry has not been made invalid by a directory change operation performed by another client.¶
When a client is not making changes to a directory for which there exist name cache entries, the client needs to periodically fetch attributes for that directory to ensure that it is not being modified. After determining that no modification has occurred, the expiration time for the associated name cache entries may be updated to be the current time plus the name cache staleness bound.¶
When a client is making changes to a given directory, it needs to
determine whether there have been changes made to the directory by
other clients. It does this by using the change attribute as reported
before and after the directory operation in the associated
change_
The simplest way to enable the client to make this determination is for the client to serialize all changes made to a specific directory. When this is done, and the server provides before and after values of the change attribute atomically, the client can simply compare the after value of the change attribute from one operation on a directory with the before value on the subsequent operation modifying that directory. When these are equal, the client is assured that no other client is modifying the directory in question.¶
When such serialization is not used, and there may be multiple simultaneous outstanding operations modifying a single directory sent from a single client, making this sort of determination can be more complicated. If two such operations complete in a different order than they were actually performed, that might give an appearance consistent with modification being made by another client. Where this appears to happen, the client needs to await the completion of all such modifications that were started previously, to see if the outstanding before and after change numbers can be sorted into a chain such that the before value of one change number matches the after value of a previous one, in a chain consistent with this client being the only one modifying the directory.¶
In either of these cases, the client is able to determine whether
the directory is being modified by another client.
If the comparison indicates that the directory was updated by
another client, the name cache associated with the modified directory
is purged from the client. If the comparison indicates no
modification, the name cache can be updated on the client to reflect
the directory operation and the associated timeout can be extended. The
post-operation change value needs to be saved as the basis for future
change_
As demonstrated by the scenario above, name caching requires that the
client revalidate name cache data by inspecting the change attribute
of a directory at the point when the name cache item was cached. This
requires that the server update the change attribute for directories
when the contents of the corresponding directory is modified. For a
client to use the change_
10.8.2. Directory Caching
The results of READDIR operations may be used to avoid subsequent
READDIR operations. Just as in the cases of attribute and name
caching, inconsistencies may arise among the various client caches. To
mitigate the effects of these inconsistencies
- Cached READDIR information for a directory that is not obtained in a single READDIR operation must always be a consistent snapshot of directory contents. This is determined by using a GETATTR before the first READDIR and after the last READDIR that contributes to the cache.¶
- An upper time boundary is maintained to indicate the length of time a directory cache entry is considered valid before the client must revalidate the cached information.¶
The revalidation technique parallels that discussed in the case of
name caching. When the client is not changing the directory in
question, checking the change attribute of the directory with GETATTR
is adequate. The lifetime of the cache entry can be extended at these
checkpoints. When a client is modifying the directory, the client
needs to use the change_
As demonstrated previously, directory caching requires that the client
revalidate directory cache data by inspecting the change attribute of
a directory at the point when the directory was cached. This requires
that the server update the change attribute for directories when the
contents of the corresponding directory is modified. For a client to
use the change_
10.9. Directory Delegations
10.9.1. Introduction to Directory Delegations
Directory caching for the NFSv4.1 protocol, as previously described, is similar to file caching in previous versions. Clients typically cache directory information for a duration determined by the client. At the end of a predefined timeout, the client will query the server to see if the directory has been updated. By caching attributes, clients reduce the number of GETATTR calls made to the server to validate attributes. Furthermore, frequently accessed files and directories, such as the current working directory, have their attributes cached on the client so that some NFS operations can be performed without having to make an RPC call. By caching name and inode information about most recently looked up entries in a Directory Name Lookup Cache (DNLC), clients do not need to send LOOKUP calls to the server every time these files are accessed.¶
This caching approach works reasonably well at reducing network traffic in many environments. However, it does not address environments where there are numerous queries for files that do not exist. In these cases of "misses", the client sends requests to the server in order to provide reasonable application semantics and promptly detect the creation of new directory entries. Examples of high miss activity are compilation in software development environments. The current behavior of NFS limits its potential scalability and wide-area sharing effectiveness in these types of environments. Other distributed stateful file system architectures such as AFS and DFS have proven that adding state around directory contents can greatly reduce network traffic in high-miss environments.¶
Delegation of directory contents is an OPTIONAL feature of NFSv4.1. Directory delegations provide similar traffic reduction benefits as with file delegations. By allowing clients to cache directory contents (in a read-only fashion) while being notified of changes, the client can avoid making frequent requests to interrogate the contents of slowly-changing directories, reducing network traffic and improving client performance. It can also simplify the task of determining whether other clients are making changes to the directory when the client itself is making many changes to the directory and changes are not serialized.¶
Directory delegations allow improved namespace cache consistency to be achieved through delegations and synchronous recalls, in the absence of notifications. In addition, if time-based consistency is sufficient, asynchronous notifications can provide performance benefits for the client, and possibly the server, under some common operating conditions such as slowly-changing and/or very large directories.¶
10.9.2. Directory Delegation Design
NFSv4.1 introduces the GET_
In addition to asking for delegations, a client can also ask for notifications for certain events. These events include changes to the directory's attributes and/or its contents. If a client asks for notification for a certain event, the server will notify the client when that event occurs. This will not result in the delegation being recalled for that client. The notifications are asynchronous and provide a way of avoiding recalls in situations where a directory is changing enough that the pure recall model may not be effective while trying to allow the client to get substantial benefit. In the absence of notifications, once the delegation is recalled the client has to refresh its directory cache; this might not be very efficient for very large directories.¶
The delegation is read-only and the client may not make changes to
the directory other than by performing NFSv4.1 operations that modify
the directory or the associated file attributes so that the server
has knowledge of these changes. In order to keep the client's
namespace synchronized with that of the server, the server will notify
the delegation
Delegations can be recalled by the server at any time. Normally, the server will recall the delegation when the directory changes in a way that is not covered by the notification, or when the directory changes and notifications have not been requested. If another client removes the directory for which a delegation has been granted, the server will recall the delegation.¶
10.9.3. Attributes in Support of Directory Notifications
See Section 5.11 for a description of the attributes associated with directory notifications.¶
10.9.4. Directory Delegation Recall
The server will recall the directory delegation by sending a callback to the client. It will use the same callback procedure as used for recalling file delegations. The server will recall the delegation when the directory changes in a way that is not covered by the notification. However, the server need not recall the delegation if attributes of an entry within the directory change.¶
If the server notices that handing out a delegation for a directory is causing too many notifications to be sent out, it may decide to not hand out delegations for that directory and/or recall those already granted. If a client tries to remove the directory for which a delegation has been granted, the server will recall all associated delegations.¶
The implementation sections for a number of operations describe situations in which notification or delegation recall would be required under some common circumstances. In this regard, a similar set of caveats to those listed in Section 10.2 apply.¶
- For CREATE, see Section 18.4.4.¶
- For LINK, see Section 18.9.4.¶
- For OPEN, see Section 18.16.4.¶
- For REMOVE, see Section 18.25.4.¶
- For RENAME, see Section 18.26.4.¶
- For SETATTR, see Section 18.30.4.¶
10.9.5. Directory Delegation Recovery
Recovery from client or server restart for state on regular files
has two main goals: avoiding the necessity of
breaking application guarantees with respect to locked files and
delivery of updates cached at the client. Neither of these
goals applies to directories protected by OPEN_
11. Multi-Server Namespace
NFSv4.1 supports attributes that allow a namespace to extend beyond the boundaries of a single server. It is desirable that clients and servers support construction of such multi-server namespaces. Use of such multi-server namespaces is OPTIONAL; however, and for many purposes, single-server namespaces are perfectly acceptable. The use of multi-server namespaces can provide many advantages by separating a file system's logical position in a namespace from the (possibly changing) logistical and administrative considerations that cause a particular file system to be located on a particular server via a single network access path that has to be known in advance or determined using DNS.¶
11.1. Terminology
In this section as a whole (i.e., within all of Section 11),
the phrase "client ID" always refers to the
64-bit shorthand identifier assigned by the server (a clientid4)
and never to the structure that the client uses to identify itself
to the server (called an nfs_
11.1.1. Terminology Related to Trunking
It is particularly important to clarify the distinction between trunking detection and trunking discovery. The definitions we present are applicable to all minor versions of NFSv4, but we will focus on how these terms apply to NFS version 4.1.¶
-
Trunking detection refers to ways of deciding whether two specific network addresses are connected to the same NFSv4 server. The means available to make this determination depends on the protocol version, and, in some cases, on the client implementation.¶
In the case of NFS version 4.1 and later minor versions, the means of trunking detection are as described in this document and are available to every client. Two network addresses connected to the same server can always be used together to access a particular server but cannot necessarily be used together to access a single session. See below for definitions of the terms "server
-trunkable" and "session -trunkable" .¶ -
Trunking discovery is a process by which a client using one network address can obtain other addresses that are connected to the same server. Typically, it builds on a trunking detection facility by providing one or more methods by which candidate addresses are made available to the client, who can then use trunking detection to appropriately filter them.¶
Despite the support for trunking detection, there was no description of trunking discovery provided in RFC 5661 [66], making it necessary to provide those means in this document.¶
The combination of a server network address and a particular connection type to be used by a connection is referred to as a "server endpoint". Although using different connection types may result in different ports being used, the use of different ports by multiple connections to the same network address in such cases is not the essence of the distinction between the two endpoints used. This is in contrast to the case of port-specific endpoints, in which the explicit specification of port numbers within network addresses is used to allow a single server node to support multiple NFS servers.¶
Two network addresses connected to the same server are said to
be server
Two network addresses connected to the same server such that
those addresses can be used to support a single common session
are referred to as session
11.1.2. Terminology Related to File System Location
Regarding the terminology that relates to the construction of multi-server namespaces out of a set of local per-server namespaces:¶
- Each server has a set of exported file systems that may be accessed by NFSv4 clients. Typically, this is done by assigning each file system a name within the pseudo-fs associated with the server, although the pseudo-fs may be dispensed with if there is only a single exported file system. Each such file system is part of the server's local namespace, and can be considered as a file system instance within a larger multi-server namespace.¶
- The set of all exported file systems for a given server constitutes that server's local namespace.¶
- In some cases, a server will have a namespace more extensive than its local namespace by using features associated with attributes that provide file system location information. These features, which allow construction of a multi-server namespace, are all described in individual sections below and include referrals (Section 11.5.6), migration (Section 11.5.5), and replication (Section 11.5.4).¶
- A file system present in a server's pseudo-fs may have multiple file system instances on different servers associated with it. All such instances are considered replicas of one another. Whether such replicas can be used simultaneously is discussed in Section 11.11.1, while the level of coordination between them (important when switching between them) is discussed in Sections 11.11.2 through 11.11.8 below.¶
- When a file system is present in a server's pseudo-fs, but there is no corresponding local file system, it is said to be "absent". In such cases, all associated instances will be accessed on other servers.¶
Regarding the terminology that relates to attributes used in trunking discovery and other multi-server namespace features:¶
-
File system location attributes include the fs_
locations and fs_ locations_ info attributes.¶ -
File system location entries provide the individual file system locations within the file system location attributes. Each such entry specifies a server, in the form of a hostname or an address, and an fs name, which designates the location of the file system within the server's local namespace. A file system location entry designates a set of server endpoints to which the client may establish connections. There may be multiple endpoints because a hostname may map to multiple network addresses and because multiple connection types may be used to communicate with a single network address. However, except where explicit port numbers are used to designate a set of servers within a single server node, all such endpoints MUST designate a way of connecting to a single server. The exact form of the location entry varies with the particular file system location attribute used, as described in Section 11.2.¶
The network addresses used in file system location entries typically appear without port number indications and are used to designate a server at one of the standard ports for NFS access, e.g., 2049 for TCP or 20049 for use with RPC-over-RDMA. Port numbers may be used in file system location entries to designate servers (typically user-level ones) accessed using other port numbers. In the case where network addresses indicate trunking relationships, the use of an explicit port number is inappropriate since trunking is a relationship between network addresses. See Section 11.5.2 for details.¶
- File system location elements are derived from location entries, and each describes a particular network access path consisting of a network address and a location within the server's local namespace. Such location elements need not appear within a file system location attribute, but the existence of each location element derives from a corresponding location entry. When a location entry specifies an IP address, there is only a single corresponding location element. File system location entries that contain a hostname are resolved using DNS, and may result in one or more location elements. All location elements consist of a location address that includes the IP address of an interface to a server and an fs name, which is the location of the file system within the server's local namespace. The fs name can be empty if the server has no pseudo-fs and only a single exported file system at the root filehandle.¶
-
Two file system location elements are said to be
server
-trunkable if they specify the same fs name and the location addresses are such that the location addresses are server -trunkable . When the corresponding network paths are used, the client will always be able to use client ID trunking, but will only be able to use session trunking if the paths are also session -trunkable .¶ -
Two file system location elements are said to be session
-trunkable if they specify the same fs name and the location addresses are such that the location addresses are session -trunkable . When the corresponding network paths are used, the client will be able to able to use either client ID trunking or session trunking.¶
Discussion of the term "replica" is complicated by the fact that
the term was used in RFC 5661 [66] with a meaning
different from that used in this document. In short,
in [66] each replica is identified by a
single network access path, while in the current document, a set
of network access paths that have server
Each set of server
11.2. File System Location Attributes
NFSv4.1 contains attributes that provide information about how a given file system may be accessed (i.e., at what network address and namespace position). As a result, file systems in the namespace of one server can be associated with one or more instances of that file system on other servers. These attributes contain file system location entries specifying a server address target (either as a DNS name representing one or more IP addresses or as a specific IP address) together with the pathname of that file system within the associated single-server namespace.¶
The fs_
- Guide choices among the various file system instances provided (e.g., priority for use, writability, currency, etc.).¶
- Help the client efficiently effect as seamless a transition as possible among multiple file system instances, when and if that should be necessary.¶
- Guide the selection of the appropriate connection type to be used when establishing a connection.¶
Within the fs_
The fs_
Within the fs_
11.3. File System Presence or Absence
A given location in an NFSv4.1 namespace (typically but not necessarily
a multi-server namespace) can have a number of file system instance
locations
associated with it (via the fs_
When there is no actual file system at the namespace location
in question, the file system is said to be "absent". An absent
file system contains no files or directories other than the
root. Any reference to it, except
to access a small set of attributes useful in determining
alternate locations, will result in an error, NFS4ERR_
While the error name suggests that we have a case of a file system
that once was present, and has only become absent later, this is
only one possibility. A position in the namespace may be permanently
absent with the set of file system(s) designated by the location
attributes being the only realization.
The name NFS4ERR_
Except in the case of GETATTR-type operations (to be discussed
later), when the
current filehandle at the start of an operation is within an
absent file system, that operation is not performed and the error
NFS4ERR_
Because a GETFH cannot succeed if the current filehandle is within an absent file system, filehandles within an absent file system cannot be transferred to the client. When a client does have filehandles within an absent file system, it is the result of obtaining them when the file system was present, and having the file system become absent subsequently.¶
It should be noted that because the check for the current filehandle being within an absent file system happens at the start of every operation, operations that change the current filehandle so that it is within an absent file system will not result in an error. This allows such combinations as PUTFH-GETATTR and LOOKUP-GETATTR to be used to get attribute information, particularly location attribute information, as discussed below.¶
The RECOMMENDED file system attribute fs_
11.4. Getting Attributes for an Absent File System
When a file system is absent, most attributes are not available,
but it is necessary to allow the client access to the small
set of attributes that are available, and most particularly
those that give information about the correct current locations
for this file system: fs_
11.4.1. GETATTR within an Absent File System
As mentioned above, an exception is made for GETATTR in that
attributes may be obtained for a filehandle within an absent
file system. This exception only applies if the attribute
mask contains at least one attribute bit that indicates the
client is interested in a result regarding an absent file
system: fs_
When a GETATTR is done on an absent file system, the set of
supported attributes is very limited. Many attributes, including
those that are normally REQUIRED, will not be available on an
absent file system. In addition to the attributes mentioned
above
- change_
policy : -
This attribute is useful for absent file systems
and can be helpful in summarizing to the client when any
of the location
-related attributes change.¶ - fsid:
- This attribute should be provided so that the client can determine file system boundaries, including, in particular, the boundary between present and absent file systems. This value must be different from any other fsid on the current server and need have no particular relationship to fsids on any particular destination to which the client might be directed.¶
- mounted_
on_ fileid : - For objects at the top of an absent file system, this attribute needs to be available. Since the fileid is within the present parent file system, there should be no need to reference the absent file system to provide this information.¶
Other attributes SHOULD NOT be made available for absent file systems, even when it is possible to provide them. The server should not assume that more information is always better and should avoid gratuitously providing additional information.¶
When a GETATTR operation includes a bit mask for one of the
attributes fs_
Handling of VERIFY/NVERIFY is similar to GETATTR in that if
the attribute mask does not include fs_
11.4.2. READDIR and Absent File Systems
A READDIR performed when the current filehandle is within an
absent file system will result in an NFS4ERR_
Attributes for an absent file system may be fetched via a READDIR for a directory in a present file system, when that directory contains the root directories of one or more absent file systems. In this case, the handling is as follows:¶
-
If the attribute set requested includes one of the attributes
fs_
locations, fs_ locations_ info, or fs_ status, then fetching of attributes proceeds normally and no NFS4ERR_ MOVED indication is returned, even when the rdattr_ error attribute is requested.¶ -
If the attribute set requested does not include one of the
attributes
fs_
locations, fs_ locations_ info, or fs_ status, then if the rdattr_ error attribute is requested, each directory entry for the root of an absent file system will report NFS4ERR_ MOVED as the value of the rdattr_ error attribute.¶ -
If the attribute set requested does not include any of the
attributes fs_
locations, fs_ locations_ info, fs_ status, or rdattr_ error, then the occurrence of the root of an absent file system within the directory will result in the READDIR failing with an NFS4ERR_ MOVED error.¶ - The unavailability of an attribute because of a file system's absence, even one that is ordinarily REQUIRED, does not result in any error indication. The set of attributes returned for the root directory of the absent file system in that case is simply restricted to those actually available.¶
11.5. Uses of File System Location Information
The file system location attributes
(i.e., fs_
When a file system is present, these attributes can provide the following:¶
- The locations of alternative replicas to be used to access the same data in the event of server failures, communications problems, or other difficulties that make continued access to the current replica impossible or otherwise impractical. Provisioning and use of such alternate replicas is referred to as "replication" and is discussed in Section 11.5.4 below.¶
- The network address(es) to be used to access the current file system instance or replicas of it. Client use of this information is discussed in Section 11.5.2 below.¶
Under some circumstances, multiple replicas
may be used simultaneously to provide higher
When a file system is present but becomes absent, clients can be
given the opportunity to have continued access to their data
using a different replica. In this case, a continued attempt
to use the data in the now-absent file system will result
in an NFS4ERR_
When a file system is currently absent, specification of file system location provides a means by which file systems located on one server can be associated with a namespace defined by another server, thus allowing a general multi-server namespace facility. A designation of such a remote instance, in place of a file system not previously present, is called a "pure referral" and is discussed in Section 11.5.6 below.¶
Because client support for attributes related to file
system location is
OPTIONAL, a server may choose to take action
to hide migration and referral events from such clients, by
acting as a proxy, for example. The server can determine
the presence of client support from the arguments of the
EXCHANGE_
11.5.1. Combining Multiple Uses in a Single Attribute
A file system location attribute will sometimes contain information relating to the location of multiple replicas, which may be used in different ways:¶
- File system location entries that relate to the file system instance currently in use provide trunking information, allowing the client to find additional network addresses by which the instance may be accessed.¶
- File system location entries that provide information about replicas to which access is to be transferred.¶
- Other file system location entries that relate to replicas that are available to use in the event that access to the current replica becomes unsatisfactory.¶
In order to simplify client handling and to allow the best choice of replicas to access, the server should adhere to the following guidelines:¶
- All file system location entries that relate to a single file system instance should be adjacent.¶
- File system location entries that relate to the instance currently in use should appear first.¶
- File system location entries that relate to replica(s) to which migration is occurring should appear before replicas that are available for later use if the current replica should become inaccessible.¶
11.5.2. File System Location Attributes and Trunking
Trunking is the use of multiple connections between a client and server in order to increase the speed of data transfer. A client may determine the set of network addresses to use to access a given file system in a number of ways:¶
- When the name of the server is known to the client, it may use DNS to obtain a set of network addresses to use in accessing the server.¶
-
The client may fetch the file system location attribute for the
file system. This will
provide either the name of the server (which can be turned
into a set of network addresses using DNS) or
a set of server
-trunkable location entries. Using the latter alternative, the server can provide addresses it regards as desirable to use to access the file system in question. Although these entries can contain port numbers, these port numbers are not used in determining trunking relationships. Once the candidate addresses have been determined and EXCHANGE_ ID done to the proper server, only the value of the so_ major_ id field returned by the servers in question determines whether a trunking relationship actually exists.¶
When the client fetches a location attribute for a file system, it should be noted that the client may encounter multiple entries for a number of reasons, such that when it determines trunking information, it may need to bypass addresses not trunkable with one already known.¶
The server can provide location entries that include either names or network addresses. It might use the latter form because of DNS-related security concerns or because the set of addresses to be used might require active management by the server.¶
Location entries used to discover candidate addresses for
use in trunking are subject to change, as discussed in
Section 11.5.7 below.
The client may respond to
such changes by using additional addresses once they are
verified or by ceasing to use
existing ones. The server can force the client to cease using
an address by returning NFS4ERR_
11.5.3. File System Location Attributes and Connection Type Selection
Because of the need to support multiple types of connections, clients face the issue of determining the proper connection type to use when establishing a connection to a given server network address. In some cases, this issue can be addressed through the use of the connection "step-up" facility described in Section 18.36. However, because there are cases in which that facility is not available, the client may have to choose a connection type with no possibility of changing it within the scope of a single connection.¶
The two file system location attributes differ as to the
information made available in this regard. The fs_
The fs_
Irrespective of the particular attribute used, when there is no indication that a step-up operation can be performed, a client supporting RDMA operation can establish a new RDMA connection, and it can be bound to the session already established by the TCP connection, allowing the TCP connection to be dropped and the session converted to further use in RDMA mode, if the server supports that.¶
11.5.4. File System Replication
The fs_
In the event that the occurrence of server failures, communications problems, or other difficulties make continued access to the current file system impossible or otherwise impractical, the client can use the alternate locations as a way to get continued access to its data.¶
The alternate locations may be physical replicas of the
(typically read-only) file system data supplemented by
possible asynchronous propagation of updates. Alternatively,
they may provide for the use of various forms of server
clustering in which multiple servers provide alternate
ways of accessing the same physical file system. How the
difference between replicas affects file system transitions
can be represented within the fs_
Although the location attributes provide some information about the nature of the inter-replica transition, many aspects of the semantics of possible asynchronous updates are not currently described by the protocol, which makes it necessary for clients using replication to switch among replicas undergoing change to familiarize themselves with the semantics of the update approach used. Due to this lack of specificity, many applications may find the use of migration more appropriate because a server can propagate all updates made before an established point in time to the new replica as part of the migration event.¶
11.5.4.1. File System Trunking Presented as Replication
In some situations, a file system location entry may indicate a file system access path to be used as an alternate location, where trunking, rather than replication, is to be used. The situations in which this is appropriate are limited to those in which both of the following are true:¶
- The two file system locations (i.e., the one on which the location attribute is obtained and the one specified in the file system location entry) designate the same locations within their respective single-server namespaces.¶
-
The two server network addresses (i.e., the one being used to
obtain the location attribute and the one specified in the file system
location entry) designate the same server (as indicated by the
same value of the so_
major_ id field of the eir_ server_ owner field returned in response to EXCHANGE_ ID ).¶
When these conditions hold, operations using both access paths are
generally trunked, although trunking may be disallowed when the
attribute fs_
-
When the fs_
locations_ info attribute shows the two entries as not having the same simultaneous -use class, trunking is inhibited, and the two access paths cannot be used together.¶ In this case, the two paths can be used serially with no transition activity required on the part of the client, and any transition between access paths is transparent. In transferring access from one to the other, the client acts as if communication were interrupted, establishing a new connection and possibly a new session to continue access to the same file system.¶
-
Note that for two such location entries, any information within
the fs_
locations_ info attribute that indicates the need for special transition activity, i.e., the appearance of the two file system location entries with different handle, fileid, write-verifier, change, and readdir classes, indicates a serious problem. The client, if it allows transition to the file system instance at all, must not treat any transition as a transparent one. The server SHOULD NOT indicate that these two entries (for the same file system on the same server) belong to different handle, fileid, write-verifier, change, and readdir classes, whether or not the two entries are shown belonging to the same simultaneous -use class.¶
These situations were recognized by [66], even though that document made no explicit mention of trunking:¶
- It treated the situation that we describe as trunking as one of simultaneous use of two distinct file system instances, even though, in the explanatory framework now used to describe the situation, the case is one in which a single file system is accessed by two different trunked addresses.¶
- It treated the situation in which two paths are to be used serially as a special sort of "transparent transition". However, in the descriptive framework now used to categorize transition situations, this is considered a case of a "network endpoint transition" (see Section 11.9).¶
11.5.5. File System Migration
When a file system is present and becomes inaccessible using the current access path, the NFSv4.1 protocol provides a means by which clients can be given the opportunity to have continued access to their data. This may involve using a different access path to the existing replica or providing a path to a different replica. The new access path or the location of the new replica is specified by a file system location attribute. The ensuing migration of access includes the ability to retain locks across the transition. Depending on circumstances, this can involve:¶
- The continued use of the existing clientid when accessing the current replica using a new access path.¶
- Use of lock reclaim, taking advantage of a per-fs grace period.¶
- Use of Transparent State Migration.¶
Typically, a client will be
accessing the file system in question, get an NFS4ERR_
In most instances, servers will choose to migrate all clients using a particular file system to a successor replica at the same time to avoid cases in which different clients are updating different replicas. However, migration of an individual client can be helpful in providing load balancing, as long as the replicas in question are such that they represent the same data as described in Section 11.11.8.¶
- In the case in which there is no transition between replicas (i.e., only a change in access path), there are no special difficulties in using of this mechanism to effect load balancing.¶
- In the case in which the two replicas are sufficiently coordinated as to allow a single client coherent, simultaneous access to both, there is, in general, no obstacle to the use of migration of particular clients to effect load balancing. Generally, such simultaneous use involves cooperation between servers to ensure that locks granted on two coordinated replicas cannot conflict and can remain effective when transferred to a common replica.¶
- In the case in which a large set of clients is accessing a file system in a read-only fashion, it can be helpful to migrate all clients with writable access simultaneously, while using load balancing on the set of read-only copies, as long as the rules in Section 11.11.8, which are designed to prevent data reversion, are followed.¶
In other cases, the client might not have sufficient guarantees of data similarity or coherence to function properly (e.g., the data in the two replicas is similar but not identical), and the possibility that different clients are updating different replicas can exacerbate the difficulties, making the use of load balancing in such situations a perilous enterprise.¶
The protocol does not specify how the file system will be moved between
servers or how updates to multiple replicas will be coordinated.
It is anticipated that a number of different
server
In the case of various forms of server clustering, the new location
may be another server providing access to the same physical file system. The client's
responsibilitie
Although a single successor location is typical, multiple locations may be provided. When multiple locations are provided, the client will typically use the first one provided. If that is inaccessible for some reason, later ones can be used. In such cases, the client might consider the transition to the new replica to be a migration event, even though some of the servers involved might not be aware of the use of the server that was inaccessible. In such a case, a client might lose access to locking state as a result of the access transfer.¶
When an alternate location is designated as the target for
migration, it must designate the same data
(with metadata being the same to the degree indicated by the
fs_
11.5.6. Referrals
Referrals allow the server to associate a file system namespace
entry located on one server with a file system located on another server.
When this includes
the use of pure referrals, servers are provided a way of
placing a file system in a location within the namespace
essentially without respect to its physical location on a
particular server. This allows a single server or a set of servers
to present a multi-server namespace that encompasses file systems
located on a wider range of servers. Some likely uses of this facility include
establishment of site-wide or organization
Referrals occur when a client determines, upon first referencing
a position in the current namespace, that it is part of a new
file system and that the file system is absent. When this
occurs, typically upon receiving the error NFS4ERR_
The file system location attribute may designate a single
file system location or multiple file system locations, to
be selected based on the needs of the client. The server,
in the fs_
If the fs_
Use of multi-server namespaces is enabled by NFSv4.1 but is not required. The use of multi-server namespaces and their scope will depend on the applications used and system administration preferences.¶
Multi-server namespaces can be established by a single
server providing a large set of pure referrals to all of the
included file systems. Alternatively, a single multi-server
namespace may be administrativel
Generally, multi-server namespaces are for the most part uniform, in that the same data made available to one client at a given location in the namespace is made available to all clients at that namespace location. However, there are facilities provided that allow different clients to be directed to different sets of data, for reasons such as enabling adaptation to such client characteristics as CPU architecture. These facilities are described in Section 11.17.3.¶
Note that it is possible, when providing a uniform namespace, to provide different location entries to different clients in order to provide each client with a copy of the data physically closest to it or otherwise optimize access (e.g., provide load balancing).¶
11.5.7. Changes in a File System Location Attribute
Although clients will typically fetch a file system location attribute
when first accessing a file system and when NFS4ERR_
For clients not prepared to access multiple replicas simultaneously (see Section 11.11.1), the handling of the various cases of location change are as follows:¶
- Changes in the list of replicas or in the network addresses associated with replicas do not require immediate action. The client will typically update its list of replicas to reflect the new information.¶
- Additions to the list of network addresses for the current file system instance need not be acted on promptly. However, to prepare for a subsequent migration event, the client can choose to take note of the new address and then use it whenever it needs to switch access to a new replica.¶
-
Deletions from the list of network addresses for the
current file system instance do not require the client to immediately
cease use of existing access paths, although new connections
are not to be established on addresses that have been deleted.
However, clients can choose to act on such deletions
by preparing for an eventual shift in access, which
becomes unavoidable as soon as the server returns
NFS4ERR_
MOVED to indicate that a particular network access path is not usable to access the current file system.¶
For clients that are prepared to access several replicas simultaneously, the following additional cases need to be addressed. As in the cases discussed above, changes in the set of replicas need not be acted upon promptly, although the client has the option of adjusting its access even in the absence of difficulties that would lead to the selection of a new replica.¶
- When a new replica is added, which may be accessed simultaneously with one currently in use, the client is free to use the new replica immediately.¶
-
When a replica currently in use is deleted from the list, the
client need not cease using it immediately. However, since
the server may subsequently force such use to cease (by
returning NFS4ERR_
MOVED ), clients might decide to limit the need for later state transfer. For example, new opens might be done on other replicas, rather than on one not present in the list.¶
11.6. Trunking without File System Location Information
In situations in which a file system is accessed using two
server
This situation was recognized by [66], although that document made no explicit mention of trunking and treated the situation as one of simultaneous use of two distinct file system instances. In the explanatory framework now used to describe the situation, the case is one in which a single file system is accessed by two different trunked addresses.¶
11.7. Users and Groups in a Multi-Server Namespace
As in the case of a single-server environment (see Section 5.9), when an owner or group name of the form "id@domain" is assigned to a file, there is an implicit promise to return that same string when the corresponding attribute is interrogated subsequently. In the case of a multi-server namespace, that same promise applies even if server boundaries have been crossed. Similarly, when the owner attribute of a file is derived from the security principal that created the file, that attribute should have the same value even if the interrogation occurs on a different server from the file creation.¶
Similarly, the set of security principals recognized by all the participating servers needs to be the same, with each such principal having the same credentials, regardless of the particular server being accessed.¶
In order to meet these requirements, those setting up multi-server namespaces will need to limit the servers included so that:¶
- In all cases in which more than a single domain is supported, the requirements stated in RFC 8000 [31] are to be respected.¶
- All servers support a common set of domains that includes all of the domains clients use and expect to see returned as the domain portion of an owner or group in the form "id@domain". Note that, although this set most often consists of a single domain, it is possible for multiple domains to be supported.¶
- All servers, for each domain that they support, accept the same set of user and group ids as valid.¶
- All servers recognize the same set of security principals. For each principal, the same credential is required, independent of the server being accessed. In addition, the group membership for each such principal is to be the same, independent of the server accessed.¶
Note that there is no requirement in general that the users corresponding to particular security principals have the same local representation on each server, even though it is most often the case that this is so.¶
When AUTH_
-
Only a single NFSv4 domain can be supported through the use of AUTH_
SYS .¶ -
The "local" representation of all owners and groups must be the same
on all servers. The word "local" is used here since that is the
way that numeric user and group ids are described in
Section 5.9. However,
when AUTH_
SYS or stringified numeric owners or groups are used, these identifiers are not truly local, since they are known to the clients as well as to the server.¶
Similarly, when stringified numeric user and group ids are used, the
"local" representation of all owners and groups must be the same on
all servers, even when AUTH_
11.8. Additional Client-Side Considerations
When clients make use of servers that implement referrals, replication, and migration, care should be taken that a user who mounts a given file system that includes a referral or a relocated file system continues to see a coherent picture of that user-side file system despite the fact that it contains a number of server-side file systems that may be on different servers.¶
One important issue is upward navigation from the root of a server-side file system to its parent (specified as ".." in UNIX), in the case in which it transitions to that file system as a result of referral, migration, or a transition as a result of replication. When the client is at such a point, and it needs to ascend to the parent, it must go back to the parent as seen within the multi-server namespace rather than sending a LOOKUPP operation to the server, which would result in the parent within that server's single-server namespace. In order to do this, the client needs to remember the filehandles that represent such file system roots and use these instead of sending a LOOKUPP operation to the current server. This will allow the client to present to applications a consistent namespace, where upward navigation and downward navigation are consistent.¶
Another issue concerns refresh of referral locations. When
referrals are used extensively, they may change as server
configurations change. It is expected that clients will cache
information related to traversing referrals so that future
client-side requests are resolved locally without server
communication.
This is usually rooted in client-side name look up caching. Clients
should periodically purge this data for referral points in order to
detect changes in location information. When the change_
11.9. Overview of File Access Transitions
File access transitions are of two types:¶
- Those that involve a transition from accessing the current replica to another one in connection with either replication or migration. How these are dealt with is discussed in Section 11.11.¶
- Those in which access to the current file system instance is retained, while the network path used to access that instance is changed. This case is discussed in Section 11.10.¶
11.10. Effecting Network Endpoint Transitions
The endpoints used to access a particular file system instance may change in a number of ways, as listed below. In each of these cases, the same fsid, client IDs, filehandles, and stateids are used to continue access, with a continuity of lock state. In many cases, the same sessions can also be used.¶
The appropriate action depends on the set of replacement addresses
that are available for use
(i.e., server endpoints that are server
-
When use of a particular address is to cease, and there is
also another address
currently in use that is server
-trunkable with it, requests that would have been issued on the address whose use is to be discontinued can be issued on the remaining address(es). When an address is server -trunkable but not session -trunkable with the address whose use is to be discontinued, the request might need to be modified to reflect the fact that a different session will be used.¶ -
When use of a particular connection is to cease, as indicated
by receiving NFS4ERR_
MOVED when using that connection, but that address is still indicated as accessible according to the appropriate file system location entries, it is likely that requests can be issued on a new connection of a different connection type once that connection is established. Since any two non -port -specific server endpoints that share a network address are inherently session -trunkable, the client can use BIND_ CONN_ TO_ SESSION to access the existing session with the new connection.¶ -
When there are no potential replacement addresses in use, but there
are valid addresses session
-trunkable with the one whose use is to be discontinued, the client can use BIND_ CONN_ TO_ SESSION to access the existing session using the new address. Although the target session will generally be accessible, there may be rare situations in which that session is no longer accessible when an attempt is made to bind the new connection to it. In this case, the client can create a new session to enable continued access to the existing instance using the new connection, providing for the use of existing filehandles, stateids, and client ids while supplying continuity of locking state.¶ -
When there is no potential replacement address in use, and there
are no valid addresses session
-trunkable with the one whose use is to be discontinued, other server -trunkable addresses may be used to provide continued access. Although the use of CREATE_ SESSION is available to provide continued access to the existing instance, servers have the option of providing continued access to the existing session through the new network access path in a fashion similar to that provided by session migration (see Section 11.12). To take advantage of this possibility, clients can perform an initial BIND_ CONN_ TO_ SESSION, as in the previous case, and use CREATE_ SESSION only if that fails.¶
11.11. Effecting File System Transitions
There are a range of situations in which there is a change to be effected in the set of replicas used to access a particular file system. Some of these may involve an expansion or contraction of the set of replicas used as discussed in Section 11.11.1 below.¶
For reasons explained in that section, most transitions will involve
a transition from a single replica to a corresponding replacement
replica. When effecting replica transition, some types of
sharing between the replicas may affect handling of the
transition as described in
Sections 11.11.2
through 11.11.8 below.
The attribute fs_
With regard to some types of state, the degree of continuity across the transition depends on the occasion prompting the transition, with transitions initiated by the servers (i.e., migration) offering much more scope for a nondisruptive transition than cases in which the client on its own shifts its access to another replica (i.e., replication). This issue potentially applies to locking state and to session state, which are dealt with below as follows:¶
- An introduction to the possible means of providing continuity in these areas appears in Section 11.11.9 below.¶
- Transparent State Migration is introduced in Section 11.12. The possible transfer of session state is addressed there as well.¶
- The client handling of transitions, including determining how to deal with the various means that the server might take to supply effective continuity of locking state, is discussed in Section 11.13.¶
-
The source and destination servers' responsibilitie
s in effecting Transparent State Migration of locking and session state are discussed in Section 11.14.¶
11.11.1. File System Transitions and Simultaneous Access
The fs_
Because of this difference in state handling, many clients will
not have the ability to take advantage of the fact that such
replicas represent the same data. Such clients will not be
prepared to use multiple replicas simultaneously but will access
each file system using only a single replica, although the
replica selected might make multiple server
Clients who are prepared to use multiple replicas simultaneously can divide opens among replicas however they choose. Once that choice is made, any subsequent transitions will treat the set of locking state associated with each replica as a single entity.¶
For example, if one of the replicas become unavailable, access will be transferred to a different replica, which is also capable of simultaneous access with the one still in use.¶
When there is no such replica, the transition may be to the replica already in use. At this point, the client has a choice between merging the locking state for the two replicas under the aegis of the sole replica in use or treating these separately until another replica capable of simultaneous access presents itself.¶
11.11.2. Filehandles and File System Transitions
There are a number of ways in which filehandles can be handled across a file system transition. These can be divided into two broad classes depending upon whether the two file systems across which the transition happens share sufficient state to effect some sort of continuity of file system handling.¶
When there is no such cooperation in filehandle assignment,
the two file systems are reported as being in different
handle classes. In this case,
all filehandles are assumed to expire as part of the
file system transition. Note that this behavior does not
depend on the fh_
When there is cooperation in filehandle assignment,
the two file systems are reported as being in the same
handle classes. In this case,
persistent filehandles remain valid after the file system
transition, while volatile filehandles (excluding those
that are only volatile due to the FH4_
11.11.3. Fileids and File System Transitions
In NFSv4.0, the issue of continuity of fileids in the event of a file system transition was not addressed. The general expectation had been that in situations in which the two file system instances are created by a single vendor using some sort of file system image copy, fileids would be consistent across the transition, while in the analogous multi-vendor transitions they would not. This poses difficulties, especially for the client without special knowledge of the transition mechanisms adopted by the server. Note that although fileid is not a REQUIRED attribute, many servers support fileids and many clients provide APIs that depend on fileids.¶
It is important to note that while clients themselves may have no trouble with a fileid changing as a result of a file system transition event, applications do typically have access to the fileid (e.g., via stat). The result is that an application may work perfectly well if there is no file system instance transition or if any such transition is among instances created by a single vendor, yet be unable to deal with the situation in which a multi-vendor transition occurs at the wrong time.¶
Providing the same fileids in a multi-vendor (multiple server vendors) environment has generally been held to be quite difficult. While there is work to be done, it needs to be pointed out that this difficulty is partly self-imposed. Servers have typically identified fileid with inode number, i.e. with a quantity used to find the file in question. This identification poses special difficulties for migration of a file system between vendors where assigning the same index to a given file may not be possible. Note here that a fileid is not required to be useful to find the file in question, only that it is unique within the given file system. Servers prepared to accept a fileid as a single piece of metadata and store it apart from the value used to index the file information can relatively easily maintain a fileid value across a migration event, allowing a truly transparent migration event.¶
In any case, where servers can provide continuity of fileids, they should, and the client should be able to find out that such continuity is available and take appropriate action. Information about the continuity (or lack thereof) of fileids across a file system transition is represented by specifying whether the file systems in question are of the same fileid class.¶
Note that when consistent fileids do not exist across a transition (either because there is no continuity of fileids or because fileid is not a supported attribute on one of instances involved), and there are no reliable filehandles across a transition event (either because there is no filehandle continuity or because the filehandles are volatile), the client is in a position where it cannot verify that files it was accessing before the transition are the same objects. It is forced to assume that no object has been renamed, and, unless there are guarantees that provide this (e.g., the file system is read-only), problems for applications may occur. Therefore, use of such configurations should be limited to situations where the problems that this may cause can be tolerated.¶
11.11.4. Fsids and File System Transitions
Since fsids are generally only unique on a per-server basis, it is likely that they will change during a file system transition. Clients should not make the fsids received from the server visible to applications since they may not be globally unique, and because they may change during a file system transition event. Applications are best served if they are isolated from such transitions to the extent possible.¶
Although normally a single source file system will transition
to a single target file system, there is a provision for splitting
a single source file system into multiple target file systems, by
specifying the FSLI4F_
11.11.4.1. File System Splitting
When a file system transition is made and the fs_
Clients might choose to maintain the fsids passed to existing applications by mapping all of the fsids for the descendant file systems to the common fsid used for the original file system.¶
Splitting a file system can be done on a transition between file systems of the same fileid class, since the fact that fileids are unique within the source file system ensure they will be unique in each of the target file systems.¶
11.11.5. The Change Attribute and File System Transitions
Since the change attribute is defined as a server-specific one, change attributes fetched from one server are normally presumed to be invalid on another server. Such a presumption is troublesome since it would invalidate all cached change attributes, requiring refetching. Even more disruptive, the absence of any assured continuity for the change attribute means that even if the same value is retrieved on refetch, no conclusions can be drawn as to whether the object in question has changed. The identical change attribute could be merely an artifact of a modified file with a different change attribute construction algorithm, with that new algorithm just happening to result in an identical change value.¶
When the two file systems have consistent change attribute formats, and this fact is communicated to the client by reporting in the same change class, the client may assume a continuity of change attribute construction and handle this situation just as it would be handled without any file system transition.¶
11.11.6. Write Verifiers and File System Transitions
In a file system transition, the two file systems might be cooperating in the handling of unstably written data. Clients can determine if this is the case by seeing if the two file systems belong to the same write-verifier class. When this is the case, write verifiers returned from one system may be compared to those returned by the other and superfluous writes can be avoided.¶
When two file systems belong to different write-verifier classes, any verifier generated by one must not be compared to one provided by the other. Instead, the two verifiers should be treated as not equal even when the values are identical.¶
11.11.7. READDIR Cookies and Verifiers and File System Transitions
In a file system transition, the two file systems might be consistent in their handling of READDIR cookies and verifiers. Clients can determine if this is the case by seeing if the two file systems belong to the same readdir class. When this is the case, readdir class, READDIR cookies, and verifiers from one system will be recognized by the other, and READDIR operations started on one server can be validly continued on the other simply by presenting the cookie and verifier returned by a READDIR operation done on the first file system to the second.¶
When two file systems belong to different readdir classes, any READDIR cookie and verifier generated by one is not valid on the second and must not be presented to that server by the client. The client should act as if the verifier were rejected.¶
11.11.8. File System Data and File System Transitions
When multiple replicas exist and are used simultaneously or in
succession by a client, applications using them will normally expect
that they contain either the same data or data that is consistent with
the normal sorts of changes that are made by other clients
updating the data of the file system
(with metadata being the same to the degree indicated by the
fs_
-
When multiple replicas exist and are used simultaneously
by a client (see the FSLIB4_
CLSIMUL definition within fs_ locations_ info ), they must designate the same data. Where file systems are writable, a change made on one instance must be visible on all instances at the same time, regardless of whether the interrogated instance is the one on which the modification was done. This allows a client to use these replicas simultaneously without any special adaptation to the fact that there are multiple replicas, beyond adapting to the fact that locks obtained on one replica are maintained separately (i.e., under a different client ID). In this case, locks (whether share reservations or byte-range locks) and delegations obtained on one replica are immediately reflected on all replicas, in the sense that access from all other servers is prevented regardless of the replica used. However, because the servers are not required to treat two associated client IDs as representing the same client, it is best to access each file using only a single client ID.¶ -
When one replica is designated as the successor instance to another
existing instance after the return of NFS4ERR_
MOVED (i.e., the case of migration), the client may depend on the fact that all changes written to stable storage on the original instance are written to stable storage of the successor (uncommitted writes are dealt with in Section 11.11.6 above).¶ -
Where a file system is not writable but represents a read-only
copy (possibly periodically updated) of a writable file system,
clients have similar requirements with regard to the propagation
of updates. They may need a guarantee that any change visible on
the original file system instance must be immediately visible on
any replica before the client transitions access to that replica,
in order to avoid any possibility that a client, in effecting a transition to a
replica, will see any reversion in file system state.
The specific means of this guarantee varies based on the value of
the fss_
type field that is reported as part of the fs_ status attribute (see Section 11.18). Since these file systems are presumed to be unsuitable for simultaneous use, there is no specification of how locking is handled; in general, locks obtained on one file system will be separate from those on others. Since these are expected to be read-only file systems, this is not likely to pose an issue for clients or applications.¶
When none of these special situations applies, there is no basis
within the protocol for the client to make assumptions about the
contents of a replica file system or its relationship to previous
file system instances. Thus, switching between nominally
identical read-write file systems would not be possible because either the
client does not use the fs_
11.11.9. Lock State and File System Transitions
While accessing a file system, clients obtain locks enforced by the server, which may prevent actions by other clients that are inconsistent with those locks.¶
When access is transferred between replicas, clients need to be assured that the actions disallowed by holding these locks cannot have occurred during the transition. This can be ensured by the methods below. Unless at least one of these is implemented, clients will not be assured of continuity of lock possession across a migration event:¶
-
Providing the client an opportunity to re-obtain his locks via a per-fs grace period on the destination server, denying all clients using the destination file system the opportunity to obtain new locks that conflict with those held by the transferred client as long as that client has not completed its per-fs grace period. Because the lock reclaim mechanism was originally defined to support server reboot, it implicitly assumes that filehandles will, upon reclaim, be the same as those at open. In the case of migration, this requires that source and destination servers use the same filehandles, as evidenced by using the same server scope (see Section 2.10.4) or by showing this agreement using fs_
locations_ info (see Section 11.11.2 above).¶ Note that such a grace period can be implemented without interfering with the ability of non-transferred clients to obtain new locks while it is going on. As long as the destination server is aware of the transferred locks, it can distinguish requests to obtain new locks that contrast with existing locks from those that do not, allowing it to treat such client requests without reference to the ongoing grace period.¶
- Locking state can be transferred as part of the transition by providing Transparent State Migration as described in Section 11.12.¶
Of these, Transparent State Migration provides the smoother experience for clients in that there is no need to go through a reclaim process before new locks can be obtained; however, it requires a greater degree of inter-server coordination. In general, the servers taking part in migration are free to provide either facility. However, when the filehandles can differ across the migration event, Transparent State Migration is the only available means of providing the needed functionality.¶
It should be noted that these two methods are not mutually exclusive and that a server might well provide both. In particular, if there is some circumstance preventing a specific lock from being transferred transparently, the destination server can allow it to be reclaimed by implementing a per-fs grace period for the migrated file system.¶
11.11.9.1. Security Consideration Related to Reclaiming Lock State after File System Transitions
Although it is possible for a client reclaiming state to misrepresent
its state in the same fashion as described in
Section 8.4.2.1.1, most
implementations providing for such reclamation in the case of
file system transitions
will have the ability to detect such misrepresentati
Typically, implementations that support file system transitions will have extensive information about the locks to be transferred. This is because of the following:¶
- Since failure is not involved, there is no need to store locking information in persistent storage.¶
- There is no need, as there is in the failure case, to update multiple repositories containing locking state to keep them in sync. Instead, there is a one-time communication of locking state from the source to the destination server.¶
- Providing this information avoids potential interference with existing clients using the destination file system by denying them the ability to obtain new locks during the grace period.¶
When such detailed locking information, not necessarily including the associated stateids, is available:¶
-
It is possible to detect reclaim requests that attempt to
reclaim locks that did not exist before the transfer, rejecting
them with NFS4ERR_
RECLAIM_ BAD (Section 15.1.9.4).¶ -
It is possible when dealing with non-reclaim requests, to determine
whether they conflict with existing locks, eliminating the need
to return NFS4ERR_
GRACE (Section 15.1.9.2) on non-reclaim requests.¶
It is possible for implementations of grace periods in connection with file system transitions not to have detailed locking information available at the destination server, in which case, the security situation is exactly as described in Section 8.4.2.1.1.¶
11.11.9.2. Leases and File System Transitions
In the case of lease renewal, the client may not be submitting requests for a file system that has been transferred to another server. This can occur because of the lease renewal mechanism. The client renews the lease associated with all file systems when submitting a request on an associated session, regardless of the specific file system being referenced.¶
In order for the client to schedule renewal of its lease
where there is locking state that may have been relocated
to the new server, the client
must find out about lease relocation before that lease
expire. To accomplish this, the SEQUENCE operation will
return the status bit SEQ4_
When a client receives an SEQ4_
A client may use GETATTR of the fs_
Once the set of file systems with transferred locking state
has been determined, the client can follow the normal process
to obtain the new server information (through the
fs_
11.11.9.3. Transitions and the Lease_time Attribute
In order that the client may appropriately manage its lease
in the case of a file system transition, the destination server must
establish proper values for the lease_
When state is transferred transparently, that state
should include the correct value of the lease_
If state has not been transferred transparently, either
because the associated servers are shown as having different
eir_
11.12. Transferring State upon Migration
When the transition is a result of a server
-
Transfer locking state from the source to the destination
server in a fashion similar to that provided by Transparent State
Migration in NFSv4.0, as described in [69].
Server responsibilitie
s are described in Section 11.14.2.¶ -
Transfer session state from the source to the destination
server. Server responsibilitie
s in effecting such a transfer are described in Section 11.14.3.¶
The means by which the client determines which of these transfer events has occurred are described in Section 11.13.¶
11.12.1. Transparent State Migration and pNFS
When pNFS is involved, the protocol is capable of supporting:¶
- Migration of the Metadata Server (MDS), leaving the Data Servers (DSs) in place.¶
- Migration of the file system as a whole, including the MDS and associated DSs.¶
- Replacement of one DS by another.¶
- Migration of a pNFS file system to one in which pNFS is not used.¶
- Migration of a file system not using pNFS to one in which layouts are available.¶
Note that migration, per se, is only involved in the transfer of the MDS function. Although the servicing of a layout may be transferred from one data server to another, this not done using the file system location attributes. The MDS can effect such transfers by recalling or revoking existing layouts and granting new ones on a different data server.¶
Migration of the MDS function is directly supported by Transparent State Migration. Layout state will normally be transparently transferred, just as other state is. As a result, Transparent State Migration provides a framework in which, given appropriate inter-MDS data transfer, one MDS can be substituted for another.¶
Migration of the file system function as a whole can be accomplished by recalling all layouts as part of the initial phase of the migration process. As a result, I/O will be done through the MDS during the migration process, and new layouts can be granted once the client is interacting with the new MDS. An MDS can also effect this sort of transition by revoking all layouts as part of Transparent State Migration, as long as the client is notified about the loss of locking state.¶
In order to allow migration to a file system on which pNFS is not supported, clients need to be prepared for a situation in which layouts are not available or supported on the destination file system and so direct I/O requests to the destination server, rather than depending on layouts being available.¶
Replacement of one DS by another is not addressed by migration as such but can be effected by an MDS recalling layouts for the DS to be replaced and issuing new ones to be served by the successor DS.¶
Migration may transfer a file system from a server that does not support pNFS to one that does. In order to properly adapt to this situation, clients that support pNFS, but function adequately in its absence, should check for pNFS support when a file system is migrated and be prepared to use pNFS when support is available on the destination.¶
11.13. Client Responsibilities When Access Is Transitioned
For a client to respond to an access transition, it must become aware of it. The ways in which this can happen are discussed in Section 11.13.1, which discusses indications that a specific file system access path has transitioned as well as situations in which additional activity is necessary to determine the set of file systems that have been migrated. Section 11.13.2 goes on to complete the discussion of how the set of migrated file systems might be determined. Sections 11.13.3 through 11.13.5 discuss how the client should deal with each transition it becomes aware of, either directly or as a result of migration discovery.¶
The following terms are used to describe client activities:¶
-
"Transition recovery" refers to the process of restoring access
to a file system on which NFS4ERR_
MOVED was received.¶ - "Migration recovery" refers to that subset of transition recovery that applies when the file system has migrated to a different replica.¶
- "Migration discovery" refers to the process of determining which file system(s) have been migrated. It is necessary to avoid a situation in which leases could expire when a file system is not accessed for a long period of time, since a client unaware of the migration might be referencing an unmigrated file system and not renewing the lease associated with the migrated file system.¶
11.13.1. Client Transition Notifications
When there is a change in the network access path that a client is to use to access a file system, there are a number of related status indications with which clients need to deal:¶
-
If an attempt is made to use or return a filehandle within a file system that is no longer accessible at the address previously used to access it, the error NFS4ERR_
MOVED is returned.¶ Exceptions are made to allow such filehandles to be used when interrogating a file system location attribute. This enables a client to determine a new replica's location or a new network access path.¶
This condition continues on subsequent attempts to access the file system in question. The only way the client can avoid the error is to cease accessing the file system in question at its old server location and access it instead using a different address at which it is now available.¶
-
Whenever a client sends a SEQUENCE operation to a server that generated state held on that client and associated with a file system no longer accessible on that server, the response will contain the status bit SEQ4_
STATUS_ LEASE_ MOVED, indicating that there has been a lease migration.¶ This condition continues until the client acknowledges the notification by fetching a file system location attribute for the file system whose network access path is being changed. When there are multiple such file systems, a location attribute for each such file system needs to be fetched. The location attribute for all migrated file systems needs to be fetched in order to clear the condition. Even after the condition is cleared, the client needs to respond by using the location information to access the file system at its new location to ensure that leases are not needlessly expired.¶
Unlike NFSv4.0, in which the corresponding
conditions are both errors and thus mutually exclusive,
in NFSv4.1 the client can,
and often will, receive both indications on the same
request. As a result, implementations need to address the
question of how to coordinate
the necessary recovery actions when both indications
arrive in the response to the same request. It should be noted
that when processing an NFSv4 COMPOUND, the server
will normally decide
whether SEQ4_
Since these indications are not mutually exclusive in NFSv4.1, the following combinations are possible results when a COMPOUND is issued:¶
-
The COMPOUND status is NFS4ERR_
MOVED, and SEQ4_ STATUS_ LEASE_ MOVED is asserted.¶ In this case, transition recovery is required. While it is possible that migration discovery is needed in addition, it is likely that only the accessed file system has transitioned. In any case, because addressing NFS4ERR_
MOVED is necessary to allow the rejected requests to be processed on the target, dealing with it will typically have priority over migration discovery.¶ -
The COMPOUND status is NFS4ERR_
MOVED, and SEQ4_ STATUS_ LEASE_ MOVED is clear.¶ In this case, transition recovery is also required. It is clear that migration discovery is not needed to find file systems that have been migrated other than the one returning NFS4ERR_
MOVED . Cases in which this result can arise include a referral or a migration for which there is no associated locking state. This can also arise in cases in which an access path transition other than migration occurs within the same server. In such a case, there is no need to set SEQ4_ STATUS_ LEASE_ MOVED, since the lease remains associated with the current server even though the access path has changed.¶ -
The COMPOUND status is not NFS4ERR_
MOVED, and SEQ4_ STATUS_ LEASE_ MOVED is asserted.¶ In this case, no transition recovery activity is required on the file system(s) accessed by the request. However, to prevent avoidable lease expiration, migration discovery needs to be done.¶
-
The COMPOUND status is not NFS4ERR_
MOVED, and SEQ4_ STATUS_ LEASE_ MOVED is clear.¶ In this case, neither transition
-related activity nor migration discovery is required.¶
Note that the specified actions only need to be taken if they are
not already going on. For example, when NFS4ERR_
The fact that a lease-migrated condition does not result in an error in NFSv4.1 has a number of important consequences. In addition to the fact that the two indications are not mutually exclusive, as discussed above, there are number of issues that are important in considering implementation of migration discovery, as discussed in Section 11.13.2.¶
Because SEQ4_
11.13.2. Performing Migration Discovery
Migration discovery can be performed in the same context as transition recovery, allowing recovery for each migrated file system to be invoked as it is discovered. Alternatively, it may be done in a separate migration discovery thread, allowing migration discovery to be done in parallel with one or more instances of transition recovery.¶
In either case, because the lease-migrated indication does not result in an error, other access to file systems on the server can proceed normally, with the possibility that further such indications will be received, raising the issue of how such indications are to be dealt with. In general:¶
- No action needs to be taken for such indications received by any threads performing migration discovery, since continuation of that work will address the issue.¶
- In other cases in which migration discovery is currently being performed, nothing further needs to be done to respond to such lease migration indications, as long as one can be certain that the migration discovery process would deal with those indications. See below for details.¶
- For such indications received in all other contexts, the appropriate response is to initiate or otherwise provide for the execution of migration discovery for file systems associated with the server IP address returning the indication.¶
This leaves a potential difficulty in situations in which the
migration discovery process is near to completion but is still
operating. One should not ignore a SEQ4_
A useful approach to this issue involves the use of separate
externally
- Non-operation, in which migration discovery is not being performed.¶
- Normal operation, in which there is an ongoing scan for migrated file systems.¶
-
Completion
/verification of migration discovery processing, in which the possible completion of migration discovery processing needs to be verified.¶
Given that framework, migration discovery processing would proceed as follows:¶
-
While in the normal
-operation state, the thread performing discovery would fetch, for successive file systems known to the client on the server being worked on, a file system location attribute plus the fs_ status attribute.¶ -
If the fs_
status attribute indicates that the file system is a migrated one (i.e., fss_ absent is true, and fss_ type != STATUS4_ REFERRAL ), then a migrated file system has been found. In this situation, it is likely that the fetch of the file system location attribute has cleared one of the file systems contributing to the lease-migrated indication.¶ -
In cases in which that happened, the thread cannot know whether
the lease-migrated indication has been cleared, and so it enters the
completion
/verification state and proceeds to issue a COMPOUND to see if the SEQ4_ STATUS_ LEASE_ MOVED indication has been cleared.¶ -
When the discovery process is in the completion
/verification state, if other requests get a lease-migrated indication, they note that it was received. Later, the existence of such indications is used when the request completes, as described below.¶
When the request used in the completion
- If a lease-migrated indication is returned, the discovery continues normally. Note that this is so even if all file systems have been traversed, since new migrations could have occurred while the process was going on.¶
-
Otherwise, if there is any record that other requests saw a
lease-migrated indication while the request was occurring,
that record is cleared, and the verification request is retried. The discovery
process remains in the completion
/verification state.¶ - If there have been no lease-migrated indications, the work of migration discovery is considered completed, and it enters the non-operating state. Once it enters this state, subsequent lease-migrated indications will trigger a new migration discovery process.¶
It should be noted that the process described above is not
guaranteed to terminate, as a long series of new migration
events might continually delay the clearing of the SEQ4_
Lease discovery needs to be provided as described above. This ensures that the client discovers file system migrations soon enough to renew its leases on each destination server before they expire. Non-renewal of leases can lead to loss of locking state. While the consequences of such loss can be ameliorated through implementations of courtesy locks, servers are under no obligation to do so, and a conflicting lock request may mean that a lock is revoked unexpectedly. Clients should be aware of this possibility.¶
11.13.3. Overview of Client Response to NFS4ERR_MOVED
This section outlines a way in which a client that receives
NFS4ERR_
-
Whether the NFS4ERR_
MOVED indicates migration has occurred, or whether it indicates another sort of file system access transition as discussed in Section 11.10 above.¶ - In the case of migration, whether Transparent State Migration has occurred.¶
- Whether any state has been lost during the process of Transparent State Migration.¶
- Whether sessions have been transferred as part of Transparent State Migration.¶
During the first phase of this process, the client proceeds to examine file system location entries to find the initial network address it will use to continue access to the file system or its replacement. For each location entry that the client examines, the process consists of five steps:¶
-
Performing an EXCHANGE_
ID directed at the location address. This operation is used to register the client owner (in the form of a client_ owner4 ) with the server, to obtain a client ID to be used subsequently to communicate with it, to obtain that client ID's confirmation status, and to determine server_ owner4 and scope for the purpose of determining if the entry is trunkable with the address previously being used to access the file system (i.e., that it represents another network access path to the same file system and can share locking state with it).¶ -
Making an initial determination of whether migration has
occurred. The initial determination will be based
on whether the EXCHANGE_
ID results indicate that the current location element is server -trunkable with that used to access the file system when access was terminated by receiving NFS4ERR_ MOVED . If it is, then migration has not occurred. In that case, the transition is dealt with, at least initially, as one involving continued access to the same file system on the same server through a new network address.¶ - Obtaining access to existing session state or creating new sessions. How this is done depends on the initial determination of whether migration has occurred and can be done as described in Section 11.13.4 below in the case of migration or as described in Section 11.13.5 below in the case of a network address transfer without migration.¶
- Verifying the trunking relationship assumed in step 2 as discussed in Section 2.10.5.1. Although this step will generally confirm the initial determination, it is possible for verification to invalidate the initial determination of network address shift (without migration) and instead determine that migration had occurred. There is no need to redo step 3 above, since it will be possible to continue use of the session established already.¶
- Obtaining access to existing locking state and/or re-obtaining it. How this is done depends on the final determination of whether migration has occurred and can be done as described below in Section 11.13.4 in the case of migration or as described in Section 11.13.5 in the case of a network address transfer without migration.¶
Once the initial address has been determined, clients are free
to apply an abbreviated process to find additional addresses
trunkable with it (clients may seek session
- A:
-
Before the EXCHANGE_
ID, the fs name of the location entry is examined, and if it does not match that currently being used, the entry is ignored. Otherwise, one proceeds as specified by step 1 above.¶ - B:
-
In the case that the network address is session
-trunkable with one used previously, a BIND_ CONN_ TO_ SESSION is used to access that session using the new network address. Otherwise, or if the bind operation fails, a CREATE_ SESSION is done.¶ - C:
- The verification procedure referred to in step 4 above is used. However, if it fails, the entry is ignored and the next available entry is used.¶
11.13.4. Obtaining Access to Sessions and State after Migration
In the event that migration has occurred, migration recovery
will involve determining whether Transparent State Migration has
occurred. This decision is made based on the client ID returned
by the EXCHANGE_
- If the client ID is an unconfirmed client ID not previously known to the client, then Transparent State Migration has not occurred.¶
- If the client ID is a confirmed client ID previously known to the client, then any transferred state would have been merged with an existing client ID representing the client to the destination server. In this state merger case, Transparent State Migration might or might not have occurred, and a determination as to whether it has occurred is deferred until sessions are established and the client is ready to begin state recovery.¶
- If the client ID is a confirmed client ID not previously known to the client, then the client can conclude that the client ID was transferred as part of Transparent State Migration. In this transferred client ID case, Transparent State Migration has occurred, although some state might have been lost.¶
Once the client ID has been obtained, it is necessary to
obtain access to sessions to continue communication with the
new server.
In any of the cases in which Transparent State Migration
has occurred, it is possible that a session was transferred
as well. To deal with that possibility, clients can, after
doing the EXCHANGE_
In some situations, it is possible for a BIND_
Once the client has determined the initial migration status, and determined that there was a shift to a new server, it needs to re-establish its locking state, if possible. To enable this to happen without loss of the guarantees normally provided by locking, the destination server needs to implement a per-fs grace period in all cases in which lock state was lost, including those in which Transparent State Migration was not implemented. Each client for which there was a transfer of locking state to the new server will have the duration of the grace period to reclaim its locks, from the time its locks were transferred.¶
Clients need to deal with the following cases:¶
-
In the state merger case, it is possible that the server
has not attempted Transparent State Migration,
in which case state may have been
lost without it being reflected in the SEQ4_
STATUS bits. To determine whether this has happened, the client can use TEST_ STATEID to check whether the stateids created on the source server are still accessible on the destination server. Once a single stateid is found to have been successfully transferred, the client can conclude that Transparent State Migration was begun, and any failure to transport all of the stateids will be reflected in the SEQ4_ STATUS bits. Otherwise, Transparent State Migration has not occurred.¶ - In a case in which Transparent State Migration has not occurred, the client can use the per-fs grace period provided by the destination server to reclaim locks that were held on the source server.¶
-
In a case in which Transparent State Migration has
occurred, and no lock state was lost (as shown by SEQ4_
STATUS flags), no lock reclaim is necessary.¶ -
In a case in which Transparent State Migration has
occurred, and some lock state was lost (as shown by SEQ4_
STATUS flags), existing stateids need to be checked for validity using TEST_ STATEID, and reclaim used to re-establish any that were not transferred.¶
For all of the cases above, RECLAIM_
11.13.5. Obtaining Access to Sessions and State after Network Address Transfer
The case in which there is a transfer to a new network
address without migration is similar to that described
in Section 11.13.4 above in that there is a need to
obtain access to needed sessions and locking state. However,
the details are simpler and will vary depending on the
type of trunking between the address receiving
NFS4ERR_
To make a session available for use, a BIND_
Access to appropriate locking state will generally need no actions
beyond access to the session. However, the SEQ4_
11.14. Server Responsibilities Upon Migration
In the event of file system migration, when the client connects to the destination server, that server needs to be able to provide the client continued access to the files it had open on the source server. There are two ways to provide this:¶
- By provision of an fs-specific grace period, allowing the client the ability to reclaim its locks, in a fashion similar to what would have been done in the case of recovery from a server restart. See Section 11.14.1 for a more complete discussion.¶
-
By implementing Transparent State Migration possibly in connection with session migration, the server can provide the client immediate access to the state built up on the source server on the destination server.¶
These features are discussed separately in Sections 11.14.2 and 11.14.3, which discuss Transparent State Migration and session migration, respectively.¶
All the features described above can involve transfer of lock-related information between source and destination servers. In some cases, this transfer is a necessary part of the implementation, while in other cases, it is a helpful implementation aid, which servers might or might not use. The subsections below discuss the information that would be transferred but do not define the specifics of the transfer protocol. This is left as an implementation choice, although standards in this area could be developed at a later time.¶
11.14.1. Server Responsibilities in Effecting State Reclaim after Migration
In this case, the destination server needs no knowledge of the locks held on the source server. It relies on the clients to accurately report (via reclaim operations) the locks previously held, and does not allow new locks to be granted on migrated file systems until the grace period expires. Disallowing of new locks applies to all clients accessing these file systems, while grace period expiration occurs for each migrated client independently.¶
During this grace period, clients have the opportunity to use
reclaim operations to obtain locks for file system objects within
the migrated file system, in the same way that they do when
recovering from server restart, and the servers typically
rely on clients to accurately report their locks, although they
have the option of subjecting these requests to verification.
If the clients only reclaim locks held on the source server, no
conflict can arise. Once the client has reclaimed its locks,
it indicates the completion of lock reclamation by performing a
RECLAIM_
While it is not necessary for source and destination servers to cooperate to transfer information about locks, implementations are well advised to consider transferring the following useful information:¶
- If information about the set of clients that have locking state for the transferred file system is made available, the destination server will be able to terminate the grace period once all such clients have reclaimed their locks, allowing normal locking activity to resume earlier than it would have otherwise.¶
- Locking summary information for individual clients (at various possible levels of detail) can detect some instances in which clients do not accurately represent the locks held on the source server.¶
11.14.2. Server Responsibilities in Effecting Transparent State Migration
The basic responsibility of the source server in effecting Transparent State Migration is to make available to the destination server a description of each piece of locking state associated with the file system being migrated. In addition to client id string and verifier, the source server needs to provide for each stateid:¶
- The stateid including the current sequence value.¶
- The associated client ID.¶
- The handle of the associated file.¶
- The type of the lock, such as open, byte-range lock, delegation, or layout.¶
- For locks such as opens and byte-range locks, there will be information about the owner(s) of the lock.¶
-
For recallable
/revocable lock types, the current recall status needs to be included.¶ - For each lock type, there will be associated type-specific information. For opens, this will include share and deny mode while for byte-range locks and layouts, there will be a type and a byte-range.¶
Such information will most probably be organized by client id string on the destination server so that it can be used to provide appropriate context to each client when it makes itself known to the client. Issues connected with a client impersonating another by presenting another client's client id string can be addressed using NFSv4.1 state protection features, as described in Section 21.¶
A further server responsibility concerns locks that are revoked or otherwise lost during the process of file system migration. Because locks that appear to be lost during the process of migration will be reclaimed by the client, the servers have to take steps to ensure that locks revoked soon before or soon after migration are not inadvertently allowed to be reclaimed in situations in which the continuity of lock possession cannot be assured.¶
-
For locks lost on the source but whose loss has not yet been
acknowledged by the client (by using FREE_
STATEID ), the destination must be aware of this loss so that it can deny a request to reclaim them.¶ -
For locks lost on the destination after the state transfer
but before the client's RECLAIM_
COMPLETE is done, the destination server should note these and not allow them to be reclaimed.¶
An additional responsibility of the cooperating servers concerns situations in which a stateid cannot be transferred transparently because it conflicts with an existing stateid held by the client and associated with a different file system. In this case, there are two valid choices:¶
-
Treat the transfer, as in NFSv4.0, as one without Transparent
State Migration. In this case, conflicting locks cannot be
granted until the client does a RECLAIM_
COMPLETE, after reclaiming the locks it had, with the exception of reclaims denied because they were attempts to reclaim locks that had been lost.¶ -
Implement Transparent State Migration, except for the lock
with the conflicting stateid. In this case, the client will
be aware of a lost lock (through the SEQ4_
STATUS flags) and be allowed to reclaim it.¶
When transferring state between the source and destination, the
issues discussed in Section 7.2 of [69]
must still be attended to. In this case, the use of NFS4ERR_
There are a number of important differences in the NFS4.1 context:¶
-
The absence of RELEASE_
LOCKOWNER means that the one case in which an operation could not be deferred by use of NFS4ERR_ DELAY no longer exists.¶ - Sequencing of operations is no longer done using owner-based operation sequences numbers. Instead, sequencing is session- based.¶
As a result, when sessions are not transferred, the techniques discussed in Section 7.2 of [69] are adequate and will not be further discussed.¶
11.14.3. Server Responsibilities in Effecting Session Transfer
The basic responsibility of the source server in effecting session transfer is to make available to the destination server a description of the current state of each slot with the session, including the following:¶
- The last sequence value received for that slot.¶
- Whether there is cached reply data for the last request executed and, if so, the cached reply.¶
When sessions are transferred, there are a number of issues that pose challenges in terms of making the transferred state unmodifiable during the period it is gathered up and transferred to the destination server:¶
- A single session may be used to access multiple file systems, not all of which are being transferred.¶
- Requests made on a session may, even if rejected, affect the state of the session by advancing the sequence number associated with the slot used.¶
As a result, when the file system state might otherwise be considered unmodifiable, the client might have any number of in-flight requests, each of which is capable of changing session state, which may be of a number of types:¶
- Those requests that were processed on the migrating file system before migration began.¶
-
Those requests that received the error NFS4ERR_
DELAY because the file system being accessed was in the process of being migrated.¶ -
Those requests that received the error NFS4ERR_
MOVED because the file system being accessed had been migrated.¶ - Those requests that accessed the migrating file system in order to obtain location or status information.¶
- Those requests that did not reference the migrating file system.¶
It should be noted that the history of any particular slot is likely to include a number of these request classes. In the case in which a session that is migrated is used by file systems other than the one migrated, requests of class 5 may be common and may be the last request processed for many slots.¶
Since session state can change even after the locking state has been fixed as part of the migration process, the session state known to the client could be different from that on the destination server, which necessarily reflects the session state on the source server at an earlier time. In deciding how to deal with this situation, it is helpful to distinguish between two sorts of behavioral consequences of the choice of initial sequence ID values:¶
-
The error NFS4ERR_
SEQ_ MISORDERED is returned when the sequence ID in a request is neither equal to the last one seen for the current slot nor the next greater one.¶ In view of the difficulty of arriving at a mutually acceptable value for the correct last sequence value at the point of migration, it may be necessary for the server to show some degree of forbearance when the sequence ID is one that would be considered unacceptable if session migration were not involved.¶
-
Returning the cached reply for a previously executed request when the sequence ID in the request matches the last value recorded for the slot.¶
In the cases in which an error is returned and there is no possibility of any non-idempotent operation having been executed, it may not be necessary to adhere to this as strictly as might be proper if session migration were not involved. For example, the fact that the error NFS4ERR_
DELAY was returned may not assist the client in any material way, while the fact that NFS4ERR_ MOVED was returned by the source server may not be relevant when the request was reissued and directed to the destination server.¶
An important issue is that the specification needs to take note of
all potential COMPOUNDs, even if they might be unlikely
in practice. For example, a COMPOUND is allowed to access
multiple file systems and might perform non-idempotent operations
in some of them before accessing a file system being migrated.
Also, a COMPOUND may return considerable data in the response
before being rejected with NFS4ERR_
To address these issues, a destination server MAY do any of the following when implementing session transfer:¶
- Avoid enforcing any sequencing semantics for a particular slot until the client has established the starting sequence for that slot on the destination server.¶
-
For each slot, avoid
returning a cached reply returning NFS4ERR_
DELAY or NFS4ERR_ MOVED until the client has established the starting sequence for that slot on the destination server.¶ -
Until the client has established the starting sequence for a
particular slot on the destination server, avoid reporting
NFS4ERR_
SEQ_ MISORDERED or returning a cached reply that contains either NFS4ERR_ DELAY or NFS4ERR_ MOVED and consists solely of a series of operations where the response is NFS4_ OK until the final error.¶
Because of the considerations mentioned above, including the rules
for the handling of NFS4ERR_
-
Not responding with NFS4ERR_
SEQ_ MISORDERED for the initial request on a slot within a transferred session because the destination server cannot be aware of requests made by the client after the server handoff but before the client became aware of the shift. In cases in which NFS4ERR_ SEQ_ MISORDERED would normally have been reported, the request is to be processed normally as a new request.¶ - Replying as it would for a retry whenever the sequence matches that transferred by the source server, even though this would not provide retry handling for requests issued after the server handoff, under the assumption that, when such requests are issued, they will never be responded to in a state-changing fashion, making retry support for them unnecessary.¶
- Once a non-retry SEQUENCE is received for a given slot, using that as the basis for further sequence checking, with no further reference to the sequence value transferred by the source server.¶
11.15. Effecting File System Referrals
Referrals are effected when an absent file system is encountered
and one or more alternate locations are made available by the
fs_
The examples given in the sections below are somewhat artificial in that an actual client will not typically do a multi-component look up, but will have cached information regarding the upper levels of the name hierarchy. However, these examples are chosen to make the required behavior clear and easy to put within the scope of a small number of requests, without getting into a discussion of the details of how specific clients might choose to cache things.¶
11.15.1. Referral Example (LOOKUP)
Let us suppose that the following COMPOUND is sent in an
environment in which
- PUTROOTFH¶
- LOOKUP "this"¶
- LOOKUP "is"¶
- LOOKUP "the"¶
- LOOKUP "path"¶
- GETFH¶
-
GETATTR (fsid, fileid, size, time_
modify )¶
Under the given circumstances, the following will be the result.¶
-
PUTROOTFH --> NFS_
OK . The current fh is now the root of the pseudo-fs.¶ -
LOOKUP "this" --> NFS_
OK . The current fh is for /this and is within the pseudo-fs.¶ -
LOOKUP "is" --> NFS_
OK . The current fh is for /this/is and is within the pseudo-fs.¶ -
LOOKUP "the" --> NFS_
OK . The current fh is for /this/is/the and is within the pseudo-fs.¶ -
LOOKUP "path" --> NFS_
OK . The current fh is for /this /is /the /path and is within a new, absent file system, but ... the client will never see the value of that fh.¶ -
GETFH --> NFS4ERR_
MOVED . Fails because current fh is in an absent file system at the start of the operation, and the specification makes no exception for GETFH.¶ -
GETATTR (fsid, fileid, size, time_
modify ). Not executed because the failure of the GETFH stops processing of the COMPOUND.¶
Given the failure of the GETFH, the client has the job of
determining the root of the absent file system and where to find
that file system, i.e., the server and path relative to that
server's root fh. Note that in this example, the client did
not obtain filehandles and attribute information (e.g., fsid) for
the intermediate directories, so that it would not be sure where
the absent file system starts. It could be the case, for example,
that /this/is/the is the root of the moved file system and that
the reason that the look up of "path" succeeded is that the
file system was not absent on that operation but was moved between the last
LOOKUP and the GETFH (since COMPOUND is not atomic). Even if we
had the fsids for all of the intermediate directories, we could
have no way of knowing that
In order to get the necessary information, let us re-send the
chain of LOOKUPs with GETFHs and GETATTRs to at least get the
fsids so we can be sure where the appropriate file system boundaries are.
The client could choose to get fs_
- OP01:
-
PUTROOTFH --> NFS_
OK¶ - Current fh is root of pseudo-fs.¶
- OP02:
-
GETATTR(fsid) --> NFS_
OK¶ - Just for completeness. Normally, clients will know the fsid of the pseudo-fs as soon as they establish communication with a server.¶
- OP03:
- LOOKUP "this" --> NFS_
OK¶ - OP04:
-
GETATTR(fsid) --> NFS_
OK¶ - Get current fsid to see where file system boundaries are. The fsid will be that for the pseudo-fs in this example, so no boundary.¶
- OP05:
-
GETFH --> NFS_
OK¶ - Current fh is for /this and is within pseudo-fs.¶
- OP06:
-
LOOKUP "is" --> NFS_
OK¶ - Current fh is for /this/is and is within pseudo-fs.¶
- OP07:
-
GETATTR(fsid) --> NFS_
OK¶ - Get current fsid to see where file system boundaries are. The fsid will be that for the pseudo-fs in this example, so no boundary.¶
- OP08:
-
GETFH --> NFS_
OK¶ - Current fh is for /this/is and is within pseudo-fs.¶
- OP09:
-
LOOKUP "the" --> NFS_
OK¶ - Current fh is for /this/is/the and is within pseudo-fs.¶
- OP10:
-
GETATTR(fsid) --> NFS_
OK¶ - Get current fsid to see where file system boundaries are. The fsid will be that for the pseudo-fs in this example, so no boundary.¶
- OP11:
-
GETFH --> NFS_
OK¶ - Current fh is for /this/is/the and is within pseudo-fs.¶
- OP12:
-
LOOKUP "path" --> NFS_
OK¶ - OP13:
-
GETATTR(fsid, fs_
locations_ info ) --> NFS_ OK¶ - We are getting the fsid to know where the file system boundaries are. In this operation, the fsid will be different than that of the parent directory (which in turn was retrieved in OP10). Note that the fsid we are given will not necessarily be preserved at the new location. That fsid might be different, and in fact the fsid we have for this file system might be a valid fsid of a different file system on that new server.¶
-
In this particular case, we are pretty sure anyway that what
has moved is
/this /is /the /path rather than /this/is/the since we have the fsid of the latter and it is that of the pseudo-fs, which presumably cannot move. However, in other examples, we might not have this kind of information to rely on (e.g., /this/is/the might be a non-pseudo file system separate from /this /is /the /path ), so we need to have other reliable source information on the boundary of the file system that is moved. If, for example, the file system /this/is had moved, we would have a case of migration rather than referral, and once the boundaries of the migrated file system was clear we could fetch fs_ locations_ info .¶ -
We are fetching fs_
locations_ info because the fact that we got an NFS4ERR_ MOVED at this point means that it is most likely that this is a referral and we need the destination. Even if it is the case that /this/is/the is a file system that has migrated, we will still need the location information for that file system.¶
- OP14:
-
GETFH --> NFS4ERR_
MOVED¶ - Fails because current fh is in an absent file system at the start of the operation, and the specification makes no exception for GETFH. Note that this means the server will never send the client a filehandle from within an absent file system.¶
Given the above, the client knows where the root of the absent file
system is
11.15.2. Referral Example (READDIR)
Another context in which a client may encounter referrals is when it does a READDIR on a directory in which some of the sub-directories are the roots of absent file systems.¶
Suppose such a directory is read as follows:¶
- PUTROOTFH¶
- LOOKUP "this"¶
- LOOKUP "is"¶
- LOOKUP "the"¶
-
READDIR (fsid, size, time_
modify, mounted_ on_ fileid )¶
In this case, because rdattr_
-
PUTROOTFH --> NFS_
OK . The current fh is at the root of the pseudo-fs.¶ -
LOOKUP "this" --> NFS_
OK . The current fh is for /this and is within the pseudo-fs.¶ -
LOOKUP "is" --> NFS_
OK . The current fh is for /this/is and is within the pseudo-fs.¶ -
LOOKUP "the" --> NFS_
OK . The current fh is for /this/is/the and is within the pseudo-fs.¶ -
READDIR (fsid, size, time_
modify, mounted_ on_ fileid ) --> NFS4ERR_ MOVED . Note that the same error would have been returned if /this/is/the had migrated, but it is returned because the directory contains the root of an absent file system.¶
So now suppose that we re-send with rdattr_
- PUTROOTFH¶
- LOOKUP "this"¶
- LOOKUP "is"¶
- LOOKUP "the"¶
-
READDIR
(rdattr_ error, fsid, size, time_ modify, mounted_ on_ fileid )¶
The results will be:¶
-
PUTROOTFH --> NFS_
OK . The current fh is at the root of the pseudo-fs.¶ -
LOOKUP "this" --> NFS_
OK . The current fh is for /this and is within the pseudo-fs.¶ -
LOOKUP "is" --> NFS_
OK . The current fh is for /this/is and is within the pseudo-fs.¶ -
LOOKUP "the" --> NFS_
OK . The current fh is for /this/is/the and is within the pseudo-fs.¶ -
READDIR
(rdattr_ error, fsid, size, time_ modify, mounted_ on_ fileid ) --> NFS_ OK . The attributes for directory entry with the component named "path" will only contain rdattr_ error with the value NFS4ERR_ MOVED, together with an fsid value and a value for mounted_ on_ fileid .¶
Suppose we do another READDIR to get fs_
- PUTROOTFH¶
- LOOKUP "this"¶
- LOOKUP "is"¶
- LOOKUP "the"¶
-
READDIR
(rdattr_ error, fs_ locations_ info, mounted_ on_ fileid, fsid, size, time_ modify )¶
The results would be:¶
-
PUTROOTFH --> NFS_
OK . The current fh is at the root of the pseudo-fs.¶ -
LOOKUP "this" --> NFS_
OK . The current fh is for /this and is within the pseudo-fs.¶ -
LOOKUP "is" --> NFS_
OK . The current fh is for /this/is and is within the pseudo-fs.¶ -
LOOKUP "the" --> NFS_
OK . The current fh is for /this/is/the and is within the pseudo-fs.¶ -
READDIR
(rdattr_ error, fs_ locations_ info, mounted_ on_ fileid, fsid, size, time_ modify ) --> NFS_ OK . The attributes will be as shown below.¶
The attributes for the directory entry with the component named "path" will only contain:¶
-
rdattr_
error (value: NFS_ OK )¶ -
fs_
locations_ info¶ -
mounted_
on_ fileid (value: unique fileid within referring file system)¶ - fsid (value: unique value within referring server)¶
The attributes for entry "path" will not contain size or
time_
11.16. The Attribute fs_locations
The fs_
struct fs_location4 {
utf8str_cis server<>;
pathname4 rootpath;
};
struct fs_locations4 {
pathname4 fs_root;
fs_location4 locations<>;
};
The fs_
The fs_
When the fs_
As an example, suppose there is a replicated file system located
at two
servers (servA and servB). At servA, the file system is located at
path /a/b/c. At, servB the file system is located at path /x/y/z.
If the client were to obtain the fs_
Note that there is no requirement that the number
of components in each rootpath be the same; there
is no relation between the number of components in
rootpath or fs_
The relationship between fs_
For an example of a referred or migrated file
system, suppose there is a file system located
at serv1. At serv1, the file system is located at
Thus, the server MUST return an fs_
Since the fs_
The following rules are general and apply irrespective of the context.¶
-
All listed
file system instances should be considered as of the
same handle class, if and only if, the
current fh_
expire_ type attribute does not include the FH4_ VOL_ MIGRATION bit. Note that in the case of referral, filehandle issues do not apply since there can be no filehandles known within the current file system, nor is there any access to the fh_ expire_ type attribute on the referring (absent) file system.¶ -
All listed file system instances should be considered as of the
same fileid class if and only if the
fh_
expire_ type attribute indicates persistent filehandles and does not include the FH4_ VOL_ MIGRATION bit. Note that in the case of referral, fileid issues do not apply since there can be no fileids known within the referring (absent) file system, nor is there any access to the fh_ expire_ type attribute.¶ - All file system instances servers should be considered as of different change classes.¶
For other class assignments, handling of file system transitions depends on the reasons for the transition:¶
-
When the transition is due to migration, that is, the client was
directed to a new file system after receiving an NFS4ERR_
MOVED error, the target should be treated as being of the same write-verifier class as the source.¶ -
When the transition is due to failover to another replica,
that is, the client selected another replica without
receiving an NFS4ERR_
MOVED error, the target should be treated as being of a different write-verifier class from the source.¶
The specific choices reflect typical implementation patterns for
failover and controlled migration, respectively. Since other
choices are possible and useful, this information is better
obtained by using fs_
See Section 21 for a
discussion on the recommendations for the security
flavor to be used by any GETATTR operation that
requests the fs_
11.17. The Attribute fs_locations_info
The fs_
There is additional data present in
fs_
- Attribute continuity information. This information will allow a client to select a replica that meets the transparency requirements of the applications accessing the data and to leverage optimizations due to the server guarantees of attribute continuity (e.g., if the change attribute of a file of the file system is continuous between multiple replicas, the client does not have to invalidate the file's cache when switching to a different replica).¶
-
File system identity information that indicates when multiple replicas, from the client's point of view, correspond to the same target file system, allowing them to be used interchangeably
, without disruption, as distinct synchronized replicas of the same file data.¶ Note that having two replicas with common identity information is distinct from the case of two (trunked) paths to the same replica.¶
- Information that will bear on the suitability of various replicas, depending on the use that the client intends. For example, many applications need an absolutely up-to-date copy (e.g., those that write), while others may only need access to the most up-to-date copy reasonably available.¶
- Server-derived preference information for replicas, which can be used to implement load-balancing while giving the client the entire file system list to be used in case the primary fails.¶
The fs_
Two fs_
The attribute will always contain at least a single fs_
It should be noted that fs_
The fs_
/*
* Defines an individual server access path
*/
struct fs_locations_server4 {
int32_t fls_currency;
opaque fls_info<>;
utf8str_cis fls_server;
};
/*
* Byte indices of items within
* fls_info: flag fields, class numbers,
* bytes indicating ranks and orders.
*/
const FSLI4BX_GFLAGS = 0;
const FSLI4BX_TFLAGS = 1;
const FSLI4BX_CLSIMUL = 2;
const FSLI4BX_CLHANDLE = 3;
const FSLI4BX_CLFILEID = 4;
const FSLI4BX_CLWRITEVER = 5;
const FSLI4BX_CLCHANGE = 6;
const FSLI4BX_CLREADDIR = 7;
const FSLI4BX_READRANK = 8;
const FSLI4BX_WRITERANK = 9;
const FSLI4BX_READORDER = 10;
const FSLI4BX_WRITEORDER = 11;
/*
* Bits defined within the general flag byte.
*/
const FSLI4GF_WRITABLE = 0x01;
const FSLI4GF_CUR_REQ = 0x02;
const FSLI4GF_ABSENT = 0x04;
const FSLI4GF_GOING = 0x08;
const FSLI4GF_SPLIT = 0x10;
/*
* Bits defined within the transport flag byte.
*/
const FSLI4TF_RDMA = 0x01;
/*
* Defines a set of replicas sharing
* a common value of the rootpath
* within the corresponding
* single-server namespaces.
*/
struct fs_locations_item4 {
fs_locations_server4 fli_entries<>;
pathname4 fli_rootpath;
};
/*
* Defines the overall structure of
* the fs_locations_info attribute.
*/
struct fs_locations_info4 {
uint32_t fli_flags;
int32_t fli_valid_for;
pathname4 fli_fs_root;
fs_locations_item4 fli_items<>;
};
/*
* Flag bits in fli_flags.
*/
const FSLI4IF_VAR_SUB = 0x00000001;
typedef fs_locations_info4 fattr4_fs_locations_info;
As noted above, the fs_
The data presented in the fs_
11.17.1. The fs_locations_server4 Structure
The fs_
When these values are different in two fs_
-
An indication of how up-to-date the file system is
(fls_ currency ) in seconds. This value is relative to the master copy. A negative value indicates that the server is unable to give any reasonably useful value here. A value of zero indicates that the file system is the actual writable data or a reliably coherent and fully up-to-date copy. Positive values indicate how out-of-date this copy can normally be before it is considered for update. Such a value is not a guarantee that such updates will always be performed on the required schedule but instead serves as a hint about how far the copy of the data would be expected to be behind the most up-to-date copy.¶ -
A counted array of one-byte values
(fls_ info ) containing information about the particular file system instance. This data includes general flags, transport capability flags, file system equivalence class information, and selection priority information. The encoding will be discussed below.¶ -
The server string
(fls_ server ). For the case of the replica currently being accessed (via GETATTR), a zero-length string MAY be used to indicate the current address being used for the RPC call. The fls_ server field can also be an IPv4 or IPv6 address, formatted the same way as an IPv4 or IPv6 address in the "server" field of the fs_ location4 data type (see Section 11.16).¶
With the exception of the transport-flag field (at offset
FSLI4BX_
Data within the fls_
-
The kinds of data in the fls_
info array, representing flags, file system classes, and priorities among sets of file systems representing the same data, are such that 8 bits provide a quite acceptable range of values. Even where there might be more than 256 such file system instances, having more than 256 distinct classes or priorities is unlikely.¶ -
Explicit definition of the various specific data items within
XDR would limit expandability in that any extension within
would require yet another attribute,
leading to specification and implementation clumsiness.
In the context of the NFSv4 extension model in effect at the time
fs_
locations_ info was designed (i.e., that which is described in RFC 5661 [66]), this would necessitate a new minor version to effect any Standards Track extension to the data in fls_ info .¶
The set of fls_
In light of the new extension model defined in RFC 8178
[67]
and the fact that the individual items within fls_
- All extensions need to be described by Standards Track documents. There is no need for such documents to be marked as updating RFC 5661 [66] or this document.¶
- It needs to be made clear whether the information in any added data items applies to the replica specified by the entry or to the specific network paths specified in the entry.¶
-
There needs to be a reliable way defined to determine whether the
server is aware of the extension. This may be based on the
length field of the fls_
info array, but it is more flexible to provide fs-scope or server-scope attributes to indicate what extensions are provided.¶
This encoding scheme can be adapted to the specification of multi-byte numeric values, even though none are currently defined. If extensions are made via Standards Track RFCs, multi-byte quantities will be encoded as a range of bytes with a range of indices, with the byte interpreted in big-endian byte order. Further, any such index assignments will be constrained by the need for the relevant quantities not to cross XDR word boundaries.¶
The fls_
-
Two 8-bit flag fields, one devoted to general file-system
characteristics and a second reserved for transport
-related capabilities.¶ - Six 8-bit class values that define various file system equivalence classes as explained below.¶
- Four 8-bit priority values that govern file system selection as explained below.¶
The general file system characteristics flag (at byte index
FSLI4BX_
-
FSLI4GF_
WRITABLE indicates that this file system target is writable, allowing it to be selected by clients that may need to write on this file system. When the current file system instance is writable and is defined as of the same simultaneous use class (as specified by the value at index FSLI4BX_ CLSIMUL ) to which the client was previously writing, then it must incorporate within its data any committed write made on the source file system instance. See Section 11.11.6, which discusses the write-verifier class. While there is no harm in not setting this flag for a file system that turns out to be writable, turning the flag on for a read-only file system can cause problems for clients that select a migration or replication target based on the flag and then find themselves unable to write.¶ -
FSLI4GF_
CUR_ REQ indicates that this replica is the one on which the request is being made. Only a single server entry may have this flag set and, in the case of a referral, no entry will have it set. Note that this flag might be set even if the request was made on a network access path different from any of those specified in the current entry.¶ -
FSLI4GF_
ABSENT indicates that this entry corresponds to an absent file system replica. It can only be set if FSLI4GF_ CUR_ REQ is set. When both such bits are set, it indicates that a file system instance is not usable but that the information in the entry can be used to determine the sorts of continuity available when switching from this replica to other possible replicas. Since this bit can only be true if FSLI4GF_ CUR_ REQ is true, the value could be determined using the fs_ status attribute, but the information is also made available here for the convenience of the client. An entry with this bit, since it represents a true file system (albeit absent), does not appear in the event of a referral, but only when a file system has been accessed at this location and has subsequently been migrated.¶ -
FSLI4GF_
GOING indicates that a replica, while still available, should not be used further. The client, if using it, should make an orderly transfer to another file system instance as expeditiously as possible. It is expected that file systems going out of service will be announced as FSLI4GF_ GOING some time before the actual loss of service. It is also expected that the fli_ valid_ for value will be sufficiently small to allow clients to detect and act on scheduled events, while large enough that the cost of the requests to fetch the fs_ locations_ info values will not be excessive. Values on the order of ten minutes seem reasonable.¶ When this flag is seen as part of a transition into a new file system, a client might choose to transfer immediately to another replica, or it may reference the current file system and only transition when a migration event occurs. Similarly, when this flag appears as a replica in the referral, clients would likely avoid being referred to this instance whenever there is another choice.¶
This flag, like the other items within fls_
info, applies to the replica rather than to a particular path to that replica. When it appears, a transition to a new replica, rather than to a different path to the same replica, is indicated.¶ -
FSLI4GF_
SPLIT indicates that when a transition occurs from the current file system instance to this one, the replacement may consist of multiple file systems. In this case, the client has to be prepared for the possibility that objects on the same file system before migration will be on different ones after. Note that FSLI4GF_ SPLIT is not incompatible with the file systems belonging to the same fileid class since, if one has a set of fileids that are unique within a file system, each subset assigned to a smaller file system after migration would not have any conflicts internal to that file system.¶ A client, in the case of a split file system, will interrogate existing files with which it has continuing connection (it is free to simply forget cached filehandles). If the client remembers the directory filehandle associated with each open file, it may proceed upward using LOOKUPP to find the new file system boundaries. Note that in the event of a referral, there will not be any such files and so these actions will not be performed. Instead, a reference to a portion of the original file system now split off into other file systems will encounter an fsid change and possibly a further referral.¶
Once the client recognizes that one file system has been split into two, it can prevent the disruption of running applications by presenting the two file systems as a single one until a convenient point to recognize the transition, such as a restart. This would require a mapping from the server's fsids to fsids as seen by the client, but this is already necessary for other reasons. As noted above, existing fileids within the two descendant file systems will not conflict. Providing non-conflicting fileids for newly created files on the split file systems is the responsibility of the server (or servers working in concert). The server can encode filehandles such that filehandles generated before the split event can be discerned from those generated after the split, allowing the server to determine when the need for emulating two file systems as one is over.¶
Although it is possible for this flag to be present in the event of referral, it would generally be of little interest to the client, since the client is not expected to have information regarding the current contents of the absent file system.¶
The transport-flag field (at byte index FSLI4BX_
-
FSLI4TF_
RDMA indicates that any specified network paths provide NFSv4.1 clients access using an RDMA-capable transport.¶
Attribute continuity and file system identity information are expressed by defining equivalence relations on the sets of file systems presented to the client. Each such relation is expressed as a set of file system equivalence classes. For each relation, a file system has an 8-bit class number. Two file systems belong to the same class if both have identical non-zero class numbers. Zero is treated as non-matching. Most often, the relevant question for the client will be whether a given replica is identical to / continuous with the current one in a given respect, but the information should be available also as to whether two other replicas match in that respect as well.¶
The following fields specify the file system's class numbers for the equivalence relations used in determining the nature of file system transitions. See Sections 11.9 through 11.14 and their various subsections for details about how this information is to be used. Servers may assign these values as they wish, so long as file system instances that share the same value have the specified relationship to one another; conversely, file systems that have the specified relationship to one another share a common class value. As each instance entry is added, the relationships of this instance to previously entered instances can be consulted, and if one is found that bears the specified relationship, that entry's class value can be copied to the new entry. When no such previous entry exists, a new value for that byte index (not previously used) can be selected, most likely by incrementing the value of the last class value assigned for that index.¶
-
The field with byte index FSLI4BX_
CLSIMUL defines the simultaneous -use class for the file system.¶ -
The field with byte index FSLI4BX_
CLHANDLE defines the handle class for the file system.¶ -
The field with byte index FSLI4BX_
CLFILEID defines the fileid class for the file system.¶ -
The field with byte index FSLI4BX_
CLWRITEVER defines the write-verifier class for the file system.¶ -
The field with byte index FSLI4BX_
CLCHANGE defines the change class for the file system.¶ -
The field with byte index FSLI4BX_
CLREADDIR defines the readdir class for the file system.¶
Server
Rank is used to express a strict server-imposed ordering on clients, with lower values indicating "more preferred". Clients should attempt to use all replicas with a given rank before they use one with a higher rank. Only if all of those file systems are unavailable should the client proceed to those of a higher rank. Because specifying a rank will override client preferences, servers should be conservative about using this mechanism, particularly when the environment is one in which client communication characteristics are neither tightly controlled nor visible to the server.¶
Within a rank, the order value is used to specify the server's
preference to guide the client's selection when the client's own
preferences are not controlling, with lower values of order
indicating "more preferred". If replicas are approximately equal
in all respects, clients should defer to the order specified by the
server. When clients look at server latency as part of their
selection, they are free to use this criterion, but it is suggested
that when latency differences are not significant, the
server
-
The field at byte index FSLI4BX_
READRANK gives the rank value to be used for read-only access.¶ -
The field at byte index FSLI4BX_
READORDER gives the order value to be used for read-only access.¶ -
The field at byte index FSLI4BX_
WRITERANK gives the rank value to be used for writable access.¶ -
The field at byte index FSLI4BX_
WRITEORDER gives the order value to be used for writable access.¶
Depending on the potential need for write access by a given client, one of the pairs of rank and order values is used. The read rank and order should only be used if the client knows that only reading will ever be done or if it is prepared to switch to a different replica in the event that any write access capability is required in the future.¶
11.17.2. The fs_locations_info4 Structure
The fs_
-
The fli_
flags field, which contains general flags that affect the interpretation of this fs_ locations_ info4 structure and all fs_ locations_ item4 structures within it. The only flag currently defined is FSLI4IF_ VAR_ SUB . All bits in the fli_ flags field that are not defined should always be returned as zero.¶ -
The fli_
fs_ root field, which contains the pathname of the root of the current file system on the current server, just as it does in the fs_ locations4 structure.¶ -
An array called fli_
items of fs_ locations4_ item structures, which contain information about replicas of the current file system. Where the current file system is actually present, or has been present, i.e., this is not a referral situation, one of the fs_ locations_ item4 structures will contain an fs_ locations_ server4 for the current server. This structure will have FSLI4GF_ ABSENT set if the current file system is absent, i.e., normal access to it will return NFS4ERR_ MOVED .¶ -
The fli_
valid_ for field specifies a time in seconds for which it is reasonable for a client to use the fs_ locations_ info attribute without refetch. The fli_ valid_ for value does not provide a guarantee of validity since servers can unexpectedly go out of service or become inaccessible for any number of reasons. Clients are well-advised to refetch this information for an actively accessed file system at every fli_ valid_ for seconds. This is particularly important when file system replicas may go out of service in a controlled way using the FSLI4GF_ GOING flag to communicate an ongoing change. The server should set fli_ valid_ for to a value that allows well-behaved clients to notice the FSLI4GF_ GOING flag and make an orderly switch before the loss of service becomes effective. If this value is zero, then no refetch interval is appropriate and the client need not refetch this data on any particular schedule. In the event of a transition to a new file system instance, a new value of the fs_ locations_ info attribute will be fetched at the destination. It is to be expected that this may have a different fli_ valid_ for value, which the client should then use in the same fashion as the previous value. Because a refetch of the attribute causes information from all component entries to be refetched, the server will typically provide a low value for this field if any of the replicas are likely to go out of service in a short time frame. Note that, because of the ability of the server to return NFS4ERR_ MOVED to trigger the use of different paths, when alternate trunked paths are available, there is generally no need to use low values of fli_ valid_ for in connection with the management of alternate paths to the same replica.¶
The FSLI4IF_
11.17.3. The fs_locations_item4 Structure
The fs_
If this flag is not set, then fli_
When such substitution is in effect, a variable beginning with the string "${" and ending with the string "}" and containing a colon is to be replaced by the client-specific value associated with that variable. The string "unknown" should be used by the client when it has no value for such a variable. The pathname resulting from such substitutions is used to designate the target file system, so that different clients may have different file systems, corresponding to that location in the multi-server namespace.¶
As mentioned above, such substituted pathname variables
contain a colon. The part before the colon is to be a
DNS domain name, and the part after is to be a case
Where the domain is "ietf.org", only variable names defined in this document or subsequent Standards Track RFCs are subject to such substitution. Organizations are free to use their domain names to create their own sets of client-specific variables, to be subject to such substitution. In cases where such variables are intended to be used more broadly than a single organization, publication of an Informational RFC defining such variables is RECOMMENDED.¶
The variable ${ietf
The variable ${ietf
The variable ${ietf
Use of these variables could result in the direction of different clients to different file systems on the same server, as appropriate to particular clients. In cases in which the target file systems are located on different servers, a single server could serve as a referral point so that each valid combination of variable values would designate a referral hosted on a single server, with the targets of those referrals on a number of different servers.¶
Because namespace administration is affected by the values selected to substitute for various variables, clients should provide convenient means of determining what variable substitutions a client will implement, as well as, where appropriate, providing means to control the substitutions to be used. The exact means by which this will be done is outside the scope of this specification.¶
Although variable substitution is most suitable for use in the context of referrals, it may be used in the context of replication and migration. If it is used in these contexts, the server must ensure that no matter what values the client presents for the substituted variables, the result is always a valid successor file system instance to that from which a transition is occurring, i.e., that the data is identical or represents a later image of a writable file system.¶
Note that when fli_
11.18. The Attribute fs_status
In an environment in which multiple copies of the same basic set of data are available, information regarding the particular source of such data and the relationships among different copies can be very helpful in providing consistent data to applications.¶
enum fs4_status_type {
STATUS4_FIXED = 1,
STATUS4_UPDATED = 2,
STATUS4_VERSIONED = 3,
STATUS4_WRITABLE = 4,
STATUS4_REFERRAL = 5
};
struct fs4_status {
bool fss_absent;
fs4_status_type fss_type;
utf8str_cs fss_source;
utf8str_cs fss_current;
int32_t fss_age;
nfstime4 fss_version;
};
The boolean fss_
The fss_
-
STATUS4_
FIXED, which indicates a read-only image in the sense that it will never change. The possibility is allowed that, as a result of migration or switch to a different image, changed data can be accessed, but within the confines of this instance, no change is allowed. The client can use this fact to cache aggressively.¶ -
STATUS4_
VERSIONED, which indicates that the image, like the STATUS4_ UPDATED case, is updated externally, but it provides a guarantee that the server will carefully update an associated version value so that the client can protect itself from a situation in which it reads data from one version of the file system and then later reads data from an earlier version of the same file system. See below for a discussion of how this can be done.¶ -
STATUS4_
UPDATED, which indicates an image that cannot be updated by the user writing to it but that may be changed externally, typically because it is a periodically updated copy of another writable file system somewhere else. In this case, version information is not provided, and the client does not have the responsibility of making sure that this version only advances upon a file system instance transition. In this case, it is the responsibility of the server to make sure that the data presented after a file system instance transition is a proper successor image and includes all changes seen by the client and any change made before all such changes.¶ -
STATUS4_
WRITABLE, which indicates that the file system is an actual writable one. The client need not, of course, actually write to the file system, but once it does, it should not accept a transition to anything other than a writable instance of that same file system.¶ -
STATUS4_
REFERRAL, which indicates that the file system in question is absent and has never been present on this server.¶
Note that in the STATUS4_
The opaque strings fss_
The opaque string fss_
The opaque string fss_
The field fss_
The fss_
When fss_
When it is important to the client to make sure that only valid
successor images are accepted, it must make sure that it does not
read data or metadata from the file system without updating its
sense of the current state of the image. This is to avoid the possibility
that the fs_
In order to accept valid images reliably, the client must do a GETATTR of the fs_
The procedure above will ensure that before using any data from the
file system the client has in hand a newly-fetched current version
of the file system image. Multiple values for multiple requests in
flight can be resolved by assembling them into the required partial
order (and the elements should form a total order within the
partial order) and
using the last.
The client may then, when switching among
file system instances, decline to use an instance that does not have
an fss_
12. Parallel NFS (pNFS)
12.1. Introduction
pNFS is an OPTIONAL feature within NFSv4.1; the pNFS feature
set allows direct client access to the storage devices containing
file data. When file data for a single NFSv4 server is stored on
multiple and/or higher
+-----------+
|+-----------+ +-----------+
||+-----------+ | |
||| | NFSv4.1 + pNFS | |
+|| Clients |<------------------------------>| Server |
+| | | |
+-----------+ | |
||| +-----------+
||| |
||| |
||| Storage +-----------+ |
||| Protocol |+-----------+ |
||+----------------||+-----------+ Control |
|+-----------------||| | Protocol|
+------------------+|| Storage |------------+
+| Devices |
+-----------+
In this model, the clients, server, and storage devices are responsible for managing file access. This is in contrast to NFSv4 without pNFS, where it is primarily the server's responsibility; some of this responsibility may be delegated to the client under strictly specified conditions. See Section 12.2.5 for a discussion of the Storage Protocol. See Section 12.2.6 for a discussion of the Control Protocol.¶
pNFS takes the form of OPTIONAL operations that manage protocol objects called 'layouts' (Section 12.2.7) that contain a byte-range and storage location information. The layout is managed in a similar fashion as NFSv4.1 data delegations. For example, the layout is leased, recallable, and revocable. However, layouts are distinct abstractions and are manipulated with new operations. When a client holds a layout, it is granted the ability to directly access the byte-range at the storage location specified in the layout.¶
There are interactions between layouts and other NFSv4.1 abstractions such as data delegations and byte-range locking. Delegation issues are discussed in Section 12.5.5. Byte-range locking issues are discussed in Sections 12.2.9 and 12.5.1.¶
12.2. pNFS Definitions
NFSv4.1's pNFS feature provides parallel data access to a file system that stripes its content across multiple storage servers. The first instantiation of pNFS, as part of NFSv4.1, separates the file system protocol processing into two parts: metadata processing and data processing. Data consist of the contents of regular files that are striped across storage servers. Data striping occurs in at least two ways: on a file-by-file basis and, within sufficiently large files, on a block-by-block basis. In contrast, striped access to metadata by pNFS clients is not provided in NFSv4.1, even though the file system back end of a pNFS server might stripe metadata. Metadata consist of everything else, including the contents of non-regular files (e.g., directories); see Section 12.2.1. The metadata functionality is implemented by an NFSv4.1 server that supports pNFS and the operations described in Section 18; such a server is called a metadata server (Section 12.2.2).¶
The data functionality is implemented by one or more storage devices, each of which are accessed by the client via a storage protocol. A subset (defined in Section 13.6) of NFSv4.1 is one such storage protocol. New terms are introduced to the NFSv4.1 nomenclature and existing terms are clarified to allow for the description of the pNFS feature.¶
12.2.1. Metadata
Information about a file system object, such as its name, location within the namespace, owner, ACL, and other attributes. Metadata may also include storage location information, and this will vary based on the underlying storage mechanism that is used.¶
12.2.2. Metadata Server
An NFSv4.1 server that supports the pNFS feature. A variety of architectural choices exist for the metadata server and its use of file system information held at the server. Some servers may contain metadata only for file objects residing at the metadata server, while the file data resides on associated storage devices. Other metadata servers may hold both metadata and a varying degree of file data.¶
12.2.3. pNFS Client
An NFSv4.1 client that supports pNFS operations and supports at least one storage protocol for performing I/O to storage devices.¶
12.2.4. Storage Device
A storage device stores a regular file's data, but leaves metadata management to the metadata server. A storage device could be another NFSv4.1 server, an object-based storage device (OSD), a block device accessed over a System Area Network (SAN, e.g., either FiberChannel or iSCSI SAN), or some other entity.¶
12.2.5. Storage Protocol
As noted in Figure 1, the storage protocol is the method used by the client to store and retrieve data directly from the storage devices.¶
The NFSv4.1 pNFS feature has been structured to allow for a variety of storage protocols to be defined and used. One example storage protocol is NFSv4.1 itself (as documented in Section 13). Other options for the storage protocol are described elsewhere and include:¶
- Block/volume protocols such as Internet SCSI (iSCSI) [56] and FCP [57]. The block/volume protocol support can be independent of the addressing structure of the block/volume protocol used, allowing more than one protocol to access the same file data and enabling extensibility to other block/volume protocols. See [48] for a layout specification that allows pNFS to use block/volume storage protocols.¶
- Object protocols such as OSD over iSCSI or Fibre Channel [58]. See [47] for a layout specification that allows pNFS to use object storage protocols.¶
It is possible that various storage protocols are available to
both client and server and it may be possible that a client and
server do not have a matching storage protocol available to them.
Because of this, the pNFS server MUST support normal NFSv4.1 access
to any file accessible by the pNFS feature; this will allow for
continued interoperabilit
12.2.6. Control Protocol
As noted in Figure 1, the control protocol is used by the exported file system between the metadata server and storage devices. Specification of such protocols is outside the scope of the NFSv4.1 protocol. Such control protocols would be used to control activities such as the allocation and deallocation of storage, the management of state required by the storage devices to perform client access control, and, depending on the storage protocol, the enforcement of authentication and authorization so that restrictions that would be enforced by the metadata server are also enforced by the storage device.¶
A particular control protocol is not REQUIRED by NFSv4.1 but requirements are placed on the control protocol for maintaining attributes like modify time, the change attribute, and the end-of-file (EOF) position. Note that if pNFS is layered over a clustered, parallel file system (e.g., PVFS [59]), the mechanisms that enable clustering and parallelism in that file system can be considered the control protocol.¶
12.2.7. Layout Types
A layout describes the mapping of a file's data to the storage devices that hold the data. A layout is said to belong to a specific layout type (data type layouttype4, see Section 3.3.13). The layout type allows for variants to handle different storage protocols, such as those associated with block/volume [48], object [47], and file (Section 13) layout types. A metadata server, along with its control protocol, MUST support at least one layout type. A private sub-range of the layout type namespace is also defined. Values from the private layout type range MAY be used for internal testing or experimentation (see Section 3.3.13).¶
As an example, the organization of the file layout type could be an array of tuples (e.g., device ID, filehandle), along with a definition of how the data is stored across the devices (e.g., striping). A block/volume layout might be an array of tuples that store <device ID, block number, block count> along with information about block size and the associated file offset of the block number. An object layout might be an array of tuples <device ID, object ID> and an additional structure (i.e., the aggregation map) that defines how the logical byte sequence of the file data is serialized into the different objects. Note that the actual layouts are typically more complex than these simple expository examples.¶
Requests for pNFS-related operations will often specify a layout
type. Examples of such operations are GETDEVICEINFO and LAYOUTGET.
The response for these operations will include structures such
as a device_
12.2.8. Layout
A layout defines how a file's data is organized on one or more storage devices. There are many potential layout types; each of the layout types are differentiated by the storage protocol used to access data and by the aggregation scheme that lays out the file data on the underlying storage devices. A layout is precisely identified by the tuple <client ID, filehandle, layout type, iomode, range>, where filehandle refers to the filehandle of the file on the metadata server.¶
It is important to define when layouts overlap and/or conflict with each other. For two layouts with overlapping byte-ranges to actually overlap each other, both layouts must be of the same layout type, correspond to the same filehandle, and have the same iomode. Layouts conflict when they overlap and differ in the content of the layout (i.e., the storage device/file mapping parameters differ). Note that differing iomodes do not lead to conflicting layouts. It is permissible for layouts with different iomodes, pertaining to the same byte-range, to be held by the same client. An example of this would be copy-on-write functionality for a block/volume layout type.¶
12.2.9. Layout Iomode
The layout iomode (data type layoutiomode4, see Section 3.3.20) indicates to the metadata server the
client's intent to perform either just READ operations
or a mixture containing READ
and WRITE operations. For certain layout
types, it is useful for a client to specify this intent at the time it sends LAYOUTGET
(Section 18.43). For example, for
block
A storage device may validate I/O with regard to the iomode; this
is dependent upon storage device implementation and layout type.
Thus, if the client's layout iomode is inconsistent with the I/O
being performed, the storage device may reject the client's I/O with
an error indicating that a new layout with the correct iomode should be
obtained via LAYOUTGET. For example, if a client gets a layout with a LAYOUTIOMODE4_
The use of the layout iomode does not conflict with OPEN share modes or byte-range LOCK operations;
open share mode and byte-range lock conflicts are enforced as they are without the
use of pNFS and are logically separate from the pNFS layout level.
Open share modes and byte-range locks are the preferred method for
restricting user access to data files. For example, an OPEN of
OPEN4_
12.2.10. Device IDs
The device ID (data type deviceid4, see Section 3.3.14) identifies a group of storage devices. The scope of a device ID is the pair <client ID, layout type>. In practice, a significant amount of information may be required to fully address a storage device. Rather than embedding all such information in a layout, layouts embed device IDs. The NFSv4.1 operation GETDEVICEINFO (Section 18.40) is used to retrieve the complete address information (including all device addresses for the device ID) regarding the storage device according to its layout type and device ID. For example, the address of an NFSv4.1 data server or of an object-based storage device could be an IP address and port. The address of a block storage device could be a volume label.¶
Clients cannot expect the mapping between a device ID and its storage device address(es) to persist across metadata server restart. See Section 12.7.4 for a description of how recovery works in that situation.¶
A device ID lives as long as there is a layout referring to the device ID. If there are no layouts referring to the device ID, the server is free to delete the device ID any time. Once a device ID is deleted by the server, the server MUST NOT reuse the device ID for the same layout type and client ID again. This requirement is feasible because the device ID is 16 bytes long, leaving sufficient room to store a generation number if the server's implementation requires most of the rest of the device ID's content to be reused. This requirement is necessary because otherwise the race conditions between asynchronous notification of device ID addition and deletion would be too difficult to sort out.¶
Device ID to device address mappings are not leased, and can be changed at any time. (Note that while device ID to device address mappings are likely to change after the metadata server restarts, the server is not required to change the mappings.) A server has two choices for changing mappings. It can recall all layouts referring to the device ID or it can use a notification mechanism.¶
The NFSv4.1 protocol has no optimal way to recall
all layouts that referred to a particular device ID
(unless the server associates a single device ID with
a single fsid or a single client ID; in which case,
CB_
Via a notification mechanism (see Section 20.12), device ID to device address mappings can change over the duration of server operation without recalling or revoking the layouts that refer to device ID. The notification mechanism can also delete a device ID, but only if the client has no layouts referring to the device ID. A notification of a change to a device ID to device address mapping will immediately or eventually invalidate some or all of the device ID's mappings. The server MUST support notifications and the client must request them before they can be used. For further information about the notification types, see Section 20.12.¶
12.3. pNFS Operations
NFSv4.1 has several operations that are needed for pNFS servers, regardless of layout type or storage protocol. These operations are all sent to a metadata server and summarized here. While pNFS is an OPTIONAL feature, if pNFS is implemented, some operations are REQUIRED in order to comply with pNFS. See Section 17.¶
These are the fore channel pNFS operations:¶
- GETDEVICEINFO
- (Section 18.40), as noted previously (Section 12.2.10), returns the mapping of device ID to storage device address.¶
- GETDEVICELIST
- (Section 18.41) allows clients to fetch all device IDs for a specific file system.¶
- LAYOUTGET
- (Section 18.43) is used by a client to get a layout for a file.¶
- LAYOUTCOMMIT
- (Section 18.42) is used to inform the metadata server of the client's intent to commit data that has been written to the storage device (the storage device as originally indicated in the return value of LAYOUTGET).¶
- LAYOUTRETURN
- (Section 18.44) is used to return layouts for a file, a file system ID (FSID), or a client ID.¶
These are the backchannel pNFS operations:¶
- CB_
LAYOUTRECALL - (Section 20.3) recalls a layout, all layouts belonging to a file system, or all layouts belonging to a client ID.¶
- CB_
RECALL_ ANY - (Section 20.6) tells a client that it needs to return some number of recallable objects, including layouts, to the metadata server.¶
- CB_
RECALLABLE_ OBJ_ AVAIL - (Section 20.7) tells a client that a recallable object that it was denied (in case of pNFS, a layout denied by LAYOUTGET) due to resource exhaustion is now available.¶
- CB_
NOTIFY_ DEVICEID - (Section 20.12) notifies the client of changes to device IDs.¶
12.4. pNFS Attributes
A number of attributes specific to pNFS are listed and described in Section 5.12.¶
12.5. Layout Semantics
12.5.1. Guarantees Provided by Layouts
Layouts grant to the client the ability to access data located at a storage device with the appropriate storage protocol. The client is guaranteed the layout will be recalled when one of two things occur: either a conflicting layout is requested or the state encapsulated by the layout becomes invalid (this can happen when an event directly or indirectly modifies the layout). When a layout is recalled and returned by the client, the client continues with the ability to access file data with normal NFSv4.1 operations through the metadata server. Only the ability to access the storage devices is affected.¶
The requirement of NFSv4.1 that all user access rights MUST be obtained through the appropriate OPEN, LOCK, and ACCESS operations is not modified with the existence of layouts. Layouts are provided to NFSv4.1 clients, and user access still follows the rules of the protocol as if they did not exist. It is a requirement that for a client to access a storage device, a layout must be held by the client. If a storage device receives an I/O request for a byte-range for which the client does not hold a layout, the storage device SHOULD reject that I/O request. Note that the act of modifying a file for which a layout is held does not necessarily conflict with the holding of the layout that describes the file being modified. Therefore, it is the requirement of the storage protocol or layout type that determines the necessary behavior. For example, block/volume layout types require that the layout's iomode agree with the type of I/O being performed.¶
Depending upon the layout type and storage protocol in use, storage
device access permissions may be granted by LAYOUTGET and may be
encoded within the type-specific layout. For an example of storage
device access permissions, see an object-based protocol such as [58]. If access permissions are encoded within the
layout, the metadata server SHOULD recall the layout when those
permissions become invalid for any reason -- for example, when a file
becomes unwritable or inaccessible to a client. Note, clients are
still required to perform the appropriate
OPEN, LOCK, and ACCESS operations as described above. The degree to which it is
possible for the client to circumvent these operations and
the consequences of doing so must be clearly specified by the
individual layout type specifications. In addition, these
specifications must be clear about the requirements and
non
In the presence of pNFS functionality, mandatory byte-range locks MUST behave as they would without pNFS. Therefore, if mandatory file locks and layouts are provided simultaneously, the storage device MUST be able to enforce the mandatory byte-range locks. For example, if one client obtains a mandatory byte-range lock and a second client accesses the storage device, the storage device MUST appropriately restrict I/O for the range of the mandatory byte-range lock. If the storage device is incapable of providing this check in the presence of mandatory byte-range locks, then the metadata server MUST NOT grant layouts and mandatory byte-range locks simultaneously.¶
12.5.2. Getting a Layout
A client obtains a layout with the LAYOUTGET operation. The metadata server will grant layouts of a particular type (e.g., block/volume, object, or file). The client selects an appropriate layout type that the server supports and the client is prepared to use. The layout returned to the client might not exactly match the requested byte-range as described in Section 18.43.3. As needed a client may send multiple LAYOUTGET operations; these might result in multiple overlapping, non-conflicting layouts (see Section 12.2.8).¶
In order to get a layout, the client must first have opened the file
via the OPEN operation. When a client has no layout on a file, it
MUST present an open stateid, a delegation stateid, or
a byte-range lock stateid in the loga_
The storage protocol used by the client to access the data on the storage device is determined by the layout's type. The client is responsible for matching the layout type with an available method to interpret and use the layout. The method for this layout type selection is outside the scope of the pNFS functionality.¶
Although the metadata server is in control
of the layout for a file, the pNFS client
can provide hints to the server when a file
is opened or created about the preferred
layout type and aggregation schemes.
pNFS introduces a layout_
Because the EXCLUSIVE4 createmode4 does not allow the
setting of attributes at file creation time, NFSv4.1
introduces the EXCLUSIVE4_
12.5.3. Layout Stateid
As with all other stateids, the layout stateid consists of a "seqid" and
"other" field. Once a layout stateid is established, the "other" field
will stay constant unless the stateid is revoked or the client
returns all layouts on the file and the server disposes of the
stateid. The "seqid" field is initially set to one, and is never
zero on any NFSv4.1 operation that uses layout stateids, whether it
is a fore channel or backchannel operation. After the layout stateid
is established, the server increments by one the value of the
"seqid" in each subsequent LAYOUTGET and LAYOUTRETURN response, and
in each CB_
Given the design goal of pNFS to provide parallelism, the layout
stateid differs from other stateid types in that the client is
expected to send LAYOUTGET and LAYOUTRETURN operations in parallel.
The "seqid" value is used by the client to properly sort responses
to LAYOUTGET and LAYOUTRETURN. The "seqid" is also used to prevent
race conditions between LAYOUTGET and CB_
Once the client receives a layout stateid, it MUST use the correct
"seqid" for subsequent LAYOUTGET or LAYOUTRETURN operations. The
correct "seqid" is defined as the highest "seqid" value from
responses of fully processed LAYOUTGET or LAYOUTRETURN operations or
arguments of a fully processed CB_
The client's receipt of a "seqid" is not sufficient for subsequent
use. The client must fully process the operations before the
"seqid" can be used. For LAYOUTGET results, if
the client is not using the forgetful model
(Section 12.5.5.1), it MUST first update its
record of what ranges of the file's layout it has before using the
seqid. For LAYOUTRETURN results, the client MUST delete the range
from its record of what ranges of the file's layout it had before
using the seqid. For CB_
Once a client has no more layouts on a file, the layout stateid is
no longer valid and MUST NOT be used. Any attempt to use such a
layout stateid will result in NFS4ERR_
12.5.4. Committing a Layout
Allowing for varying storage protocol capabilities, the pNFS protocol does not require the metadata server and storage devices to have a consistent view of file attributes and data location mappings. Data location mapping refers to aspects such as which offsets store data as opposed to storing holes (see Section 13.4.4 for a discussion). Related issues arise for storage protocols where a layout may hold provisionally allocated blocks where the allocation of those blocks does not survive a complete restart of both the client and server. Because of this inconsistency, it is necessary to resynchronize the client with the metadata server and its storage devices and make any potential changes available to other clients. This is accomplished by use of the LAYOUTCOMMIT operation.¶
The LAYOUTCOMMIT operation is responsible for committing a modified layout to the metadata server. The data should be written and committed to the appropriate storage devices before the LAYOUTCOMMIT occurs. The scope of the LAYOUTCOMMIT operation depends on the storage protocol in use. It is important to note that the level of synchronization is from the point of view of the client that sent the LAYOUTCOMMIT. The updated state on the metadata server need only reflect the state as of the client's last operation previous to the LAYOUTCOMMIT. The metadata server is not REQUIRED to maintain a global view that accounts for other clients' I/O that may have occurred within the same time frame.¶
For block
The control protocol is free to synchronize the attributes before it receives a LAYOUTCOMMIT; however, upon successful completion of a LAYOUTCOMMIT, state that exists on the metadata server that describes the file MUST be synchronized with the state that exists on the storage devices that comprise that file as of the client's last sent operation. Thus, a client that queries the size of a file between a WRITE to a storage device and the LAYOUTCOMMIT might observe a size that does not reflect the actual data written.¶
The client MUST have a layout in order to send a LAYOUTCOMMIT operation.¶
12.5.4.1. LAYOUTCOMMIT and change/time_modify
The change and time_
For some layout protocols, the storage device is able to notify the
metadata server of the occurrence of an I/O; as a result, the
change and time_
12.5.4.2. LAYOUTCOMMIT and size
The size of a file may be updated when the LAYOUTCOMMIT operation is
used by the client. One of the fields in the argument to
LAYOUTCOMMIT is loca_
The metadata server may do one of the following:¶
- Update the file's size using the last write offset provided by the client as either the true file size or as a hint of the file size. If the metadata server has a method available, any new value for file size should be sanity-checked. For example, the file must not be truncated if the client presents a last write offset less than the file's current size.¶
- Ignore the client-provided last write offset; the metadata server must have sufficient knowledge from other sources to determine the file's size. For example, the metadata server queries the storage devices with the control protocol.¶
The method chosen to update the file's size will depend on the storage device's and/or the control protocol's capabilities. For example, if the storage devices are block devices with no knowledge of file size, the metadata server must rely on the client to set the last write offset appropriately.¶
The results of LAYOUTCOMMIT contain a new size value in the form of a newsize4 union data type. If the file's size is set as a result of LAYOUTCOMMIT, the metadata server must reply with the new size; otherwise, the new size is not provided. If the file size is updated, the metadata server SHOULD update the storage devices such that the new file size is reflected when LAYOUTCOMMIT processing is complete. For example, the client should be able to read up to the new file size.¶
The client can extend the length of a file
or truncate a file by sending a SETATTR operation to the metadata server
with the size attribute specified. If the size specified is larger than
the current size of the file, the file is "zero extended", i.e., zeros are
implicitly added between the file's previous EOF and the new EOF.
(In many implementations
12.5.4.3. LAYOUTCOMMIT and layoutupdate
The LAYOUTCOMMIT argument contains a loca_
12.5.5. Recalling a Layout
Since a layout protects a client's access to a file via a direct
client
An iomode is also specified when recalling a layout.
Generally, the iomode in the recall request must match the layout
being returned; for example, a recall with an iomode of
LAYOUTIOMODE4_
A REMOVE operation SHOULD cause the metadata server to recall the
layout to prevent the client from accessing a non-existent file and
to reclaim state stored on the client. Since a REMOVE may be delayed
until the last close of the file has occurred, the recall may also
be delayed until this time. After the last reference on the file
has been released and the file has been removed, the client should
no longer be able to perform I/O using the layout. In the case of a
file-based layout, the data server SHOULD return NFS4ERR_
Once a layout has been returned, the client MUST NOT send I/Os to the storage devices for the file, byte-range, and iomode represented by the returned layout. If a client does send an I/O to a storage device for which it does not hold a layout, the storage device SHOULD reject the I/O.¶
Although pNFS does not alter the file data caching capabilities of
clients, or their semantics, it recognizes that some clients may
perform more aggressive write-behind caching to optimize the
benefits provided by pNFS. However, write-behind caching may
negatively affect the latency in returning a layout in response to a
CB_
12.5.5.1. Layout Recall Callback Robustness
It has been assumed thus far that pNFS client state (layout ranges and iomode) for a file exactly matches that of the pNFS server for that file. This assumption leads to the implication that any callback results in a LAYOUTRETURN or set of LAYOUTRETURNs that exactly match the range in the callback, since both client and server agree about the state being maintained. However, it can be useful if this assumption does not always hold. For example:¶
-
If conflicts that require
callbacks are very rare, and a server can use a multi-file callback
to recover per-client resources (e.g., via an FSID recall or a
multi-file recall within a single CB_
COMPOUND ), the result may be significantly less client-server pNFS traffic.¶ - It may be useful for servers to maintain information about what ranges are held by a client on a coarse-grained basis, leading to the server's layout ranges being beyond those actually held by the client. In the extreme, a server could manage conflicts on a per-file basis, only sending whole-file callbacks even though clients may request and be granted sub-file ranges.¶
-
It may be useful for clients to "forget" details about
what layouts and ranges the client actually has, leading
to the server's layout ranges being beyond those that the
client "thinks" it has. As long as the client does not
assume it has layouts that are beyond what the server
has granted, this is a safe practice. When a client
forgets what ranges and layouts it has, and it receives
a CB_
LAYOUTRECALL operation, the client MUST follow up with a LAYOUTRETURN for what the server recalled, or alternatively return the NFS4ERR_ NOMATCHING_ LAYOUT error if it has no layout to return in the recalled range.¶ -
In order to avoid errors, it is vital that a client not assign
itself layout permissions beyond what the server has granted, and
that the server not forget layout permissions that have been granted.
On the other hand, if a
server believes that a client holds a layout that the client
does not know about, it is useful for the client to cleanly indicate
completion of the requested recall either by sending a LAYOUTRETURN
operation for the entire requested range or by returning an
NFS4ERR_
NOMATCHING_ LAYOUT error to the CB_ LAYOUTRECALL .¶
Thus, in light of the above, it is useful for a server to be able to send callbacks for layout ranges it has not granted to a client, and for a client to return ranges it does not hold. A pNFS client MUST always return layouts that comprise the full range specified by the recall. Note, the full recalled layout range need not be returned as part of a single operation, but may be returned in portions. This allows the client to stage the flushing of dirty data and commits and returns of layouts. Also, it indicates to the metadata server that the client is making progress.¶
When a layout is returned, the client MUST NOT have any outstanding I/O requests to the storage devices involved in the layout. Rephrasing, the client MUST NOT return the layout while it has outstanding I/O requests to the storage device.¶
Even with this requirement for the client, it is possible that I/O requests may be presented to a storage device no longer allowed to perform them. Since the server has no strict control as to when the client will return the layout, the server may later decide to unilaterally revoke the client's access to the storage devices as provided by the layout. In choosing to revoke access, the server must deal with the possibility of lingering I/O requests, i.e., I/O requests that are still in flight to storage devices identified by the revoked layout. All layout type specifications MUST define whether unilateral layout revocation by the metadata server is supported; if it is, the specification must also describe how lingering writes are processed. For example, storage devices identified by the revoked layout could be fenced off from the client that held the layout.¶
In order to ensure client/server convergence with regard to layout state,
the final LAYOUTRETURN operation in a sequence of LAYOUTRETURN
operations for a particular recall MUST specify the entire range
being recalled, echoing the recalled layout type, iomode,
recall/return type (FILE, FSID, or ALL), and byte-range, even if
layouts pertaining to partial ranges were previously
returned. In addition, if the client holds no layouts that
overlap the range being recalled, the client should return the
NFS4ERR_
12.5.5.2. Sequencing of Layout Operations
As with other stateful operations, pNFS requires the correct sequencing of layout operations. pNFS uses the "seqid" in the layout stateid to provide the correct sequencing between regular operations and callbacks. It is the server's responsibility to avoid inconsistencies regarding the layouts provided and the client's responsibility to properly serialize its layout requests and layout returns.¶
12.5.5.2.1. Layout Recall and Return Sequencing
One critical issue with regard to layout operations sequencing
concerns callbacks. The protocol must defend against
races between the reply to a LAYOUTGET or LAYOUTRETURN
operation and a subsequent CB_
In addition to the seqid-based mechanism,
Section 2.10.6.3
describes the sessions mechanism for allowing the
client to detect callback race conditions and delay processing such a
CB_
12.5.5.2.1.1. Get/Return Sequencing
The protocol allows the client to send concurrent LAYOUTGET and LAYOUTRETURN operations to the server. The protocol does not provide any means for the server to process the requests in the same order in which they were created. However, through the use of the "seqid" field in the layout stateid, the client can determine the order in which parallel outstanding operations were processed by the server. Thus, when a layout retrieved by an outstanding LAYOUTGET operation intersects with a layout returned by an outstanding LAYOUTRETURN on the same file, the order in which the two conflicting operations are processed determines the final state of the overlapping layout. The order is determined by the "seqid" returned in each operation: the operation with the higher seqid was executed later.¶
It is permissible for the client to send multiple parallel LAYOUTGET operations for the same file or multiple parallel LAYOUTRETURN operations for the same file or a mix of both.¶
It is permissible for the client to use the current stateid (see Section 16.2.3.1.2) for LAYOUTGET operations, for example, when compounding LAYOUTGETs or compounding OPEN and LAYOUTGETs. It is also permissible to use the current stateid when compounding LAYOUTRETURNs.¶
It is permissible for the client to use the current stateid when combining LAYOUTRETURN and LAYOUTGET operations for the same file in the same COMPOUND request since the server MUST process these in order. However, if a client does send such COMPOUND requests, it MUST NOT have more than one outstanding for the same file at the same time, and it MUST NOT have other LAYOUTGET or LAYOUTRETURN operations outstanding at the same time for that same file.¶
12.5.5.2.1.2. Client Considerations
Consider a pNFS client that has sent a LAYOUTGET, and before
it receives the reply to LAYOUTGET, it receives
a CB_
-
The server processed the LAYOUTGET before sending the recall, so the
LAYOUTGET must be waited for because it
may be carrying layout information that will need to be returned to deal
with the CB_
LAYOUTRECALL .¶ -
The
server sent the callback before receiving the
LAYOUTGET. The server will not respond to the LAYOUTGET
until the CB_
LAYOUTRECALL is processed.¶
If these possibilities cannot be distinguished, a deadlock could result, as the client must wait for the LAYOUTGET response before processing the recall in the first case, but that response will not arrive until after the recall is processed in the second case. Note that in the first case, the "seqid" in the layout stateid of the recall is two greater than what the client has recorded; in the second case, the "seqid" is one greater than what the client has recorded. This allows the client to disambiguate between the two cases. The client thus knows precisely which possibility applies.¶
In case 1, the client knows it needs to wait for
the LAYOUTGET response before processing the recall
(or the client can return NFS4ERR_
In case 2, the client will not wait for the LAYOUTGET response before processing the recall because waiting would cause deadlock. Therefore, the action at the client will only require waiting in the case that the client has not yet seen the server's earlier responses to the LAYOUTGET operation(s).¶
The recall process can be considered completed when
the final LAYOUTRETURN operation for the recalled range is completed.
The LAYOUTRETURN uses the layout stateid (with seqid) specified in
CB_
12.5.5.2.1.3. Server Considerations
Consider a race from the metadata server's point of
view. The metadata server has sent a CB_
-
The client sent the LAYOUTGET before processing the CB_
LAYOUTRECALL . The "seqid" in the layout stateid of the arguments of LAYOUTGET is one less than the "seqid" in CB_ LAYOUTRECALL . The server returns NFS4ERR_ RECALLCONFLICT to the client, which indicates to the client that there is a pending recall.¶ -
The client sent the LAYOUTGET after processing the
CB_
LAYOUTRECALL, but the LAYOUTGET arrived before the LAYOUTRETURN and the response to CB_ LAYOUTRECALL that completed that processing. The "seqid" in the layout stateid of LAYOUTGET is equal to or greater than that of the "seqid" in CB_ LAYOUTRECALL . The server has not received a response to the CB_ LAYOUTRECALL, so it returns NFS4ERR_ RECALLCONFLICT .¶ -
The client sent the LAYOUTGET after processing the
CB_
LAYOUTRECALL; the server received the CB_ LAYOUTRECALL response, but the LAYOUTGET arrived before the LAYOUTRETURN that completed that processing. The "seqid" in the layout stateid of LAYOUTGET is equal to that of the "seqid" in CB_ LAYOUTRECALL . The server has received a response to the CB_ LAYOUTRECALL, so it returns NFS4ERR_ RETURNCONFLICT .¶
12.5.5.2.1.4. Wraparound and Validation of Seqid
The rules for layout stateid processing differ from other stateids
in the protocol because the "seqid" value cannot be zero and the
stateid's "seqid" value changes in a CB_
Just as the server validates the "seqid" in the event of
CB_
The server MUST support a minimum VALID_
If the server finds the "seqid" is zero, the NFS4ERR_
12.5.5.2.1.5. Bulk Recall and Return
pNFS supports recalling and returning all layouts that
are for files belonging to a particular fsid
Once a CB_
Once a CB_
If the server has sent a bulk CB_
12.5.6. Revoking Layouts
Parallel NFS permits servers to revoke layouts from clients that fail to respond to recalls and/or fail to renew their lease in time. Depending on the layout type, the server might revoke the layout and might take certain actions with respect to the client's I/O to data servers.¶
12.5.7. Metadata Server Write Propagation
Asynchronous writes written through the metadata server may be propagated lazily to the storage devices. For data written asynchronously through the metadata server, a client performing a read at the appropriate storage device is not guaranteed to see the newly written data until a COMMIT occurs at the metadata server. While the write is pending, reads to the storage device may give out either the old data, the new data, or a mixture of new and old. Upon completion of a synchronous WRITE or COMMIT (for asynchronously written data), the metadata server MUST ensure that storage devices give out the new data and that the data has been written to stable storage. If the server implements its storage in any way such that it cannot obey these constraints, then it MUST recall the layouts to prevent reads being done that cannot be handled correctly. Note that the layouts MUST be recalled prior to the server responding to the associated WRITE operations.¶
12.6. pNFS Mechanics
This section describes the operations flow taken by a pNFS client to a metadata server and storage device.¶
When a pNFS client encounters a new FSID, it sends a GETATTR to the
NFSv4.1 server for the fs_
The client then creates a session, requesting a persistent session, so
that exclusive creates can be done with single round trip via the
createmode4 of GUARDED4. If the session ends up not being persistent,
the client will use EXCLUSIVE4_
If a file is to be created on a pNFS-enabled file
system, the client uses the OPEN operation. With the
normal set of attributes that may be provided upon OPEN
used for creation, there is an OPTIONAL layout_
If the client wants to open an existing file, then it also includes a GETATTR to determine what layout type the file supports.¶
The GETATTR in either the file creation or plain file open case can
also include the layout_
Assuming the client supports the layout type returned by GETATTR and it chooses to use pNFS for data access, it then sends LAYOUTGET using the filehandle and stateid returned by OPEN, specifying the range it wants to do I/O on. The response is a layout, which may be a subset of the range for which the client asked. It also includes device IDs and a description of how data is organized (or in the case of writing, how data is to be organized) across the devices. The device IDs and data description are encoded in a format that is specific to the layout type, but the client is expected to understand.¶
When the client wants to send an I/O, it determines to which device ID it needs to send the I/O command by examining the data description in the layout. It then sends a GETDEVICEINFO to find the device address(es) of the device ID. The client then sends the I/O request to one of device ID's device addresses, using the storage protocol defined for the layout type. Note that if a client has multiple I/Os to send, these I/O requests may be done in parallel.¶
If the I/O was a WRITE, then at some point the client may want to use LAYOUTCOMMIT to commit the modification time and the new size of the file (if it believes it extended the file size) to the metadata server and the modified data to the file system.¶
12.7. Recovery
Recovery is complicated by the distributed nature of the pNFS protocol. In general, crash recovery for layouts is similar to crash recovery for delegations in the base NFSv4.1 protocol. However, the client's ability to perform I/O without contacting the metadata server introduces subtleties that must be handled correctly if the possibility of file system corruption is to be avoided.¶
12.7.1. Recovery from Client Restart
Client recovery for layouts is similar to client recovery for other lock and delegation state. When a pNFS client restarts, it will lose all information about the layouts that it previously owned. There are two methods by which the server can reclaim these resources and allow otherwise conflicting layouts to be provided to other clients.¶
The first is through the expiry of the client's lease. If the client recovery time is longer than the lease period, the client's lease will expire and the server will know that state may be released. For layouts, the server may release the state immediately upon lease expiry or it may allow the layout to persist, awaiting possible lease revival, as long as no other layout conflicts.¶
The second is through the client restarting in less time than it
takes for the lease period to expire. In such a case, the client
will contact the server through the standard EXCHANGE_
12.7.2. Dealing with Lease Expiration on the Client
If a client believes its lease has expired, it MUST NOT send I/O
to the storage device until it has validated its lease. The client
can send a SEQUENCE operation to the metadata server. If the
SEQUENCE operation is successful, but sr_
If sr_
If sr_
If sr_
While clients SHOULD NOT send I/Os to storage devices that may extend past the lease expiration time period, this is not always possible, for example, an extended network partition that starts after the I/O is sent and does not heal until the I/O request is received by the storage device. Thus, the metadata server and/or storage devices are responsible for protecting themselves from I/Os that are both sent before the lease expires and arrive after the lease expires. See Section 12.7.3.¶
12.7.3. Dealing with Loss of Layout State on the Metadata Server
This is a description of the case where all of the following are true:¶
- the metadata server has not restarted¶
- a pNFS client's layouts have been discarded (usually because the client's lease expired) and are invalid¶
- an I/O from the pNFS client arrives at the storage device¶
The metadata server and its storage devices MUST solve this by fencing the client. In other words, they MUST solve this by preventing the execution of I/O operations from the client to the storage devices after layout state loss. The details of how fencing is done are specific to the layout type. The solution for NFSv4.1 file-based layouts is described in (Section 13.11), and solutions for other layout types are in their respective external specification documents.¶
12.7.4. Recovery from Metadata Server Restart
The pNFS client will discover that the metadata server has restarted via the methods described in Section 8.4.2 and discussed in a pNFS-specific context in Section 12.7.2, Paragraph 2. The client MUST stop using layouts and delete the device ID to device address mappings it previously received from the metadata server. Having done that, if the client wrote data to the storage device without committing the layouts via LAYOUTCOMMIT, then the client has additional work to do in order to have the client, metadata server, and storage device(s) all synchronized on the state of the data.¶
-
If the client has data still modified and unwritten in the client's memory, the client has only two choices.¶
- The client can obtain a layout via LAYOUTGET after the server's grace period and write the data to the storage devices.¶
- The client can WRITE that data through the metadata server using the WRITE (Section 18.32) operation, and then obtain layouts as desired.¶
- If the client asynchronously wrote data to the storage device, but still has a copy of the data in its memory, then it has available to it the recovery options listed above in the previous bullet point. If the metadata server is also in its grace period, the client has available to it the options below in the next bullet point.¶
-
The client does not have a copy of the data in its memory and the metadata server is still in its grace period. The client cannot use LAYOUTGET (within or outside the grace period) to reclaim a layout because the contents of the response from LAYOUTGET may not match what it had previously. The range might be different or the client might get the same range but the content of the layout might be different. Even if the content of the layout appears to be the same, the device IDs may map to different device addresses, and even if the device addresses are the same, the device addresses could have been assigned to a different storage device. The option of retrieving the data from the storage device and writing it to the metadata server per the recovery scenario described above is not available because, again, the mappings of range to device ID, device ID to device address, and device address to physical device are stale, and new mappings via new LAYOUTGET do not solve the problem.¶
The only recovery option for this scenario is to send a LAYOUTCOMMIT in reclaim mode, which the metadata server will accept as long as it is in its grace period. The use of LAYOUTCOMMIT in reclaim mode informs the metadata server that the layout has changed. It is critical that the metadata server receive this information before its grace period ends, and thus before it starts allowing updates to the file system.¶
To send LAYOUTCOMMIT in reclaim mode, the client sets the loca_
reclaim field of the operation's arguments (Section 18.42.1) to TRUE. During the metadata server's recovery grace period (and only during the recovery grace period) the metadata server is prepared to accept LAYOUTCOMMIT requests with the loca_ reclaim field set to TRUE.¶ When loca_
reclaim is TRUE, the client is attempting to commit changes to the layout that occurred prior to the restart of the metadata server. The metadata server applies some consistency checks on the loca_ layoutupdate field of the arguments to determine whether the client can commit the data written to the storage device to the file system. The loca_ layoutupdate field is of data type layoutupdate4 and contains layout -type -specific content (in the lou_ body field of loca_ layoutupdate ). The layout -type -specific information that loca_ layoutupdate might have is discussed in Section 12.5.4.3. If the metadata server's consistency checks on loca_ layoutupdate succeed, then the metadata server MUST commit the data (as described by the loca_ offset, loca_ length, and loca_ layoutupdate fields of the arguments) that was written to the storage device. If the metadata server's consistency checks on loca_ layoutupdate fail, the metadata server rejects the LAYOUTCOMMIT operation and makes no changes to the file system. However, any time LAYOUTCOMMIT with loca_ reclaim TRUE fails, the pNFS client has lost all the data in the range defined by <loca_ offset, loca_ length> . A client can defend against this risk by caching all data, whether written synchronously or asynchronously in its memory, and by not releasing the cached data until a successful LAYOUTCOMMIT. This condition does not hold true for all layout types; for example, file-based storage devices need not suffer from this limitation.¶ -
The client does not have a copy of the data in its memory and the
metadata server is no longer in its grace period; i.e., the metadata
server returns NFS4ERR_
NO_ GRACE . As with the scenario in the above bullet point, the failure of LAYOUTCOMMIT means the data in the range <loca_ offset, loca_ length> lost. The defense against the risk is the same -- cache all written data on the client until a successful LAYOUTCOMMIT.¶
12.7.5. Operations during Metadata Server Grace Period
Some of the recovery scenarios thus far noted that some operations (namely, WRITE and LAYOUTGET) might be permitted during the metadata server's grace period. The metadata server may allow these operations during its grace period. For LAYOUTGET, the metadata server must reliably determine that servicing such a request will not conflict with an impending LAYOUTCOMMIT reclaim request. For WRITE, the metadata server must reliably determine that servicing the request will not conflict with an impending OPEN or with a LOCK where the file has mandatory byte-range locking enabled.¶
As mentioned previously, for expediency,
the metadata server might reject some
operations (namely, WRITE and LAYOUTGET) during its
grace period, because the simplest correct approach
is to reject all non-reclaim pNFS requests and WRITE operations by
returning the NFS4ERR_
12.7.6. Storage Device Recovery
Recovery from storage device restart is mostly dependent upon the layout type in use. However, there are a few general techniques a client can use if it discovers a storage device has crashed while holding modified, uncommitted data that was asynchronously written. First and foremost, it is important to realize that the client is the only one that has the information necessary to recover non-committed data since it holds the modified data and probably nothing else does. Second, the best solution is for the client to err on the side of caution and attempt to rewrite the modified data through another path.¶
The client SHOULD immediately WRITE the data to the metadata server,
with the stable field in the WRITE4args set to FILE_
12.8. Metadata and Storage Device Roles
If the same physical hardware is used to implement both a metadata server and storage device, then the same hardware entity is to be understood to be implementing two distinct roles and it is important that it be clearly understood on behalf of which role the hardware is executing at any given time.¶
Two sub-cases can be distinguished.¶
- The storage device uses NFSv4.1 as the storage protocol, i.e., the same physical hardware is used to implement both a metadata and data server. See Section 13.1 for a description of how multiple roles are handled.¶
- The storage device does not use NFSv4.1 as the storage protocol, and the same physical hardware is used to implement both a metadata and storage device. Whether distinct network addresses are used to access the metadata server and storage device is immaterial. This is because it is always clear to the pNFS client and server, from the upper-layer protocol being used (NFSv4.1 or non-NFSv4.1), to which role the request to the common server network address is directed.¶
12.9. Security Considerations for pNFS
pNFS separates file system metadata and data and provides access to both. There are pNFS-specific operations (listed in Section 12.3) that provide access to the metadata; all existing NFSv4.1 conventional (non-pNFS) security mechanisms and features apply to accessing the metadata. The combination of components in a pNFS system (see Figure 1) is required to preserve the security properties of NFSv4.1 with respect to an entity that is accessing a storage device from a client, including security countermeasures to defend against threats for which NFSv4.1 provides defenses in environments where these threats are considered significant.¶
In some cases, the security countermeasures for connections
to storage devices may take the form of physical isolation or a
recommendation to avoid the use of pNFS in an environment. For example, it
may be impractical to provide confidentiality protection for some
storage protocols to protect against eavesdropping. In
environments where eavesdropping on such protocols is of sufficient
concern to require countermeasures
Where communication with storage devices is subject to the same
threats as client
pNFS implementations MUST NOT remove NFSv4.1's access controls.
The combination of clients, storage devices, and the metadata server
are responsible for ensuring that all client
13. NFSv4.1 as a Storage Protocol in pNFS: the File Layout Type
This section describes the semantics and format of NFSv4.1 file-based
layouts for pNFS.
NFSv4.1 file-based layouts use the LAYOUT4_
13.1. Client ID and Session Considerations
Sessions are a REQUIRED feature of NFSv4.1, and this extends to both the metadata server and file-based (NFSv4.1-based) data servers.¶
The role a server plays in pNFS is determined by the result it returns
from EXCHANGE_
-
Metadata server
(EXCHGID4_ FLAG_ USE_ PNFS_ MDS is set in the result eir_ flags ).¶ -
Data server
(EXCHGID4_ FLAG_ USE_ PNFS_ DS ).¶ -
Non-metadata server
(EXCHGID4_ FLAG_ USE_ NON_ PNFS ). This is an NFSv4.1 server that does not support operations (e.g., LAYOUTGET) or attributes that pertain to pNFS.¶
The client MAY request zero or more of
EXCHGID4_
| Acceptable Results from EXCHANGE_ |
|---|
|
EXCHGID4_ |
|
EXCHGID4_ |
|
EXCHGID4_ |
|
EXCHGID4_ |
|
EXCHGID4_ |
As the above table implies, a server can have one
or two roles. A server can be both a metadata server
and a data server, or it can be both a data server and
non-metadata server. In addition to returning two roles
in the EXCHANGE_
In the case of a server with concurrent pNFS roles that
are served by a common client ID, if the EXCHANGE_
In the case of a server that has multiple concurrent
pNFS roles, each role served by a unique client ID,
if the client specifies zero or a combination of roles
in the request, the server results SHOULD return only
one of the roles from the combination specified by the
client request. If the role specified by the server
result does not match the intended use by the client,
the client should send the EXCHANGE_
If a pNFS metadata client gets a layout that refers it to an NFSv4.1
data server, it needs a client ID on that data server. If it does not
yet have a client ID from the server that had the EXCHGID4_
In NFSv4.1, the session ID in the SEQUENCE operation implies the client ID, which in turn might be used by the server to map the stateid to the right client/server pair. However, when a data server is presented with a READ or WRITE operation with a stateid, because the stateid is associated with a client ID on a metadata server, and because the session ID in the preceding SEQUENCE operation is tied to the client ID of the data server, the data server has no obvious way to determine the metadata server from the COMPOUND procedure, and thus has no way to validate the stateid. One RECOMMENDED approach is for pNFS servers to encode metadata server routing and/or identity information in the data server filehandles as returned in the layout.¶
If metadata server routing and/or identity information is encoded in data server filehandles, when the metadata server identity or location changes, the data server filehandles it gave out will become invalid (stale), and so the metadata server MUST first recall the layouts. Invalidating a data server filehandle does not render the NFS client's data cache invalid. The client's cache should map a data server filehandle to a metadata server filehandle, and a metadata server filehandle to cached data.¶
If a server is both a metadata server and a data server, the server might need to distinguish operations on files that are directed to the metadata server from those that are directed to the data server. It is RECOMMENDED that the values of the filehandles returned by the LAYOUTGET operation be different than the value of the filehandle returned by the OPEN of the same file.¶
Another scenario is for the metadata server and the storage device to be distinct from one client's point of view, and the roles reversed from another client's point of view. For example, in the cluster file system model, a metadata server to one client might be a data server to another client. If NFSv4.1 is being used as the storage protocol, then pNFS servers need to encode the values of filehandles according to their specific roles.¶
13.1.1. Sessions Considerations for Data Servers
Section 2.10.11.2 states
that a client has to keep its lease renewed in
order to prevent a session from being deleted by
the server. If the reply to EXCHANGE_
For example, if one metadata server has a lease_
13.2. File Layout Definitions
The following definitions apply to the LAYOUT4_
- Unit.
- A unit is a fixed-size quantity of data written to a data server.¶
- Pattern.
- A pattern is a method of distributing one or more equal sized units across a set of data servers. A pattern is iterated one or more times.¶
- Stripe.
- A stripe is a set of data distributed across a set of data servers in a pattern before that pattern repeats.¶
- Stripe Count.
- A stripe count is the number of units in a pattern.¶
- Stripe Width.
- A stripe width is the size of a stripe in bytes. The stripe width = the stripe count * the size of the stripe unit.¶
Hereafter, this document will refer to a unit that is a written in a pattern as a "stripe unit".¶
A pattern may have more stripe units than data servers. If so, some data servers will have more than one stripe unit per stripe. A data server that has multiple stripe units per stripe MAY store each unit in a different data file (and depending on the implementation, will possibly assign a unique data filehandle to each data file).¶
13.3. File Layout Data Types
The high level NFSv4.1 layout types are
nfsv4_
The SETATTR operation supports a layout hint attribute
(Section 5.12.4).
When the client sets a layout hint (data type layouthint4) with
a layout type of LAYOUT4_
const NFL4_UFLG_MASK = 0x0000003F;
const NFL4_UFLG_DENSE = 0x00000001;
const NFL4_UFLG_COMMIT_THRU_MDS = 0x00000002;
const NFL4_UFLG_STRIPE_UNIT_SIZE_MASK
= 0xFFFFFFC0;
typedef uint32_t nfl_util4;
enum filelayout_hint_care4 {
NFLH4_CARE_DENSE = NFL4_UFLG_DENSE,
NFLH4_CARE_COMMIT_THRU_MDS
= NFL4_UFLG_COMMIT_THRU_MDS,
NFLH4_CARE_STRIPE_UNIT_SIZE
= 0x00000040,
NFLH4_CARE_STRIPE_COUNT = 0x00000080
};
/* Encoded in the loh_body field of data type layouthint4: */
struct nfsv4_1_file_layouthint4 {
uint32_t nflh_care;
nfl_util4 nflh_util;
count4 nflh_stripe_count;
};
The generic layout hint structure is described
in Section 3.3.19. The client uses the
layout hint in the layout_
When LAYOUTGET returns a LAYOUT4_
typedef netaddr4 multipath_list4<>;
/*
* Encoded in the da_addr_body field of
* data type device_addr4:
*/
struct nfsv4_1_file_layout_ds_addr4 {
uint32_t nflda_stripe_indices<>;
multipath_list4 nflda_multipath_ds_list<>;
};
The nfsv4_
-
nflda_
multipath_ ds_ list : An array of lists of data servers, where each list can be one or more elements, and each element represents a data server address that may serve equally as the target of I/O operations (see Section 13.5). The length of this array might be different than the stripe count.¶ -
nflda_
stripe_ indices : An array of indices used to index into nflda_ multipath_ ds_ list . The value of each element of nflda_ stripe_ indices MUST be less than the number of elements in nflda_ multipath_ ds_ list . Each element of nflda_ multipath_ ds_ list SHOULD be referred to by one or more elements of nflda_ stripe_ indices . The number of elements in nflda_ stripe_ indices is always equal to the stripe count.¶
/*
* Encoded in the loc_body field of
* data type layout_content4:
*/
struct nfsv4_1_file_layout4 {
deviceid4 nfl_deviceid;
nfl_util4 nfl_util;
uint32_t nfl_first_stripe_index;
offset4 nfl_pattern_offset;
nfs_fh4 nfl_fh_list<>;
};
The nfsv4_
-
nfl_
deviceid : The device ID that maps to a value of type nfsv4_ 1_ file_ layout_ ds_ addr4 .¶ -
nfl_
util : Like the nflh_ util field of data type nfsv4_ 1_ file_ layouthint4, a compact representation of how the data on a file on each data server is packed, whether the client should send COMMIT operations to the metadata server or data server, and the stripe unit size. If a server returns two or more overlapping layouts, each stripe unit size in each overlapping layout MUST be the same.¶ -
nfl_
first_ stripe_ index : The index into the first element of the nflda_ stripe_ indices array to use.¶ -
nfl_
pattern_ offset : This field is the logical offset into the file where the striping pattern starts. It is required for converting the client's logical I/O offset (e.g., the current offset in a POSIX file descriptor before the read() or write() system call is sent) into the stripe unit number (see Section 13.4.1).¶ If dense packing is used, then nfl_
pattern_ offset is also needed to convert the client's logical I/O offset to an offset on the file on the data server corresponding to the stripe unit number (see Section 13.4.4).¶ Note that nfl_
pattern_ offset is not always the same as lo_ offset . For example, via the LAYOUTGET operation, a client might request a layout starting at offset 1000 of a file that has its striping pattern start at offset zero.¶ -
nfl_
fh_ list : An array of data server filehandles for each list of data servers in each element of the nflda_ multipath_ ds_ list array. The number of elements in nfl_ fh_ list depends on whether sparse or dense packing is being used.¶ -
If sparse packing is being used, the number of elements in nfl_
fh_ list MUST be one of three values:¶ - Zero. This means that filehandles used for each data server are the same as the filehandle returned by the OPEN operation from the metadata server.¶
-
One. This means that every data server uses
the same filehandle: what is specified in
nfl_
fh_ list[0] .¶ -
The same number of elements in
nflda_
multipath_ ds_ list . Thus, in this case, when sending an I/O operation to any data server in nflda_ multipath_ ds_ list[X], the filehandle in nfl_ fh_ list[X] MUST be used.¶
See the discussion on sparse packing in Section 13.4.4.¶
-
If dense packing is being used, the number of elements in nfl_
fh_ list MUST be the same as the number of elements in nflda_ stripe_ indices . Thus, when sending an I/O operation to any data server in nflda_ multipath_ ds_ list[nflda_ stripe_ indices[Y]], the filehandle in nfl_ fh_ list[Y] MUST be used. In addition, any time there exists i and j, (i != j), such that the intersection of nflda_ multipath_ ds_ list[nflda_ stripe_ indices[i]] and nflda_ multipath_ ds_ list[nflda_ stripe_ indices[j]] is not empty, then nfl_ fh_ list[i] MUST NOT equal nfl_ fh_ list[j] . In other words, when dense packing is being used, if a data server appears in two or more units of a striping pattern, each reference to the data server MUST use a different filehandle.¶ Indeed, if there are multiple striping patterns, as indicated by the presence of multiple objects of data type layout4 (either returned in one or multiple LAYOUTGET operations), and a data server is the target of a unit of one pattern and another unit of another pattern, then each reference to each data server MUST use a different filehandle.¶
See the discussion on dense packing in Section 13.4.4.¶
-
The details on the interpretation of the layout are in Section 13.4.¶
13.4. Interpreting the File Layout
13.4.1. Determining the Stripe Unit Number
To find the stripe unit number that corresponds to the client's logical file offset, the pattern offset will also be used. The i'th stripe unit (SUi) is:¶
relative_offset = file_offset - nfl_pattern_offset;
SUi = floor(relative_offset / stripe_unit_size);13.4.2. Interpreting the File Layout Using Sparse Packing
When sparse packing is used, the algorithm for determining the filehandle and set of data-server network addresses to write stripe unit i (SUi) to is:¶
stripe_count = number of elements in nflda_stripe_indices;
j = (SUi + nfl_first_stripe_index) % stripe_count;
idx = nflda_stripe_indices[j];
fh_count = number of elements in nfl_fh_list;
ds_count = number of elements in nflda_multipath_ds_list;
switch (fh_count) {
case ds_count:
fh = nfl_fh_list[idx];
break;
case 1:
fh = nfl_fh_list[0];
break;
case 0:
fh = filehandle returned by OPEN;
break;
default:
throw a fatal exception;
break;
}
address_list = nflda_multipath_ds_list[idx];
The client would then select a data server from address_
Consider the following example:¶
Suppose we have a device address consisting of seven data servers, arranged in three equivalence (Section 13.5) classes:¶
- { A, B, C, D }, { E }, { F, G }¶
where A through G are network addresses.¶
Then¶
-
nflda_
multipath_ ds_ list<> = { A, B, C, D }, { E }, { F, G }¶
i.e.,¶
-
nflda_
multipath_ ds_ list[0] = { A, B, C, D }¶ -
nflda_
multipath_ ds_ list[1] = { E }¶ -
nflda_
multipath_ ds_ list[2] = { F, G }¶
Suppose the striping index array is:¶
-
nflda_
stripe_ indices<> = { 2, 0, 1, 0 }¶
Now suppose the client gets a layout that has a device ID that maps to the above device address. The initial index contains¶
-
nfl_
first_ stripe_ index = 2,¶
and the filehandle list is¶
-
nfl_
fh_ list = { 0x36, 0x87, 0x67 }.¶
If the client wants to write to SU0, the set of valid { network address, filehandle } combinations for SUi are determined by:¶
-
nfl_
first_ stripe_ index = 2¶
So¶
So¶
-
nflda_
multipath_ ds_ list[1] = { E }¶
and¶
-
nfl_
fh_ list[1] = { 0x87 }¶
The client can thus write SU0 to { 0x87, { E } }.¶
The destinations of the first 13 storage units are:¶
| SUi | filehandle | data servers |
|---|---|---|
| 0 | 87 | E |
| 1 | 36 | A,B,C,D |
| 2 | 67 | F,G |
| 3 | 36 | A,B,C,D |
| 4 | 87 | E |
| 5 | 36 | A,B,C,D |
| 6 | 67 | F,G |
| 7 | 36 | A,B,C,D |
| 8 | 87 | E |
| 9 | 36 | A,B,C,D |
| 10 | 67 | F,G |
| 11 | 36 | A,B,C,D |
| 12 | 87 | E |
13.4.3. Interpreting the File Layout Using Dense Packing
When dense packing is used, the algorithm for determining the filehandle and set of data server network addresses to write stripe unit i (SUi) to is:¶
stripe_count = number of elements in nflda_stripe_indices;
j = (SUi + nfl_first_stripe_index) % stripe_count;
idx = nflda_stripe_indices[j];
fh_count = number of elements in nfl_fh_list;
ds_count = number of elements in nflda_multipath_ds_list;
switch (fh_count) {
case stripe_count:
fh = nfl_fh_list[j];
break;
default:
throw a fatal exception;
break;
}
address_list = nflda_multipath_ds_list[idx];
The client would then select a data server from address_
Consider the following example (which is the same as the sparse packing example, except for the filehandle list):¶
Suppose we have a device address consisting of seven data servers, arranged in three equivalence (Section 13.5) classes:¶
- { A, B, C, D }, { E }, { F, G }¶
where A through G are network addresses.¶
Then¶
-
nflda_
multipath_ ds_ list<> = { A, B, C, D }, { E }, { F, G }¶
i.e.,¶
-
nflda_
multipath_ ds_ list[0] = { A, B, C, D }¶ -
nflda_
multipath_ ds_ list[1] = { E }¶ -
nflda_
multipath_ ds_ list[2] = { F, G }¶
Suppose the striping index array is:¶
-
nflda_
stripe_ indices<> = { 2, 0, 1, 0 }¶
Now suppose the client gets a layout that has a device ID that maps to the above device address. The initial index contains¶
-
nfl_
first_ stripe_ index = 2,¶
and¶
-
nfl_
fh_ list = { 0x67, 0x37, 0x87, 0x36 }.¶
The interesting examples for dense packing are SU1 and SU3 because each stripe unit refers to the same data server list, yet each stripe unit MUST use a different filehandle. If the client wants to write to SU1, the set of valid { network address, filehandle } combinations for SUi are determined by:¶
- nfl_
first_ stripe_ index = 2¶
So¶
So¶
-
nflda_
multipath_ ds_ list[0] = { A, B, C, D }¶
and¶
-
nfl_
fh_ list[3] = { 0x36 }¶
The client can thus write SU1 to { 0x36, { A, B, C, D } }.¶
For SU3, j = (3 + 2) % 4 = 1, and nflda_
The destinations of the first 13 storage units are:¶
| SUi | filehandle | data servers |
|---|---|---|
| 0 | 87 | E |
| 1 | 36 | A,B,C,D |
| 2 | 67 | F,G |
| 3 | 37 | A,B,C,D |
| 4 | 87 | E |
| 5 | 36 | A,B,C,D |
| 6 | 67 | F,G |
| 7 | 37 | A,B,C,D |
| 8 | 87 | E |
| 9 | 36 | A,B,C,D |
| 10 | 67 | F,G |
| 11 | 37 | A,B,C,D |
| 12 | 87 | E |
13.4.4. Sparse and Dense Stripe Unit Packing
The flag NFL4_
If nfl_
If sparse packing is being used and a client attempts I/O to one of
the holes, then an error MUST be
returned by the data server. Using the above example, if data server 3 received a READ or WRITE operation for block 4, the data server
would return NFS4ERR_
If nfl_
- Logical stripe units 0, 3, 6, ... of the file would live on stripe units 0, 1, 2, ... of the file of data server 1.¶
- Logical stripe units 1, 4, 7, ... of the file would live on stripe units 0, 1, 2, ... of the file of data server 2.¶
- Logical stripe units 2, 5, 8, ... of the file would live on stripe units 0, 1, 2, ... of the file of data server 3.¶
Because dense packing does not leave holes on the data servers, the pNFS client is allowed to write to any offset of any data file of any data server in the stripe. Thus, the data servers need not know the file's striping pattern.¶
The calculation to determine the byte offset within the data file for dense data server layouts is:¶
stripe_width = stripe_unit_size * N;
where N = number of elements in nflda_stripe_indices.
relative_offset = file_offset - nfl_pattern_offset;
data_file_offset = floor(relative_offset / stripe_width)
* stripe_unit_size
+ relative_offset % stripe_unit_sizeIf dense packing is being used, and a data server appears more than once in a striping pattern, then to distinguish one stripe unit from another, the data server MUST use a different filehandle. Let's suppose there are two data servers. Logical stripe units 0, 3, 6 are served by data server 1; logical stripe units 1, 4, 7 are served by data server 2; and logical stripe units 2, 5, 8 are also served by data server 2. Unless data server 2 has two filehandles (each referring to a different data file), then, for example, a write to logical stripe unit 1 overwrites the write to logical stripe unit 2 because both logical stripe units are located in the same stripe unit (0) of data server 2.¶
13.5. Data Server Multipathing
The NFSv4.1 file layout supports multipathing to
multiple data server addresses.
Data
To support data server multipathing, each element of
the nflda_
The client is free to use any of the network addresses
as a destination to send data server requests. If some
network addresses are less optimal paths to the data than
others, then the MDS SHOULD NOT include those network
addresses in an element of nflda_
Generally, if two network addresses appear in an element
of nflda_
13.6. Operations Sent to NFSv4.1 Data Servers
Clients accessing data on an NFSv4.1 data server MUST send only the NULL procedure and COMPOUND procedures whose operations are taken only from two restricted subsets of the operations defined as valid NFSv4.1 operations. Clients MUST use the filehandle specified by the layout when accessing data on NFSv4.1 data servers.¶
The first of these operation subsets consists of management operations.
This subset consists of the BACKCHANNEL_
The second subset consists of COMMIT, READ, WRITE, and PUTFH. These operations MUST be used with a current filehandle specified by the layout. In the case of PUTFH, the new current filehandle MUST be one taken from the layout. Henceforth, these will be referred to as data-server I/O operations. As described in Section 12.5.1, a client MUST NOT send an I/O to a data server for which it does not hold a valid layout; the data server MUST reject such an I/O.¶
Unless the server has a concurrent non-data-server
personality -- i.e., EXCHANGE_
When the server has concurrent data-server and non-data-server personalities, each COMPOUND sent by the client MUST be constructed so that it is appropriate to one of the two personalities, and it MUST NOT contain operations directed to a mix of those personalities. The server MUST enforce this. To understand the constraints, operations within a COMPOUND are divided into the following three classes:¶
- An operation that is ambiguous regarding its personality assignment. This includes all of the data-server housekeeping operations. Additionally, if the server has assigned filehandles so that the ones defined by the layout are the same as those used by the metadata server, all operations using such filehandles are within this class, with the following exception. The exception is that if the operation uses a stateid that is incompatible with a data-server personality (e.g., a special stateid or the stateid has a non-zero "seqid" field, see Section 13.9.1), the operation is in class 3, as described below. A COMPOUND containing multiple class 1 operations (and operations of no other class) MAY be sent to a server with multiple concurrent data server and non-data-server personalities.¶
- An operation that is unambiguously referable to the data-server personality. This includes data-server I/O operations where the filehandle is one that can only be validly directed to the data-server personality.¶
- An operation that is unambiguously referable to the non-data-server personality. This includes all COMPOUND operations that are neither data-server housekeeping nor data-server I/O operations, plus data-server I/O operations where the current fh (or the one to be made the current fh in the case of PUTFH) is only valid on the metadata server or where a stateid is used that is incompatible with the data server, i.e., is a special stateid or has a non-zero seqid value.¶
When a COMPOUND first executes an operation from class 3 above,
it acts as a normal COMPOUND on any other server, and the
data-server personality ceases to be relevant.
There are no special restrictions on the
operations in the COMPOUND to limit them to those for
a data server. When a PUTFH is done, filehandles
derived from the layout are not valid. If their format
is not normally acceptable, then NFS4ERR_
When a COMPOUND first executes an operation from class 2,
which would be PUTFH where the filehandle
is one from a layout, the COMPOUND henceforth is interpreted
with respect to the data-server personality.
Operations outside the two classes discussed
above MUST result in NFS4ERR_
Until the server first executes an operation from class 2 or class 3, the client MUST NOT depend on the operation being executed by either the data-server or the non-data-server personality. The server MUST pick one personality consistently for a given COMPOUND, with the only possible transition being a single one when the first operation from class 2 or class 3 is executed.¶
Because of the complexity induced by assigning filehandles so they can be used on both a data server and a metadata server, it is RECOMMENDED that where the same server can have both personalities, the server assign separate unique filehandles to both personalities. This makes it unambiguous for which server a given request is intended.¶
GETATTR and SETATTR MUST be directed to the metadata
server. In the case of a SETATTR of the size attribute,
the control protocol is responsible for propagating size
updates
13.7. COMMIT through Metadata Server
The file layout provides two alternate means of providing for the
commit of data written through data servers. The flag
NFL4_
- When the flag is FALSE, COMMIT operations MUST to be sent to the data server to which the corresponding WRITE operations were sent. This approach is sometimes useful when file striping is implemented within the pNFS server (instead of the file system), with the individual data servers each implementing their own file systems.¶
-
When the flag is TRUE, COMMIT operations MUST be sent to the metadata server, rather than to the individual data servers. This approach is sometimes useful when file striping is implemented within the clustered file system that is the backend to the pNFS server. In such an implementation, each COMMIT to each data server might result in repeated writes of metadata blocks to the detriment of write performance. Sending a single COMMIT to the metadata server can be more efficient when there exists a clustered file system capable of implementing such a coordinated COMMIT.¶
If nfl_
util & NFL4_ UFLG_ COMMIT_ THRU_ MDS is TRUE, then in order to maintain the current NFSv4.1 commit and recovery model, the data servers MUST return a common writeverf verifier in all WRITE responses for a given file layout, and the metadata server's COMMIT implementation must return the same writeverf. The value of the writeverf verifier MUST be changed at the metadata server or any data server that is referenced in the layout, whenever there is a server event that can possibly lead to loss of uncommitted data. The scope of the verifier can be for a file or for the entire pNFS server. It might be more difficult for the server to maintain the verifier at the file level, but the benefit is that only events that impact a given file will require recovery action.¶
Note that if the layout specified dense packing, then the offset used to a COMMIT to the MDS may differ than that of an offset used to a COMMIT to the data server.¶
The single COMMIT to the metadata server will return a verifier, and
the client should compare it to all the verifiers from the WRITEs and
fail the COMMIT if there are any mismatched verifiers. If COMMIT to the
metadata server fails, the client should re-send WRITEs for all the
modified data in the file. The client should treat modified data with
a mismatched verifier
as a WRITE failure and try to recover by resending the WRITEs to the
original data server or using another path to that data if the layout
has not been recalled. Alternatively, the client can obtain
a new layout or it could rewrite the data directly to the metadata server. If
nfl_
13.8. The Layout Iomode
The layout iomode need not be used by the metadata server when
servicing NFSv4.1 file-based layouts, although in some circumstances
it may be useful. For example, if the server implementation
supports reading from read-only replicas or mirrors, it would be
useful for the server to return a layout enabling the client to do
so. As such, the client SHOULD set the iomode based on its intent
to read or write the data. The client may default to an iomode of
LAYOUTIOMODE4_
13.9. Metadata and Data Server State Coordination
13.9.1. Global Stateid Requirements
When the client sends
I/O to a data server, the stateid used MUST NOT be a layout stateid
as returned by LAYOUTGET or sent by CB_
The stateid used for I/O MUST have the same effect and be subject to the same validation on a data server as it would if the I/O was being performed on the metadata server itself in the absence of pNFS. This has the implication that stateids are globally valid on both the metadata and data servers. This requires the metadata server to propagate changes in LOCK and OPEN state to the data servers, so that the data servers can validate I/O accesses. This is discussed further in Section 13.9.2. Depending on when stateids are propagated, the existence of a valid stateid on the data server may act as proof of a valid layout.¶
Clients performing I/O operations need to select an appropriate stateid based on the locks (including opens and delegations) held by the client and the various types of state-owners sending the I/O requests. The rules for doing so when referencing data servers are somewhat different from those discussed in Section 8.2.5, which apply when accessing metadata servers.¶
The following rules, applied in order of decreasing priority, govern the selection of the appropriate stateid:¶
- If the client holds a delegation for the file in question, the delegation stateid should be used.¶
- Otherwise, there must be an OPEN stateid for the current open-owner, and that OPEN stateid for the open file in question is used, unless mandatory locking prevents that. See below.¶
-
If the data server had previously responded with NFS4ERR_
LOCKED to use of the OPEN stateid, then the client should use the byte-range lock stateid whenever one exists for that open file with the current lock-owner.¶ -
Special stateids should never be used. If they are used, the data
server MUST reject the I/O with an NFS4ERR_
BAD_ STATEID error.¶
13.9.2. Data Server State Propagation
Since the metadata server, which handles byte-range lock and open-mode state changes as well as ACLs, might not be co-located with the data servers where I/O accesses are validated, the server implementation MUST take care of propagating changes of this state to the data servers. Once the propagation to the data servers is complete, the full effect of those changes MUST be in effect at the data servers. However, some state changes need not be propagated immediately, although all changes SHOULD be propagated promptly. These state propagations have an impact on the design of the control protocol, even though the control protocol is outside of the scope of this specification. Immediate propagation refers to the synchronous propagation of state from the metadata server to the data server(s); the propagation must be complete before returning to the client.¶
13.9.2.1. Lock State Propagation
If the pNFS server supports mandatory byte-range locking, any mandatory byte-range locks on a file MUST be made effective at the data servers before the request that establishes them returns to the caller. The effect MUST be the same as if the mandatory byte-range lock state were synchronously propagated to the data servers, even though the details of the control protocol may avoid actual transfer of the state under certain circumstances.¶
On the other hand, since advisory byte-range lock state is not used for checking I/O accesses at the data servers, there is no semantic reason for propagating advisory byte-range lock state to the data servers. Since updates to advisory locks neither confer nor remove privileges, these changes need not be propagated immediately, and may not need to be propagated promptly. The updates to advisory locks need only be propagated when the data server needs to resolve a question about a stateid. In fact, if byte-range locking is not mandatory (i.e., is advisory) the clients are advised to avoid using the byte-range lock-based stateids for I/O. The stateids returned by OPEN are sufficient and eliminate overhead for this kind of state propagation.¶
If a client gets back an NFS4ERR_
13.9.2.2. Open and Deny Mode Validation
Open and deny mode validation MUST be performed against
the open and deny mode(s) held by the data servers. When
access is reduced or a deny mode made more restrictive
(because of CLOSE or OPEN_
13.9.2.3. File Attributes
Since the SETATTR operation has the ability to modify state that is visible on both the metadata and data servers (e.g., the size), care must be taken to ensure that the resultant state across the set of data servers is consistent, especially when truncating or growing the file.¶
As described earlier, the LAYOUTCOMMIT operation is used to ensure
that the metadata is synchronized with changes made to the data servers.
For the NFSv4.1-based data storage protocol,
it is necessary to re-synchronize
state such as the size attribute, and the setting of mtime
Any changes to file attributes that control authorization or access as reflected by ACCESS calls or READs and WRITEs on the metadata server, MUST be propagated to the data servers for enforcement on READ and WRITE I/O calls. If the changes made on the metadata server result in more restrictive access permissions for any user, those changes MUST be propagated to the data servers synchronously.¶
The OPEN operation (Section 18.16.4) does not impose any requirement that I/O operations
on an open file have the same credentials as the OPEN
itself (unless EXCHGID4_
13.10. Data Server Component File Size
A potential problem exists when a component data file on a particular data server has grown past EOF; the problem exists for both dense and sparse layouts. Imagine the following scenario: a client creates a new file (size == 0) and writes to byte 131072; the client then seeks to the beginning of the file and reads byte 100. The client should receive zeroes back as a result of the READ. However, if the striping pattern directs the client to send the READ to a data server other than the one that received the client's original WRITE, the data server servicing the READ may believe that the file's size is still 0 bytes. In that event, the data server's READ response will contain zero bytes and an indication of EOF. The data server can only return zeroes if it knows that the file's size has been extended. This would require the immediate propagation of the file's size to all data servers, which is potentially very costly. Therefore, the client that has initiated the extension of the file's size MUST be prepared to deal with these EOF conditions. When the offset in the arguments to READ is less than the client's view of the file size, if the READ response indicates EOF and/or contains fewer bytes than requested, the client will interpret such a response as a hole in the file, and the NFS client will substitute zeroes for the data.¶
The NFSv4.1 protocol only provides close-to-open file data cache semantics; meaning that when the file is closed, all modified data is written to the server. When a subsequent OPEN of the file is done, the change attribute is inspected for a difference from a cached value for the change attribute. For the case above, this means that a LAYOUTCOMMIT will be done at close (along with the data WRITEs) and will update the file's size and change attribute. Access from another client after that point will result in the appropriate size being returned.¶
13.11. Layout Revocation and Fencing
As described in Section 12.7, the
layout
In addition to lease expiration,
the reasons a layout can be revoked include: client fails to respond to
a CB_
Fencing works as follows. As described in Section 13.1, in COMPOUND procedure
requests to the data server, the data filehandle provided
by the PUTFH operation and the stateid in the READ or
WRITE operation are used to ensure that the client has
a valid layout for the I/O being performed; if it does
not, the I/O is rejected with NFS4ERR_
Before the metadata server takes any action to revoke layout state given out by a previous instance, it must make sure that all layout state from that previous instance are invalidated at the data servers. This has the following implications.¶
- The metadata server must not restripe a file until it has contacted all of the data servers to invalidate the layouts from the previous instance.¶
- The metadata server must not give out mandatory locks that conflict with layouts from the previous instance without either doing a specific layout invalidation (as it would have to do anyway) or doing a global data server invalidation.¶
13.12. Security Considerations for the File Layout Type
The NFSv4.1 file layout type MUST adhere to the security considerations outlined in Section 12.9. NFSv4.1 data servers MUST make all of the required access checks on each READ or WRITE I/O as determined by the NFSv4.1 protocol. If the metadata server would deny a READ or WRITE operation on a file due to its ACL, mode attribute, open access mode, open deny mode, mandatory byte-range lock state, or any other attributes and state, the data server MUST also deny the READ or WRITE operation. This impacts the control protocol and the propagation of state from the metadata server to the data servers; see Section 13.9.2 for more details.¶
The methods for authentication,
integrity, and privacy for data servers based on the
LAYOUT4_
For a given file object, a metadata server MAY require different security parameters (secinfo4 value) than the data server. For a given file object with multiple data servers, the secinfo4 value SHOULD be the same across all data servers. If the secinfo4 values across a metadata server and its data servers differ for a specific file, the mapping of the principal to the server's internal user identifier MUST be the same in order for the access-control checks based on ACL, mode, open and deny mode, and mandatory locking to be consistent across on the pNFS server.¶
If an NFSv4.1 implementation supports
pNFS and supports NFSv4.1 file layouts, then the
implementation MUST support the SECINFO_
14. Internationalization
The primary issue in which NFSv4.1 needs to deal with
internationaliz
RFC 3454 [16], otherwise known as "stringprep", documents a framework for using Unicode/UTF-8 in networking protocols so as "to increase the likelihood that string input and string comparison work in ways that make sense for typical users throughout the world". A protocol must define a profile of stringprep "in order to fully specify the processing options". The remainder of this section defines the NFSv4.1 stringprep profiles. Much of the terminology used for the remainder of this section comes from stringprep.¶
There are three UTF-8 string types defined for NFSv4.1:
utf8str_
- The intended applicability of the profile.¶
- The character repertoire that is the input and output to stringprep (which is Unicode 3.2 for the referenced version of stringprep). However, NFSv4.1 implementations are not limited to 3.2.¶
- The mapping tables from stringprep used (as described in Section 3 of stringprep).¶
- Any additional mapping tables specific to the profile.¶
- The Unicode normalization used, if any (as described in Section 4 of stringprep).¶
- The tables from the stringprep listing of characters that are prohibited as output (as described in Section 5 of stringprep).¶
- The bidirectional string testing used, if any (as described in Section 6 of stringprep).¶
- Any additional characters that are prohibited as output specific to the profile.¶
Stringprep discusses Unicode characters, whereas NFSv4.1 renders UTF-8 characters. Since there is a one-to-one mapping from UTF-8 to Unicode, when the remainder of this document refers to Unicode, the reader should assume UTF-8.¶
Much of the text for the profiles comes from RFC 3491 [20].¶
14.1. Stringprep Profile for the utf8str_cs Type
Every use of the utf8str_
14.1.1. Intended Applicability of the nfs4_cs_prep Profile
The utf8str_
14.1.2. Character Repertoire of nfs4_cs_prep
The nfs4_
14.1.3. Mapping Used by nfs4_cs_prep
The nfs4_
- Table B.1¶
Table B.2 is normally not part of the nfs4_
If the case_
14.1.4. Normalization used by nfs4_cs_prep
The nfs4_
14.1.5. Prohibited Output for nfs4_cs_prep
The nfs4_
14.1.6. Bidirectional Output for nfs4_cs_prep
The nfs4_
14.2. Stringprep Profile for the utf8str_cis Type
Every use of the utf8str_
14.2.1. Intended Applicability of the nfs4_cis_prep Profile
The utf8str_
14.2.2. Character Repertoire of nfs4_cis_prep
The nfs4_
14.2.3. Mapping Used by nfs4_cis_prep
The nfs4_
14.2.4. Normalization Used by nfs4_cis_prep
The nfs4_
14.2.5. Prohibited Output for nfs4_cis_prep
The nfs4_
14.2.6. Bidirectional Output for nfs4_cis_prep
The nfs4_
14.3. Stringprep Profile for the utf8str_mixed Type
Every use of the utf8str_
14.3.1. Intended Applicability of the nfs4_mixed_prep Profile
The utf8str_
14.3.2. Character Repertoire of nfs4_mixed_prep
The nfs4_
14.3.3. Mapping Used by nfs4_cis_prep
For the prefix and the separator of a utf8str_
- Table B.1¶
For the suffix of a utf8str_
14.3.4. Normalization Used by nfs4_mixed_prep
The nfs4_
14.3.5. Prohibited Output for nfs4_mixed_prep
The nfs4_
14.3.6. Bidirectional Output for nfs4_mixed_prep
The nfs4_
14.4. UTF-8 Capabilities
const FSCHARSET_CAP4_CONTAINS_NON_UTF8 = 0x1; const FSCHARSET_CAP4_ALLOWS_ONLY_UTF8 = 0x2; typedef uint32_t fs_charset_cap4;
Because some operating environments and file systems do
not enforce character set encodings, NFSv4.1 supports the
fs_
15. Error Values
NFS error numbers are assigned to failed operations within a
Compound (COMPOUND or CB_
15.1. Error Definitions
| Error | Number | Description |
|---|---|---|
| NFS4_ |
0 | Section 15.1.3.1 |
| NFS4ERR_ |
13 | Section 15.1.6.1 |
| NFS4ERR_ |
10032 | Section 15.1.15.1 |
| NFS4ERR_ |
10047 | Section 15.1.5.1 |
| NFS4ERR_ |
10057 | Section 15.1.12.1 |
| NFS4ERR_ |
10040 | Section 15.1.7.1 |
| NFS4ERR_ |
10001 | Section 15.1.2.1 |
| NFS4ERR_ |
10049 | Section 15.1.10.1 |
| NFS4ERR_ |
10050 | Section 15.1.10.2 |
| NFS4ERR_ |
10041 | Section 15.1.7.2 |
| NFS4ERR_ |
10039 | Section 15.1.15.2 |
| NFS4ERR_ |
10052 | Section 15.1.11.1 |
| NFS4ERR_ |
10053 | Section 15.1.11.2 |
| NFS4ERR_ |
10007 | Section 15.1.4.1 |
| NFS4ERR_ |
10036 | Section 15.1.1.1 |
| NFS4ERR_ |
10003 | Section 15.1.1.2 |
| NFS4ERR_ |
10077 | Section 15.1.11.3 |
| NFS4ERR_ |
10042 | Section 15.1.8.1 |
| NFS4ERR_ |
10026 | Section 15.1.16.1 |
| NFS4ERR_ |
10051 | Section 15.1.12.2 |
| NFS4ERR_ |
10025 | Section 15.1.5.2 |
| NFS4ERR_ |
10048 | Section 15.1.11.4 |
| NFS4ERR_ |
10017 | Section 15.1.13.2 |
| NFS4ERR_ |
10074 | Section 15.1.13.1 |
| NFS4ERR_ |
10054 | Section 15.1.9.1 |
| NFS4ERR_ |
10055 | Section 15.1.11.6 |
| NFS4ERR_ |
10045 | Section 15.1.8.2 |
| NFS4ERR_ |
10078 | Section 15.1.11.5 |
| NFS4ERR_ |
10008 | Section 15.1.1.3 |
| NFS4ERR_ |
10056 | Section 15.1.14.1 |
| NFS4ERR_ |
10087 | Section 15.1.5.3 |
| NFS4ERR_ |
10010 | Section 15.1.8.3 |
| NFS4ERR_ |
10084 | Section 15.1.14.2 |
| NFS4ERR_ |
69 | Section 15.1.4.2 |
| NFS4ERR_ |
10079 | Section 15.1.13.3 |
| NFS4ERR_ |
17 | Section 15.1.4.3 |
| NFS4ERR_ |
10011 | Section 15.1.5.4 |
| NFS4ERR_ |
27 | Section 15.1.4.4 |
| NFS4ERR_ |
10014 | Section 15.1.2.2 |
| NFS4ERR_ |
10046 | Section 15.1.4.5 |
| NFS4ERR_ |
10013 | Section 15.1.9.2 |
| NFS4ERR_ |
10072 | Section 15.1.13.4 |
| NFS4ERR_ |
22 | Section 15.1.1.4 |
| NFS4ERR_ |
5 | Section 15.1.4.6 |
| NFS4ERR_ |
21 | Section 15.1.2.3 |
| NFS4ERR_ |
10058 | Section 15.1.10.3 |
| NFS4ERR_ |
10059 | Section 15.1.10.4 |
| NFS4ERR_ |
10031 | Section 15.1.16.2 |
| NFS4ERR_ |
10012 | Section 15.1.8.4 |
| NFS4ERR_ |
10037 | Section 15.1.8.5 |
| NFS4ERR_ |
10043 | Section 15.1.8.6 |
| NFS4ERR_ |
10028 | Section 15.1.8.7 |
| NFS4ERR_ |
10021 | Section 15.1.3.2 |
| NFS4ERR_ |
31 | Section 15.1.4.7 |
| NFS4ERR_ |
10019 | Section 15.1.2.4 |
| NFS4ERR_ |
63 | Section 15.1.7.3 |
| NFS4ERR_ |
2 | Section 15.1.4.8 |
| NFS4ERR_ |
10020 | Section 15.1.2.5 |
| NFS4ERR_ |
10060 | Section 15.1.10.5 |
| NFS4ERR_ |
28 | Section 15.1.4.9 |
| NFS4ERR_ |
20 | Section 15.1.2.6 |
| NFS4ERR_ |
66 | Section 15.1.4.10 |
| NFS4ERR_ |
10004 | Section 15.1.1.5 |
| NFS4ERR_ |
10081 | Section 15.1.3.3 |
| NFS4ERR_ |
10027 | Section 15.1.15.3 |
| NFS4ERR_ |
10033 | Section 15.1.9.3 |
| NFS4ERR_ |
6 | Section 15.1.16.3 |
| NFS4ERR_ |
10024 | Section 15.1.5.5 |
| NFS4ERR_ |
10038 | Section 15.1.8.8 |
| NFS4ERR_ |
10044 | Section 15.1.3.4 |
| NFS4ERR_ |
10071 | Section 15.1.3.5 |
| NFS4ERR_ |
1 | Section 15.1.6.2 |
| NFS4ERR_ |
10075 | Section 15.1.10.6 |
| NFS4ERR_ |
10080 | Section 15.1.10.7 |
| NFS4ERR_ |
10061 | Section 15.1.14.3 |
| NFS4ERR_ |
10034 | Section 15.1.9.4 |
| NFS4ERR_ |
10035 | Section 15.1.9.5 |
| NFS4ERR_ |
10085 | Section 15.1.14.4 |
| NFS4ERR_ |
10066 | Section 15.1.3.6 |
| NFS4ERR_ |
10067 | Section 15.1.3.7 |
| NFS4ERR_ |
10065 | Section 15.1.3.8 |
| NFS4ERR_ |
10030 | Section 15.1.16.4 |
| NFS4ERR_ |
10068 | Section 15.1.3.9 |
| NFS4ERR_ |
10086 | Section 15.1.10.8 |
| NFS4ERR_ |
30 | Section 15.1.4.11 |
| NFS4ERR_ |
10009 | Section 15.1.15.4 |
| NFS4ERR_ |
10015 | Section 15.1.8.9 |
| NFS4ERR_ |
10064 | Section 15.1.3.10 |
| NFS4ERR_ |
10076 | Section 15.1.11.7 |
| NFS4ERR_ |
10063 | Section 15.1.11.8 |
| NFS4ERR_ |
10006 | Section 15.1.1.6 |
| NFS4ERR_ |
70 | Section 15.1.2.7 |
| NFS4ERR_ |
10022 | Section 15.1.13.5 |
| NFS4ERR_ |
10023 | Section 15.1.16.5 |
| NFS4ERR_ |
10029 | Section 15.1.2.8 |
| NFS4ERR_ |
10005 | Section 15.1.1.7 |
| NFS4ERR_ |
10070 | Section 15.1.3.11 |
| NFS4ERR_ |
10062 | Section 15.1.10.9 |
| NFS4ERR_ |
10069 | Section 15.1.3.12 |
| NFS4ERR_ |
10016 | Section 15.1.6.3 |
| NFS4ERR_ |
10082 | Section 15.1.6.4 |
| NFS4ERR_ |
10083 | Section 15.1.2.9 |
| NFS4ERR_ |
18 | Section 15.1.4.12 |
15.1.1. General Errors
This section deals with errors that are applicable to a broad set of different purposes.¶
15.1.1.1. NFS4ERR_BADXDR (Error Code 10036)
The arguments for this operation do not match those specified in the XDR definition. This includes situations in which the request ends before all the arguments have been seen. Note that this error applies when fixed enumerations (these include booleans) have a value within the input stream that is not valid for the enum. A replier may pre-parse all operations for a Compound procedure before doing any operation execution and return RPC-level XDR errors in that case.¶
15.1.1.2. NFS4ERR_BAD_COOKIE (Error Code 10003)
Used for operations that provide a set of information indexed by some quantity provided by the client or cookie sent by the server for an earlier invocation. Where the value cannot be used for its intended purpose, this error results.¶
15.1.1.3. NFS4ERR_DELAY (Error Code 10008)
For any of a number of reasons, the replier could not process this operation in what was deemed a reasonable time. The client should wait and then try the request with a new slot and sequence value.¶
Some examples of scenarios that might lead to this situation:¶
- A server that supports hierarchical storage receives a request to process a file that had been migrated.¶
- An operation requires a delegation recall to proceed, but the need to wait for this delegation to be recalled and returned makes processing this request in a timely fashion impossible.¶
- A request is being performed on a session being migrated from another server as described in Section 11.14.3, and the lack of full information about the state of the session on the source makes it impossible to process the request immediately.¶
In such cases, returning the error NFS4ERR_
-
If NFS4ERR_
DELAY is returned on a SEQUENCE operation, the request is retried in full with the SEQUENCE operation containing the same slot and sequence values. In this case, the replier MUST avoid returning a response containing NFS4ERR_ DELAY as the response to SEQUENCE solely because an earlier instance of the same request returned that error and it was stored in the reply cache. If the replier did this, the retries would not be effective as there would be no opportunity for the replier to see whether the condition that generated the NFS4ERR_ DELAY had been rectified during the interim between the original request and the retry.¶ -
If NFS4ERR_
DELAY is returned on an operation other than SEQUENCE that validly appears as the first operation of a request, the handling is similar. The request can be retried in full without modification. In this case as well, the replier MUST avoid returning a response containing NFS4ERR_ DELAY as the response to an initial operation of a request solely on the basis of its presence in the reply cache. If the replier did this, the retries would not be effective as there would be no opportunity for the replier to see whether the condition that generated the NFS4ERR_ DELAY had been rectified during the interim between the original request and the retry.¶ -
If NFS4ERR_
DELAY is returned on an operation other than the first in the request, the request when retried MUST contain a SEQUENCE operation that is different than the original one, with either the slot ID or the sequence value different from that in the original request. Because requesters do this, there is no need for the replier to take special care to avoid returning an NFS4ERR_ DELAY error obtained from the reply cache. When no non-idempotent operations have been processed before the NFS4ERR_ DELAY was returned, the requester should retry the request in full, with the only difference from the original request being the modification to the slot ID or sequence value in the reissued SEQUENCE operation.¶ -
When NFS4ERR_
DELAY is returned on an operation other than the first within a request and there has been a non-idempotent operation processed before the NFS4ERR_ DELAY was returned, reissuing the request as is normally done would incorrectly cause the re-execution of the non-idempotent operation.¶ To avoid this situation, the client should reissue the request without the non-idempotent operation. The request still must use a SEQUENCE operation with either a different slot ID or sequence value from the SEQUENCE in the original request. Because this is done, there is no way the replier could avoid spuriously re-executing the non-idempotent operation since the different SEQUENCE parameters prevent the requester from recognizing that the non-idempotent operation is being retried.¶
Note that without the ability to return NFS4ERR_
15.1.1.4. NFS4ERR_INVAL (Error Code 22)
The arguments for this operation are not valid for some reason, even though they do match those specified in the XDR definition for the request.¶
15.1.1.5. NFS4ERR_NOTSUPP (Error Code 10004)
Operation not supported, either because the operation is an OPTIONAL one and is not supported by this server or because the operation MUST NOT be implemented in the current minor version.¶
15.1.1.6. NFS4ERR_SERVERFAULT (Error Code 10006)
An error occurred on the server that does not map to any of the specific legal NFSv4.1 protocol error values. The client should translate this into an appropriate error. UNIX clients may choose to translate this to EIO.¶
15.1.1.7. NFS4ERR_TOOSMALL (Error Code 10005)
Used where an operation returns a variable amount of data, with a limit specified by the client. Where the data returned cannot be fit within the limit specified by the client, this error results.¶
15.1.2. Filehandle Errors
These errors deal with the situation in which the current or saved filehandle, or the filehandle passed to PUTFH intended to become the current filehandle, is invalid in some way. This includes situations in which the filehandle is a valid filehandle in general but is not of the appropriate object type for the current operation.¶
Where the error description indicates a problem with the current or saved filehandle, it is to be understood that filehandles are only checked for the condition if they are implicit arguments of the operation in question.¶
15.1.2.1. NFS4ERR_BADHANDLE (Error Code 10001)
Illegal NFS filehandle for the current server. The current filehandle failed internal consistency checks. Once accepted as valid (by PUTFH), no subsequent status change can cause the filehandle to generate this error.¶
15.1.2.2. NFS4ERR_FHEXPIRED (Error Code 10014)
A current or saved filehandle that is an argument to the current operation is volatile and has expired at the server.¶
15.1.2.3. NFS4ERR_ISDIR (Error Code 21)
The current or saved filehandle designates a directory when the current operation does not allow a directory to be accepted as the target of this operation.¶
15.1.2.4. NFS4ERR_MOVED (Error Code 10019)
The file system that contains the current filehandle object
is not present at the server or is not accessible with the
network address used. It may have been made accessible on a different
set of network addresses, relocated or
migrated to another server, or it may have never been present.
The client may obtain the new file system location by obtaining
the fs_
As with the case of NFS4ERR_
15.1.2.5. NFS4ERR_NOFILEHANDLE (Error Code 10020)
The logical current or saved filehandle value is required by the current operation and is not set. This may be a result of a malformed COMPOUND operation (i.e., no PUTFH or PUTROOTFH before an operation that requires the current filehandle be set).¶
15.1.2.6. NFS4ERR_NOTDIR (Error Code 20)
The current (or saved) filehandle designates an object that is not a directory for an operation in which a directory is required.¶
15.1.2.7. NFS4ERR_STALE (Error Code 70)
The current or saved filehandle value designating an argument to the current operation is invalid. The file referred to by that filehandle no longer exists or access to it has been revoked.¶
15.1.2.8. NFS4ERR_SYMLINK (Error Code 10029)
The current filehandle designates a symbolic link when the current operation does not allow a symbolic link as the target.¶
15.1.2.9. NFS4ERR_WRONG_TYPE (Error Code 10083)
The current (or saved) filehandle designates an object that
is of an invalid type for the current operation, and there is no
more specific error (such as NFS4ERR_
15.1.3. Compound Structure Errors
This section deals with errors that relate to the overall structure
of a Compound request (by which we mean to include both
COMPOUND and CB_
There are a number of basic constraints on the operations that
may appear in a Compound request. Sessions add to these basic
constraints by requiring a Sequence operation (either SEQUENCE
or CB_
15.1.3.1. NFS_OK (Error code 0)
Indicates the operation completed successfully, in that all of the constituent operations completed without error.¶
15.1.3.2. NFS4ERR_MINOR_VERS_MISMATCH (Error code 10021)
The minor version specified is not one that the current listener supports. This value is returned in the overall status for the Compound but is not associated with a specific operation since the results will specify a result count of zero.¶
15.1.3.3. NFS4ERR_NOT_ONLY_OP (Error Code 10081)
Certain operations, which are allowed to be executed outside of a session, MUST be the only operation within a Compound whenever the Compound does not start with a Sequence operation. This error results when that constraint is not met.¶
15.1.3.4. NFS4ERR_OP_ILLEGAL (Error Code 10044)
The operation code is not a valid one for the current Compound procedure. The opcode in the result stream matched with this error is the ILLEGAL value, although the value that appears in the request stream may be different. Where an illegal value appears and the replier pre-parses all operations for a Compound procedure before doing any operation execution, an RPC-level XDR error may be returned.¶
15.1.3.5. NFS4ERR_OP_NOT_IN_SESSION (Error Code 10071)
Most forward operations and all callback operations are only valid within the context of a session, so that the Compound request in question MUST begin with a Sequence operation. If an attempt is made to execute these operations outside the context of session, this error results.¶
15.1.3.6. NFS4ERR_REP_TOO_BIG (Error Code 10066)
The reply to a Compound would exceed the channel's negotiated maximum response size.¶
15.1.3.7. NFS4ERR_REP_TOO_BIG_TO_CACHE (Error Code 10067)
The reply to a Compound would exceed the channel's negotiated maximum size for replies cached in the reply cache when the Sequence for the current request specifies that this request is to be cached.¶
15.1.3.8. NFS4ERR_REQ_TOO_BIG (Error Code 10065)
The Compound request exceeds the channel's negotiated maximum size for requests.¶
15.1.3.9. NFS4ERR_RETRY_UNCACHED_REP (Error Code 10068)
The requester has attempted a retry of a Compound that it previously requested not be placed in the reply cache.¶
15.1.3.10. NFS4ERR_SEQUENCE_POS (Error Code 10064)
A Sequence operation appeared in a position other than the first operation of a Compound request.¶
15.1.3.11. NFS4ERR_TOO_MANY_OPS (Error Code 10070)
The Compound request has too many operations, exceeding the count negotiated when the session was created.¶
15.1.3.12. NFS4ERR_UNSAFE_COMPOUND (Error Code 10068)
The client has sent a COMPOUND request with an unsafe mix of operations -- specifically, with a non-idempotent operation that changes the current filehandle and that is not followed by a GETFH.¶
15.1.4. File System Errors
These errors describe situations that occurred in the underlying file system implementation rather than in the protocol or any NFSv4.x feature.¶
15.1.4.1. NFS4ERR_BADTYPE (Error Code 10007)
An attempt was made to create an object with an inappropriate type specified to CREATE. This may be because the type is undefined, because the type is not supported by the server, or because the type is not intended to be created by CREATE (such as a regular file or named attribute, for which OPEN is used to do the file creation).¶
15.1.4.2. NFS4ERR_DQUOT (Error Code 69)
Resource (quota) hard limit exceeded. The user's resource limit on the server has been exceeded.¶
15.1.4.3. NFS4ERR_EXIST (Error Code 17)
A file of the specified target name (when creating, renaming, or linking) already exists.¶
15.1.4.4. NFS4ERR_FBIG (Error Code 27)
The file is too large. The operation would have caused the file to grow beyond the server's limit.¶
15.1.4.5. NFS4ERR_FILE_OPEN (Error Code 10046)
The operation is not allowed because a file involved in the operation is currently open. Servers may, but are not required to, disallow linking-to, removing, or renaming open files.¶
15.1.4.6. NFS4ERR_IO (Error Code 5)
Indicates that an I/O error occurred for which the file system was unable to provide recovery.¶
15.1.4.7. NFS4ERR_MLINK (Error Code 31)
The request would have caused the server's limit for the number of hard links a file may have to be exceeded.¶
15.1.4.8. NFS4ERR_NOENT (Error Code 2)
Indicates no such file or directory. The file or directory name specified does not exist.¶
15.1.4.9. NFS4ERR_NOSPC (Error Code 28)
Indicates there is no space left on the device. The operation would have caused the server's file system to exceed its limit.¶
15.1.4.10. NFS4ERR_NOTEMPTY (Error Code 66)
An attempt was made to remove a directory that was not empty.¶
15.1.4.11. NFS4ERR_ROFS (Error Code 30)
Indicates a read-only file system. A modifying operation was attempted on a read-only file system.¶
15.1.4.12. NFS4ERR_XDEV (Error Code 18)
Indicates an attempt to do an operation, such as linking, that inappropriately crosses a boundary. This may be due to such boundaries as:¶
- that between file systems (where the fsids are different).¶
- that between different named attribute directories or between a named attribute directory and an ordinary directory.¶
-
that between byte-ranges of a file system that the file system
implementation treats as separate (for example, for space
accounting purposes), and where cross
-connection between the byte-ranges are not allowed.¶
15.1.5. State Management Errors
These errors indicate problems with the stateid (or one of the stateids) passed to a given operation. This includes situations in which the stateid is invalid as well as situations in which the stateid is valid but designates locking state that has been revoked. Depending on the operation, the stateid when valid may designate opens, byte-range locks, file or directory delegations, layouts, or device maps.¶
15.1.5.1. NFS4ERR_ADMIN_REVOKED (Error Code 10047)
A stateid designates locking state of any type that has been revoked due to administrative interaction, possibly while the lease is valid.¶
15.1.5.2. NFS4ERR_BAD_STATEID (Error Code 10026)
A stateid does not properly designate any valid state. See Sections 8.2.4 and 8.2.3 for a discussion of how stateids are validated.¶
15.1.5.3. NFS4ERR_DELEG_REVOKED (Error Code 10087)
A stateid designates recallable locking state of any type (delegation or layout) that has been revoked due to the failure of the client to return the lock when it was recalled.¶
15.1.5.4. NFS4ERR_EXPIRED (Error Code 10011)
A stateid designates locking state of any type that has been revoked due to expiration of the client's lease, either immediately upon lease expiration, or following a later request for a conflicting lock.¶
15.1.5.5. NFS4ERR_OLD_STATEID (Error Code 10024)
A stateid with a non-zero seqid value does match the current seqid for the state designated by the user.¶
15.1.6. Security Errors
These are the various permission
15.1.6.1. NFS4ERR_ACCESS (Error Code 13)
Indicates permission denied. The caller does
not have the correct permission to perform
the requested operation. Contrast this with
NFS4ERR_
15.1.6.2. NFS4ERR_PERM (Error Code 1)
Indicates requester is not the owner. The operation was not allowed because the caller is neither a privileged user (root) nor the owner of the target of the operation.¶
15.1.6.3. NFS4ERR_WRONGSEC (Error Code 10016)
Indicates that the security mechanism being used by the client
for the operation does not match the server's security policy.
The client should change the security mechanism being used and
re-send the operation (but not with the same slot ID and
sequence ID; one or both MUST be different on the re-send). SECINFO and SECINFO_
15.1.6.4. NFS4ERR_WRONG_CRED (Error Code 10082)
An operation that manipulates state was attempted by a principal that was not allowed to modify that piece of state.¶
15.1.7. Name Errors
Names in NFSv4 are UTF-8 strings. When the strings are not
valid UTF-8 or are of length zero, the error NFS4ERR_
15.1.7.1. NFS4ERR_BADCHAR (Error Code 10040)
A UTF-8 string contains a character that is not supported by the server in the context in which it being used.¶
15.1.7.2. NFS4ERR_BADNAME (Error Code 10041)
A name string in a request consisted of valid UTF-8 characters supported by the server, but the name is not supported by the server as a valid name for the current operation. An example might be creating a file or directory named ".." on a server whose file system uses that name for links to parent directories.¶
15.1.7.3. NFS4ERR_NAMETOOLONG (Error Code 63)
Returned when the filename in an operation exceeds the server's implementation limit.¶
15.1.8. Locking Errors
This section deals with errors related to locking, both as to share reservations and byte-range locking. It does not deal with errors specific to the process of reclaiming locks. Those are dealt with in Section 15.1.9.¶
15.1.8.1. NFS4ERR_BAD_RANGE (Error Code 10042)
The byte-range of a LOCK, LOCKT, or LOCKU operation is not allowed by the server. For example, this error results when a server that only supports 32-bit ranges receives a range that cannot be handled by that server. (See Section 18.10.3.)¶
15.1.8.2. NFS4ERR_DEADLOCK (Error Code 10045)
The server has been able to determine a byte-range locking
deadlock condition for a READW_
15.1.8.3. NFS4ERR_DENIED (Error Code 10010)
An attempt to lock a file is denied. Since this may be a temporary condition, the client is encouraged to re-send the lock request (but not with the same slot ID and sequence ID; one or both MUST be different on the re-send) until the lock is accepted. See Section 9.6 for a discussion of the re-send.¶
15.1.8.4. NFS4ERR_LOCKED (Error Code 10012)
A READ or WRITE operation was attempted on a file where there was a conflict between the I/O and an existing lock:¶
15.1.8.5. NFS4ERR_LOCKS_HELD (Error Code 10037)
An operation was prevented by the unexpected presence of locks.¶
15.1.8.6. NFS4ERR_LOCK_NOTSUPP (Error Code 10043)
A LOCK operation was attempted that would require the upgrade or downgrade of a byte-range lock range already held by the owner, and the server does not support atomic upgrade or downgrade of locks.¶
15.1.8.7. NFS4ERR_LOCK_RANGE (Error Code 10028)
A LOCK operation is operating on a range that overlaps in part a currently held byte-range lock for the current lock-owner and does not precisely match a single such byte-range lock where the server does not support this type of request, and thus does not implement POSIX locking semantics [21]. See Sections 18.10.4, 18.11.4, and 18.12.4 for a discussion of how this applies to LOCK, LOCKT, and LOCKU respectively.¶
15.1.8.8. NFS4ERR_OPENMODE (Error Code 10038)
The client attempted a READ, WRITE, LOCK, or other operation not sanctioned by the stateid passed (e.g., writing to a file opened for read-only access).¶
15.1.8.9. NFS4ERR_SHARE_DENIED (Error Code 10015)
An attempt to OPEN a file with a share reservation has failed because of a share conflict.¶
15.1.9. Reclaim Errors
These errors relate to the process of reclaiming locks after a server restart.¶
15.1.9.1. NFS4ERR_COMPLETE_ALREADY (Error Code 10054)
The client previously sent a successful RECLAIM_
15.1.9.2. NFS4ERR_GRACE (Error Code 10013)
This error is returned when the server is in its grace period with regard to the file system object for which the lock was requested. In this situation, a non-reclaim locking request cannot be granted. This can occur because either:¶
- The server does not have sufficient information about locks that might be potentially reclaimed to determine whether the lock could be granted.¶
-
The request is made by a client responsible for reclaiming its
locks that has not yet done the appropriate RECLAIM_
COMPLETE operation, allowing it to proceed to obtain new locks.¶
In the case of a per-fs grace period, there may be clients (i.e., those currently using the destination file system) who might be unaware of the circumstances resulting in the initiation of the grace period. Such clients need to periodically retry the request until the grace period is over, just as other clients do.¶
15.1.9.3. NFS4ERR_NO_GRACE (Error Code 10033)
A reclaim of client state was attempted in circumstances in which the server cannot guarantee that conflicting state has not been provided to another client. This occurs in any of the following situations:¶
- There is no active grace period applying to the file system object for which the request was made.¶
- The client making the request has no current role in reclaiming locks.¶
-
Previous operations have created a situation in which
the server is not able to determine that a reclaim
-interfering edge condition does not exist.¶
15.1.9.4. NFS4ERR_RECLAIM_BAD (Error Code 10034)
The server has determined that a reclaim attempted by the client
is not valid, i.e., the lock specified as being reclaimed could
not possibly have existed before the server restart or file
system migration event. A server
is not obliged to make this determination and will typically rely
on the client to only reclaim locks that the client was granted prior
to restart. However,
when a server does have reliable information to enable it to make
this determination, this error indicates that the reclaim has
been rejected as invalid. This is as opposed to the error
NFS4ERR_
15.1.9.5. NFS4ERR_RECLAIM_CONFLICT (Error Code 10035)
The reclaim attempted by the client has encountered a conflict
and cannot be satisfied. This potentially indicates a misbehaving
client, although not necessarily the one receiving the error.
The misbehavior might be on the part of the client that
established the lock with which this client conflicted. See also
Section 15.1.9.4 for the related error,
NFS4ERR_
15.1.10. pNFS Errors
This section deals with pNFS-related errors including those that are associated with using NFSv4.1 to communicate with a data server.¶
15.1.10.1. NFS4ERR_BADIOMODE (Error Code 10049)
An invalid or inappropriate layout iomode was specified.
For example an inappropriate layout iomode, suppose
a client's LAYOUTGET operation specified an iomode of
LAYOUTIOMODE4_
15.1.10.2. NFS4ERR_BADLAYOUT (Error Code 10050)
The layout specified is invalid in some way. For LAYOUTCOMMIT,
this indicates that the specified layout is not held by the
client or is not of mode LAYOUTIOMODE4_
15.1.10.3. NFS4ERR_LAYOUTTRYLATER (Error Code 10058)
Layouts are temporarily unavailable for the file. The client should re-send later (but not with the same slot ID and sequence ID; one or both MUST be different on the re-send).¶
15.1.10.4. NFS4ERR_LAYOUTUNAVAILABLE (Error Code 10059)
Returned when layouts are not available for the current file system or the particular specified file.¶
15.1.10.5. NFS4ERR_NOMATCHING_LAYOUT (Error Code 10060)
Returned when layouts are recalled and the client has no layouts matching the specification of the layouts being recalled.¶
15.1.10.6. NFS4ERR_PNFS_IO_HOLE (Error Code 10075)
The pNFS client has attempted to read from or write to an illegal hole of a file of a data server that is using sparse packing. See Section 13.4.4.¶
15.1.10.7. NFS4ERR_PNFS_NO_LAYOUT (Error Code 10080)
The pNFS client has attempted to read from or write to a file (using a request to a data server) without holding a valid layout. This includes the case where the client had a layout, but the iomode does not allow a WRITE.¶
15.1.10.8. NFS4ERR_RETURNCONFLICT (Error Code 10086)
A layout is unavailable due to an attempt to perform the LAYOUTGET before a pending LAYOUTRETURN on the file has been received. See Section 12.5.5.2.1.3.¶
15.1.10.9. NFS4ERR_UNKNOWN_LAYOUTTYPE (Error Code 10062)
The client has specified a layout type that is not supported by the server.¶
15.1.11. Session Use Errors
This section deals with errors encountered when using sessions,
that is, errors encountered when a request uses a Sequence
(i.e., either SEQUENCE or CB_
15.1.11.1. NFS4ERR_BADSESSION (Error Code 10052)
The specified session ID is unknown to the server to which the operation is addressed.¶
15.1.11.2. NFS4ERR_BADSLOT (Error Code 10053)
The requester sent a Sequence operation that attempted to use a slot the replier does not have in its slot table. It is possible the slot may have been retired.¶
15.1.11.3. NFS4ERR_BAD_HIGH_SLOT (Error Code 10077)
The highest_
15.1.11.4. NFS4ERR_CB_PATH_DOWN (Error Code 10048)
There is a problem contacting the client via the callback path. The function of this error has been mostly superseded by the use of status flags in the reply to the SEQUENCE operation (see Section 18.46).¶
15.1.11.5. NFS4ERR_DEADSESSION (Error Code 10078)
The specified session is a persistent session that is dead and does not accept new requests or perform new operations on existing requests (in the case in which a request was partially executed before server restart).¶
15.1.11.6. NFS4ERR_CONN_NOT_BOUND_TO_SESSION (Error Code 10055)
A Sequence operation was sent on a connection that has not
been associated with the specified session,
where the client specified that connection association
was to be enforced with SP4_
15.1.11.7. NFS4ERR_SEQ_FALSE_RETRY (Error Code 10076)
The requester sent a Sequence operation with a slot ID and sequence ID that are in the reply cache, but the replier has detected that the retried request is not the same as the original request. See Section 2.10.6.1.3.1.¶
15.1.11.8. NFS4ERR_SEQ_MISORDERED (Error Code 10063)
The requester sent a Sequence operation with an invalid sequence ID.¶
15.1.12. Session Management Errors
This section deals with errors associated with requests used in session management.¶
15.1.12.1. NFS4ERR_BACK_CHAN_BUSY (Error Code 10057)
An attempt was made to destroy a session when the session cannot be destroyed because the server has callback requests outstanding.¶
15.1.12.2. NFS4ERR_BAD_SESSION_DIGEST (Error Code 10051)
The digest used in a SET_
15.1.13. Client Management Errors
This section deals with errors associated with requests used to create and manage client IDs.¶
15.1.13.1. NFS4ERR_CLIENTID_BUSY (Error Code 10074)
The DESTROY_
15.1.13.2. NFS4ERR_CLID_INUSE (Error Code 10017)
While processing an EXCHANGE_
15.1.13.3. NFS4ERR_ENCR_ALG_UNSUPP (Error Code 10079)
An EXCHANGE_
15.1.13.4. NFS4ERR_HASH_ALG_UNSUPP (Error Code 10072)
An EXCHANGE_
15.1.13.5. NFS4ERR_STALE_CLIENTID (Error Code 10022)
A client ID not recognized by the server was passed to an operation. Note that unlike the case of NFSv4.0, client IDs are not passed explicitly to the server in ordinary locking operations and cannot result in this error. Instead, when there is a server restart, it is first manifested through an error on the associated session, and the staleness of the client ID is detected when trying to associate a client ID with a new session.¶
15.1.14. Delegation Errors
This section deals with errors associated with requesting and returning delegations.¶
15.1.14.1. NFS4ERR_DELEG_ALREADY_WANTED (Error Code 10056)
The client has requested a delegation when it had already registered that it wants that same delegation.¶
15.1.14.2. NFS4ERR_DIRDELEG_UNAVAIL (Error Code 10084)
This error is returned when the server is unable or unwilling to provide a requested directory delegation.¶
15.1.14.3. NFS4ERR_RECALLCONFLICT (Error Code 10061)
A recallable object (i.e., a layout or delegation) is unavailable due to a conflicting recall operation that is currently in progress for that object.¶
15.1.14.4. NFS4ERR_REJECT_DELEG (Error Code 10085)
The callback operation invoked to deal with a new delegation has rejected it.¶
15.1.15. Attribute Handling Errors
This section deals with errors specific to attribute handling within NFSv4.¶
15.1.15.1. NFS4ERR_ATTRNOTSUPP (Error Code 10032)
An attribute specified is not supported by the server. This error MUST NOT be returned by the GETATTR operation.¶
15.1.15.2. NFS4ERR_BADOWNER (Error Code 10039)
This error is returned when an owner or owner_
15.1.15.3. NFS4ERR_NOT_SAME (Error Code 10027)
This error is returned by the VERIFY operation to signify that the attributes compared were not the same as those provided in the client's request.¶
15.1.15.4. NFS4ERR_SAME (Error Code 10009)
This error is returned by the NVERIFY operation to signify that the attributes compared were the same as those provided in the client's request.¶
15.1.16. Obsoleted Errors
These errors MUST NOT be generated by any NFSv4.1 operation. This can be for a number of reasons.¶
- The function provided by the error has been superseded by one of the status bits returned by the SEQUENCE operation.¶
- The new session structure and associated change in locking have made the error unnecessary.¶
- There has been a restructuring of some errors for NFSv4.1 that resulted in the elimination of certain errors.¶
15.1.16.1. NFS4ERR_BAD_SEQID (Error Code 10026)
The sequence number (seqid) in a locking request is neither the next expected number or the last number processed. These seqids are ignored in NFSv4.1.¶
15.1.16.2. NFS4ERR_LEASE_MOVED (Error Code 10031)
A lease being renewed is associated with a file system
that has been migrated to a new server. The error has
been superseded by the SEQ4_
15.1.16.3. NFS4ERR_NXIO (Error Code 5)
I/O error. No such device or address. This error is for errors involving block and character device access, but because NFSv4.1 is not a device-access protocol, this error is not applicable.¶
15.1.16.4. NFS4ERR_RESTOREFH (Error Code 10030)
The RESTOREFH operation does not have a saved filehandle
(identified by SAVEFH) to operate upon. In NFSv4.1, this error has
been superseded by NFS4ERR_
15.1.16.5. NFS4ERR_STALE_STATEID (Error Code 10023)
A stateid generated by an earlier server instance was used. This error is moot in NFSv4.1 because all operations that take a stateid MUST be preceded by the SEQUENCE operation, and the earlier server instance is detected by the session infrastructure that supports SEQUENCE.¶
15.2. Operations and Their Valid Errors
This section contains a table that gives the valid error returns
for each protocol operation. The error code NFS4_
-
The operations that MUST NOT be implemented:
OPEN_
CONFIRM, RELEASE_ LOCKOWNER, RENEW, SETCLIENTID, and SETCLIENTID_ CONFIRM .¶ - The invalid operation: ILLEGAL.¶
| Operation | Errors |
|---|---|
| ACCESS |
NFS4ERR_ |
| BACKCHANNEL_ |
NFS4ERR_ |
| BIND_ |
NFS4ERR_ |
| CLOSE |
NFS4ERR_ |
| COMMIT |
NFS4ERR_ |
| CREATE |
NFS4ERR_ |
| CREATE_ |
NFS4ERR_ |
| DELEGPURGE |
NFS4ERR_ |
| DELEGRETURN |
NFS4ERR_ |
| DESTROY_ |
NFS4ERR_ |
| DESTROY_ |
NFS4ERR_ |
| EXCHANGE_ |
NFS4ERR_ |
| FREE_ |
NFS4ERR_ |
| GET_ |
NFS4ERR_ |
| GETATTR |
NFS4ERR_ |
| GETDEVICEINFO |
NFS4ERR_ |
| GETDEVICELIST |
NFS4ERR_ |
| GETFH |
NFS4ERR_ |
| ILLEGAL |
NFS4ERR_ |
| LAYOUTCOMMIT |
NFS4ERR_ |
| LAYOUTGET |
NFS4ERR_ |
| LAYOUTRETURN |
NFS4ERR_ |
| LINK |
NFS4ERR_ |
| LOCK |
NFS4ERR_ |
| LOCKT |
NFS4ERR_ |
| LOCKU |
NFS4ERR_ |
| LOOKUP |
NFS4ERR_ |
| LOOKUPP |
NFS4ERR_ |
| NVERIFY |
NFS4ERR_ |
| OPEN |
NFS4ERR_ |
| OPEN_ |
NFS4ERR_ |
| OPEN_ |
NFS4ERR_ |
| OPENATTR |
NFS4ERR_ |
| PUTFH |
NFS4ERR_ |
| PUTPUBFH |
NFS4ERR_ |
| PUTROOTFH |
NFS4ERR_ |
| READ |
NFS4ERR_ |
| READDIR |
NFS4ERR_ |
| READLINK |
NFS4ERR_ |
| RECLAIM_ |
NFS4ERR_ |
| RELEASE_ |
NFS4ERR_ |
| REMOVE |
NFS4ERR_ |
| RENAME |
NFS4ERR_ |
| RENEW |
NFS4ERR_ |
| RESTOREFH |
NFS4ERR_ |
| SAVEFH |
NFS4ERR_ |
| SECINFO |
NFS4ERR_ |
| SECINFO_ |
NFS4ERR_ |
| SEQUENCE |
NFS4ERR_ |
| SET_ |
NFS4ERR_ |
| SETATTR |
NFS4ERR_ |
| SETCLIENTID |
NFS4ERR_ |
| SETCLIENTID_ |
NFS4ERR_ |
| TEST_ |
NFS4ERR_ |
| VERIFY |
NFS4ERR_ |
| WANT_ |
NFS4ERR_ |
| WRITE |
NFS4ERR_ |
15.3. Callback Operations and Their Valid Errors
This section contains a table that gives the valid error returns
for each callback operation. The error code NFS4_
| Callback Operation | Errors |
|---|---|
| CB_ |
NFS4ERR_ |
| CB_ |
NFS4ERR_ |
| CB_ |
NFS4ERR_ |
| CB_ |
NFS4ERR_ |
| CB_ |
NFS4ERR_ |
| CB_ |
NFS4ERR_ |
| CB_ |
NFS4ERR_ |
| CB_ |
NFS4ERR_ |
| CB_ |
NFS4ERR_ |
| CB_ |
NFS4ERR_ |
| CB_ |
NFS4ERR_ |
| CB_ |
NFS4ERR_ |
| CB_ |
NFS4ERR_ |
15.4. Errors and the Operations That Use Them
| Error | Operations |
|---|---|
| NFS4ERR_ |
ACCESS,
COMMIT,
CREATE,
GETATTR,
GET_ |
| NFS4ERR_ |
CLOSE,
DELEGRETURN,
LAYOUTCOMMIT,
LAYOUTGET,
LAYOUTRETURN,
LOCK,
LOCKU,
OPEN,
OPEN_ |
| NFS4ERR_ |
CREATE, LAYOUTCOMMIT, NVERIFY, OPEN, SETATTR, VERIFY |
| NFS4ERR_ |
DESTROY_ |
| NFS4ERR_ |
CREATE,
EXCHANGE_ |
| NFS4ERR_ |
CB_ |
| NFS4ERR_ |
CB_ |
| NFS4ERR_ |
LAYOUTCOMMIT, LAYOUTGET |
| NFS4ERR_ |
CREATE, LINK, LOOKUP, OPEN, REMOVE, RENAME, SECINFO |
| NFS4ERR_ |
CREATE, OPEN, SETATTR |
| NFS4ERR_ |
BIND_ |
| NFS4ERR_ |
CB_ |
| NFS4ERR_ |
CREATE |
| NFS4ERR_ |
ACCESS,
BACKCHANNEL_ |
| NFS4ERR_ |
GETDEVICELIST, READDIR |
| NFS4ERR_ |
CB_ |
| NFS4ERR_ |
LOCK, LOCKT, LOCKU |
| NFS4ERR_ |
BIND_ |
| NFS4ERR_ |
CB_ |
| NFS4ERR_ |
DESTROY_ |
| NFS4ERR_ |
CREATE_ |
| NFS4ERR_ |
DESTROY_ |
| NFS4ERR_ |
RECLAIM_ |
| NFS4ERR_ |
CB_ |
| NFS4ERR_ |
LOCK |
| NFS4ERR_ |
ACCESS,
BACKCHANNEL_ |
| NFS4ERR_ |
ACCESS,
BACKCHANNEL_ |
| NFS4ERR_ |
OPEN,
WANT_ |
| NFS4ERR_ |
DELEGRETURN, LAYOUTCOMMIT, LAYOUTGET, LAYOUTRETURN, OPEN, READ, SETATTR, WRITE |
| NFS4ERR_ |
LOCK, LOCKT |
| NFS4ERR_ |
GET_ |
| NFS4ERR_ |
CREATE, LAYOUTGET, LINK, OPEN, OPENATTR, RENAME, SETATTR, WRITE |
| NFS4ERR_ |
EXCHANGE_ |
| NFS4ERR_ |
CREATE, LINK, OPEN, RENAME |
| NFS4ERR_ |
CLOSE,
DELEGRETURN,
LAYOUTCOMMIT,
LAYOUTRETURN,
LOCK,
LOCKU,
OPEN,
OPEN_ |
| NFS4ERR_ |
LAYOUTCOMMIT, OPEN, SETATTR, WRITE |
| NFS4ERR_ |
ACCESS,
CLOSE,
COMMIT,
CREATE,
DELEGRETURN,
GETATTR,
GETDEVICELIST,
GETFH,
GET_ |
| NFS4ERR_ |
LINK, REMOVE, RENAME |
| NFS4ERR_ |
GETATTR,
GET_ |
| NFS4ERR_ |
EXCHANGE_ |
| NFS4ERR_ |
ACCESS,
BACKCHANNEL_ |
| NFS4ERR_ |
ACCESS,
COMMIT,
CREATE,
GETATTR,
GETDEVICELIST,
GET_ |
| NFS4ERR_ |
COMMIT, LAYOUTCOMMIT, LAYOUTRETURN, LINK, LOCK, LOCKT, OPEN, READ, WRITE |
| NFS4ERR_ |
LAYOUTGET |
| NFS4ERR_ |
LAYOUTGET |
| NFS4ERR_ |
LAYOUTGET, READ, SETATTR, WRITE |
| NFS4ERR_ |
CLOSE,
FREE_ |
| NFS4ERR_ |
LOCK |
| NFS4ERR_ |
LOCK, LOCKT, LOCKU |
| NFS4ERR_ |
CREATE, LINK, RENAME |
| NFS4ERR_ |
ACCESS,
CLOSE,
COMMIT,
CREATE,
DELEGRETURN,
GETATTR,
GETFH,
GET_ |
| NFS4ERR_ |
CREATE, LINK, LOOKUP, OPEN, REMOVE, RENAME, SECINFO |
| NFS4ERR_ |
BACKCHANNEL_ |
| NFS4ERR_ |
ACCESS,
CLOSE,
COMMIT,
CREATE,
DELEGRETURN,
GETATTR,
GETDEVICELIST,
GETFH,
GET_ |
| NFS4ERR_ |
CB_ |
| NFS4ERR_ |
CREATE,
CREATE_ |
| NFS4ERR_ |
CREATE,
GET_ |
| NFS4ERR_ |
REMOVE, RENAME |
| NFS4ERR_ |
CB_ |
| NFS4ERR_ |
BIND_ |
| NFS4ERR_ |
EXCHANGE_ |
| NFS4ERR_ |
LAYOUTCOMMIT,
LAYOUTRETURN,
LOCK,
OPEN,
WANT_ |
| NFS4ERR_ |
CLOSE,
DELEGRETURN,
FREE_ |
| NFS4ERR_ |
LAYOUTGET, LOCK, READ, SETATTR, WRITE |
| NFS4ERR_ |
CB_ |
| NFS4ERR_ |
ACCESS,
BACKCHANNEL_ |
| NFS4ERR_ |
CREATE, OPEN, SETATTR |
| NFS4ERR_ |
READ, WRITE |
| NFS4ERR_ |
READ, WRITE |
| NFS4ERR_ |
LAYOUTGET,
WANT_ |
| NFS4ERR_ |
LAYOUTCOMMIT,
LOCK,
OPEN,
WANT_ |
| NFS4ERR_ |
LAYOUTCOMMIT,
LOCK,
OPEN,
WANT_ |
| NFS4ERR_ |
CB_ |
| NFS4ERR_ |
ACCESS,
BACKCHANNEL_ |
| NFS4ERR_ |
ACCESS,
BACKCHANNEL_ |
| NFS4ERR_ |
ACCESS,
BACKCHANNEL_ |
| NFS4ERR_ |
ACCESS,
BACKCHANNEL_ |
| NFS4ERR_ |
CREATE,
LINK,
LOCK,
LOCKT,
OPEN,
OPENATTR,
OPEN_ |
| NFS4ERR_ |
NVERIFY |
| NFS4ERR_ |
CB_ |
| NFS4ERR_ |
CB_ |
| NFS4ERR_ |
CB_ |
| NFS4ERR_ |
ACCESS,
BIND_ |
| NFS4ERR_ |
OPEN |
| NFS4ERR_ |
ACCESS,
CLOSE,
COMMIT,
CREATE,
DELEGRETURN,
GETATTR,
GETFH,
GET_ |
| NFS4ERR_ |
CREATE_ |
| NFS4ERR_ |
COMMIT, LAYOUTCOMMIT, LINK, LOCK, LOCKT, LOOKUP, LOOKUPP, OPEN, READ, WRITE |
| NFS4ERR_ |
CREATE_ |
| NFS4ERR_ |
ACCESS,
BACKCHANNEL_ |
| NFS4ERR_ |
CB_ |
| NFS4ERR_ |
CREATE, OPEN, OPENATTR |
| NFS4ERR_ |
LINK, LOOKUP, LOOKUPP, OPEN, PUTFH, PUTPUBFH, PUTROOTFH, RENAME, RESTOREFH |
| NFS4ERR_ |
CLOSE,
CREATE_ |
| NFS4ERR_ |
CB_ |
| NFS4ERR_ |
LINK, RENAME |
16. NFSv4.1 Procedures
Both procedures, NULL and COMPOUND, MUST be implemented.¶
16.1. Procedure 0: NULL - No Operation
16.1.3. DESCRIPTION
This is the standard NULL procedure with the standard void argument and void response. This procedure has no functionality associated with it. Because of this, it is sometimes used to measure the overhead of processing a service request. Therefore, the server SHOULD ensure that no unnecessary work is done in servicing this procedure.¶
16.2. Procedure 1: COMPOUND - Compound Operations
16.2.1. ARGUMENTS
enum nfs_opnum4 {
OP_ACCESS = 3,
OP_CLOSE = 4,
OP_COMMIT = 5,
OP_CREATE = 6,
OP_DELEGPURGE = 7,
OP_DELEGRETURN = 8,
OP_GETATTR = 9,
OP_GETFH = 10,
OP_LINK = 11,
OP_LOCK = 12,
OP_LOCKT = 13,
OP_LOCKU = 14,
OP_LOOKUP = 15,
OP_LOOKUPP = 16,
OP_NVERIFY = 17,
OP_OPEN = 18,
OP_OPENATTR = 19,
OP_OPEN_CONFIRM = 20, /* Mandatory not-to-implement */
OP_OPEN_DOWNGRADE = 21,
OP_PUTFH = 22,
OP_PUTPUBFH = 23,
OP_PUTROOTFH = 24,
OP_READ = 25,
OP_READDIR = 26,
OP_READLINK = 27,
OP_REMOVE = 28,
OP_RENAME = 29,
OP_RENEW = 30, /* Mandatory not-to-implement */
OP_RESTOREFH = 31,
OP_SAVEFH = 32,
OP_SECINFO = 33,
OP_SETATTR = 34,
OP_SETCLIENTID = 35, /* Mandatory not-to-implement */
OP_SETCLIENTID_CONFIRM = 36, /* Mandatory not-to-implement */
OP_VERIFY = 37,
OP_WRITE = 38,
OP_RELEASE_LOCKOWNER = 39, /* Mandatory not-to-implement */
/* new operations for NFSv4.1 */
OP_BACKCHANNEL_CTL = 40,
OP_BIND_CONN_TO_SESSION = 41,
OP_EXCHANGE_ID = 42,
OP_CREATE_SESSION = 43,
OP_DESTROY_SESSION = 44,
OP_FREE_STATEID = 45,
OP_GET_DIR_DELEGATION = 46,
OP_GETDEVICEINFO = 47,
OP_GETDEVICELIST = 48,
OP_LAYOUTCOMMIT = 49,
OP_LAYOUTGET = 50,
OP_LAYOUTRETURN = 51,
OP_SECINFO_NO_NAME = 52,
OP_SEQUENCE = 53,
OP_SET_SSV = 54,
OP_TEST_STATEID = 55,
OP_WANT_DELEGATION = 56,
OP_DESTROY_CLIENTID = 57,
OP_RECLAIM_COMPLETE = 58,
OP_ILLEGAL = 10044
};
union nfs_argop4 switch (nfs_opnum4 argop) {
case OP_ACCESS: ACCESS4args opaccess;
case OP_CLOSE: CLOSE4args opclose;
case OP_COMMIT: COMMIT4args opcommit;
case OP_CREATE: CREATE4args opcreate;
case OP_DELEGPURGE: DELEGPURGE4args opdelegpurge;
case OP_DELEGRETURN: DELEGRETURN4args opdelegreturn;
case OP_GETATTR: GETATTR4args opgetattr;
case OP_GETFH: void;
case OP_LINK: LINK4args oplink;
case OP_LOCK: LOCK4args oplock;
case OP_LOCKT: LOCKT4args oplockt;
case OP_LOCKU: LOCKU4args oplocku;
case OP_LOOKUP: LOOKUP4args oplookup;
case OP_LOOKUPP: void;
case OP_NVERIFY: NVERIFY4args opnverify;
case OP_OPEN: OPEN4args opopen;
case OP_OPENATTR: OPENATTR4args opopenattr;
/* Not for NFSv4.1 */
case OP_OPEN_CONFIRM: OPEN_CONFIRM4args opopen_confirm;
case OP_OPEN_DOWNGRADE:
OPEN_DOWNGRADE4args opopen_downgrade;
case OP_PUTFH: PUTFH4args opputfh;
case OP_PUTPUBFH: void;
case OP_PUTROOTFH: void;
case OP_READ: READ4args opread;
case OP_READDIR: READDIR4args opreaddir;
case OP_READLINK: void;
case OP_REMOVE: REMOVE4args opremove;
case OP_RENAME: RENAME4args oprename;
/* Not for NFSv4.1 */
case OP_RENEW: RENEW4args oprenew;
case OP_RESTOREFH: void;
case OP_SAVEFH: void;
case OP_SECINFO: SECINFO4args opsecinfo;
case OP_SETATTR: SETATTR4args opsetattr;
/* Not for NFSv4.1 */
case OP_SETCLIENTID: SETCLIENTID4args opsetclientid;
/* Not for NFSv4.1 */
case OP_SETCLIENTID_CONFIRM: SETCLIENTID_CONFIRM4args
opsetclientid_confirm;
case OP_VERIFY: VERIFY4args opverify;
case OP_WRITE: WRITE4args opwrite;
/* Not for NFSv4.1 */
case OP_RELEASE_LOCKOWNER:
RELEASE_LOCKOWNER4args
oprelease_lockowner;
/* Operations new to NFSv4.1 */
case OP_BACKCHANNEL_CTL:
BACKCHANNEL_CTL4args opbackchannel_ctl;
case OP_BIND_CONN_TO_SESSION:
BIND_CONN_TO_SESSION4args
opbind_conn_to_session;
case OP_EXCHANGE_ID: EXCHANGE_ID4args opexchange_id;
case OP_CREATE_SESSION:
CREATE_SESSION4args opcreate_session;
case OP_DESTROY_SESSION:
DESTROY_SESSION4args opdestroy_session;
case OP_FREE_STATEID: FREE_STATEID4args opfree_stateid;
case OP_GET_DIR_DELEGATION:
GET_DIR_DELEGATION4args
opget_dir_delegation;
case OP_GETDEVICEINFO: GETDEVICEINFO4args opgetdeviceinfo;
case OP_GETDEVICELIST: GETDEVICELIST4args opgetdevicelist;
case OP_LAYOUTCOMMIT: LAYOUTCOMMIT4args oplayoutcommit;
case OP_LAYOUTGET: LAYOUTGET4args oplayoutget;
case OP_LAYOUTRETURN: LAYOUTRETURN4args oplayoutreturn;
case OP_SECINFO_NO_NAME:
SECINFO_NO_NAME4args opsecinfo_no_name;
case OP_SEQUENCE: SEQUENCE4args opsequence;
case OP_SET_SSV: SET_SSV4args opset_ssv;
case OP_TEST_STATEID: TEST_STATEID4args optest_stateid;
case OP_WANT_DELEGATION:
WANT_DELEGATION4args opwant_delegation;
case OP_DESTROY_CLIENTID:
DESTROY_CLIENTID4args
opdestroy_clientid;
case OP_RECLAIM_COMPLETE:
RECLAIM_COMPLETE4args
opreclaim_complete;
/* Operations not new to NFSv4.1 */
case OP_ILLEGAL: void;
};
struct COMPOUND4args {
utf8str_cs tag;
uint32_t minorversion;
nfs_argop4 argarray<>;
};
16.2.2. RESULTS
union nfs_resop4 switch (nfs_opnum4 resop) {
case OP_ACCESS: ACCESS4res opaccess;
case OP_CLOSE: CLOSE4res opclose;
case OP_COMMIT: COMMIT4res opcommit;
case OP_CREATE: CREATE4res opcreate;
case OP_DELEGPURGE: DELEGPURGE4res opdelegpurge;
case OP_DELEGRETURN: DELEGRETURN4res opdelegreturn;
case OP_GETATTR: GETATTR4res opgetattr;
case OP_GETFH: GETFH4res opgetfh;
case OP_LINK: LINK4res oplink;
case OP_LOCK: LOCK4res oplock;
case OP_LOCKT: LOCKT4res oplockt;
case OP_LOCKU: LOCKU4res oplocku;
case OP_LOOKUP: LOOKUP4res oplookup;
case OP_LOOKUPP: LOOKUPP4res oplookupp;
case OP_NVERIFY: NVERIFY4res opnverify;
case OP_OPEN: OPEN4res opopen;
case OP_OPENATTR: OPENATTR4res opopenattr;
/* Not for NFSv4.1 */
case OP_OPEN_CONFIRM: OPEN_CONFIRM4res opopen_confirm;
case OP_OPEN_DOWNGRADE:
OPEN_DOWNGRADE4res
opopen_downgrade;
case OP_PUTFH: PUTFH4res opputfh;
case OP_PUTPUBFH: PUTPUBFH4res opputpubfh;
case OP_PUTROOTFH: PUTROOTFH4res opputrootfh;
case OP_READ: READ4res opread;
case OP_READDIR: READDIR4res opreaddir;
case OP_READLINK: READLINK4res opreadlink;
case OP_REMOVE: REMOVE4res opremove;
case OP_RENAME: RENAME4res oprename;
/* Not for NFSv4.1 */
case OP_RENEW: RENEW4res oprenew;
case OP_RESTOREFH: RESTOREFH4res oprestorefh;
case OP_SAVEFH: SAVEFH4res opsavefh;
case OP_SECINFO: SECINFO4res opsecinfo;
case OP_SETATTR: SETATTR4res opsetattr;
/* Not for NFSv4.1 */
case OP_SETCLIENTID: SETCLIENTID4res opsetclientid;
/* Not for NFSv4.1 */
case OP_SETCLIENTID_CONFIRM:
SETCLIENTID_CONFIRM4res
opsetclientid_confirm;
case OP_VERIFY: VERIFY4res opverify;
case OP_WRITE: WRITE4res opwrite;
/* Not for NFSv4.1 */
case OP_RELEASE_LOCKOWNER:
RELEASE_LOCKOWNER4res
oprelease_lockowner;
/* Operations new to NFSv4.1 */
case OP_BACKCHANNEL_CTL:
BACKCHANNEL_CTL4res
opbackchannel_ctl;
case OP_BIND_CONN_TO_SESSION:
BIND_CONN_TO_SESSION4res
opbind_conn_to_session;
case OP_EXCHANGE_ID: EXCHANGE_ID4res opexchange_id;
case OP_CREATE_SESSION:
CREATE_SESSION4res
opcreate_session;
case OP_DESTROY_SESSION:
DESTROY_SESSION4res
opdestroy_session;
case OP_FREE_STATEID: FREE_STATEID4res
opfree_stateid;
case OP_GET_DIR_DELEGATION:
GET_DIR_DELEGATION4res
opget_dir_delegation;
case OP_GETDEVICEINFO: GETDEVICEINFO4res
opgetdeviceinfo;
case OP_GETDEVICELIST: GETDEVICELIST4res
opgetdevicelist;
case OP_LAYOUTCOMMIT: LAYOUTCOMMIT4res oplayoutcommit;
case OP_LAYOUTGET: LAYOUTGET4res oplayoutget;
case OP_LAYOUTRETURN: LAYOUTRETURN4res oplayoutreturn;
case OP_SECINFO_NO_NAME:
SECINFO_NO_NAME4res
opsecinfo_no_name;
case OP_SEQUENCE: SEQUENCE4res opsequence;
case OP_SET_SSV: SET_SSV4res opset_ssv;
case OP_TEST_STATEID: TEST_STATEID4res optest_stateid;
case OP_WANT_DELEGATION:
WANT_DELEGATION4res
opwant_delegation;
case OP_DESTROY_CLIENTID:
DESTROY_CLIENTID4res
opdestroy_clientid;
case OP_RECLAIM_COMPLETE:
RECLAIM_COMPLETE4res
opreclaim_complete;
/* Operations not new to NFSv4.1 */
case OP_ILLEGAL: ILLEGAL4res opillegal;
};
struct COMPOUND4res {
nfsstat4 status;
utf8str_cs tag;
nfs_resop4 resarray<>;
};
16.2.3. DESCRIPTION
The COMPOUND procedure is used to combine one or more NFSv4
operations into a
single RPC request. The server interprets each of the operations in
turn. If an operation is executed by the server and the status of that
operation is NFS4_
In the processing of the COMPOUND procedure, the server may find that it does not have the available resources to execute any or all of the operations within the COMPOUND sequence. See Section 2.10.6.4 for a more detailed discussion.¶
The server will generally choose between two methods of decoding the
client's request. The first would be the traditional one-pass XDR
decode. If there is an XDR decoding error in this case, the RPC XDR
decode error would be returned. The second method would be to make an
initial pass to decode the basic COMPOUND request and then to XDR
decode the individual operations; the most interesting is the decode
of attributes. In this case, the server may encounter an XDR decode
error during the second pass. If it does, the server would return
the error NFS4ERR_
The COMPOUND arguments contain a "minorversion" field. For NFSv4.1,
the value for this field is 1. If the server receives
a COMPOUND procedure with a minorversion field value that it does not
support, the server MUST return an error of
NFS4ERR_
Contained within the COMPOUND results is a "status" field. If the results array length is non-zero, this status must be equivalent to the status of the last operation that was executed within the COMPOUND procedure. Therefore, if an operation incurred an error then the "status" value will be the same error value as is being returned for the operation that failed.¶
Note that operations zero and one are not defined for the
COMPOUND procedure. Operation 2 is not defined and is reserved for
future definition and use with minor versioning. If the server
receives an operation array that contains operation 2 and the
minorversion field has a value of zero, an error of
NFS4ERR_
It is possible that the server receives a request that contains an
operation that is less than the first legal operation
The definition of the "tag" in the request is left to the implementor.
It may be used to summarize the content of the Compound request for
the benefit of packet-sniffers and engineers debugging
implementations
16.2.3.1. Current Filehandle and Stateid
The COMPOUND procedure offers a simple environment for the execution of the operations specified by the client. The first two relate to the filehandle while the second two relate to the current stateid.¶
16.2.3.1.1. Current Filehandle
The current and saved filehandles are used throughout
the protocol. Most operations implicitly use
the current filehandle as an argument, and many set
the current filehandle as part of the results.
The combination of client
PUTFH fh1 {fh1}
LOOKUP "compA" {fh2}
GETATTR {fh2}
LOOKUP "compB" {fh3}
GETATTR {fh3}
LOOKUP "compC" {fh4}
GETATTR {fh4}
GETFHIn this example, the PUTFH (Section 18.19) operation explicitly sets the current filehandle value while the result of each LOOKUP operation sets the current filehandle value to the resultant file system object. Also, the client is able to insert GETATTR operations using the current filehandle as an argument.¶
The PUTROOTFH (Section 18.21) and PUTPUBFH (Section 18.20) operations also set the current filehandle. The above example would replace "PUTFH fh1" with PUTROOTFH or PUTPUBFH with no filehandle argument in order to achieve the same effect (on the assumption that "compA" is directly below the root of the namespace).¶
Along with the current filehandle, there is a saved filehandle. While the current filehandle is set as the result of operations like LOOKUP, the saved filehandle must be set directly with the use of the SAVEFH operation. The SAVEFH operation copies the current filehandle value to the saved value. The saved filehandle value is used in combination with the current filehandle value for the LINK and RENAME operations. The RESTOREFH operation will copy the saved filehandle value to the current filehandle value; as a result, the saved filehandle value may be used a sort of "scratch" area for the client's series of operations.¶
16.2.3.1.2. Current Stateid
With NFSv4.1, additions of a current stateid and a saved stateid have been made to the COMPOUND processing environment; this allows for the passing of stateids between operations. There are no changes to the syntax of the protocol, only changes to the semantics of a few operations.¶
A "current stateid" is the stateid that is associated with the current filehandle. The current stateid may only be changed by an operation that modifies the current filehandle or returns a stateid. If an operation returns a stateid, it MUST set the current stateid to the returned value. If an operation sets the current filehandle but does not return a stateid, the current stateid MUST be set to the all-zeros special stateid, i.e., (seqid, other) = (0, 0). If an operation uses a stateid as an argument but does not return a stateid, the current stateid MUST NOT be changed. For example, PUTFH, PUTROOTFH, and PUTPUBFH will change the current server state from {ocfh, (osid)} to {cfh, (0, 0)}, while LOCK will change the current state from {cfh, (osid} to {cfh, (nsid)}. Operations like LOOKUP that transform a current filehandle and component name into a new current filehandle will also change the current state to {0, 0}. The SAVEFH and RESTOREFH operations will save and restore both the current filehandle and the current stateid as a set.¶
The following example is the common case of a simple READ operation with a normal stateid showing that the PUTFH initializes the current stateid to (0, 0). The subsequent READ with stateid (sid1) leaves the current stateid unchanged.¶
PUTFH fh1 - -> {fh1, (0, 0)}
READ (sid1), 0, 1024 {fh1, (0, 0)} -> {fh1, (0, 0)}This next example performs an OPEN with the root filehandle and, as a result, generates stateid (sid1). The next operation specifies the READ with the argument stateid set such that (seqid, other) are equal to (1, 0), but the current stateid set by the previous operation is actually used when the operation is evaluated. This allows correct interaction with any existing, potentially conflicting, locks.¶
PUTROOTFH - -> {fh1, (0, 0)}
OPEN "compA" {fh1, (0, 0)} -> {fh2, (sid1)}
READ (1, 0), 0, 1024 {fh2, (sid1)} -> {fh2, (sid1)}
CLOSE (1, 0) {fh2, (sid1)} -> {fh2, (sid2)}This next example is similar to the second in how it passes the stateid sid2 generated by the LOCK operation to the next READ operation. This allows the client to explicitly surround a single I/O operation with a lock and its appropriate stateid to guarantee correctness with other client locks. The example also shows how SAVEFH and RESTOREFH can save and later reuse a filehandle and stateid, passing them as the current filehandle and stateid to a READ operation.¶
PUTFH fh1 - -> {fh1, (0, 0)}
LOCK 0, 1024, (sid1) {fh1, (sid1)} -> {fh1, (sid2)}
READ (1, 0), 0, 1024 {fh1, (sid2)} -> {fh1, (sid2)}
LOCKU 0, 1024, (1, 0) {fh1, (sid2)} -> {fh1, (sid3)}
SAVEFH {fh1, (sid3)} -> {fh1, (sid3)}
PUTFH fh2 {fh1, (sid3)} -> {fh2, (0, 0)}
WRITE (1, 0), 0, 1024 {fh2, (0, 0)} -> {fh2, (0, 0)}
RESTOREFH {fh2, (0, 0)} -> {fh1, (sid3)}
READ (1, 0), 1024, 1024 {fh1, (sid3)} -> {fh1, (sid3)}
The final example shows a disallowed use of
the current stateid. The client is attempting
to implicitly pass an anonymous special stateid, (0,0), to
the READ operation. The server MUST return NFS4ERR_
PUTFH fh1 - -> {fh1, (0, 0)}
READ (1, 0), 0, 1024 {fh1, (0, 0)} -> NFS4ERR_BAD_STATEID16.2.4. ERRORS
COMPOUND will of course return every error that each operation on the fore channel can return (see Table 12). However, if COMPOUND returns zero operations, obviously the error returned by COMPOUND has nothing to do with an error returned by an operation. The list of errors COMPOUND will return if it processes zero operations include:¶
| Error | Notes |
|---|---|
| NFS4ERR_ |
The tag argument has a character the replier does not support. |
| NFS4ERR_ |
|
| NFS4ERR_ |
|
| NFS4ERR_ |
The tag argument is not in UTF-8 encoding. |
| NFS4ERR_ |
|
| NFS4ERR_ |
|
| NFS4ERR_ |
|
| NFS4ERR_ |
|
| NFS4ERR_ |
|
| NFS4ERR_ |
17. Operations: REQUIRED, RECOMMENDED, or OPTIONAL
The following tables summarize the operations of the NFSv4.1 protocol and the corresponding designation of REQUIRED, RECOMMENDED, and OPTIONAL to implement or MUST NOT implement. The designation of MUST NOT implement is reserved for those operations that were defined in NFSv4.0 and MUST NOT be implemented in NFSv4.1.¶
For the most part, the REQUIRED, RECOMMENDED, or OPTIONAL designation for operations sent by the client is for the server implementation. The client is generally required to implement the operations needed for the operating environment for which it serves. For example, a read-only NFSv4.1 client would have no need to implement the WRITE operation and is not required to do so.¶
The REQUIRED or OPTIONAL designation for
callback operations sent by the server is for both the client
and server. Generally, the client has the option of
creating the backchannel and sending the operations on the
fore channel that will be a catalyst for the server sending
callback operations. A partial
exception is CB_
Since this is a summary of the operations and their designation, there are subtleties that are not presented here. Therefore, if there is a question of the requirements of implementation, the operation descriptions themselves must be consulted along with other relevant explanatory text within this specification.¶
The abbreviations used in the second and third columns of the table are defined as follows.¶
- REQ
- REQUIRED to implement¶
- REC
- RECOMMEND to implement¶
- OPT
- OPTIONAL to implement¶
- MNI
- MUST NOT implement¶
For the NFSv4.1 features that are OPTIONAL, the operations that
support those features are OPTIONAL, and the server would return
NFS4ERR_
The OPTIONAL features identified and their abbreviations are as follows:¶
| Operation | REQ, REC, OPT, or MNI | Feature (REQ, REC, or OPT) | Definition |
|---|---|---|---|
| ACCESS | REQ | Section 18.1 | |
| BACKCHANNEL_ |
REQ | Section 18.33 | |
| BIND_ |
REQ | Section 18.34 | |
| CLOSE | REQ | Section 18.2 | |
| COMMIT | REQ | Section 18.3 | |
| CREATE | REQ | Section 18.4 | |
| CREATE_ |
REQ | Section 18.36 | |
| DELEGPURGE | OPT | FDELG (REQ) | Section 18.5 |
| DELEGRETURN | OPT | FDELG, DDELG, pNFS (REQ) | Section 18.6 |
| DESTROY_ |
REQ | Section 18.50 | |
| DESTROY_ |
REQ | Section 18.37 | |
| EXCHANGE_ |
REQ | Section 18.35 | |
| FREE_ |
REQ | Section 18.38 | |
| GETATTR | REQ | Section 18.7 | |
| GETDEVICEINFO | OPT | pNFS (REQ) | Section 18.40 |
| GETDEVICELIST | OPT | pNFS (OPT) | Section 18.41 |
| GETFH | REQ | Section 18.8 | |
| GET_ |
OPT | DDELG (REQ) | Section 18.39 |
| LAYOUTCOMMIT | OPT | pNFS (REQ) | Section 18.42 |
| LAYOUTGET | OPT | pNFS (REQ) | Section 18.43 |
| LAYOUTRETURN | OPT | pNFS (REQ) | Section 18.44 |
| LINK | OPT | Section 18.9 | |
| LOCK | REQ | Section 18.10 | |
| LOCKT | REQ | Section 18.11 | |
| LOCKU | REQ | Section 18.12 | |
| LOOKUP | REQ | Section 18.13 | |
| LOOKUPP | REQ | Section 18.14 | |
| NVERIFY | REQ | Section 18.15 | |
| OPEN | REQ | Section 18.16 | |
| OPENATTR | OPT | Section 18.17 | |
| OPEN_ |
MNI | N/A | |
| OPEN_ |
REQ | Section 18.18 | |
| PUTFH | REQ | Section 18.19 | |
| PUTPUBFH | REQ | Section 18.20 | |
| PUTROOTFH | REQ | Section 18.21 | |
| READ | REQ | Section 18.22 | |
| READDIR | REQ | Section 18.23 | |
| READLINK | OPT | Section 18.24 | |
| RECLAIM_ |
REQ | Section 18.51 | |
| RELEASE_ |
MNI | N/A | |
| REMOVE | REQ | Section 18.25 | |
| RENAME | REQ | Section 18.26 | |
| RENEW | MNI | N/A | |
| RESTOREFH | REQ | Section 18.27 | |
| SAVEFH | REQ | Section 18.28 | |
| SECINFO | REQ | Section 18.29 | |
| SECINFO_ |
REC | pNFS file layout (REQ) | Section 18.45, Section 13.12 |
| SEQUENCE | REQ | Section 18.46 | |
| SETATTR | REQ | Section 18.30 | |
| SETCLIENTID | MNI | N/A | |
| SETCLIENTID_ |
MNI | N/A | |
| SET_ |
REQ | Section 18.47 | |
| TEST_ |
REQ | Section 18.48 | |
| VERIFY | REQ | Section 18.31 | |
| WANT_ |
OPT | FDELG (OPT) | Section 18.49 |
| WRITE | REQ | Section 18.32 |
| Operation | REQ, REC, OPT, or MNI | Feature (REQ, REC, or OPT) | Definition |
|---|---|---|---|
| CB_ |
OPT | FDELG (REQ) | Section 20.1 |
| CB_ |
OPT | pNFS (REQ) | Section 20.3 |
| CB_ |
OPT | DDELG (REQ) | Section 20.4 |
| CB_ |
OPT | pNFS (OPT) | Section 20.12 |
| CB_ |
OPT | Section 20.11 | |
| CB_ |
OPT | FDELG (OPT) | Section 20.5 |
| CB_ |
OPT | FDELG, DDELG, pNFS (REQ) | Section 20.2 |
| CB_ |
OPT | FDELG, DDELG, pNFS (REQ) | Section 20.6 |
| CB_ |
REQ | Section 20.8 | |
| CB_ |
OPT | DDELG, pNFS (REQ) | Section 20.7 |
| CB_ |
OPT | FDELG, DDELG, pNFS (REQ) | Section 20.9 |
| CB_ |
OPT | FDELG, DDELG, pNFS (REQ) | Section 20.10 |
18. NFSv4.1 Operations
18.1. Operation 3: ACCESS - Check Access Rights
18.1.1. ARGUMENTS
const ACCESS4_READ = 0x00000001;
const ACCESS4_LOOKUP = 0x00000002;
const ACCESS4_MODIFY = 0x00000004;
const ACCESS4_EXTEND = 0x00000008;
const ACCESS4_DELETE = 0x00000010;
const ACCESS4_EXECUTE = 0x00000020;
struct ACCESS4args {
/* CURRENT_FH: object */
uint32_t access;
};18.1.2. RESULTS
struct ACCESS4resok {
uint32_t supported;
uint32_t access;
};
union ACCESS4res switch (nfsstat4 status) {
case NFS4_OK:
ACCESS4resok resok4;
default:
void;
};18.1.3. DESCRIPTION
ACCESS determines the access rights that a user, as identified by the
credentials in the RPC request, has with respect to the file system
object specified by the current filehandle. The client encodes the
set of access rights that are to be checked in the bit mask "access".
The server checks the permissions encoded in the bit mask. If a
status of NFS4_
Note that the reply's supported and access fields MUST NOT
contain more values than originally set in the request's
access field. For example, if the client sends an ACCESS
operation with just the ACCESS4_
The reply's access field MUST NOT contain more values than the supported field.¶
The results of this operation are necessarily advisory in nature. A
return status of NFS4_
The following access permissions may be requested:¶
- ACCESS4_
READ - Read data from file or read a directory.¶
- ACCESS4_
LOOKUP - Look up a name in a directory (no meaning for non-directory objects).¶
- ACCESS4_
MODIFY - Rewrite existing file data or modify existing directory entries.¶
- ACCESS4_
EXTEND - Write new data or add directory entries.¶
- ACCESS4_
DELETE - Delete an existing directory entry.¶
- ACCESS4_
EXECUTE - Execute a regular file (no meaning for a directory).¶
On success, the current filehandle retains its value.¶
ACCESS4_
- Whether or not a regular file is executable ought to be the responsibility of the NFS client and not the server. And yet the ACCESS operation is specified to seemingly require a server to own that responsibility.¶
- When a client executes a regular file, it has to read the file from the server. Strictly speaking, the server should not allow the client to read a file being executed unless the user has read permissions on the file. Requiring explicit read permissions on executable files in order to access them over NFS is not going to be acceptable to some users and storage administrators. Historically, NFS servers have allowed a user to READ a file if the user has execute access to the file.¶
As a practical example, the UNIX specification [60] states that an implementation claiming conformance to UNIX may indicate in the access() programming interface's result that a privileged user has execute rights, even if no execute permission bits are set on the regular file's attributes. It is possible to claim conformance to the UNIX specification and instead not indicate execute rights in that situation, which is true for some operating environments. Suppose the operating environments of the client and server are implementing the access() semantics for privileged users differently, and the ACCESS operation implementations of the client and server follow their respective access() semantics. This can cause undesired behavior:¶
-
Suppose the client's access() interface returns X_
OK if the user is privileged and no execute permission bits are set on the regular file's attribute, and the server's access() interface does not return X_ OK in that situation. Then the client will be unable to execute files stored on the NFS server that could be executed if stored on a non-NFS file system.¶ -
Suppose the client's access() interface does not return X_
OK if the user is privileged, and no execute permission bits are set on the regular file's attribute, and the server's access() interface does return X_ OK in that situation. Then:¶ - The client will be able to execute files stored on the NFS server that could be executed if stored on a non-NFS file system, unless the client's execution subsystem also checks for execute permission bits.¶
- Even if the execution subsystem is checking for execute permission bits, there are more potential issues. For example, suppose the client is invoking access() to build a "path search table" of all executable files in the user's "search path", where the path is a list of directories each containing executable files. Suppose there are two files each in separate directories of the search path, such that files have the same component name. In the first directory the file has no execute permission bits set, and in the second directory the file has execute bits set. The path search table will indicate that the first directory has the executable file, but the execute subsystem will fail to execute it. The command shell might fail to try the second file in the second directory. And even if it did, this is a potential performance issue. Clearly, the desired outcome for the client is for the path search table to not contain the first file.¶
To deal with the problems described above, the "smart client, stupid server" principle is used. The client owns overall responsibility for determining execute access and relies on the server to parse the execution permissions within the file's mode, acl, and dacl attributes. The rules for the client and server follow:¶
-
If the client is sending ACCESS in order to determine
if the user can read the file, the client SHOULD
set ACCESS4_
READ in the request's access field.¶ -
If the client's operating environment only grants
execution to the user if the user has execute access
according to the execute permissions in the mode,
acl, and dacl attributes, then if the client wants
to determine execute access, the client SHOULD send
an ACCESS request with ACCESS4_
EXECUTE bit set in the request's access field.¶ -
If the client's operating environment grants execution
to the user even if the user does not have execute
access according to the execute permissions in the
mode, acl, and dacl attributes, then if the client
wants to determine execute access, it SHOULD send
an ACCESS request with both the ACCESS4_
EXECUTE and ACCESS4_ READ bits set in the request's access field. This way, if any read or execute permission grants the user read or execute access (or if the server interprets the user as privileged), as indicated by the presence of ACCESS4_ EXECUTE and/or ACCESS4_ READ in the reply's access field, the client will be able to grant the user execute access to the file.¶ -
If the server supports execute permission bits, or some other
method for denoting executability (e.g., the suffix of the name
of the file might indicate execute), it MUST check
only execute permissions, not read permissions, when determining
whether or not the reply will have ACCESS4_
EXECUTE set in the access field. The server MUST NOT also examine read permission bits when determining whether or not the reply will have ACCESS4_ EXECUTE set in the access field. Even if the server's operating environment would grant execute access to the user (e.g., the user is privileged), the server MUST NOT reply with ACCESS4_ EXECUTE set in reply's access field unless there is at least one execute permission bit set in the mode, acl, or dacl attributes. In the case of acl and dacl, the "one execute permission bit" MUST be an ACE4_ EXECUTE bit set in an ALLOW ACE.¶ -
If the server does not support execute permission
bits or some other method for denoting executability, it MUST NOT set ACCESS4_
EXECUTE in the reply's supported and access fields. If the client set ACCESS4_ EXECUTE in the ACCESS request's access field, and ACCESS4_ EXECUTE is not set in the reply's supported field, then the client will have to send an ACCESS request with the ACCESS4_ READ bit set in the request's access field.¶ -
If the server supports read permission bits, it MUST
only check for read permissions in the mode, acl,
and dacl attributes when it receives an ACCESS request
with ACCESS4_
READ set in the access field. The server MUST NOT also examine execute permission bits when determining whether the reply will have ACCESS4_ READ set in the access field or not.¶
Note that if the ACCESS reply has ACCESS4_
18.1.4. IMPLEMENTATION
In general, it is not sufficient for the client to attempt to deduce access permissions by inspecting the uid, gid, and mode fields in the file attributes or by attempting to interpret the contents of the ACL attribute. This is because the server may perform uid or gid mapping or enforce additional access-control restrictions. It is also possible that the server may not be in the same ID space as the client. In these cases (and perhaps others), the client cannot reliably perform an access check with only current file attributes.¶
In the NFSv2 protocol, the only reliable way to determine whether an operation was allowed was to try it and see if it succeeded or failed. Using the ACCESS operation in the NFSv4.1 protocol, the client can ask the server to indicate whether or not one or more classes of operations are permitted. The ACCESS operation is provided to allow clients to check before doing a series of operations that will result in an access failure. The OPEN operation provides a point where the server can verify access to the file object and a method to return that information to the client. The ACCESS operation is still useful for directory operations or for use in the case that the UNIX interface access() is used on the client.¶
The information returned by the server in response to an ACCESS call is not permanent. It was correct at the exact time that the server performed the checks, but not necessarily afterwards. The server can revoke access permission at any time.¶
The client should use the effective credentials of the user to build the authentication information in the ACCESS request used to determine access rights. It is the effective user and group credentials that are used in subsequent READ and WRITE operations.¶
Many implementations do not directly support the ACCESS4_
18.2. Operation 4: CLOSE - Close File
18.2.1. ARGUMENTS
struct CLOSE4args {
/* CURRENT_FH: object */
seqid4 seqid;
stateid4 open_stateid;
};18.2.2. RESULTS
union CLOSE4res switch (nfsstat4 status) {
case NFS4_OK:
stateid4 open_stateid;
default:
void;
};18.2.3. DESCRIPTION
The CLOSE operation releases share reservations for the regular or named attribute file as specified by the current filehandle. The share reservations and other state information released at the server as a result of this CLOSE are only those associated with the supplied stateid. State associated with other OPENs is not affected.¶
If byte-range locks are held, the client SHOULD release all locks before sending a CLOSE. The server MAY free all outstanding locks on CLOSE, but some servers may not support the CLOSE of a file that still has byte-range locks held. The server MUST return failure if any locks would exist after the CLOSE.¶
The argument seqid MAY have any value, and the server MUST ignore seqid.¶
On success, the current filehandle retains its value.¶
The server MAY require that the combination of principal, security flavor, and, if applicable, GSS mechanism that sent the OPEN request also be the one to CLOSE the file. This might not be possible if credentials for the principal are no longer available. The server MAY allow the machine credential or SSV credential (see Section 18.35) to send CLOSE.¶
18.2.4. IMPLEMENTATION
Even though CLOSE returns a stateid, this stateid is not useful to the
client and should be treated as deprecated. CLOSE "shuts down" the
state associated with all OPENs for the file by a single open-owner.
As noted above, CLOSE will either release all file-locking state or
return an error. Therefore, the stateid returned by CLOSE is not
useful for operations that follow. To help find any uses of
this stateid by clients, the server SHOULD return the invalid
special stateid (the "other" value is zero and the "seqid" field
is NFS4_
A CLOSE operation may make delegations grantable where they were not previously. Servers may choose to respond immediately if there are pending delegation want requests or may respond to the situation at a later time.¶
18.3. Operation 5: COMMIT - Commit Cached Data
18.3.2. RESULTS
struct COMMIT4resok {
verifier4 writeverf;
};
union COMMIT4res switch (nfsstat4 status) {
case NFS4_OK:
COMMIT4resok resok4;
default:
void;
};18.3.3. DESCRIPTION
The COMMIT operation forces or flushes uncommitted, modified data to stable storage for the file specified by the current filehandle. The flushed data is that which was previously written with one or more WRITE operations that had the "committed" field of their results field set to UNSTABLE4.¶
The offset specifies the position within the file where the flush is to begin. An offset value of zero means to flush data starting at the beginning of the file. The count specifies the number of bytes of data to flush. If the count is zero, a flush from the offset to the end of the file is done.¶
The server returns a write verifier upon successful completion of the COMMIT. The write verifier is used by the client to determine if the server has restarted between the initial WRITE operations and the COMMIT. The client does this by comparing the write verifier returned from the initial WRITE operations and the verifier returned by the COMMIT operation. The server must vary the value of the write verifier at each server event or instantiation that may lead to a loss of uncommitted data. Most commonly this occurs when the server is restarted; however, other events at the server may result in uncommitted data loss as well.¶
On success, the current filehandle retains its value.¶
18.3.4. IMPLEMENTATION
The COMMIT operation is similar in operation and semantics to the
POSIX fsync() [22] system interface that synchronizes a file's state with the
disk (file data and metadata is flushed to disk or stable
storage). COMMIT performs the same operation for a client, flushing
any unsynchronized data and metadata on the server to the server's
disk or stable storage for the specified file. Like fsync(), it may
be that there is some modified data or no modified data to
synchronize. The data may have been synchronized by the server's
normal periodic buffer synchronization activity. COMMIT should return
NFS4_
COMMIT differs from fsync() in that it is possible for the client to
flush a range of the file (most likely triggered by a
buffer
The server implementation of COMMIT is reasonably simple. If the server receives a full file COMMIT request, that is, starting at offset zero and count zero, it should do the equivalent of applying fsync() to the entire file. Otherwise, it should arrange to have the modified data in the range specified by offset and count to be flushed to stable storage. In both cases, any metadata associated with the file must be flushed to stable storage before returning. It is not an error for there to be nothing to flush on the server. This means that the data and metadata that needed to be flushed have already been flushed or lost during the last server failure.¶
The client implementation of COMMIT is a little more complex. There are two reasons for wanting to commit a client buffer to stable storage. The first is that the client wants to reuse a buffer. In this case, the offset and count of the buffer are sent to the server in the COMMIT request. The server then flushes any modified data based on the offset and count, and flushes any modified metadata associated with the file. It then returns the status of the flush and the write verifier. The second reason for the client to generate a COMMIT is for a full file flush, such as may be done at close. In this case, the client would gather all of the buffers for this file that contain uncommitted data, do the COMMIT operation with an offset of zero and count of zero, and then free all of those buffers. Any other dirty buffers would be sent to the server in the normal fashion.¶
After a buffer is written (via the WRITE operation)
by the client with the "committed" field in the result of WRITE
set to UNSTABLE4, the buffer must be considered as modified by
the client
until the buffer has either been flushed via a COMMIT operation or
written via a WRITE operation with the "committed" field in the
result set to FILE_
When a response is returned from either a WRITE or a COMMIT operation
and it contains a write verifier that differs from that previously
returned by the server, the client will need to retransmit all of the
buffers containing uncommitted data to the server. How this is
to be done is up to the implementor. If there is only one buffer of
interest, then it should be sent in a WRITE request
with the FILE_
The above description applies to page
18.4. Operation 6: CREATE - Create a Non-Regular File Object
18.4.1. ARGUMENTS
union createtype4 switch (nfs_ftype4 type) {
case NF4LNK:
linktext4 linkdata;
case NF4BLK:
case NF4CHR:
specdata4 devdata;
case NF4SOCK:
case NF4FIFO:
case NF4DIR:
void;
default:
void; /* server should return NFS4ERR_BADTYPE */
};
struct CREATE4args {
/* CURRENT_FH: directory for creation */
createtype4 objtype;
component4 objname;
fattr4 createattrs;
};18.4.2. RESULTS
struct CREATE4resok {
change_info4 cinfo;
bitmap4 attrset; /* attributes set */
};
union CREATE4res switch (nfsstat4 status) {
case NFS4_OK:
/* new CURRENTFH: created object */
CREATE4resok resok4;
default:
void;
};18.4.3. DESCRIPTION
The CREATE operation creates a file object other than an ordinary file in a directory with a given name. The OPEN operation MUST be used to create a regular file or a named attribute.¶
The current filehandle must be a directory: an object of type NF4DIR. If the current
filehandle is an attribute directory (type NF4ATTRDIR), the
error NFS4ERR_
The objname specifies the name for the new object.
The objtype determines the type of object to be
created: directory, symlink, etc. If the object
type specified is that of an ordinary file, a
named attribute, or a named attribute directory,
the error NFS4ERR_
If an object of the same name already exists in the directory, the
server will return the error NFS4ERR_
For the directory where the new file object was created, the server
returns change_
If the objname has a length of zero, or if objname does not obey
the UTF-8 definition, the error NFS4ERR_
The current filehandle is replaced by that of the new object.¶
The createattrs specifies the initial set of attributes for the object. The set of attributes may include any writable attribute valid for the object type. When the operation is successful, the server will return to the client an attribute mask signifying which attributes were successfully set for the object.¶
If createattrs includes neither the owner attribute nor an ACL with an
ACE for the owner, and if the server's file system both supports and
requires an owner attribute (or an owner ACE), then the server MUST
derive the owner (or the owner ACE). This would typically be from the
principal indicated in the RPC credentials of the call, but the
server's operating environment or file system semantics may dictate
other methods of derivation. Similarly, if createattrs includes
neither the group attribute nor a group ACE, and if the server's
file system both supports and requires the notion of a group attribute
(or group ACE), the server MUST derive the group attribute (or the
corresponding owner ACE) for the file. This could be from the RPC
call's credentials, such as the group principal if the credentials
include it (such as with AUTH_
Conversely, it is possible that the client will specify in createattrs an
owner attribute, group attribute, or ACL that the principal indicated
the RPC call's credentials does not have permissions to create files
for. The error to be returned in this instance is NFS4ERR_
If the current filehandle designates a directory for which another
client holds a directory delegation, then, unless the delegation
is such that the situation can be resolved by sending a notification,
the delegation MUST be recalled, and the CREATE operation MUST NOT proceed
until the delegation is returned or revoked. Except where this
happens very quickly, one or more NFS4ERR_
When the current filehandle designates a directory for which
one or more directory delegations exist, then, when those delegations
request such notifications, NOTIFY4_
If the capability FSCHARSET_
18.4.4. IMPLEMENTATION
If the client desires to set attribute values after the create, a SETATTR operation can be added to the COMPOUND request so that the appropriate attributes will be set.¶
18.5. Operation 7: DELEGPURGE - Purge Delegations Awaiting Recovery
18.5.3. DESCRIPTION
This operation purges all of the delegations awaiting recovery for a given client. This is useful for clients that do not commit delegation information to stable storage to indicate that conflicting requests need not be delayed by the server awaiting recovery of delegation information.¶
The client is NOT specified by the clientid field of the request. The client SHOULD set the client field to zero, and the server MUST ignore the clientid field. Instead, the server MUST derive the client ID from the value of the session ID in the arguments of the SEQUENCE operation that precedes DELEGPURGE in the COMPOUND request.¶
The DELEGPURGE operation should be used by clients that record delegation information on stable storage on the client. In this case, after the client recovers all delegations it knows of, it should immediately send a DELEGPURGE operation. Doing so will notify the server that no additional delegations for the client will be recovered allowing it to free resources, and avoid delaying other clients which make requests that conflict with the unrecovered delegations. The set of delegations known to the server and the client might be different. The reason for this is that after sending a request that resulted in a delegation, the client might experience a failure before it both received the delegation and committed the delegation to the client's stable storage.¶
The server MAY support DELEGPURGE, but if it does not, it MUST NOT
support CLAIM_
18.6. Operation 8: DELEGRETURN - Return Delegation
18.6.1. ARGUMENTS
struct DELEGRETURN4args {
/* CURRENT_FH: delegated object */
stateid4 deleg_stateid;
};18.6.3. DESCRIPTION
The DELEGRETURN operation returns the delegation represented by the current filehandle and stateid.¶
Delegations may be returned voluntarily (i.e., before the server has recalled them) or when recalled. In either case, the client must properly propagate state changed under the context of the delegation to the server before returning the delegation.¶
The server MAY require that the principal, security flavor, and if applicable, the GSS mechanism, combination that acquired the delegation also be the one to send DELEGRETURN on the file. This might not be possible if credentials for the principal are no longer available. The server MAY allow the machine credential or SSV credential (see Section 18.35) to send DELEGRETURN.¶
18.7. Operation 9: GETATTR - Get Attributes
18.7.2. RESULTS
struct GETATTR4resok {
fattr4 obj_attributes;
};
union GETATTR4res switch (nfsstat4 status) {
case NFS4_OK:
GETATTR4resok resok4;
default:
void;
};18.7.3. DESCRIPTION
The GETATTR operation will obtain attributes for the file system object specified by the current filehandle. The client sets a bit in the bitmap argument for each attribute value that it would like the server to return. The server returns an attribute bitmap that indicates the attribute values that it was able to return, which will include all attributes requested by the client that are attributes supported by the server for the target file system. This bitmap is followed by the attribute values ordered lowest attribute number first.¶
The server MUST return a value for each attribute that the client requests if the attribute is supported by the server for the target file system. If the server does not support a particular attribute on the target file system, then it MUST NOT return the attribute value and MUST NOT set the attribute bit in the result bitmap. The server MUST return an error if it supports an attribute on the target but cannot obtain its value. In that case, no attribute values will be returned.¶
File systems that are absent should be treated as having support for a very small set of attributes as described in Section 11.4.1, even if previously, when the file system was present, more attributes were supported.¶
All servers MUST support the REQUIRED attributes as specified in Section 5.6, for all file systems, with the exception of absent file systems.¶
On success, the current filehandle retains its value.¶
18.7.4. IMPLEMENTATION
Suppose there is an OPEN_
-
The requested attribute values are returned in the response to
CB_
GETATTR .¶ -
The OPEN_
DELEGATE_ WRITE delegation is returned.¶ -
The OPEN_
DELEGATE_ WRITE delegation is revoked.¶
Unless one of the above happens very quickly,
one or more NFS4ERR_
18.8. Operation 10: GETFH - Get Current Filehandle
18.8.2. RESULTS
struct GETFH4resok {
nfs_fh4 object;
};
union GETFH4res switch (nfsstat4 status) {
case NFS4_OK:
GETFH4resok resok4;
default:
void;
};18.8.3. DESCRIPTION
This operation returns the current filehandle value.¶
On success, the current filehandle retains its value.¶
As described in Section 2.10.6.4, GETFH is REQUIRED or RECOMMENDED to immediately follow certain operations, and servers are free to reject such operations if the client fails to insert GETFH in the request as REQUIRED or RECOMMENDED. Section 18.16.4.1 provides additional justification for why GETFH MUST follow OPEN.¶
18.8.4. IMPLEMENTATION
Operations that change the current filehandle like LOOKUP or CREATE do not automatically return the new filehandle as a result. For instance, if a client needs to look up a directory entry and obtain its filehandle, then the following request is needed.¶
18.9. Operation 11: LINK - Create Link to a File
18.9.1. ARGUMENTS
struct LINK4args {
/* SAVED_FH: source object */
/* CURRENT_FH: target directory */
component4 newname;
};18.9.2. RESULTS
struct LINK4resok {
change_info4 cinfo;
};
union LINK4res switch (nfsstat4 status) {
case NFS4_OK:
LINK4resok resok4;
default:
void;
};18.9.3. DESCRIPTION
The LINK operation creates an additional newname for the file
represented by the saved filehandle, as set by the SAVEFH operation,
in the directory represented by the current filehandle. The existing
file and the target directory must reside within the same file system
on the server. On success, the current filehandle will continue to be
the target directory. If an object exists in the target directory
with the same name as newname, the server must return NFS4ERR_
For the target directory, the server returns change_
If the newname has a length of zero, or if newname does not obey
the UTF-8 definition, the error NFS4ERR_
18.9.4. IMPLEMENTATION
The server MAY impose restrictions on the LINK operation such that
LINK may not be done when the file is open or when that open is done
by particular protocols, or with particular options or access modes.
When LINK is rejected because of such restrictions, the error
NFS4ERR_
If a server does implement such restrictions and those restrictions
include cases of NFSv4 opens preventing successful execution of
a link, the server needs to recall any delegations that could
hide the existence of opens relevant to that decision. The reason
is that when a client holds a delegation, the server
might not have an accurate account of the opens for that client, since
the client may execute OPENs and CLOSEs locally. The LINK operation
must be delayed only until a definitive result can be obtained.
For example, suppose there are multiple delegations and one of them establishes
an open whose presence would prevent the link. Given the server's
semantics, NFS4ERR_
If the current filehandle designates a directory for which another
client holds a directory delegation, then, unless the delegation
is such that the situation can be resolved by sending a notification,
the delegation MUST be recalled, and the operation cannot be
performed successfully until the delegation is returned or revoked. Except where this
happens very quickly, one or more NFS4ERR_
When the current filehandle designates a directory for which
one or more directory delegations exist, then, when those delegations
request such notifications, instead of a recall,
NOTIFY4_
If the current file system supports the numlinks attribute, and
other clients have delegations to the file being linked, then those
delegations MUST be recalled and the LINK operation MUST NOT proceed until
all delegations are returned or revoked. Except where this
happens very quickly, one or more NFS4ERR_
Changes to any property of the "hard" linked files are reflected in all of the linked files. When a link is made to a file, the attributes for the file should have a value for numlinks that is one greater than the value before the LINK operation.¶
The statement "file and the target directory must reside within the
same file system on the server" means that the fsid fields in the
attributes for the objects are the same. If they reside on
different file systems, the error NFS4ERR_
On some
servers, "." and ".." are illegal values for newname
and the error NFS4ERR_
When the current filehandle designates a named attribute directory
and the object to be linked (the saved filehandle) is not a named
attribute for the same object, the error NFS4ERR_
When the current filehandle designates a named attribute directory
and the object to be linked (the saved filehandle) is a named
attribute within that directory, the server may return
the error NFS4ERR_
In the case that newname is already linked to the file represented by
the saved filehandle, the server will return NFS4ERR_
Note that symbolic links are created with the CREATE operation.¶
18.10. Operation 12: LOCK - Create Lock
18.10.1. ARGUMENTS
/*
* For LOCK, transition from open_stateid and lock_owner
* to a lock stateid.
*/
struct open_to_lock_owner4 {
seqid4 open_seqid;
stateid4 open_stateid;
seqid4 lock_seqid;
lock_owner4 lock_owner;
};
/*
* For LOCK, existing lock stateid continues to request new
* file lock for the same lock_owner and open_stateid.
*/
struct exist_lock_owner4 {
stateid4 lock_stateid;
seqid4 lock_seqid;
};
union locker4 switch (bool new_lock_owner) {
case TRUE:
open_to_lock_owner4 open_owner;
case FALSE:
exist_lock_owner4 lock_owner;
};
/*
* LOCK/LOCKT/LOCKU: Record lock management
*/
struct LOCK4args {
/* CURRENT_FH: file */
nfs_lock_type4 locktype;
bool reclaim;
offset4 offset;
length4 length;
locker4 locker;
};18.10.2. RESULTS
struct LOCK4denied {
offset4 offset;
length4 length;
nfs_lock_type4 locktype;
lock_owner4 owner;
};
struct LOCK4resok {
stateid4 lock_stateid;
};
union LOCK4res switch (nfsstat4 status) {
case NFS4_OK:
LOCK4resok resok4;
case NFS4ERR_DENIED:
LOCK4denied denied;
default:
void;
};18.10.3. DESCRIPTION
The LOCK operation requests a byte-range lock for the byte-range specified by the offset and length parameters, and lock type specified in the locktype parameter. If this is a reclaim request, the reclaim parameter will be TRUE.¶
Bytes in a file may be locked even if those bytes are not currently
allocated to the file. To lock the file from a specific offset
through the end-of-file (no matter how long the file actually is) use
a length field equal to NFS4_
- Length is equal to zero.¶
-
Length is not equal to NFS4_
UINT64_ MAX, and the sum of length and offset exceeds NFS4_ UINT64_ MAX .¶
32-bit servers are servers that support locking for
byte offsets that fit within 32 bits (i.e., less than
or equal to NFS4_
If the server returns NFS4ERR_
The locker argument specifies the lock-owner that is associated with
the LOCK operation. The locker4 structure is a switched union that
indicates whether the client has already created byte-range locking
state associated with the current open file and lock-owner. In the
case in which it has, the argument is just a stateid representing
the set of
locks associated with that open file and lock-owner, together with
a lock_
The following fields of the locker parameter MAY be set to any value by the client and MUST be ignored by the server:¶
-
The clientid field of the lock_
owner field of the open_ owner field (locker .open_ owner .lock_ owner .clientid ). The reason the server MUST ignore the clientid field is that the server MUST derive the client ID from the session ID from the SEQUENCE operation of the COMPOUND request.¶ -
The open_
seqid and lock_ seqid fields of the open_ owner field (locker .open_ owner .open_ seqid and locker .open_ owner .lock_ seqid ).¶ -
The lock_
seqid field of the lock_ owner field (locker .lock_ owner .lock_ seqid ).¶
Note that the client ID appearing in a LOCK4denied
structure is the actual client associated with the
conflicting lock, whether this is the client ID
associated with the current session or a different
one. Thus, if the server returns NFS4ERR_
If the current filehandle is not an ordinary file, an error will be
returned to the client. In the case that the current filehandle
represents an object of type NF4DIR, NFS4ERR_
On success, the current filehandle retains its value.¶
18.10.4. IMPLEMENTATION
If the server is unable to determine the exact offset and length of the conflicting byte-range lock, the same offset and length that were provided in the arguments should be returned in the denied results.¶
LOCK operations are subject to permission checks and to checks against the access type of the associated file. However, the specific right and modes required for various types of locks reflect the semantics of the server-exported file system, and are not specified by the protocol. For example, Windows 2000 allows a write lock of a file open for read access, while a POSIX-compliant system does not.¶
When the client sends a LOCK operation that corresponds to a range that
the lock-owner has locked already (with the same or different lock
type), or to a sub-range of such a range, or to a byte-range that
includes multiple locks already granted to that lock-owner, in whole or
in part, and the server does not support such locking operations
(i.e., does not support POSIX locking semantics), the server will
return the error NFS4ERR_
When a client holds an OPEN_
When one or more clients hold OPEN_
18.11. Operation 13: LOCKT - Test for Lock
18.11.1. ARGUMENTS
struct LOCKT4args {
/* CURRENT_FH: file */
nfs_lock_type4 locktype;
offset4 offset;
length4 length;
lock_owner4 owner;
};18.11.2. RESULTS
union LOCKT4res switch (nfsstat4 status) {
case NFS4ERR_DENIED:
LOCK4denied denied;
case NFS4_OK:
void;
default:
void;
};18.11.3. DESCRIPTION
The LOCKT operation tests the lock as specified in the arguments. If
a conflicting lock exists, the owner, offset, length, and type of the
conflicting lock are returned.
The owner field in the results includes the client ID of the owner of
the conflicting lock, whether this is the client ID associated with the
current session or a different client ID.
If no lock is held, nothing other than
NFS4_
The ranges are specified as for LOCK. The NFS4ERR_
The clientid field of the owner MAY be set to any value by the client and MUST be ignored by the server. The reason the server MUST ignore the clientid field is that the server MUST derive the client ID from the session ID from the SEQUENCE operation of the COMPOUND request.¶
If the current filehandle is not an ordinary file, an error will be
returned to the client. In the case that the current filehandle
represents an object of type NF4DIR, NFS4ERR_
On success, the current filehandle retains its value.¶
18.11.4. IMPLEMENTATION
If the server is unable to determine the exact offset and length of the conflicting lock, the same offset and length that were provided in the arguments should be returned in the denied results.¶
LOCKT uses a lock_
As noted in Section 18.10.4, some
servers may return NFS4ERR_
The LOCKT operation's test for conflicting locks SHOULD exclude
locks for the current lock-owner, and thus should return NFS4_
When a client holds an OPEN_
18.12. Operation 14: LOCKU - Unlock File
18.12.1. ARGUMENTS
struct LOCKU4args {
/* CURRENT_FH: file */
nfs_lock_type4 locktype;
seqid4 seqid;
stateid4 lock_stateid;
offset4 offset;
length4 length;
};18.12.2. RESULTS
union LOCKU4res switch (nfsstat4 status) {
case NFS4_OK:
stateid4 lock_stateid;
default:
void;
};18.12.3. DESCRIPTION
The LOCKU operation unlocks the byte-range lock specified by the
parameters. The client may set the locktype field to any value that is
legal for the nfs_
The ranges are specified as for LOCK. The NFS4ERR_
The seqid parameter MAY be any value and the server MUST ignore it.¶
If the current filehandle is not an ordinary file, an error will be
returned to the client. In the case that the current filehandle
represents an object of type NF4DIR, NFS4ERR_
On success, the current filehandle retains its value.¶
The server MAY require that the principal, security flavor, and if applicable, the GSS mechanism, combination that sent a LOCK operation also be the one to send LOCKU on the file. This might not be possible if credentials for the principal are no longer available. The server MAY allow the machine credential or SSV credential (see Section 18.35) to send LOCKU.¶
18.12.4. IMPLEMENTATION
If the area to be unlocked does not correspond exactly to a lock
actually held by the lock-owner, the server may return the error
NFS4ERR_
When a client holds an OPEN_
18.13. Operation 15: LOOKUP - Lookup Filename
18.13.3. DESCRIPTION
The LOOKUP operation looks up or finds a file system object using the directory specified by the current filehandle. LOOKUP evaluates the component and if the object exists, the current filehandle is replaced with the component's filehandle.¶
If the component cannot be evaluated either because it does not exist or because the client does not have permission to evaluate the component, then an error will be returned and the current filehandle will be unchanged.¶
If the component is a zero-length string or if any component does not
obey the UTF-8 definition, the error NFS4ERR_
18.13.4. IMPLEMENTATION
If the client wants to achieve the effect of a multi-component look up, it may construct a COMPOUND request such as (and obtain each filehandle):¶
PUTFH (directory filehandle)
LOOKUP "pub"
GETFH
LOOKUP "foo"
GETFH
LOOKUP "bar"
GETFHUnlike NFSv3, NFSv4.1 allows LOOKUP requests to cross mountpoints on the server. The client can detect a mountpoint crossing by comparing the fsid attribute of the directory with the fsid attribute of the directory looked up. If the fsids are different, then the new directory is a server mountpoint. UNIX clients that detect a mountpoint crossing will need to mount the server's file system. This needs to be done to maintain the file object identity checking mechanisms common to UNIX clients.¶
Servers that limit NFS access to "shared" or "exported" file systems should provide a pseudo file system into which the exported file systems can be integrated, so that clients can browse the server's namespace. The clients view of a pseudo file system will be limited to paths that lead to exported file systems.¶
Note: previous versions of the protocol assigned special semantics to the names "." and "..". NFSv4.1 assigns no special semantics to these names. The LOOKUPP operator must be used to look up a parent directory.¶
Note that this operation does not follow symbolic links. The client is responsible for all parsing of filenames including filenames that are modified by symbolic links encountered during the look up process.¶
If the current filehandle supplied is not a directory but a symbolic
link, the error NFS4ERR_
18.14. Operation 16: LOOKUPP - Lookup Parent Directory
18.14.3. DESCRIPTION
The current filehandle is assumed to refer to a regular
directory or a named attribute directory. LOOKUPP assigns the
filehandle for its parent directory to be the current
filehandle. If there is no parent directory, an NFS4ERR_
As is the case with LOOKUP, LOOKUPP will also cross mountpoints.¶
If the current filehandle is not a directory or named attribute
directory, the error NFS4ERR_
If the requester's security flavor does not match that
configured for the parent directory, then the server SHOULD
return NFS4ERR_
If the current filehandle is a named attribute directory that is associated with a file system object via OPENATTR (i.e., not a sub-directory of a named attribute directory), LOOKUPP SHOULD return the filehandle of the associated file system object.¶
18.14.4. IMPLEMENTATION
An issue to note is upward navigation from named attribute directories. The named attribute directories are essentially detached from the namespace, and this property should be safely represented in the client operating environment. LOOKUPP on a named attribute directory may return the filehandle of the associated file, and conveying this to applications might be unsafe as many applications expect the parent of an object to always be a directory. Therefore, the client may want to hide the parent of named attribute directories (represented as ".." in UNIX) or represent the named attribute directory as its own parent (as is typically done for the file system root directory in UNIX).¶
18.15. Operation 17: NVERIFY - Verify Difference in Attributes
18.15.3. DESCRIPTION
This operation is used to prefix a sequence of operations to be
performed if one or more attributes have changed on some file system
object. If all the attributes match, then the error NFS4ERR_
On success, the current filehandle retains its value.¶
18.15.4. IMPLEMENTATION
This operation is useful as a cache validation operator. If the object to which the attributes belong has changed, then the following operations may obtain new data associated with that object, for instance, to check if a file has been changed and obtain new data if it has:¶
SEQUENCE
PUTFH fh
NVERIFY attrbits attrs
READ 0 32767Contrast this with NFSv3, which would first send a GETATTR in one request/reply round trip, and then if attributes indicated that the client's cache was stale, then send a READ in another request/reply round trip.¶
In the case that a RECOMMENDED attribute is specified in the NVERIFY
operation and the server does not support that attribute for the
file system object, the error NFS4ERR_
When the attribute rdattr_
18.16. Operation 18: OPEN - Open a Regular File
18.16.1. ARGUMENTS
/*
* Various definitions for OPEN
*/
enum createmode4 {
UNCHECKED4 = 0,
GUARDED4 = 1,
/* Deprecated in NFSv4.1. */
EXCLUSIVE4 = 2,
/*
* New to NFSv4.1. If session is persistent,
* GUARDED4 MUST be used. Otherwise, use
* EXCLUSIVE4_1 instead of EXCLUSIVE4.
*/
EXCLUSIVE4_1 = 3
};
struct creatverfattr {
verifier4 cva_verf;
fattr4 cva_attrs;
};
union createhow4 switch (createmode4 mode) {
case UNCHECKED4:
case GUARDED4:
fattr4 createattrs;
case EXCLUSIVE4:
verifier4 createverf;
case EXCLUSIVE4_1:
creatverfattr ch_createboth;
};
enum opentype4 {
OPEN4_NOCREATE = 0,
OPEN4_CREATE = 1
};
union openflag4 switch (opentype4 opentype) {
case OPEN4_CREATE:
createhow4 how;
default:
void;
};
/* Next definitions used for OPEN delegation */
enum limit_by4 {
NFS_LIMIT_SIZE = 1,
NFS_LIMIT_BLOCKS = 2
/* others as needed */
};
struct nfs_modified_limit4 {
uint32_t num_blocks;
uint32_t bytes_per_block;
};
union nfs_space_limit4 switch (limit_by4 limitby) {
/* limit specified as file size */
case NFS_LIMIT_SIZE:
uint64_t filesize;
/* limit specified by number of blocks */
case NFS_LIMIT_BLOCKS:
nfs_modified_limit4 mod_blocks;
} ;
/*
* Share Access and Deny constants for open argument
*/
const OPEN4_SHARE_ACCESS_READ = 0x00000001;
const OPEN4_SHARE_ACCESS_WRITE = 0x00000002;
const OPEN4_SHARE_ACCESS_BOTH = 0x00000003;
const OPEN4_SHARE_DENY_NONE = 0x00000000;
const OPEN4_SHARE_DENY_READ = 0x00000001;
const OPEN4_SHARE_DENY_WRITE = 0x00000002;
const OPEN4_SHARE_DENY_BOTH = 0x00000003;
/* new flags for share_access field of OPEN4args */
const OPEN4_SHARE_ACCESS_WANT_DELEG_MASK = 0xFF00;
const OPEN4_SHARE_ACCESS_WANT_NO_PREFERENCE = 0x0000;
const OPEN4_SHARE_ACCESS_WANT_READ_DELEG = 0x0100;
const OPEN4_SHARE_ACCESS_WANT_WRITE_DELEG = 0x0200;
const OPEN4_SHARE_ACCESS_WANT_ANY_DELEG = 0x0300;
const OPEN4_SHARE_ACCESS_WANT_NO_DELEG = 0x0400;
const OPEN4_SHARE_ACCESS_WANT_CANCEL = 0x0500;
const
OPEN4_SHARE_ACCESS_WANT_SIGNAL_DELEG_WHEN_RESRC_AVAIL
= 0x10000;
const
OPEN4_SHARE_ACCESS_WANT_PUSH_DELEG_WHEN_UNCONTENDED
= 0x20000;
enum open_delegation_type4 {
OPEN_DELEGATE_NONE = 0,
OPEN_DELEGATE_READ = 1,
OPEN_DELEGATE_WRITE = 2,
OPEN_DELEGATE_NONE_EXT = 3 /* new to v4.1 */
};
enum open_claim_type4 {
/*
* Not a reclaim.
*/
CLAIM_NULL = 0,
CLAIM_PREVIOUS = 1,
CLAIM_DELEGATE_CUR = 2,
CLAIM_DELEGATE_PREV = 3,
/*
* Not a reclaim.
*
* Like CLAIM_NULL, but object identified
* by the current filehandle.
*/
CLAIM_FH = 4, /* new to v4.1 */
/*
* Like CLAIM_DELEGATE_CUR, but object identified
* by current filehandle.
*/
CLAIM_DELEG_CUR_FH = 5, /* new to v4.1 */
/*
* Like CLAIM_DELEGATE_PREV, but object identified
* by current filehandle.
*/
CLAIM_DELEG_PREV_FH = 6 /* new to v4.1 */
};
struct open_claim_delegate_cur4 {
stateid4 delegate_stateid;
component4 file;
};
union open_claim4 switch (open_claim_type4 claim) {
/*
* No special rights to file.
* Ordinary OPEN of the specified file.
*/
case CLAIM_NULL:
/* CURRENT_FH: directory */
component4 file;
/*
* Right to the file established by an
* open previous to server reboot. File
* identified by filehandle obtained at
* that time rather than by name.
*/
case CLAIM_PREVIOUS:
/* CURRENT_FH: file being reclaimed */
open_delegation_type4 delegate_type;
/*
* Right to file based on a delegation
* granted by the server. File is
* specified by name.
*/
case CLAIM_DELEGATE_CUR:
/* CURRENT_FH: directory */
open_claim_delegate_cur4 delegate_cur_info;
/*
* Right to file based on a delegation
* granted to a previous boot instance
* of the client. File is specified by name.
*/
case CLAIM_DELEGATE_PREV:
/* CURRENT_FH: directory */
component4 file_delegate_prev;
/*
* Like CLAIM_NULL. No special rights
* to file. Ordinary OPEN of the
* specified file by current filehandle.
*/
case CLAIM_FH: /* new to v4.1 */
/* CURRENT_FH: regular file to open */
void;
/*
* Like CLAIM_DELEGATE_PREV. Right to file based on a
* delegation granted to a previous boot
* instance of the client. File is identified
* by filehandle.
*/
case CLAIM_DELEG_PREV_FH: /* new to v4.1 */
/* CURRENT_FH: file being opened */
void;
/*
* Like CLAIM_DELEGATE_CUR. Right to file based on
* a delegation granted by the server.
* File is identified by filehandle.
*/
case CLAIM_DELEG_CUR_FH: /* new to v4.1 */
/* CURRENT_FH: file being opened */
stateid4 oc_delegate_stateid;
};
/*
* OPEN: Open a file, potentially receiving an OPEN delegation
*/
struct OPEN4args {
seqid4 seqid;
uint32_t share_access;
uint32_t share_deny;
open_owner4 owner;
openflag4 openhow;
open_claim4 claim;
};18.16.2. RESULTS
struct open_read_delegation4 {
stateid4 stateid; /* Stateid for delegation*/
bool recall; /* Pre-recalled flag for
delegations obtained
by reclaim (CLAIM_PREVIOUS) */
nfsace4 permissions; /* Defines users who don't
need an ACCESS call to
open for read */
};
struct open_write_delegation4 {
stateid4 stateid; /* Stateid for delegation */
bool recall; /* Pre-recalled flag for
delegations obtained
by reclaim
(CLAIM_PREVIOUS) */
nfs_space_limit4
space_limit; /* Defines condition that
the client must check to
determine whether the
file needs to be flushed
to the server on close. */
nfsace4 permissions; /* Defines users who don't
need an ACCESS call as
part of a delegated
open. */
};
enum why_no_delegation4 { /* new to v4.1 */
WND4_NOT_WANTED = 0,
WND4_CONTENTION = 1,
WND4_RESOURCE = 2,
WND4_NOT_SUPP_FTYPE = 3,
WND4_WRITE_DELEG_NOT_SUPP_FTYPE = 4,
WND4_NOT_SUPP_UPGRADE = 5,
WND4_NOT_SUPP_DOWNGRADE = 6,
WND4_CANCELLED = 7,
WND4_IS_DIR = 8
};
union open_none_delegation4 /* new to v4.1 */
switch (why_no_delegation4 ond_why) {
case WND4_CONTENTION:
bool ond_server_will_push_deleg;
case WND4_RESOURCE:
bool ond_server_will_signal_avail;
default:
void;
};
union open_delegation4
switch (open_delegation_type4 delegation_type) {
case OPEN_DELEGATE_NONE:
void;
case OPEN_DELEGATE_READ:
open_read_delegation4 read;
case OPEN_DELEGATE_WRITE:
open_write_delegation4 write;
case OPEN_DELEGATE_NONE_EXT: /* new to v4.1 */
open_none_delegation4 od_whynone;
};
/*
* Result flags
*/
/* Client must confirm open */
const OPEN4_RESULT_CONFIRM = 0x00000002;
/* Type of file locking behavior at the server */
const OPEN4_RESULT_LOCKTYPE_POSIX = 0x00000004;
/* Server will preserve file if removed while open */
const OPEN4_RESULT_PRESERVE_UNLINKED = 0x00000008;
/*
* Server may use CB_NOTIFY_LOCK on locks
* derived from this open
*/
const OPEN4_RESULT_MAY_NOTIFY_LOCK = 0x00000020;
struct OPEN4resok {
stateid4 stateid; /* Stateid for open */
change_info4 cinfo; /* Directory Change Info */
uint32_t rflags; /* Result flags */
bitmap4 attrset; /* attribute set for create*/
open_delegation4 delegation; /* Info on any open
delegation */
};
union OPEN4res switch (nfsstat4 status) {
case NFS4_OK:
/* New CURRENT_FH: opened file */
OPEN4resok resok4;
default:
void;
};18.16.3. DESCRIPTION
The OPEN operation opens a regular file in a
directory with the provided name or filehandle.
OPEN can also create a file if a name is provided,
and the client specifies it wants to create a file.
Specification of whether or not a file is to be created,
and the method of creation is via the openhow
parameter. The openhow parameter consists of
a switched union (data type opengflag4), which
switches on the value of opentype
Upon success (which might entail creation of a new file), the current filehandle is replaced by that of the created or existing object.¶
If the current filehandle is a named attribute
directory, OPEN will then create or open a named
attribute file. Note that exclusive create
of a named attribute is not supported. If the
createmode is EXCLUSIVE4 or EXCLUSIVE4_
UNCHECKED4 means that the file should be created if a file of that name does not exist and encountering an existing regular file of that name is not an error. For this type of create, createattrs specifies the initial set of attributes for the file. The set of attributes may include any writable attribute valid for regular files. When an UNCHECKED4 create encounters an existing file, the attributes specified by createattrs are not used, except that when createattrs specifies the size attribute with a size of zero, the existing file is truncated.¶
If GUARDED4 is specified, the server checks for
the presence of a duplicate object by name before
performing the create. If a duplicate exists,
NFS4ERR_
For the UNCHECKED4 and GUARDED4 cases, where the operation is successful, the server will return to the client an attribute mask signifying which attributes were successfully set for the object.¶
EXCLUSIVE4_
If using EXCLUSIVE4, and if the server uses attributes to
store the exclusive create verifier, the server will signify
which attributes it used by setting the appropriate bits in
the attribute mask that is returned in the results.
Unlike UNCHECKED4, GUARDED4, and EXCLUSIVE4_
In NFSv4.1, EXCLUSIVE4 has been deprecated in favor
of EXCLUSIVE4_
With the addition of persistent sessions and pNFS, under some conditions EXCLUSIVE4 MUST NOT be used by the client or supported by the server. The following table summarizes the appropriate and mandated exclusive create methods for implementations of NFSv4.1:¶
| Persistent Reply Cache Enabled | Server Supports pNFS | Server REQUIRED | Client Allowed |
|---|---|---|---|
| no | no | EXCLUSIVE4_ |
EXCLUSIVE4_ |
| no | yes | EXCLUSIVE4_ |
EXCLUSIVE4_ |
| yes | no | GUARDED4 | GUARDED4 |
| yes | yes | GUARDED4 | GUARDED4 |
If CREATE_
With persistent sessions, exclusive create semantics
are fully achievable via GUARDED4, and so EXCLUSIVE4
or EXCLUSIVE4_
For the target directory, the server returns change_
The OPEN operation provides for Windows share
reservation capability with the use of the
share_
For each OPEN, the client provides a value for
the owner field of the OPEN argument. The owner
field is of data type open_
The "seqid" field of the request is not used in NFSv4.1, but it MAY be any value and the server MUST ignore it.¶
In the case that the client is recovering state from a server failure, the claim field of the OPEN argument is used to signify that the request is meant to reclaim state previously held.¶
The "claim" field of the OPEN argument is used to specify the file to be opened and the state information that the client claims to possess. There are seven claim types as follows:¶
| open type | description |
|---|---|
|
CLAIM_ |
For the client, this is a new OPEN request and there is no
previous state associated with the file for the client. With
CLAIM_ |
|
CLAIM_ |
The client is claiming basic OPEN state for a file that was held previous to a server restart. Generally used when a server is returning persistent filehandles; the client may not have the file name to reclaim the OPEN. |
|
CLAIM_ |
The client is claiming a delegation for OPEN
as granted by the server. Generally, this
is done as part of recalling a delegation. With
CLAIM_ |
|
CLAIM_ |
The client is claiming a delegation granted to a
previous client instance; used after the client
restarts. The server MAY support CLAIM_ |
For OPEN requests that reach the server during
the grace period, the server returns an error
of NFS4ERR_
-
OPEN requests specifying the claim type CLAIM_
PREVIOUS are devoted to reclaiming opens after a server restart and are typically only valid during the grace period.¶ -
OPEN requests specifying the claim types CLAIM_
DELEGATE_ CUR and CLAIM_ DELEG_ CUR_ FH are valid both during and after the grace period. Since the granting of the delegation that they are subordinate to assures that there is no conflict with locks to be reclaimed by other clients, the server need not return NFS4ERR_ GRACE when these are received during the grace period.¶
For any OPEN request, the server may return an OPEN delegation, which
allows further opens and closes to be handled locally on the client as
described in Section 10.4. Note that delegation is
up to the server to decide. The client should never assume that
delegation will or will not be granted in a particular instance. It
should always be prepared for either case. A partial exception is the
reclaim
The rflags returned by a successful OPEN allow the server to return information governing how the open file is to be handled.¶
-
OPEN4_
RESULT_ CONFIRM is deprecated and MUST NOT be returned by an NFSv4.1 server.¶ -
OPEN4_
RESULT_ LOCKTYPE_ POSIX indicates that the server's byte-range locking behavior supports the complete set of POSIX locking techniques [21]. From this, the client can choose to manage byte-range locking state in a way to handle a mismatch of byte-range locking management.¶ -
OPEN4_
RESULT_ PRESERVE_ UNLINKED indicates that the server will preserve the open file if the client (or any other client) removes the file as long as it is open. Furthermore, the server promises to preserve the file through the grace period after server restart, thereby giving the client the opportunity to reclaim its open.¶ -
OPEN4_
RESULT_ MAY_ NOTIFY_ LOCK indicates that the server may attempt CB_ NOTIFY_ LOCK callbacks for locks on this file. This flag is a hint only, and may be safely ignored by the client.¶
If the component is of zero length, NFS4ERR_
When an OPEN is done and the specified open-owner already has the resulting filehandle open, the result is to "OR" together the new share and deny status together with the existing status. In this case, only a single CLOSE need be done, even though multiple OPENs were completed. When such an OPEN is done, checking of share reservations for the new OPEN proceeds normally, with no exception for the existing OPEN held by the same open-owner. In this case, the stateid returned as an "other" field that matches that of the previous open while the "seqid" field is incremented to reflect the change status due to the new open.¶
If the underlying file system at the server is only accessible in a
read-only mode and the OPEN request has specified ACCESS_
As with the CREATE operation, the server MUST derive
the owner, owner ACE, group, or group ACE if any
of the four attributes are required and supported
by the server's file system. For an OPEN with the
EXCLUSIVE4 createmode, the server has no choice,
since such OPEN calls do not include the createattrs
field. Conversely, if createattrs (UNCHECKED4 or
GUARDED4) or cva_
In the case of an OPEN that specifies a size of zero (e.g., truncation) and the file has named attributes, the named attributes are left as is and are not removed.¶
NFSv4.1 gives more precise control to clients over
acquisition of delegations via the following new
flags for the share_
OPEN4_
OPEN4_
OPEN4_
OPEN4_
OPEN4_
OPEN4_
OPEN4_
If
OPEN4_
OPEN4_
OPEN4_
OPEN4_
OPEN4_
Otherwise, the client is neither indicating a desire nor a non-desire for a delegation, and the server MAY or MAY not return a delegation in the OPEN response.¶
If the server supports the new _
- WND4_
NOT_ WANTED -
The client specified OPEN4_
SHARE_ ACCESS_ WANT_ NO_ DELEG .¶ - WND4_
CONTENTION - There is a conflicting delegation or open on the file.¶
- WND4_
RESOURCE - Resource limitations prevent the server from granting a delegation.¶
- WND4_
NOT_ SUPP_ FTYPE - The server does not support delegations on this file type.¶
- WND4_
WRITE_ DELEG_ NOT_ SUPP_ FTYPE -
The server does not support OPEN_
DELEGATE_ WRITE delegations on this file type.¶ - WND4_
NOT_ SUPP_ UPGRADE -
The server does not support atomic upgrade of an OPEN_
DELEGATE_ READ delegation to an OPEN_ DELEGATE_ WRITE delegation.¶ - WND4_
NOT_ SUPP_ DOWNGRADE -
The server does not support atomic downgrade of an OPEN_
DELEGATE_ WRITE delegation to an OPEN_ DELEGATE_ READ delegation.¶ - WND4_
CANCELED -
The client specified OPEN4_
SHARE_ ACCESS_ WANT_ CANCEL and now any "want" for this file object is cancelled.¶ - WND4_
IS_ DIR -
The specified file object is a directory, and the operation
is OPEN or WANT_
DELEGATION, which do not support delegations on directories.¶
OPEN4_
OPEN4_
OPEN4_
The client may set one or both of
OPEN4_
- OPEN4_
SHARE_ ACCESS_ WANT_ READ_ DELEG¶ - OPEN4_
SHARE_ ACCESS_ WANT_ WRITE_ DELEG¶ - OPEN4_
SHARE_ ACCESS_ WANT_ ANY_ DELEG¶
If the client specifies
OPEN4_
If the client specifies
OPEN4_
If the client has previously registered a want for a
delegation on a file, and then sends a request to register a
want for a delegation on the same file, the server MUST return
a new error: NFS4ERR_
18.16.4. IMPLEMENTATION
In absence of a persistent session, the client
invokes exclusive create by setting the how parameter
to EXCLUSIVE4 or EXCLUSIVE4_
If the object does not exist, the server creates the object and stores the verifier in stable storage. For file systems that do not provide a mechanism for the storage of arbitrary file attributes, the server may use one or more elements of the object's metadata to store the verifier. The verifier MUST be stored in stable storage to prevent erroneous failure on retransmission of the request. It is assumed that an exclusive create is being performed because exclusive semantics are critical to the application. Because of the expected usage, exclusive CREATE does not rely solely on the server's reply cache for storage of the verifier. A nonpersistent reply cache does not survive a crash and the session and reply cache may be deleted after a network partition that exceeds the lease time, thus opening failure windows.¶
An NFSv4.1 server SHOULD NOT store the verifier in
any of the file's RECOMMENDED or REQUIRED attributes.
If it does, the server SHOULD use time_
- acl (it is desirable for access control to be established at creation),¶
- dacl (ditto),¶
- mode (ditto),¶
- owner (ditto),¶
- owner_
group (ditto),¶ - retentevt_
set (it may be desired to establish retention at creation)¶ - retention_
hold (ditto),¶ - retention_
set (ditto),¶ - sacl (it is desirable for auditing control to be established at creation),¶
- size (on some servers, size may have a limited range of values),¶
-
mode_
set_ masked (as with mode),¶ - and¶
- time_
creation (a meaningful file creation should be set when the file is created).¶
Another alternative for the server is to use a named attribute to store the verifier.¶
Because the EXCLUSIVE4 create method does not specify initial attributes when processing an EXCLUSIVE4 create, the server¶
- SHOULD set the owner of the file to that corresponding to the credential of request's RPC header.¶
- SHOULD NOT leave the file's access control to anyone but the owner of the file.¶
If the server cannot support exclusive create
semantics, possibly because of the requirement to
commit the verifier to stable storage, it should fail
the OPEN request with the error NFS4ERR_
During an exclusive CREATE request, if the object
already exists, the server reconstructs the object's
verifier and compares it with the verifier in
the request. If they match, the server treats the
request as a success. The request is presumed to
be a duplicate of an earlier, successful request
for which the reply was lost and that the server
duplicate request cache mechanism did not detect. If
the verifiers do not match, the request is rejected
with the status NFS4ERR_
After the client has performed a successful
exclusive create, the attrset response indicates
which attributes were used to store the verifier.
If EXCLUSIVE4 was used, the attributes set in
attrset were used for the verifier. If EXCLUSIVE4_
Unless a persistent session is used, use of the
GUARDED4 attribute does not provide exactly once
semantics. In particular, if a reply is lost and
the server does not detect the retransmission of the
request, the operation can fail with NFS4ERR_
For SHARE reservations, the value of the expression
Based on the share_
Note that if the client ID was not created
with the EXCHGID4_
If the component provided to OPEN is a symbolic link, the error
NFS4ERR_
The use of the OPEN4_
If another client has a delegation of the file being opened that
conflicts with open being done (sometimes depending on the
share_
-
The value of share_
access includes the bit OPEN4_ SHARE_ ACCESS_ WRITE .¶ -
The value of share_
deny specifies OPEN4_ SHARE_ DENY_ READ or OPEN4_ SHARE_ DENY_ BOTH .¶ -
OPEN4_
CREATE is specified together with UNCHECKED4, the size attribute is specified as zero (for truncation), and an existing file is truncated.¶
If OPEN4_
If OPEN4_
18.16.4.1. Warning to Client Implementors
OPEN resembles LOOKUP in that it generates a filehandle for the client to use. Unlike LOOKUP though, OPEN creates server state on the filehandle. In normal circumstances, the client can only release this state with a CLOSE operation. CLOSE uses the current filehandle to determine which file to close. Therefore, the client MUST follow every OPEN operation with a GETFH operation in the same COMPOUND procedure. This will supply the client with the filehandle such that CLOSE can be used appropriately.¶
Simply waiting for the lease on the file to expire is insufficient because the server may maintain the state indefinitely as long as another client does not attempt to make a conflicting access to the same file.¶
See also Section 2.10.6.4.¶
18.17. Operation 19: OPENATTR - Open Named Attribute Directory
18.17.2. RESULTS
struct OPENATTR4res {
/*
* If status is NFS4_OK,
* new CURRENT_FH: named attribute
* directory
*/
nfsstat4 status;
};18.17.3. DESCRIPTION
The OPENATTR operation is used to obtain the filehandle of the named attribute directory associated with the current filehandle. The result of the OPENATTR will be a filehandle to an object of type NF4ATTRDIR. From this filehandle, READDIR and LOOKUP operations can be used to obtain filehandles for the various named attributes associated with the original file system object. Filehandles returned within the named attribute directory will designate objects of type of NF4NAMEDATTR.¶
The createdir argument allows the client to signify if a named
attribute directory should be created as a result of the OPENATTR
operation. Some clients may use the OPENATTR operation with a value
of FALSE for createdir to determine if any named attributes exist for
the object. If none exist, then NFS4ERR_
If the current filehandle designates an object of type
NF4NAMEDATTR (a named attribute) or NF4ATTRDIR (a named attribute
directory), an error of NFS4ERR_
18.17.4. IMPLEMENTATION
If the server does not support named attributes for the current
filehandle, an error of NFS4ERR_
18.18. Operation 21: OPEN_DOWNGRADE - Reduce Open File Access
18.18.1. ARGUMENTS
struct OPEN_DOWNGRADE4args {
/* CURRENT_FH: opened file */
stateid4 open_stateid;
seqid4 seqid;
uint32_t share_access;
uint32_t share_deny;
};18.18.2. RESULTS
struct OPEN_DOWNGRADE4resok {
stateid4 open_stateid;
};
union OPEN_DOWNGRADE4res switch(nfsstat4 status) {
case NFS4_OK:
OPEN_DOWNGRADE4resok resok4;
default:
void;
};18.18.3. DESCRIPTION
This operation is used to adjust the access and deny states
for a given open. This is necessary when a given open-owner opens the
same file multiple times with different access and deny
values. In this situation, a close of one of the opens may change the
appropriate share_
Valid values for the expression
Valid values for the share_
After checking for valid values of share_
-
The bits in share_
access SHOULD equal the union of the share_ access bits (not including OPEN4_ SHARE_ WANT_ * bits) specified for some subset of the OPENs in effect for the current open-owner on the current file.¶ -
The bits in share_
deny SHOULD equal the union of the share_ deny bits specified for some subset of the OPENs in effect for the current open-owner on the current file.¶
If the above constraints are not respected,
the server SHOULD return the error NFS4ERR_
The seqid argument is not used in NFSv4.1, MAY be any value, and MUST be ignored by the server.¶
On success, the current filehandle retains its value.¶
18.18.4. IMPLEMENTATION
An OPEN_
18.19. Operation 22: PUTFH - Set Current Filehandle
18.19.2. RESULTS
struct PUTFH4res {
/*
* If status is NFS4_OK,
* new CURRENT_FH: argument to PUTFH
*/
nfsstat4 status;
};18.19.3. DESCRIPTION
This operation replaces the current filehandle with the filehandle provided as an argument. It clears the current stateid.¶
If the security mechanism used by the requester does not meet the
requirements of the filehandle provided to this operation, the server
MUST return NFS4ERR_
See Section 16.2.3.1.1 for more details on the current filehandle.¶
See Section 16.2.3.1.2 for more details on the current stateid.¶
18.19.4. IMPLEMENTATION
This operation is used in an NFS request to set the context for file accessing operations that follow in the same COMPOUND request.¶
18.20. Operation 23: PUTPUBFH - Set Public Filehandle
18.20.2. RESULT
struct PUTPUBFH4res {
/*
* If status is NFS4_OK,
* new CURRENT_FH: public fh
*/
nfsstat4 status;
};18.20.3. DESCRIPTION
This operation replaces the current filehandle with the filehandle that represents the public filehandle of the server's namespace. This filehandle may be different from the "root" filehandle that may be associated with some other directory on the server.¶
PUTPUBFH also clears the current stateid.¶
The public filehandle represents the concepts embodied in RFC 2054 [49], RFC 2055 [50], and RFC 2224 [61]. The intent for NFSv4.1 is that the public filehandle (represented by the PUTPUBFH operation) be used as a method of providing WebNFS server compatibility with NFSv3.¶
The public filehandle and the root filehandle (represented by the PUTROOTFH operation) SHOULD be equivalent. If the public and root filehandles are not equivalent, then the directory corresponding to the public filehandle MUST be a descendant of the directory corresponding to the root filehandle.¶
See Section 16.2.3.1.1 for more details on the current filehandle.¶
See Section 16.2.3.1.2 for more details on the current stateid.¶
18.20.4. IMPLEMENTATION
This operation is used in an NFS request to set the context for file accessing operations that follow in the same COMPOUND request.¶
With the NFSv3 public filehandle, the client is able to specify whether the pathname provided in the LOOKUP should be evaluated as either an absolute path relative to the server's root or relative to the public filehandle. RFC 2224 [61] contains further discussion of the functionality. With NFSv4.1, that type of specification is not directly available in the LOOKUP operation. The reason for this is because the component separators needed to specify absolute vs. relative are not allowed in NFSv4. Therefore, the client is responsible for constructing its request such that the use of either PUTROOTFH or PUTPUBFH signifies absolute or relative evaluation of an NFS URL, respectively.¶
Note that there are warnings mentioned in RFC 2224 [61] with respect to the use of absolute evaluation and the restrictions the server may place on that evaluation with respect to how much of its namespace has been made available. These same warnings apply to NFSv4.1. It is likely, therefore, that because of server implementation details, an NFSv3 absolute public filehandle look up may behave differently than an NFSv4.1 absolute resolution.¶
There is a form of security negotiation as described in RFC 2755 [62] that uses the public filehandle and an overloading of the pathname. This method is not available with NFSv4.1 as filehandles are not overloaded with special meaning and therefore do not provide the same framework as NFSv3. Clients should therefore use the security negotiation mechanisms described in Section 2.6.¶
18.21. Operation 24: PUTROOTFH - Set Root Filehandle
18.21.2. RESULTS
struct PUTROOTFH4res {
/*
* If status is NFS4_OK,
* new CURRENT_FH: root fh
*/
nfsstat4 status;
};18.21.3. DESCRIPTION
This operation replaces the current filehandle with the filehandle that represents the root of the server's namespace. From this filehandle, a LOOKUP operation can locate any other filehandle on the server. This filehandle may be different from the "public" filehandle that may be associated with some other directory on the server.¶
PUTROOTFH also clears the current stateid.¶
See Section 16.2.3.1.1 for more details on the current filehandle.¶
See Section 16.2.3.1.2 for more details on the current stateid.¶
18.21.4. IMPLEMENTATION
This operation is used in an NFS request to set the context for file accessing operations that follow in the same COMPOUND request.¶
18.22. Operation 25: READ - Read from File
18.22.1. ARGUMENTS
struct READ4args {
/* CURRENT_FH: file */
stateid4 stateid;
offset4 offset;
count4 count;
};18.22.2. RESULTS
struct READ4resok {
bool eof;
opaque data<>;
};
union READ4res switch (nfsstat4 status) {
case NFS4_OK:
READ4resok resok4;
default:
void;
};18.22.3. DESCRIPTION
The READ operation reads data from the regular file identified by the current filehandle.¶
The client provides an offset of where the READ is to start and a
count of how many bytes are to be read. An offset of zero means
to read data starting at the beginning of the file. If offset is
greater than or equal to the size of the file, the status NFS4_
If the client specifies a count value of zero, the READ succeeds and returns zero bytes of data again subject to access permissions checking. The server may choose to return fewer bytes than specified by the client. The client needs to check for this condition and handle the condition appropriately.¶
Except when special stateids are used, the stateid value for a READ request represents a value returned from a previous byte-range lock or share reservation request or the stateid associated with a delegation. The stateid identifies the associated owners if any and is used by the server to verify that the associated locks are still valid (e.g., have not been revoked).¶
If the read ended at the end-of-file (formally, in a correctly formed READ operation, if offset + count is equal to the size of the file), or the READ operation extends beyond the size of the file (if offset + count is greater than the size of the file), eof is returned as TRUE; otherwise, it is FALSE. A successful READ of an empty file will always return eof as TRUE.¶
If the current filehandle is not an ordinary file, an error will be
returned to the client. In the case that the current filehandle
represents an object of type NF4DIR, NFS4ERR_
For a READ with a stateid value of all bits equal to zero, the server MAY allow the READ to be serviced subject to mandatory byte-range locks or the current share deny modes for the file. For a READ with a stateid value of all bits equal to one, the server MAY allow READ operations to bypass locking checks at the server.¶
On success, the current filehandle retains its value.¶
18.22.4. IMPLEMENTATION
If the server returns a "short read" (i.e., fewer data than requested and eof is set to FALSE), the client should send another READ to get the remaining data. A server may return less data than requested under several circumstances. The file may have been truncated by another client or perhaps on the server itself, changing the file size from what the requesting client believes to be the case. This would reduce the actual amount of data available to the client. It is possible that the server reduce the transfer size and so return a short read result. Server resource exhaustion may also occur in a short read.¶
If mandatory byte-range locking is in effect for the file, and if the byte-range
corresponding to the data to be read from the file is WRITE_
If another client has an OPEN_
18.23. Operation 26: READDIR - Read Directory
18.23.1. ARGUMENTS
struct READDIR4args {
/* CURRENT_FH: directory */
nfs_cookie4 cookie;
verifier4 cookieverf;
count4 dircount;
count4 maxcount;
bitmap4 attr_request;
};18.23.2. RESULTS
struct entry4 {
nfs_cookie4 cookie;
component4 name;
fattr4 attrs;
entry4 *nextentry;
};
struct dirlist4 {
entry4 *entries;
bool eof;
};
struct READDIR4resok {
verifier4 cookieverf;
dirlist4 reply;
};
union READDIR4res switch (nfsstat4 status) {
case NFS4_OK:
READDIR4resok resok4;
default:
void;
};18.23.3. DESCRIPTION
The READDIR operation retrieves a variable number of entries from a
file system directory and returns client
The arguments contain a cookie value that represents where the READDIR should start within the directory. A value of zero for the cookie is used to start reading at the beginning of the directory. For subsequent READDIR requests, the client specifies a cookie value that is provided by the server on a previous READDIR request.¶
The request's cookieverf field should be set to 0
zero) when the request's cookie field is zero
(first read of the directory). On subsequent requests, the
cookieverf field must match the cookieverf returned
by the READDIR in which the cookie was acquired.
If the server determines that the cookieverf
is no longer valid for the directory, the error
NFS4ERR_
The dircount field of the request is a hint of the maximum number of bytes of directory information that should be returned. This value represents the total length of the names of the directory entries and the cookie value for these entries. This length represents the XDR encoding of the data (names and cookies) and not the length in the native format of the server.¶
The maxcount field of the request represents the maximum
total size of all of the data being returned within
the READDIR4resok structure and includes the XDR
overhead. The server MAY return less data. If the
server is unable to return a single directory entry
within the maxcount limit, the error NFS4ERR_
Finally, the request's attr_
A successful reply consists of a list of directory entries. Each of these entries contains the name of the directory entry, a cookie value for that entry, and the associated attributes as requested. The "eof" flag has a value of TRUE if there are no more entries in the directory.¶
The cookie value is only meaningful to the server and is used as a cursor for the directory entry. As mentioned, this cookie is used by the client for subsequent READDIR operations so that it may continue reading a directory. The cookie is similar in concept to a READ offset but MUST NOT be interpreted as such by the client. Ideally, the cookie value SHOULD NOT change if the directory is modified since the client may be caching these values.¶
In some cases, the server may encounter an error while obtaining the
attributes for a directory entry. Instead of returning an error for
the entire READDIR operation, the server can instead return the
attribute rdattr_
For some file system environments, the directory entries "." and ".." have special meaning, and in other environments, they do not. If the server supports these special entries within a directory, they SHOULD NOT be returned to the client as part of the READDIR response. To enable some client environments, the cookie values of zero, 1, and 2 are to be considered reserved. Note that the UNIX client will use these values when combining the server's response and local representations to enable a fully formed UNIX directory presentation to the application.¶
For READDIR arguments, cookie values of one and two SHOULD NOT be used, and for READDIR results, cookie values of zero, one, and two SHOULD NOT be returned.¶
On success, the current filehandle retains its value.¶
18.23.4. IMPLEMENTATION
The server's file system directory representations can differ greatly. A client's programming interfaces may also be bound to the local operating environment in a way that does not translate well into the NFS protocol. Therefore, the use of the dircount and maxcount fields are provided to enable the client to provide hints to the server. If the client is aggressive about attribute collection during a READDIR, the server has an idea of how to limit the encoded response.¶
If dircount is zero, the server bounds the reply's size based on the request's maxcount field.¶
The cookieverf may be used by the server to help manage cookie values
that may become stale. It should be a rare occurrence that a server is
unable to continue properly reading a directory with the provided
cookie
The use of the cookieverf will also protect the client from using READDIR cookie values that might be stale. For example, if the file system has been migrated, the server might or might not be able to use the same cookie values to service READDIR as the previous server used. With the client providing the cookieverf, the server is able to provide the appropriate response to the client. This prevents the case where the server accepts a cookie value but the underlying directory has changed and the response is invalid from the client's context of its previous READDIR.¶
Since some servers will not be returning "." and ".." entries as has been done with previous versions of the NFS protocol, the client that requires these entries be present in READDIR responses must fabricate them.¶
18.24. Operation 27: READLINK - Read Symbolic Link
18.24.2. RESULTS
struct READLINK4resok {
linktext4 link;
};
union READLINK4res switch (nfsstat4 status) {
case NFS4_OK:
READLINK4resok resok4;
default:
void;
};18.24.3. DESCRIPTION
READLINK reads the data associated with a symbolic link. Depending on the value of the UTF-8 capability attribute (Section 14.4), the data is encoded in UTF-8. Whether created by an NFS client or created locally on the server, the data in a symbolic link is not interpreted (except possibly to check for proper UTF-8 encoding) when created, but is simply stored.¶
On success, the current filehandle retains its value.¶
18.24.4. IMPLEMENTATION
A symbolic link is nominally a pointer to another file. The data is not necessarily interpreted by the server, just stored in the file. It is possible for a client implementation to store a pathname that is not meaningful to the server operating system in a symbolic link. A READLINK operation returns the data to the client for interpretation. If different implementations want to share access to symbolic links, then they must agree on the interpretation of the data in the symbolic link.¶
The READLINK operation is only allowed on objects of type NF4LNK.
The server should return the error NFS4ERR_
18.25. Operation 28: REMOVE - Remove File System Object
18.25.2. RESULTS
struct REMOVE4resok {
change_info4 cinfo;
};
union REMOVE4res switch (nfsstat4 status) {
case NFS4_OK:
REMOVE4resok resok4;
default:
void;
};18.25.3. DESCRIPTION
The REMOVE operation removes (deletes) a directory entry named by filename from the directory corresponding to the current filehandle. If the entry in the directory was the last reference to the corresponding file system object, the object may be destroyed. The directory may be either of type NF4DIR or NF4ATTRDIR.¶
For the directory where the filename was removed, the server
returns change_
If the target has a length of zero, or if
the target does not obey the UTF-8 definition (and
the server is enforcing UTF-8 encoding; see Section 14.4), the error NFS4ERR_
On success, the current filehandle retains its value.¶
18.25.4. IMPLEMENTATION
NFSv3 required a different operator RMDIR for directory removal and REMOVE for non-directory removal. This allowed clients to skip checking the file type when being passed a non-directory delete system call (e.g., unlink() [24] in POSIX) to remove a directory, as well as the converse (e.g., a rmdir() on a non-directory) because they knew the server would check the file type. NFSv4.1 REMOVE can be used to delete any directory entry independent of its file type. The implementor of an NFSv4.1 client's entry points from the unlink() and rmdir() system calls should first check the file type against the types the system call is allowed to remove before sending a REMOVE operation. Alternatively, the implementor can produce a COMPOUND call that includes a LOOKUP/VERIFY sequence of operations to verify the file type before a REMOVE operation in the same COMPOUND call.¶
The concept of last reference is server
specific. However, if the numlinks field in the
previous attributes of the object had the value 1,
the client should not rely on referring to the
object via a filehandle. Likewise, the client
should not rely on the resources (disk space,
directory entry, and so on) formerly associated
with the object becoming immediately available.
Thus, if a client needs to be able to continue to
access a file after using REMOVE to remove it, the
client should take steps to make sure that the file
will still be accessible. While the traditional
mechanism used is to RENAME the file from its old
name to a new hidden name, the NFSv4.1 OPEN operation
MAY return a result flag, OPEN4_
If the server finds that the file is still open when the REMOVE arrives:¶
-
The server SHOULD NOT delete the file's directory entry if the
file was opened with OPEN4_
SHARE_ DENY_ WRITE or OPEN4_ SHARE_ DENY_ BOTH .¶ -
If the file was not opened with OPEN4_
SHARE_ DENY_ WRITE or OPEN4_ SHARE_ DENY_ BOTH, the server SHOULD delete the file's directory entry. However, until last CLOSE of the file, the server MAY continue to allow access to the file via its filehandle.¶ -
The server MUST NOT delete the directory
entry if the reply from OPEN had the flag
OPEN4_
RESULT_ PRESERVE_ UNLINKED set.¶
The server MAY implement its own restrictions on removal of a file while it is open. The server might disallow such a REMOVE (or a removal that occurs as part of RENAME). The conditions that influence the restrictions on removal of a file while it is still open include:¶
- Whether certain access protocols (i.e., not just NFS) are holding the file open.¶
- Whether particular options, access modes, or policies on the server are enabled.¶
If a file has an outstanding OPEN and this prevents the
removal of the file's directory entry,
the error NFS4ERR_
Where the determination above cannot be made definitively because delegations are being held, they MUST be recalled to allow processing of the REMOVE to continue. When a delegation is held, the server has no reliable knowledge of the status of OPENs for that client, so unless there are files opened with the particular deny modes by clients without delegations, the determination cannot be made until delegations are recalled, and the operation cannot proceed until each sufficient delegation has been returned or revoked to allow the server to make a correct determination.¶
In all cases in which delegations are recalled, the server
is likely to return one or more NFS4ERR_
If the current filehandle designates a directory for
which another client holds a directory delegation,
then, unless the situation can be resolved by sending
a notification, the directory delegation MUST be
recalled, and the operation MUST NOT proceed until
the delegation is returned or revoked. Except where
this happens very quickly, one or more NFS4ERR_
When the current filehandle designates a directory
for which one or more directory delegations
exist, then, when those delegations request
such notifications, NOTIFY4_
Note that when a remove occurs as a result of a
RENAME, NOTIFY4_
18.26. Operation 29: RENAME - Rename Directory Entry
18.26.1. ARGUMENTS
struct RENAME4args {
/* SAVED_FH: source directory */
component4 oldname;
/* CURRENT_FH: target directory */
component4 newname;
};18.26.2. RESULTS
struct RENAME4resok {
change_info4 source_cinfo;
change_info4 target_cinfo;
};
union RENAME4res switch (nfsstat4 status) {
case NFS4_OK:
RENAME4resok resok4;
default:
void;
};18.26.3. DESCRIPTION
The RENAME operation renames the object identified by oldname in the source directory corresponding to the saved filehandle, as set by the SAVEFH operation, to newname in the target directory corresponding to the current filehandle. The operation is required to be atomic to the client. Source and target directories MUST reside on the same file system on the server. On success, the current filehandle will continue to be the target directory.¶
If the target directory already contains an entry with the name
newname, the source object MUST be compatible with the target: either
both are non-directories or both are directories and the target MUST
be empty.
If compatible, the existing target is removed before the
rename occurs or, preferably, the target is removed atomically as
part of the rename.
See Section 18.25.4
for client and server actions whenever a target is removed.
Note however that when the removal is performed atomically with the
rename, certain parts of the removal described there are integrated
with the rename. For example, notification of the removal will not
be via a NOTIFY4_
If the source object and the target are not
compatible or if the target is a directory but not empty, the server
will return the error NFS4ERR_
If oldname and newname both refer to the same
file (e.g., they might be hard links of each
other), then unless the file is open (see Section 18.26.4), RENAME MUST
perform no action and return NFS4_
For both directories involved in the RENAME, the server returns
change_
If oldname refers to a named attribute and the saved and current
filehandles refer to different file system objects, the server will
return NFS4ERR_
If oldname or newname has a length of zero, or if oldname or
newname does not obey the UTF-8 definition, the error NFS4ERR_
18.26.4. IMPLEMENTATION
The server MAY impose restrictions on the RENAME
operation such that RENAME may not be done when the
file being renamed is open or when that open is done
by particular protocols, or with particular options
or access modes. Similar restrictions may be applied
when a file exists with the target name and is open.
When RENAME is rejected because of such restrictions,
the error NFS4ERR_
When oldname and rename refer to the same file and
that file is open in a fashion such that RENAME
would normally be rejected with NFS4ERR_
If a server does implement such restrictions and those restrictions
include cases of NFSv4 opens preventing successful execution of
a rename, the server needs to recall any delegations that could
hide the existence of opens relevant to that decision. This is
because when a client holds a delegation, the server
might not have an accurate account of the opens for that client, since
the client may execute OPENs and CLOSEs locally. The RENAME operation
need only be delayed until a definitive result can be obtained. For
example, if there are multiple delegations and one of them establishes
an open whose presence would prevent the rename, given the server's
semantics, NFS4ERR_
If the current filehandle or the saved filehandle designates a
directory for which another client holds a directory delegation,
then, unless the situation can be resolved by sending a notification,
the delegation MUST be recalled, and the operation cannot proceed
until the delegation is returned or revoked. Except where this
happens very quickly, one or more NFS4ERR_
When the current and saved filehandles are the
same and they designate a directory for which one
or more directory delegations exist, then, when
those delegations request such notifications,
a notification of type NOTIFY4_
When the current and saved filehandles are not the same:¶
-
If the current filehandle designates a directory for which
one or more directory delegations exist, then, when those
delegations request such notifications, NOTIFY4_
ADD_ ENTRY will be generated as a result of this operation. When a file is removed because it has the same name as the target, if that removal is done atomically with the rename, a NOTIFY4_ REMOVE_ ENTRY notification will not be generated. Instead, the deletion of the file will be reported as part of the NOTIFY4_ ADD_ ENTRY notification.¶ -
If the saved filehandle designates a directory for which
one or more directory delegations exist, then, when those
delegations request such notifications, NOTIFY4_
REMOVE_ ENTRY will be generated as a result of this operation.¶
If the object being renamed has file delegations
held by clients other than the one doing the RENAME,
the delegations MUST be recalled, and the
operation cannot proceed
until each such delegation is returned
or revoked. Note that in the case of multiply linked files,
the delegation recall requirement applies even if the
delegation was obtained through a different name than the
one being renamed.
In all cases in which delegations are recalled, the server
is likely to return one or more NFS4ERR_
The RENAME operation must be atomic to the client. The statement
"source and target directories MUST reside on the same file system
on the server"
means that the fsid fields in the attributes for the
directories are the same. If they reside on different file systems,
the error NFS4ERR_
Based on the value of the fh_
On some servers, the file names "." and ".." are illegal as either
oldname or newname, and will result in the error NFS4ERR_
If either of the source or target filehandles are not directories, the
server will return NFS4ERR_
18.27. Operation 31: RESTOREFH - Restore Saved Filehandle
18.27.2. RESULTS
struct RESTOREFH4res {
/*
* If status is NFS4_OK,
* new CURRENT_FH: value of saved fh
*/
nfsstat4 status;
};18.27.3. DESCRIPTION
The RESTOREFH operation sets the current filehandle and stateid to the values in the
saved filehandle and stateid. If
there is no saved filehandle, then the server will
return the error NFS4ERR_
See Section 16.2.3.1.1 for more details on the current filehandle.¶
See Section 16.2.3.1.2 for more details on the current stateid.¶
18.27.4. IMPLEMENTATION
Operations like OPEN and LOOKUP use the current filehandle to represent a directory and replace it with a new filehandle. Assuming that the previous filehandle was saved with a SAVEFH operator, the previous filehandle can be restored as the current filehandle. This is commonly used to obtain post-operation attributes for the directory, e.g.,¶
PUTFH (directory filehandle)
SAVEFH
GETATTR attrbits (pre-op dir attrs)
CREATE optbits "foo" attrs
GETATTR attrbits (file attributes)
RESTOREFH
GETATTR attrbits (post-op dir attrs)18.28. Operation 32: SAVEFH - Save Current Filehandle
18.28.2. RESULTS
struct SAVEFH4res {
/*
* If status is NFS4_OK,
* new SAVED_FH: value of current fh
*/
nfsstat4 status;
};18.28.3. DESCRIPTION
The SAVEFH operation saves the current filehandle and stateid. If a previous filehandle was saved, then it is no longer accessible. The saved filehandle can be restored as the current filehandle with the RESTOREFH operator.¶
On success, the current filehandle retains its value.¶
See Section 16.2.3.1.1 for more details on the current filehandle.¶
See Section 16.2.3.1.2 for more details on the current stateid.¶
18.29. Operation 33: SECINFO - Obtain Available Security
18.29.2. RESULTS
/*
* From RFC 2203
*/
enum rpc_gss_svc_t {
RPC_GSS_SVC_NONE = 1,
RPC_GSS_SVC_INTEGRITY = 2,
RPC_GSS_SVC_PRIVACY = 3
};
struct rpcsec_gss_info {
sec_oid4 oid;
qop4 qop;
rpc_gss_svc_t service;
};
/* RPCSEC_GSS has a value of '6' - See RFC 2203 */
union secinfo4 switch (uint32_t flavor) {
case RPCSEC_GSS:
rpcsec_gss_info flavor_info;
default:
void;
};
typedef secinfo4 SECINFO4resok<>;
union SECINFO4res switch (nfsstat4 status) {
case NFS4_OK:
/* CURRENTFH: consumed */
SECINFO4resok resok4;
default:
void;
};18.29.3. DESCRIPTION
The SECINFO operation is used by the client to obtain a list of
valid RPC authentication flavors for a specific directory
filehandle, file name pair. SECINFO should apply the same
access methodology used for LOOKUP when evaluating the name.
Therefore, if the requester does not have the appropriate access
to LOOKUP the name, then SECINFO MUST behave the same way and
return NFS4ERR_
The result will contain an array that represents the security
mechanisms available, with an order corresponding to the
server's preferences, the most preferred being first in the
array. The client is free to pick whatever security mechanism it
both desires and supports, or to pick in the server's preference
order the first one it supports. The array entries are
represented by the secinfo4 structure. The field 'flavor' will
contain a value of AUTH_
For the flavors AUTH_
On success, the current filehandle is consumed (see
Section 2.6.3.1.1.8), and if the
next operation after SECINFO tries to use the current filehandle,
that operation will fail with the status NFS4ERR_
If the name has a length of zero, or if the name does not obey
the UTF-8 definition (assuming UTF-8 capabilities are enabled; see
Section 14.4), the error NFS4ERR_
See Section 2.6 for additional information on the use of SECINFO.¶
18.29.4. IMPLEMENTATION
The SECINFO operation is expected to be used by the NFS client
when the error value of NFS4ERR_
As mentioned, the server's security
policies will determine when a client
request receives NFS4ERR_
With the exception of LINK and RENAME,
the set of operations that can return NFS4ERR_
The READDIR operation will not directly return the
NFS4ERR_
To resolve an error return of
NFS4ERR_
- For LOOKUP and OPEN, the client will use SECINFO with the same current filehandle and name as provided in the original LOOKUP or OPEN to enumerate the available security triples.¶
-
For the rdattr_
error, the client will use SECINFO with the same current filehandle as provided in the original READDIR. The name passed to SECINFO will be that of the directory entry (as returned from READDIR) that had the NFS4ERR_ WRONGSEC error in the rdattr_ error attribute.¶ -
For PUTFH, PUTROOTFH, PUTPUBFH, RESTOREFH, LINK, and RENAME, the client will use SECINFO_
NO_ NAME { style = SECINFO_ STYLE4_ CURRENT_ FH }. The client will prefix the SECINFO_ NO_ NAME operation with the appropriate PUTFH, PUTPUBFH, or PUTROOTFH operation that provides the filehandle originally provided by the PUTFH, PUTPUBFH, PUTROOTFH, or RESTOREFH operation.¶ NOTE: In NFSv4.0, the client was required to use SECINFO, and had to reconstruct the parent of the original filehandle and the component name of the original filehandle. The introduction in NFSv4.1 of SECINFO_
NO_ NAME obviates the need for reconstruction.¶ -
For LOOKUPP, the client will
use SECINFO_
NO_ NAME { style = SECINFO_ STYLE4_ PARENT } and provide the filehandle that equals the filehandle originally provided to LOOKUPP.¶
See Section 21 for a discussion on
the recommendations for the security flavor used by SECINFO and
SECINFO_
18.30. Operation 34: SETATTR - Set Attributes
18.30.1. ARGUMENTS
struct SETATTR4args {
/* CURRENT_FH: target object */
stateid4 stateid;
fattr4 obj_attributes;
};18.30.3. DESCRIPTION
The SETATTR operation changes one or more of the attributes of a file system object. The new attributes are specified with a bitmap and the attributes that follow the bitmap in bit order.¶
The stateid argument for SETATTR is used to provide byte-range locking
context that is necessary for SETATTR requests that set the size
attribute. Since setting the size attribute modifies the file's data,
it has the same locking requirements as a corresponding WRITE. Any
SETATTR that sets the size attribute is incompatible with a share
reservation that specifies OPEN4_
On either success or failure of the operation, the server will return
the attrsset bitmask to represent what (if any) attributes were
successfully set. The attrsset in the response is a subset of the
attrmask field of the obj_
On success, the current filehandle retains its value.¶
18.30.4. IMPLEMENTATION
If the request specifies the owner attribute to be set, the server SHOULD allow the operation to succeed if the current owner of the object matches the value specified in the request. Some servers may be implemented in a way as to prohibit the setting of the owner attribute unless the requester has privilege to do so. If the server is lenient in this one case of matching owner values, the client implementation may be simplified in cases of creation of an object (e.g., an exclusive create via OPEN) followed by a SETATTR.¶
The file size attribute is used to request changes to the size of a file. A value of zero causes the file to be truncated, a value less than the current size of the file causes data from new size to the end of the file to be discarded, and a size greater than the current size of the file causes logically zeroed data bytes to be added to the end of the file. Servers are free to implement this using unallocated bytes (holes) or allocated data bytes set to zero. Clients should not make any assumptions regarding a server's implementation of this feature, beyond that the bytes in the affected byte-range returned by READ will be zeroed. Servers MUST support extending the file size via SETATTR.¶
SETATTR is not guaranteed to be atomic. A failed SETATTR may partially change a file's attributes, hence the reason why the reply always includes the status and the list of attributes that were set.¶
If the object whose attributes are being changed has a file delegation
that is held by a client other than the one doing the SETATTR,
the delegation(s) must be recalled, and the
operation cannot proceed to actually change an attribute
until each such delegation is returned
or revoked.
In all cases in which delegations are recalled, the server
is likely to return one or more NFS4ERR_
If the object whose attributes are being set is a directory
and another client holds a directory delegation for that
directory, then if enabled, asynchronous notifications will be generated
when the set of attributes changed has a non-null intersection
with the set of attributes for which notification is requested.
Notifications of type NOTIFY4_
If the object whose attributes are being set is a member of
the directory for which another client holds a directory delegation,
then asynchronous notifications will be generated
when the set of attributes changed has a non-null intersection
with the set of attributes for which notification is requested.
Notifications of type NOTIFY4_
Changing the size of a file with SETATTR indirectly
changes the time_
The attributes time_
If server and client times differ, programs that compare client time to file times can break. A time synchronization protocol should be used to limit client/server time skew.¶
Use of a COMPOUND containing a VERIFY operation specifying only the change attribute, immediately followed by a SETATTR, provides a means whereby a client may specify a request that emulates the functionality of the SETATTR guard mechanism of NFSv3. Since the function of the guard mechanism is to avoid changes to the file attributes based on stale information, delays between checking of the guard condition and the setting of the attributes have the potential to compromise this function, as would the corresponding delay in the NFSv4 emulation. Therefore, NFSv4.1 servers SHOULD take care to avoid such delays, to the degree possible, when executing such a request.¶
If the server does not support an attribute as requested by the
client, the server SHOULD return NFS4ERR_
A mask of the attributes actually set is returned by SETATTR in all
cases. That mask MUST NOT include attribute bits not requested to be
set by the client.
If the attribute masks in the request and
reply are equal, the status field in the reply MUST be NFS4_
18.31. Operation 37: VERIFY - Verify Same Attributes
18.31.3. DESCRIPTION
The VERIFY operation is used to verify that attributes have the value
assumed by the client before proceeding with the following operations in
the COMPOUND request. If any of the attributes do not match, then the
error NFS4ERR_
18.31.4. IMPLEMENTATION
One possible use of the VERIFY operation is the following series of operations. With this, the client is attempting to verify that the file being removed will match what the client expects to be removed. This series can help prevent the unintended deletion of a file.¶
PUTFH (directory filehandle)
LOOKUP (file name)
VERIFY (filehandle == fh)
PUTFH (directory filehandle)
REMOVE (file name)This series does not prevent a second client from removing and creating a new file in the middle of this sequence, but it does help avoid the unintended result.¶
In the case that a RECOMMENDED attribute is specified in the VERIFY
operation and the server does not support that attribute for the
file system object, the error NFS4ERR_
When the attribute rdattr_
18.32. Operation 38: WRITE - Write to File
18.32.1. ARGUMENTS
enum stable_how4 {
UNSTABLE4 = 0,
DATA_SYNC4 = 1,
FILE_SYNC4 = 2
};
struct WRITE4args {
/* CURRENT_FH: file */
stateid4 stateid;
offset4 offset;
stable_how4 stable;
opaque data<>;
};18.32.2. RESULTS
struct WRITE4resok {
count4 count;
stable_how4 committed;
verifier4 writeverf;
};
union WRITE4res switch (nfsstat4 status) {
case NFS4_OK:
WRITE4resok resok4;
default:
void;
};18.32.3. DESCRIPTION
The WRITE operation is used to write data to a regular file. The target file is specified by the current filehandle. The offset specifies the offset where the data should be written. An offset of zero specifies that the write should start at the beginning of the file. The count, as encoded as part of the opaque data parameter, represents the number of bytes of data that are to be written. If the count is zero, the WRITE will succeed and return a count of zero subject to permissions checking. The server MAY write fewer bytes than requested by the client.¶
The client specifies with the stable parameter the method
of how the data is to be processed by the server. If stable is
FILE_
Except when special stateids are used, the stateid value for a WRITE request represents a value returned from a previous byte-range LOCK or OPEN request or the stateid associated with a delegation. The stateid identifies the associated owners if any and is used by the server to verify that the associated locks are still valid (e.g., have not been revoked).¶
Upon successful completion, the following results are returned. The count result is the number of bytes of data written to the file. The server may write fewer bytes than requested. If so, the actual number of bytes written starting at location, offset, is returned.¶
The server also returns an indication of the level of commitment of the data and metadata via committed. Per Table 20,¶
- The server MAY commit the data at a stronger level than requested.¶
- The server MUST commit the data at a level at least as high as that committed.¶
| stable | committed |
|---|---|
| UNSTABLE4 | FILE_ |
| DATA_ |
FILE_ |
| FILE_ |
FILE_ |
The final portion of the result is the field writeverf. This field is the write verifier and is a cookie that the client can use to determine whether a server has changed instance state (e.g., server restart) between a call to WRITE and a subsequent call to either WRITE or COMMIT. This cookie MUST be unchanged during a single instance of the NFSv4.1 server and MUST be unique between instances of the NFSv4.1 server. If the cookie changes, then the client MUST assume that any data written with an UNSTABLE4 value for committed and an old writeverf in the reply has been lost and will need to be recovered.¶
If a client writes data to the server with the stable argument set to
UNSTABLE4 and the reply yields a committed response of DATA_
For a WRITE with a stateid value of all bits equal to zero, the server MAY allow the WRITE to be serviced subject to mandatory byte-range locks or the current share deny modes for the file. For a WRITE with a stateid value of all bits equal to 1, the server MUST NOT allow the WRITE operation to bypass locking checks at the server and otherwise is treated as if a stateid of all bits equal to zero were used.¶
On success, the current filehandle retains its value.¶
18.32.4. IMPLEMENTATION
It is possible for the server to write fewer bytes of data than requested by the client. In this case, the server SHOULD NOT return an error unless no data was written at all. If the server writes less than the number of bytes specified, the client will need to send another WRITE to write the remaining data.¶
It is assumed that the act of writing data to
a file will cause the time_
Stable storage is persistent storage that survives:¶
- Repeated power failures.¶
- Hardware failures (of any board, power supply, etc.).¶
- Repeated software crashes and restarts.¶
This definition does not address failure of the stable storage module itself.¶
The verifier is defined to allow a client to detect different instances of an NFSv4.1 protocol server over which cached, uncommitted data may be lost. In the most likely case, the verifier allows the client to detect server restarts. This information is required so that the client can safely determine whether the server could have lost cached data. If the server fails unexpectedly and the client has uncommitted data from previous WRITE requests (done with the stable argument set to UNSTABLE4 and in which the result committed was returned as UNSTABLE4 as well), the server might not have flushed cached data to stable storage. The burden of recovery is on the client, and the client will need to retransmit the data to the server.¶
A suggested verifier would be to use the time that the server was last started (if restarting the server results in lost buffers).¶
The reply's committed field allows the client to do more
effective caching. If the server is committing all WRITE requests to
stable storage, then it SHOULD return with committed set to FILE_
Some implementations may return NFS4ERR_
In the case that the current filehandle is of
type NF4DIR, the server will return NFS4ERR_
If mandatory byte-range locking is in effect for the file,
and the corresponding byte-range of the data to
be written to the file is READ_
If the stateid's owner had a conflicting READ_
If one or more other clients have delegations for the file being
written, those delegations MUST be recalled, and the
operation cannot proceed until those delegations are returned
or revoked. Except where this
happens very quickly, one or more NFS4ERR_
18.33. Operation 40: BACKCHANNEL_CTL - Backchannel Control
18.33.1. ARGUMENT
typedef opaque gsshandle4_t<>;
struct gss_cb_handles4 {
rpc_gss_svc_t gcbp_service; /* RFC 2203 */
gsshandle4_t gcbp_handle_from_server;
gsshandle4_t gcbp_handle_from_client;
};
union callback_sec_parms4 switch (uint32_t cb_secflavor) {
case AUTH_NONE:
void;
case AUTH_SYS:
authsys_parms cbsp_sys_cred; /* RFC 5531 */
case RPCSEC_GSS:
gss_cb_handles4 cbsp_gss_handles;
};
struct BACKCHANNEL_CTL4args {
uint32_t bca_cb_program;
callback_sec_parms4 bca_sec_parms<>;
};18.33.3. DESCRIPTION
The BACKCHANNEL_
The arguments of the BACKCHANNEL_
BACKCHANNEL_
If the RPCSEC_
If an RPCSEC_
18.34. Operation 41: BIND_CONN_TO_SESSION - Associate Connection with Session
18.34.1. ARGUMENT
enum channel_dir_from_client4 {
CDFC4_FORE = 0x1,
CDFC4_BACK = 0x2,
CDFC4_FORE_OR_BOTH = 0x3,
CDFC4_BACK_OR_BOTH = 0x7
};
struct BIND_CONN_TO_SESSION4args {
sessionid4 bctsa_sessid;
channel_dir_from_client4
bctsa_dir;
bool bctsa_use_conn_in_rdma_mode;
};18.34.2. RESULT
enum channel_dir_from_server4 {
CDFS4_FORE = 0x1,
CDFS4_BACK = 0x2,
CDFS4_BOTH = 0x3
};
struct BIND_CONN_TO_SESSION4resok {
sessionid4 bctsr_sessid;
channel_dir_from_server4
bctsr_dir;
bool bctsr_use_conn_in_rdma_mode;
};
union BIND_CONN_TO_SESSION4res
switch (nfsstat4 bctsr_status) {
case NFS4_OK:
BIND_CONN_TO_SESSION4resok
bctsr_resok4;
default: void;
};18.34.3. DESCRIPTION
BIND_
If, when the client ID was created, the client opted for SP4_
The field bctsa_
See the CREATE_
Invoking BIND_
18.34.4. IMPLEMENTATION
If a session's channel loses all connections, depending on
the client ID's state protection and type of channel,
the client might need to use
BIND_
Suppose SP4_
- The client reconnects.¶
-
The client assumes that the SET_
SSV was executed, and so sends BIND_ CONN_ TO_ SESSION with the subkey (derived from the new SSV, i.e., what SET_ SSV would have set the SSV to) used as the key for the RPCSEC_ GSS credential message integrity codes.¶ -
If the request succeeds, this means that the original attempted SET_
SSV did execute successfully. The client re-sends the original SET_ SSV, which the server will reply to via the reply cache.¶ -
If the server returns an RPC authentication error,
this means that the server's current SSV was not changed
(and the SET_
SSV was likely not executed). The client then tries BIND_ CONN_ TO_ SESSION with the subkey derived from the old SSV as the key for the RPCSEC_ GSS message integrity codes.¶ -
The attempted BIND_
CONN_ TO_ SESSION with the old SSV should succeed. If so, the client re-sends the original SET_ SSV . If the original SET_ SSV was not executed, then the server executes it. If the original SET_ SSV was executed but failed, the server will return the SET_ SSV from the reply cache.¶
18.35. Operation 42: EXCHANGE_ID - Instantiate Client ID
The EXCHANGE_
18.35.1. ARGUMENT
const EXCHGID4_FLAG_SUPP_MOVED_REFER = 0x00000001;
const EXCHGID4_FLAG_SUPP_MOVED_MIGR = 0x00000002;
const EXCHGID4_FLAG_BIND_PRINC_STATEID = 0x00000100;
const EXCHGID4_FLAG_USE_NON_PNFS = 0x00010000;
const EXCHGID4_FLAG_USE_PNFS_MDS = 0x00020000;
const EXCHGID4_FLAG_USE_PNFS_DS = 0x00040000;
const EXCHGID4_FLAG_MASK_PNFS = 0x00070000;
const EXCHGID4_FLAG_UPD_CONFIRMED_REC_A = 0x40000000;
const EXCHGID4_FLAG_CONFIRMED_R = 0x80000000;
struct state_protect_ops4 {
bitmap4 spo_must_enforce;
bitmap4 spo_must_allow;
};
struct ssv_sp_parms4 {
state_protect_ops4 ssp_ops;
sec_oid4 ssp_hash_algs<>;
sec_oid4 ssp_encr_algs<>;
uint32_t ssp_window;
uint32_t ssp_num_gss_handles;
};
enum state_protect_how4 {
SP4_NONE = 0,
SP4_MACH_CRED = 1,
SP4_SSV = 2
};
union state_protect4_a switch(state_protect_how4 spa_how) {
case SP4_NONE:
void;
case SP4_MACH_CRED:
state_protect_ops4 spa_mach_ops;
case SP4_SSV:
ssv_sp_parms4 spa_ssv_parms;
};
struct EXCHANGE_ID4args {
client_owner4 eia_clientowner;
uint32_t eia_flags;
state_protect4_a eia_state_protect;
nfs_impl_id4 eia_client_impl_id<1>;
};18.35.2. RESULT
struct ssv_prot_info4 {
state_protect_ops4 spi_ops;
uint32_t spi_hash_alg;
uint32_t spi_encr_alg;
uint32_t spi_ssv_len;
uint32_t spi_window;
gsshandle4_t spi_handles<>;
};
union state_protect4_r switch(state_protect_how4 spr_how) {
case SP4_NONE:
void;
case SP4_MACH_CRED:
state_protect_ops4 spr_mach_ops;
case SP4_SSV:
ssv_prot_info4 spr_ssv_info;
};
struct EXCHANGE_ID4resok {
clientid4 eir_clientid;
sequenceid4 eir_sequenceid;
uint32_t eir_flags;
state_protect4_r eir_state_protect;
server_owner4 eir_server_owner;
opaque eir_server_scope<NFS4_OPAQUE_LIMIT>;
nfs_impl_id4 eir_server_impl_id<1>;
};
union EXCHANGE_ID4res switch (nfsstat4 eir_status) {
case NFS4_OK:
EXCHANGE_ID4resok eir_resok4;
default:
void;
};18.35.3. DESCRIPTION
The client uses the EXCHANGE_
The client ID returned from this
operation will be associated with the connection
on which the EXCHANGE_
In situations in which the registration of the
client_
If the flag EXCHGID4_
The value eir_
EXCHANGE_
The eia_
A server MUST NOT provide the same client ID to two different
incarnations of an eia_
In addition to the client ID and sequence ID, the server
returns a server owner
The client ID returned by EXCHANGE_
The server, as defined by the unique identity expressed
in the so_
-
The capabilities expressed by the following bits, which come from the results of EXCHANGE_
ID :¶ - EXCHGID4_
FLAG_ SUPP_ MOVED_ REFER¶ - EXCHGID4_
FLAG_ SUPP_ MOVED_ MIGR¶ - EXCHGID4_
FLAG_ BIND_ PRINC_ STATEID¶ - EXCHGID4_
FLAG_ USE_ NON_ PNFS¶ - EXCHGID4_
FLAG_ USE_ PNFS_ MDS¶ - EXCHGID4_
FLAG_ USE_ PNFS_ DS¶
These properties may be updated by subsequent EXCHANGE_
ID operations on confirmed client IDs though the server MAY refuse to change them.¶ - EXCHGID4_
-
The state protection method used, one of SP4_
NONE, SP4_ MACH_ CRED, or SP4_ SSV, as set by the spa_ how field of the arguments to EXCHANGE_ ID . Once the client ID is confirmed, this property cannot be updated by subsequent EXCHANGE_ ID operations.¶ -
For SP4_
MACH_ CRED or SP4_ SSV state protection:¶ -
The list of operations
(spo_ must_ enforce ) that MUST use the specified state protection. This list comes from the results of EXCHANGE_ ID .¶ -
The list of operations
(spo_ must_ allow ) that MAY use the specified state protection. This list comes from the results of EXCHANGE_ ID .¶
Once the client ID is confirmed, these properties cannot be updated by subsequent EXCHANGE_
ID requests.¶ -
The list of operations
-
For SP4_
SSV protection:¶ -
The OID of the hash algorithm. This property is
represented by one of the algorithms in the
ssp_
hash_ algs field of the EXCHANGE_ ID arguments. Once the client ID is confirmed, this property cannot be updated by subsequent EXCHANGE_ ID requests.¶ -
The OID of the encryption algorithm. This property
is represented by one of the algorithms in the
ssp_
encr_ algs field of the EXCHANGE_ ID arguments. Once the client ID is confirmed, this property cannot be updated by subsequent EXCHANGE_ ID requests.¶ -
The length of the SSV. This property is represented by the spi_
ssv_ len field in the EXCHANGE_ ID results. Once the client ID is confirmed, this property cannot be updated by subsequent EXCHANGE_ ID operations.¶ There are REQUIRED and RECOMMENDED relationships among the length of the key of the encryption algorithm ("key length"), the length of the output of hash algorithm ("hash length"), and the length of the SSV ("SSV length").¶
- key length MUST be <= hash length. This is because the keys used for the encryption algorithm are actually subkeys derived from the SSV, and the derivation is via the hash algorithm. The selection of an encryption algorithm with a key length that exceeded the length of the output of the hash algorithm would require padding, and thus weaken the use of the encryption algorithm.¶
- hash length SHOULD be <= SSV length. This is because the SSV is a key used to derive subkeys via an HMAC, and it is recommended that the key used as input to an HMAC be at least as long as the length of the HMAC's hash algorithm's output (see Section 3 of [52]).¶
- key length SHOULD be <= SSV length. This is a transitive result of the above two invariants.¶
- key length SHOULD be >= hash length / 2. This is because the subkey derivation is via an HMAC and it is recommended that if the HMAC has to be truncated, it should not be truncated to less than half the hash length (see Section 4 of RFC 2104 [52]).¶
-
Number of concurrent versions of the SSV the client
and server will support (see Section 2.10.9).
This property is represented by spi_
window in the EXCHANGE_ ID results. The property may be updated by subsequent EXCHANGE_ ID operations.¶
-
The OID of the hash algorithm. This property is
represented by one of the algorithms in the
ssp_
-
The client's implementation ID as represented by
the eia_
client_ impl_ id field of the arguments. The property may be updated by subsequent EXCHANGE_ ID requests.¶ -
The server's implementation ID as represented by
the eir_
server_ impl_ id field of the reply. The property may be updated by replies to subsequent EXCHANGE_ ID requests.¶
The eia_
The EXCHGID4_
If EXCHGID4_
If EXCHGID4_
When the EXCHGID4_
When the EXCHGID4_
When EXCHGID4_
The EXCHGID4_
The spa_
-
SP4_
NONE . The client does not request the NFSv4.1 server to enforce state protection. The NFSv4.1 server MUST NOT enforce state protection for the returned client ID.¶ -
SP4_
MACH_ CRED . If spa_ how is SP4_ MACH_ CRED, then the client MUST send the EXCHANGE_ ID operation with RPCSEC_ GSS as the security flavor, and with a service of RPC_ GSS_ SVC_ INTEGRITY or RPC_ GSS_ SVC_ PRIVACY . If SP4_ MACH_ CRED is specified, then the client wants to use an RPCSEC_ GSS -based machine credential to protect its state. The server MUST note the principal the EXCHANGE_ ID operation was sent with, and the GSS mechanism used. These notes collectively comprise the machine credential.¶ After the client ID is confirmed, as long as the lease associated with the client ID is unexpired, a subsequent EXCHANGE_
ID operation that uses the same eia_ clientowner .co_ owner as the first EXCHANGE_ ID MUST also use the same machine credential as the first EXCHANGE_ ID . The server returns the same client ID for the subsequent EXCHANGE_ ID as that returned from the first EXCHANGE_ ID .¶ -
SP4_
SSV . If spa_ how is SP4_ SSV, then the client MUST send the EXCHANGE_ ID operation with RPCSEC_ GSS as the security flavor, and with a service of RPC_ GSS_ SVC_ INTEGRITY or RPC_ GSS_ SVC_ PRIVACY . If SP4_ SSV is specified, then the client wants to use the SSV to protect its state. The server records the credential used in the request as the machine credential (as defined above) for the eia_ clientowner .co_ owner . The CREATE_ SESSION operation that confirms the client ID MUST use the same machine credential.¶
When a client specifies SP4_
Note that if SP4_
There is a corresponding result, also called spo_
If spo_
The second list is spo_
The corresponding result, also called
spo_
The purpose of spo_
The SP4_
- ssp_
hash_ algs : -
This is the set of algorithms the client supports for the purpose of computing the digests needed for the internal SSV GSS mechanism and for the SET_
SSV operation. Each algorithm is specified as an object identifier (OID). The REQUIRED algorithms for a server are id-sha1, id-sha224, id-sha256, id-sha384, and id-sha512 [25].¶ Due to known weaknesses in id-sha1, it is RECOMMENDED that the client specify at least one algorithm within ssp_
hash_ algs other than id-sha1.¶ The algorithm the server selects among the set is indicated in spi_
hash_ alg, a field of spr_ ssv_ prot_ info . The field spi_ hash_ alg is an index into the array ssp_ hash_ algs . Because of known the weaknesses in id-sha1, it is RECOMMENDED that it not be selected by the server as long as ssp_ hash_ algs contains any other supported algorithm.¶ If the server does not support any of the offered algorithms, it returns NFS4ERR_
HASH_ ALG_ UNSUPP . If ssp_ hash_ algs is empty, the server MUST return NFS4ERR_ INVAL .¶ - ssp_
encr_ algs : -
This is the set of algorithms the client supports for the
purpose of providing privacy protection for the internal
SSV GSS mechanism. Each algorithm is
specified as an OID.
The REQUIRED algorithm for a server is id-aes256-CBC.
The RECOMMENDED algorithms are id-aes192-CBC and id-aes128-CBC
[26]. The selected algorithm is
returned in spi_
encr_ alg, an index into ssp_ encr_ algs . If the server does not support any of the offered algorithms, it returns NFS4ERR_ ENCR_ ALG_ UNSUPP . If ssp_ encr_ algs is empty, the server MUST return NFS4ERR_ INVAL . Note that due to previously stated requirements and recommendations on the relationships between key length and hash length, some combinations of RECOMMENDED and REQUIRED encryption algorithm and hash algorithm either SHOULD NOT or MUST NOT be used. Table 21 summarizes the illegal and discouraged combinations.¶ - ssp_
window : -
This is the number of SSV versions the client wants
the server to maintain (i.e., each successful call to SET_
SSV produces a new version of the SSV). If ssp_ window is zero, the server MUST return NFS4ERR_ INVAL . The server responds with spi_ window, which MUST NOT exceed ssp_ window and MUST be at least one. Any requests on the backchannel or fore channel that are using a version of the SSV that is outside the window will fail with an ONC RPC authentication error, and the requester will have to retry them with the same slot ID and sequence ID.¶ - ssp_
num_ gss_ handles : -
This is the number of RPCSEC_
GSS handles the server should create that are based on the GSS SSV mechanism (see Section 2.10.9). It is not the total number of RPCSEC_ GSS handles for the client ID. Indeed, subsequent calls to EXCHANGE_ ID will add RPCSEC_ GSS handles. The server responds with a list of handles in spi_ handles . If the client asks for at least one handle and the server cannot create it, the server MUST return an error. The handles in spi_ handles are not available for use until the client ID is confirmed, which could be immediately if EXCHANGE_ ID returns EXCHGID4_ FLAG_ CONFIRMED_ R, or upon successful confirmation from CREATE_ SESSION .¶ While a client ID can span all the connections that are connected to a server sharing the same eir_
server_ owner .so_ major_ id, the RPCSEC_ GSS handles returned in spi_ handles can only be used on connections connected to a server that returns the same the eir_ server_ owner .so_ major_ id and eir_ server_ owner .so_ minor_ id on each connection. It is permissible for the client to set ssp_ num_ gss_ handles to zero; the client can create more handles with another EXCHANGE_ ID call.¶ Because each SSV RPCSEC_
GSS handle shares a common SSV GSS context, there are security considerations specific to this situation discussed in Section 2.10.10.¶ The seq_
window (see Section 5.2.3.1 of RFC 2203 [4]) of each RPCSEC_ GSS handle in spi_ handle MUST be the same as the seq_ window of the RPCSEC_ GSS handle used for the credential of the RPC request of which the EXCHANGE_ ID operation was sent as a part.¶
| Encryption Algorithm | MUST NOT be combined with | SHOULD NOT be combined with |
|---|---|---|
| id-aes128-CBC | id-sha384, id-sha512 | |
| id-aes192-CBC | id-sha1 | id-sha512 |
| id-aes256-CBC | id-sha1, id-sha224 |
The arguments include an array of up to one
element in length called eia_
A possible use for implementation identifiers
would be in diagnostic software that extracts
this information in an attempt to identify
interoperabilit
Because it is possible that some implementations might
violate the protocol specification and interpret
the identity information, implementations MUST
provide facilities to allow the NFSv4 client and server
to be configured to set the contents of the nfs_
18.35.4. IMPLEMENTATION
A server's client record is a 5-tuple:¶
-
co_
ownerid :¶ The client identifier string, from the eia_
clientowner structure of the EXCHANGE_ ID4args structure.¶ -
co_
verifier :¶ A client-specific value used to indicate incarnations (where a client restart represents a new incarnation), from the eia_
clientowner structure of the EXCHANGE_ ID4args structure.¶ -
principal:¶
The principal that was defined in the RPC header's credential and/or verifier at the time the client record was established.¶
-
client ID:¶
The shorthand client identifier, generated by the server and returned via the eir_
clientid field in the EXCHANGE_ ID4resok structure.¶ -
confirmed:¶
A private field on the server indicating whether or not a client record has been confirmed. A client record is confirmed if there has been a successful CREATE_
SESSION operation to confirm it. Otherwise, it is unconfirmed. An unconfirmed record is established by an EXCHANGE_ ID call. Any unconfirmed record that is not confirmed within a lease period SHOULD be removed.¶
The following identifiers represent special values for the fields in the records.¶
- ownerid_
arg : -
The value of the eia_
clientowner .co_ ownerid subfield of the EXCHANGE_ ID4args structure of the current request.¶ - verifier_
arg : -
The value of the eia_
clientowner .co_ verifier subfield of the EXCHANGE_ ID4args structure of the current request.¶ - old_
verifier_ arg : -
A value of the eia_
clientowner .co_ verifier field of a client record received in a previous request; this is distinct from verifier_ arg .¶ - principal_
arg : -
The value of the RPCSEC_
GSS principal for the current request.¶ - old_
principal_ arg : -
A value of the principal of a client record as defined by the
RPC header's credential or verifier of a previous request.
This is distinct from principal_
arg .¶ - clientid_
ret : -
The value of the eir_
clientid field the server will return in the EXCHANGE_ ID4resok structure for the current request.¶ - old_
clientid_ ret : -
The value of the eir_
clientid field the server returned in the EXCHANGE_ ID4resok structure for a previous request. This is distinct from clientid_ ret .¶ - confirmed:
- The client ID has been confirmed.¶
- unconfirmed:
- The client ID has not been confirmed.¶
Since EXCHANGE_
The scenarios are described in terms of the
client record(s) a server has for a given
co_
-
New Owner ID¶
If the server has no client records with eia_
clientowner .co_ ownerid matching ownerid_ arg, and EXCHGID4_ FLAG_ UPD_ CONFIRMED_ REC_ A is not set in the EXCHANGE_ ID, then a new shorthand client ID (let us call it clientid_ ret ) is generated, and the following unconfirmed record is added to the server's state.¶ { ownerid_
arg, verifier_ arg, principal_ arg, clientid_ ret, unconfirmed }¶ Subsequently, the server returns clientid_
ret .¶ -
Non-Update on Existing Client ID¶
If the server has the following confirmed record, and the request does not have EXCHGID4_
FLAG_ UPD_ CONFIRMED_ REC_ A set, then the request is the result of a retried request due to a faulty router or lost connection, or the client is trying to determine if it can perform trunking.¶ { ownerid_
arg, verifier_ arg, principal_ arg, clientid_ ret, confirmed }¶ Since the record has been confirmed, the client must have received the server's reply from the initial EXCHANGE_
ID request. Since the server has a confirmed record, and since EXCHGID4_ FLAG_ UPD_ CONFIRMED_ REC_ A is not set, with the possible exception of eir_ server_ owner .so_ minor_ id, the server returns the same result it did when the client ID's properties were last updated (or if never updated, the result when the client ID was created). The confirmed record is unchanged.¶ -
Client Collision¶
If EXCHGID4_
FLAG_ UPD_ CONFIRMED_ REC_ A is not set, and if the server has the following confirmed record, then this request is likely the result of a chance collision between the values of the eia_ clientowner .co_ ownerid subfield of EXCHANGE_ ID4args for two different clients.¶ { ownerid_
arg, *, old_ principal_ arg, old_ clientid_ ret, confirmed }¶ If there is currently no state associated with old_
clientid_ ret, or if there is state but the lease has expired, then this case is effectively equivalent to the New Owner ID case of Section 18.35.4, Paragraph 7, Item 1. The confirmed record is deleted, the old_ clientid_ ret and its lock state are deleted, a new shorthand client ID is generated, and the following unconfirmed record is added to the server's state.¶ { ownerid_
arg, verifier_ arg, principal_ arg, clientid_ ret, unconfirmed }¶ Subsequently, the server returns clientid_
ret .¶ If old_
clientid_ ret has an unexpired lease with state, then no state of old_ clientid_ ret is changed or deleted. The server returns NFS4ERR_ CLID_ INUSE to indicate that the client should retry with a different value for the eia_ clientowner .co_ ownerid subfield of EXCHANGE_ ID4args . The client record is not changed.¶ -
Replacement of Unconfirmed Record¶
If the EXCHGID4_
FLAG_ UPD_ CONFIRMED_ REC_ A flag is not set, and the server has the following unconfirmed record, then the client is attempting EXCHANGE_ ID again on an unconfirmed client ID, perhaps due to a retry, a client restart before client ID confirmation (i.e., before CREATE_ SESSION was called), or some other reason.¶ { ownerid_
arg, *, *, old_ clientid_ ret, unconfirmed }¶ It is possible that the properties of old_
clientid_ ret are different than those specified in the current EXCHANGE_ ID . Whether or not the properties are being updated, to eliminate ambiguity, the server deletes the unconfirmed record, generates a new client ID (clientid_ ret ), and establishes the following unconfirmed record:¶ { ownerid_
arg, verifier_ arg, principal_ arg, clientid_ ret, unconfirmed }¶ -
Client Restart¶
If EXCHGID4_
FLAG_ UPD_ CONFIRMED_ REC_ A is not set, and if the server has the following confirmed client record, then this request is likely from a previously confirmed client that has restarted.¶ { ownerid_
arg, old_ verifier_ arg, principal_ arg, old_ clientid_ ret, confirmed }¶ Since the previous incarnation of the same client will no longer be making requests, once the new client ID is confirmed by CREATE_
SESSION, byte-range locks and share reservations should be released immediately rather than forcing the new incarnation to wait for the lease time on the previous incarnation to expire. Furthermore, session state should be removed since if the client had maintained that information across restart, this request would not have been sent. If the server supports neither the CLAIM_ DELEGATE_ PREV nor CLAIM_ DELEG_ PREV_ FH claim types, associated delegations should be purged as well; otherwise, delegations are retained and recovery proceeds according to Section 10.2.1.¶ After processing, clientid_
ret is returned to the client and this client record is added:¶ { ownerid_
arg, verifier_ arg, principal_ arg, clientid_ ret, unconfirmed }¶ The previously described confirmed record continues to exist, and thus the same ownerid_
arg exists in both a confirmed and unconfirmed state at the same time. The number of states can collapse to one once the server receives an applicable CREATE_ SESSION or EXCHANGE_ ID .¶ -
If the server subsequently receives a successful
CREATE_
SESSION that confirms clientid_ ret, then the server atomically destroys the confirmed record and makes the unconfirmed record confirmed as described in Section 18.36.3.¶ -
If the server instead subsequently receives
an EXCHANGE_
ID with the client owner equal to ownerid_ arg, one strategy is to simply delete the unconfirmed record, and process the EXCHANGE_ ID as described in the entirety of Section 18.35.4.¶
-
If the server subsequently receives a successful
CREATE_
-
Update¶
If EXCHGID4_
FLAG_ UPD_ CONFIRMED_ REC_ A is set, and the server has the following confirmed record, then this request is an attempt at an update.¶ { ownerid_
arg, verifier_ arg, principal_ arg, clientid_ ret, confirmed }¶ Since the record has been confirmed, the client must have received the server's reply from the initial EXCHANGE_
ID request. The server allows the update, and the client record is left intact.¶ -
Update but Wrong Verifier¶
If EXCHGID4_
FLAG_ UPD_ CONFIRMED_ REC_ A is set, and the server has the following confirmed record, then this request is an illegal attempt at an update, perhaps because of a retry from a previous client incarnation.¶ { ownerid_
arg, old_ verifier_ arg, *, clientid_ ret, confirmed }¶ The server returns NFS4ERR_
NOT_ SAME and leaves the client record intact.¶ -
Update but Wrong Principal¶
If EXCHGID4_
FLAG_ UPD_ CONFIRMED_ REC_ A is set, and the server has the following confirmed record, then this request is an illegal attempt at an update by an unauthorized principal.¶ { ownerid_
arg, verifier_ arg, old_ principal_ arg, clientid_ ret, confirmed }¶ The server returns NFS4ERR_
PERM and leaves the client record intact.¶
18.36. Operation 43: CREATE_SESSION - Create New Session and Confirm Client ID
18.36.1. ARGUMENT
struct channel_attrs4 {
count4 ca_headerpadsize;
count4 ca_maxrequestsize;
count4 ca_maxresponsesize;
count4 ca_maxresponsesize_cached;
count4 ca_maxoperations;
count4 ca_maxrequests;
uint32_t ca_rdma_ird<1>;
};
const CREATE_SESSION4_FLAG_PERSIST = 0x00000001;
const CREATE_SESSION4_FLAG_CONN_BACK_CHAN = 0x00000002;
const CREATE_SESSION4_FLAG_CONN_RDMA = 0x00000004;
struct CREATE_SESSION4args {
clientid4 csa_clientid;
sequenceid4 csa_sequence;
uint32_t csa_flags;
channel_attrs4 csa_fore_chan_attrs;
channel_attrs4 csa_back_chan_attrs;
uint32_t csa_cb_program;
callback_sec_parms4 csa_sec_parms<>;
};18.36.2. RESULT
struct CREATE_SESSION4resok {
sessionid4 csr_sessionid;
sequenceid4 csr_sequence;
uint32_t csr_flags;
channel_attrs4 csr_fore_chan_attrs;
channel_attrs4 csr_back_chan_attrs;
};
union CREATE_SESSION4res switch (nfsstat4 csr_status) {
case NFS4_OK:
CREATE_SESSION4resok csr_resok4;
default:
void;
};18.36.3. DESCRIPTION
This operation is used by the client to create new session objects on the server.¶
CREATE_
In addition to creating a session, CREATE_
- The first session created with a new client ID serves to confirm the creation of that client's state on the server. The server returns the parameter values for the new session.¶
-
The connection CREATE_
SESSION that is sent over is associated with the session's fore channel.¶
The arguments and results of CREATE_
- csa_
clientid : -
This is the client ID with which the new session will be associated.
The corresponding result is csr_
sessionid, the session ID of the new session.¶ - csa_
sequence : -
Each client ID serializes CREATE_
SESSION via a per-client ID sequence number (see Section 18.36.4). The corresponding result is csr_ sequence, which MUST be equal to csa_ sequence .¶
In the next three arguments, the client offers a value that is to be a property of the session. Except where stated otherwise, it is RECOMMENDED that the server accept the value. If it is not acceptable, the server MAY use a different value. Regardless, the server MUST return the value the session will use (which will be either what the client offered, or what the server is insisting on) to the client.¶
- csa_
flags : -
The csa_
flags field contains a list of the following flag bits:¶ - CREATE_
SESSION4_ FLAG_ PERSIST : -
If CREATE_
SESSION4_ FLAG_ PERSIST is set, the client wants the server to provide a persistent reply cache. For sessions in which only idempotent operations will be used (e.g., a read-only session), clients SHOULD NOT set CREATE_ SESSION4_ FLAG_ PERSIST . If the server does not or cannot provide a persistent reply cache, the server MUST NOT set CREATE_ SESSION4_ FLAG_ PERSIST in the field csr_ flags .¶ If the server is a pNFS metadata server, for reasons described in Section 12.5.2 it SHOULD support CREATE_
SESSION4_ FLAG_ PERSIST if it supports the layout_ hint (Section 5.12.4) attribute.¶ - CREATE_
SESSION4_ FLAG_ CONN_ BACK_ CHAN : -
If CREATE_
SESSION4_ FLAG_ CONN_ BACK_ CHAN is set in csa_ flags, the client is requesting that the connection over which the CREATE_ SESSION operation arrived be associated with the session's backchannel in addition to its fore channel. If the server agrees, it sets CREATE_ SESSION4_ FLAG_ CONN_ BACK_ CHAN in the result field csr_ flags . If CREATE_ SESSION4_ FLAG_ CONN_ BACK_ CHAN is not set in csa_ flags, then CREATE_ SESSION4_ FLAG_ CONN_ BACK_ CHAN MUST NOT be set in csr_ flags .¶ - CREATE_
SESSION4_ FLAG_ CONN_ RDMA : -
If CREATE_
SESSION4_ FLAG_ CONN_ RDMA is set in csa_ flags, and if the connection over which the CREATE_ SESSION operation arrived is currently in non-RDMA mode but has the capability to operate in RDMA mode, then the client is requesting that the server "step up" to RDMA mode on the connection. If the server agrees, it sets CREATE_ SESSION4_ FLAG_ CONN_ RDMA in the result field csr_ flags . If CREATE_ SESSION4_ FLAG_ CONN_ RDMA is not set in csa_ flags, then CREATE_ SESSION4_ FLAG_ CONN_ RDMA MUST NOT be set in csr_ flags . Note that once the server agrees to step up, it and the client MUST exchange all future traffic on the connection with RPC RDMA framing and not Record Marking ([32]).¶
- CREATE_
- csa_
fore_ chan_ attrs, csa_ back_ chan_ attrs : -
The csa_
fore_ chan_ attrs and csa_ back_ chan_ attrs fields apply to attributes of the fore channel (which conveys requests originating from the client to the server), and the backchannel (the channel that conveys callback requests originating from the server to the client), respectively. The results are in corresponding structures called csr_ fore_ chan_ attrs and csr_ back_ chan_ attrs . The results establish attributes for each channel, and on all subsequent use of each channel of the session. Each structure has the following fields:¶ - ca_
headerpadsize : -
The maximum amount of padding the requester is willing to apply to ensure that write payloads are aligned on some boundary at the replier. For each channel, the server¶
- ca_
maxrequestsize : -
The maximum size of a COMPOUND or CB_
COMPOUND request that will be sent. This size represents the XDR encoded size of the request, including the RPC headers (including security flavor credentials and verifiers) but excludes any RPC transport framing headers. Imagine a request coming over a non-RDMA TCP/IP connection, and that it has a single Record Marking header preceding it. The maximum allowable count encoded in the header will be ca_ maxrequestsize . If a requester sends a request that exceeds ca_ maxrequestsize, the error NFS4ERR_ REQ_ TOO_ BIG will be returned per the description in Section 2.10.6.4. For each channel, the server MAY decrease this value but MUST NOT increase it.¶ - ca_
maxresponsesize : -
The maximum size of a COMPOUND or CB_
COMPOUND reply that the requester will accept from the replier including RPC headers (see the ca_ maxrequestsize definition). For each channel, the server MAY decrease this value, but MUST NOT increase it. However, if the client selects a value for ca_ maxresponsesize such that a replier on a channel could never send a response, the server SHOULD return NFS4ERR_ TOOSMALL in the CREATE_ SESSION reply. After the session is created, if a requester sends a request for which the size of the reply would exceed this value, the replier will return NFS4ERR_ REP_ TOO_ BIG, per the description in Section 2.10.6.4.¶ - ca_
maxresponsesize_ cached : -
Like ca_
maxresponsesize, but the maximum size of a reply that will be stored in the reply cache (Section 2.10.6.1). For each channel, the server MAY decrease this value, but MUST NOT increase it. If, in the reply to CREATE_ SESSION, the value of ca_ maxresponsesize_ cached of a channel is less than the value of ca_ maxresponsesize of the same channel, then this is an indication to the requester that it needs to be selective about which replies it directs the replier to cache; for example, large replies from non-idempotent operations (e.g., COMPOUND requests with a READ operation) should not be cached. The requester decides which replies to cache via an argument to the SEQUENCE (the sa_ cachethis field, see Section 18.46) or CB_ SEQUENCE (the csa_ cachethis field, see Section 20.9) operations. After the session is created, if a requester sends a request for which the size of the reply would exceed ca_ maxresponsesize_ cached, the replier will return NFS4ERR_ REP_ TOO_ BIG_ TO_ CACHE, per the description in Section 2.10.6.4.¶ - ca_
maxoperations : -
The maximum number of operations the replier
will accept in a COMPOUND or CB_
COMPOUND . For the backchannel, the server MUST NOT change the value the client offers. For the fore channel, the server MAY change the requested value. After the session is created, if a requester sends a COMPOUND or CB_ COMPOUND with more operations than ca_ maxoperations, the replier MUST return NFS4ERR_ TOO_ MANY_ OPS .¶ - ca_
maxrequests : -
The maximum number of concurrent COMPOUND or CB_
COMPOUND requests the requester will send on the session. Subsequent requests will each be assigned a slot identifier by the requester within the range zero to ca_ maxrequests - 1 inclusive. For the backchannel, the server MUST NOT change the value the client offers. For the fore channel, the server MAY change the requested value.¶ - ca_
rdma_ ird : - This array has a maximum of one element. If this array has one element, then the element contains the inbound RDMA read queue depth (IRD). For each channel, the server MAY decrease this value, but MUST NOT increase it.¶
- ca_
- csa_
cb_ program -
This is the ONC RPC program number the server MUST use in
any callbacks sent through the backchannel to the client.
The server MUST specify an ONC RPC program number equal to
csa_
cb_ program and an ONC RPC version number equal to 4 in callbacks sent to the client. If a CB_ COMPOUND is sent to the client, the server MUST use a minor version number of 1. There is no corresponding result.¶ - csa_
sec_ parms -
The field csa_
sec_ parms is an array of acceptable security credentials the server can use on the session's backchannel. Three security flavors are supported: AUTH_ NONE, AUTH_ SYS, and RPCSEC_ GSS . If AUTH_ NONE is specified for a credential, then this says the client is authorizing the server to use AUTH_ NONE on all callbacks for the session. If AUTH_ SYS is specified, then the client is authorizing the server to use AUTH_ SYS on all callbacks, using the credential specified cbsp_ sys_ cred . If RPCSEC_ GSS is specified, then the server is allowed to use the RPCSEC_ GSS context specified in cbsp_ gss_ parms as the RPCSEC_ GSS context in the credential of the RPC header of callbacks to the client. There is no corresponding result.¶ The RPCSEC_
GSS context for the backchannel is specified via a pair of values of data type gsshandle4_ t . The data type gsshandle4_ t represents an RPCSEC_ GSS handle, and is precisely the same as the data type of the "handle" field of the rpc_ gss_ init_ res data type defined in "Context Creation Response - Successful Acceptance", Section 5.2.3.1 of [4].¶ The first RPCSEC_
GSS handle, gcbp_ handle_ from_ server, is the fore handle the server returned to the client (either in the handle field of data type rpc_ gss_ init_ res or as one of the elements of the spi_ handles field returned in the reply to EXCHANGE_ ID ) when the RPCSEC_ GSS context was created on the server. The second handle, gcbp_ handle_ from_ client, is the back handle to which the client will map the RPCSEC_ GSS context. The server can immediately use the value of gcbp_ handle_ from_ client in the RPCSEC_ GSS credential in callback RPCs. That is, the value in gcbp_ handle_ from_ client can be used as the value of the field "handle" in data type rpc_ gss_ cred_ t (see "Elements of the RPCSEC_ GSS Security Protocol", Section 5 of [4]) in callback RPCs. The server MUST use the RPCSEC_ GSS security service specified in gcbp_ service, i.e., it MUST set the "service" field of the rpc_ gss_ cred_ t data type in RPCSEC_ GSS credential to the value of gcbp_ service (see "RPC Request Header", Section 5.3.1 of [4]).¶ If the RPCSEC_
GSS handle identified by gcbp_ handle_ from_ server does not exist on the server, the server will return NFS4ERR_ NOENT .¶ Within each element of csa_
sec_ parms, the fore and back RPCSEC_ GSS contexts MUST share the same GSS context and MUST have the same seq_ window (see Section 5.2.3.1 of RFC 2203 [4]). The fore and back RPCSEC_ GSS context state are independent of each other as far as the RPCSEC_ GSS sequence number (see the seq_ num field in the rpc_ gss_ cred_ t data type of Sections 5 and 5.3.1 of [4]).¶ If an RPCSEC_
GSS handle is using the SSV context (see Section 2.10.9), then because each SSV RPCSEC_ GSS handle shares a common SSV GSS context, there are security considerations specific to this situation discussed in Section 2.10.10.¶
Once the session is created, the first SEQUENCE or
CB_
18.36.4. IMPLEMENTATION
To describe a possible implementation, the same notation for client
records introduced in the description of EXCHANGE_
-
clientid_
arg : The value of the csa_ clientid field of the CREATE_ SESSION4args structure of the current request.¶
Since CREATE_
-
First, this is a reply cache just for
detecting and processing CREATE_
SESSION requests for a given client ID.¶ -
Second, the size of the client ID
reply cache is of one slot (and as a result, the
CREATE_
SESSION request does not carry a slot number). This means that at most one CREATE_ SESSION request for a given client ID can be outstanding.¶
As previously stated, CREATE_
After the client received a reply to an EXCHANGE_
-
Client record look up. The server looks up the client ID
in its client record table.
If the server contains no records
with client ID equal to clientid_
arg, then most likely the client's state has been purged during a period of inactivity, possibly due to a loss of connectivity. NFS4ERR_ STALE_ CLIENTID is returned, and no changes are made to any client records on the server. Otherwise, the server goes to phase 2.¶ -
Sequence ID processing. If csa_
sequenceid is equal to the sequence ID in the client ID's slot, then this is a replay of the previous CREATE_ SESSION request, and the server returns the cached result. If csa_ sequenceid is not equal to the sequence ID in the slot, and is more than one greater (accounting for wraparound), then the server returns the error NFS4ERR_ SEQ_ MISORDERED, and does not change the slot. If csa_ sequenceid is equal to the slot's sequence ID + 1 (accounting for wraparound), then the slot's sequence ID is set to csa_ sequenceid, and the CREATE_ SESSION processing goes to the next phase. A subsequent new CREATE_ SESSION call over the same client ID MUST use a csa_ sequenceid that is one greater than the sequence ID in the slot.¶ -
Client ID confirmation. If this would be the first session for the client ID, the CREATE_
SESSION operation serves to confirm the client ID. Otherwise, the client ID confirmation phase is skipped and only the session creation phase occurs. Any case in which there is more than one record with identical values for client ID represents a server implementation error. Operation in the potential valid cases is summarized as follows.¶ -
Successful Confirmation¶
- If the server has the following unconfirmed record, then this is the expected confirmation of an unconfirmed record.¶
-
{ ownerid, verifier, principal_
arg, clientid_ arg, unconfirmed }¶ - As noted in Section 18.35.4, the server might also have the following confirmed record.¶
-
{ ownerid, old_
verifier, principal_ arg, old_ clientid, confirmed }¶ - The server schedules the replacement of both records with:¶
-
{ ownerid, verifier, principal_
arg, clientid_ arg, confirmed }¶ -
The processing of CREATE_
SESSION continues on to session creation. Once the session is successfully created, the scheduled client record replacement is committed. If the session is not successfully created, then no changes are made to any client records on the server.¶
-
Unsuccessful Confirmation¶
-
If the server has the following record, then the client has
changed principals after the previous EXCHANGE_
ID request, or there has been a chance collision between shorthand client identifiers.¶ -
{ *, *, old_
principal_ arg, clientid_ arg, * }¶ -
Neither of these cases is permissible. Processing stops and
NFS4ERR_
CLID_ INUSE is returned to the client. No changes are made to any client records on the server.¶
-
If the server has the following record, then the client has
changed principals after the previous EXCHANGE_
-
-
Session creation. The server confirmed the client ID, either in this CREATE_
SESSION operation, or a previous CREATE_ SESSION operation. The server examines the remaining fields of the arguments.¶ The server creates the session by recording the parameter values used (including whether the CREATE_
SESSION4_ FLAG_ PERSIST flag is set and has been accepted by the server) and allocating space for the session reply cache (if there is not enough space, the server returns NFS4ERR_ NOSPC ). For each slot in the reply cache, the server sets the sequence ID to zero, and records an entry containing a COMPOUND reply with zero operations and the error NFS4ERR_ SEQ_ MISORDERED . This way, if the first SEQUENCE request sent has a sequence ID equal to zero, the server can simply return what is in the reply cache: NFS4ERR_ SEQ_ MISORDERED . The client initializes its reply cache for receiving callbacks in the same way, and similarly, the first CB_ SEQUENCE operation on a slot after session creation MUST have a sequence ID of one.¶ If the session state is created successfully, the server associates the session with the client ID provided by the client.¶
When a request that had CREATE_
SESSION4_ FLAG_ CONN_ RDMA set needs to be retried, the retry MUST be done on a new connection that is in non-RDMA mode. If properties of the new connection are different enough that the arguments to CREATE_ SESSION need to change, then a non-retry MUST be sent. The server will eventually dispose of any session that was created on the original connection.¶
On the backchannel, the client and server might wish to have many slots, in some cases perhaps more that the fore channel, in order to deal with the situations where the network link has high latency and is the primary bottleneck for response to recalls. If so, and if the client provides too few slots to the backchannel, the server might limit the number of recallable objects it gives to the client.¶
Implementing RPCSEC_
- Adding a data structure that wraps the GSS-API context with a reference count.¶
- New functions to increment and decrement the reference count. If the reference count is decremented to zero, the wrapper data structure and the GSS-API context it refers to would be freed.¶
-
Change RPCSEC_
GSS to create the wrapper data structure upon receiving GSS-API context from gss_ accept_ sec_ context () and gss_ init_ sec_ context (). The reference count would be initialized to 1.¶ -
Adding a function to map an existing
RPCSEC_
GSS handle to a pointer to the wrapper data structure. The reference count would be incremented.¶ -
Adding a function to create a new RPCSEC_
GSS handle from a pointer to the wrapper data structure. The reference count would be incremented.¶ -
Replacing calls from RPCSEC_
GSS that free GSS-API contexts, with calls to decrement the reference count on the wrapper data structure.¶
18.37. Operation 44: DESTROY_SESSION - Destroy a Session
18.37.3. DESCRIPTION
The DESTROY_
DESTROY_
If the COMPOUND request starts with SEQUENCE, and
if the sessionids specified in SEQUENCE and DESTROY_
-
DESTROY_
SESSION MUST be the final operation in the COMPOUND request.¶ -
It is advisable to avoid placing DESTROY_
SESSION in a COMPOUND request with other state-modifying operations, because the DESTROY_ SESSION will destroy the reply cache.¶ - Because the session and its reply cache are destroyed, a client that retries the request may receive an error in reply to the retry, even though the original request was successful.¶
If the COMPOUND request starts with SEQUENCE, and
if the sessionids specified in SEQUENCE and DESTROY_
If the COMPOUND request does not start with
SEQUENCE, and if DESTROY_
If there is a backchannel on the session and the
server has outstanding CB_
18.38. Operation 45: FREE_STATEID - Free Stateid with No Locks
18.38.3. DESCRIPTION
The FREE_
When a stateid is freed that had been associated with revoked locks,
by sending the FREE_
Once a successful FREE_
18.39. Operation 46: GET_DIR_DELEGATION - Get a Directory Delegation
18.39.1. ARGUMENT
typedef nfstime4 attr_notice4;
struct GET_DIR_DELEGATION4args {
/* CURRENT_FH: delegated directory */
bool gdda_signal_deleg_avail;
bitmap4 gdda_notification_types;
attr_notice4 gdda_child_attr_delay;
attr_notice4 gdda_dir_attr_delay;
bitmap4 gdda_child_attributes;
bitmap4 gdda_dir_attributes;
};18.39.2. RESULT
struct GET_DIR_DELEGATION4resok {
verifier4 gddr_cookieverf;
/* Stateid for get_dir_delegation */
stateid4 gddr_stateid;
/* Which notifications can the server support */
bitmap4 gddr_notification;
bitmap4 gddr_child_attributes;
bitmap4 gddr_dir_attributes;
};
enum gddrnf4_status {
GDD4_OK = 0,
GDD4_UNAVAIL = 1
};
union GET_DIR_DELEGATION4res_non_fatal
switch (gddrnf4_status gddrnf_status) {
case GDD4_OK:
GET_DIR_DELEGATION4resok gddrnf_resok4;
case GDD4_UNAVAIL:
bool gddrnf_will_signal_deleg_avail;
};
union GET_DIR_DELEGATION4res
switch (nfsstat4 gddr_status) {
case NFS4_OK:
GET_DIR_DELEGATION4res_non_fatal gddr_res_non_fatal4;
default:
void;
};18.39.3. DESCRIPTION
The GET_
The server will also return a directory delegation stateid,
gddr_
The server might not be able to support notifications of certain
events. If the client asks for such notifications, the server
MUST inform the client of its inability to do so as part of the
GET_
The GET_
If client sets gdda_
When a client makes a request for a
directory delegation while it already holds
a directory delegation for that directory
(including the case where it has been
recalled but not yet returned by the client
or revoked by the server), the server MUST
reply with the value of gddr_
18.39.4. IMPLEMENTATION
Directory delegations provide the benefit of improving cache consistency of namespace information. This is done through synchronous callbacks. A server must support synchronous callbacks in order to support directory delegations. In addition to that, asynchronous notifications provide a way to reduce network traffic as well as improve client performance in certain conditions.¶
Notifications are specified in terms of potential
changes to the directory. A client can ask to be
notified of events by setting one or more
bits in gdda_
The client can also ask for
notifications of changes to
attributes of directory entries
For attribute notifications, the client
will set bits in the gdda_
The client will also let the server know if
it wants to get the notification as soon as the attribute change
occurs or after a certain delay by setting a delay factor;
gdda_
The client MUST use a security tuple (Section 2.6.1) that the
directory or its applicable ancestor (Section 2.6) is
exported with. If not, the server MUST return
NFS4ERR_
The directory delegation covers all the entries in the directory except the parent entry. That means if a directory and its parent both hold directory delegations, any changes to the parent will not cause a notification to be sent for the child even though the child's parent entry points to the parent directory.¶
18.40. Operation 47: GETDEVICEINFO - Get Device Information
18.40.1. ARGUMENT
struct GETDEVICEINFO4args {
deviceid4 gdia_device_id;
layouttype4 gdia_layout_type;
count4 gdia_maxcount;
bitmap4 gdia_notify_types;
};18.40.2. RESULT
struct GETDEVICEINFO4resok {
device_addr4 gdir_device_addr;
bitmap4 gdir_notification;
};
union GETDEVICEINFO4res switch (nfsstat4 gdir_status) {
case NFS4_OK:
GETDEVICEINFO4resok gdir_resok4;
case NFS4ERR_TOOSMALL:
count4 gdir_mincount;
default:
void;
};18.40.3. DESCRIPTION
The GETDEVICEINFO operation returns pNFS storage device address
information for the specified device ID.
The client identifies the device information to be returned by
providing the gdia_
The da_
The client also provides a notification bitmap,
gdia_
The notification bitmap applies only to the specified device ID. If a client sends a GETDEVICEINFO operation on a deviceID multiple times, the last notification bitmap is used by the server for subsequent notifications. If the bitmap is zero or empty, then the device ID's notifications are turned off.¶
If the client wants to just update or turn off notifications,
it MAY send a GETDEVICEINFO operation with gdia_
If an unknown device ID is given in gdia_
If NFS4ERR_
18.40.4. IMPLEMENTATION
Aside from updating or turning off notifications, another
use case for gdia_
The client SHOULD request a notification for changes or deletion of a device ID to device address mapping so that the server can allow the client gracefully use a new mapping, without having pending I/O fail abruptly, or force layouts using the device ID to be recalled or revoked.¶
It is possible that GETDEVICEINFO (and
GETDEVICELIST) will race with CB_
-
CB_
NOTIFY_ DEVICEID deletes a device ID. If the client believes it has layouts that refer to the device ID, then it is possible that layouts referring to the deleted device ID have been revoked. The client should send a TEST_ STATEID request using the stateid for each layout that might have been revoked. If TEST_ STATEID indicates that any layouts have been revoked, the client must recover from layout revocation as described in Section 12.5.6. If TEST_ STATEID indicates that at least one layout has not been revoked, the client should send a GETDEVICEINFO operation on the supposedly deleted device ID to verify that the device ID has been deleted.¶ If GETDEVICEINFO indicates that the device ID does not exist, then the client assumes the server is faulty and recovers by sending an EXCHANGE_
ID operation. If GETDEVICEINFO indicates that the device ID does exist, then while the server is faulty for sending an erroneous device ID deletion notification, the degree to which it is faulty does not require the client to create a new client ID.¶ If the client does not have layouts that refer to the device ID, no harm is done. The client should mark the device ID as deleted, and when GETDEVICEINFO or GETDEVICELIST results are received that indicate that the device ID has been in fact deleted, the device ID should be removed from the client's cache.¶
-
CB_
NOTIFY_ DEVICEID indicates that a device ID's device addressing mappings have changed. The client should assume that the results from the in-progress GETDEVICEINFO will be stale for the device ID once received, and so it should send another GETDEVICEINFO on the device ID.¶
18.41. Operation 48: GETDEVICELIST - Get All Device Mappings for a File System
18.41.1. ARGUMENT
struct GETDEVICELIST4args {
/* CURRENT_FH: object belonging to the file system */
layouttype4 gdla_layout_type;
/* number of deviceIDs to return */
count4 gdla_maxdevices;
nfs_cookie4 gdla_cookie;
verifier4 gdla_cookieverf;
};18.41.2. RESULT
struct GETDEVICELIST4resok {
nfs_cookie4 gdlr_cookie;
verifier4 gdlr_cookieverf;
deviceid4 gdlr_deviceid_list<>;
bool gdlr_eof;
};
union GETDEVICELIST4res switch (nfsstat4 gdlr_status) {
case NFS4_OK:
GETDEVICELIST4resok gdlr_resok4;
default:
void;
};18.41.3. DESCRIPTION
This operation is used by the client to enumerate all of the device IDs that a server's file system uses.¶
The client provides a current filehandle of a file object that
belongs to the file system (i.e., all file objects sharing the same
fsid as that of the current filehandle) and the layout type
in gdia_
The successful response to the operation will contain the
cookie, gdlr_
18.41.4. IMPLEMENTATION
An example of the use of this operation is for pNFS
clients and servers that use LAYOUT4_
18.42. Operation 49: LAYOUTCOMMIT - Commit Writes Made Using a Layout
18.42.1. ARGUMENT
union newtime4 switch (bool nt_timechanged) {
case TRUE:
nfstime4 nt_time;
case FALSE:
void;
};
union newoffset4 switch (bool no_newoffset) {
case TRUE:
offset4 no_offset;
case FALSE:
void;
};
struct LAYOUTCOMMIT4args {
/* CURRENT_FH: file */
offset4 loca_offset;
length4 loca_length;
bool loca_reclaim;
stateid4 loca_stateid;
newoffset4 loca_last_write_offset;
newtime4 loca_time_modify;
layoutupdate4 loca_layoutupdate;
};18.42.2. RESULT
union newsize4 switch (bool ns_sizechanged) {
case TRUE:
length4 ns_size;
case FALSE:
void;
};
struct LAYOUTCOMMIT4resok {
newsize4 locr_newsize;
};
union LAYOUTCOMMIT4res switch (nfsstat4 locr_status) {
case NFS4_OK:
LAYOUTCOMMIT4resok locr_resok4;
default:
void;
};18.42.3. DESCRIPTION
The LAYOUTCOMMIT operation commits changes in the layout represented by the current
filehandle, client ID (derived from the session ID in the
preceding SEQUENCE operation), byte-range, and stateid. Since
layouts are sub-dividable, a smaller portion of a layout,
retrieved via LAYOUTGET, can be committed. The byte-range being
committed is specified through the byte-range
The LAYOUTCOMMIT operation indicates that the client has completed writes using a layout obtained by a previous LAYOUTGET. The client may have only written a subset of the data range it previously requested. LAYOUTCOMMIT allows it to commit or discard provisionally allocated space and to update the server with a new end-of-file. The layout referenced by LAYOUTCOMMIT is still valid after the operation completes and can be continued to be referenced by the client ID, filehandle, byte-range, layout type, and stateid.¶
If the loca_
Setting the loca_
The loca_
The loca_
The loca_
The loca_
The layout information is more verbose for block devices than for objects and files because the latter two hide the details of block allocation behind their storage protocols. At the minimum, the client needs to communicate changes to the end-of-file location back to the server, and, if desired, its view of the file's modification time. For block/volume layouts, it needs to specify precisely which blocks have been used.¶
If the layout identified in the arguments does not exist, the
error NFS4ERR_
On success, the current filehandle retains its value and the current stateid retains its value.¶
18.42.4. IMPLEMENTATION
The client MAY also use LAYOUTCOMMIT with the
loca_
If loca_
18.43. Operation 50: LAYOUTGET - Get Layout Information
18.43.1. ARGUMENT
struct LAYOUTGET4args {
/* CURRENT_FH: file */
bool loga_signal_layout_avail;
layouttype4 loga_layout_type;
layoutiomode4 loga_iomode;
offset4 loga_offset;
length4 loga_length;
length4 loga_minlength;
stateid4 loga_stateid;
count4 loga_maxcount;
};18.43.2. RESULT
struct LAYOUTGET4resok {
bool logr_return_on_close;
stateid4 logr_stateid;
layout4 logr_layout<>;
};
union LAYOUTGET4res switch (nfsstat4 logr_status) {
case NFS4_OK:
LAYOUTGET4resok logr_resok4;
case NFS4ERR_LAYOUTTRYLATER:
bool logr_will_signal_layout_avail;
default:
void;
};18.43.3. DESCRIPTION
The LAYOUTGET operation requests a layout from the metadata server for reading or
writing the file given by the filehandle at the
byte-range specified by offset and length. Layouts are
identified by the client ID (derived from the session ID in the
preceding SEQUENCE operation), current filehandle, layout type
If the metadata server is in a grace period, and does not
persist layouts and device ID to device address mappings, then
it MUST return NFS4ERR_
The LAYOUTGET operation returns layout information
for the specified byte-range: a layout.
The client actually specifies two ranges, both starting
at the offset in the loga_
When a length field is set to NFS4_
The following rules govern the relationships among,
and the minima of,
loga_
-
If loga_
length is less than loga_ minlength, the metadata server MUST return NFS4ERR_ INVAL .¶ -
If loga_
minlength is zero, this is an indication to the metadata server that the client desires any layout at offset loga_ offset or less that the metadata server has "readily available". Readily is subjective, and depends on the layout type and the pNFS server implementation. For example, some metadata servers might have to pre-allocate stable storage when they receive a request for a range of a file that goes beyond the file's current length. If loga_ minlength is zero and loga_ length is greater than zero, this tells the metadata server what range of the layout the client would prefer to have. If loga_ length and loga_ minlength are both zero, then the client is indicating that it desires a layout of any length with the ending offset of the range no less than the value specified loga_ offset, and the starting offset at or below loga_ offset . If the metadata server does not have a layout that is readily available, then it MUST return NFS4ERR_ LAYOUTTRYLATER .¶ -
If the sum of loga_
offset and loga_ minlength exceeds NFS4_ UINT64_ MAX, and loga_ minlength is not NFS4_ UINT64_ MAX, the error NFS4ERR_ INVAL MUST result.¶ -
If the sum of loga_
offset and loga_ length exceeds NFS4_ UINT64_ MAX, and loga_ length is not NFS4_ UINT64_ MAX, the error NFS4ERR_ INVAL MUST result.¶
After the metadata server has performed the above checks on loga_
Acceptable layouts based on loga_
| Layout iomode of request | Layout a_ |
Layout iomode of reply | Layout offset of reply | Layout length of reply |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| _ |
u64m |
MAY be _ |
MUST be <= a_ |
MUST be >= file length - layout offset |
| _ |
u64m |
MAY be _ |
MUST be <= a_ |
MUST be u64m |
| _ |
> 0 and < u64m |
MAY be _ |
MUST be <= a_ |
MUST be >= MIN(file length, a_ |
| _ |
> 0 and < u64m |
MAY be _ |
MUST be <= a_ |
MUST be >= a_ |
| _ |
0 |
MAY be _ |
MUST be <= a_ |
MUST be > 0 |
| _ |
0 |
MAY be _ |
MUST be <= a_ |
MUST be > 0 |
| _ |
u64m |
MUST be _ |
MUST be <= a_ |
MUST be u64m |
| _ |
> 0 and < u64m |
MUST be _ |
MUST be <= a_ |
MUST be >= a_ |
| _ |
0 |
MUST be _ |
MUST be <= a_ |
MUST be > 0 |
If loga_
Desired layouts based on loga_
| Layout iomode of request | Layout a_ |
Layout iomode of reply | Layout offset of reply | Layout length of reply |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| _ |
u64m |
MAY be _ |
MUST be <= a_ |
SHOULD be u64m |
| _ |
u64m |
MAY be _ |
MUST be <= a_ |
SHOULD be u64m |
| _ |
> 0 and < u64m |
MAY be _ |
MUST be <= a_ |
SHOULD be >= a_ |
| _ |
> 0 and < u64m |
MAY be _ |
MUST be <= a_ |
SHOULD be >= a_ |
| _ |
0 |
MAY be _ |
MUST be <= a_ |
SHOULD be > a_ |
| _ |
0 |
MAY be _ |
MUST be <= a_ |
SHOULD be > a_ |
| _ |
u64m |
MUST be _ |
MUST be <= a_ |
SHOULD be u64m |
| _ |
> 0 and < u64m |
MUST be _ |
MUST be <= a_ |
SHOULD be >= a_ |
| _ |
0 |
MUST be _ |
MUST be <= a_ |
SHOULD be > a_ |
The loga_
The loga_
The returned layout is expressed as an array,
logr_
Table 22
and
Table 23
both refer to a returned layout iomode, offset, and length.
Because the returned layout is encoded in the logr_
- iomode
-
The value of the returned layout iomode listed in
Table 22
and
Table 23
is equal to the value of the lo_
iomode field in each element of logr_ layout . As shown in Table 22 and Table 23, the metadata server MAY return a layout with an lo_ iomode different from the requested iomode (field loga_ iomode of the request). If it does so, it MUST ensure that the lo_ iomode is more permissive than the loga_ iomode requested. For example, this behavior allows an implementation to upgrade LAYOUTIOMODE4_ READ requests to LAYOUTIOMODE4_ RW requests at its discretion, within the limits of the layout type specific protocol. A lo_ iomode of either LAYOUTIOMODE4_ READ or LAYOUTIOMODE4_ RW MUST be returned.¶ - offset
-
The value of the returned layout offset listed in
Table 22
and
Table 23
is always equal to the lo_
offset field of the first element logr_ layout .¶ - length
-
When setting the value of the returned layout length, the situation is complicated by the possibility that the special layout length value NFS4_
UINT64_ MAX is involved. For a logr_ layout array of N elements, the lo_ length field in the first N-1 elements MUST NOT be NFS4_ UINT64_ MAX . The lo_ length field of the last element of logr_ layout can be NFS4_ UINT64_ MAX under some conditions as described in the following list.¶ -
If an applicable rule of Table 22
states that the metadata server MUST return a layout of length
NFS4_
UINT64_ MAX, then the lo_ length field of the last element of logr_ layout MUST be NFS4_ UINT64_ MAX .¶ -
If an applicable rule of Table 22
states that the metadata server MUST NOT return a layout of length
NFS4_
UINT64_ MAX, then the lo_ length field of the last element of logr_ layout MUST NOT be NFS4_ UINT64_ MAX .¶ -
If an applicable rule of Table 23
states that the metadata server SHOULD return a layout of length
NFS4_
UINT64_ MAX, then the lo_ length field of the last element of logr_ layout SHOULD be NFS4_ UINT64_ MAX .¶ -
When the value of the returned layout length of
Table 22
and
Table 23 is not NFS4_
UINT64_ MAX, then the returned layout length is equal to the sum of the lo_ length fields of each element of logr_ layout .¶
-
If an applicable rule of Table 22
states that the metadata server MUST return a layout of length
NFS4_
The logr_
The logr_
The format of the returned layout
If neither the requested file nor its
containing file system support layouts, the metadata server MUST return
NFS4ERR_
If the layout for the file is unavailable due to transient
conditions, e.g., file sharing prohibits layouts, the metadata server MUST
return NFS4ERR_
If the layout request is rejected due to an overlapping layout
recall, the metadata server MUST return NFS4ERR_
If the layout conflicts with a mandatory byte-range lock held on the
file, and if the storage devices have no method of enforcing
mandatory locks, other than through the restriction of layouts, the
metadata server SHOULD return NFS4ERR_
If client sets loga_
On success, the current filehandle retains its value and the current stateid is updated to match the value as returned in the results.¶
18.43.4. IMPLEMENTATION
Typically, LAYOUTGET will be called as part of a
COMPOUND request after an OPEN operation and results
in the client having location information for the
file. This requires that loga_
As indicated by Table 22 and Table 23, the specification of LAYOUTGET allows a pNFS client and server considerable flexibility. A pNFS client can take several strategies for sending LAYOUTGET. Some examples are as follows.¶
-
If LAYOUTGET is preceded by OPEN in the same
COMPOUND request and the OPEN requests OPEN4_
SHARE_ ACCESS_ READ access, the client might opt to request a _ READ layout with loga_ offset set to zero, loga_ minlength set to zero, and loga_ length set to NFS4_ UINT64_ MAX . If the file has space allocated to it, that space is striped over one or more storage devices, and there is either no conflicting layout or the concept of a conflicting layout does not apply to the pNFS server's layout type or implementation, then the metadata server might return a layout with a starting offset of zero, and a length equal to the length of the file, if not NFS4_ UINT64_ MAX . If the length of the file is not a multiple of the pNFS server's stripe width (see Section 13.2 for a formal definition), the metadata server might round up the returned layout's length.¶ -
If LAYOUTGET is preceded by OPEN in the same
COMPOUND request, and the OPEN requests OPEN4_
SHARE_ ACCESS_ WRITE access and does not truncate the file, the client might opt to request a _ RW layout with loga_ offset set to zero, loga_ minlength set to zero, and loga_ length set to the file's current length (if known), or NFS4_ UINT64_ MAX . As with the previous case, under some conditions the metadata server might return a layout that covers the entire length of the file or beyond.¶ -
This strategy is as above, but the OPEN truncates the file. In this case,
the client might anticipate it will be writing to the
file from offset zero, and so loga_
offset and loga_ minlength are set to zero, and loga_ length is set to the value of threshold4_ write_ iosize . The metadata server might return a layout from offset zero with a length at least as long as threshold4_ write_ iosize .¶ -
A process on the client invokes a request to read
from offset 10000 for length 50000. The client
is using buffered I/O, and has buffer sizes of
4096 bytes. The client intends to map the request
of the process into a series of READ requests
starting at offset 8192. The end offset needs to be higher
than 10000 + 50000 = 60000, and the next offset that is
a multiple of 4096 is 61440. The difference between 61440 and
that starting offset of the layout is 53248 (which is
the product of 4096 and 15).
The value
of threshold4_
read_ iosize is less than 53248, so the client sends a LAYOUTGET request with loga_ offset set to 8192, loga_ minlength set to 53248, and loga_ length set to the file's length (if known) minus 8192 or NFS4_ UINT64_ MAX (if the file's length is not known). Since this LAYOUTGET request exceeds the metadata server's threshold, it grants the layout, possibly with an initial offset of zero, with an end offset of at least 8192 + 53248 - 1 = 61439, but preferably a layout with an offset aligned on the stripe width and a length that is a multiple of the stripe width.¶ -
This strategy is as above, but the client is not using buffered I/O, and
instead all internal I/O requests are sent directly to
the server. The LAYOUTGET request has loga_
offset equal to 10000 and loga_ minlength set to 50000. The value of loga_ length is set to the length of the file. The metadata server is free to return a layout that fully overlaps the requested range, with a starting offset and length aligned on the stripe width.¶ -
Again, a process on the client invokes a request
to read from offset 10000 for length 50000 (i.e. a
range with a starting offset of 10000 and an ending
offset of 69999), and
buffered I/O is in use. The client is expecting
that the server might not be able to return the
layout for the full I/O range.
The client intends to map the request of the
process into a series of thirteen READ requests starting at
offset 8192, each with length 4096, with a total
length of 53248 (which equals 13 * 4096), which
fully contains the range that client's process wants to read.
Because the value of threshold4_
read_ iosize is equal to 4096, it is practical and reasonable for the client to use several LAYOUTGET operations to complete the series of READs. The client sends a LAYOUTGET request with loga_ offset set to 8192, loga_ minlength set to 4096, and loga_ length set to 53248 or higher. The server will grant a layout possibly with an initial offset of zero, with an end offset of at least 8192 + 4096 - 1 = 12287, but preferably a layout with an offset aligned on the stripe width and a length that is a multiple of the stripe width. This will allow the client to make forward progress, possibly sending more LAYOUTGET operations for the remainder of the range.¶ - An NFS client detects a sequential read pattern, and so sends a LAYOUTGET operation that goes well beyond any current or pending read requests to the server. The server might likewise detect this pattern, and grant the LAYOUTGET request. Once the client reads from an offset of the file that represents 50% of the way through the range of the last layout it received, in order to avoid stalling I/O that would wait for a layout, the client sends more operations from an offset of the file that represents 50% of the way through the last layout it received. The client continues to request layouts with byte-ranges that are well in advance of the byte-ranges of recent and/or read requests of processes running on the client.¶
-
This strategy is as above, but the client fails to detect the
pattern, but the server does. The next time the
metadata server gets a LAYOUTGET, it returns a layout with
a length that is well beyond loga_
minlength .¶ - A client is using buffered I/O, and has a long queue of write-behinds to process and also detects a sequential write pattern. It sends a LAYOUTGET for a layout that spans the range of the queued write-behinds and well beyond, including ranges beyond the filer's current length. The client continues to send LAYOUTGET operations once the write-behind queue reaches 50% of the maximum queue length.¶
Once the client has obtained a layout referring to a particular device ID, the metadata server MUST NOT delete the device ID until the layout is returned or revoked.¶
CB_
18.44. Operation 51: LAYOUTRETURN - Release Layout Information
18.44.1. ARGUMENT
/* Constants used for LAYOUTRETURN and CB_LAYOUTRECALL */
const LAYOUT4_RET_REC_FILE = 1;
const LAYOUT4_RET_REC_FSID = 2;
const LAYOUT4_RET_REC_ALL = 3;
enum layoutreturn_type4 {
LAYOUTRETURN4_FILE = LAYOUT4_RET_REC_FILE,
LAYOUTRETURN4_FSID = LAYOUT4_RET_REC_FSID,
LAYOUTRETURN4_ALL = LAYOUT4_RET_REC_ALL
};
struct layoutreturn_file4 {
offset4 lrf_offset;
length4 lrf_length;
stateid4 lrf_stateid;
/* layouttype4 specific data */
opaque lrf_body<>;
};
union layoutreturn4 switch(layoutreturn_type4 lr_returntype) {
case LAYOUTRETURN4_FILE:
layoutreturn_file4 lr_layout;
default:
void;
};
struct LAYOUTRETURN4args {
/* CURRENT_FH: file */
bool lora_reclaim;
layouttype4 lora_layout_type;
layoutiomode4 lora_iomode;
layoutreturn4 lora_layoutreturn;
};18.44.2. RESULT
union layoutreturn_stateid switch (bool lrs_present) {
case TRUE:
stateid4 lrs_stateid;
case FALSE:
void;
};
union LAYOUTRETURN4res switch (nfsstat4 lorr_status) {
case NFS4_OK:
layoutreturn_stateid lorr_stateid;
default:
void;
};18.44.3. DESCRIPTION
This operation returns from the client to the server
one or more layouts represented by the client ID
(derived from the session ID in the preceding SEQUENCE
operation), lora_
If the set of layouts designated in the case of
LAYOUTRETURN4_
The layout being returned may be a subset
or superset of a layout specified by CB_
For all lr_
In the case that lr_
Return of a layout or all layouts does not invalidate the mapping of storage device ID to a storage device address. The mapping remains in effect until specifically changed or deleted via device ID notification callbacks. Of course if there are no remaining layouts that refer to a previously used device ID, the server is free to delete a device ID without a notification callback, which will be the case when notifications are not in effect.¶
If the lora_
Layouts may be returned when recalled or voluntarily (i.e., before the server has recalled them). In either case, the client must properly propagate state changed under the context of the layout to the storage device(s) or to the metadata server before returning the layout.¶
If the client returns the layout in response to a
CB_
If a client fails to return a layout in a timely manner, then the metadata server SHOULD use its control protocol with the storage devices to fence the client from accessing the data referenced by the layout. See Section 12.5.5 for more details.¶
If the LAYOUTRETURN request sets the lora_
If the LAYOUTRETURN request sets the lora_
If the client sets the lr_
On success, the current filehandle retains its value.¶
If the EXCHGID4_
18.44.4. IMPLEMENTATION
The final LAYOUTRETURN operation in response to a CB_
Returning all layouts in a file system using LAYOUTRETURN4_
Once the client has returned all layouts referring to a particular device ID, the server MAY delete the device ID.¶
18.45. Operation 52: SECINFO_NO_NAME - Get Security on Unnamed Object
18.45.1. ARGUMENT
enum secinfo_style4 {
SECINFO_STYLE4_CURRENT_FH = 0,
SECINFO_STYLE4_PARENT = 1
};
/* CURRENT_FH: object or child directory */
typedef secinfo_style4 SECINFO_NO_NAME4args;
18.45.2. RESULT
/* CURRENTFH: consumed if status is NFS4_OK */ typedef SECINFO4res SECINFO_NO_NAME4res;
18.45.3. DESCRIPTION
Like the SECINFO operation, SECINFO_
There are two styles of SECINFO_
If PUTFH, PUTPUBFH, PUTROOTFH, or RESTOREFH returns
NFS4ERR_
If SECINFO_
On success, the current filehandle is consumed
(see Section 2.6.3.1.1.8), and if the
next operation after SECINFO_
Everything else about SECINFO_
18.45.4. IMPLEMENTATION
See the discussion on SECINFO (Section 18.29.4).¶
18.46. Operation 53: SEQUENCE - Supply Per-Procedure Sequencing and Control
18.46.1. ARGUMENT
struct SEQUENCE4args {
sessionid4 sa_sessionid;
sequenceid4 sa_sequenceid;
slotid4 sa_slotid;
slotid4 sa_highest_slotid;
bool sa_cachethis;
};18.46.2. RESULT
const SEQ4_STATUS_CB_PATH_DOWN = 0x00000001;
const SEQ4_STATUS_CB_GSS_CONTEXTS_EXPIRING = 0x00000002;
const SEQ4_STATUS_CB_GSS_CONTEXTS_EXPIRED = 0x00000004;
const SEQ4_STATUS_EXPIRED_ALL_STATE_REVOKED = 0x00000008;
const SEQ4_STATUS_EXPIRED_SOME_STATE_REVOKED = 0x00000010;
const SEQ4_STATUS_ADMIN_STATE_REVOKED = 0x00000020;
const SEQ4_STATUS_RECALLABLE_STATE_REVOKED = 0x00000040;
const SEQ4_STATUS_LEASE_MOVED = 0x00000080;
const SEQ4_STATUS_RESTART_RECLAIM_NEEDED = 0x00000100;
const SEQ4_STATUS_CB_PATH_DOWN_SESSION = 0x00000200;
const SEQ4_STATUS_BACKCHANNEL_FAULT = 0x00000400;
const SEQ4_STATUS_DEVID_CHANGED = 0x00000800;
const SEQ4_STATUS_DEVID_DELETED = 0x00001000;
struct SEQUENCE4resok {
sessionid4 sr_sessionid;
sequenceid4 sr_sequenceid;
slotid4 sr_slotid;
slotid4 sr_highest_slotid;
slotid4 sr_target_highest_slotid;
uint32_t sr_status_flags;
};
union SEQUENCE4res switch (nfsstat4 sr_status) {
case NFS4_OK:
SEQUENCE4resok sr_resok4;
default:
void;
};18.46.3. DESCRIPTION
The SEQUENCE operation is used by the server to implement session request control and the reply cache semantics.¶
SEQUENCE MUST appear as the first operation of any COMPOUND
in which it appears. The error NFS4ERR_
If SEQUENCE is received on a connection not associated with the
session via CREATE_
The sa_
The sa_
The sa_
If sa_
The response to the SEQUENCE operation contains a
word of status flags
- SEQ4_
STATUS_ CB_ PATH_ DOWN - When set, indicates that the client has no operational backchannel path for any session associated with the client ID, making it necessary for the client to re-establish one. This bit remains set on all SEQUENCE responses on all sessions associated with the client ID until at least one backchannel is available on any session associated with the client ID. If the client fails to re-establish a backchannel for the client ID, it is subject to having recallable state revoked.¶
- SEQ4_
STATUS_ CB_ PATH_ DOWN_ SESSION -
When set, indicates that the session has
no operational backchannel. There are two reasons
why SEQ4_
STATUS_ CB_ PATH_ DOWN_ SESSION may be set and not SEQ4_ STATUS_ CB_ PATH_ DOWN . First is that a callback operation that applies specifically to the session (e.g., CB_ RECALL_ SLOT, see Section 20.8) needs to be sent. Second is that the server did send a callback operation, but the connection was lost before the reply. The server cannot be sure whether or not the client received the callback operation, and so, per rules on request retry, the server MUST retry the callback operation over the same session. The SEQ4_ STATUS_ CB_ PATH_ DOWN_ SESSION bit is the indication to the client that it needs to associate a connection to the session's backchannel. This bit remains set on all SEQUENCE responses of the session until a connection is associated with the session's a backchannel. If the client fails to re-establish a backchannel for the session, it is subject to having recallable state revoked.¶ - SEQ4_
STATUS_ CB_ GSS_ CONTEXTS_ EXPIRING -
When set, indicates that all GSS contexts or RPCSEC_
GSS handles assigned to the session's backchannel will expire within a period equal to the lease time. This bit remains set on all SEQUENCE replies until at least one of the following are true:¶ -
All SSV RPCSEC_
GSS handles on the session's backchannel have been destroyed and all non-SSV GSS contexts have expired.¶ -
At least one more SSV RPCSEC_
GSS handle has been added to the backchannel.¶ -
The expiration time of at least one non-SSV GSS context
of an RPCSEC_
GSS handle is beyond the lease period from the current time (relative to the time of when a SEQUENCE response was sent)¶
-
All SSV RPCSEC_
- SEQ4_
STATUS_ CB_ GSS_ CONTEXTS_ EXPIRED -
When set, indicates all non-SSV GSS contexts and all
SSV RPCSEC_
GSS handles assigned to the session's backchannel have expired or have been destroyed. This bit remains set on all SEQUENCE replies until at least one non-expired non-SSV GSS context for the session's backchannel has been established or at least one SSV RPCSEC_ GSS handle has been assigned to the backchannel.¶ - SEQ4_
STATUS_ EXPIRED_ ALL_ STATE_ REVOKED -
When set, indicates that the lease has expired
and as a result the server released all of the
client's locking state. This status bit remains
set on all SEQUENCE replies until the loss of
all such locks has been acknowledged by use of
FREE_
STATEID (see Section 18.38), or by establishing a new client instance by destroying all sessions (via DESTROY_ SESSION ), the client ID (via DESTROY_ CLIENTID ), and then invoking EXCHANGE_ ID and CREATE_ SESSION to establish a new client ID.¶ - SEQ4_
STATUS_ EXPIRED_ SOME_ STATE_ REVOKED -
When set, indicates that some subset of the client's locks
have been revoked due to expiration of the lease period
followed by another client's conflicting LOCK operation.
This status bit remains set on all SEQUENCE replies
until the loss of all
such locks has been acknowledged by use of FREE_
STATEID .¶ - SEQ4_
STATUS_ ADMIN_ STATE_ REVOKED -
When set, indicates that one or more locks have been revoked
without expiration of the lease period, due to administrative
action. This status bit remains set on all SEQUENCE replies
until the loss of all
such locks has been acknowledged by use of FREE_
STATEID .¶ - SEQ4_
STATUS_ RECALLABLE_ STATE_ REVOKED -
When set, indicates that one or more recallable
objects have been revoked without expiration
of the lease period, due to the client's
failure to return them when recalled, which
may be a consequence of there being no working
backchannel and the client failing to re-establish
a backchannel per the SEQ4_
STATUS_ CB_ PATH_ DOWN, SEQ4_ STATUS_ CB_ PATH_ DOWN_ SESSION, or SEQ4_ STATUS_ CB_ GSS_ CONTEXTS_ EXPIRED status flags. This status bit remains set on all SEQUENCE replies until the loss of all such locks has been acknowledged by use of FREE_ STATEID .¶ - SEQ4_
STATUS_ LEASE_ MOVED -
When set, indicates that responsibility for lease renewal has
been transferred to one or more new servers. This condition
will continue until the client receives an NFS4ERR_
MOVED error and the server receives the subsequent GETATTR for the fs_ locations or fs_ locations_ info attribute for an access to each file system for which a lease has been moved to a new server. See Section 11.11.9.2.¶ - SEQ4_
STATUS_ RESTART_ RECLAIM_ NEEDED -
When set, indicates that due to server
restart, the client must reclaim locking state.
Until the client sends a global RECLAIM_
COMPLETE (Section 18.51), every SEQUENCE operation will return SEQ4_ STATUS_ RESTART_ RECLAIM_ NEEDED .¶ - SEQ4_
STATUS_ BACKCHANNEL_ FAULT - The server has encountered an unrecoverable fault with the backchannel (e.g., it has lost track of the sequence ID for a slot in the backchannel). The client MUST stop sending more requests on the session's fore channel, wait for all outstanding requests to complete on the fore and back channel, and then destroy the session.¶
- SEQ4_
STATUS_ DEVID_ CHANGED - The client is using device ID notifications and the server has changed a device ID mapping held by the client. This flag will stay present until the client has obtained the new mapping with GETDEVICEINFO.¶
- SEQ4_
STATUS_ DEVID_ DELETED -
The client is using device ID notifications and the server
has deleted a device ID mapping held by the client.
This flag will stay in effect until the client sends a GETDEVICEINFO
on the device ID with a null value in the argument gdia_
notify_ types .¶
The value of the sa_
-
If the difference between sa_
sequenceid and the server's cached sequence ID at the slot ID is two (2) or more, or if sa_ sequenceid is less than the cached sequence ID (accounting for wraparound of the unsigned sequence ID value), then the server MUST return NFS4ERR_ SEQ_ MISORDERED .¶ -
If sa_
sequenceid and the cached sequence ID are the same, this is a retry, and the server replies with what is recorded in the reply cache. The lease is possibly renewed as described below.¶ -
If sa_
sequenceid is one greater (accounting for wraparound) than the cached sequence ID, then this is a new request, and the slot's sequence ID is incremented. The operations subsequent to SEQUENCE, if any, are processed. If there are no other operations, the only other effects are to cache the SEQUENCE reply in the slot, maintain the session's activity, and possibly renew the lease.¶
If the client reuses a slot ID and sequence ID for
a completely different request, the server MAY treat
the request as if it is a retry of what it has already
executed. The server MAY however detect the client's
illegal reuse and return NFS4ERR_
If SEQUENCE returns an error, then the state of the slot (sequence ID, cached reply) MUST NOT change, and the associated lease MUST NOT be renewed.¶
If SEQUENCE returns NFS4_
18.46.4. IMPLEMENTATION
The server MUST maintain a mapping of session ID to client ID in order to validate any operations that follow SEQUENCE that take a stateid as an argument and/or result.¶
If the client establishes a persistent session, then
a SEQUENCE received after a server restart might encounter
requests performed and recorded in a persistent reply
cache before the server restart. In this case, SEQUENCE
will be processed successfully, while requests that
were not previously performed and recorded are rejected with
NFS4ERR_
Depending on which of the operations within the COMPOUND were
successfully
performed before the server restart, these operations will
also have replies sent from the server reply cache.
Note that when these operations establish locking state, it
is locking state that applies to the previous server instance
and to the previous client ID, even though the
server restart, which logically happened after these
operations, eliminated that state. In the
case of a partially executed COMPOUND, processing may reach
an operation not processed during the earlier server instance,
making this operation a new one and not performable on the
existing session. In this case, NFS4ERR_
18.47. Operation 54: SET_SSV - Update SSV for a Client ID
18.47.1. ARGUMENT
struct ssa_digest_input4 {
SEQUENCE4args sdi_seqargs;
};
struct SET_SSV4args {
opaque ssa_ssv<>;
opaque ssa_digest<>;
};18.47.2. RESULT
struct ssr_digest_input4 {
SEQUENCE4res sdi_seqres;
};
struct SET_SSV4resok {
opaque ssr_digest<>;
};
union SET_SSV4res switch (nfsstat4 ssr_status) {
case NFS4_OK:
SET_SSV4resok ssr_resok4;
default:
void;
};18.47.3. DESCRIPTION
This operation is used to update the
SSV for a client ID. Before SET_
SET_
The field ssa_
The argument ssa_
In the response, ssr_
As noted in Section 18.35, the client and
server can maintain multiple concurrent versions of the SSV.
The client and server each MUST maintain an internal
SSV version number, which is set to one the first time
SET_
18.47.4. IMPLEMENTATION
When the server receives ssa_
Clients SHOULD NOT send an ssa_
Clients SHOULD send SET_
A client SHOULD NOT send SET_
18.48. Operation 55: TEST_STATEID - Test Stateids for Validity
18.48.2. RESULT
struct TEST_STATEID4resok {
nfsstat4 tsr_status_codes<>;
};
union TEST_STATEID4res switch (nfsstat4 tsr_status) {
case NFS4_OK:
TEST_STATEID4resok tsr_resok4;
default:
void;
};18.48.3. DESCRIPTION
The TEST_
-
SEQ4_
STATUS_ EXPIRED_ SOME_ STATE_ REVOKED¶ -
SEQ4_
STATUS_ EXPIRED_ ADMIN_ STATE_ REVOKED¶ -
SEQ4_
STATUS_ EXPIRED_ RECALLABLE_ STATE_ REVOKED¶
The client can use TEST_
For each stateid, the server returns the status code that would be returned if that stateid were to be used in normal operation. Returning such a status indication is not an error and does not cause COMPOUND processing to terminate. Checks for the validity of the stateid proceed as they would for normal operations with a number of exceptions:¶
- There is no check for the type of stateid object, as would be the case for normal use of a stateid.¶
- There is no reference to the current filehandle.¶
-
Special stateids are always considered invalid (they result
in the error code NFS4ERR_
BAD_ STATEID ).¶
All stateids are interpreted as being associated with the client for the current session. Any possible association with a previous instance of the client (as stale stateids) is not considered.¶
The valid status values in the returned status_
18.48.4. IMPLEMENTATION
See Sections 8.2.2 and 8.2.4 for a discussion of stateid structure, lifetime, and validation.¶
18.49. Operation 56: WANT_DELEGATION - Request Delegation
18.49.1. ARGUMENT
union deleg_claim4 switch (open_claim_type4 dc_claim) {
/*
* No special rights to object. Ordinary delegation
* request of the specified object. Object identified
* by filehandle.
*/
case CLAIM_FH: /* new to v4.1 */
/* CURRENT_FH: object being delegated */
void;
/*
* Right to file based on a delegation granted
* to a previous boot instance of the client.
* File is specified by filehandle.
*/
case CLAIM_DELEG_PREV_FH: /* new to v4.1 */
/* CURRENT_FH: object being delegated */
void;
/*
* Right to the file established by an open previous
* to server reboot. File identified by filehandle.
* Used during server reclaim grace period.
*/
case CLAIM_PREVIOUS:
/* CURRENT_FH: object being reclaimed */
open_delegation_type4 dc_delegate_type;
};
struct WANT_DELEGATION4args {
uint32_t wda_want;
deleg_claim4 wda_claim;
};18.49.2. RESULT
union WANT_DELEGATION4res switch (nfsstat4 wdr_status) {
case NFS4_OK:
open_delegation4 wdr_resok4;
default:
void;
};18.49.3. DESCRIPTION
Where this description mandates the return of a specific error code for a specific condition, and where multiple conditions apply, the server MAY return any of the mandated error codes.¶
This operation allows a client to:¶
- Get a delegation on all types of files except directories.¶
-
Register a "want" for a delegation for the
specified file object, and be notified via a
callback when the delegation is available. The
server MAY support notifications of availability
via callbacks. If the server does not support
registration of wants, it MUST NOT return
an error to indicate that, and instead MUST
return with ond_
why set to WND4_ CONTENTION or WND4_ RESOURCE and ond_ server_ will_ push_ deleg or ond_ server_ will_ signal_ avail set to FALSE. When the server indicates that it will notify the client by means of a callback, it will either provide the delegation using a CB_ PUSH_ DELEG operation or cancel its promise by sending a CB_ WANTS_ CANCELLED operation.¶ - Cancel a want for a delegation.¶
The client SHOULD NOT set OPEN4_
The meanings of the following flags in wda_
-
OPEN4_
SHARE_ ACCESS_ WANT_ READ_ DELEG¶ -
OPEN4_
SHARE_ ACCESS_ WANT_ WRITE_ DELEG¶ -
OPEN4_
SHARE_ ACCESS_ WANT_ ANY_ DELEG¶ -
OPEN4_
SHARE_ ACCESS_ WANT_ NO_ DELEG . Unlike the OPEN operation, this flag SHOULD NOT be set by the client in the arguments to WANT_ DELEGATION, and MUST be ignored by the server.¶ -
OPEN4_
SHARE_ ACCESS_ WANT_ CANCEL¶ -
OPEN4_
SHARE_ ACCESS_ WANT_ SIGNAL_ DELEG_ WHEN_ RESRC_ AVAIL¶ -
OPEN4_
SHARE_ ACCESS_ WANT_ PUSH_ DELEG_ WHEN_ UNCONTENDED¶
The handling of the above flags in WANT_
The successful results of WANT_
If
The client uses the
OPEN4_
If WANT_
18.49.4. IMPLEMENTATION
A request for a conflicting delegation is not normally intended to trigger the recall of the existing delegation. Servers may choose to treat some clients as having higher priority such that their wants will trigger recall of an existing delegation, although that is expected to be an unusual situation.¶
Servers will generally recall delegations assigned by WANT_
18.50. Operation 57: DESTROY_CLIENTID - Destroy a Client ID
18.50.3. DESCRIPTION
The DESTROY_
If DESTROY_
18.50.4. IMPLEMENTATION
DESTROY_
18.51. Operation 58: RECLAIM_COMPLETE - Indicates Reclaims Finished
18.51.1. ARGUMENT
struct RECLAIM_COMPLETE4args {
/*
* If rca_one_fs TRUE,
*
* CURRENT_FH: object in
* file system reclaim is
* complete for.
*/
bool rca_one_fs;
};
18.51.3. DESCRIPTION
A RECLAIM_
-
When rca_
one_ fs is FALSE, a global RECLAIM_ COMPLETE is being done. This indicates that recovery of all locks that the client held on the previous server instance has been completed. The current filehandle need not be set in this case.¶ -
When rca_
one_ fs is TRUE, a file system-specific RECLAIM_ COMPLETE is being done. This indicates that recovery of locks for a single fs (the one designated by the current filehandle) due to the migration of the file system has been completed. Presence of a current filehandle is required when rca_ one_ fs is set to TRUE. When the current filehandle designates a filehandle in a file system not in the process of migration, the operation returns NFS4_ OK and is otherwise ignored.¶
Once a RECLAIM_
Whenever a client establishes a new client ID and before it does
the first non-reclaim operation that obtains a lock, it MUST send a
RECLAIM_
Similarly, when the client accesses a migrated file system on a new
server, before it sends the first non-reclaim operation that
obtains a lock on this new server, it MUST send a RECLAIM_
It should be noted that there are situations in which a client needs
to issue both forms of RECLAIM_
Any locks not reclaimed at the point at which RECLAIM_
By sending a RECLAIM_
18.51.4. IMPLEMENTATION
Servers will typically use the information as to when reclaim
activity is complete to reduce the length of the grace period.
When the server maintains in persistent storage
a list of clients that might have had locks,
it is able to use the fact that
all such clients have done a RECLAIM_
Latency can be minimized by doing a RECLAIM_
RECLAIM_
When a RECLAIM_
Because previous descriptions of RECLAIM_
While clients SHOULD NOT misuse
this feature, and servers SHOULD respond to such misuse as described
above, implementors need to be aware of the following considerations
as they make necessary trade-offs between interoperabilit
-
When servers have no support for becoming the destination server
of a file system subject to migration, there is no possibility of
a per-fs RECLAIM_
COMPLETE being done legitimately, and occurrences of it SHOULD be ignored. However, the negative consequences of accepting such mistaken use are quite limited as long as the client does not issue it before all necessary reclaims are done.¶ -
When a server might become the destination for a file system being
migrated, inappropriate use of per-fs RECLAIM_
COMPLETE is more concerning. In the case in which the file system designated is not within a per-fs grace period, the per-fs RECLAIM_ COMPLETE SHOULD be ignored, with the negative consequences of accepting it being limited, as in the case in which migration is not supported. However, if the server encounters a file system undergoing migration, the operation cannot be accepted as if it were a global RECLAIM_ COMPLETE without invalidating its intended use.¶
18.52. Operation 10044: ILLEGAL - Illegal Operation
18.52.3. DESCRIPTION
This operation is a placeholder for encoding a result to handle the case of the client sending an operation code within COMPOUND that is not supported. See the COMPOUND procedure description for more details.¶
The status field of ILLEGAL4res MUST be set to NFS4ERR_
18.52.4. IMPLEMENTATION
A client will probably not send an operation with code OP_
19. NFSv4.1 Callback Procedures
The procedures used for callbacks are defined in the following sections. In the interest of clarity, the terms "client" and "server" refer to NFS clients and servers, despite the fact that for an individual callback RPC, the sense of these terms would be precisely the opposite.¶
Both procedures, CB_
19.1. Procedure 0: CB_NULL - No Operation
19.1.3. DESCRIPTION
CB_
19.2. Procedure 1: CB_COMPOUND - Compound Operations
19.2.1. ARGUMENTS
enum nfs_cb_opnum4 {
OP_CB_GETATTR = 3,
OP_CB_RECALL = 4,
/* Callback operations new to NFSv4.1 */
OP_CB_LAYOUTRECALL = 5,
OP_CB_NOTIFY = 6,
OP_CB_PUSH_DELEG = 7,
OP_CB_RECALL_ANY = 8,
OP_CB_RECALLABLE_OBJ_AVAIL = 9,
OP_CB_RECALL_SLOT = 10,
OP_CB_SEQUENCE = 11,
OP_CB_WANTS_CANCELLED = 12,
OP_CB_NOTIFY_LOCK = 13,
OP_CB_NOTIFY_DEVICEID = 14,
OP_CB_ILLEGAL = 10044
};
union nfs_cb_argop4 switch (unsigned argop) {
case OP_CB_GETATTR:
CB_GETATTR4args opcbgetattr;
case OP_CB_RECALL:
CB_RECALL4args opcbrecall;
case OP_CB_LAYOUTRECALL:
CB_LAYOUTRECALL4args opcblayoutrecall;
case OP_CB_NOTIFY:
CB_NOTIFY4args opcbnotify;
case OP_CB_PUSH_DELEG:
CB_PUSH_DELEG4args opcbpush_deleg;
case OP_CB_RECALL_ANY:
CB_RECALL_ANY4args opcbrecall_any;
case OP_CB_RECALLABLE_OBJ_AVAIL:
CB_RECALLABLE_OBJ_AVAIL4args opcbrecallable_obj_avail;
case OP_CB_RECALL_SLOT:
CB_RECALL_SLOT4args opcbrecall_slot;
case OP_CB_SEQUENCE:
CB_SEQUENCE4args opcbsequence;
case OP_CB_WANTS_CANCELLED:
CB_WANTS_CANCELLED4args opcbwants_cancelled;
case OP_CB_NOTIFY_LOCK:
CB_NOTIFY_LOCK4args opcbnotify_lock;
case OP_CB_NOTIFY_DEVICEID:
CB_NOTIFY_DEVICEID4args opcbnotify_deviceid;
case OP_CB_ILLEGAL: void;
};
struct CB_COMPOUND4args {
utf8str_cs tag;
uint32_t minorversion;
uint32_t callback_ident;
nfs_cb_argop4 argarray<>;
};
19.2.2. RESULTS
union nfs_cb_resop4 switch (unsigned resop) {
case OP_CB_GETATTR: CB_GETATTR4res opcbgetattr;
case OP_CB_RECALL: CB_RECALL4res opcbrecall;
/* new NFSv4.1 operations */
case OP_CB_LAYOUTRECALL:
CB_LAYOUTRECALL4res
opcblayoutrecall;
case OP_CB_NOTIFY: CB_NOTIFY4res opcbnotify;
case OP_CB_PUSH_DELEG: CB_PUSH_DELEG4res
opcbpush_deleg;
case OP_CB_RECALL_ANY: CB_RECALL_ANY4res
opcbrecall_any;
case OP_CB_RECALLABLE_OBJ_AVAIL:
CB_RECALLABLE_OBJ_AVAIL4res
opcbrecallable_obj_avail;
case OP_CB_RECALL_SLOT:
CB_RECALL_SLOT4res
opcbrecall_slot;
case OP_CB_SEQUENCE: CB_SEQUENCE4res opcbsequence;
case OP_CB_WANTS_CANCELLED:
CB_WANTS_CANCELLED4res
opcbwants_cancelled;
case OP_CB_NOTIFY_LOCK:
CB_NOTIFY_LOCK4res
opcbnotify_lock;
case OP_CB_NOTIFY_DEVICEID:
CB_NOTIFY_DEVICEID4res
opcbnotify_deviceid;
/* Not new operation */
case OP_CB_ILLEGAL: CB_ILLEGAL4res opcbillegal;
};
struct CB_COMPOUND4res {
nfsstat4 status;
utf8str_cs tag;
nfs_cb_resop4 resarray<>;
};
19.2.3. DESCRIPTION
The CB_
During the processing of the CB_
The minorversion field of the arguments MUST be the same as the minorversion of the COMPOUND procedure used to create the client ID and session. For NFSv4.1, minorversion MUST be set to 1.¶
Contained within the CB_
The "tag" field is handled the same way as that of the COMPOUND procedure (see Section 16.2.3).¶
Illegal operation codes are handled in the same way as they are handled for the COMPOUND procedure.¶
19.2.4. IMPLEMENTATION
The CB_
19.2.5. ERRORS
CB_
| Error | Notes |
|---|---|
| NFS4ERR_ |
The tag argument has a character the replier does not support. |
| NFS4ERR_ |
|
| NFS4ERR_ |
|
| NFS4ERR_ |
The tag argument is not in UTF-8 encoding. |
| NFS4ERR_ |
|
| NFS4ERR_ |
|
| NFS4ERR_ |
|
| NFS4ERR_ |
|
| NFS4ERR_ |
|
| NFS4ERR_ |
20. NFSv4.1 Callback Operations
20.1. Operation 3: CB_GETATTR - Get Attributes
20.1.2. RESULT
struct CB_GETATTR4resok {
fattr4 obj_attributes;
};
union CB_GETATTR4res switch (nfsstat4 status) {
case NFS4_OK:
CB_GETATTR4resok resok4;
default:
void;
};
20.1.3. DESCRIPTION
The CB_
If the filehandle specified is not one for which the client holds an
OPEN_
20.1.4. IMPLEMENTATION
The client returns attrmask bits and the associated attribute
values only for the change attribute, and attributes that it may
change
20.2. Operation 4: CB_RECALL - Recall a Delegation
20.2.3. DESCRIPTION
The CB_
The truncate flag is used to optimize recall for a file object that is a regular file and is about to be truncated to zero. When it is TRUE, the client is freed of the obligation to propagate modified data for the file to the server, since this data is irrelevant.¶
If the handle specified is not one for which the client holds a
delegation, an NFS4ERR_
If the stateid specified is not one corresponding to an OPEN
delegation for the file specified by the filehandle, an
NFS4ERR_
20.2.4. IMPLEMENTATION
The client SHOULD reply to the callback immediately.
Replying does not complete the recall except when
the value of the reply's status field is neither
NFS4ERR_
20.3. Operation 5: CB_LAYOUTRECALL - Recall Layout from Client
20.3.1. ARGUMENT
/*
* NFSv4.1 callback arguments and results
*/
enum layoutrecall_type4 {
LAYOUTRECALL4_FILE = LAYOUT4_RET_REC_FILE,
LAYOUTRECALL4_FSID = LAYOUT4_RET_REC_FSID,
LAYOUTRECALL4_ALL = LAYOUT4_RET_REC_ALL
};
struct layoutrecall_file4 {
nfs_fh4 lor_fh;
offset4 lor_offset;
length4 lor_length;
stateid4 lor_stateid;
};
union layoutrecall4 switch(layoutrecall_type4 lor_recalltype) {
case LAYOUTRECALL4_FILE:
layoutrecall_file4 lor_layout;
case LAYOUTRECALL4_FSID:
fsid4 lor_fsid;
case LAYOUTRECALL4_ALL:
void;
};
struct CB_LAYOUTRECALL4args {
layouttype4 clora_type;
layoutiomode4 clora_iomode;
bool clora_changed;
layoutrecall4 clora_recall;
};
20.3.3. DESCRIPTION
The CB_
The behavior of the operation varies based on the value of the
layoutrecall_
- LAYOUTRECALL4_
FILE -
For a layout to match the recall request, the values of the following fields must match those of the layout: clora_
type, clora_ iomode, lor_ fh, and the byte-range specified by lor_ offset and lor_ length . The clora_ iomode field may have a special value of LAYOUTIOMODE4_ ANY . The special value LAYOUTIOMODE4_ ANY will match any iomode originally returned in a layout; therefore, it acts as a wild card. The other special value used is for lor_ length . If lor_ length has a value of NFS4_ UINT64_ MAX, the lor_ length field means the maximum possible file size. If a matching layout is found, it MUST be returned using the LAYOUTRETURN operation (see Section 18.44). An example of the field's special value use is if clora_ iomode is LAYOUTIOMODE4_ ANY, lor_ offset is zero, and lor_ length is NFS4_ UINT64_ MAX, then the entire layout is to be returned.¶ The NFS4ERR_
NOMATCHING_ LAYOUT error is only returned when the client does not hold layouts for the file or if the client does not have any overlapping layouts for the specification in the layout recall.¶ - LAYOUTRECALL4_
FSID and LAYOUTRECALL4_ ALL -
If LAYOUTRECALL4_
FSID is specified, the fsid specifies the file system for which any outstanding layouts MUST be returned. If LAYOUTRECALL4_ ALL is specified, all outstanding layouts MUST be returned. In addition, LAYOUTRECALL4_ FSID and LAYOUTRECALL4_ ALL specify that all the storage device ID to storage device address mappings in the affected file system(s) are also recalled. The respective LAYOUTRETURN with either LAYOUTRETURN4_ FSID or LAYOUTRETURN4_ ALL acknowledges to the server that the client invalidated the said device mappings. See Section 12.5.5.2.1.5 for considerations with "bulk" recall of layouts.¶ The NFS4ERR_
NOMATCHING_ LAYOUT error is only returned when the client does not hold layouts and does not have valid deviceid mappings.¶
In processing the layout recall request, the client also varies
its behavior based on the value of the clora_
See Section 12.5.3 for a description of how the
lor_
20.3.4. IMPLEMENTATION
The client's processing for CB_
Before returning the layout to the server via LAYOUTRETURN, the client should wait for the response from in-process or in-flight READ, WRITE, or COMMIT operations that use the recalled layout.¶
If the client is holding modified data that is affected by a
recalled layout, the client has various options for writing the
data to the server. As always, the client may write the data
through the metadata server. In fact, the client may not have a
choice other than writing to the metadata server when the
clora_
In the case of modified data being written while the layout is held, the client must use LAYOUTCOMMIT operations at the appropriate time; as required LAYOUTCOMMIT must be done before the LAYOUTRETURN. If a large amount of modified data is outstanding, the client may send LAYOUTRETURNs for portions of the recalled layout; this allows the server to monitor the client's progress and adherence to the original recall request. However, the last LAYOUTRETURN in a sequence of returns MUST specify the full range being recalled (see Section 12.5.5.1 for details).¶
If a server needs to delete a device ID and there are layouts
referring to the device ID, CB_
20.4. Operation 6: CB_NOTIFY - Notify Client of Directory Changes
20.4.1. ARGUMENT
/*
* Directory notification types.
*/
enum notify_type4 {
NOTIFY4_CHANGE_CHILD_ATTRS = 0,
NOTIFY4_CHANGE_DIR_ATTRS = 1,
NOTIFY4_REMOVE_ENTRY = 2,
NOTIFY4_ADD_ENTRY = 3,
NOTIFY4_RENAME_ENTRY = 4,
NOTIFY4_CHANGE_COOKIE_VERIFIER = 5
};
/* Changed entry information. */
struct notify_entry4 {
component4 ne_file;
fattr4 ne_attrs;
};
/* Previous entry information */
struct prev_entry4 {
notify_entry4 pe_prev_entry;
/* what READDIR returned for this entry */
nfs_cookie4 pe_prev_entry_cookie;
};
struct notify_remove4 {
notify_entry4 nrm_old_entry;
nfs_cookie4 nrm_old_entry_cookie;
};
struct notify_add4 {
/*
* Information on object
* possibly renamed over.
*/
notify_remove4 nad_old_entry<1>;
notify_entry4 nad_new_entry;
/* what READDIR would have returned for this entry */
nfs_cookie4 nad_new_entry_cookie<1>;
prev_entry4 nad_prev_entry<1>;
bool nad_last_entry;
};
struct notify_attr4 {
notify_entry4 na_changed_entry;
};
struct notify_rename4 {
notify_remove4 nrn_old_entry;
notify_add4 nrn_new_entry;
};
struct notify_verifier4 {
verifier4 nv_old_cookieverf;
verifier4 nv_new_cookieverf;
};
/*
* Objects of type notify_<>4 and
* notify_device_<>4 are encoded in this.
*/
typedef opaque notifylist4<>;
struct notify4 {
/* composed from notify_type4 or notify_deviceid_type4 */
bitmap4 notify_mask;
notifylist4 notify_vals;
};
struct CB_NOTIFY4args {
stateid4 cna_stateid;
nfs_fh4 cna_fh;
notify4 cna_changes<>;
};
20.4.3. DESCRIPTION
The CB_
If the server has more notifications than can fit in
the CB_
If the client holding the delegation makes any changes in the directory that cause files or sub-directories to be added or removed, the server will notify that client of the resulting change(s). If the client holding the delegation is making attribute or cookie verifier changes only, the server does not need to send notifications to that client. The server will send the following information for each operation:¶
- NOTIFY4_
ADD_ ENTRY -
The server will send
information about the new directory entry being created along with the
cookie for that entry. The entry information (data type
notify_
add4 ) includes the component name of the entry and attributes. The server will send this type of entry when a file is actually being created, when an entry is being added to a directory as a result of a rename across directories (see below), and when a hard link is being created to an existing file. If this entry is added to the end of the directory, the server will set the nad_ last_ entry flag to TRUE. If the file is added such that there is at least one entry before it, the server will also return the previous entry information (nad_ prev_ entry, a variable-length array of up to one element. If the array is of zero length, there is no previous entry), along with its cookie. This is to help clients find the right location in their file name caches and directory caches where this entry should be cached. If the new entry's cookie is available, it will be in the nad_ new_ entry_ cookie (another variable-length array of up to one element) field. If the addition of the entry causes another entry to be deleted (which can only happen in the rename case) atomically with the addition, then information on this entry is reported in nad_ old_ entry .¶ - NOTIFY4_
REMOVE_ ENTRY - The server will send information about the directory entry being deleted. The server will also send the cookie value for the deleted entry so that clients can get to the cached information for this entry.¶
- NOTIFY4_
RENAME_ ENTRY -
The server will send information about both
the old entry and the new entry. This includes the name and
attributes for each entry. In addition, if the rename
causes the deletion of an entry (i.e., the case of a file
renamed over), then this is reported in
nrn_
new_ new_ entry .nad_ old_ entry . This notification is only sent if both entries are in the same directory. If the rename is across directories, the server will send a remove notification to one directory and an add notification to the other directory, assuming both have a directory delegation.¶ - NOTIFY4_
CHANGE_ CHILD_ ATTRS /NOTIFY4_ CHANGE_ DIR_ ATTRS -
The client will use the attribute
mask to inform the server of attributes for which it wants to
receive notifications. This change notification can be
requested for changes to the attributes of the directory
as well as changes to any file's attributes in the directory by
using two separate attribute masks. The client cannot ask
for change attribute notification for a specific file. One attribute
mask covers all the files in the directory. Upon any
attribute change, the server will send back the values of
changed attributes. Notifications might not make sense for
some file system-wide attributes, and it is up to the server to
decide which subset it wants to support. The client can
negotiate the frequency of attribute notifications by letting
the server know how often it wants to be notified of an
attribute change. The server will return supported
notification frequencies or an indication that no
notification is permitted for directory or child attributes
by setting the dir_
notif_ delay and dir_ entry_ notif_ delay attributes, respectively.¶ - NOTIFY4_
CHANGE_ COOKIE_ VERIFIER - If the cookie verifier changes while a client is holding a delegation, the server will notify the client so that it can invalidate its cookies and re-send a READDIR to get the new set of cookies.¶
20.5. Operation 7: CB_PUSH_DELEG - Offer Previously Requested Delegation to Client
20.5.1. ARGUMENT
struct CB_PUSH_DELEG4args {
nfs_fh4 cpda_fh;
open_delegation4 cpda_delegation;
};
20.5.3. DESCRIPTION
CB_
20.5.4. IMPLEMENTATION
If the client does return NFS4ERR_
When a client returns a status other than NFS4_
20.6. Operation 8: CB_RECALL_ANY - Keep Any N Recallable Objects
20.6.1. ARGUMENT
const RCA4_TYPE_MASK_RDATA_DLG = 0;
const RCA4_TYPE_MASK_WDATA_DLG = 1;
const RCA4_TYPE_MASK_DIR_DLG = 2;
const RCA4_TYPE_MASK_FILE_LAYOUT = 3;
const RCA4_TYPE_MASK_BLK_LAYOUT = 4;
const RCA4_TYPE_MASK_OBJ_LAYOUT_MIN = 8;
const RCA4_TYPE_MASK_OBJ_LAYOUT_MAX = 9;
const RCA4_TYPE_MASK_OTHER_LAYOUT_MIN = 12;
const RCA4_TYPE_MASK_OTHER_LAYOUT_MAX = 15;
struct CB_RECALL_ANY4args {
uint32_t craa_objects_to_keep;
bitmap4 craa_type_mask;
};
20.6.3. DESCRIPTION
The server may decide that it cannot hold all of the state for recallable objects, such as delegations and layouts, without running out of resources. In such a case, while not optimal, the server is free to recall individual objects to reduce the load.¶
Because the general purpose of such recallable objects as delegations is to eliminate client interaction with the server, the server cannot interpret lack of recent use as indicating that the object is no longer useful. The absence of visible use is consistent with a delegation keeping potential operations from being sent to the server. In the case of layouts, while it is true that the usefulness of a layout is indicated by the use of the layout when storage devices receive I/O requests, because there is no mandate that a storage device indicate to the metadata server any past or present use of a layout, the metadata server is not likely to know which layouts are good candidates to recall in response to low resources.¶
In order to implement an effective reclaim scheme for such objects, the server's knowledge of available resources must be used to determine when objects must be recalled with the clients selecting the actual objects to be returned.¶
Server implementations may differ in their resource allocation requirements. For example, one server may share resources among all classes of recallable objects, whereas another may use separate resource pools for layouts and for delegations, or further separate resources by types of delegations.¶
When a given resource pool is over-utilized, the server can
send a CB_
A number of bits are defined. For some of these, ranges are defined and it is up to the definition of the storage protocol to specify how these are to be used. There are ranges reserved for object-based storage protocols and for other experimental storage protocols. An RFC defining such a storage protocol needs to specify how particular bits within its range are to be used. For example, it may specify a mapping between attributes of the layout (read vs. write, size of area) and the bit to be used, or it may define a field in the layout where the associated bit position is made available by the server to the client.¶
- RCA4_
TYPE_ MASK_ RDATA_ DLG -
The client is to return OPEN_
DELEGATE_ READ delegations on non-directory file objects.¶ - RCA4_
TYPE_ MASK_ WDATA_ DLG -
The client is to return OPEN_
DELEGATE_ WRITE delegations on regular file objects.¶ - RCA4_
TYPE_ MASK_ DIR_ DLG - The client is to return directory delegations.¶
- RCA4_
TYPE_ MASK_ FILE_ LAYOUT -
The client is to return layouts of type LAYOUT4_
NFSV4_ 1_ FILES .¶ - RCA4_
TYPE_ MASK_ BLK_ LAYOUT - See [48] for a description.¶
- RCA4_
TYPE_ MASK_ OBJ_ LAYOUT_ MIN to RCA4_ TYPE_ MASK_ OBJ_ LAYOUT_ MAX - See [47] for a description.¶
- RCA4_
TYPE_ MASK_ OTHER_ LAYOUT_ MIN to RCA4_ TYPE_ MASK_ OTHER_ LAYOUT_ MAX - This range is reserved for telling the client to recall layouts of experimental or site-specific layout types (see Section 3.3.13).¶
When a bit is set in the type mask that corresponds
to an undefined type of recallable object,
NFS4ERR_
CB_
If resource demands prompt it, the server may send another
CB_
Servers are generally free to deny recallable objects
when insufficient resources are available. Note that the
effect of such a policy is implicitly to give precedence to
existing objects relative to requested ones, with the result
that resources might not be optimally used. To prevent this,
servers are well advised to make the point at which they start
sending CB_
20.6.4. IMPLEMENTATION
The client can choose to return any type of object specified
by the mask. If a server wishes to limit the use of objects of a
specific type, it should only specify that type in the mask
it sends. Should the client fail to return requested objects, it is
up to the server to handle this situation, typically by sending
specific recalls (i.e., sending CB_
20.7. Operation 9: CB_RECALLABLE_OBJ_AVAIL - Signal Resources for Recallable Objects
20.7.3. DESCRIPTION
CB_
The argument craa_
The server is not obligated to reserve the
difference between the number of the objects
the client currently has and the value of
craa_
20.8. Operation 10: CB_RECALL_SLOT - Change Flow Control Limits
20.8.3. DESCRIPTION
The CB_
If the session has only non-RDMA connections associated with its
operations channel, then the client need only wait
for all outstanding requests with a slot ID >
rsa_
20.8.4. IMPLEMENTATION
If the client fails to reduce highest slot it has on the fore channel
to what the server requests, the server can force the issue
by asserting flow control on the receive side of
all connections bound to the fore channel, and then
finish servicing all outstanding requests that are
in slots greater than rsa_
20.9. Operation 11: CB_SEQUENCE - Supply Backchannel Sequencing and Control
20.9.1. ARGUMENT
struct referring_call4 {
sequenceid4 rc_sequenceid;
slotid4 rc_slotid;
};
struct referring_call_list4 {
sessionid4 rcl_sessionid;
referring_call4 rcl_referring_calls<>;
};
struct CB_SEQUENCE4args {
sessionid4 csa_sessionid;
sequenceid4 csa_sequenceid;
slotid4 csa_slotid;
slotid4 csa_highest_slotid;
bool csa_cachethis;
referring_call_list4 csa_referring_call_lists<>;
};
20.9.2. RESULT
struct CB_SEQUENCE4resok {
sessionid4 csr_sessionid;
sequenceid4 csr_sequenceid;
slotid4 csr_slotid;
slotid4 csr_highest_slotid;
slotid4 csr_target_highest_slotid;
};
union CB_SEQUENCE4res switch (nfsstat4 csr_status) {
case NFS4_OK:
CB_SEQUENCE4resok csr_resok4;
default:
void;
};
20.9.3. DESCRIPTION
The CB_
See Section 18.46.3 for a description of how slots are processed.¶
If csa_
The csa_
The value of the csa_
-
If the difference between csa_
sequenceid and the client's cached sequence ID at the slot ID is two (2) or more, or if csa_ sequenceid is less than the cached sequence ID (accounting for wraparound of the unsigned sequence ID value), then the client MUST return NFS4ERR_ SEQ_ MISORDERED .¶ -
If csa_
sequenceid and the cached sequence ID are the same, this is a retry, and the client returns the CB_ COMPOUND request's cached reply.¶ -
If csa_
sequenceid is one greater (accounting for wraparound) than the cached sequence ID, then this is a new request, and the slot's sequence ID is incremented. The operations subsequent to CB_ SEQUENCE, if any, are processed. If there are no other operations, the only other effects are to cache the CB_ SEQUENCE reply in the slot, maintain the session's activity, and when the server receives the CB_ SEQUENCE reply, renew the lease of state related to the client ID.¶
If the server reuses a slot ID and sequence ID for
a completely different request, the client MAY
treat the request as if it is a retry
of what it has already executed. The client MAY however
detect the server's illegal reuse and return NFS4ERR_
If CB_
The client returns two "highest_
20.10. Operation 12: CB_WANTS_CANCELLED - Cancel Pending Delegation Wants
20.10.1. ARGUMENT
struct CB_WANTS_CANCELLED4args {
bool cwca_contended_wants_cancelled;
bool cwca_resourced_wants_cancelled;
};
20.10.3. DESCRIPTION
The CB_
If cwca_
If cwca_
After receiving a CB_
20.10.4. IMPLEMENTATION
When a client has an OPEN, WANT_
20.11. Operation 13: CB_NOTIFY_LOCK - Notify Client of Possible Lock Availability
20.11.3. DESCRIPTION
The server can use this operation to indicate that a byte-range lock for the given file and lock-owner, previously requested by the client via an unsuccessful LOCK operation, might be available.¶
This callback is meant to be used by servers to help reduce the latency of
blocking locks in the case where they recognize that a client that has
been polling for a blocking byte-range lock may now be able to acquire the lock.
If the server supports this callback for a given file, it MUST set the
OPEN4_
If an OPEN operation results in an upgrade, in which the stateid returned
has an "other" value matching that of a stateid already allocated, with a
new "seqid" indicating a change in the lock being represented, then the
value of the OPEN4_
20.11.4. IMPLEMENTATION
The server MUST NOT grant the byte-range lock to the client unless and until it receives a LOCK operation from the client. Similarly, the client receiving this callback cannot assume that it now has the lock or that a subsequent LOCK operation for the lock will be successful.¶
The server is not required to implement this callback, and even if it does, it is not required to use it in any particular case. Therefore, the client must still rely on polling for blocking locks, as described in Section 9.6.¶
Similarly, the client is not required to implement this callback, and even it does, is still free to ignore it. Therefore, the server MUST NOT assume that the client will act based on the callback.¶
20.12. Operation 14: CB_NOTIFY_DEVICEID - Notify Client of Device ID Changes
20.12.1. ARGUMENT
/*
* Device notification types.
*/
enum notify_deviceid_type4 {
NOTIFY_DEVICEID4_CHANGE = 1,
NOTIFY_DEVICEID4_DELETE = 2
};
/* For NOTIFY4_DEVICEID4_DELETE */
struct notify_deviceid_delete4 {
layouttype4 ndd_layouttype;
deviceid4 ndd_deviceid;
};
/* For NOTIFY4_DEVICEID4_CHANGE */
struct notify_deviceid_change4 {
layouttype4 ndc_layouttype;
deviceid4 ndc_deviceid;
bool ndc_immediate;
};
struct CB_NOTIFY_DEVICEID4args {
notify4 cnda_changes<>;
};
20.12.3. DESCRIPTION
The CB_
As with CB_
All device ID notifications contain a device ID and a layout type. The layout type is necessary because two different layout types can share the same device ID, and the common device ID can have completely different mappings for each layout type.¶
The server will send the following notifications:¶
- NOTIFY_
DEVICEID4_ CHANGE -
A previously provided device
-ID -to -device -address mapping has changed and the client uses GETDEVICEINFO to obtain the updated mapping. The notification is encoded in a value of data type notify_ deviceid_ change4 . This data type also contains a boolean field, ndc_ immediate, which if TRUE indicates that the change will be enforced immediately, and so the client might not be able to complete any pending I/O to the device ID. If ndc_ immediate is FALSE, then for an indefinite time, the client can complete pending I/O. After pending I/O is complete, the client SHOULD get the new device -ID -to -device -address mappings before sending new I/O requests to the storage devices addressed by the device ID.¶ - NOTIFY4_
DEVICEID_ DELETE -
Deletes a device ID from the mappings. This notification MUST NOT be sent if the client has a layout that refers to the device ID. In other words, if the server is sending a delete device ID notification, one of the following is true for layouts associated with the layout type:¶
- The client never had a layout referring to that device ID.¶
- The client has returned all layouts referring to that device ID.¶
- The server has revoked all layouts referring to that device ID.¶
The notification is encoded in a value of data type notify_
deviceid_ delete4 . After a server deletes a device ID, it MUST NOT reuse that device ID for the same layout type until the client ID is deleted.¶
20.13. Operation 10044: CB_ILLEGAL - Illegal Callback Operation
20.13.2. RESULT
/*
* CB_ILLEGAL: Response for illegal operation numbers
*/
struct CB_ILLEGAL4res {
nfsstat4 status;
};
20.13.3. DESCRIPTION
This operation is a placeholder for encoding a
result to handle the case of the server sending
an operation code within CB_
The status field of CB_
20.13.4. IMPLEMENTATION
A server will probably not send an operation with code
OP_
21. Security Considerations
Historically, the authentication model of NFS
was based on the entire machine being the NFS client, with the
NFS server trusting the NFS client
to authenticate the end-user.
The NFS server in turn shared its files only to
specific clients, as identified by the client's source
network address. Given this model, the AUTH_
Note that being REQUIRED to implement does not mean REQUIRED to
use; AUTH_
For reasons of reduced administration overhead, better
performance, and/or reduction of CPU utilization,
users of NFSv4.1 implementations might decline to use
security mechanisms that enable integrity protection
on each remote procedure call and response. The
use of mechanisms without integrity leaves the user
vulnerable to a man
-
The first two such operations are SECINFO and
SECINFO_
NO_ NAME . It is RECOMMENDED that the client send both operations such that they are protected with a security flavor that has integrity protection, such as RPCSEC_ GSS with either the rpc_ gss_ svc_ integrity or rpc_ gss_ svc_ privacy service. Without integrity protection encapsulating SECINFO and SECINFO_ NO_ NAME and their results, a man -in -the -middle could modify results such that the client might select a weaker algorithm in the set allowed by the server, making the client and/or server vulnerable to further attacks.¶ -
The third operation that SHOULD use integrity protection
is any GETATTR for the fs_
locations and fs_ locations_ info attributes, in order to mitigate the severity of a man -in -the -middle attack. The attack has two steps. First the attacker modifies the unprotected results of some operation to return NFS4ERR_ MOVED . Second, when the client follows up with a GETATTR for the fs_ locations or fs_ locations_ info attributes, the attacker modifies the results to cause the client to migrate its traffic to a server controlled by the attacker. With integrity protection, this attack is mitigated.¶
Relative to previous NFS versions, NFSv4.1 has additional security
considerations for pNFS (see Sections 12.9
and 13.12), locking
and session state (see Section 2.10.8.3),
and state recovery during grace period (see Section 8.4.2.1.1).
With respect to locking and session state, if SP4_
Security considerations for lock reclaim differ between the two different
situations in which state reclaim is to be done.
The server failure situation is discussed in
Section 8.4.2.1.1, while the per-fs state
reclaim done in support of migration
The use of the multi-server namespace features described in Section 11 raises the possibility that requests to determine the set of network addresses corresponding to a given server might be interfered with or have their responses modified in flight. In light of this possibility, the following considerations should be noted:¶
-
When DNS is used to convert server names to addresses and DNSSEC [29] is not available, the validity of the network addresses returned generally cannot be relied upon. However, when combined with a trusted resolver, DNS over TLS [30] and DNS over HTTPS [34] can be relied upon to provide valid address resolutions.¶
In situations in which the validity of the provided addresses cannot be relied upon and the client uses RPCSEC_
GSS to access the designated server, it is possible for mutual authentication to discover invalid server addresses as long as the RPCSEC_ GSS implementation used does not use insecure DNS queries to canonicalize the hostname components of the service principal names, as explained in [28].¶ -
The fetching of attributes containing file system location
information SHOULD be
performed using integrity protection. It is important to note here that
a client making a request of this sort without using
integrity protection needs be aware of
the negative consequences of doing so, which can lead to
invalid hostnames or network addresses being returned. These
include cases in which the
client is directed to a server under the control of an
attacker, who might get access to data written or provide
incorrect values for data read. In light of
this, the client needs to recognize that using such returned
location information to access an NFSv4 server
without use of RPCSEC_
GSS (i.e., by using AUTH_ SYS ) poses dangers as it can result in the client interacting with such an attacker -controlled server without any authentication facilities to verify the server's identity.¶ -
Despite the fact that it is a requirement that implementations provide
"support" for use of RPCSEC_
GSS, it cannot be assumed that use of RPCSEC_ GSS is always available between any particular client-server pair.¶ -
When a client has the network addresses of a server but not the
associated hostnames, that would interfere with its ability
to use RPCSEC_
GSS .¶
In light of the above, a server SHOULD present file system location
entries that correspond to file systems on other servers using a
hostname. This would allow the client to interrogate the
fs_
When RPCSEC_
When a file system location attribute is fetched upon connecting with an NFS server, it SHOULD, as stated above, be done with integrity protection. When this not possible, it is generally best for the client to ignore trunking and replica information or simply not fetch the location information for these purposes.¶
When location information cannot be verified, it can be subjected
to additional filtering to prevent the client from being
inappropriately directed. For example, if a range of network
addresses can be determined that assure that the servers and
clients using AUTH_
To summarize considerations regarding the use of RPCSEC_
- The use of integrity protection is RECOMMENDED in all cases, since the absence of integrity protection exposes the client to the possibility of the results being modified in transit.¶
-
The use of requests issued without RPCSEC_
GSS (i.e., using AUTH_ SYS, which has no provision to avoid modification of data in flight), while undesirable and a potential security exposure, may not be avoidable in all cases. Where the use of the returned information cannot be avoided, it is made subject to filtering as described above to eliminate the possibility that the client would treat an invalid address as if it were a NFSv4 server. The specifics will vary depending on the degree of network isolation and whether the request is to the referring or destination servers.¶
Even if such requests are not interfered with in flight, it is possible
for a compromised server to direct the client to use inappropriate servers,
such as those under the control of the attacker. It is not clear that being
directed to such servers represents a greater threat to the client than the
damage that could be done by the compromised server itself. However, it
is possible that some sorts of transient server compromises might be
exploited to direct a client to a server capable of doing greater
damage over a longer time. One useful step to guard against this
possibility is to issue requests to fetch location data using RPCSEC_
Similar considerations apply if the threat to be avoided is the redirection of client traffic to inappropriate (i.e., poorly performing) servers. In both cases, there is no reason for the information returned to depend on the identity of the client principal requesting it, while the validity of the server information, which has the capability to affect all client principals, is of considerable importance.¶
22. IANA Considerations
This section uses terms that are defined in [63].¶
22.1. IANA Actions
This update does not require any modification of, or additions to, registry entries or registry rules associated with NFSv4.1. However, since this document obsoletes RFC 5661, IANA has updated all registry entries and registry rules references that point to RFC 5661 to point to this document instead.¶
Previous actions by IANA related to NFSv4.1 are listed in the remaining subsections of Section 22.¶
22.2. Named Attribute Definitions
IANA created a registry called the "NFSv4 Named Attribute Definitions Registry".¶
The NFSv4.1 protocol supports the association of a file with zero or
more named attributes. The namespace identifiers for these attributes
are defined as string names. The protocol does not define the
specific assignment of the namespace for these file attributes.
The IANA registry promotes interoperabilit
Such registered named attributes are presumed to apply to all minor versions of NFSv4, including those defined subsequently to the registration. If the named attribute is intended to be limited to specific minor versions, this will be clearly stated in the registry's assignment.¶
All assignments to the registry are made on a First Come First Served basis, per Section 4.4 of [63]. The policy for each assignment is Specification Required, per Section 4.6 of [63].¶
Under the NFSv4.1 specification, the name of a named attribute can in theory be up to 232 - 1 bytes in length, but in practice NFSv4.1 clients and servers will be unable to handle a string that long. IANA should reject any assignment request with a named attribute that exceeds 128 UTF-8 characters. To give the IESG the flexibility to set up bases of assignment of Experimental Use and Standards Action, the prefixes of "EXPE" and "STDS" are Reserved. The named attribute with a zero-length name is Reserved.¶
The prefix "PRIV" is designated for Private Use. A site that wants to make use of unregistered named attributes without risk of conflicting with an assignment in IANA's registry should use the prefix "PRIV" in all of its named attributes.¶
Because some NFSv4.1 clients and servers have case
The registry of named attributes is a list of assignments, each containing three fields for each assignment.¶
- A US-ASCII string name that is the actual name of the attribute. This name must be unique. This string name can be 1 to 128 UTF-8 characters long.¶
- A reference to the specification of the named attribute. The reference can consume up to 256 bytes (or more if IANA permits).¶
- The point of contact of the registrant. The point of contact can consume up to 256 bytes (or more if IANA permits).¶
22.2.1. Initial Registry
There is no initial registry.¶
22.2.2. Updating Registrations
The registrant is always permitted to update the point of contact field. Any other change will require Expert Review or IESG Approval.¶
22.3. Device ID Notifications
IANA created a registry called the "NFSv4 Device ID Notifications Registry".¶
The potential exists for new notification types to be
added to the CB_
Hence, all assignments to the registry are made on a Standards Action basis per Section 4.6 of [63], with Expert Review required.¶
The registry is a list of assignments, each containing five fields per assignment.¶
-
The name of the notification type. This name must have the
prefix "NOTIFY_
DEVICEID4_ " . This name must be unique.¶ -
The value of the notification. IANA will assign
this number, and the request from the registrant
will use TBD1 instead of an actual value. IANA
MUST use a whole number that can be no higher
than 232-1, and should be the next available
value. The value assigned must be unique.
A Designated Expert must be used to
ensure that when the name of the notification
type and its value are added to the NFSv4.1
notify_
deviceid_ type4 enumerated data type in the NFSv4.1 XDR description [10], the result continues to be a valid XDR description.¶ - The Standards Track RFC(s) that describe the notification. If the RFC(s) have not yet been published, the registrant will use RFCTBD2, RFCTBD3, etc. instead of an actual RFC number.¶
- How the RFC introduces the notification. This is indicated by a single US-ASCII value. If the value is N, it means a minor revision to the NFSv4 protocol. If the value is L, it means a new pNFS layout type. Other values can be used with IESG Approval.¶
- The minor versions of NFSv4 that are allowed to use the notification. While these are numeric values, IANA will not allocate and assign them; the author of the relevant RFCs with IESG Approval assigns these numbers. Each time there is a new minor version of NFSv4 approved, a Designated Expert should review the registry to make recommended updates as needed.¶
22.3.1. Initial Registry
The initial registry is in Table 25. Note that the next available value is zero.¶
| Notification Name | Value | RFC | How | Minor Versions |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| NOTIFY_ |
1 | RFC 8881 | N | 1 |
| NOTIFY_ |
2 | RFC 8881 | N | 1 |
22.3.2. Updating Registrations
The update of a registration will require IESG Approval on the advice of a Designated Expert.¶
22.4. Object Recall Types
IANA created a registry called the "NFSv4 Recallable Object Types Registry".¶
The potential exists for new object types to be added to the CB_
All assignments to the registry are made on a Standards Action basis per Section 4.9 of [63], with Expert Review required.¶
Recallable object types are 32-bit unsigned numbers. There are no Reserved values. Values in the range 12 through 15, inclusive, are designated for Private Use.¶
The registry is a list of assignments, each containing five fields per assignment.¶
-
The name of the recallable object type. This name must have the
prefix "RCA4_
TYPE_ MASK_ " . The name must be unique.¶ - The value of the recallable object type. IANA will assign this number, and the request from the registrant will use TBD1 instead of an actual value. IANA MUST use a whole number that can be no higher than 232-1, and should be the next available value. The value must be unique. A Designated Expert must be used to ensure that when the name of the recallable type and its value are added to the NFSv4 XDR description [10], the result continues to be a valid XDR description.¶
- The Standards Track RFC(s) that describe the recallable object type. If the RFC(s) have not yet been published, the registrant will use RFCTBD2, RFCTBD3, etc. instead of an actual RFC number.¶
- How the RFC introduces the recallable object type. This is indicated by a single US-ASCII value. If the value is N, it means a minor revision to the NFSv4 protocol. If the value is L, it means a new pNFS layout type. Other values can be used with IESG Approval.¶
- The minor versions of NFSv4 that are allowed to use the recallable object type. While these are numeric values, IANA will not allocate and assign them; the author of the relevant RFCs with IESG Approval assigns these numbers. Each time there is a new minor version of NFSv4 approved, a Designated Expert should review the registry to make recommended updates as needed.¶
22.4.1. Initial Registry
The initial registry is in Table 26. Note that the next available value is five.¶
| Recallable Object Type Name | Value | RFC | How | Minor Versions |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| RCA4_ |
0 | RFC 8881 | N | 1 |
| RCA4_ |
1 | RFC 8881 | N | 1 |
| RCA4_ |
2 | RFC 8881 | N | 1 |
| RCA4_ |
3 | RFC 8881 | N | 1 |
| RCA4_ |
4 | RFC 8881 | L | 1 |
| RCA4_ |
8 | RFC 8881 | L | 1 |
| RCA4_ |
9 | RFC 8881 | L | 1 |
22.4.2. Updating Registrations
The update of a registration will require IESG Approval on the advice of a Designated Expert.¶
22.5. Layout Types
IANA created a registry called the "pNFS Layout Types Registry".¶
All assignments to the registry are made on a Standards Action basis, with Expert Review required.¶
Layout types are 32-bit numbers. The value zero is Reserved. Values in the range 0x80000000 to 0xFFFFFFFF inclusive are designated for Private Use. IANA will assign numbers from the range 0x00000001 to 0x7FFFFFFF inclusive.¶
The registry is a list of assignments, each containing five fields.¶
-
The name of the layout type. This name must have the
prefix "LAYOUT4_
" . The name must be unique.¶ - The value of the layout type. IANA will assign this number, and the request from the registrant will use TBD1 instead of an actual value. The value assigned must be unique. A Designated Expert must be used to ensure that when the name of the layout type and its value are added to the NFSv4.1 layouttype4 enumerated data type in the NFSv4.1 XDR description [10], the result continues to be a valid XDR description.¶
- The Standards Track RFC(s) that describe the notification. If the RFC(s) have not yet been published, the registrant will use RFCTBD2, RFCTBD3, etc. instead of an actual RFC number. Collectively, the RFC(s) must adhere to the guidelines listed in Section 22.5.3.¶
- How the RFC introduces the layout type. This is indicated by a single US-ASCII value. If the value is N, it means a minor revision to the NFSv4 protocol. If the value is L, it means a new pNFS layout type. Other values can be used with IESG Approval.¶
- The minor versions of NFSv4 that are allowed to use the notification. While these are numeric values, IANA will not allocate and assign them; the author of the relevant RFCs with IESG Approval assigns these numbers. Each time there is a new minor version of NFSv4 approved, a Designated Expert should review the registry to make recommended updates as needed.¶
22.5.1. Initial Registry
The initial registry is in Table 27.¶
| Layout Type Name | Value | RFC | How | Minor Versions |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| LAYOUT4_ |
0x1 | RFC 8881 | N | 1 |
| LAYOUT4_ |
0x2 | RFC 5664 | L | 1 |
| LAYOUT4_ |
0x3 | RFC 5663 | L | 1 |
22.5.2. Updating Registrations
The update of a registration will require IESG Approval on the advice of a Designated Expert.¶
22.5.3. Guidelines for Writing Layout Type Specifications
The author of a new pNFS layout specification must follow these steps to obtain acceptance of the layout type as a Standards Track RFC:¶
- The author devises the new layout specification.¶
-
The new layout type specification MUST, at a minimum:¶
-
Define the contents of the layout
-type -specific fields of the following data types:¶ - Describe or define the storage access protocol used to access the storage devices.¶
- Describe whether revocation of layouts is supported.¶
-
At a minimum, describe the methods of recovery from:¶
- Failure and restart for client, server, storage device.¶
- Lease expiration from perspective of the active client, server, storage device.¶
- Loss of layout state resulting in fencing of client access to storage devices (for an example, see Section 12.7.3).¶
-
Include an IANA considerations section, which will in turn include:¶
- A request to IANA for a new layout type per Section 22.5.¶
-
A list of requests to IANA for
any new recallable object types for
CB_
RECALL_ ANY; each entry is to be presented in the form described in Section 22.4.¶ -
A list of requests to IANA for
any new notification values for
CB_
NOTIFY_ DEVICEID; each entry is to be presented in the form described in Section 22.3.¶
- Include a security considerations section. This section MUST explain how the NFSv4.1 authentication, authorization, and access-control models are preserved. That is, if a metadata server would restrict a READ or WRITE operation, how would pNFS via the layout similarly restrict a corresponding input or output operation?¶
-
- The author documents the new layout specification as an Internet-Draft.¶
-
The author submits the Internet-Draft for review through the
IETF standards process as defined in "The Internet Standards
Process
--Revision 3" (BCP 9 [35]). The new layout specification will be submitted for eventual publication as a Standards Track RFC.¶ - The layout specification progresses through the IETF standards process.¶
22.6. Path Variable Definitions
This section deals with the IANA considerations associated with the variable substitution feature for location names as described in Section 11.17.3. As described there, variables subject to substitution consist of a domain name and a specific name within that domain, with the two separated by a colon. There are two sets of IANA considerations here:¶
Thus, there will be one registry for the list of variable names, and possibly one registry for listing the values of each variable name.¶
22.6.1. Path Variables Registry
IANA created a registry called the "NFSv4 Path Variables Registry".¶
22.6.1.1. Path Variable Values
Variable names are of the form "${", followed by a
domain name, followed by a colon (":"), followed by
a domain-specific portion of the variable name,
followed by "}". When the domain name is "ietf.org",
all variables names must be registered with IANA on
a Standards Action basis, with Expert Review
required. Path variables with registered domain
names neither part of nor equal to ietf.org are
assigned on a Hierarchical Allocation basis
(delegating to the domain owner) and thus of no
concern to IANA, unless the domain owner chooses to
register a variable name from his domain. If the
domain owner chooses to do so, IANA will do so on a
First Come First Serve basis. To accommodate
registrants who do not have their own domain, IANA
will accept requests to register variables with the
prefix "${FCFS
The registry is a list of assignments, each containing three fields.¶
-
The name of the variable. The name of this
variable must start with a "${" followed by a
registered domain name, followed by ":", or it
must start with "${FCFS
.ietf .org" . The name must be no more than 64 UTF-8 characters long. The name must be unique.¶ - For assignments made on Standards Action basis, the Standards Track RFC(s) that describe the variable. If the RFC(s) have not yet been published, the registrant will use RFCTBD1, RFCTBD2, etc. instead of an actual RFC number. Note that the RFCs do not have to be a part of an NFS minor version. For assignments made on a First Come First Serve basis, an explanation (consuming no more than 1024 bytes, or more if IANA permits) of the purpose of the variable. A reference to the explanation can be substituted.¶
- The point of contact, including an email address. The point of contact can consume up to 256 bytes (or more if IANA permits). For assignments made on a Standards Action basis, the point of contact is always IESG.¶
22.6.1.1.1. Initial Registry
The initial registry is in Table 28.¶
| Variable Name | RFC | Point of Contact |
|---|---|---|
| ${ietf |
RFC 8881 | IESG |
| ${ietf |
RFC 8881 | IESG |
| ${ietf |
RFC 8881 | IESG |
IANA has created registries for the values
of the variable names ${ietf
For the values of the variable
${ietf
22.6.1.1.2. Updating Registrations
The update of an assignment made on a Standards Action basis will require IESG Approval on the advice of a Designated Expert.¶
The registrant can always update the point of contact of an assignment made on a First Come First Serve basis. Any other update will require Expert Review.¶
22.6.2. Values for the ${ietf.org:CPU_ARCH} Variable
IANA created a registry called the "NFSv4 ${ietf
Assignments to the registry are made on a First Come First Serve
basis. The zero-length value of ${ietf
The registry is a list of assignments, each containing three fields.¶
-
A value of the ${ietf
.org :CPU_ ARCH} variable. The value must be 1 to 32 UTF-8 characters long. The value must be unique.¶ - An explanation (consuming no more than 1024 bytes, or more if IANA permits) of what CPU architecture the value denotes. A reference to the explanation can be substituted.¶
- The point of contact, including an email address. The point of contact can consume up to 256 bytes (or more if IANA permits).¶
22.6.2.1. Initial Registry
There is no initial registry.¶
22.6.2.2. Updating Registrations
The registrant is free to update the assignment, i.e., change the
explanation and/or point
22.6.3. Values for the ${ietf.org:OS_TYPE} Variable
IANA created a registry called the "NFSv4 ${ietf
Assignments to the registry are made on a First Come First Serve
basis. The zero-length value of ${ietf
The registry is a list of assignments, each containing three fields.¶
-
A value of the ${ietf
.org :OS_ TYPE} variable. The value must be 1 to 32 UTF-8 characters long. The value must be unique.¶ - An explanation (consuming no more than 1024 bytes, or more if IANA permits) of what CPU architecture the value denotes. A reference to the explanation can be substituted.¶
- The point of contact, including an email address. The point of contact can consume up to 256 bytes (or more if IANA permits).¶
22.6.3.1. Initial Registry
There is no initial registry.¶
22.6.3.2. Updating Registrations
The registrant is free to update the assignment, i.e., change the explanation and/or point of contact fields.¶
23. References
23.1. Normative References
- [1]
-
Bradner, S., "Key words for use in RFCs to Indicate Requirement Levels", BCP 14, RFC 2119, DOI 10
.17487 , , <https:///RFC2119 www >..rfc -editor .org /info /rfc2119 - [2]
-
Eisler, M., Ed., "XDR: External Data Representation Standard", STD 67, RFC 4506, DOI 10
.17487 , , <https:///RFC4506 www >..rfc -editor .org /info /rfc4506 - [3]
-
Thurlow, R., "RPC: Remote Procedure Call Protocol Specification Version 2", RFC 5531, DOI 10
.17487 , , <https:///RFC5531 www >..rfc -editor .org /info /rfc5531 - [4]
-
Eisler, M., Chiu, A., and L. Ling, "RPCSEC_
GSS Protocol Specification" , RFC 2203, DOI 10.17487 , , <https:///RFC2203 www >..rfc -editor .org /info /rfc2203 - [5]
-
Zhu, L., Jaganathan, K., and S. Hartman, "The Kerberos Version 5 Generic Security Service Application Program Interface (GSS-API) Mechanism: Version 2", RFC 4121, DOI 10
.17487 , , <https:///RFC4121 www >..rfc -editor .org /info /rfc4121 - [6]
-
The Open Group, "Section 3.191 of Chapter 3 of Base Definitions of The Open Group Base Specifications Issue 6 IEEE Std 1003.1, 2004 Edition, HTML Version", ISBN 1931624232, , <https://
www >..opengroup .org - [7]
-
Linn, J., "Generic Security Service Application Program Interface Version 2, Update 1", RFC 2743, DOI 10
.17487 , , <https:///RFC2743 www >..rfc -editor .org /info /rfc2743 - [8]
-
Recio, R., Metzler, B., Culley, P., Hilland, J., and D. Garcia, "A Remote Direct Memory Access Protocol Specification", RFC 5040, DOI 10
.17487 , , <https:///RFC5040 www >..rfc -editor .org /info /rfc5040 - [9]
-
Eisler, M., "RPCSEC_
GSS Version 2" , RFC 5403, DOI 10.17487 , , <https:///RFC5403 www >..rfc -editor .org /info /rfc5403 - [10]
-
Shepler, S., Ed., Eisler, M., Ed., and D. Noveck, Ed., "Network File System (NFS) Version 4 Minor Version 1 External Data Representation Standard (XDR) Description", RFC 5662, DOI 10
.17487 , , <https:///RFC5662 www >..rfc -editor .org /info /rfc5662 - [11]
-
The Open Group, "Section 3.372 of Chapter 3 of Base Definitions of The Open Group Base Specifications Issue 6 IEEE Std 1003.1, 2004 Edition, HTML Version", ISBN 1931624232, , <https://
www >..opengroup .org - [12]
-
Eisler, M., "IANA Considerations for Remote Procedure Call (RPC) Network Identifiers and Universal Address Formats", RFC 5665, DOI 10
.17487 , , <https:///RFC5665 www >..rfc -editor .org /info /rfc5665 - [13]
-
The Open Group, "Section 'read()' of System Interfaces of The Open Group Base Specifications Issue 6 IEEE Std 1003.1, 2004 Edition, HTML Version", ISBN 1931624232, , <https://
www >..opengroup .org - [14]
-
The Open Group, "Section 'readdir()' of System Interfaces of The Open Group Base Specifications Issue 6 IEEE Std 1003.1, 2004 Edition, HTML Version", ISBN 1931624232, , <https://
www >..opengroup .org - [15]
-
The Open Group, "Section 'write()' of System Interfaces of The Open Group Base Specifications Issue 6 IEEE Std 1003.1, 2004 Edition, HTML Version", ISBN 1931624232, , <https://
www >..opengroup .org - [16]
-
Hoffman, P. and M. Blanchet, "Preparation of Internationaliz
ed Strings ("stringprep")" , RFC 3454, DOI 10.17487 , , <https:///RFC3454 www >..rfc -editor .org /info /rfc3454 - [17]
-
The Open Group, "Section 'chmod()' of System Interfaces of The Open Group Base Specifications Issue 6 IEEE Std 1003.1, 2004 Edition, HTML Version", ISBN 1931624232, , <https://
www >..opengroup .org - [18]
- International Organization for Standardization, "Information Technology - Universal Multiple-octet coded Character Set (UCS) - Part 1: Architecture and Basic Multilingual Plane", ISO Standard 10646-1, .
- [19]
-
Alvestrand, H., "IETF Policy on Character Sets and Languages", BCP 18, RFC 2277, DOI 10
.17487 , , <https:///RFC2277 www >..rfc -editor .org /info /rfc2277 - [20]
-
Hoffman, P. and M. Blanchet, "Nameprep: A Stringprep Profile for Internationaliz
ed Domain Names (IDN)" , RFC 3491, DOI 10.17487 , , <https:///RFC3491 www >..rfc -editor .org /info /rfc3491 - [21]
-
The Open Group, "Section 'fcntl()' of System Interfaces of The Open Group Base Specifications Issue 6 IEEE Std 1003.1, 2004 Edition, HTML Version", ISBN 1931624232, , <https://
www >..opengroup .org - [22]
-
The Open Group, "Section 'fsync()' of System Interfaces of The Open Group Base Specifications Issue 6 IEEE Std 1003.1, 2004 Edition, HTML Version", ISBN 1931624232, , <https://
www >..opengroup .org - [23]
-
The Open Group, "Section 'getpwnam()' of System Interfaces of The Open Group Base Specifications Issue 6 IEEE Std 1003.1, 2004 Edition, HTML Version", ISBN 1931624232, , <https://
www >..opengroup .org - [24]
-
The Open Group, "Section 'unlink()' of System Interfaces of The Open Group Base Specifications Issue 6 IEEE Std 1003.1, 2004 Edition, HTML Version", ISBN 1931624232, , <https://
www >..opengroup .org - [25]
-
Schaad, J., Kaliski, B., and R. Housley, "Additional Algorithms and Identifiers for RSA Cryptography for use in the Internet X.509 Public Key Infrastructure Certificate and Certificate Revocation List (CRL) Profile", RFC 4055, DOI 10
.17487 , , <https:///RFC4055 www >..rfc -editor .org /info /rfc4055 - [26]
-
National Institute of Standards and Technology, "Computer Security Objects Register", , <https://
csrc >..nist .gov /projects /computer -security -objects -register /algorithm -registration - [27]
-
Adamson, A. and N. Williams, "Remote Procedure Call (RPC) Security Version 3", RFC 7861, DOI 10
.17487 , , <https:///RFC7861 www >..rfc -editor .org /info /rfc7861 - [28]
-
Neuman, C., Yu, T., Hartman, S., and K. Raeburn, "The Kerberos Network Authentication Service (V5)", RFC 4120, DOI 10
.17487 , , <https:///RFC4120 www >..rfc -editor .org /info /rfc4120 - [29]
-
Arends, R., Austein, R., Larson, M., Massey, D., and S. Rose, "DNS Security Introduction and Requirements", RFC 4033, DOI 10
.17487 , , <https:///RFC4033 www >..rfc -editor .org /info /rfc4033 - [30]
-
Hu, Z., Zhu, L., Heidemann, J., Mankin, A., Wessels, D., and P. Hoffman, "Specification for DNS over Transport Layer Security (TLS)", RFC 7858, DOI 10
.17487 , , <https:///RFC7858 www >..rfc -editor .org /info /rfc7858 - [31]
-
Adamson, A. and N. Williams, "Requirements for NFSv4 Multi-Domain Namespace Deployment", RFC 8000, DOI 10
.17487 , , <https:///RFC8000 www >..rfc -editor .org /info /rfc8000 - [32]
-
Lever, C., Ed., Simpson, W., and T. Talpey, "Remote Direct Memory Access Transport for Remote Procedure Call Version 1", RFC 8166, DOI 10
.17487 , , <https:///RFC8166 www >..rfc -editor .org /info /rfc8166 - [33]
-
Lever, C., "Network File System (NFS) Upper-Layer Binding to RPC-over-RDMA Version 1", RFC 8267, DOI 10
.17487 , , <https:///RFC8267 www >..rfc -editor .org /info /rfc8267 - [34]
-
Hoffman, P. and P. McManus, "DNS Queries over HTTPS (DoH)", RFC 8484, DOI 10
.17487 , , <https:///RFC8484 www >..rfc -editor .org /info /rfc8484 - [35]
-
Bradner, S., "The Internet Standards Process -- Revision 3", BCP 9, RFC 2026, .Kolkman, O., Bradner, S., and S. Turner, "Characterizatio
n of Proposed Standards" , BCP 9, RFC 7127, .Dusseault, L. and R. Sparks, "Guidance on Interoperation and Implementation Reports for Advancement to Draft Standard", BCP 9, RFC 5657, .Housley, R., Crocker, D., and E. Burger, "Reducing the Standards Track to Two Maturity Levels", BCP 9, RFC 6410, .Resnick, P., "Retirement of the "Internet Official Protocol Standards" Summary Document", BCP 9, RFC 7100, .Dawkins, S., "Increasing the Number of Area Directors in an IETF Area", BCP 9, RFC 7475, .<https://www >.rfc -editor .org /info /bcp9
23.2. Informative References
- [36]
-
Roach, A., "Process for Handling Non-Major Revisions to Existing RFCs", Work in Progress, Internet-Draft, draft
-roach , , <https://-bis -documents -00 tools >..ietf .org /html /draft -roach -bis -documents -00 - [37]
-
Shepler, S., Callaghan, B., Robinson, D., Thurlow, R., Beame, C., Eisler, M., and D. Noveck, "Network File System (NFS) version 4 Protocol", RFC 3530, DOI 10
.17487 , , <https:///RFC3530 www >..rfc -editor .org /info /rfc3530 - [38]
-
Callaghan, B., Pawlowski, B., and P. Staubach, "NFS Version 3 Protocol Specification", RFC 1813, DOI 10
.17487 , , <https:///RFC1813 www >..rfc -editor .org /info /rfc1813 - [39]
-
Eisler, M., "LIPKEY - A Low Infrastructure Public Key Mechanism Using SPKM", RFC 2847, DOI 10
.17487 , , <https:///RFC2847 www >..rfc -editor .org /info /rfc2847 - [40]
-
Eisler, M., "NFS Version 2 and Version 3 Security Issues and the NFS Protocol's Use of RPCSEC_
GSS and Kerberos V5" , RFC 2623, DOI 10.17487 , , <https:///RFC2623 www >..rfc -editor .org /info /rfc2623 - [41]
- Juszczak, C., "Improving the Performance and Correctness of an NFS Server", USENIX Conference Proceedings, .
- [42]
-
Reynolds, J., Ed., "Assigned Numbers: RFC 1700 is Replaced by an On-line Database", RFC 3232, DOI 10
.17487 , , <https:///RFC3232 www >..rfc -editor .org /info /rfc3232 - [43]
-
Srinivasan, R., "Binding Protocols for ONC RPC Version 2", RFC 1833, DOI 10
.17487 , , <https:///RFC1833 www >..rfc -editor .org /info /rfc1833 - [44]
- Werme, R., "RPC XID Issues", USENIX Conference Proceedings, .
- [45]
-
Nowicki, B., "NFS: Network File System Protocol specification", RFC 1094, DOI 10
.17487 , , <https:///RFC1094 www >..rfc -editor .org /info /rfc1094 - [46]
- Bhide, A., Elnozahy, E. N., and S. P. Morgan, "A Highly Available Network Server", USENIX Conference Proceedings, .
- [47]
-
Halevy, B., Welch, B., and J. Zelenka, "Object-Based Parallel NFS (pNFS) Operations", RFC 5664, DOI 10
.17487 , , <https:///RFC5664 www >..rfc -editor .org /info /rfc5664 - [48]
-
Black, D., Fridella, S., and J. Glasgow, "Parallel NFS (pNFS) Block/Volume Layout", RFC 5663, DOI 10
.17487 , , <https:///RFC5663 www >..rfc -editor .org /info /rfc5663 - [49]
-
Callaghan, B., "WebNFS Client Specification", RFC 2054, DOI 10
.17487 , , <https:///RFC2054 www >..rfc -editor .org /info /rfc2054 - [50]
-
Callaghan, B., "WebNFS Server Specification", RFC 2055, DOI 10
.17487 , , <https:///RFC2055 www >..rfc -editor .org /info /rfc2055 - [51]
-
IESG, "IESG Processing of RFC Errata for the IETF Stream", , <https://
www >..ietf .org /about /groups /iesg /statements /processing -rfc -errata / - [52]
-
Krawczyk, H., Bellare, M., and R. Canetti, "HMAC: Keyed-Hashing for Message Authentication", RFC 2104, DOI 10
.17487 , , <https:///RFC2104 www >..rfc -editor .org /info /rfc2104 - [53]
-
Shepler, S., "NFS Version 4 Design Considerations", RFC 2624, DOI 10
.17487 , , <https:///RFC2624 www >..rfc -editor .org /info /rfc2624 - [54]
- The Open Group, "Protocols for Interworking: XNFS, Version 3W", ISBN 1-85912-184-5, .
- [55]
- Floyd, S. and V. Jacobson, "The Synchronization of Periodic Routing Messages", IEEE/ACM Transactions on Networking, 2(2), pp. 122-136, .
- [56]
-
Chadalapaka, M., Satran, J., Meth, K., and D. Black, "Internet Small Computer System Interface (iSCSI) Protocol (Consolidated)", RFC 7143, DOI 10
.17487 , , <https:///RFC7143 www >..rfc -editor .org /info /rfc7143 - [57]
- Snively, R., "Fibre Channel Protocol for SCSI, 2nd Version (FCP-2)", ANSI/INCITS, 350-2003, .
- [58]
-
Weber, R.O., "Object-Based Storage Device Commands (OSD)", ANSI/INCITS, 400-2004, , <https://
www >..t10 .org /drafts .htm - [59]
- Carns, P. H., Ligon III, W. B., Ross, R. B., and R. Thakur, "PVFS: A Parallel File System for Linux Clusters.", Proceedings of the 4th Annual Linux Showcase and Conference, .
- [60]
-
The Open Group, "The Open Group Base Specifications Issue 6, IEEE Std 1003.1, 2004 Edition", , <https://
www >..opengroup .org - [61]
-
Callaghan, B., "NFS URL Scheme", RFC 2224, DOI 10
.17487 , , <https:///RFC2224 www >..rfc -editor .org /info /rfc2224 - [62]
-
Chiu, A., Eisler, M., and B. Callaghan, "Security Negotiation for WebNFS", RFC 2755, DOI 10
.17487 , , <https:///RFC2755 www >..rfc -editor .org /info /rfc2755 - [63]
-
Cotton, M., Leiba, B., and T. Narten, "Guidelines for Writing an IANA Considerations Section in RFCs", BCP 26, RFC 8126, DOI 10
.17487 , , <https:///RFC8126 www >..rfc -editor .org /info /rfc8126 - [64]
-
RFC Errata, Erratum ID 2006, RFC 5661, <https://
www >..rfc -editor .org /errata /eid2006 - [65]
-
Spasojevic, M. and M. Satayanarayanan, "An Empirical Study of a Wide-Area Distributed File System", ACM Transactions on Computer Systems, Vol. 14, No. 2, pp. 200-222, DOI 10
.1145 , , <https:///227695 .227698 doi >..org /10 .1145 /227695 .227698 - [66]
-
Shepler, S., Ed., Eisler, M., Ed., and D. Noveck, Ed., "Network File System (NFS) Version 4 Minor Version 1 Protocol", RFC 5661, DOI 10
.17487 , , <https:///RFC5661 www >..rfc -editor .org /info /rfc5661 - [67]
-
Noveck, D., "Rules for NFSv4 Extensions and Minor Versions", RFC 8178, DOI 10
.17487 , , <https:///RFC8178 www >..rfc -editor .org /info /rfc8178 - [68]
-
Haynes, T., Ed. and D. Noveck, Ed., "Network File System (NFS) Version 4 Protocol", RFC 7530, DOI 10
.17487 , , <https:///RFC7530 www >..rfc -editor .org /info /rfc7530 - [69]
-
Noveck, D., Ed., Shivam, P., Lever, C., and B. Baker, "NFSv4.0 Migration: Specification Update", RFC 7931, DOI 10
.17487 , , <https:///RFC7931 www >..rfc -editor .org /info /rfc7931 - [70]
-
Haynes, T., "Requirements for Parallel NFS (pNFS) Layout Types", RFC 8434, DOI 10
.17487 , , <https:///RFC8434 www >..rfc -editor .org /info /rfc8434 - [71]
-
Farrell, S. and H. Tschofenig, "Pervasive Monitoring Is an Attack", BCP 188, RFC 7258, DOI 10
.17487 , , <https:///RFC7258 www >..rfc -editor .org /info /rfc7258 - [72]
-
Rescorla, E. and B. Korver, "Guidelines for Writing RFC Text on Security Considerations", BCP 72, RFC 3552, DOI 10
.17487 , , <https:///RFC3552 www >..rfc -editor .org /info /rfc3552
Appendix A. The Need for This Update
This document includes an explanation of how clients and servers are to determine the particular network access paths to be used to access a file system. This includes descriptions of how to handle changes to the specific replica to be used or to the set of addresses to be used to access it, and how to deal transparently with transfers of responsibility that need to be made. This includes cases in which there is a shift between one replica and another and those in which different network access paths are used to access the same replica.¶
As a result of the following problems in RFC 5661 [66], it was necessary to provide the specific updates that are made by this document. These updates are described in Appendix B.¶
- RFC 5661 [66], while it dealt with situations in which various forms of clustering allowed coordination of the state assigned by cooperating servers to be used, made no provisions for Transparent State Migration. Within NFSv4.0, Transparent State Migration was first explained clearly in RFC 7530 [68] and corrected and clarified by RFC 7931 [69]. No corresponding explanation for NFSv4.1 had been provided.¶
- Although NFSv4.1 provided a clear definition of how trunking detection was to be done, there was no clear specification of how trunking discovery was to be done, despite the fact that the specification clearly indicated that this information could be made available via the file system location attributes.¶
-
Because the existence of multiple network access paths to the same
file system was dealt with as if there were multiple replicas, issues relating to
transitions between replicas could never be clearly distinguished
from trunking
-related transitions between the addresses used to access a particular file system instance. As a result, in situations in which both migration and trunking configuration changes were involved, neither of these could be clearly dealt with, and the relationship between these two features was not seriously addressed.¶ - Because use of two network access paths to the same file system instance (i.e., trunking) was often treated as if two replicas were involved, it was considered that two replicas were being used simultaneously. As a result, the treatment of replicas being used simultaneously in RFC 5661 [66] was not clear, as it covered the two distinct cases of a single file system instance being accessed by two different network access paths and two replicas being accessed simultaneously, with the limitations of the latter case not being clearly laid out.¶
The majority of the consequences of these issues are dealt with by presenting in Section 11 a replacement for Section 11 of RFC 5661 [66]. This replacement modifies existing subsections within that section and adds new ones as described in Appendix B.1. Also, some existing sections were deleted. These changes were made in order to do the following:¶
- Reorganize the description so that the case of two network access paths to the same file system instance is distinguished clearly from the case of two different replicas since, in the former case, locking state is shared and there also can be sharing of session state.¶
- Provide a clear statement regarding the desirability of transparent transfer of state between replicas together with a recommendation that either transparent transfer or a single-fs grace period be provided.¶
- Specifically delineate how a client is to handle such transfers, taking into account the differences from the treatment in [69] made necessary by the major protocol changes to NFSv4.1.¶
- Discuss the relationship between transparent state transfer and Parallel NFS (pNFS).¶
-
Clarify the fs_
locations_ info attribute in order to specify which portions of the provided information apply to a specific network access path and which apply to the replica that the path is used to access.¶
In addition, other sections of RFC 5661 [66] were updated to correct the consequences of the incorrect assumptions underlying the treatment of multi-server namespace issues. These are described in Appendices B.2 through B.4.¶
- A revised introductory section regarding multi-server namespace facilities is provided.¶
- A more realistic treatment of server scope is provided. This treatment reflects the more limited coordination of locking state adopted by servers actually sharing a common server scope.¶
-
Some confusing text regarding changes in server_
owner has been clarified.¶ - The description of some existing errors has been modified to more clearly explain certain error situations to reflect the existence of trunking and the possible use of fs-specific grace periods. For details, see Appendix B.3.¶
- New descriptions of certain existing operations are provided, either because the existing treatment did not account for situations that would arise in dealing with Transparent State Migration, or because some types of reclaim issues were not adequately dealt with in the context of fs-specific grace periods. For details, see Appendix B.2.¶
Appendix B. Changes in This Update
B.1. Revisions Made to Section 11 of RFC 5661
A number of areas have been revised or extended, in many cases replacing subsections within Section 11 of RFC 5661 [66]:¶
- New introductory material, including a terminology section, replaces the material in RFC 5661 [66], ranging from the start of the original Section 11 up to and including Section 11.1. The new material starts at the beginning of Section 11 and continues through 11.2.¶
-
A significant reorganization of the material in Sections 11.4 and 11.5 of RFC 5661 [66] was necessary. The reasons for the reorganization of these sections into a single section with multiple subsections are discussed in Appendix B.1.1 below. This replacement appears as Section 11.5.¶
New material relating to the handling of the file system location attributes is contained in Sections 11.5.1 and 11.5.7.¶
- A new section describing requirements for user and group handling within a multi-server namespace has been added as Section 11.7.¶
- A major replacement for Section 11.7 of RFC 5661 [66], entitled "Effecting File System Transitions", appears as Sections 11.9 through 11.14. The reasons for the reorganization of this section into multiple sections are discussed in Appendix B.1.2.¶
-
A replacement for Section
11.10 of RFC 5661 [66],
entitled "The Attribute fs_
locations_ info", appears as Section 11.17, with Appendix B.1.3 describing the differences between the new section and the treatment within [66]. A revised treatment was necessary because the original treatment did not make clear how the added attribute information relates to the case of trunked paths to the same replica. These issues were not addressed in RFC 5661 [66] where the concepts of a replica and a network path used to access a replica were not clearly distinguished.¶
B.1.1. Reorganization of Sections 11.4 and 11.5 of RFC 5661
Previously, issues related to the fact that multiple location entries directed the client to the same file system instance were dealt with in Section 11.5 of RFC 5661 [66]. Because of the new treatment of trunking, these issues now belong within Section 11.5.¶
In this new section, trunking is covered in Section 11.5.2 together with the other uses of file system location information described in Sections 11.5.3 through 11.5.6.¶
As a result, Section 11.5, which replaces Section 11.4 of RFC 5661 [66], is substantially different than the section it replaces in that some original sections have been replaced by corresponding sections as described below, while new sections have been added:¶
- The material in Section 11.5, exclusive of subsections, replaces the material in Section 11.4 of RFC 5661 [66] exclusive of subsections.¶
- Section 11.5.1 is the new first subsection of the overall section.¶
- Section 11.5.2 is the new second subsection of the overall section.¶
- Each of the Sections 11.5.4, 11.5.5, and 11.5.6 replaces (in order) one of the corresponding Sections 11.4.1, 11.4.2, and 11.4.3 of RFC 5661 [66].¶
- Section 11.5.7 is the new final subsection of the overall section.¶
B.1.2. Reorganization of Material Dealing with File System Transitions
The material relating to file system transition, previously contained in Section 11.7 of RFC 5661 [66] has been reorganized and augmented as described below:¶
-
Because there can be a shift of the network access paths used to access a file system instance without any shift between replicas, a new Section 11.9 distinguishes between those cases in which there is a shift between distinct replicas and those involving a shift in network access paths with no shift between replicas.¶
As a result, the new Section 11.10 deals with network address transitions, while the bulk of the original Section 11.7 of RFC 5661 [66] has been extensively modified as reflected in Section 11.11, which is now limited to cases in which there is a shift between two different sets of replicas.¶
- The additional Section 11.12 discusses the case in which a shift to a different replica is made and state is transferred to allow the client the ability to have continued access to its accumulated locking state on the new server.¶
- The additional Section 11.13 discusses the client's response to access transitions, how it determines whether migration has occurred, and how it gets access to any transferred locking and session state.¶
-
The additional Section 11.14 discusses the
responsibilitie
s of the source and destination servers when transferring locking and session state.¶
This reorganization has caused a renumbering of the sections within Section 11 of [66] as described below:¶
- The new Sections 11.9 and 11.10 have resulted in the renumbering of existing sections with these numbers.¶
- Section 11.7 of [66] has been substantially modified and appears as Section 11.11. The necessary modifications reflect the fact that this section only deals with transitions between replicas, while transitions between network addresses are dealt with in other sections. Details of the reorganization are described later in this section.¶
- Sections 11.12, 11.13, and 11.14 have been added.¶
- Consequently, Sections 11.8, 11.9, 11.10, and 11.11 in [66] now appear as Sections 11.15, 11.16, 11.17, and 11.18, respectively.¶
As part of this general reorganization, Section 11.7 of RFC 5661 [66] has been modified as described below:¶
- Sections 11.7 and 11.7.1 of RFC 5661 [66] have been replaced by Sections 11.11 and 11.11.1, respectively.¶
- Section 11.7.2 of RFC 5661 (and included subsections) has been deleted.¶
- Sections 11.7.3, 11.7.4, 11.7.5, 11.7.5.1, and 11.7.6 of RFC 5661 [66] have been replaced by Sections 11.11.2, 11.11.3, 11.11.4, 11.11.4.1, and 11.11.5 respectively in this document.¶
- Section 11.7.7 of RFC 5661 [66] has been replaced by Section 11.11.9. This subsection has been moved to the end of the section dealing with file system transitions.¶
- Sections 11.7.8, 11.7.9, and 11.7.10 of RFC 5661 [66] have been replaced by Sections 11.11.6, 11.11.7, and 11.11.8 respectively in this document.¶
B.1.3. Updates to the Treatment of fs_locations_info
Various elements of the fs_
In addition, special clarification has been provided with regard to the following fields:¶
-
With regard to the handling of FSLI4GF_
GOING, it was clarified that this only applies to the unavailability of a replica rather than to a path to access a replica.¶ -
In describing the appropriate value for a server to use for
fli_
valid_ for, it was clarified that there is no need for the client to frequently fetch the fs_ locations_ info value to be prepared for shifts in trunking patterns.¶ -
Clarification of the rules for extensions to the fls_
info has been provided. The original treatment reflected the extension model that was in effect at the time RFC 5661 [66] was written, but has been updated in accordance with the extension model described in RFC 8178 [67].¶
B.2. Revisions Made to Operations in RFC 5661
Descriptions have been revised to address issues that arose in effecting necessary changes to multi-server namespace features.¶
-
The treatment of EXCHANGE_
ID (Section 18.35 of RFC 5661 [66]) assumed that client IDs cannot be created /confirmed other than by the EXCHANGE_ ID and CREATE_ SESSION operations. Also, the necessary use of EXCHANGE_ ID in recovery from migration and related situations was not clearly addressed. A revised treatment of EXCHANGE_ ID was necessary, and it appears in Section 18.35, while the specific differences between it and the treatment within [66] are explained in Appendix B.2.1 below.¶ -
The treatment of RECLAIM_
COMPLETE in Section 18.51 of RFC 5661 [66] was not sufficiently clear about the purpose and use of the rca_ one_ fs and how the server was to deal with inappropriate values of this argument. Because the resulting confusion raised interoperabilit y issues, a new treatment of RECLAIM_ COMPLETE was necessary, and it appears in Section 18.51, while the specific differences between it and the treatment within RFC 5661 [66] are discussed in Appendix B.2.2 below. In addition, the definitions of the reclaim-related errors have received an updated treatment in Section 15.1.9 to reflect the fact that there are multiple contexts for lock reclaim operations.¶
B.2.1. Revision of Treatment of EXCHANGE_ID
There was a number of issues in the original treatment of
EXCHANGE_
These issues arose from the fact that this treatment was written:¶
-
Assuming that a client ID can only become known to a server
by having been created by executing an EXCHANGE_
ID, with confirmation of the ID only possible by execution of a CREATE_ SESSION .¶ - Considering the interactions between a client and a server only occurring on a single network address.¶
As these assumptions have become invalid in the context of Transparent State Migration and active use of trunking, the treatment has been modified in several respects:¶
-
It had been assumed that an EXCHANGE_
ID executed when the server was already aware that a given client instance was either updating associated parameters (e.g., with respect to callbacks) or dealing with a previously lost reply by retransmitting. As a result, any slot sequence returned by that operation would be of no use. The original treatment went so far as to say that it "MUST NOT" be used, although this usage was not in accord with [1]. This created a difficulty when an EXCHANGE_ ID is done after Transparent State Migration since that slot sequence would need to be used in a subsequent CREATE_ SESSION .¶ In the updated treatment, CREATE_
SESSION is a way that client IDs are confirmed, but it is understood that other ways are possible. The slot sequence can be used as needed, and cases in which it would be of no use are appropriately noted.¶ -
It had been assumed that the only functions of EXCHANGE_
ID were to inform the server of the client, to create the client ID, and to communicate it to the client. When multiple simultaneous connections are involved, as often happens when trunking, that treatment was inadequate in that it ignored the role of EXCHANGE_ ID in associating the client ID with the connection on which it was done, so that it could be used by a subsequent CREATE_ SESSION whose parameters do not include an explicit client ID.¶ The new treatment explicitly discusses the role of EXCHANGE_
ID in associating the client ID with the connection so it can be used by CREATE_ SESSION and in associating a connection with an existing session.¶
The new treatment can be found in Section 18.35 above. It supersedes the treatment in Section 18.35 of RFC 5661 [66].¶
B.2.2. Revision of Treatment of RECLAIM_COMPLETE
The following changes were made to the treatment of
RECLAIM_
-
In a number of places, the text was made more explicit about the
purpose of rca_
one_ fs and its connection to file system migration.¶ -
There is a discussion of situations in which particular forms of
RECLAIM_
COMPLETE would need to be done.¶ -
There is a discussion of interoperabilit
y issues between implementations that may have arisen due to the lack of clarity of the previous treatment of RECLAIM_ COMPLETE .¶
B.3. Revisions Made to Error Definitions in RFC 5661
The new handling of various situations required revisions to some existing error definitions:¶
-
Because of the need to appropriately address trunking
-related issues, some uses of the term "replica" in RFC 5661 [66] became problematic because a shift in network access paths was considered to be a shift to a different replica. As a result, the original definition of NFS4ERR_ MOVED (in Section 15.1.2.4 of RFC 5661 [66]) was updated to reflect the different handling of unavailability of a particular fs via a specific network address.¶ Since such a situation is no longer considered to constitute unavailability of a file system instance, the description has been changed, even though the set of circumstances in which it is to be returned remains the same. The new paragraph explicitly recognizes that a different network address might be used, while the previous description, misleadingly, treated this as a shift between two replicas while only a single file system instance might be involved. The updated description appears in Section 15.1.2.4.¶
- Because of the need to accommodate the use of fs-specific grace periods, it was necessary to clarify some of the definitions of reclaim-related errors in Section 15 of RFC 5661 [66] so that the text applies properly to reclaims for all types of grace periods. The updated descriptions appear within Section 15.1.9.¶
-
Because of the need to provide the clarifications in errata
report 2006 [64]
and to adapt these to properly explain the interaction of
NFS4ERR_
DELAY with the reply cache, a revised description of NFS4ERR_ DELAY appears in Section 15.1.1.3. This errata report, unlike many other RFC 5661 errata reports, is addressed in this document because of the extensive use of NFS4ERR_ DELAY in connection with state migration and session migration.¶
B.4. Other Revisions Made to RFC 5661
Besides the major reworking of Section 11 of RFC 5661 [66] and the associated revisions to existing operations and errors, there were a number of related changes that were necessary:¶
- The summary in Section 1.7.3.3 of RFC 5661 [66] was revised to reflect the changes made to Section 11 above. The updated summary appears as Section 1.8.3.3 above.¶
-
The discussion of server scope in Section
2.10.4 of RFC 5661
[66] was replaced since it
appeared to require a level of inter-server coordination
incompatible with its basic function of avoiding the need for
a globally uniform means of assigning server_
owner values. A revised treatment appears in Section 2.10.4.¶ -
The discussion of trunking in Section
2.10.5 of RFC 5661 [66]
was revised to more clearly
explain the multiple types of trunking support and how the
client can be made aware of the existing trunking configuration.
In addition, while the last paragraph (exclusive of subsections) of
that section dealing with server_
owner changes was literally true, it had been a source of confusion. Since the original paragraph could be read as suggesting that such changes be handled nondisruptively , the issue was clarified in the revised Section 2.10.5.¶
Appendix C. Security Issues That Need to Be Addressed
The following issues in the treatment of security within the NFSv4.1 specification need to be addressed:¶
- The Security Considerations Section of RFC 5661 [66] was not written in accordance with RFC 3552 (BCP 72) [72]. Of particular concern was the fact that the section did not contain a threat analysis.¶
- Initial analysis of the existing security issues with NFSv4.1 has made it likely that a revised Security Considerations section for the existing protocol (one containing a threat analysis) would be likely to conclude that NFSv4.1 does not meet the goal of secure use on the Internet.¶
The Security Considerations section of this document (Section 21) has not been thoroughly revised to correct the difficulties mentioned above. Instead, it has been modified to take proper account of issues related to the multi-server namespace features discussed in Section 11, leaving the incomplete discussion and security weaknesses pretty much as they were.¶
The following major security issues need to be addressed in a satisfactory fashion before an updated Security Considerations section can be published as part of a bis document for NFSv4.1:¶
-
The continued use of AUTH_
SYS and the security exposures it creates need to be addressed. Addressing this issue must not be limited to the questions of whether the designation of this as OPTIONAL was justified and whether it should be changed.¶ In any event, it may not be possible at this point to correct the security problems created by continued use of AUTH_
SYS simply by revising this designation.¶ -
The lack of attention within the protocol to the possibility of pervasive monitoring attacks such as those described in RFC 7258 [71] (also BCP 188).¶
In that connection, the use of CREATE_
SESSION without privacy protection needs to be addressed as it exposes the session ID to view by an attacker. This is worrisome as this is precisely the type of protocol artifact alluded to in RFC 7258, which can enable further mischief on the part of the attacker as it enables denial -of -service attacks that can be executed effectively with only a single, normally low-value, credential, even when RPCSEC_ GSS authentication is in use.¶ -
The lack of effective use of privacy and integrity, even where the infrastructure to support use of RPCSEC_
GSS is present, needs to be addressed.¶ In light of the security exposures that this situation creates, it is not enough to define a protocol that could address this problem with the provision of sufficient resources. Instead, what is needed is a way to provide the necessary security with very limited performance costs and without requiring security infrastructure, which experience has shown is difficult for many clients and servers to provide.¶
In trying to provide a major security upgrade for a deployed protocol such as NFSv4.1, the working group and the Internet community are likely to find themselves dealing with a number of considerations such as the following:¶
- The need to accommodate existing deployments of protocols specified previously in existing Proposed Standards.¶
-
The difficulty of effecting changes to existing, interoperating
implementations
.¶ - The difficulty of making changes to NFSv4 protocols other than those in the form of OPTIONAL extensions.¶
- The tendency of those responsible for existing NFSv4 deployments to ignore security flaws in the context of local area networks under the mistaken impression that network isolation provides, in and of itself, isolation from all potential attackers.¶
Given that the above-mentioned difficulties apply to minor version zero as well, it may make sense to deal with these security issues in a common document that applies to all NFSv4 minor versions. If that approach is taken, the Security Considerations section of an eventual NFv4.1 bis document would reference that common document, and the defining RFCs for other minor versions might do so as well.¶
Acknowledgments
Acknowledgments for This Update
The authors wish to acknowledge the important role of Andy Adamson of Netapp in clarifying the need for trunking discovery functionality, and exploring the role of the file system location attributes in providing the necessary support.¶
The authors wish to thank Tom Haynes of Hammerspace for drawing our
attention to the fact that internationaliz
The authors also wish to acknowledge the work of Xuan Qi of Oracle with NFSv4.1 client and server prototypes of Transparent State Migration functionality.¶
The authors wish to thank others that brought attention to important
issues. The comments of Trond Myklebust of Primary Data related
to trunking helped to clarify the role of DNS in
trunking discovery. Rick Macklem's comments brought attention to
problems in the handling of the per-fs version of
RECLAIM_
The authors wish to thank Olga Kornievskaia of Netapp for her helpful review comments.¶
Acknowledgments for RFC 5661
The initial text for the SECINFO extensions were edited by Mike Eisler with contributions from Peng Dai, Sergey Klyushin, and Carl Burnett.¶
The initial text for the SESSIONS extensions were edited by Tom Talpey, Spencer Shepler, Jon Bauman with contributions from Charles Antonelli, Brent Callaghan, Mike Eisler, John Howard, Chet Juszczak, Trond Myklebust, Dave Noveck, John Scott, Mike Stolarchuk, and Mark Wittle.¶
Initial text relating to multi-server namespace features, including the concept of referrals, were contributed by Dave Noveck, Carl Burnett, and Charles Fan with contributions from Ted Anderson, Neil Brown, and Jon Haswell.¶
The initial text for the Directory Delegations support were contributed by Saadia Khan with input from Dave Noveck, Mike Eisler, Carl Burnett, Ted Anderson, and Tom Talpey.¶
The initial text for the ACL explanations were contributed by Sam Falkner and Lisa Week.¶
The pNFS work was inspired by the NASD and OSD
work done by Garth Gibson. Gary Grider has also
been a champion of high
The initial text for the parallel NFS support was edited by Brent Welch and Garth Goodson. Additional authors for those documents were Benny Halevy, David Black, and Andy Adamson. Additional input came from the informal group that contributed to the construction of the initial pNFS drafts; specific acknowledgment goes to Gary Grider, Peter Corbett, Dave Noveck, Peter Honeyman, and Stephen Fridella.¶
Fredric Isaman found several errors in draft versions of the ONC RPC XDR description of the NFSv4.1 protocol.¶
Audrey Van Belleghem provided, in numerous ways, essential coordination and management of the process of editing the specification documents.¶
Richard Jernigan gave feedback on the file layout's striping pattern design.¶
Several formal inspection teams were formed to review various areas of the protocol. All the inspections found significant errors and room for improvement. NFSv4.1's inspection teams were:¶
-
ACLs, with the following inspectors: Sam Falkner, Bruce Fields, Rahul Iyer, Saadia Khan, Dave Noveck, Lisa Week, Mario Wurzl, and Alan Yoder.¶
-
Sessions, with the following inspectors: William Brown, Tom Doeppner, Robert Gordon, Benny Halevy, Fredric Isaman, Rick Macklem, Trond Myklebust, Dave Noveck, Karen Rochford, John Scott, and Peter Shah.¶
-
Initial pNFS inspection, with the following inspectors: Andy Adamson, David Black, Mike Eisler, Marc Eshel, Sam Falkner, Garth Goodson, Benny Halevy, Rahul Iyer, Trond Myklebust, Spencer Shepler, and Lisa Week.¶
-
Global namespace, with the following inspectors: Mike Eisler, Dan Ellard, Craig Everhart, Fredric Isaman, Trond Myklebust, Dave Noveck, Theresa Raj, Spencer Shepler, Renu Tewari, and Robert Thurlow.¶
-
NFSv4.1 file layout type, with the following inspectors: Andy Adamson, Marc Eshel, Sam Falkner, Garth Goodson, Rahul Iyer, Trond Myklebust, and Lisa Week.¶
-
NFSv4.1 locking and directory delegations, with the following inspectors: Mike Eisler, Pranoop Erasani, Robert Gordon, Saadia Khan, Eric Kustarz, Dave Noveck, Spencer Shepler, and Amy Weaver.¶
-
EXCHANGE_
ID and DESTROY_ CLIENTID, with the following inspectors: Mike Eisler, Pranoop Erasani, Robert Gordon, Benny Halevy, Fredric Isaman, Saadia Khan, Ricardo Labiaga, Rick Macklem, Trond Myklebust, Spencer Shepler, and Brent Welch.¶ -
Final pNFS inspection, with the following inspectors: Andy Adamson, Mike Eisler, Mark Eshel, Sam Falkner, Jason Glasgow, Garth Goodson, Robert Gordon, Benny Halevy, Dean Hildebrand, Rahul Iyer, Suchit Kaura, Trond Myklebust, Anatoly Pinchuk, Spencer Shepler, Renu Tewari, Lisa Week, and Brent Welch.¶
A review team worked together to generate the tables of assignments of error sets to operations and make sure that each such assignment had two or more people validating it. Participating in the process were Andy Adamson, Mike Eisler, Sam Falkner, Garth Goodson, Robert Gordon, Trond Myklebust, Dave Noveck, Spencer Shepler, Tom Talpey, Amy Weaver, and Lisa Week.¶
Jari Arkko, David Black, Scott Bradner, Lisa Dusseault, Lars Eggert, Chris Newman, and Tim Polk provided valuable review and guidance.¶
Olga Kornievskaia found several errors in the SSV specification.¶
Ricardo Labiaga found several places where the use of RPCSEC_
Those who provided miscellaneous comments include: Andy Adamson, Sunil Bhargo, Alex Burlyga, Pranoop Erasani, Bruce Fields, Vadim Finkelstein, Jason Goldschmidt, Vijay K. Gurbani, Sergey Klyushin, Ricardo Labiaga, James Lentini, Anshul Madan, Daniel Muntz, Daniel Picken, Archana Ramani, Jim Rees, Mahesh Siddheshwar, Tom Talpey, and Peter Varga.¶